1.1.2 Calypso Mittauksen Perusteet

CALYPSO
Basics
Operating Instructions
The design and delivered components of the CMM, its options, the program packages, and the relevant documentation are subject to change.
This manual must not be circulated or copied, or its contents utilized and
disseminated, without our express written permission. Persons misusing
this manual are subject to prosecution.
All rights reserved, especially in cases of granting a patent or registering
a utility model.
This manual is subject to modification. All rights pertaining to changes in
the CMM and its options reserved.
All product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of the corresponding proprietors.
Although utmost care has been taken in preparing the information given
in this manual, we cannot assume any liability for its completeness and
correctness, except in case of willful intent.
CALYPSO
Version 5.6
Operating Instructions
2013-05-24
61212-2011002
Table of contents
Preface
Information about these operating instructions
............................................................................... Preface 1
Configuration of safety instructions .................. Preface 6
Chapter 1
Introduction
Welcome to CALYPSO ................................................... 12
Starting CALYPSO .......................................................... 13
The main window of CALYPSO .................................... 16
Working with CALYPSO ................................................ 18
Operating CALYPSO ....................................................................... 18
Using shortcuts ............................................................................... 19
Entering alphanumeric characters with the mouse ........................ 110
Using context menus .................................................................... 110
Working with toolbars .................................................................. 111
Directory structures in CALYPSO ................................................... 113
Important terms in CALYPSO ...................................... 115

Overview of important terms ........................................................ 115
Features ........................................................................................ 115
Characteristics .............................................................................. 115
Measurement plans ...................................................................... 115
Coordinate systems ...................................................................... 116
Clearance planes .......................................................................... 116
Measurement plan-oriented measuring with CALYPSO

....................................................................................... 117
Options and licenses ................................................... 119
Options ........................................................................................ 119
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Table of contents
Licensing ...................................................................................... 119

Activating and deactivating licenses .............................................. 120
Using licenses in the network ........................................................ 121
User support for CALYPSO .......................................... 123

Support in the submenu ? ............................................................ 123
Using the Online Help ................................................................... 123
Videos in the Online Help ............................................................. 126
Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy ...................................................... 127
ZEISS training block ...................................................................... 128
Exiting CALYPSO .......................................................... 130
Chapter 2
Working with the CAD window

Basics about the CAD window ..................................... 22
Functions in the CAD window ........................................................ 22
CAD model in the CAD window ..................................................... 22
Work area in the CAD window ....................................................... 23
Working in the CAD window .......................................................... 24
Buttons in the CAD window ......................................... 27

Defining features in the CAD window ...................... 210
Selecting and defining features in the CAD window ..................... 210
Selecting features in the CAD model ............................................. 210
Displaying individual features or all features .................................. 210
Defining probing points in the CAD window ................................. 211
Defining a space point .................................................................. 212
Defining an edge point ................................................................. 213
Defining a circle ............................................................................ 213
Defining a 2D line ......................................................................... 213
Defining a rectangle ..................................................................... 214
Defining features for the distance check ....................................... 214
Defining a coordinate system in the CAD window ........................ 214
Extracting features ........................................................................ 215
Defining/selecting the geometry ................................................... 215
Defining the display in the CAD window .................. 216

Table of contents
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining the amount of data to be loaded and the CAD view ...... 216
Defining the view of the CAD model ............................................ 216
Controlling the loading of the CAD model .................................... 217
Moving the CAD model in the CAD window ................................. 218
Zooming the CAD model in or out ................................................ 218
Changing or resetting the model perspective ................................ 219
Rotating the CAD model ............................................................... 219
Displaying the CAD model as a solid ............................................. 221
Splitting the CAD window into several areas ................................. 221
Saving and loading the CAD view ................................................. 223
Deleting a CAD view ..................................................................... 224
Deleting a CAD model in the CAD window ................................... 225
Redrawing the CAD model ........................................................... 225
Saving the CAD view settings ....................................................... 225
Displaying measuring results in the CAD window ... 227

Display options in the CAD window .............................................. 227
Displaying actual points ................................................................ 228
Displaying characteristics .............................................................. 228
Displaying features ....................................................................... 228
Modifying a representation ........................................................... 229
Banners in the CAD window ......................................................... 229
Output of the CAD model ........................................... 232

Output methods ........................................................................... 232
Printing the CAD model ................................................................ 232
Outputting the CAD window ........................................................ 232
Outputting the CAD window as a plot .......................................... 233
Working with the CAD model .................................... 235

Ways of working with the CAD model .......................................... 235
Transforming the CAD model ....................................................... 235
Modifying the CAD model ............................................................ 235
Creating features on the CAD model ............................................ 238
Working with the data of the CAD model ................ 244

CAD model and CAD file .............................................................. 244
Creating a new measurement plan from a CAD file ...................... 244
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Table of contents
Updating a loaded CAD model ..................................................... 245

Remedying problems in the CAD model display ............................ 246
Saving the CAD model as a CAD file ............................................. 247
CAD models consisting of several parts ......................................... 248
Transforming coordinate systems and CAD entities ....................... 249
Chapter 3
Preparing the measurement plan

Measurement plan basics ............................................. 32
Components of the measurement plan ........................................... 32
Creating a new measurement plan ................................................. 33
Opening and displaying a measurement plan .................................. 34
Saving and naming the measurement plan ..................................... 34
Settings for measurement plans ...................................................... 35
Editing the representation of features ............................................. 36
Compatibility of measurement plans ............................................... 38
Measurement plan area .............................................. 310

Tabs and color bars ....................................................................... 310
CMM index card ........................................................................... 311
Measurement Plan tab .................................................................. 311
Connecting the CMM .................................................. 313

Validity of the reference point ....................................................... 313
Connecting the CMM ................................................................... 313
Preparing the stylus system ........................................ 315

Validity of the stylus system .......................................................... 315
Inserting the stylus system ............................................................ 316
Re-qualifying a stylus system ......................................................... 317
Defining the CT properties ......................................... 318

Setting the base / start alignment ............................. 319
Working with the base/start alignment ......................................... 319
Part alignment basics .................................................................... 320
Loading an existing base alignment/start alignment ...................... 323
Creating a new base/start alignment ............................................. 324
Adapting a base / start alignment ................................................. 327

Table of contents
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Customizing a base alignment iteratively ...................................... 328

Alignment by means of computed iteration .................................. 330
Editing a base / start alignment ..................................................... 333
Moving or rotating the base / start alignment ............................... 334
Rotating reference axis by secondary reference ............................. 337
Loading a secondary alignment for a base / start alignment .......... 342
Calculating a base alignment back to the CAD origin .................... 347
Accepting local alignment from the CAD model ........................... 348
Deleting a base alignment ............................................................ 349
Setting a base alignment to zero ................................................... 349
Alternative alignment methods ..................................................... 349
Prerequisites for the rotary table ............................... 355

Defining the clearance planes .................................... 356
Use of the clearance planes .......................................................... 356
Components of the clearance planes ............................................ 356
Defining the clearance planes with the CMM ................................ 357
Defining the clearance planes manually ........................................ 358
Defining the clearance planes by probing ...................................... 359
Generating the clearance planes automatically .............................. 360
Testing the clearance planes ......................................................... 360
Blocking individual edges of the clearance planes ......................... 361
Editing printout settings ............................................. 363

Working with measurement plan editors ................. 364
Overview of the measurement plan editors ................................... 364
Measurement plan editor for features ........................................... 364
Measurement plan editor for characteristics .................................. 365
Temperature compensation ........................................ 367

Purpose of temperature compensation ......................................... 367
Activating the temperature compensation .................................... 369
Determining the temperatures by manual probing ........................ 370
Configuring automatic temperature probing (CNC) ...................... 371
Determining the workpiece temperature externally ....................... 375
Entering temperatures manually ................................................... 376
Temperature compensation of the base alignment ........................ 378
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Table of contents
Chapter 4
Defining features
Defining features ........................................................... 42
Options for defining features .......................................................... 42
Preassignments for features ............................................................ 43
Features index card ......................................................................... 44
Definition template for features ...................................................... 45
Automatic feature recognition and automatic feature end ............ 411
Deriving features from CAD files ................................................... 415
Importing features from the CAD model to the measurement plan ...
420
Multiplying features by patterns .................................................... 421
Relative measurement ................................................................... 425
Copying properties of features ...................................................... 435
Tips and tricks for defining features .............................................. 436
Details on definition of the features ......................... 438

Further information on the definition of the features .................... 438
Overview of the features ............................................................... 439
Point feature ................................................................................. 442
Circle feature ................................................................................ 445
Plane feature ................................................................................ 446
2D Line feature ............................................................................. 448
3D Line feature ............................................................................. 450
Cylinder feature ............................................................................ 450
Cone feature ................................................................................ 452
Sphere feature .............................................................................. 455
Curve feature ............................................................................... 455
3D Curve feature .......................................................................... 455
Ellipse special geometry ................................................................ 456
Slot special geometry .................................................................... 457
Rectangle special geometry ........................................................... 458
Torus special geometry ................................................................. 458
Offset Plane special geometry ....................................................... 462
Symmetry Point special geometry .................................................. 463
Symmetry Plane special geometry ................................................. 463
Step Cylinder special geometry ..................................................... 464
Radius point special geometry ....................................................... 467
Table of contents
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Sphere Point special geometry ...................................................... 468

Angle Point special geometry ........................................................ 469
Circle on Cone special geometry ................................................... 470
General Surface special geometry ................................................. 472
General Curve special geometry .................................................... 472
Free Form Surface special geometry .............................................. 473
Holos and Gear additional features ............................................... 479
Turbine Blade additional feature ................................................... 481
Profile Elements additional feature ................................................ 483
Point Set additional feature ........................................................... 484
Station Point additional feature ..................................................... 489
Greater accuracy by gage correction qualification ......................... 492
Linking features in constructions ............................... 495

What is a construction? ................................................................ 495
Overview of constructions ............................................................. 495
Defining constructions .................................................................. 497
Defining features by recalling ........................................................ 497
Perpendicular construction .......................................................... 4115
Intersection construction ............................................................. 4116
Symmetry construction ............................................................... 4132
Edge Point construction .............................................................. 4141
Projection construction ............................................................... 4141
Tangent construction .................................................................. 4142
Minimum Point construction ....................................................... 4144
Maximum Point construction ...................................................... 4145
Minimum Feature construction ................................................... 4145
Maximum Feature construction ................................................... 4145
Average-Feature construction ..................................................... 4146
Cone Addition construction ........................................................ 4146
Plane with Offset construction .................................................... 4148
Circle in contour best fit construction ......................................... 4148
Kink Point construction ............................................................... 4154
Step Point construction ............................................................... 4156
Measurement strategies for features ...................... 4160

What is a measurement strategy? ............................................... 4160
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Table of contents
Managing measurement strategies ............................................. 4160

Editing a measurement strategy .................................................. 4162
Defining the measurement strategy for a feature ........................ 4162
Using the context menu of the strategy list ................................. 4163
Evaluation range ......................................................................... 4164
Point list ..................................................................................... 4169
Alternative probing methods (self-centering probing) .................. 4170
Automatic stylus search .............................................................. 4175
Path generation measuring features automatically

..................................................................................... 4178
Purpose and use of the path generation ..................................... 4178
Adding a path generation method to a strategy list .................... 4179
General settings for the path generation method ........................ 4180
Path generation methods in detail .............................................. 4180
Chapter 5
Defining characteristics
Basics about characteristics .......................................... 52
Calculation of geometric elements .............................. 53
Computed feature .......................................................................... 53
Best-fit methods ............................................................................. 53
Defining characteristics ................................................. 57

Options for defining characteristics ................................................. 57
Characteristics index card ............................................................... 58
Inserting characteristics into the measurement plan ........................ 59
Extracting characteristics from CAD files ......................................... 59
Characteristic definition templates ................................................ 517
Connecting characteristics to features ........................................... 518
Datums for characteristics ............................................................. 524
Characteristics with indexes .......................................................... 528
Nominal values and tolerances in characteristics ............................ 531
Copying properties of characteristics ............................................. 540
Evaluation parameters for features ........................... 542

Overview of the evaluation parameters ......................................... 542
Table of contents
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Filtering and outlier elimination ..................................................... 543

Excluding ranges by masking from the form characteristics ........... 552
Reference point for feature ........................................................... 555
User-defined characteristic attributes ........................ 557

Working with user-defined characteristic attributes ....................... 557
Assigning values for characteristic attributes ................................. 558
Importing characteristic attributes with values ............................... 559
Reference: INI file for characteristic attributes ................................ 560
Example: Configuration file for user-defined characteristic attributes
..................................................................................................... 561
Details on defining characteristics ............................. 563

Overview of characteristics ............................................................ 563
Radius Measurement characteristic ............................................... 573
Length of Perpendicular characteristic ........................................... 573
2 Point Diameter characteristic ...................................................... 574
Profile characteristic ...................................................................... 576
GDT Symmetry characteristic ........................................................ 579
Circular Pitch characteristic ........................................................... 580
Linear Pitch characteristic .............................................................. 584
Minimum, Maximum and Average characteristics ......................... 586
Roundness with reference angle characteristic .............................. 587
Flatness with reference length characteristic ................................. 588
Straightness with reference length characteristic ........................... 589
Result Element characteristic ......................................................... 590
Special Program characteristic ....................................................... 591
Maximum Waviness characteristic ................................................. 593
True Position with Best Fit of Bore Pattern characteristic .............. 5106
Characteristics in practice (instructions) ....................................... 5110
Utilities ....................................................................... 5112

Overview of the utilities .............................................................. 5112
Utilities for alignments ................................................................ 5113
Geometry Best Fit utility .............................................................. 5113
Probing System Qualification utility ............................................. 5114
Qualification of stylus system holders utility ................................ 5115
Erosion Module utility ................................................................. 5115
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Table of contents
Text Element utility ..................................................................... 5118

Graphics Element utility .............................................................. 5120
Saving an alignment ................................................................... 5120
Loading an alignment ................................................................. 5121
Deleting an alignment ................................................................ 5121
Base Alignment Match utility ...................................................... 5122
CAD Presentation utility .............................................................. 5127
Chapter 6
Editing the measurement plan

Overview: Editing the measurement plan ................... 62
Editing the entire measurement plan .......................... 63
Overview: Editing the entire measurement plan .............................. 63
Managing measurement plans ....................................................... 63
Saving measurement plan versions .................................................. 64
Editing compatibility settings .......................................................... 65
Exchanging styli in a measurement plan .......................................... 67
Editing a measurement plan ........................................................... 68
Specifying feature names in the measurement plan ...................... 618
Mirroring a measurement plan ...................................................... 624
Combining several measurement plans ......................................... 627
Editing features of the measurement plan ............... 629

Overview: Editing features of the measurement plan .................... 629
Adding features or characteristics to a measurement plan ............. 629
Highlighting features and characteristics ....................................... 630
Editing a measurement plan feature ............................................. 630
Copying measurement plan features ............................................. 631
Moving features or characteristics ................................................. 632
Deleting features or characteristics ................................................ 632
Working with the waste basket .................................................... 633
Grouping and ungrouping characteristics ...................................... 633
Copying features with references .................................................. 633
Renaming measurement plan features .......................................... 635
Undoing changes in the measurement plan .................................. 635
Searching and replacing measurement plan feature names ........... 636
10
Table of contents
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Converting selected cylinders to circles ......................................... 636
Formula input and run control ................................... 637

Overview of the formula input and run control ............................. 637
Formula input ............................................................................... 637
Entering formulas ......................................................................... 638
Entering formulas for clearance planes/clearance groups ............... 638
Showing formulas in the measurement plan ................................. 639
Setting conditions ......................................................................... 640
Inserting loops .............................................................................. 642
Run control with external batch files ............................................. 648
Using macros in the measurement plan .................... 650

Purpose of macros in the measurement plan ................................. 650
Basics about macros in measurement plans ................................... 651
Using macros in CALYPSO ............................................................ 653
Toolboxes ..................................................................... 657

What are toolboxes? ..................................................................... 657
Creating toolboxes ....................................................................... 657
Working with the toolbox ............................................................. 658
Deleting a toolbox ........................................................................ 658
Super characteristics ..................................................................... 658
Editing the travel paths .............................................. 664

Overview of the travel paths ......................................................... 664
About travel paths ........................................................................ 664
Clearance planes/clearance groups ............................................... 665
Checking the travel paths ............................................................. 667
Editing travel paths between features ........................................... 668
Editing travel paths within a feature .............................................. 671
Additional travel paths and positions ............................................ 672
Multimedia user information ..................................... 675

Information files in the measurement plan .................................... 675
Adding an information file to a measurement plan ....................... 675
Loading the information file of a measurement plan ..................... 676
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Table of contents
11
Chapter 7
Running a measurement plan

Measurement plan run .................................................. 72
Defining the scope of measurement ............................ 73
Options for defining the scope of measurement ............................. 73
Measuring the current selection ...................................................... 74
Working with measurement plan groups ........................................ 74
Working with mini-plans ................................................................. 74
Entering printout header data ..................................... 76

Overview of the printout header data ............................................. 76
Entering global printout header data .............................................. 76
Entering local printout header data ................................................. 76
Starting a measurement ............................................... 77

CNC run and manual run ................................................................ 77
Starting a CNC run ......................................................................... 77
Manual run ..................................................................................... 78
Checking and controlling the measurement plan run

....................................................................................... 711
Basics about the measurement plan run ........................................ 711
Setup Mode for features ............................................................... 711
Continue at missing probing ......................................................... 711
Working with the Stop Light window ........................................... 712
Working with the light signal window .......................................... 719
Working with the remark window ................................................ 721
Repeating measurements ........................................... 723

Use of repeat measurements ........................................................ 723
Repeat measurements in CALYPSO ............................................... 723
Preparing a repeat measurement .................................................. 724
Performing the repeat measurement ............................................. 726
Evaluating repeat measurements .................................................. 728
Behavior in the case of insufficient measuring force ...................... 728
Manual measurements ................................................ 730

Surface measurement with single points ....................................... 730
12
Table of contents
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Alternating operation with CALYPSO and UMESS ... 731
Chapter 8
Viewing, presenting and editing measuring results

Printouts in CALYPSO .................................................... 82
Overview of the printouts in CALYPSO ............................................ 82
Printout modes and printout types .................................................. 82
Working in the Single Printouts mode ............................................. 86
Working in the Multiple Printouts mode ......................................... 89
Outputting EXCEL reports ............................................................. 812
Displaying and printing printouts .................................................. 813
Examples of printouts ................................................................... 814
Preparing custom printouts and compact printouts ...821

Custom printout and compact printout ......................................... 821
Structure of custom printouts and compact printouts ................... 821
Automatic fields in the printout header ......................................... 822
Result presentation in the custom printout .................................... 822
Designing printouts with the printout format editors .................... 823
Outputting form and location plots with the graphics elements ............................................................................ 840
Outputting form and location plots ............................................... 840
Layout of a form and location plot ................................................ 840
Defining graphics elements ........................................................... 842
Examples of form and location plots ............................................. 844
Creating single templates with the graphics editor ........................ 860
Creating graphics forms with the printout header editor ............... 867
Working with the plot window .................................................... 870
Outputting form and location plots for characteristics

....................................................................................... 872
Defining the output in the definition template .............................. 872
Form and location plots for characteristics .................................... 872
Output of form or location plot .................................................... 873
Format files for form and location plots ........................................ 878
Working with the form and location plot window ......................... 882
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Table of contents
13
Exporting measuring results into files ....................... 885

Overview of the export of measuring results ................................. 885
Defining paths and names individually for output files .................. 888
Saving measuring results as files ................................................... 889
Exporting points during CNC run .................................................. 891
Exporting points manually ............................................................. 892
Configuring the DMIS output ....................................................... 894
Table files with measuring results .................................................. 895
Copying the measuring results file ................................................ 899
Evaluating measuring results subsequently ............ 8100

Basics about the subsequent evaluation of measuring results ...... 8100
Saving measuring points ............................................................. 8100
Evaluating measuring points ....................................................... 8101
Programmed access to measuring results ............... 8104

Basics about the programmed access to measuring results .......... 8104
Permitting access to measuring results ........................................ 8105
Syntax of the CalypsoInterface ................................................ 8106
Example: VBScript Application (WSH) ......................................... 8112
Chapter 9
Creating protocol templates with the PiWeb

BasicReporter
Introduction to the PiWeb BasicReporter .................... 92
Designing the protocol template ................................. 93
PiWeb BasicReporter program window ....................... 94
Setting up the pages of a protocol template .............. 95
Master pages and report pages ....................................................... 95
Setting up headers and footers ....................................................... 96
Generating a table of contents ....................................................... 97
Designing pages by means of the toolbox .................. 99

Adding elements from the toolbox ................................................. 99
Text and variables in protocol templates ....................................... 910
Images and views in protocol templates ........................................ 911
14
Table of contents
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Lines in protocol templates ........................................................... 912

Printouts and tables in protocol templates .................................... 914
Form plots in report templates ...................................................... 917
Changing element properties ........................................................ 919
Arranging elements on one page .................................................. 920
Linking an element to a characteristic ....................... 922

Undoing and restoring changes ................................. 924
Designing interactive protocols ................................. 925
Saving the protocol template and closing the BasicReporter ................................................................................... 926
Modifying and creating element templates .............. 927
Chapter 10
Managing CALYPSO
Saving and installing CMM data ................................ 102
If a software error occurs the error report ............. 103
Components of the error report .................................................... 103
Preparing the error report ............................................................. 103
Error report - preparing saving ...................................................... 104
Using the error report ................................................................... 105
Modifying system settings ......................................... 108

Overview of system settings .......................................................... 108
Example: Modifying system settings .............................................. 109
User management ........................................................................ 109
Changing the environment ......................................................... 1013
Changing the CMM configuration .............................................. 1013
Changing the measurement parameters of the CMM ................. 1014
Displaying system messages ........................................................ 1014
Activating licenses and displaying program parameters ............... 1014
Initializing the CMM ................................................................... 1015
Using the taskbar ........................................................................ 1015
These system settings can be modified ........................................ 1015
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Table of contents
15
Chapter 11
Styli and stylus systems

Overview of the chapter ............................................. 112
Editing stylus systems and styli .................................. 113
Procedure for stylus systems and styli ............................................ 113
Defining a new stylus system ........................................................ 113
Adding further styli to a stylus system ......................................... 1111
Renaming a stylus ....................................................................... 1112
Entering data of the master stylus ............................................... 1113
Setting the angle positions of an RDS stylus ................................ 1115
Creating and editing the RC List ................................................. 1117
Automated creation of a stylus list for an RC system ................... 1120
Qualifying the reference sphere .............................. 1122

Principle of qualification with reference sphere ........................... 1122
Determining the position of the reference sphere ....................... 1123
Qualification of styli .................................................. 1125

Basics about stylus qualification .................................................. 1125
Limit values for styli .................................................................... 1127
Measuring the stylus values ........................................................ 1128
Sensor monitoring for 3D microstyli on the F25 .......................... 1129
Selection of the qualification method .......................................... 1132
Performing stylus qualification .................................................... 1134
Qualifying stylus system with measurement plan ......................... 1139
Stylus system management ...................................... 1143

Stylus system management window ........................................... 1143
Editing stylus data ....................................................................... 1144
Creating a new stylus ................................................................. 1144
Working with overviews ............................................................. 1145
Outputting stylus data ................................................................ 1146
Reference sphere management ................................ 1149

Basics of reference spheres ......................................................... 1149
Reference sphere correction ........................................................ 1149
Transfer of reference sphere data ............................................... 1150
Reference sphere management window ................................. 1151
16
Table of contents
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Creating a new reference sphere ............................................... 1152

Editing reference sphere data ..................................................... 1153
Semi-automatically defining the RSH shaft direction .................... 1154
Outputting reference sphere data ............................................... 1155
Chapter 12
Measuring with the rotary table

General information on using the rotary table ......... 122
Advantages of the rotary table use ............................................... 122
Safety instructions for RT-AB rotary tables ..................................... 123
Mass moment of inertia (MMI) of rotary tables ............................. 123
Prerequisites for the rotary table ............................... 127

Steps for preparation .................................................................... 127
Logging in the rotary table ............................................................ 127
REWI additional correction for rotary table operation .................. 1210
Setting the rotary table axis for measurements ............................ 1213
Qualifying the rotary table axis .................................................... 1215
Additional prerequisites for the rotary table ................................ 1229
Using the rotary table for measurements ............... 1234

Overview of the use of the rotary table for measurements .......... 1234
Using the rotary table passively ................................................... 1234
Positioning the rotary table manually .......................................... 1235
Visualizing the tilting moment of the RT-AB rotary table ............. 1238
Using the loading mode for the RT-AB rotary table ..................... 1239
RT clearance planes ................................................................... 1240
Rotary table parameters in the feature ........................................ 1241
Measuring a feature in a number of rotary table positions .......... 1243
Rotational pattern of a feature with rotary table coupling ........... 1244
Chapter 13
Stylus system changer

Stylus system change .................................................. 132
Stylus system change in CALYPSO ................................................ 132
Stylus system changer for certain stylus systems ............................ 133
Multi-stage stylus system change .................................................. 133
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Table of contents
17
Setting the change behavior for multi-sensor systems ................... 134
Special aspects with stylus system changers ............. 136

Overview: Special aspects with stylus system changers .................. 136
Renishaw MCR20 stylus system changer ....................................... 136
SCR200 stylus system changer ...................................................... 137
ACR3 stylus system changer ......................................................... 138
Stylus system changer for RDS ...................................................... 139
Setting up the stylus system changer ...................... 1310

Setup in the system settings ........................................................ 1310
Configuring the stylus system changer ........................................ 1311
Setting up holders ...................................................................... 1312
Color coding of holders .............................................................. 1314
Rack assignments ....................................................................... 1315
Defining length of master stylus .................................................. 1317
Defining the RDS geometry ......................................................... 1318
Defining approach parameters and paths .................................... 1320
Defining holder positions ............................................................ 1327
Assigning a stylus system to a holder .......................................... 1333
Automatically changing the stylus system ................................... 1334
Semi-automatically changing the stylus system ........................... 1334
Changing stylus system assignments ........................................... 1335
Setting up an SP25 stylus system with an FCR25 rack ................. 1335
Setting up an XXT stylus system with an XXT rack ....................... 1337
Qualifying the stylus changer rack in the CNC run ...1341

Suitable holders for CNC qualification ......................................... 1341
Qualifying holders in the CNC run .............................................. 1342
Chapter 14
AutoRun interface
Introduction to AutoRun interfaces ........................... 142
Basics about AutoRun interfaces ................................ 143
Purpose and basic terms ............................................................... 143
Layout of the AutoRun interface ................................................... 143
Basics about desks ........................................................................ 144
18
Table of contents
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Basics about measurement plan icons ........................................... 145

Basics about pallets ....................................................................... 146
Basics about branches ................................................................... 149
Basics about keywords .................................................................. 149
Working with AutoRun ............................................. 1410

Preset AutoRun interface ............................................................ 1410
Your user privileges .................................................................... 1410
Preparing a measurement start for AutoRun ............................... 1410
Starting a measurement in AutoRun ........................................... 1415
Entering printout header parameters .......................................... 1416
Controlling measuring runs in AutoRun ...................................... 1417
When a measurement in AutoRun is completed .......................... 1417
Visualization of the measuring results ......................................... 1418
Displaying printouts subsequently ............................................... 1419
AutoRun for system administrators ......................... 1421

Tasks of the system administrator ............................................... 1421
Configuring AutoRun ................................................................. 1421
Mapping the workpieces ............................................................ 1426
Mapping a pallet ........................................................................ 1430
Defining measuring runs for a pallet ........................................... 1432
Assigning keywords to icons ....................................................... 1436
Creating branches between desks ............................................... 1437
Preparing a measurement ........................................................... 1437
Managing AutoRun .................................................................... 1443
Chapter 15
Duplex mode
Duplex mode with CALYPSO ...................................... 152
Preparing the duplex mode ........................................ 154
Prerequisites for the duplex mode ................................................. 154
Configuring CALYPSO for duplex mode ........................................ 154
Files for duplex mode .................................................................... 157
Establishing the connection and coupling the measuring ranges ... 158
Using the duplex mode ............................................. 1515

61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Table of contents
19
Notes on measuring in duplex mode ........................................... 1515

Measuring with a duplex CMM ................................................... 1515
Chapter 16
Setup and use of the RTP20 probe

Contents and purpose of this chapter ....................... 162
RTP20 probe ................................................................. 163
Basics about the RTP20 probe ....................................................... 163
Configuring the RTP20 in the system settings ............................... 164
Particular aspects of semi-automatic operation ........ 165

Semi-automatic operation with RTP20 .......................................... 165
Prerequisites for semi-automatic operation with RTP20 ................. 165
Qualifying the pivot sphere with the RTP20 ................................... 166
Semi-automatic angle positioning by CALYPSO ............................. 168
Entering the current angular position in CALYPSO ..1611
Chapter 17
Using the VAST XTR gold probe

Contents and purpose of this chapter ....................... 172
VAST XTR gold probe .................................................. 173
Basics about the VAST XTR gold probe ......................................... 173
Prerequisites and conditions .......................................................... 174
Particularities for the use ............................................ 176

Particularities for the measurement ............................................... 176
Stylus system change with VAST XTR gold .................................... 177
Alphabetic index
20
Table of contents
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Preface
Information about these operating
instructions
These Basics Instructions are intended for users who want to learn about
the use of CALYPSO and the rational execution of their CALYPSO measuring jobs.
These operating instructions describe how to work with the base module
of CALYPSO. To take full advantage of additional functions, you must
purchase the corresponding option.
NOTICE
The additional CALYPSO options are described in separate manuals.
Reference information about the windows and dialogs can be found in
the dialog reference in the CALYPSO Online Help.
Overview
These instructions contain:
Chapter Introduction [ 11]

Contains background information illustrating the basic procedures
and general concepts of CALYPSO.
Chapter Working with the CAD window [ 21]

Describes the possibilities of the CAD window and how to use them.
You also get information on how to work with CAD data.
Chapter Preparing the measurement plan [ 31]

Describes how to open a measurement plan and the prerequisites
necessary before you can run a measurement plan automatically.
Chapter Defining features [ 41]

Describes the definition of the features (e.g. a plane or cylinder) and
explains how to work with strategy macros and scanning.
Chapter Defining characteristics [ 51]

Describes the principles of the fitting methods that CALYPSO uses and
shows how to define characteristics.
Chapter Editing the measurement plan [ 61]

Explains how to manage a measurement plan, work with the toolbox
options, create custom printouts and work with the travel paths of
the CMM.
Chapter Running a measurement plan [ 71]

Describes how to start CNC runs and how to work with the measuring
results.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Preface
Chapter Viewing, presenting and editing measuring re-
sults [ 81]
Describes which types of printouts are available and how to work with
them. How to save the measuring results in files of different formats
is also described.
Chapter Creating protocol templates with the PiWeb BasicReport-
er [ 91]
Opens the PiWeb BasicReporter for creating and editing the protocol
templates (PTX files) for Basic Reports.
Chapter Managing CALYPSO [ 101]

Shows how to install CALYPSO and how to view and modify all system
settings of Calypso.
Chapter Styli and stylus systems [ 111]

Describes the installation, qualification and administration of stylus
systems and styli for CALYPSO.
Chapter Measuring with the rotary table [ 121]

Describes the login, setup and qualification of the rotary table and the
special aspects of the measuring run with the rotary table.
Chapter Stylus system changer [ 131]

Contains the instructions for using the CALYPSO stylus system changer.
Chapter Automatic Run [ 141]

Explains how the system administrator sets up an AutoRun interface
and how users work with AutoRun.
Chapter Duplex mode [ 151]

Contains the instructions for preparing, performing and evaluating
measurements with duplex CMMs.
Chapter Setup and use of the RTP20 probe [ 161]

Contains the instructions for setup and use of the RTP20 probe which
allows semi-automatic angle adjustment.
Chapter Using the VAST XTR gold probe [ 171]

Explains the structural features and the procedure for the use of the
VAST XTR gold probe.
Additional documents
for CALYPSO
The following operating instructions describe the options of CALYPSO as

well as special devices.
Curve Measurement (option)

Contains the basics of curve measurement, how to set up features
and characteristics, and how to operate on the results.
Preface
Parameter-coded measuring runs (option)
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Explains the basics of the PCM programming language. It also provides directions for and examples of using PCM with CALYPSO, with
formulas, input and output parameters, conditions and loops.
Simulation (option)
Simulation
If you have used the stylus system library to copy the styli of your
CMM virtually, CALYPSO is able to simulate the stylus movements in
the CAD window.
DMIS Export (option)

Explains the basics and the procedure for the export of CALYPSO
measurement plans to DMIS.
DMIS Import (V2) (option)

Explains the basics and the procedure for the import of measuring
runs programmed in DMIS toCALYPSO.
Characteristic IN (option)
You can use the Characteristic IN option without a connected CMM
to import suitable CAD data or Agipp data for manufacturing segments and convert this data into a CALYPSO measurement plan.
OVCMM Measuring Uncertainty Definition (option)

Describes the configuration and use of the OVCMM that can be used
to determine the measuring uncertainty of measurement plan results.
Qualifying the RDS with CAA (option)

Describes how to qualify an RDS on a system with the RDS-CAA option (Computer Aided Accuracy). A small number of physical probings
is all that is needed to qualify all 20,736 possible angular positions of
an RDS.
VAST Navigator (option)

With the VAST Navigator, you can achieve maximum precision during
high-speed scanning thanks to the refined equipment technology,
control technology and algorithms. Tangential probing and helical
scanning now become possible.
Automation (option)
Describes the Automation option, with which automation projects are
realized in combination with the CMM-OS.
QS-STAT Interface (option)

With the QS-STAT Interface option, you can evaluate measuring results that have been saved by CALYPSO in the Q-DAS format in the
qs-STAT statistics program.
Dynalog and Dynalog P control consoles

Describes how to operate CALYPSO using the Dynalog control console.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Preface
Metrotomography (option)
With the Metrotomography option, you can load, visualize and measure CT data records gained by METROTOM.
CALYPSO DME Interface (option)

The CALYPSO DME Interface option allows you to use CALYPSO for
the control of a DME server.
AIMS Interface (option)

The AIMS Interface option allows you to import measurement plans
from AIMS to CALYPSO and to export the results calculated by means
of these measurement plans back to AIMS.
Calypso Barcode (option)

The CALYPSO Barcode option makes it possible to use barcode information on workpieces for partially automated quality testing.
Calypso Tube Measurement Program (option)

The Tube Measurement Program option enables you to define, measure and evaluate curved tubes.
VAST Performance (option)

The VAST Performance option enables you to use the FlyScan function
which makes it possible to measure paths interrupted by grooves
much faster and more conveniently in one go. Furthermore, you have
access to the quick stylus system change.
PiWeb FlexReporting (option)

The PiWeb FlexReporting option allows you to evaluate the measured
values of a measurement plan in separate reports. The reports may
contain graphic representations, integrated statistical evaluations and
interactive elements and can be updated by pressing a button after
selecting the desired measurements.
PC-DMIS Import (option)

You can use the PC-DMIS import option to import a program created with PC-DMIS and to have it converted to a CALYPSO measurement plan. Provided you have a licensed and executable version of
PC-DMIS installed on your computer.
Supplementary literature
Simply Measure And what you should know to do it right, A metrology

primer
Carl Zeiss, Industrial Metrology Division, Order number: 612302-9002
ZEISS training block
You can order the training block from Carl Zeiss, Industrial Metrology
Division, D-73446 Oberkochen.
Order no.: 600331-8052-000
Preface
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Text conventions and

symbols
Icons
Text conventions The following text conventions and symbols are used in
these instructions:
Example
Description
Features
Text element of the graphics screen

display.
Comment
The Comment button on the

screen.
<machine name>
Variable text or dummy for a name.
C:\windows\w.ini
The w.ini file in the windows directory on the C:\ drive.
For this section...
A passage containing important information.
Preface
This is a cross reference. When

viewing this manual on the screen,
you will be guided to the indicated
text passage by clicking the reference.
Plan CNC-Start
The Run command in the Plan

submenu of the main menu.
CTRL+A
Press the CTRL key and the letter A at

the same time.
Three special icons containing important information are used in this

manual. The icons appear in the marginal column next to the respective
text.
You will find a detailed explanation of the safety instructions under Configuration of safety instructions.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Preface
Configuration of safety instructions

Safety instructions indicate a personal health hazard. We distinguish three
different levels: Danger, warning and caution. All three safety instructions
are marked with the same warning symbol. The designation of the safety
instruction is shown beside the symbol. The safety instructions used are
described below.
Configuration of a safety instruction

A safety instruction may have the following components:
Warning symbol and designation of the safety instruction (signal

word): Danger, warning or caution.
Source and cause of the danger
Consequences for the user due to non-observance of the safety instruction
Required measures to be taken by the user to avoid possible consequences
A measure may cause an intermediate result.
At the end of all measures, a final result may be caused.
Personal health hazard

DANGER
A danger indicates an imminent risk to life and limb.
Non-observance of this safety instruction when the described risk occurs
causes death or serious injuries.
Example: Electric shock due to high electric voltage.
WARNING
A warning indicates a possible risk to life and limb.
may cause death or serious injuries.
Example: Risk of severe crushing of the body caused by heavy loads.
CAUTION
A caution indicates a personal health hazard.
may cause slight to moderate injuries.
Example: Risk of minor crushing of the limbs caused by small loads.
Risk of material damage

If there is no personal health hazard, but the CMM or components may
get damaged, this is pointed out by the following notice.
Preface
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
This symbol refers to possible damage to the CMM.

Non-observance of this safety instruction when the event occurs may cause
damage to the CMM or one of its components.
Example: Collision of the ram with a workpiece.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Preface
Preface
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Chapter
Introduction
.................................................................................................................
This chapter contains:

Welcome to CALYPSO ............................................................................. 12
Starting CALYPSO .................................................................................... 13
The main window of CALYPSO ................................................................ 16
Working with CALYPSO ........................................................................... 18
Important terms in CALYPSO ................................................................. 115
Measurement plan-oriented measuring with CALYPSO .......................... 117
Options and licenses .............................................................................. 119
User support for CALYPSO ..................................................................... 123
Exiting CALYPSO .................................................................................... 130
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-1
Welcome to CALYPSO
Welcome to CALYPSO
CALYPSO was developed to make the job of measuring easier for you.
To this end, CALYPSO utilizes the entire know-how pool of Carl Zeiss, the
technology leader in the world of metrology.
Straightforward programming
CALYPSO automatically recognizes the geometry features that you probe

and generates probing paths and strategies, retraction movements and
travel paths between the features.
In contrast to conventional software, the styli are qualified with the aid
of CNC programs. As a consequence you need only perform the first
probing of the reference sphere manually, CALYPSO will perform all of
the remaining steps for you.
In CALYPSO, you enter the measurement parameters in accordance with
a predefined structure, which means that nothing can be inadvertently
omitted. You will find, for example, that the parameters in the input menus offer you default values. There are only a few items that call for manual input in CALYPSO, and they are highlighted to draw your attention
to them right away. Logical sequences, indicators, prompts for confirmation, and plausibility checks matching the individual characteristics are all
in place to make sure that you omit nothing and to make measuring as
straightforward as possible.
You see what you're

measuring
CALYPSO offers you a clear view of the workpiece at all times. The CAD
model is right in front of you on the screen and you can follow every detail
as measurement proceeds. Of course, you also have the option of directly
importing CAD data so that you can quickly generate error-free measurement programs of your own.
Versatile measurement
logs
You can be sure that you'll have the results of measurement without delay, and afterwards you can still depend on CALYPSO to help. You can
customize measurement logs to suit your needs and preferences,for example you can assign colors to tolerance overshoots or select full-graphics
display modes for the results.
If you want to import the results into other mainstream Windows applications, CALYPSO can export the result files, so you can present the data
as graphic or in table form, or in presentation programs whatever you
want.
1-2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Starting CALYPSO
Starting CALYPSO
1 Wait for the Windows desktop to appear and double-click the Calypso icon.
- or Select Start Programs Zeiss CALYPSO 5.6 CALYPSO
5.6.
The Log In window opens and you must identify yourself by entering
the user name and the password.
Exceptions:
If System login (LDAP) is activated in the User notebook in the

system settings,
CALYPSO sends, via the IP address set, user name and password to
the LDAP server, which will compare this data to the data stored in
the server. If the data corresponds to each other, CALYPSO is started.
However, the prerequisite is that the users are defined with the same
user name and password (pay attention to upper and lower case!),
not only in the system used by the LDAP directory (e.g. the Microsoft
Active Directory) but also in the CALYPSO user management.
If Automatic login is activated in the User notebook in the system

settings, CALYPSO starts automatically without login.
Login in the CALYPSO window
1 Select your user name from the User Name list.
Note: If you click Memos, you find information left for you by the
operator on the previous shift.
2 Type in your password and click OK.
When you log in for the first time, CALYPSO prompts you to confirm
your password:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-3
Starting CALYPSO
3 Type in your password again and click OK.

Once you have logged in, the following will be opened depending on the
default settings:
Starting to work
the CALYPSO program
the AutoRun user interface
the counter display
the task bar
If the CALYPSO program starts with an empty user desk according to your
settings, you can call in the What do you like to do? window one of
the functions that you require most frequently when starting to work or
switch to one of the measurement plans last opened.
How do you want to start?

The most important tasks
Measurement plans used last
Create New Measurement Plan
Engine block
Open Measurement Plan
Gear
Load CAD Model
Rotary table
Manage Stylus Systems

Change Settings
Calypso 5.6.0000
Version 5.6.0000 (01.05.2013)
1-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Starting CALYPSO
NOTICE
Consult your system administrator if you encounter problems when logging in.
The CALYPSO program window

After starting, CALYPSO opens several windows: the main window, Stop
Light window, status window, Tips and Tricks and, if necessary, the light
signal window.
Make your entries in the CALYPSO main window. The other windows are
only for information and checking.
NOTICE
Never close ACIS Interface when CALYPSO is running.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-5
The main window of CALYPSO

The CALYPSO work area appears once you have logged in.
This graphic shows the main window with an open measurement plan.
The CAD window contains the model of the workpiece.
Menu bar
Toolbar
Measurement plan
area with four tabs
Current index card of

the measurement
plan range
CAD window
CAD icons
The main window and its principal elements are described briefly below:
Menu bar
The menu bar contains the basic commands for working with CALYPSO.
Toolbar
Icons allow you to run frequently required commands quickly.
Note: Use the Toolbar Editor to configure the toolbar.
Measurement plan area

The measurement plan area comprises four tabs. The small squares
of the boxes on the tabs indicate the status of the tab.
1-6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CMM
Here you find the CMM settings and the stylus system dialogs.
Measurement plan
This is where you quickly find the important dialogs for preparing the measurement plan.
Characteristics
This is where you define the characteristics in the order in

which they are carried out in the CNC run, and where you
edit them.
Features
This is where you create and edit lists of the features.
CAD window
The CAD window contains a three-dimensional model of the workpiece and each feature. The model is permanently updated when you
define new features or edit existing ones.
Note: The view requires a certain period of time to create itself. If you
do not require the display of the model in the CAD window, select
CAD View Hide CAD View.
CAD icons
The icons allow you to define features in the CAD window and to
work on their representation.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-7
Working with CALYPSO

Operating CALYPSO
You can work with CALYPSO the same way as with many Window software packages: using the keyboard and mouse. You can use a mouse
with 2 or 3 buttons and a mouse with a scroll wheel. You can also use
the scroll wheel of the mouse to scroll lists up and down.
Two- and three-button
mouse
The table shows which key combinations of a two-button mouse correspond to the keys of the three-button mouse.
Two-button
mouse
Three-button mouse
left button
corresponds to
left button
right button
corresponds to
middle button
Ctrl + right button
corresponds to
right button
Alt + right button
corresponds to
Alt + right button
NOTICE
The descriptions in this document are based on a two-button mouse.
Using a 3D mouse
For convenient rotation and displacement of three-dimensional objects in

the CAD window, you can also use a 3D mouse which is also called space
mouse.
For example, the SpaceNavigator by 3DConnexion has been tested and
released in combination with CALYPSO.
NOTICE
Note that the 3D mouse cannot be used instead of the normal mouse
but must be connected in addition.
For further information, please refer to the operating instructions of the
corresponding 3D mouse.
Routines
CALYPSO offers shortcuts [ 19] that enable you to call functions

quickly.
If you are unwilling or unable to use the keyboard, you can also make
entries using the mouse [ 110].
The context menu [ 110] is available in lists and in the CAD window
in addition to the menu items in the main menu and submenus.
Switching from one

measurement plan to the
other
If you want to switch between several open measurement plans, use

Window Meas. Plan Name to go to the desired measurement
plan.
1-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Clicking through lists

with open windows
In the lists of features and characteristics, you can open the definition
template for each item which defines the element. You can open additional windows in the definition template.
By selecting another element in the list, the open windows are updated.
It is not necessary to close the windows and to open them again for the
other element.
You can open the strategy window for a feature, for example,and then
view and edit the strategy for any other feature desired without having
to close the strategy window prior to this.
NOTICE
All changes made in the open windows are accepted and saved automatically.
Using shortcuts
If a shortcut is available for a menu item, it is shown next to the menu
item. You can use the following shortcuts:
Shortcut
Function
CTRL+N
Creating a new measurement plan
CTRL+O
Opening a measurement plan
CTRL+S
Saving the measurement plan
CTRL+F
Opening the Search window
CTRL+H
Opening the Replace window
CTRL+A
Select All
CTRL+Z
Undoing the last action
CTRL+C
Copying the selection to the clipboard
CTRL+X
Cutting the selection
CTRL+V
Pasting the selection from the clipboard
F2
Renaming the selected feature
DEL
Deleting the selected feature
ESC
Closing the box without applying the changes
RETURN
Closing the box and applying the changes
RIGHT
Opening the feature and characteristic window for the selected feature
CTRL+RIGHT
Opening the strategy window for the selected feature
ALT+RIGHT
Opening the evaluation for the selected feature
ALT+F4
Exiting CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-9
Entering alphanumeric characters with

the mouse
If you prefer using the mouse to enter text strings, CALYPSO can display
an input field with a keyboard.
Activating the typewriter

1 Select View Configuration.
2 In the Touch Screen index card in the Datum Features window, tick
the Use typewriter for inputs check box.
3 Click Close.
The Typewriter dialog box will appear on the screen whenever a
change is made to an input field.
Using context menus

CALYPSO has context menus that change depending on where you are
in the software.
Calling a context menu

1 Click with the right mouse button.
Note: Sometimes, the context menus offer commands that are
available nowhere else.
In the context menu of a feature, use the Details submenu to open the
Clearance Data, Evaluation (Feature) and Strategy windows.
Thus you edit a feature without opening the feature beforehand.
1-10
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Working with toolbars

Toolbar editor
Use the Toolbar Editor to customize the toolbar to fit your requirements.
This provides all the functions of the menus that have graphical icons, as
well as the additional icons of the toolbar.
NOTICE
In every configuration, the right end of the toolbar forms the icon group
for stylus administration. This stylus group cannot be deleted, and its
icons cannot be selected.
You can only add icons to the toolbar according to the space available
above the main window. As soon as the space has been used up, the
toolbar editor refuses to insert additional icons.
Toolbar per user
The toolbar is saved on a user-specific basis: After you have logged in,
CALYPSO automatically displays your toolbar.
Saving and loading toolbars
You can save and load toolbars. The toolbars are saved as *.config files.
Restoring the standard
The standard toolbar can be restored using Presetting and activated

for your main window using Apply.
Restructuring toolbars
Use the Toolbar Editor to specify which icons appear in what order in the
toolbar.
Creating and adopting a new toolbar

1 Select View Toolbar Editor.
In the upper window, the current working state of the toolbar is displayed. In the lower window, all the available icons are shown.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-11
2 Select the representation of the available icons:

All buttons: All icons appear successively in a list.
Sorted by menu: All the icons appear in a hierarchical list according
to menu items of the main menu.
3 Select the desired icon and, if appropriate, tick the check box for the
spaces to be inserted.
4 To append the icon at the right end of the toolbar (in front of the stylus
group): Click Insert at end.
- or To insert the icon in another position in the toolbar: In the upper window, select the icon after the desired position and click Insert before selection.
If there is no more space for the icon to be inserted, a message appears.
5 In order to remove an icon from the toolbar: Select it in the upper
window and click Remove button.
6 When the toolbar corresponds to your wishes: Save it using Save
as ... if you want to adopt it into your main window later.
- or Click Apply to let the toolbar take effect immediately.
7 Click OK to close the two dialog boxes.
1-12
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Operation with the keyboard

In both windows, you can operate all the functions with the keyboard
(corresponds to Windows standard). In particular, you can use ENTER to
insert the marked icon at the end of the toolbar; with CTRL+ENTER a space
is inserted before it.
Operation with the mouse

You can use the mouse to drag icons from the list in the lower window
into the toolbar in the upper window.
If you press CTRL at the same time, a space is inserted in front of the icon.
If you press SHIFT at the same time, a space is inserted behind the icon. If
you press both keys, spaces are inserted both in front of and behind the
icon.
Directory structures in CALYPSO

To meet the specifications of Microsoft Windows, the directory structures
of CALYPSO version 5.6 have been modified.
The data in CALYPSO is grouped in the following categories:
Program files
The files required for CALYPSO operation.
User data
The data you process during a CALYPSO session.
This data is stored in different directories. The program files are located
in the program directory and in the program data directory. The user data
is stored in the user directory.
NOTICE
The folder names depend on the language of the installed Windows version. If you install the English Windows version, the folders, too, will have
English designations.
To display the folder names in the address line in the installation language, a certain INI file must be available for each folder. If this file is
missing, this folder will be shown with the English designation.
The program files and the user data are located in the following directories in CALYPSO:
CALYPSO program directory

Windows XP: C:Programme\Zeiss\CALYPSO 5.6
Windows 7: C:\Programs (x86)\Zeiss\CALYPSO 5.6
CALYPSO user directory

Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Zeiss
\CALYPSO 5.6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-13
Windows 7: C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\Zeiss\Calypso 5.6
CALYPSO program data directory

Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data
\Zeiss\Calypso 5.6
Windows 7: C:\ProgramData\Zeiss\Calypso 5.6
CALYPSO temporary data directory

To get access to the temporary data, enter the following in the address
line of the Windows Explorer:
Windows XP: %Temp%\Zeiss\Calypso 5.6
Windows 7: %Temp%\Zeiss\Calypso 5.6
Representation in the documentation

The names of the directories for program data and user data differ depending on whether Windows XP or Windows 7 is used. Therefore, placeholders in angle brackets are used in this documentation (<user directory>). For example, if the <user directory>\daten\excel_report\ directory
is indicated in the documentation, replace the placeholder <user directory> with the corresponding path in your Windows version to determine
the directory.
Example
If you use Windows XP on your computer, the file is stored in the C:
\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Zeiss\CALYPSO 5.6\daten

\excel_report\ directory in this example.
NOTICE
In the address line of the Windows Explorer, some folders are displayed
with a different designation than that shown in the navigation bar. For
example, the name of the folder Shared documents is shown with the
abbreviated name Documents in the address line.
However, the folder name shown in the navigation bar is important.
1-14
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Important terms in CALYPSO

Overview of important terms
It is a good idea to familiarize yourself with the most important basic terms
of CALYPSO so that you will be able to understand the following chapters
and make optimum use of the features offered by CALYPSO:
Features [ 115]
Characteristics [ 115]
Measurement plans [ 115]
Coordinate systems [ 116]
Clearance cuboid [ 116]
Features
There are two types of feature in CALYPSO:
Automatic feature recognition
A physical feature of a workpiece such as planes (lateral surfaces) and

cylinders (holes),etc.
A constructed feature that does not physically exist. Features of this

nature are needed for lines of intersection and cylinder axes, for example.
CALYPSO automatically recognizes most geometric elements as you

move the CMM stylus to probe them. The software's measurement algorithm is smart and takes into account the location of measurement
points as well as the probing direction. For example, if you take measurements at three points on a workpiece, CALYPSO will determine
whether the feature is a line, plane or circle.
Characteristics
An engineering drawing requirement. You use characteristics to specify
the dimensions, shape or location of features along with any applicable
nominal and tolerance values (e.g. the diameter of a hole, the perpendicularity of a hole to a plane and the distance between two planes).
Measurement plans
A measurement plan is the CALYPSO version of what you might be familiar with as a part program or control data. A measurement plan
contains the information the system needs to perform a measurement,
for example:
the characteristics with their tolerances
the features
the names of the stylus systems
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-15
the part alignment
the clearance planes around the workpiece
The measurement plan is displayed as three lists with icons that represent
the characteristics, the features and the other components to be evaluated.
There are two ways of generating measurement plans:
You can begin by using the CMM or a different way to define the
part's features that you want to measure and the characteristics to
evaluate for those features.
Or you can create the characteristics and then determine all the requisite features.
Once you have created a measurement plan, you can run it to automatically evaluate the characteristics on a specified workpiece.
Coordinate systems
For exact location definition and reliable performance of measurements,
precisely defined and convertible coordinate systems are essential.
Machine coordinate system
The machine coordinate system is the basis of travel commands and

measurements of the CMM. For concrete measurements on a workpiece,
however, this is impractical. A coordinate system referred to the workpiece must be used as the user-defined reference coordinate system of a
measurement plan.
Part Alignment
A part alignment is bound to the workpiece. For CALYPSO and the CMM,
it locates the position and alignment of the workpiece on the measuring
table. There may be several part alignments for a single workpiece.
Base System
One of the part alignments is defined as the base alignment for the
measurement plan. All other part alignments can be converted to this
base alignment.
Local feature alignment
In addition, you can also use the local feature alignment for each feature;
the zero point and alignment of this coordinate system are defined in a
specified manner by the feature.
Clearance planes
Six planes define a safe area around a part and any associated fixture
where the stylus can move without risk of collision. Outside the clearance
zone formed by these planes, the stylus can be moved without risk of
collision.
CALYPSO determines the part's clearance planes using only two positions.
1-16
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Measurement plan-oriented measuring with

CALYPSO
CALYPSO is used for quality assurance and is a powerful tool for measuring workpieces quickly and reliably. When you measure with CALYPSO,
you begin by creating a measurement plan containing all the requisite
tolerances and nominal data in the form of characteristics and all the
requisite geometric data in the form of features.
Working close by the machine and from a remote position

Your measurement determines how you define the characteristics and
features. You can adopt the values CALYPSO suggests as standard for
the nominal values and tolerances when probing the workpiece.
Alternatively, you can import data directly into the measurement plan
from a CAD file or enter the values manually. CALYPSO supports you
through these steps with automatic feature recognition and an extensive
library of tolerance tables.
CALYPSO Planner
These functions make it easy to generate a measurement plan away from

the machine. The CALYPSOPlanner makes it possible to work on a computer without a connected CMM in the Simulation operating mode.
NOTICE
To simulate measuring results, you can generate actual values that differ
from the nominal values due to translation and random dispersion. The
dispersion and translation are set under Extras Settings Measurement.
DME Interface
When using CALYPSO with the DME interface, you can control all CMMs
supporting the DME interface.
Common to all these procedures is the fact that the characteristics and
features, once defined, are grouped in the measurement plan. This means
that random samples taken from series production can be measured automatically without any need for manual probing.
Output of measuring results

The measuring results are output in standardized printouts. The measuring results can be exported and edited in other applications (e.g. statistics
programs).
This user guide takes you through the process step-by-step, all the way
up to the measured results. The diagram below illustrates the path we
are going to follow.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-17
1-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Options and licenses

Options
The CALYPSO program consists of a main program and additional purchase options for special purposes. The options offered are shown in the
Carl Zeiss product sheets.
The main program can be operated in three versions which differ with
regard to the control of the CMM:
Manuals for the options
CALYPSO MAN / CNC
CALYPSO Planner
CALYPSO DME Interface
This documentation has a similar structure.
The main documentation is intended for CALYPSO MAN / CNC and

CALYPSO Planner. You will receive an additional manual for the CALYPSO DME interface.
You will receive additional manuals for the purchased options.
Licensing
Licenses for options and measurement plans
Options
You can only use an option if the appropriate license is installed on your
system. The licenses installed on your computer are shown in CALYPSO
under Extras Settings Miscellaneous on the Licenses notebook page.
Protected measurement
plans
Furthermore, licenses for individual measurement plans created and protected by Carl Zeiss are also available. To run such a measurement plan,
the corresponding license is required.
Licensing using the Zeiss License Activation Utility

As of version 5.4, you can use the new licensing procedure of the Zeiss
License Activation Utility. It offers more options than the procedure of the
Zeiss License Manager. With the Zeiss License Activation Utility, the licenses are not so dependent on the hardware used and you can use licenses already in use in the network. The Zeiss License Activation Utility
can be installed if required and is described in a separate document.
Licensing using the Zeiss License Activation Utility offers the following
options:
PC-related license with hardware ID. In the event of major changes to

the hardware, you can repair the license yourself.
License for use on any PC with software protection device (dongle)
Licenses for free use of any number of licenses in a network.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-19
You manage the licenses in the network on a server which distributes

them to clients. Activate the licenses in CALYPSO under Extras Settings Miscellaneous on the Licenses notebook
page. Once the maximum number of usable licenses in the network
has been reached, no new activation is possible.
Licensing using the Zeiss License Manager

If you do not want to use the new licensing procedure of the Zeiss License
Activation Utility, you must uninstall the Zeiss License Activation Utility.
Then the Zeiss License Manager will be activated automatically. It enables
you to determine your system's hardware ID and to install the licenses
personalized for your system via the hardware ID by Carl Zeiss.
Licensing via the Zeiss License Manager offers the following options:
PC-related license with hardware ID.

In the event of hardware changes, you must determine the new
modified hardware ID and request new personalized licenses.
License for use on any PC with software protection device (dongle)
Activating and deactivating licenses

For PC-related licenses or licenses protected by a software protection device (dongle), you can define the licenses to be used by CALYPSO. This
can be useful in the following case, for example:
You can use different CALYPSO installations on several CMMs. For example, on one CMM, CALYPSO is used with the VAST Navigator option
and on another CMM, CALYPSO is used without this option.
If you now create a measurement plan on the CMM with the VAST Navigator option and set optimum speed for a feature in this measurement
plan, CALYPSO cannot interpret this measurement plan correctly on the
other CMM (without VAST Navigator).
To avoid this, deactivate the licenses not required for the current measurement plan in the system configuration.
Activating and deactivating licenses

1 To do so, select Extras Settings Miscellaneous and open
the Licenses notebook page.
The appearance of the notebook page differs depending on whether
you use the Zeiss License Activation Utility or not (here without Zeiss
License Activation Utility).
1-20
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 Activate or deactivate the desired licenses with a click.

A check mark in front of the name of the license or in the Activated indicates that the license is activated.
Using licenses in the network

For freely applicable licenses in the network, you can define on each individual client PC which of the available licenses can be used by CALYPSO.
Activating licenses
1 To do so, select Extras Settings Miscellaneous and open
the Licenses notebook page.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-21
2 Activate or deactivate the desired licenses.

If the maximum number of applicable licenses in the network is
reached, a message to this effect is issued. In this case, you can only
activate the license on this PC after having deactivated it on another
client PC.
1-22
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
User support for CALYPSO

Support in the submenu ?
CALYPSO helps you use the program in many different ways. In the ?
submenu, you will find help and support:
Menu item
Function
Bubble help
Displays programmed help texts when moving the mouse pointer

over an object.
Global Help
Opens the start page of the Online Help.

The chapter Using the Online Help [ 123] in the Online Help
describes the use of the Online Help system.
Operating In- Displays the Basic Operating Instructions for CALYPSO as a PDF file.
structions
You can print PDF files relating to the various topics from the Online
Help. Links to the PDF files can be found as PDF files under Operating
Instructions.
Tips and
Tricks
Shows notes and tips regarding practical questions relating to the

work with CALYPSO.
Release Info
Shows the release information regarding the new functions of the

current version of CALYPSO as a PDF file.
Product Information
Opens the product information of Carl Zeiss in the internet.
CZ IMT on the IMT on the Internet: Opens the start page of Carl Zeiss IMT on
the internet.
Internet
Academy Web: Opens the Academy Web Login window from
where you can access the Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy.
About...
Shows the version numbers of the currently installed versions, service

packs and interfaces.
Furthermore, the Online Help contains videos with example instructions
that can be played from within the Online Help under Videos in the
Online Help [ 126].
Using the Online Help

The CALYPSO Online Help has an intuitive interface to take you right to
the information you need. It is a good idea to read the following notes
even so, because they will help you find the most efficient way of using
the CALYPSO Online Help system.
How to access the Online Help
Press the F1 key or click Help in the corresponding dialog.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-23
How to use this Online Help

You can use the Online Help in much the same way as a standard internet
page.
Navigator
The navigator enables you to go straight to the help pages of your choice.
Content
You can view a topic by double-clicking it in the table of contents.
Double-click a book icon to view the list of topics covered in the books
subsections.
Note: If the Navigator is not visible on the screen, click the Show
button at the top left of the help window.
Index
Double-click a term in the alphabetical index to view the help pages
that contain occurrences of the term.
Search
Use this function for full-text searching through the entire Online Help
system. You can use the ? and * wildcards.
Examples: ?D curve finds 2D curve and 3D curve. *stylus
finds spherical-tip stylus, disk stylus, conical stylus, etc.
Favorite places
You can insert bookmarks as shortcuts that will take you quickly back
to pages of your choice.
Display area
The help pages with text and illustrations appear in the display area.
The text contains hotlinks (words or phrases that are underscored and
color-highlighted). Clicking a hotlink takes you straight to another page
containing more information of relevance to the original subject.
1-24
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
There are arrow icons at the bottom of each help page:

Takes you to the top of the help page
Takes you to the previous help page (referring to
the table of contents).
Takes you to the next help page (referring to the
table of contents).
Routemap
The hotlinks to other help pages in the CALYPSO Online Help are grouped
in categories.
Basics and background information
Step-by-step instructions
Details and detailed information
Examples
A list of related topics is displayed when you click one of the Routemap
icons. Select one of the topics from the list in order to go straight to the
corresponding help page.
Buttons
The following buttons are arranged along the top edge of the Help window:
Shows the Navigator.
Hides the Navigator.
Returns to the previous page.
Returns to the page where you last clicked the
Back button.
Takes you to the start page in the Online Help.
Prints the current page (with or without all related
topics, according to your choice).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-25
Opens a menu with a wide range of options for

customizing the window.
Takes you to the internet pages of Carl Zeiss, Industrial Metrology Division.
Context menus
Context menus that you open by right-clicking provide access to additional functions.
Typographic conventions
The following typographic conventions are employed in the Online Help
system:
Highlight
Meaning
Bold
Dialog element on the screen Example: the OK

button
Term
Example: the DMIS export
Italic
A passage containing important information

Example: Click with the right mouse button...
Warnings and notes

Passages drawing the attention to risks of injury or damage to equipment
and passages containing important information have a color background:
You will find a detailed explanation of the safety instructions under Configuration of safety instructions.
Videos in the Online Help

Playing videos
You can find videos that you can play with a simple click for the following
topics in the text and as a summary in this table:
Video
Topic
File name
AutoSave
Saving measurement plan versions [ 64]
001_e_Autosave_/001_Autosave_e.htm
Inserting your own logo into Preparing printout header dathe printout header
ta [ 827]
Recalling (1): 3D line from
circle centers
Defining features by recall-
ing [ 497]
Recalling (2): one element in- Recalling a feature in its entireto a new coordinate system ty [ 4103]
1-26
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
003_e_Protkopf_aendern/
003_2_demo.htm
011_e_Rueckruf1/011_Rueckruf1.htm
012_e_Rueckruf2/012_e_Rueckruf2.htm
Video
Topic
File name
True Position (1): base align- Characteristic definition temment as reference, using the plates [ 517]
tangential element
015_e_DINPos1/015_e_DinPos1_CZLogo.htm
Setting filters and eliminating outliers
Evaluation parameters for features [ 542]
018_e_AusreisserFilter/
018_e_AusreisserFilter.htm
Stylus qualification: VAST

XXT with RDS
Qualification of styli [ 1125]
022_e_TasterEinmessen_XXT/
022_e_TasterEinmessen_XXT.htm
Angle schema for RDS quali- Automated creation of a stylus

fication with styli list
list for an RC system [ 1120]
Features: keep position
Duplicating features [ 48]
4_8Update_Movie12_e/4_8Update_Movie12.htm
4_8Update_Movie27_e/4_8Update_Movie18.htm
Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy

As a user of CALYPSO, you can access the Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy
on the internet even if your CALYPSO computer does not have internet
connection.
Within the Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy, Carl Zeiss provides you with
information on metrology, e.g. in the form of a glossary, teach media and
links to interesting pages.
However, it is possible to communicate with other users. Carl Zeiss provides you with the frame and you can discuss in forums all questions
regarding metrology and the use of the ZEISS programs.
Call
To access the Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy:

1 Select ? CZ IMT on the Internet Academy Web Login.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-27
The Academy Web Login window shows the internet address and
the registration code. At the first call, the button is called Register
and then it is called Open.
2 Open the access page of Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy:
If your CALYPSO computer is equipped with internet access: Click
Register or Open.
If you want to open the Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy on
another computer with internet access: Enter the indicated access
address (with registration code) in a Web Browser.
The access page of the Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy opens.
Your registration code is already entered under Register User.
3 Use a login name and a password to log in for the first time to the
Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy.
From now on you can log in at any time to the Carl Zeiss Metrology
Academy by using your selected login name and your password and
use the offered options.
ZEISS training block

You can order the training block from Carl Zeiss, Industrial Metrology
Division, D-73446 Oberkochen.
Order no.: 600331-8052-000
1-28
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1-29
Exiting CALYPSO
Exiting CALYPSO
Exiting CALYPSO
1 Select File Exit.
CALYPSO prompts you to save or reject the changes. CALYPSO then
closes the CALYPSO User Desk, logs you off in CALYPSO and displays the Log In window.
2 To leave a message for the following users, click the Memos button
and enter your message in the Memo Editor.
Note: If system login or automatic login is activated in the User notebook in the system settings, then this window is skipped when logging
in and logging off.
3 Click the Terminate button in the Log In window.
CALYPSO is terminated and all dialog boxes opened by CALYPSO (e.g.
Simulation, Events) are closed.
1-30
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Chapter
Working with the CAD window
.................................................................................................................

Basics about the CAD window ................................................................. 22
Buttons in the CAD window .................................................................... 27
Defining features in the CAD window .................................................... 210
Defining the display in the CAD window ................................................ 216
Displaying measuring results in the CAD window ................................... 227
Output of the CAD model ...................................................................... 232
Working with the CAD model ................................................................ 235
Working with the data of the CAD model .............................................. 244
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-1
Basics about the CAD window

Functions in the CAD window
The CAD window shows a CAD file containing the workpiece you want
to measure as well as other elements of the CMM.
NOTICE
The view requires a certain period of time to create itself. If you do not
require the display of the model in the CAD window, select
Showing the CAD model
A three-dimensional model of the loaded CAD file is shown. You can

supplement the data and set the model to obtain a photo-realistic mapping of the workpiece.
A workpiece shown in this way is called the CAD model. You can rotate,
move or enlarge the CAD model in the CAD window with the mouse.
Using a 3D mouse
For convenient rotation and displacement of the CAD model, you can also
use a 3D mouse, e.g. the SpaceNavigator by 3DConnexion.
NOTICE
Note that the 3D mouse cannot be used instead of the normal mouse
but must be connected in addition.
Interactive processing
If you use a measurement plan, the selected feature is shown on the CAD
model. You can process features and define new features.
The points to be probed are shown in the CAD window during the manual
CNC run.
Saving a CAD model
You can save the CAD model together with the measurement plan or
separately. If a workpiece is to be processed with different measurement
plans, you require less memory space by saving it separately.
Outputting the CAD

model as plot
You can include a saved CAD model in your evaluations and, for example,
output it as a plot (see in the Online Help under Outputting the CAD
window as a plot [ 233]).
Stylus simulation
If you have the Simulation option, you can display the stylus system in use
in the CAD window and trace the stylus movements during the CNC run
or its simulation (see Simulation (option) in the Online Help).
Showing the work area
You can define the representation of the CMM, the stylus changer rack
and the clamping device and save it as a work area. Depending on the
requirements of the corresponding measurement plan, you load the appropriate work area in addition.
CAD model in the CAD window

The CAD window shows a CAD file containing the workpiece you want
to measure as well as other elements of the CMM.
2-2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
A workpiece shown in this way is called the CAD model. You can rotate,
move or enlarge the CAD model in the CAD window - depending on the
type of view required.
NOTICE
The CAD window is only for viewing a CAD file. By editing the displayed
CAD model, you do not edit the CAD data on which it is based.
Load settings
If you do not need the complete CAD model with all functions, you can
reduce the amount of data and thus the loading time.
Depending on the setting, only one view of the CAD model or only the
number of geometric elements is loaded:
Saving a CAD model separately
You can modify the view of the CAD model but you cannot extract
any features from it.
In the display of the geometric elements, the CAD model is not shown.
You can save the CAD model together with the measurement plan or
separately. Define the type of saving in the Settings (CAD) window which
you open via CAD Settings. The measurement plan remembers
where the CAD model is stored and loads it from there into the CAD
window.
By saving a measurement plan, the CAD model is saved either together
with the measurement plan or not at all, depending on the setting.
If you save the CAD model separately, you can use it for several measurement plans. It is not possible to process this external CAD model in
an individual measurement plan.
NOTICE
You can save only one CAD model per measurement plan.
If you want to edit a workpiece which consists of several CAD files, you
must load all files before you save them together.
Work area in the CAD window

You can define and save the representation of the CMM, the stylus
changer rack and the clamping device as a work area.
You then load the appropriate work area in addition for the open measurement plan.
NOTICE
By saving the measurement plan, the work area is not saved.
Defining the work area
The elements of the work area as well as the workpiece are defined by
means of CAD data.
1 Select CAD Modify CAD Entities and activate the Hierarchy tab.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-3
2 Deselect the Part setting in the context menu of the CAD entity and
select Work Area.
Thus, the selected CAD entity is assigned to the work area.
Positioning CAD entities
The Position function allows you to compile your work area by means of
CAD entities and to position it on the base plate.
1 Select CAD Modify CAD Entities and activate the Positioning tab.
2 Set the offset and rotation of the desired CAD entity.
The Position function executes the positioning of the entity.
Use Repeat to carry out again the previous transformation.
Saving the work area
A defined work area must be saved to use it again.

1 Select Planner Save Work Area.
The work area is saved in <user directory>\workarea\CAD-workarea.
Loading the work area
You can add a defined and saved work area to your measurement plan.
1 Select Planner Load Work Area.
2 Select the desired work area and click Load.
Working in the CAD window

The illustration shows the CAD window and buttons used to manipulate
the model of the workpiece.
2-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CAD window
CAD icons
Most of the functions can also be selected from the CAD menu.
Switch to Feature Menu /
Define feature
Use mouse to
Rotate CAD
image
Show selected Features

only
Zoom Out
Rotate -> by
increments
Rotate <by
increments
Show
solid model
Render
Show all Calypso Features

Show edges
Working away from the

machine
Use mouse to
Pan CAD image
Select
Rotation mode
Select view
Zoom In
Use Mouse
to Zoom
Fit to CAD
window
The CAD file of the workpiece allows you to work your way through the
preparations without using the CMM. You use the mouse to define features and their probing points.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-5
You can also generate an entire measurement plan on the basis of the
CAD model.
Simulating probing with the mouse

You can define probing points and entire features with the mouse in the
CAD window by clicking the requested CAD window.
Defining probing points
in the CAD window
You can add further probing points to existing features. In this case, the
definition template of the corresponding feature must be open. The
probing points will be added to the existing point list.
Defining features in the

CAD window
You can also define new features in a plane of the part alignment with
probing points. The list of features has to be open for this purpose. The
mouse takes over the function of the stylus with the full functionality of
automatic feature recognition (Defining features using automatic feature recognition [ 414]).
Defining a coordinate
system in the CAD window
You can define coordinate systems in the CAD window if the CAD model
contains local coordinate systems (Defining a coordinate system in the
CAD window [ 214]).
2-6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Buttons in the CAD window

The table describes the dialog elements available in the CAD window and
their functions.
You can access additional information by opening this section in the Online Help.
Dialog element
Function
Switch to
Feature
Menu / Select/
Define/Extract mode
The selection list includes the following options:

Select Already Extracted Features, see Selecting features in the CAD model [ 210] in the Online Help
Define points, see Defining probing points in the CAD
window [ 211] in the Online Help
Define a Space Point, see Defining a space
point [ 212] in the Online Help
Define Edge Point, see Defining an edge
point [ 213] in the Online Help
Define Circle on a Cylinder, see Defining a circle on a
cylinder [ 213] in the Online Help
Define Line on a Plane, see Defining a 2D
line [ 213] in the Online Help
Define Rectangle, see Defining a rectangle [ 214] in
the Online Help
Distance check, see Checking the wall thickness and wall
deviation [ 5110]
Select Alignment, see Defining a coordinate system in
the CAD window [ 214]

Extract Features, see Extracting features [ 215] in the
Online Help
Define/Select Geometry, see Defining/selecting the geometry [ 215] in the Online Help
Show selected Features only
Shows only the selected features.
Show all Calypso

Features
Shows all features.
Select a feature from the list or in the CAD model (see in the
Online Help under Displaying individual features or all features [ 210]).
Use this icon if only selected features were displayed or the solid
or rendered model was shown (see Displaying individual features or all features [ 210]).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-7
Dialog element
Function
Show solid model
Shows a solid model if a CAD model is available. The solid

model can be rendered into a three-dimensional model with
illuminated sides by using the Render icon.
To return to a view of the features of the model, click Show
all Calypso Features (see Displaying the CAD model as
a solid [ 221]).
Show edges
Switches on or off the display of the edges in the CAD model.
Render
Toggles the view of the CAD model as a three-dimensional

solid with illuminated surfaces.
To create a solid model before rendering it, first click Show
solid model (see in the Online Help under Displaying the
CAD model as a solid [ 221]).
Use mouse to Pan

CAD image
Moves the model.

This icon remains enabled until you click either the Use
Mouse to Zoom or Use mouse to Rotate CAD image button (see in the Online Help under Moving the CAD
model in the CAD window [ 218]).
Use mouse to Rotate Rotates the model about the axis selected with the Select
CAD image
Rotation mode icon (see in the Online Help under Rotating the CAD model [ 219]).
Select Rotation
mode
Sets the rotational axis of the CAD model: X, Y, Z or free axis

(center of the CAD window).
To rotate the model, click the Use mouse to Rotate CAD
image button (see in the Online Help under Rotating the
CAD model [ 219]).
2-8
Rotate -> by increments
Rotates the CAD model one increment (according to the setting

in Settings (CAD)) clockwise about the selected axis (see in the
Online Help under Rotating the CAD model [ 219]). Default: 10 degrees.
Rotate <- by increments
Rotates the CAD model one increment (according to the setting

in Settings (CAD)) counterclockwise about the selected axis (see
in the Online Help under Rotating the CAD model [ 219]). Default: 10 degrees.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Dialog element
Function
View
Changes the view of the model.

You can load a view or choose one of the following views: isometric (or three-dimensional), +X or -X (left or right side), +Y
or -Y (front or back), +Z or -Z (top or bottom).
The default view is isometric. Choosing the isometric view also
resets the model to the home position (see in the Online Help
under Changing or resetting the model perspective [ 219]).
Zoom Out
The view zooms out.

The factor can be set under Settings (CAD) (see in the Online
Help under Zooming the CAD model in or out [ 218]).
Zoom In
Zooms in the view.

The factor can be set under Settings (CAD) (see in the Online
Use Mouse to Zoom
Zooms in an area of the model.

This icon remains enabled until you click either the Use
mouse to Pan CAD image or Use mouse to Rotate
CAD image button (see in the Online Help under Zooming
the CAD model in or out [ 218]).
Fit to CAD window
Fits the CAD model into the CAD window (see in the Online
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-9
Defining features in the CAD window

Selecting and defining features in the
CAD window
If you work away from the machine or without the CMM, you can view
existing features, add probing points to them and define new features.
To do so, use the menu items for the selection and definition in the CAD
toolbar.
Selecting features in the CAD model

You can select individual features in the model view and have them displayed on their own (the rest of the model will be hidden), or you can
define characteristics for them.
1 Make sure that the features are shown in the measurement plan area.
2 For selection and definition, select Select Already Extracted Features from the selection list.
3 Click a line of the feature you want to define.
The color of the lines of this feature is changed. The feature is highlighted
in the list of features.
Displaying individual features or all

features
If many features are defined for a workpiece, you can have an individual
feature shown to you and the rest of the model hidden.
1 Select the feature.
2-10
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 Click the Show selected Features only icon.

The selected feature is shown on its own. Click the icon again to
smooth the lines.
The illustrations show a model with a highlighted feature before and
after you have clicked on the Show selected Features only button.
3 To return to the view of the entire model, click Show all Calypso
Features.
Defining probing points in the CAD

window
This option is suitable if you wish to define features away from the machine or if the workpiece is not available to you when you are defining
the measurement plan.
You place one probing point after the other until CALYPSO recognizes
the feature.
Defining a feature with probing points

1 For selection and definition, select Define points from the selection
list.
2 Select the stylus (see Preparing the stylus system [ 315]).
3 Click the locations in the CAD window at which you would like to place
probing points.
A probing point will be produced each time you click on the model in
the CAD window.
By holding down the shift key at the same time, the probed point will
be projected onto the nominal height of the feature.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-11
The automatic feature recognition allows CALYPSO to select automatically the correct definition template and to fill it with values.
4 Click OK to confirm the definition of the feature.
The new feature is included in the list of features.
As soon as you run the measurement plan automatically, the CMM will
move precisely to these probing points.
Defining a space point

This option is suitable for defining features away from the machine.
Probing is also possible without the CMM.
Features must be displayed in the measurement plan area before you can
directly define the point in the CAD window with the mouse. The point
must lie on a feature shown in the CAD model.
1 For selection and definition, select Define a Space Point from the
selection list.
2 Click the location in the CAD window that is to define the point.
2-12
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The PointX feature is included in the list of features. X represents here the
serial number of the defined points in your measurement plan.
Defining an edge point

This function allows you to define an edge point for the edge measurement.
1 For selection and definition, select Define Edge Point from the selection list.
2 Click a plane on the CAD model.
The point closest to the selected point on the edge of the selected
plane is inserted as an edge point in the list of features. Any additional
parameters must be entered in the definition template of the feature.
Defining a circle
This option is particularly suitable for defining features away from the
machine.
Conditions:
Features must be displayed in the measurement plan area before
you can directly define the circle in the CAD window with the
mouse.
1 For selection and definition, select Define Circle on a Cylinder
from the selection list.
2 Click the depiction of a cylindrical or tapered bore or an external cylinder in the CAD window.
The CircleX feature is included in the list of features. X represents here
the serial number of the defined circles in your measurement plan.
Defining a 2D line
Conditions:
you can directly define the 2D line in the CAD window with the
mouse.
1 For selection and definition, select Define Line on a Plane from
the selection list.
2 Draw a line while holding down the left mouse button.
The 2-D LineX feature is included in the list of features. X represents here
the serial number of the defined 2D lines in your measurement plan.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-13
Defining a rectangle
Conditions:
you can directly define the rectangle in the CAD window with the
mouse.
1 For selection and definition, select Define Rectangle from the selection list.
2 Click the depiction of a rectangular body in the CAD window.
3 Select a point of the body.
- or If the specification of an individual point is not sufficient, select another
point.
The RectangleX feature is included in the list of features. X represents here the serial number of the defined rectangle in your measurement plan.
Defining features for the distance check

Conditions:
you can define two space points suitable for the distance check in
the CAD window with the mouse.
1 For selection and definition, select Distance check from the selection list.
2 Click the location in the CAD model at which you would like to measure and check the distance.
This must be a suitable point at which the opposing surfaces are parallel (at least locally).
Two features, PointX and PointX+1, appear in the list of features. X represents here the serial number of the defined points in your measurement
plan.
You must create the appropriate characteristic in order to use these two
points for the distance check (see Checking the wall thickness and wall
deviation [ 5110]).
Defining a coordinate system in the CAD

window
This function makes it possible to extract a coordinate system from the
CAD model and transfer it to the measurement plan.
2-14
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1 For selection and definition, choose Select Alignment from the selection list.
The CAD model shows all its coordinate systems with offset and rotations.
2 Click the desired coordinate system.
A new coordinate system with already assigned special functions is
added to the measurement plan.
Extracting features
Features must be displayed in the measurement plan area before you can
directly define the plane, cone and cylinder features in the CAD window
with the mouse.
1 For selection and definition, select Extract Features from the selection list.
2 Make sure that features or characteristics are shown in the measurement plan area.
3 Click a plane, cone or cylinder of the model in the CAD window.
If you produced a plane, you will have to define a measurement strategy for this plane (see Measurement strategies for features [ 4160]).
The feature with the addition X after the name is included in the list of
features. X represents here the serial number of the defined features in
your measurement plan.
Defining/selecting the geometry

The Define/Select Geometry option is particularly suitable for defining features away from the machine. Combine the Select Already Extracted Features and Extract Features options so that you do not
have to switch between these options.
1 Make sure that the features are shown in the measurement plan area.
2 Select from the CAD buttons the Define/Select Geometry mode.
3 Click a plane, cone or cylinder of the model in the CAD window.
If the feature has already been created, it is called and selected in
the measurement plan area.
Otherwise, CALYPSO creates the feature. You can rename the feature if required (F2).
4 Define the measurement strategy for new features (see Measurement strategies for features [ 4160]).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-15
Defining the display in the CAD window

Defining the amount of data to be
loaded and the CAD view
Defining the amount of
data to be loaded
The CAD window is where you view a CAD file containing the workpiece
and the work area. With the load settings, you set the amount of CAD
data to be loaded [ 217]. If you do not need all the functions of the
CAD model, you can load the complete CAD model or only some of the
CAD data. This way the loading time is reduced considerably.
Hiding the view completely
If you do not require the display of the model in the CAD window, select
Changing the view
CALYPSO is set up so that the CAD model always appears in a perspective

view. You can change the view or enlarge or reduce the model size.
Saving the view
A CAD model can be saved [ 223] together with your defining

parameters and restored at any time. The CAD model must be saved before you can output this CAD model as a plot [ 233].
Defining the view of the CAD model

There are several settings possible for the display of the CAD model in
the CAD window:
1 Select CAD CAD Model Control <menu item>.
Menu item
Function
Show Silhouette
Displays the silhouettes of the features.

Example: A cylinder is represented by two circular sections. If the features are displayed with silhouette, you can see form lines connecting
these two circles.
Note: With large models, displaying silhouettes leads to long computing times and is switched off when loading a CAD model.
Points
Shows the points defined in the CAD model and selected in the list
of features.
Always display points
Permanently shows all points defined in the CAD model.
Show PMIs from CAD model (Only for CAD models with extractable form and location data):
Switches the display of the form and location icons on and off.
CT Point Cloud
Shows the loaded CT point cloud (Metrotomography option).
CAD Model
Shows the CAD model. (Default: enabled).
Display Clearance Plane
Shows the dimensions of the clearance planes in shaded form over

the CAD model.
Highlight selected Feature(s) Shows the features selected in the list of features (default: enabled).
2-16
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Menu item
Function
View faces from either side
Shows also the opposite side of faces.

Activate this function if the normals show the wrong direction to
ensure that all faces are externally visible.
Hide CAD View
Hides the CAD view.
Show Model Coordinates
The coordinates of the point of the model surface on which the

mouse pointer is positioned are displayed in the upper left corner of
the CAD window.
Show Probe Object
(Manual measurement) Shows a stylus or a reflector at the stylus position.
Display Form and Location
(Only for CAD models with extractable form and location data):
Shows the extracted form and location data in the form of small
banners located next to the features.
Comment
Opens the Show Text dialog box where you determine the contents
and representation of an additional text line. When outputting the
CAD view as a plot, this text is also output.
NOTICE
Most of these settings can also be made via CAD Settings in the
Settings (CAD) window under Model Display.
Controlling the loading of the CAD

model
If you do not need the complete CAD model with all functions, you can
reduce the amount of data and thus the loading time.
1 Select File CAD Load settings....
2 Select the desired setting in the Load Settings window.
Model: the entire CAD model is loaded. You can use all functions
of the CAD model.
Note: This is the only option which makes it possible to edit or extend
the measurement plan!
No Model: only the features of the CAD model are loaded. Only
individual, unlinked features are shown in the CAD window.
Model View: only one view of the CAD model is loaded. You can
rotate, move or enlarge the view of the CAD model. You cannot
extract any features.
Only surfaces used: only the features of the surfaces used are
loaded. Only individual, unlinked surfaces are shown in the CAD
window.
3 Click Close to save the setting.
The settings will take effect the next time you load a CAD model.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-17
Moving the CAD model in the CAD

window
With the Use mouse to Pan CAD image function, you can move the
CAD model in the CAD window. This is the default function that remains
active until you click Zoom in or Rotate.
1 Click the Use mouse to Pan CAD image icon.
2 Drag the model to the desired position.
Zooming the CAD model in or out

CALYPSO offers various options to zoom the CAD model view in and out.
You can zoom the CAD model in and out at any time.
Continuously zooming in and out

1 Position the mouse in the CAD window.
2 When using a mouse with wheel, rotate the wheel of the mouse.
- or With a three-button mouse, hold down the middle mouse button and
drag the mouse over the model.
With a two-button mouse, hold down the right mouse button together with the Ctrl key and drag the mouse over the model.
To zoom out, drag the mouse away from the model.
To zoom in, drag the mouse towards the model.
The CAD model is zoomed in or out in microsteps.
For incremental zooming in and out, you must set the increments for
zooming out/in in CAD Settings under Handling.
Incrementally zooming in and out
1 Click the Zoom in or Zoom out icon.

With every mouse click, the CAD model is zoomed out/in by the preset
factor.
Displaying a relevant portion on the entire screen

1 Click the Use mouse to Zoom icon.
A magnifier is displayed as mouse pointer.
2 Drag a rectangle over the desired area.
The size of the model is adjusted so that it is completely visible in the
CAD window.
2-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
This mode remains active until you switch to the Use mouse to Pan
CAD image or Rotate mode.
Showing the CAD model on the entire screen

1 Click the Fit icon.
Changing or resetting the model

perspective
You can load a saved CAD view or define the direction of the view.
Changing the view of the CAD model

1 Select the desired view in the View selection list.
You have a choice of the following settings:
Load View
Isometric (three-dimensional)
+X or -X (from left or right)
+Y or -Y (from the front or rear)
+Z or -Z (from the bottom or top)
1 Click View and select Isometric (three-dimensional view) to reset

the view.
Rotating the CAD model

You can rotate the CAD model about a selected axis or freely about any
rotation point.
The default setting is free rotation and the rotation point in the center
of the CAD window. You can change the rotation point if no feature is
open.
NOTICE
The step width for rotating the CAD model must be set in Settings (CAD)
under Handling.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-19
Rotating the model freely in space

1 With a three-button mouse: Hold down the right mouse button and
move the mouse.
- or With a two-button mouse: Hold down the right mouse button together with the ALT key and move the mouse.
Defining the rotation
point
You determine the rotation point via the context menu or the menu:
Determining the rotation point via the context menu

1 Select Define rotation point On in the context menu of the CAD
window.
2 Click the point that is to represent the new rotation point.
Determining the rotation point via the menu

1 Select CAD View Define Rotation Point.
2 Click the point in the CAD window that is to represent the new rotation point.
Resetting the rotation point to the center of the CAD

window
1 Click the Fit icon.
Defining the rotational axis

1 Select the desired rotational axis in the Select Rotation mode selection list.
Rotating the model by any angle about the axis

1 Click the Use mouse to Rotate CAD image icon.
The mouse pointer changes from an arrow to a hand.
2 Drag the mouse in the desired direction in the CAD window.
Note: The Use mouse to Rotate CAD image icon remains active
until you click Use mouse to Pan CAD image or Use Mouse to
Zoom.
Rotating the model clockwise or counterclockwise

about the axis
2-20
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1 Click the icon with the desired direction of rotation.

Each time you click the icon, the CAD model is rotated 10 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise about the selected axis.
Displaying the CAD model as a solid

You can display a model as a three-dimensional image with illuminated
side faces if a CAD model is loaded:
1 Click the Render icon.
Click Render again to return to the line drawing.
Splitting the CAD window into several

areas
You can split the CAD window into four areas. In each of these areas, the
CAD model is shown from a different perspective. Thus you maintain your
overview, e.g. if the workpiece is very complex.
Splitting the CAD window

1 Select CAD View Split View.
The window is then split as follows:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-21
The upper right area is your CAD work area. The three smaller areas each
show the CAD model from a different axis direction.
Changing the split

1 Click the axis to be moved and zoom the corresponding windows in
or out.
Undoing the split

1 Remove the check mark in front of Split View.
2-22
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Saving and loading the CAD view

You can save the current view of the CAD model under a separate name.
This function allows you to toggle between various CAD views quickly.
Example: The CAD window displays a rendered view of your model (seen
in +X direction) that you require for practice. Another view shows a wire
frame model, with visible feature names, from a particular perspective.
Save both views under different names to toggle from one view to the
other quickly.
NOTICE
The CAD model must be saved under a name before it can be output as
a plot.
Saving the CAD view

1 Make sure that the CAD model is displayed in the CAD window as you
would like to save it.
2 Select CAD View Save View.
3 Enter a name for the view, e.g. new_view.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-23
Liste of saved CAD

views
Entry field for new

names
A default view is automatically saved under model for each measurement plan. You will see this view each time a measurement plan is
loaded.
4 Confirm the input with Enter.
5 Click OK.
Loading a CAD view

1 Select CAD View Load View.
2 Select the desired view.
3 Click OK.
If you do not see anything at first, click the Show all Calypso Features icon.
Deleting a CAD view

1 Select CAD View Load View.
2 Select the name of the view you would like to delete.
2-24
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3 In the context menu, select Delete.
Deleting a CAD model in the CAD

window
You can delete the CAD model displayed in the CAD window.
1 Select CAD View Delete.
Redrawing the CAD model

Displaying CAD models requires a large amount of processing power. It
is possible that an action will not be performed or shown in the CAD
window.
Redrawing the CAD model will cause the computer to regenerate the
CAD model from the beginning. This function causes actions that might
have become stuck in the computer to be executed.
1 Select CAD View Redraw CAD Model.
Saving the CAD view settings

You can change the view of the CAD window and set further parameters
for the CAD window in the Settings window.
Display of the view
Display of boundary curves
Display of grid lines
Use of colors
Display of (scanning) technologies used
Display of texts
Display of 2D and/or 3D objects
Zoom factor and rotation angle
Storage location for the CAD model
Conversion settings
Extraction settings
Outputting and printing the CAD views
Displaying the CAD program window
Changing settings
1 Select CAD Settings.
2 Select in the tree view in the Settings (CAD) window to the left the
desired branch to open the tab.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-25
3 Make the changes in the right-hand area.

4 If necessary, define your changes as defaults for new measurement
plans.
5 Click OK.
2-26
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Displaying measuring results in the CAD window
Displaying measuring results in the CAD

window
Display options in the CAD window
As soon as characteristics have been evaluated and calculated for a measurement plan, you can display the measuring results in the CAD window.
You can display the measured actual points or banners with the result
data of the characteristics.
The illustration shows a CAD window containing both the actual points
of a feature (with arrows) and all data from the associated characteristic.
Make the settings in the Results Presentation window which you

open via CAD Evaluation.
See also:
Displaying actual points [ 228]
Displaying characteristics [ 228]
Displaying features [ 228]
Modifying a representation [ 229]
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-27
Displaying actual points

As soon as a feature or characteristic has been measured and evaluated,
you can display the actual points in the CAD window.
Show Actual Points

1 Select CAD Evaluation.
2 Make the settings on the Actuals tab in the Results Presentation window.
3 Close the window.
The CAD model will be updated as soon as you highlight the characteristic
of a feature. If this does not happen, there might not be any actual points
yet.
Displaying characteristics
As soon as a characteristic has been evaluated, you can display all relevant
data of the characteristic (e.g. tolerances or deviation) in the CAD window.
2 Select on the Characteristics index card in the Results Presentation window the data to be displayed.
3 Close the window.
of a feature. If not, the reason might be that no measuring results have
been calculated yet.
Displaying features
As soon as a characteristic has been evaluated, you can display all relevant
data of the corresponding characteristic (e.g. tolerances or deviation) in
the CAD window.
Displaying the results of a feature

2 Select on the Features tab in the Results Presentation window
the data to be displayed.
3 Close the window.
of a feature. If not, the reason might be that no measuring results have
been calculated yet.
2-28
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Modifying a representation
As soon as a characteristic has been evaluated, you can modify the measured data, e.g. invert the deviations or load and use the corrections.
Modifying results
2 Select on the Modification tab in the Results Presentation window the data to be modified and saved.
3 Close the window.
Banners in the CAD window

You can show the measuring values and measuring results on the workpiece in the CAD window by means of banners. You can define the orientation, division, contents and representation of these banners and save
them with the CAD view.
General definitions
Make the general definitions for the CAD view and the banners on the
three tabs Actuals, Characteristics and Features in the Results
Presentation window. These settings can be saved as own CAD view.
The banners are displayed as soon as you have selected measurement
plan features in the measurement plan area or clicked them in the CAD
window.
You can define individually the orientation, division, contents and representation of the banners in the CAD window. To do so, use the context
menu of the banners.
Defining the contents of the banners in the CAD window

1 Select one or more banners using the multiple selection method if
necessary.
2 Select Properties from the context menu of any banner.
The CAD View Parameters dialog box appears on the screen.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-29
3 Enter the contents of the banners under Banner.

4 Define the representation of the banners under View.
These changes have an immediate effect on the selected banners.
5 Click Apply to all to accept the changes for all banners.
NOTICE
By clicking Apply to all, the changes are entered immediately in the
Results Presentation window.
With CAD View Save View or with Save view in the Results
Presentation window, you can save and reload them.
Defining the positions and orientation of the banners

in the CAD window
1 To define the positions of the banners, select in the context menu of
any banner the Positioning function and one of the submenu items.
Set to feature position
Set to border
2 To define the orientation of the banners, select in the context menu
of any banner the Alignment function and one of the submenu
items.
Left / Middle / Right
Top / Center / Bottom
3 To define the spacing of the banners, select in the context menu of
any banner the Spacing function and one of the submenu items.
Equal horizontal spacing
Increase /Decrease horizontal spacing
2-30
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Remove horizontal spacing

Equal vertical spacing
Increase /Decrease vertical spacing
Remove vertical spacing
NOTICE
With CAD View Save View or with Save view in the Results
Presentation window, you can save and reload the changes made.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-31
Output of the CAD model

Output methods
Current view
You can print the CAD model in the current view [ 232]. Only the
currently visible area will be printed.
Saved views
You can define and save different representations in the CAD window
(zoom factor, scope of model, rotation angle, offset, magnification factor
etc.) as your own views. You can output this drawn model with spatial
effect in the CNC run.
Output via the CAD Representation utility [ 232]

The CAD Presentation utility allows you to output the set CAD
view in the selected format on the selected media in the CNC run.
Output as a plot in the characteristic [ 233]

You activate the output of the CAD window as a plot in exactly the
same way as the form plot using the Graphic icon in the definition
template of a characteristic.
Printing the CAD model

You can print the CAD model in the current view. Only the currently visible
area will be printed.
1 Select CAD View Print CAD Model.
Printing will start as soon as you have made a selection.
Outputting the CAD window

You can output any view of the CAD window in the CNC run or directly.
To do so, a CAD Presentation utility must be added to the measurement
plan.
1 Use CAD CAD Presentation to add a CAD-Presentation utility to the list of characteristics.
Alternatively, you can also click the icon in the Results Presentation window to add a CAD-Presentation utility in which the current CAD view is already preset.
2 Double click to open the definition template for the CAD presentation.
2-32
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3 Define the output method (screen, printer).

4 Select the format of the output (portrait or landscape) by means of a
format file.
5 Select from the list the CAD view to be represented.
6 Click Plot to output the presentation immediately if necessary.
The selected CAD view is output on the selected media (screen, printer)
during the CNC run.
Outputting the CAD window as a plot

You can freeze the model in the CAD window and output it as a plot.
1 Create the desired model in the CAD window.
2 Select CAD Evaluation and define the result presentation in the
CAD window in the Results Presentation window.
3 Save the associated parameters with CAD View Save View.
Calypso saves the workpiece name,scope of the model, offset, rotation angle, zoom factor and magnification factor etc.
4 Activate the Graphic check box in the definition template of the
characteristic.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-33
5 Click Graphic in the definition template of the characteristic and select the name of the CAD model as the name of the graphic file.
Once the measurement plan has been completed, the set CAD model will
be output as a plot during evaluation of the respective characteristic.
2-34
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Working with the CAD model

Ways of working with the CAD model
You can work with the CAD model as described below:
You can change the geometric position of the model with respect
to the base alignment [ 235].
You can modify the CAD model [ 235], i.e. transform, position
or mirror the model.
You can create features from the CAD model [ 238], i.e. create
new or modified CAD entities and features.
Transforming the CAD model

You can transform the CAD model, i.e. shift and rotate it in the base
alignment. This is necessary if the position of the CAD model does not
coincide with the selected base alignment.
1 Select CAD Modification CAD Model Transformation.
The CAD Model Transformation window is opened.
2 If you want to shift the CAD model, enter the coordinates of the
translation vector in the Translation group.
3 If you want to rotate the CAD model, select the space axis in the
Rotation group and enter the rotation angle.
4 Click Apply.
Modifying the CAD model

Modify CAD Model window
You work with the parts and elements of the CAD model in the Modify
CAD Model window.
On the Hierarchy index card, the hierarchically ordered structural view
of all elements (bodies and surfaces) of the CAD model is helpful.
In this window, you can
Edit CAD entities (one or several entities) [ 236],
Edit the hierarchy of the CAD model [ 236],
Edit point clouds [ 236],
Edit solid bodies [ 237],
Mirror the entire CAD model [ 238]
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-35
Editing CAD entities

Editing the CAD model
1 Select CAD Modify CAD Entities.
The Modify CAD Model window is opened.
2 Select the CAD entity you want to edit in the CAD window or on the
Hierarchy tab (multiple selection with the CTRL key).
3 Activate the Edit tab.
The symbols whose actions can be applied to the entity are activated
on the tab.
You can delete the entities or reverse their normal vectors.
4 Click the corresponding symbol.
5 Click Close to end editing of the CAD model.
Editing the hierarchy

You can create new groups of features and hide groups or features in the
CAD model. Thus you can view the CAD model, if necessary, and show
structures that are usually not visible.
2 Activate the Hierarchy tab.
3 To add a group: Select Add Group in the context menu.
A new group (desk) is added to the hierarchy.
4 To define the group: Select Define Group in the context menu.
In the Desk Definition window, you can add CAD entities to the
group by clicking them in the CAD window or by extracting them from
the CAD model.
5 To hide a feature: Select the desired feature in the structure tree and
select Hide Feature in the context menu.
The feature will not be shown in the CAD window.
6 To show a feature again: Select the desired feature in the structure
tree and select Show Feature again in the context menu.
The feature will be shown again in the CAD window.
7 To remove a feature from the CAD model: Select the desired feature
in the structure tree and select Delete in the context menu.
The feature is removed from the CAD model.
Editing a point cloud
2-36
You can edit point clouds loaded via files.

61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1 Select CAD Creating features.

2 Activate the Hierarchy tab in the Create feature window.
3 Click the point cloud in the tree view and select Edit in the context
menu.
4 Make your changes in the Edit window.

5 Click Close.
Editing solid bodies in the CAD model

You can edit solid bodies.
The Modify CAD Model window is opened.
2 Select the entity you want to edit in the CAD window or on the Hierarchy tab (multiple selection with the CTRL key).
3 Activate the Edit body tab.
on the tab.
You can delete the entity or entities or reverse the normal vectors
of all surfaces.
You can (logically) combine several solid bodies.
You can name the solid body.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-37
You can choose the color of the solid body.

4 Click the corresponding symbol.
Mirroring a CAD model

You can mirror the CAD model.
2 Activate the Edit body tab in the Modify CAD Model window.
3 Under Mirror on plane, select the coordinate plane of the base
alignment on which the model is to be mirrored.
Next to it on the left-hand side, a schematic representation of the mirroring type is shown.
4 Click Apply.
The entire CAD model is mirrored on the selected plane.
Creating features on the CAD model

The Create feature window appears on the
screen.
You can create new CAD entities using the existing entities in the Create
feature window. You can create planes, cylinders, cones, circles, ellipses, slots, rectangles, lines, curves, points and point grids.
The new entities appear in the list of features and as new CAD entities in
the CAD model.
Various options are available on three index cards:
Create CAD entities from existing CAD entities [ 238],
Create a curve with planar section [ 241] or
Create a 3D curve by means of an intersection with a cylinder [ 242],
Create new elements from a space-point grid [ 240].
Creating new entities in the CAD model

The Create feature window will open.
Hierarchy tab (multiple selection with the CTRL key).
3 Activate the Creation tab.
2-38
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Desired element
on the tab.
Procedure
Prerequisites/result
Plane, Cylinder,
Cone
The corresponding surface element

Click the Geometry icon and
then the icon for plane, cylinder or appears in the measurement plan.
cone.
Circle
Click the symbol on the left and, if A feature with one or more edges
must be highlighted (e.g. a line).
necessary, enter an Offset.
If full circle has been activated, the
full circle will also be created when
clicking a circular arc.
Ellipse
Click the symbol on the left and, if A feature with one or more edges
must be highlighted (e.g. a line).
Slot
Click the symbol on the left and, if A feature with at least four edges
must be highlighted.
Rectangle
Click the symbol on the left and, if A feature with four edges must be
highlighted.
Line
Click the symbol on the left.
An edge must be marked.
Multiple creation
Click the symbol on the left.
Creates all selected or marked elements in one cycle.
Curve
Click the Curve symbol and enter The vector normal to the plane of
the desired number of points under intersection is automatically calculated for each point.
Points.
By activating Per Segment, each
segment has the same number of
points.
Point
Click the CAD model. The computed coordinates appear in the input
fields. You can correct the coordinates subsequently or enter approximate values from the outset.
The entered coordinates are projected orthogonally onto the CAD

surface. The position of the point
feature represents the perpendicular base point.
Select the point mode. Click the

Point symbol.
Simultaneously, the normal for the

point feature is computed from the
CAD model.
Generating a new 3D curve from an intersection

61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-39

Hierarchy tab (multiple selection with the ALT key).
Use the mouse to draw a rectangle and mark all entities in the rectangle.
3 Activate the Points tab.
4 Select the Curve option under Feature to be created and confirm
with OK.
The new 3D curve is created and added to the list of features.
Creating a space-point grid in the CAD model

You can create space points in a defined grid.
2 In the CAD model or on the Hierarchy index card, highlight the surface on which you want to create space points.
4 Select the type of feature you want to create from the points.
2-40
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5 Enter parameters for creating the space-point grid.

6 Click Create.
The new space points are shown in the CAD model.
7 If you would like to adjust the parameters based on the display: Click
Delete and repeat the steps after step 4.
8 To add the displayed space points to the list of features: Click Create
Feature.
The feature selected above is created from the space points in the CAD
model.
Creating a curve in the CAD window using the

unknown cut method
You can create a curve in the CAD window using an intersection with the
CAD model. The curve is added to the list of features as a 3D curve.
2 Activate the Intersection tab in the Create feature window.
3 Click Plane and define the intersecting surface by specifying the center, normal vector and expansion.
The intersecting surface is symmetrical about the center.
4 Click Intersection.
As an intermediate step, CALYPSO creates the actual intersection contour as a CAD entity.
5 Activate the Hierarchy tab and highlight the intersection contour.
The symbols whose actions can be applied to the intersection curve
are now activated on the index card.
7 Plane, cylinder, cone: Click the Geometry symbol and on one of the
symbols for plane, cylinder or cone to create the corresponding surface
element.
8 Circle, ellipse, slot, rectangle, line: Click one of the symbols on the left
and, if necessary, enter an Offset to create the corresponding feature.
Circle: A feature with one or more edges must be highlighted (e.g.
a line).
Ellipse: A feature with one or more edges must be highlighted (e.g.
a line).
Slot: A feature with at least four edges must be highlighted.
Rectangle: A feature with four edges must be highlighted.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-41
Line: An edge must be marked.

9 Curve: Click the Curve symbol.
The curve is inserted into the measurement plan with the number of
points specified under Points.
The vector normal to the CAD surface is automatically calculated for
each point.
103D Curve: Click the Curve symbol.
The curve's vectors from the CAD surface you clicked will be adopted
in the measurement plan with the number of points specified under
Points.
The vector normal to the plane of intersection is automatically calculated for each point.
The 3D curve is added to the list of CAD entities and to the list of
features.
11Click Close to end editing of the CAD model.
Creating a curve in the CAD window by means

of an intersection with a cylinder
You can create a curve in the CAD window by intersecting a feature with
a cylinder. The curve is added to the list of features as a 3D curve.
2 Activate the Intersection tab in the Create feature window.
3 Click Cylinder and define the lateral surface by specifying the center,
axis vector (under Normal Vector) and expansion (height and diameter).
The intersecting surface is symmetrical about the center.
4 Click Intersection.
As an intermediate step, CALYPSO creates the actual intersection contour as a CAD entity.
5 Activate the Hierarchy tab and highlight the intersection contour.
The symbols whose actions can be applied to the intersection curve
are activated on the index card.
7 Circle, ellipse, slot, rectangle, line: Click one of the symbols on the left
and, if necessary, enter an Offset to create the corresponding feature.
Circle: A feature with one or more edges must be highlighted (e.g.
a line).
Ellipse: A feature with one or more edges must be highlighted (e.g.
a line).
2-42
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Slot: A feature with at least four edges must be highlighted.

Rectangle: A feature with four edges must be highlighted.
Line: An edge must be marked.
8 3D Curve: Click the Curve symbol.
The curve's vectors from the CAD surface you clicked will be adopted
in the measurement plan with the number of points specified under
Points.
The vector normal to the plane of intersection is automatically calculated for each point.
The 3D curve is added to the list of CAD entities and to the list of
features.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-43
Working with the data of the CAD model

CAD model and CAD file
The CAD model contains a large volume of data all features and their
coordinates are stored in the model.
You can save this data in a CAD file [ 247], and reload and edit this
data.
You can import CAD files to CALYPSO and use them to filter out
features for a measurement plan [ 244].
As this process takes a longer time in the case of complex CAD models,
it is possible in this case to convert CAD files in the background in
advance [ 416]. Converted files can be loaded more quickly.
Creating a new measurement plan from

a CAD file
If a workpiece is available in the form of a CAD file, you can define a
complete, automatically executable measurement plan in the CAD window without the need to use the CMM.
As the tasks involved in this process are very diverse, only the general
procedure will be described below. However, the individual steps include
references to more detailed information.
1 Open a new measurement plan [ 33].
2 Extract the features from the CAD file [ 415].
3 (Only with Catia V5, Unigraphics and ProE) If the CAD file also contains
information on form, location and size:
Extract the information on form and location and use the information to generate characteristics [ 59].
4 Create a new base alignment [ 324].
5 Create the clearance planes [ 360] if the measurement plan is
to be executed automatically.
Bear in mind that some of the features do not yet possess specific probing
points because they were adopted from the CAD file. The section Defining probing points in the CAD window [ 211] describes how to define probing points in the CAD window.
If you want to set the same technology for all features of a certain type
(2D line, plane, circle, cylinder or cone), select CAD Filter Set
Default Measurement Strategy and make the necessary settings
in the Strategy defaults window.
2-44
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Updating a loaded CAD model

You have created a measurement plan from a CAD file and you now have
a newer version of the CAD data. In the case of slight changes or additions, you can import the CAD file as supplement for the existing CAD
model and accept or ignore the changes.
Conditions:
The strategy is defined for all features to be measured in the measurement plan.
1 Open the measurement plan.
2 Select CAD CAD File Load.
3 Select in the Open CAD File window the new CAD model belonging
to the measurement plan.
4 Select CAD CAD File CAD Model Comparison.
5 Enter in the CAD Modification List a distance in mm to be used
as tolerance criterion.
6 Click Comparison.
CALYPSO compares the entities of the new CAD model with the probing points of the features in the measurement plan. The features,
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-45
whose probing points are separated from the corresponding CAD entity less than the specified distance, are shown in the list under Features inside tolerance.
Under Features outside tolerance, all features are shown that
are outside the specified distance to a CAD entity.
7 Click the desired entity in the modification list.
In the CAD window, the feature from the measurement plan to which
the CAD entity marked in the list can be adapted is highlighted in color
and the CAD model is rotated so that the feature is visible. If you ticked
the Show strategy when selecting Feature check box under
Strategy in the Settings (CAD) window, then the strategy of the
feature is also highlighted in color.
Note: Double-click the line to open the definition template for the
feature. You can compare the element's plan values with the actually
measured values. Similarly, the next surface is highlighted in the CAD
window. This ensures that CALYPSO has recognized the right feature.
8 To adapt the feature to the new data of the corresponding CAD entity,
click with the mouse the feature in the CAD window.
- or Mark in the modification list those lines that you want to transfer
to the measurement plan and click Apply.
The adapted feature is shown in italics in the modification list and
moved to the end of the list Features inside tolerance.
If the feature could not be adapted, it is shown in italics in the modification list and moved to the end of the list Features outside tolerance.
9 Click Close to terminate the comparison.
10Save the measurement plan.
Remedying problems in the CAD model

display
If your CAD model cannot be displayed in rendered form, it was not possible to import all entities of the model.
The CAD model will have to be revised in this case. During revision, all
CAD source files are once again converted to the ACIS format.
1 Select CAD CAD File Automatic Healing.
2 Activate the check boxes for the desired healing steps in the Healer
Settings window.
2-46
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Simplification: Free form surfaces are converted to simpler geometric objects (cones, spheres, cylinder, planes). You can modify
the tolerance.
Stitching: Free surfaces, i.e. surfaces that do not belong to bodies, are joined to bodies.
Build Geometry: The entire CAD model is healed geometrically.
Errors and inconsistencies are corrected. This includes the Simplification and Stitching functions.
Note: This process can take some time to complete, especially for larger CAD models.
Correct boundary curves: Gaps in the boundary curves of surfaces and sections which are not exactly aligned are corrected.
Note: In most cases, this setting is sufficient for a successful healing.

3 Press OK to confirm.
Saving the CAD model as a CAD file

However, you can save the CAD model independently of the measurement plan in a separate file and edit it with CAD programs.
1 Select CAD CAD File Save.
2 Select the CAD format:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-47
Format
File name
ACIS
*.sat
ACIS
*.sab
IGES
*.igs
VDAFS
*.vda
STEP
*.stp
CATIA
*.model
PARASOLID
*.x_t
STL
*.stl
3 Enter the target directory and the file name.

4 Click Save.
CAD models consisting of several parts

Work area and workpiece
You can structure a work area with work area elements such as clamping
devices and pallets, and position the CAD model of a workpiece in this
area. Thus, you simulate the arrangement of the work area elements and
the workpiece in the real measuring situation.
Assigning CAD entities
When running the measurement plan, CALYPSO distinguishes between

the work area and the workpiece. This is why you must specify in the case
of CAD models which consist of several CAD entities for each CAD entity
whether the entity is a work area element or the workpiece.
CAD entities with the Part element assignment are considered as a

workpiece. The CAD entity is saved in the measurement plan.
CAD entities with the Work area element assignment are considered as part of the work area. The CAD entity is not saved in the
measurement plan but as work area.
CAD entities without assignment are saved in the measurement plan

but they are not used for the measurement.
For information on the assignment of CAD entities to the work area,

please refer to Editing the hierarchy of the CAD entities [ 248].
Editing the hierarchy of the CAD entities

For example, to show, hide or position a clamping device and a pallet
together in a CAD window, it is possible to group both CAD entities. For
any actions carried out with this group, the modifications will be active
at the same time for both CAD entities.
2-48
You work with groups on the Hierarchy tab of the Modify CAD
Model window.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1 Select CAD Modify CAD Entities and activate the Hierarchy

tab in Modify CAD Model.
2 To add a new group, select Add Group in the context menu of the
supper hierarchy level.
When grouping, individual CAD entities or entire groups are shifted
hierarchically.
3 To shift CAD entities, select the CAD entities to be shifted and drag
them to the target group.
Transforming coordinate systems and

CAD entities
Overview of transformations
Use local alignments to position work area elements and workpieces in
the CAD window. All positioning and location processes take place in
these coordinate systems.
It is possible to transform CAD entities and coordinate systems. To transform an object, assign a coordinate system to the object in the CAD
model. The object is transformed along the coordinate axes of this coordinate system.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-49
The following transformations are possible:
Moving a coordinate system along the axes of the active coordinate

system
Rotating a coordinate system around its own axes
Moving a CAD entity along the axes of the active coordinate system
Rotating a CAD entity around its own axes
Rotating a CAD entity around the axes of a coordinate system
Adding a new coordinate system

Conditions:
A CAD model is loaded.
1 Select CAD Modify CAD Entities Modify CAD Model and
activate the Transformation tab.
2 Click the Create button in the Alignment group.
2-50
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3 Click the desired position or the CAD entity in the CAD window.
A local alignment is inserted at the corresponding place parallel to the
coordinate system defined in the CAD entity.
Note: By ticking the Center check box before adding the alignment,
the coordinate system with its origin is automatically positioned in the
center of the surface or feature you clicked.
4 Repeat step 3 for the desired number of coordinate systems.
5 Then click again Create to deactivate the button.
6 Close the dialog box.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-51
Transforming the coordinate system

It is possible to shift and rotate a local alignment.
2 Select the coordinate system to be transformed in the selection list
displayed next to Alignment.
The CAD window displays the coordinate system purple-colored.
3 Set the fields at the axis ends to the desired values.
2-52
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The changes made are immediately shown in the CAD window.

Note: The following order applies when several rotations are carried
out: Rotation in Z, rotation in Y, rotation in X. Another order would
cause a different total rotation.
4 If the Activate temporarily check box is activated, the last coordinate system created becomes the active coordinate system.
Transforming a CAD entity

It is possible to transform, i.e. shift and rotate, a CAD entity in the CAD
window. To do so, you must assign a coordinate system in the CAD window to the CAD entity and define the transformation of the CAD model.
2 Select the desired CAD entity in the CAD window.
The CAD entity is shown purple-colored.
3 Select the coordinate system in which you wish to transform the CAD
entity in the selection list displayed next to Alignment active.
The CAD window displays the coordinate system in boldface.
4 Set the fields at the axis ends to the desired values.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-53
5 Activate the Center check box if the rotation should refer to a coordinate system parallel to the axis in the center of gravity of the CAD
entity.
Otherwise, the rotation refers to the origin of the selected coordinate
system.
6 Select Apply to move the CAD entity to the defined position and to
rotate it.
2-54
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7 Select Copy to move a copy of the currently selected CAD entity to

the defined position and to rotate it. The original CAD entity remains
unchanged.
8 If you activate the Drag Base Alignment check box, the base
alignment is also moved and rotated, i.e. it is transferred together with
the CAD entity, during movement and rotation.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2-55
2-56
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Chapter
Preparing the measurement

plan
.................................................................................................................

Measurement plan basics ......................................................................... 32
Measurement plan area ......................................................................... 310
Connecting the CMM ............................................................................ 313
Preparing the stylus system .................................................................... 315
Defining the CT properties ..................................................................... 318
Setting the base / start alignment ........................................................... 319
Prerequisites for the rotary table ............................................................ 355
Defining the clearance planes ................................................................ 356
Editing printout settings ......................................................................... 363
Working with measurement plan editors ................................................ 364
Temperature compensation ................................................................... 367
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-1
Measurement plan basics

Components of the measurement plan
The measurement plan contains all the information needed to control the
CMM, to perform the measurements and to evaluate them.
What does a measurement plan comprise?
The measurement plan essentially contains the following components:
the sequence of characteristics that you want to measure on a workpiece,
the features required for measuring,
additional information important for measuring:
the stylus system,

the coordinate systems,
the clearance planes,
the temperature compensation,
user-defined video clips, if applicable.
Creating and executing a measurement plan

Creating a new measurement plan manually
There are eight steps in creating a new measurement plan in CALYPSO:
Basic steps for creating a measurement plan
Refer to this section for details
Step 1: Open the measurement plan.
Creating a new measurement
plan [ 33]
Step 2: Define the naming conventions.
Specifying feature names in the

measurement plan [ 618]
Step 3: Carry out the preparations.
Measurement Plan tab [ 311]
Step 4: Define the part's features that you want to measure. Defining features [ 42]
Step 5: Define the characteristics for which these features
are to be checked for compliance.
Step 6: Save the measurement plan and name it.
Saving and naming the measurement plan [ 34]
Step 7: Prepare the execution.
CMM tab [ 311]
Step 8: Run your measurement plan.
Starting a measurement [ 72]
Changing the sequence
You can also change the order: You can lay out the sequence of characteristics first (step 5) and then begin defining features (step 4) and associating them to characteristics.
Creating a new measurement plan automatically
You have several options for creating measurement plans:
3-2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Import Measurement Plan

If you use the DMIS Input Postprocessor option, you can import runs
programmed in DMIS (see in the operating instructions for the DMIS
Input Postprocessor option under DMIS Import (option)).
Generate Measurement Plan

You can use the Characteristic IN option to generate the essential
components of a measurement plan from CAD data or from manufacturing segments (Agipp) automatically (see in the operating instructions for the Characteristic IN option under Characteristic IN (option)).
Import features from CAD files

You can extract the features for a measurement plan automatically
from a CAD file of a workpiece (see Deriving features from CAD
files [ 415]).

Measurement plans in
the file system
After creation, you can edit and supplement each measurement plan.
More information about measurement plans

Each measurement plan is saved in a file called inspection in a directory
that bears the name of the measurement plan. The default path for this
directory is <user directory>\workarea\inspections.
To open the Explorer window with the measurement plans, select
View Measurement Plan Directory.
During the measurement plan run, CALYPSO generates several result files
depending on your definitions. To open the Explorer window with the
result files, select View Result Directories Measurement
Plan.
Combined evaluations
CALYPSO creates evaluations for each measurement plan. You can also
combine measurement plans and thereby create combined evaluations
(Combining several measurement plans [ 627]).
Names in the measurement plans
By default, CALYPSO assigns names to the features, characteristics and

utilities that correspond to the language set. Select the name form for
automatically created characteristics in the default settings.
You can change the names afterwards. Should you generally desire to
have other name definitions, you may load these name definitions into
CALYPSO (Loading a file with default names [ 624]).
Creating a new measurement plan

The procedure for creating a measurement plan is as follows:
1 Select File New or click the Begin New Measurement Plan
icon.
An empty measurement plan opens in the main CALYPSO window. It
is possible to load CAD files, define features and characteristics and
edit the measurement plan.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-3
The measurement plan is provided with a provisional unique name

with a serial number. When closing or saving, you can name it as desired.
Opening and displaying a measurement

plan
A measurement plan can be opened at any time and you can edit or run
it. You can have several measurement plans open at the same time.
If the CMM has not yet been initialized, a message to this effect is issued.
Then set up the connection to the CMM.
Opening a measurement plan

1 Select File Open or click the Open Existing Measurement
Plan icon.
2 Go to the directory containing the measurement plan you want to
open.
3 Select the inspection file and confirm with Open.
Opening one of the measurement plans last opened

1 Select File <measurement_plan_name>.
Switching between open measurement plans

1 Select Window <measurement_plan_name>.
Saving and naming the measurement

plan
To ensure that the created or edited measurement plan is retained, you
must save it. To do so, you must have the corresponding rights.
Note: If you have modified measurement plans of other users, it will not
be possible to run them just like that. Thus, results which are not traceable
are avoided.
You can only run the measurement plan once you have reloaded it.
Note: You can only load and run protected ZEISS measurement plans for
which you have a license. You cannot edit them and you cannot copy any
features.

1 Select File Save or click the Save Current Measurement
Plan icon.
- or -
3-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 Select File Save As ....

3 Select a path in the Save Measurement Plan as ... window and
enter a name.
Note: CALYPSO uses uppercase and lowercase letters when saving.

Bear this in mind, because it means that CALYPSO does not distinguish
between names of measurement plans that differ only in the use of
uppercase and lowercase letters.
Note: Do not use any control characters, umlauts or the letter
(Germany).
Note: In the system settings (Extras Settings Environment, Save tab), you can activate the automatic creation of backup
copies (Auto-Save).
Settings for measurement plans

Defaults for measurement plans
Use the list of prerequisites to prepare the measurement plan.
In addition, you can define other defaults for the measurement plans via
the Resources menu:
Resources
Presettings
Stylus
Preassign stylus system for Measurement Plan

autom.
Stylus Check at CNC Start
Exchange stylus system name / stylus in measurement plan
Measurement Plan
Rack Assignment
Preassignment for New Features
Default alignment and default projection plane

for new features
Save / Load Defaults
Default filtering and outlier elimination for new

characteristics and features
Default strategies for new features
CAD presettings
Space Point Mode
Evaluation and method of stylus data correction during point measurement
Name for output files
Definition of the output files via PCM formulas
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-5
Loading measurement and evaluation settings

You can define defaults for the measurement and evaluation of characteristics and features for the entire measurement plan.
If you have to reuse the same settings, you can save them with a name
and load them into another measurement plan or export and then import
them into another computer. Use Resources Save / Load Defaults... to open the Settings (Measurement Plan) window.
You can save and load as well as export and import files with the following
settings:
Tab
Settings
Filter/Outlier
Defaults for filtering and outlier setting for the following new features
for the entire measurement plan:
Strategy
Characteristics of the type Size
Characteristics of the type Location
Characteristics of the type Form
References in characteristics and alignment features in coordinate

systems
Strategy defaults which are effective throughout the measurement

plan for new features of the following types:
Point
2D line
Plane
Circle
Cylinder
Cone
CAD
Defaults for the entire measurement plan used for visualization in the
CAD window. You can also make these settings under CAD Settings in the Settings (CAD) window.
General
The three settings combined in one file. This file does not refer to
individual files but contains the definitions of the three tabs.
Editing the representation of features

The Features representation defines how actual values, nominal values
and results are presented. The settings are based on the scales and units
of measure of various geometric elements and are always saved together
with the current measurement plan.
3-6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Checking or modifying the representation of features

1 To open the settings for the entire measurement plan: In the list of
features, select No feature and select Resources Features representation.
2 To open the settings for an individual feature: Mark the entry in the
list of features and select Resources Features representation.
The Features representation window appears on the screen. It shows
the default output settings.
Be sure to check all settings at the Position, Angle and Size global
radio buttons.
3 If you want to change the setting for a feature, open the selection box
of the feature in the Mode column and select Change.
This activates the radio buttons on the right-hand side of the window.
4 Make all the necessary changes.
5 Click OK.
This window is fully described in Features representation in the CALYPSO
dialog reference in the Online Help.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-7
Compatibility of measurement plans

Every new version of CALYPSO contains modifications and improvements
of the algorithms and evaluation methods. However, any new measurement plans created in CALYPSO contain the methods and modes of the
current version.
Any existing measurement plans which you created with an older CALYPSO version can, however, also be run with the current version without
any problems.
If you do not modify the settings, the measurement plan runs in the same
way as with the original version of CALYPSO. This means that new functions or modified behaviors are not used in the old measurement plan.
It may be useful for you to run older measurement plans with a more
recent behavior or new measurement plans with an older behavior.
Compatibility settings
You can define these settings for each individual measurement plan and
(with the appropriate rights) also for several measurement plans.
Filter limit points per wave
Outlier Elimination
Calculate Alignment as Base Alignment
Scanning speed circle referring to surface
Evaluate Features from point recalls
Point Recall via Box with Actual Geometry
Point recall of individual points with path()
Circle path on plane is calculated as for circle
Take into account the offset angle for RT axes measurement with start system
Old positioning for optical measurement fields
DMIS Printout: Unique Feature Names
DMIS Printout: Length of feature name
DMIS Printout: Definition of TOL/WIDTH
DMIS Printout: Source of nominal data for measured features
Take the retract distance for multiple safety data into consideration
Adapt font when printing the custom printout
Staggered end message to FACS
RT navigation: Move to a higher clear position when executing Retract to top.
Optimized travel paths with rotate/swivel position with preset path
Performance as if created with Rev.
Optimized travel performance before stylus system change
Always use Arc Motion mode
3-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
To edit an individual measurement plan, select Resources Compatibility Settings ...for this Measurement Plan and define the
settings in the Compatibility settings for this Measurement
Plan window.
To edit several measurement plans, select Resources Compatibility Settings ... for several measurement plans and define the
settings in the Compatibility settings for this Measurement
Plans window.
The Performance as if created with Rev. list item allows you to set
the entire behavior of the measurement plan or the measurement plans
to a certain version of CALYPSO.
In addition, certain functions and behaviors can be activated separately.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-9

Tabs and color bars
You can define the most important definitions for the current measurement plan on four tabs in the left part of the workspace in the measurement plan area. The traffic light colors of the boxes on the tabs indicate
the status of the tab.
CMM
CMM settings and the stylus system dialogs

(CMM tab [ 311])
Measurement
plan
All important dialogs for the measurement plan preparation
Characteristics
List of characteristics in the order in which the characteristics are carried out in the CNC run
(Measurement Plan tab [ 311])
(Characteristics tab [ 58])

Features
List of features
(Features tab [ 44])
Status of prerequisites
The indicator boxes on the CMM and Measurement Plan tabs reflect
the combined status of the prerequisites:
Red: One or more buttons are red. You must complete the prerequisites in question before you can run the measurement plan. Manual
measurements, however, can be performed.
Yellow: One or more buttons are yellow. You can still work, however.
Green: All prerequisites are completed.
CMM
Meas. Plan Characteristics
Features
CMM Settings
Stylus system
Star
If you are performing measurements manually (for example, doing a quick

measurement of the diameter of a cylinder), you can proceed if all of the
prerequisites have been satisfied:
3-10
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CMM tab
The reference point has been approached.

The stylus system is qualified.
Measurement Plan tab
(Only required if you want to run measurement plans automatically:)

The clearance planes are defined.
Whether or not you include the measurement plan settings and temperature compensation depends on the intended application.
Status of results
On the Characteristics tab, the indicator box reflects the results after
the measurement:
Red: One or more characteristics are red.
Yellow: One or more characteristics are yellow.
Green: All characteristics are within the tolerance.
CMM index card

The measurement plan area of the CMM index card contains buttons for
machine-specific preparations.
The prerequisites are described in the following sections:
CMM Settings: This button indicates the status of the CMM and the
connection between the CMM and CALYPSO. If the CMM has not
been initialized and referenced, the button is red (see Connecting
the CMM [ 313]).
Stylus system: By means of this button, the stylus system installed at

the moment is qualified (see Preparing the stylus system [ 315]).
Measurement Plan tab

The measurement plan area of the Measurement Plan tab and the
CMM tab contain all the settings you should configure before you create
a measurement plan or run a workpiece measurement.
CT Properties: This button allows you to prepare the measurement of

CT datasets. CALYPSO makes it possible to show the measured values
determined by means of the METROTOM as point clouds and to evaluate characteristics (see Defining the CT properties [ 318]).
Base / Start Alignment: By means of this button, the part alignment

allocated to the measurement plan is defined (see Setting the base /
start alignment [ 319]).
Rotary Table (RT): Click this button to activate a rotary table for the
current measurement plan and to define the settings for rotary table
operation (see Prerequisites for the rotary table [ 355]).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-11
3-12
Clearance Planes: Click this button to define a clearance zone around

the workpiece for CMM movements. This is required only for CMMs
with CNC capability (see Defining the clearance planes [ 356]).
Multiple Printout: Click this button to check and edit the settings for
the result logs (see Editing printout settings [ 363]).
Measurement Plan Editor Features: Click this button to open the

Measurement Plan Editor Features (see Working with measurement
plan editors [ 364]).
Temperature Compensation: Click this button to have CALYPSO include the temperature of the workpiece and the X, Y and Z scales of
the CMM in the calculations (see Temperature compensation [ 367]).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Connecting the CMM
Connecting the CMM

Validity of the reference point
You have to set up a connection to the controller and the reference point
must be approached before you can work with the CMM.
All measurements and derived calculations are referred to the reference
point. CALYPSO checks whether the CMM has approached the valid reference point. This information can only be transferred if the connection
between CALYPSO and the CMM has been established.
On the CMM index card, a color bar shows the following status:
Green: There is a proper connection between the CMM and CALYPSO. The reference point has been approached.
Red: You must initialize or restart the connection between the CMM
and CALYPSO to home the CMM.
New reference point

The new reference point may slightly differ from the previous reference
point. This has no influence on the validity of the stylus data and the future
measurements because they do not refer to the reference point.
By contrast, the positions of the reference spheres refer to the reference
point. Therefore, they would become invalid by homing the CMM. If you
want to re-qualify styli, you must also re-qualify the positions of the reference spheres.
NOTICE
When using a rotary table, you must redefine the rotary table axis after
the CMM has been homed. This is the prerequisite for using the rotary
table. For more information, see Prerequisites for the rotary table [ 355].
Connecting the CMM

You have to set up a connection to the controller before you can work
with the CMM.
Note: When you install an SP600, SP25 or XXT, you must be careful that
the stylus does not touch the workpiece nor come to rest anywhere. The
dead weight would, in this case, be determined incorrectly.
1 Select Extras Settings CMM.
- or On the CMM index card, click CMM Settings.
2 Click Connect.
The connection will be established.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-13
Connecting the CMM
The CMM moves to home position automatically to which all measurements and derived calculations are referred.
NOTICE
All reference spheres used are no longer valid after a home position travel.
Before you can reuse the reference spheres, you must determine their
position again via the master stylus.
3-14
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Preparing the stylus system

Validity of the stylus system
When you create a measurement plan, make sure that you have installed
the correct stylus system and that it is suitable for the measurement. To
ensure this, the stylus system must have been qualified and the limit values must be complied with.
Status
Qualifying styli
On the CMM tab, the following status is shown:
Green: The currently active stylus of the displayed stylus system is

qualified.
Red: The currently active stylus of the displayed stylus system is not
qualified or not permitted for the measurement.
Qualification means that the stylus probes the reference sphere and stylus
correction values are determined from the results. The compliance with
the limit values can be checked automatically by CALYPSO.
When qualifying the stylus, observe the following:
Always define and qualify stylus systems and styli within a measurement plan. You can use defined stylus systems with qualified styli in
all other measurement plans.
The stylus system that you use to set up a measurement plan must be
the same one that you use to run the measurement plan.
Note: If the stylus system can no longer be used, but you have a stylus
system with the same configuration, select Resources Stylus
system Define stylus system for current Measurement
Plan to select the suitable stylus system.
Further information
In the list of the prerequisites, the name of the stylus system is displayed that was most recently used for measuring. When opening a
measurement plan, you must use the appropriate stylus system. To
display the stylus system to be used, choose Resources Stylus
system Define stylus system for current Measurement
Plan.
In the following sections you will find the instructions on how to insert or
change a stylus system manually and to quality an already qualified stylus
system.
For more information about stylus systems and styli of different types as
well as stylus system management, please refer to the chapter Styli and
stylus systems [ 111].
For information about the automatic stylus change, please refer to the
chapter Stylus system changer [ 131].
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-15
Inserting the stylus system

Inserting the stylus system in the CMM
1 Select Resources Stylus system Manual stylus system
change.
The Manual stylus system change [machine name] window is opened.
2 If you want to install an SP600 and change the stylus system (SP600
plate): Remove the stylus system manually from the SP600 and proceed with step 5.
- or If you want to install an SP600 and change the probe (RDS plate), as
well as in all other cases: Click the red arrow in the left half of the
window.
The message Stylus system will be released in 5 seconds appears on
the screen.
3 Click OK.
4 Carefully grip the stylus system that is about to be ejected.
After five seconds, the CMM ejects the stylus system.
If a trigger probe is involved, deviate the stylus system slightly to be
able to remove it from the holder.
Measuring probes are ejected fully automatically, i.e. you must be holding
the stylus system in your hand at this time.
3-16
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5 Click the red arrow on the right-hand side of the window.

The Insert stylus? prompt appears on the screen.
Do not click OK at this time.
6 Install the new stylus system. Make sure the notch in the adapter plate
is aligned with the pin on the underside of the probe.
7 Click OK.
There is an audible sound when the electromagnet engages.
If you do not hear anything, gently move the stylus system to assure
a proper seat.
A popup menu appears listing available, already defined stylus system
names.
8 If you install a new stylus system, click New and enter a name.
- or If the stylus system has already been defined and qualified, select the
respective name.
- or If you install a master stylus, select MasterStylus.
9 Click OK.
If you install a stylus system that has already been qualified, the name of
the stylus system appears in the list of prerequisites. If not, the stylus
system must be qualified.
Re-qualifying a stylus system

You can program CALYPSO to automatically re-qualify the stylus of a
stylus system already qualified.
1 Click the Stylus system icon in the list of prerequisites.
The Probing system qualification window appears on the screen.
2 Select the name of the stylus system.
3 Select the name of the stylus you want to qualify.
4 Click the CNC Probing system qualification icon.
5 Click OK.
The styli are now qualified and the color of the Stylus system icon is
green. The qualified stylus system can now be used by all CALYPSO users.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-17
Defining the CT properties
Defining the CT properties

If you have the Metrotomography option, you can load, visualize and
measure CT datasets gained by METROTOM in CALYPSO.
Define the settings for the measurement, visualization and analysis of the
CT dataset in the CT Properties window which you open via the button
in the prerequisites.
More detailed information on the measurement of CT datasets can be

found in the operating instructions for the Metrotomography option.
3-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Setting the base / start alignment

Working with the base/start alignment
The calculated alignment of a workpiece is completed in CALYPSO by
defining a base alignment (coordinate system). If this base alignment can
only be determined through time-consuming measurements or scanning,
you can manually define a start alignment, which will then be used to
measure the base alignment.
NOTICE
In order to work with base alignments/start alignments, you need to be
familiar with automatic feature recognition (see Defining features using automatic feature recognition [ 414]).
The tasks that can be involved in defining the base/start alignment are as
follows:
Loading an existing base alignment/start alignment [ 323]

If there is an existing base/start alignment, you can use it for your
current measurement plan.
Creating a new base/start alignment [ 324]

You can create a new base / start alignment. There are several ways
of creating a base/start alignment, and you will have to choose one
(see Alternative alignment methods [ 349]).
Adapting a base / start alignment [ 327]

If the position of the workpiece has changed but the part alignment
is still defined, you can recalculate alignment without having to redefine the base/start alignment from scratch.
Editing an existing base/start alignment [ 333]

The settings (e.g. a primary reference) of an open (active) base or start
alignment can be changed at any time.
Moving or rotating the base / start alignment [ 334]

You can offset or rotate a base or start alignment in order to customize it to suit the positions of features on a workpiece.
Deleting a base alignment [ 349]
Setting a base alignment to zero [ 349]
For each of these tasks, you start from the part alignment template. The
part alignment template is described in full detail in Definition template
(Alignment) in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-19
Part alignment basics

Part alignments
The part alignment is the user-defined reference coordinate system for
your measurement plan. The base alignment (see also Base alignment [ 321]) is a particular part alignment. It localizes the part on the
measuring table for the CMM. Why is that necessary?
In its clamped position on the table, a workpiece can be tilted or out of
line. The CMM still has to perform accurately, so before you start measuring you have to define (compute) the position of the workpiece relative
to the axes of the CMM.
This is precisely what happens when the part alignment is computed: the
part alignment is virtually tilted and turned until certain geometric elements of the workpiece are parallel to the CMM's axes.
The part alignment needs to locate the part within the six constraints
(three rotational and three translational).
The part alignment is based on five references:
The primary reference (Rotate Space) restricts two of the three rotational degrees of freedom; e.g., the rotation around the X and Y axes.
The secondary reference (Rotate Plane) constrains the third rotational

degree of freedom, e.g., rotation around the Z axis.
Three tertiary references control the three translational constraints.

These are the origins of X, Y and Z. With these, the part alignment is
defined.
You can save several part alignments within one measurement plan. You
can define a new part alignment using Resources Utilities Alignment or with the toolbox.
Selecting the coordinate
system
3-20
The known coordinate systems in the measurement plan can be selected

and used at various positions of the measurement plan:
Features and constructions
The start coordinate system for a coordinate system according to the

standard method
True Position, Profile, Simple distance characteristics
Erosion Module utility, Save Alignment
Display position and Move in Part Alignment System in the stop

light window
Additional Features HOLOS and GEAR PRO
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Coordinate system with index

Coordinate systems determined according to the standard method may
contain a loop index and thus represent several specific coordinate systems.
This becomes the case when
you use features with a pattern or a loop index for a coordinate system
determined by the standard method,
you use the loop index in a special function when defining the coordinate system.
The name of the coordinate system is then provided with an index in

brackets. For every valid index value, the coordinate system becomes a
particular coordinate system of its own.
NOTICE
The type of brackets selected in the loop is passed along with the index
as is the number.
n different coordinate systems are calculated for a coordinate system that

has a feature with pattern and n positions. When several references contain patterns with varying number of positions, the resulting coordinate
system contains exactly as many positions as the reference having the
smallest number of positions.
Example: A circle and two planes have one pattern with ten features each.
If you use these features as references for the coordinate system, a coordinate system with index is formed. This coordinate system can take on
from one to ten different positions or alignments depending on the specific index value.
NOTICE
A coordinate system provided with a loop is interpreted as an iterative
alignment. For this reason, coordinate systems that should be calculated
with an index should have no loop.
Base alignment
The base alignment is a part alignment that defines the position of the
workpiece on the CMM. There is only one base alignment in every measurement plan. In order to view, define or change the base alignment, read
Creating a new base/start alignment [ 324].
The base alignment parameters correspond to the machine coordinate
system. The part alignments inside a measurement plan, on the other
hand, correspond either to the base alignment or to other alignments.
They are used for the correct evaluation of the measuring results.
When you set the base alignment, you have to decide which features you
want to use for defining the workpiece position on the CMM. If these
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-21
features have already been measured, the current workpiece position will
be calculated and saved.
Otherwise, with machine-remote programming, for example, the workpiece position cannot be calculated until later. This can be accomplished
by loading a saved base alignment (see Loading an existing base alignment/start alignment [ 323]) or by manually adapting a defined base
alignment (see Adapting a base / start alignment [ 327]).
It is important to differentiate between 2 processes:
The assignments of the features to the 5 references of the base alignment are saved in the measurement plan.
The results of the calculation of the base alignment are saved in a file.
Start alignment
A part alignment is referred to as a start alignment when it can be used
as a provisional base alignment. It must be possible to generate it by
manual probing and can be permitted only once in a measurement plan.
What is the purpose of a
start alignment?
A start alignment is used in the following situations:
Generating the base alignment through manual probing would be

relatively complex.
This is the case, for example, when constructions are entered into the
base alignments that, in turn, have been formed from several other
features. Then many features are necessary for generating the base
alignment.
This applies also when features which are difficult to probe are used
for generating the base alignment.
A receptacle is used holding the workpiece.

Then the start alignment is defined on the receptacle and the base
alignment on the workpiece.
Simple structure
A start alignment can be built up relatively simple. Depending on the

individual case it can, for example, be built by a 3-2-1 alignment, by simple
features or also by one point in X, Y and Z each.
For a CNC run with manual alignment, it is then sufficient to probe these
few points or features. Afterward, CALYPSO knows the approximate position of the workpiece and can qualify the base alignment in the CNC
run.
NOTICE
Always define the base alignment first, and then the start alignment.
Otherwise, the offset between the base alignment and the start alignment cannot be correctly calculated.
Defining start alignment
3-22
The start alignment is defined and edited in the same manner and with
the same functions as a base alignment. For this purpose, use the Start
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Alignment index card in the Load, Create Or Change Base Alignment

window.
It is only the CNC run that cannot be set in the start alignment.
Activating start alignment
To activate the start alignment for the current measurement plan, you
must tick the corresponding check box on the Start Alignment index
card.
For information on how to view, define or change the start alignment,
read Creating a new base/start alignment [ 324].
What to bear in mind when defining references

The features you choose to define a part alignment depend to a very large
extent on the geometry of the workpiece and the measuring job you want
to accomplish. Here are the basic rules:
Choose at least three different physical features. They can all be

planes, but they must not be the same plane.
Do not select parallel planes for different references (e.g. the surface
of a cube and the surface of a cylinder on top of it). In this case, the
second reference tells CALYPSO nothing more about the orientation
of the workpiece than the first reference did.
For each feature, spread out the points as far as possible.
The primary reference must be a three-dimensional object (e.g. plane,

cylinder or cone, or a sphere, if another sphere defines all 3 tertiary
origins).
The secondary reference must be a two-dimensional object (e.g. a

line), but can also be three-dimensional. (Or a circle or ellipse, if other
entities define both tertiary origins which belong to the plane of the
primary axis.)
The tertiary references are typically one-dimensional (a point), but a

two-dimensional or three-dimensional reference can also be selected.
Loading an existing base alignment/start

alignment
If you have or another user has already defined a part alignment, you can
use it as a base or start alignment for your current measurement plan if
it satisfies your requirements.
Selecting a part alignment

1 In the list of prerequisites, click the Base / Start Alignment icon.
2 Activate the desired tab in the Load, Create Or Change Base Alignment
window.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-23
3 Select the Load a saved base alignment or Load an existing

start alignment option.
4 Select the desired part alignment from the selection list below.
5 Click OK.
Once you have selected an existing part alignment as the new start
alignment, the following query will be displayed:
Do you want to create a start alignment by calculating the
difference to the base alignment (otherwise you will move the
workpiece)?
6 Click Compute if you want to move the loaded start alignment to
the position of the base alignment.
- or Click Move if you want to use the position of the start alignment and
the workpiece and its base alignment are to be moved to the position
of the start alignment.
- or Click Overwrite if you want to use the position of the start alignment
and overwrite the previous start alignment of the measurement plan
with the new start alignment which is loaded.
The start alignment is loaded and adapted accordingly.
Note: In all cases, you must match the part alignment to the position
of the workpiece. See Adapting a base / start alignment [ 327].
The Base / Start Alignment icon will now be green.
When loading the base/start alignment, only the workpiece position is
changed, not, however, the definition of the features used. That is why
the model in the CAD window does not change.
Creating a new base/start alignment

If you prefer not to use the standard method to define a part alignment,
you have a choice of three other methods: 3D Best Fit and RPS or P6
procedures (see Alternative alignment methods [ 349]).
window.
3 Select either the Create a new base alignment or Create a
new start alignment option.
4 From the list, select the method you want to use for alignment (see
Alternative alignment methods [ 349]).
5 Click OK.
The Definition template (Alignment) window will open.
3-24
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
This dialog box has five buttons and fields for defining the five references. CALYPSO automatically enters the information in the fields
when you probe the workpiece to define the requisite features.
You do not need to probe the workpiece if you have already measured
the features required for the part alignment.
6 Make sure that the correct stylus is selected at the CMM control console.
7 Define a feature for the reference. There are a number of possibilities:
The feature already exists:
Click the appropriate button of the reference.
The Selection dialog box appears on the screen.
Select the feature of your choice from the selection list.
Click OK.
CALYPSO transfers the feature to the appropriate field.

The feature does not exist in If you are working on the CMM:
the measurement plan as
You do not have to exit the Alignment dialog box.
yet:
Probe point by point.
The automatic feature recognition engine of CALYPSO automatically registers the geometry of the feature.
Click OK when you have fully defined the feature as a reference.
CALYPSO will automatically transfer the feature to the measurement

plan.
If you are working away from the machine:
Click the appropriate button of the reference in the Alignment dialog box.
Select the New option.
Click the appropriate button of the feature you want to define.
Click OK.
In the CAD window, either probe the necessary number of points

on the feature with the mouse.
- or -
Click one of the buttons Define a Space Point, Define Circle on a Cylinder, Define 2-D Line or Extract Features
to import the entire feature right away.
CALYPSO updates the feature definition at the left-hand side of
the dialog box.
Click OK.
8 Define the features for the other references in the same way.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-25
9 Click OK when you have finished defining all the references.

The part alignment is saved and the dialog box is closed. The Base / Start
Alignment icon will then be green.
Once all of the references have been defined, CALYPSO will enter the
corresponding features in the appropriate fields (see the example in the
illustration below).
The default name for the measurement plan is derived from the name of
the newly calculated base alignment. You can, however, highlight the
name and overwrite it with a name of your choice. Click the Comment button to type in and save a comment containing additional information.
3-26
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Adapting a base / start alignment

If the workpiece was shifted, turned or tilted out of position slightly, you
will have to repeat the computed alignment. CALYPSO will assist you.
1 In the measurement plan area of the list of prerequisites, click the
Base / Start Alignment icon.
window.
3 Select either the Change current base alignment or Change
current start alignment option.
4 Click OK.
The Definition template (Alignment) window will open. You can see
which features were used to define the part alignment.
5 Click the Execute Manual Run Now icon.
CALYPSO guides you through the procedure for computing alignment. The Manual Alignment dialog box appears on the screen for this
purpose.
The instructions in this dialog box tell you exactly which feature has to
be probed and how often to ensure successful alignment. This dialog
box is fully described in Manual Alignment in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
6 Using the joysticks, take the indicated number of probings on the indicated feature of the part. The information in the dialog box is up61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-27
dated after each probing. In this manner, you know how often you
have to probe.
When you take the final probing for a reference, the window displays
the feature needed for the next reference (such as 2D Line1).
After the probing, CALYPSO takes a moment to update the part alignment and display the new image in the CAD window. Then you are
returned to the Alignment window.
7 Click OK.
The Base / Start Alignment icon will then be green.
When adjusting the base/start alignment, only the workpiece position will
be changed, not, however, the definition of the features used. That is
why the model in the CAD window does not change.
Customizing a base alignment iteratively

You can enhance precision by computing alignment of the part alignment
iteratively. You do this by defining a loop in the Load, Create Or
Change Base Alignment window.
NOTICE
The Automatic Run check box has to be ticked in the definition template of the base alignment.
If you use an abortion condition instead of defining the end of the loop
by specifying a certain number of repetitions, you can predefine the target
precision for the new part alignment.
If a space point measured with the Point Set strategy is used for the definition of the base alignment, you can carry out partial computed iteration, i.e. without remeasuring.
1 In the Load Create Or Change Base Alignment dialog box, activate the radio button for the Change current base alignment
option.
3-28
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 Click Loop.
The Loop dialog box appears on the screen.
3 Click Add.
4 Enter in the End field, e.g., 5 as number of the loop cycles.
5 Point to the Break Condition field, open the shortcut menu and
select Formula....
6 In the Formula... window, enter an abortion condition, for example
the following expression:
baseSystem().valueA<0.05
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-29
This Boolean expression is checked at the end of each loop and when
it is satisfied (value of the expression = true), the loop is stopped. The
value of the valueA variable is recalculated each time the loop is run.
It stands for the approximation between the measured alignment and
the alignment stored in memory. In the standard protocol, valueA is
designated as Delta.
7 Close the Formula, Loop and Load, Create Or Change Base
Alignment dialog boxes.
If a Space Point feature measured with the Point Set strategy is used
in the base alignment, you can carry out partial computed iteration.
8 To do so, click Iterative alignment and enter the parameters for
computed iteration.
For computed iteration, the point set is not remeasured but the measured point set is evaluated again. For more information, see Alignment by means of computed iteration [ 330].
9 Start the measurement plan.
Alignment terminates immediately if the workpiece has not been moved
since the alignment was last computed.
If a marginal change was made to the position of the workpiece, alignment is computed iteratively until the difference (delta) between two
consecutive alignments is less than the value you specified (0.05).
Refer to the default printout for information on the alignment procedure
and the results, including the value for delta.
Alignment by means of computed

iteration
During iterative alignment of a coordinate system, the features are remeasured until the loop is terminated or an abortion condition is met. In
the case of a loop with n steps, the features can be measured n times.
However, in the case of space points measured with the Point Set strategy
a sufficient number of points with slight shifts is already available so that
repeated physical time-consuming measuring is most probably not necessary. CALYPSO can re-evaluate the already existing measuring points
and use them for the calculation of the coordinate system.
CALYPSO searches the measuring points to be evaluated within a defined
search radius around the target position. If the defined minimum number
of measuring points has been found, these measuring points will be used
for the evaluation of the point. If an insufficient number of measuring
points is found at the current target position, a physical measurement is
actually carried out or the computation is interrupted. When remeasuring,
the new measuring points from the current iteration step will be added
to the old measuring points of the previous iteration steps.
3-30
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Parameters for computed iteration
You can define the parameters for each Space Point feature individually
or for all features used in the coordinate system. CALYPSO checks the
entries and issues warning messages:
Search radius
If the specified search radius is too small, e.g. smaller than the step
width of the scanning strategy, CALYPSO can find a maximum of one
point. If the specified value is too large, e.g. larger than the expansion
of the scanning strategy, the distance between the points and the
target position is too large and the computation is inaccurate (see ill.).
When checking the parameters for all space points used in the coordinate system, CALYPSO uses the largest step width and the smallest
expansion of all scanning strategies as basis.
Search radius
Point set
Target position
Minimum number of calculation points

The minimum number of points must not exceed the number of
measuring points in the point set in any case since otherwise an abortion would already take place in the first step. On the other hand, it
should not be too small for reasons of accuracy.
When checking the parameters for all space points used in the coordinate system, CALYPSO uses the smallest number of measuring
points for the measurement.
Configuring computed alignment

Conditions:
A base alignment or another coordinate system is defined.
For the definition of the base alignment or coordinate system, space
points measured by means of the Point set strategy are used.
1 Click Loop in the Load, Create Or Change Base Alignment
window.
- or 61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-31
Select Loop in the context menu of the corresponding coordinate

system.
2 If necessary, enter the loop parameters with Insert.

3 If necessary, enter an abortion condition in the Break Condition
field.
4 Click Iterative alignment to configure the computed iteration.
5 The Settings for iterative alignment window shows the space

points measured as point set which are used for the coordinate system.
CALYPSO defined default settings for all parameters.
6 Activate for the computer iteration either individual space points of
the list or all features of the list using the Measurement Plan line.
7 Enter the Search radius and the Min. no.\calculation\points
and define what is to happen when this number is not reached.
8 Confirm the open windows with OK.
When starting the measurement plan or measuring the coordinate system
the next time, the settings for the computed iteration are used.
3-32
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Editing a base / start alignment

When a base / start alignment is changed, the nominal values of all of the
features in the current measurement plan will be changed. The position
of the base alignment relative to the workpiece is changed. The position
of the workpiece on the CMM will also be changed if only measured
features are used.
Note: When making changes on the base alignment of an existing measurement plan, always do so with great care and deliberation especially
when dealing with a complex measurement plan or when the measurement plan contains theoretical features, formulas or parameters. Check
subsequently the nominal values of the features with regard to their correctness.
window.
3 Select either the Change current base alignment or Change
current start alignment option.
4 Click OK.
The Definition template (Alignment) window appears on the screen.
It shows which features were used to define the part alignment.
5 If you want to replace a feature for a particular reference with another
feature which has already been defined:
Click the button for the reference in question to open the Selection
(Features) window.
In the list, click the feature you want to use.
Confirm twice with OK.
6 If you want to assign a particular reference a feature that has yet to
be defined:
Click the button for the reference in question.
The Selection (Features) window appears on the screen.
Select New and choose the type of feature you want to define (e.g.
plane or 2D straight line).
Confirm by clicking OK and use the CMM to probe the necessary
points of the feature.
Make sure that the correct stylus is selected at the CMM control
console.
As soon as you start probing, CALYPSO updates the feature definition
at the left-hand side of the window.
After probing, confirm twice with OK.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-33
After every change in the part alignment, the Base / Start Alignment icon must be green. When a base / start alignment is changed, the
nominal values of all of the features in the current measurement plan will
be changed. The position of the base/start alignment relative to the workpiece will be changed.
The position of the workpiece on the CMM will also be changed if only
measured features are used.
Moving or rotating the base / start

alignment
Purpose of movement and rotation
Sometimes, the coordinate values of a workpiece feature needed to define the base/start alignment are not 0, or the features are not parallel
to a part alignment axis, but are rotated. In these situations, the base/
start alignment can be moved (offset) or rotated to the desired position.
In such cases, the base/start alignment is always moved first, and then
rotated.
Offsetting a base/start
alignment
An offset also enables you to move the origin of the part alignment to a
point that cannot be probed. You can define an offset in any and all of
the three coordinate directions.
Rotating the base / start

alignment
Using the rotation function, it is possible to rotate a part alignment

around a coordinate axis. There are two methods for entering the rotation
angle:
Rotate by an angle:
The desired rotation angle is entered directly in degrees.
Rotate by distances:
The rotation angle is entered via vector coordinates.
The rotation of the reference axis by secondary reference is described

separately (see Rotate to Distance [ 338]).
Offsetting a base / start alignment

Offsetting or shifting a part alignment is part of the special Offset function.
1 On the Measurement Plan tab, click the Base / Start Alignment button.
window.
3 Select the Change current base alignment or Change current
start alignment option and click OK.
3-34
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4 Click Special in the Base Alignment or Start Alignment window.

The Special Functions dialog box appears on the screen.
5 Click the Offset button.
The Offset entry and input fields for the coordinates are added to the
Special Functions dialog box.
6 Enter the amount by which you want to offset the origin in the X,Y
or Z axis:
7 Click OK.
The new position of the part alignment is displayed in the CAD window.
Rotating a part alignment by an angle

Rotating a part alignment about a selected axis is part of the Rotate
special function. After the alignment has been computed, you can rotate
the part alignment through the desired angle.
1 Click the Base / Start Alignment icon in the measurement plan
area on the Measurement Plan tab.
window.
4 Click the Special button.
5 Click Rotate by an angle.
The Rotate Around entry and input fields for the space axis and the
rotation angle will appear in the Special Functions dialog box.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-35
6 Enter the space axis around which you want the alignment to be rotated, and the angle (in degrees):
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 if you want to define rotations about other space
axes as well.
8 Click OK.
Rotating a part alignment by distances

When a part alignment is rotated by distance (Cartesian), the rotation
angle is specified using vector coordinates.
window.
5 Click Rotate by distances .
The Rotate Around entry, a selection field for the space axis and
input fields for the respective complementary coordinates are added
to the Special Functions window, along with a field for displaying the
resulting rotation angle.
3-36
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6 Enter the space axis around which you want the system to be rotated,
and the vector for rotation.
Specify the vector with its two coordinates in the coordinate system
of the plane of rotation (the plane of rotation depends on the selected
axis of rotation).
7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 if you want to define rotations about other space
axes as well.
8 Click OK.
Rotating reference axis by secondary

reference
Options for rotating the reference axis
In addition to the offset (movement) and rotation of a base / start alignment, there are other, special options for changing a base / start alignment.
To access these, click Special in the Special Functions window in the
definition template for the workpiece coordinate system. Here you will
find three options for using a secondary reference to set the reference
axis.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-37
Option
Function
Rotate to Distance (to a given Rotates the coordinate system about a given axis so that a specific
axis)
coordinate of a specified feature reaches a given size.
Rotate to origin line
Rotates the coordinate system about a given axis so that a line passing
through the origin and the nominal coordinate intersects the tertiary
reference (measured point) in the plane. After this rotation, the X
value and Y value of the nominal point and the tertiary reference have
same ratios.
Rotate to same deviation
Rotates the coordinate system about a given axis until a line between
a point in the plane (the nominal coordinate) and the tertiary reference has a slope of 45. After this rotation, the delta-X and delta-Y
of the nominal point and the tertiary reference are equal (delta-X
(delta-Y) is the difference between the two X values (Y values)).
The options only appear in the Special Functions window if they
would be reasonable to use and the base / start alignment satisfies certain
preconditions.
Prerequisites
To be able to use the Rotate reference axis by secondary reference function, the following preconditions must be met:
The secondary reference of the base / start alignment was defined by

either a circle, a slot, a rectangle, an ellipse or a point.
For both coordinates of the plane in which the base alignment is rotated, the tertiary reference must be
defined with the same feature, or

with 2 planes, or
with two 2D lines, or
remain unchanged in both coordinates.
Rotate to Distance
Use the Rotate to Distance function to enter a desired value on the
coordinate axis for a feature. CALYPSO rotates the part alignment until
it is set to this value.
Example
The following example illustrates the function:

The origin of the part alignment is in the bore on the left. The center of
the bore on the right is 50 mm away in the X axis. This distance should
maintain the nominal of 40 mm.
3-38
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
50
CALYPSO rotates the part alignment around the origin in the left bore
until the nominal distance is achieved.
40
Rotating to origin line

The Rotate to origin line function can only be performed when certain conditions are met (see Rotating reference axis by secondary reference [ 337]).
This allows rotating the coordinate system such that a line going through
the coordinate origin will go through the point that was used as the third
reference when the base alignment was defined.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-39
When using the Rotate to origin line function, CALYPSO rotates the
part alignment until the specified line touches the defined point.
Rotate to Origin line

Actual point (measured)
Yact
Y nom
Nominal coordinates
X act
X nom
In the new coordinate system, the relationships between the X values and
the Y values for both points (the one defined by the line and the point
for the tertiary reference) are exactly equal. The Rotate to origin line is
in a sense a Rotate to Equal Relationships.
Example

the bore on the right delivers the third reference for both the X and Y
axes.
With (20,30), a line is defined in the X-Y plane, which passes through the
origin and the point at X = 20 mm, Y = 30 mm.
After the Rotate to origin line function has been performed, the line
should also pass through the center of the bore on the right. CALYPSO
rotates the part alignment around the origin in the left bore until the line
touches the center of the bore on the right.
Rotating to same deviation

The Rotate to same deviation function can only be performed when
certain conditions are met (see Rotating reference axis by secondary
reference [ 337]).
This allows rotating the coordinate system such that a specified line with
the slope 1 (equals 45) will go through the point that was used as the
third reference when the base alignment was defined.
When using the Rotate to same deviation function, CALYPSO rotates
the part alignment until the specified line touches the defined point.
3-40
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Rotate to equal deviation

Actual point (measured)
Nominal coordinates
X
In the new coordinate system, the difference between the X values (between the just defined point and the point of the tertiary reference) equals
the difference between the Y values which is why it is called Rotate to
same deviation.
Example

the bore on the right delivers the third reference for both the X and Y
axes.
A line is defined with (20,30) in the X-Y plane of the coordinate system;
it will pass with the slope 1 through the point at X = 20 mm, Y = 30 mm.
After the Rotate to same deviation function has been performed, the
line should also pass through the center of the bore on the right. CALYPSO rotates the part alignment around the origin in the left bore until
the line touches the center of the bore on the right.
Rotating the reference axis

1 Make sure that the necessary requirements [ 338] for rotating the
reference axis have been met.
window.
The Special Functions dialog box appears on the screen. Once the prerequisites are met, additional options and input fields will appear in
the upper part for Reference axis setting in secondary reference.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-41
Enter
distance
6 Select the desired option:

Rotate to Distance
Rotate to origin line
Rotate to same deviation
7 Rotate to Distance: Enter the distance to be achieved by rotating (important: pay attention to sign).
- or In Rotate to origin line or same deviation: Enter the coordinates of the
point through which the line should pass.
8 Click twice OK.
You can observe the rotation of the base alignment directly in the CAD
window.
Loading a secondary alignment for a

base / start alignment
Purpose of loading a secondary alignment
You can take the secondary alignment for a base alignment/start alignment from another base alignment/start alignment.
Example of application
This can be necessary in the following case, for example: During the
alignment of a workpiece, the primary and the tertiary alignment is to be
measured on the workpiece. The secondary alignment, however, is to be
measured on a fixture that is no longer accessible after clamping down
the workpiece.
As a result, the feature for the secondary alignment can no longer be
measured as soon as the workpiece is clamped onto the fixture.
The base / start alignment can nonetheless be created. To do this, measure the secondary alignment in a separate measurement plan before the
CNC run. You then define the base alignment / start alignment of the
3-42
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
workpiece initially without secondary alignment, taking it instead from

the existing base / start alignment of the separate measurement plan.
To do this, apply the Load alignment for secondary reference
function in the Special Functions window for the base alignment /
start alignment.
Particular aspects when loading the secondary

alignment
Prerequisites
You can load the secondary reference for a base alignment/start alignment from another base alignment/start alignment under the following
circumstances:
The current base/start alignment is a standard coordinate system (no

alternative alignment method such as 3D Best Fit, RPS Method, P6
Method).
The primary alignment in the current base/start alignment has already

been defined.
The secondary alignment in the current base/start alignment has not

yet been defined.
NOTICE
Both the Load alignment for secondary reference and the Reference axis setting in secondary reference options thus cancel
one another.
Measurement plan already exists
Also in an already existing measurement plan it is possible to load the

secondary reference of the base/start alignment from another base/start
alignment. This, however, is only practical if the following conditions are
met:
The primary alignments of the current and stored base/start alignment

are approximately the same.
Otherwise, the nominal data is offset so much by the transformation after

the loading of the secondary reference that no normal measurement is
possible any longer.
NOTICE
It is not admissible to enter just any base alignment as secondary alignment and then do the qualifying of the alignment thereafter.
Sequential order during
adjustment
If the workpiece on the machine has been displaced and it thereby becomes necessary to re-qualify the base/start alignment, you must always
qualify the base/start alignment first and load its secondary reference afterward. Not until afterward do you redefine the base/start alignment in
which you want to load the secondary reference.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-43
How the new axis is determined when loading

the secondary reference
How does CALYPSO determine the new coordinate axis of the base/start
alignment from the existing base/start alignment?
Determining the space
axis
The first coordinate axis of the new base/start alignment that has already
been determined is compared with the six directions of the axes from the
existing base/start alignment. Among these six axis directions, the axis is
found that forms the smallest angle to the new primary alignment.
Stored
alignment
Z
Y
Spatial
orientation
and origin in
Z
Origin in
X and Y
The determined axis direction of the existing system forms, together with
the primary alignment of the new base/start alignment, an angle smaller
than or equal to 45.
For the secondary alignment, one of the two other axes of the existing
base/start alignment is used:
nearest direction of the existing system
-X
-Y
-Z
axis of existing system used for secondary reference
It is now important for the new coordinate system to know for which axis
direction (in the new coordinate system) the axis of the existing system
determined above is to be used:
primary axis of the new system
the existing axis becomes an axis in the new system
The primary direction (of the new alignment) is found in the first line, the
secondary axis is below it.
3-44
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Loading the alignment for the secondary

reference
For a new base alignment/start alignment that is to be created, you can
take the secondary alignment from another base alignment/start alignment.
Conditions:
A base/start alignment exists whose secondary alignment is the
same as the desired secondary alignment of the new base/start
alignment.
The secondary reference for the new base/start alignment has not
yet been defined.
1 Determine the primary alignment of the new base/start alignment.
2 Determine the tertiary alignment of the new base/start alignment.
window.
The Special Functions dialog box appears on the screen. Once the prerequisites are met, additional input fields will appear in the upper part
under Alignment for secondary reference.
7 Tick the Load alignment for secondary reference check box.

8 Select here the base alignment/start alignment whose secondary reference you want to accept for the current base alignment/start alignment.
9 Click OK.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-45
If the base alignment file cannot be loaded, a remark is displayed.

If CALYPSO is in CNC mode, the stop light is switched over to red
instead, and the CNC run is discontinued. A line is displayed in the
status monitor with a corresponding error text.
10Click OK.
Particular aspects when loading the secondary

reference
When you want to use the Load alignment for secondary reference, observe a few special aspects.
Coordination with the rotate special function

In case you have loaded the secondary alignment from another base/start
alignment and, for example, you rotate the system by the primary alignment, the secondary axis of the resulting base/start system will point in a
direction other than the loaded secondary axis.
As soon as the base alignment is calculated a second time, the axis for
the secondary alignment can no longer be determined correctly.
The rotate function is not blocked, however, because, e.g., rotating
around the axis of the secondary alignment may be useful.
Other requirements
The following situation is presented as an example: There are two measurement plans one, to measure the plane rotation on a fixture, and a
second, to measure the workpiece on the fixture.
If the base alignment of the plane rotation was re-qualified (e.g., because
the fixture was moved or turned about) and now it is switched over to
the other measurement plan, a very difficult situation develops.
The plane rotation was changed but the base alignment of the workpiece
is still in the same position. This can be compared to the following: A
workpiece was defined on the machine by probings (with complete base
alignment). Now the workpiece is turned about and a new plane is measured. This plane is now replaced by the feature of the current plane rotation of the base alignment. The consequence is: When the base alignment window is opened and closed again, all nominal geometries are
calculated again (shifting of the CAD model) due to the fact that the
actual features of the primary and tertiary alignments were not likewise
measured again.
To compensate for this, the base alignment is calculated from the nominal
geometries again when the base alignment window opens. If the stored
alignment has not changed, the nominal base alignment has a zero vector
and a universal matrix. If it has changed, however, the difference between
the existing alignment and the new alignment in relation to the current
alignment is added and saved.
3-46
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The calculation and saving of the base alignment when opening the window is only carried out in the case where the Load alignment for
secondary reference function is activated.
Calculating a base alignment back to the

CAD origin
For certain applications in the automobile industry (especially for horizontal-arm machines), a base alignment is needed whose origin coincides
with the origin of the CAD model. For this purpose, CALYPSO offers the
Keep CAD Origin function that takes a base alignment that has already
been calculated back to the coordinate system of the CAD model.
Additionally, special automatic functions (offset, rotate by an angle and
rotate by coordinates) are calculated that compensate a shift or a wrong
turn.
Conditions:
The base alignment exists already and possesses the correct alignment.
2 Select the Change current base alignment option and click
OK.
4 Tick the Keep original alignment from CAD model check box.
CALYPSO calculates the special functions (offset, rotate by distances
and rotate by an angle) that are necessary to take the current base
alignment back to the CAD origin and thereby maintain its alignment.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-47
The names of the special functions calculated are listed. Besides OK

and Cancel, all buttons and input fields are set to inactive.
Note: If you untick the Keep alignment from CAD model check
box, the calculated special functions remain in the list. The buttons
and input fields are active again.
5 Click twice OK.
Accepting local alignment from the CAD

model
Conditions:
The base alignment exists already and possesses the correct alignment.
2 Select the Change current base alignment option and click
OK.
4 Tick the Accept local alignment from the CAD model check
box.
5 Move the mouse over the CAD model in the CAD window.
Every time you move over a local alignment in the CAD model, the
name, the offset and the rotation are displayed at the position in the
CAD window.
6 Click with the mouse to transfer the desired alignment to the window.
7 Click twice OK.
3-48
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Deleting a base alignment

You can delete a part alignment when you no longer need it.
1 Select File Delete Base Alignment.
2 Select the names of the base alignments you would like to delete in
the list.
3 Click OK.
Only the base alignments as such are deleted, not the references and
features on which they are based.
NOTICE
If you delete a base alignment, you must define new part alignments. See
Adapting a base / start alignment [ 327].
Setting a base alignment to zero

If you want to undo the settings made in defining a base alignment to
set it up again, set it to zero.
1 Select Resources Utilities Set Base Alignment to
zero.
Alternative alignment methods

Overview of alternative alignment methods
Apart from the standard method (see Creating a new base/start alignment [ 324]), you have a choice of four other alignment methods:
3D Best Fit
RPS Alignment (RPS 321 or RPS Freeform)
Six Points
3D Best Fit
The 3D Best Fit can be used to calculate the alignment for workpieces for
which no clear references have been defined. This is a situation frequently
encountered in free form measurements.
The 3D best fit is a method that delivers the best possible fit between any
number of points or geometric elements and their specified geometry.
Number of points
Description
at least 1,
The errors between specified and actual points are squared and added up. The base alignment is changed until this value is minimized.
no upper limit
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-49
If you select the Best fit on CAD model option, the actual points are
first aligned with the nominal points (according to Gauss) and the perpendicular base points of the actual points aligned in this way are then
calculated on the CAD model. Finally, the actual points are aligned with
the perpendicular base points (according to Gauss).
RPS Method
CALYPSO supports two RPS methods: RPS 321 and RPS Freeform.
RPS 321
The RPS 321 method is not suitable for free form measurements. RPS is
short for Reference Point System. RPS alignment is based on the 3-2-1
rule.
Number of points
Description
at least 3,
A coordinate (e.g. Z) is fixed 3 times
maximum 6
A coordinate (e.g. Y) is fixed 2 times
A coordinate (e.g. X) is fixed 1 time
RPS alignment is usually an iterative process performed with the aid

of a loop.
Unlike other methods, RPS alignment is based on the points that are
specified in the drawing of the workpiece.
Alignment is therefore subject to rules and is not wholly user-definable.
One of the advantages is therefore that different results obtained with a
given workpiece are comparable because they are all based on the same
system of coordinates.
RPS Freeform
Contrary to the RPS 321 method, the RPS Freeform method is suitable for
free form measurements. It uses the same algorithms as the HOLOS program and is primarily used for measuring body panels for motor vehicles.
Number of points
Description
at least 1,
The errors between specified and actual points are squared and added up. The base alignment is changed until this value is minimized.
no upper limit
The RPS Freeform method has the same function as the 3D best fit according to nominal planes. The main planes of the coordinate system
which was selected in the RPS alignment represent the nominal planes.
If more than one direction is defined for a feature, the same feature is
called several times in each direction.
Best fit according to
nominal plane
The normal 3D best fit is a method that delivers the best possible iterative
fit between the actual points and the nominal points.
3-50
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
For the Best fit according to nominal plane, the actual points are first
projected onto the nominal plane. The nominal plane is defined via the
nominal point and the normal. Then the best possible fit between the
actual points and the nominal points takes place. The perpendicular base
points are recalculated with each iteration step.
P6 Method
The P6 Method is particularly suitable for the alignment of tubes.
Number of points
Description
exactly 3
The first point defines the origin in X, Y and Z.

The first and the second point define the main axis.
The third point defines rotation about this primary axis.
Using an alternative alignment method

Performing a 3D best fit or an alignment according to
RPS or P6
1 To add a new coordinate system to the measurement plan, select the

alignment method from the Resources Utilities submenus and
double-click the icon added to the list of characteristics.
- or To create a new part alignment, click the Base / Start Alignment
icon in the list of the prerequisites and then select the desired procedure from the list.
The definition templates for all these methods are very similar in appearance. The illustration shows the 3D best fit, called from the prerequisites (base alignment).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-51
Select also the type of alignment for the RPS alignment: RPS 321 or
RPS Freeform.
The dialog box for RPS alignment has X, Y and Z check boxes that you
must use to define which feature constrains which degrees of freedom.
2 Click Select Features to define the features you want to use for
alignment.
3-52
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Here all of the features that have been defined will be displayed.
3 Select the features you need for alignment (multiple selection with the
Ctrl key).
The features you select in this way are listed in the definition template
for alignment.
4 If you have to define reference features in addition to those already
listed:
Click the line of the feature for which you want to define a reference.
An arrow appears, indicating the active line.
Click Select References.
In the selection window, click the feature you want to define as a
reference.
Click OK.
5 If you want to fit actual values to nominal positions as part of alignment, define the nominal position in the columns headed Nominal
X, Nominal Y and Nominal Z.
6 The next step in RPS alignment is to define the fixation direction indicated in the drawing for each feature you selected (X, Y or Z check
box).
7 If (during alignment with 3D best fit) you want to perform the best fit
on the CAD model, tick the Best fit on CAD model check box.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-53
Best fit is then a three-step procedure:

The actual points are fitted in the conjugated nominal points according to Gauss.
The perpendicular base points of the fitted actual points on the
CAD model are calculated.
The actual points are fitted in the conjugated perpendicular base
points according to Gauss.
8 Select the alignment method to be used in the CNC run. For more
information, see Definition template (Alignment) in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
9 If you are ready to execute the alignment you just defined, click the
Execute Manual Run Now button.
CALYPSO will step you through the alignment procedure and prompt
you to take probings (see Controlling the manual run [ 78]).
10Click OK.
See Example: Loop for alignment to RPS [ 646].
3-54
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Prerequisites for the rotary table

CALYPSO makes it possible to use an installed or mobile rotary table actively or passively.
If a rotary table is logged in and activated for the measurement plan in
the default settings, the icon for the rotary table appears in the list of
prerequisites. The bar next to the icon is red as long as no valid rotary
table axis has been determined.
Click the button to open the Rotary Table window.
Rotary Table
RT activated for this meas. plan
Rotate Now
Passive RT
Activation for CNC run
RT prealignment at start of run

RT home position
0.00
RT axis definition for this Measurement Plan

Load existing RT axis
Measure RT axis
Align part mechanically to

Set To
By Eye / Manually
Help Position
0.00
Normal from Feature

Manual
RT clearance paths
Rotationally symmetrical part near RT center
Auto
Rotate to CMM side
0.00
*
Base Alignment Axis
Auto
Rotate to CMM side
+X
and set RT position to

OK
Retract to current side

Retract to top
Mass Moment of Inertia (MMI)
Redefine at every CNC start
0.00
*
*
Move clear during RT rotation
Define MMI now

Lower RT at end of CNC
Reset
The position and the use of the rotary table for the measurement plan
can be determined in this and in other windows. The necessary prerequisites are described in the following sections of the chapter Rotary table:
Logging in the rotary table [ 127]
Positioning the rotary table manually [ 1235]
Qualifying the rotary table axis [ 1215]
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-55
Defining the clearance planes

Use of the clearance planes
Clearance planes enable CMMs with CNC capability to move styli around
the workpiece without risk of collision. These clearance planes form together a safety cube that acts as a kind of imaginary box around the
workpiece and clamping device, protecting the stylus against collision.
Additionally, to avoid collisions with other workpieces or objects on the
CMM table, you can define an outer clearance plane (Defining the
outer clearance planes [ 671]).
Components of the clearance planes

The safety cube is composed of the clearance planes. It acts as a kind of
imaginary box around the workpiece and clamping device, protecting
the stylus against collision.
Names of the clearance
planes
The names of the clearance planes, of which the safety cube is composed,
begin with the abbreviation CP, followed by the direction to be protected.
For example, CP +X. The names of clearance planes that are additionally
defined when a rotary table is used consist of the abbreviation RTCP and
the direction to be protected. For example, RTCP +X.
Do not make the clearance planes unnecessarily large, because in some
cases this could lead to unfavorable routing or even collisions.
Any time the part alignment is changed such that a new origin or axis
alignment is defined, you must redefine the clearance planes. Failure to do
so may result in collisions with the part.
Prerequisites
The preconditions that have to be satisfied before you can define the
clearance planes are as follows:
All styli of the current stylus system must be qualified. See Qualify-
ing styli manually [ 1134]
Method
3-56
The size of the probe must be defined in the default settings under
Extras Settings CMM (on the Probe index card).
There are various methods for defining the clearance planes:
You can define the corners of the cube with the CMM [ 357].
You can type in the X, Y and Z locations of the corners manually [ 358].
If you do not have a CMM position (or I-POS) button on your CMM
control console (which allows you to record the current position of
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
the stylus), then you can use the CMM to probe the outside edges
of the part itself as its clearance planes [ 359].
If you use a CAD model, you can generate the clearance planes
automatically [ 360]. All you have to do is tell CALYPSO how far
you want the clearance planes to be from the workpiece.
These methods are described in the following sections.

Block Edges
Blocking edges is a way of further restricting stylus travel without the need
to change the size of the clearance planes. This can be useful, for example,
if you have two or more workpieces positioned on the table or the design
of the clamping device is such that it could cause a collision at an edge.
The new route is calculated automatically. See Blocking individual
edges of the clearance planes [ 361].
Defining the clearance planes with the

CMM
Defining the corner points of the clearance planes with
the CMM
Conditions:
Your CMM control console has a button that can be used to confirm the current position of the stylus.
1 Click the Clearance Planes icon in the measurement plan area on
the Measurement Plan tab.
2 Under Alignment, select the reference alignment for the coordinates.
The side areas of the safety cube are aligned according to this reference alignment.
3 Move the CMM to a position approximately 10 millimeters outside the
top rear right corner of the workpiece (position 1):
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-57
(1)
(2)
4 Press the position button on the right-hand joystick three times to save
the current position.
5 Move the CMM to a position approximately 10 millimeters outside the
opposing diagonal (bottom front left corner) of the workpiece (position 2).
6 Press the position button on the right-hand joystick three times to save
the current position.
7 Click OK.
The Update Clearance Plane Settings For Defined Features? message is displayed.
8 Click YES if you want to update the clearance planes for all defined
features, or NO if you want to retain the original clearance planes.
You will find more information on updating clearance planes in Clearance planes in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
The bar next to the Clearance Plane icon is now green.
Defining the clearance planes manually

If you want to define the corners of the clearance planes manually, you
must enter the x, y and z coordinates for two corners.
3-58
3 Type the coordinate values into the X, Y and Z boxes.

61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4 Click OK.
Defining the clearance planes by probing

If you want to define the two corners of the clearance planes by probing,
you have to define the X, Y and Z coordinates by probing.
The clearance planes generated by this strategy are very close to the workpiece.
In order to avoid the risk of damaging a stylus, you should set a clearance
distance of at least 10 mm (see Moving the approach position closer to
the feature [ 672]).
(1)
z y
x
(2)
Defining the corners of the clearance planes

3 Define the first corner (1).
You do this by probing the workpiece in Z, X and Y, consecutively.
CALYPSO automatically enters the values in each field in turn and
highlights the next field so that you can determine the value by probing.
Note: If a corner is inaccessible, you can move to the corresponding
position on the clearance plane, select the stylus, highlight the appropriate input field and use the intermediate position.
4 Define the second corner (3).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-59
The procedure is the same as in step 3, but you probe in the opposite
direction.
5 Click OK.
Generating the clearance planes

automatically
All you have to do is specify the clearance distance (offset) in millimeters.
Conditions:
The CAD file of the workpiece is open in the CAD window.
3 Click Clearance Plane from CAD model.
4 Type in the offset in millimeters (e.g. 10) and click OK.
The computed values appear in the input fields. The clearance planes
appear around the CAD model.
5 Click OK.
The Clearance Plane icon is now green.
Testing the clearance planes

CALYPSO allows you to validate the clearance planes.
3-60
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
NOTICE
Check that you have defined all the clearance planes (depending on the
geometry of the workpiece, the CMM might not be able to reach each
plane directly).
Testing drive to a clearance plane

2 Highlight the clearance plane of your choice (e.g. +Z) in the Clearance
Plane window.
3 Click Test Drive To The Selected Clearance Plane.
The CMM moves to the clearance plane.
Note: The stylus will always first travel out in the direction of the +Z
axis, before the CMM moves in the selected direction (e.g. +X).
4 If necessary redefine the value.
5 Select, if necessary, the Coordinate system again.
6 Click OK.
Blocking individual edges of the

clearance planes
When you block an edge of the clearance planes in this way you prohibit the CMM from moving along the edge. It is advisable to block
edges in the following cases:
You have positioned more than one workpiece on the measuring table.
The clamping device could cause a collision at an edge.
Under these circumstances, blocking the edges can prevent collisions

without the need to change the size of the clearance planes.
Blocking edges of the clearance planes

1 Select Plan Navigation Block edges.
The Block Edges dialog box is opened.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-61
Check box for

blocking an edge
Note: The bottom edges (the edges of the face on the table) are always blocked. The -Y or +Y edge is also blocked if the measuring machine is of the horizontal-arm type. You cannot revoke these settings.
2 Tick the check boxes for the edges you want to block.
3 Click OK.
The edges you selected are blocked with immediate effect.
3-62
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Editing printout settings
Editing printout settings

On the Measurement Plan tab, you can define the use of multiple
printouts under Multiple Printouts. In addition, you can define the
contents and representation of multiple printouts, i.e. you define the basic printouts and Basic Reports to be included in the multiple printout and
the desired output sequence.
The settings are defined in the Definition of Multiple Printouts
dialog box:
You can find more details under Creating multiple printouts [ 810].
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-63
Working with measurement plan editors

Overview of the measurement plan
editors
The measurement plan editor provides you with a quick and easy way of
checking and, if necessary, changing important measurement plan settings and values. You can choose whether to apply your changes to the
entire measurement plan (global) or to selected features only.
There are two separate editors, one for features and one for characteristics:
Measurement plan editor for features [ 364]
Measurement plan editor for characteristics [ 365]
Measurement plan editor for features

This editor is used to edit the features of the measurement plan.
This is where you can check and, if necessary, change general settings
for features. The settings in question are feature-related definitions
and settings applicable to the entire measurement plan, e.g. those
relating to measurement strategies, styli and clearances in a CNC run.
Here you can overwrite the definitions made in the default settings
for the current measurement plan.
Additionally, you can have the nominal data (values or formulas) of

the features displayed and edit them for individual or several features.
You thus overwrite the definitions made in the definition templates
of the features.
Open the measurement plan editor for features by using the icon in the
list of prerequisites or via Resources Features Settings Editor.
3-64
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Measurement Plan Editor Features

from higher setting (Measurement Plan/Group)
MAN-CNC-Modus
Not Available On System

Travel
Accept for:
Measurement Plan
Probing
selected features
Stylus System
Units
Set To
Manual Point Masking
Activate point masking after time interval
MAN CNC Mode
Time interval after scanning start [sec]
Setup Mode
Time interval before scanning end [sec]

Activate point masking according to the number
Printer
Number after scanning start
CMM Parameters
Number before scanning end
Geometry (Evaluation Settings)

Geometry (Nominal Data)
Plane
Warning Limits
Plane
Optical Settings
Circle
Circle
Circle
Cylinder
Cylinder
Cylinder
Cylinder
Circle
Circle
2D Line
Plane
Cone
Circle
OK
Tabular editor
Cancel
Help
For some attributes, the editor is in table format which enables you to
edit the settings quickly and easily.
For more information, see Working with the tabular editor [ 611]
and Measurement plan editor features in the CALYPSO dialog reference
in the Online Help.
Measurement plan editor for

characteristics
This editor is used to edit the characteristics of the measurement plan.
This is where you can check and, if necessary, change general settings
for characteristics.
Here you can overwrite the definitions made in the default settings
for the current measurement plan.
Additionally, you can have the nominal data (values and formulas,
geometrical features and datums) of the characteristics displayed and
edit them for individual or several characteristics.
You thus overwrite the definitions made in the definition templates
of the characteristics.
Select Resources Characteristics Settings Editor to open the

measurement plan editor for characteristics.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-65
Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics

** = from higher setting (Measurement Plan/Group)
Warning Limit in %
!! = Not Available On System

Printout
Accept for:
Form Plot
Measurement Plan
selected features
Characteristic to Statistic
Mode for nominal values
Tolerance Mode
Show formulas
Units
Set To
Type
Characteristics (Evaluation Settings)
Characteristics (Nominal Data)
Z-value1
Angle One 1
W1
Angle Two 1
W2
Angle of lnclination1
TiltAng
Angle of Rotation1
RotAng
Diameter1
Diameter Two1
D2
Radius1
Radius Two1
R2
Width1
Width
Length1
Length
Value
OK
Tabular editor
Cancel
Help
For some attributes, the editor is in table format which enables you to
edit the settings quickly and easily.
For more information, see Working with the tabular editor [ 611]
and Measurement plan editor characteristics in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
3-66
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Temperature compensation
Purpose of temperature compensation
You can configure CALYPSO to consider the temperature-related expansion/contraction of the workpiece and the X, Y and Z scales of the CMM
when taking the measurements. Additionally, you may establish temperature limits that trigger a warning when going above or below the limits
at the start of the CNC run.
Temperature compensation is of great significance for precision of the

measurements, since the nominal values are generally based on a workpiece and ambient temperature of 20C, and the different materials expand/contract to different degrees as the temperature varies.
Therefore, the expansion/contraction must be compensated in accordance with the respective material, if the workpiece cannot be brought to
the reference temperature.
CALYPSO receives the information about the temperature, depending

on your CMM's equipment, from sensors on the scales or temperature
sensors on the workpiece, through probing with a temperature probe,
from a file or by simply manually entering the temperature value.
In any case, you must enter the coefficients of expansion for the
workpiece materials directly.
Most manuals on materials science give the coefficients of expansion.
The following table shows the coefficients of expansion of certain
common materials:
Material
Coefficient (micrometers/C)
Aluminum (2024-T3)
22.7
Aluminum (6061-T6)
24.3
Aluminum (7079-T6)
24.7
Cast iron
11.7
Copper
16.6
Magnesium (HK31A-H24)
25.2
Nickel
13.0
Steel (AISI C1020)
15.1
Steel (AISI 304)
17.8
Carbon steel
11.3
Titanium (B 120VCA)
9.4
NOTICE
Since the coefficient of expansion depends on the alloy, the values may
vary slightly from one table to another.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-67
Thermal plate bending
Differences in temperature above and below the granite plate of a CMM

can cause a slight curvature of the plate. In high-precision CMMs, the
thermal plate bending effect is also compensated.
The compensation for thermal plate bending of the measuring table is
automatically activated as soon as CALYPSO calculates the temperature
compensation for the CMM scales. In this case, the plate will be simulated
by a beam model.
How does CALYPSO learn the coefficients of expansion?

The coefficients of expansion must be entered manually. If the workpiece
material does not change, just once per measurement plan (Entering
temperatures manually [ 376]).
Same workpieces from
different materials
Workpieces from different materials
If you use multiple materials to manufacture the same part, for example
a cast-iron version and an aluminum version, you have two options:
Create two measurement plans that are identical except for the coefficients of expansion for temperature compensation.
Use the same measurement plan for both versions, but always remember to enter the coefficient of expansion for the respective material before starting a new series.
If various parts of a workpiece consist of different materials, you must

enter the different coefficients of expansion for the corresponding features in the Measurement Plan Editor Features [ 68].
CALYPSO calculates the correct results for each individual feature. However, results for the calculation of which values of features with different
coefficients of expansion are used may be inaccurate.
How does CALYPSO learn the temperatures?

There are several ways for CALYPSO to learn the actual temperatures:
The CMM has temperature sensors on the scales in the X, Y and Z

directions or on the workpiece. In this case, you need only start the
temperature compensation (Activating the temperature compensation [ 369]).
Usually, the temperature is measured directly before the probing of
the first feature takes place. If you use the readWPTemperature PCM
command in the input parameters of the measurement plan, you can
bring this measurement forward.
3-68
Have the CMM do a temperature probing of the workpiece (only on

CMMs with a VAST probe). To do so, you must configure the temperature probing (Configuring automatic temperature probing
(CNC) [ 371]).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Prior to running the measurement plan, you read the temperature

from a file or via a dialog and overwrite any existing values (Determining the workpiece temperature externally [ 375]).
The CMM has neither a temperature sensor nor temperature stylus.

In this case, enter the temperature(s) of the workpiece or scales that
you measured or determined yourself (Entering temperatures manually [ 376]).
Activating the temperature

compensation
If the temperature of the workpiece to be measured or the room temperature is not 20C (68F),you can only measure accurately with temperature compensation activated.
1 Click the Temperature Compensation icon on the Measurement Plan tab.
The Temperature Compensation window appears on the screen.
2 Tick the Temperature Compensation on/off check box.

3 Set under Part temperature of sensor which temperature
sensor should determine the workpiece temperature.
Combine several numbers using a plus sign +. Specify ranges
using a hyphen -, e.g. 2-5.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-69
Here you can also enter a formula.

4 Click the icon to display the current sensor values for the workpiece
temperature in a window.
5 Enter the correct coefficient of expansion under Workpiece.
Note: If the workpiece consists partly of other materials, enter the coefficients of expansion for the corresponding features in the Measurement plan editor features.
6 Tick the Warning if workpiece temperature over ... or under ... check box if such a warning should be displayed at CNC start,
and enter the upper and lower limits for the temperature.
7 Tick the Warning, if the difference between workpiece
temperature and qualification temperature of the stylus
used is greater than ... check box if such a warning should be
displayed at CNC start, and enter the maximum admissible difference.
Once you have activated temperature compensation, this means the following:
If your CMM has automatic temperature sensors, the measured temperatures will be used automatically to correct the measurements.
If your CMM does not have automatic temperature sensors, CALYPSO

will automatically display the Temperature Compensation window before you run a measurement plan. You can then perform or
configure a temperature probing or enter the measured temperatures
yourself.
Determining the temperatures by

manual probing
If your CMM is equipped with the VAST probe and a stylus with temperature sensor (temperature stylus), you can use CALYPSO to determine the
precise workpiece temperature by probing.
2 Tick Temperature Compensation on/off, followed by the Temperature probing on/off check box as well (if the temperature
stylus has already been selected, both check boxes are ticked automatically).
The Probe with temperature stylus at one or several points on the
part! prompt will appear.
3 If the temperature stylus has not yet been selected: select it now.
3-70
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4 If the temperature stylus has not yet been qualified: qualify it now by
probing the reference sphere once in line with the shaft.
For the temperature probing, you only need a rough, not a highly precise qualification of the stylus (Qualifying the styli [ 1125]). To
do this, select the Manual mode and, under Geometry, the Temperature stylus option.
5 Probe the workpiece with the temperature stylus.
In a temperature measurement, the probe travels until it detects contact with the workpiece and then another 3 mm against the measuring
force.
After the first probing, an entry called Temperature probing will
appear in the list of features.
6 Probe other points on the workpiece.
After each probing, the temperature and the location of the point will
be determined and displayed.
The data regarding the location of the points will be stored in the
technology list for the Temperature probing feature. You can edit
the data (Configuring automatic temperature probing
(CNC) [ 371]).
The measured temperatures will be determined and displayed in the
Temperature Compensation window.
CALYPSO calculates the average of all of the measured temperatures
and enters this value in the Temperature Compensation window. This value will then be used (instead of the temperature from
any possibly present temperature sensor) for the temperature compensation for the workpiece.
All of the measured temperatures and the calculated average will be
included in the default printout.
Configuring automatic temperature

probing (CNC)
If your CMM is equipped with the VAST probe and a stylus with a temperature sensor (temperature stylus), you can let the system perform a
Temperature probing automatically in the CNC run.
Temperature probing at
the beginning of a run
If automatic temperature probing is enabled (Activating the temperature compensation [ 369]), CALYPSO will begin probing the appropriate points on the workpiece with the temperature stylus at the start of
the CNC run (in other words before the CNC alignment) and will thus
determine the temperature of the workpiece to a high degree of precision.
Adding a temperature
probing feature
The simplest way to add a Temperature probing feature to the measurement plan is to perform a manual temperature probing (Determin61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-71
ing the temperatures by manual probing [ 370]). A Temperature probing entry with the probed points will be automatically added to the list
of features.
The Temperature probing feature added to the measurement plan can
be edited like any other feature; for example, you can change the point
probed if necessary. You can also copy or delete it. In this manner, you
can add several temperature probed points to a measurement plan.
NOTICE
At the beginning of a CNC run, the system will only perform the Temperature probing feature that is entered under Feature in the Temperature Compensation window.
Configuring the temperature probing in a measurement plan

2 Tick Temperature Compensation on/off, followed by the Temperature probing on/off check box as well (if the temperature
stylus has already been selected, both check boxes are ticked automatically).
The Probe with temperature stylus at one or several points on the
part! prompt will appear.
3 Cancel and click the Switch to Feature Menu button next to
Feature.
The Selection dialog box appears on the screen. In contrast to the
usual window for selecting features, this one only lists the Temperature probing features for selection.
(If the measurement plan does not yet contain any Temperature
probing features, the New option will be preset and the Edit check
box will be ticked.)
3-72
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4 To activate the desired Temperature probing feature, select it and

confirm with OK.
The selected feature will now be shown under Feature in the Temperature Compensation window.
5 To edit a specific Temperature probing feature, select it, tick the
Edit check box and confirm with OK.
This opens the Temperature probing definition template of the
feature.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-73
To define the probing strategy, click Strategy and specify the

probing method in the Strategy window.
Here you can define a list of points, preset probing and intermediate
points, define CMM steps with and without probing and insert programmed stops. .
Furthermore, you can edit the Clearance data.
With OK, you will be returned to the definition template.
The selected and edited Temperature probing feature appears under Feature in the Temperature Compensation window.
3-74
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Temperature probing
during a CNC start
At the start of the CNC run, the temperature probing is conducted automatically in accordance with the selected feature. CALYPSO calculates
the average of all of the measured temperatures and enters this value in
the Temperature Compensation window. This value will then be
used (instead of the temperature from any possibly present temperature
sensor) for the temperature compensation for the workpiece.
Warnings when temperature limits are exceeded
If you have enabled the issuing of a warning when the workpiece temperature limits have been exceeded, a warning will be issued accordingly
before the run begins. You may decide either to cancel or to continue the
run.
If you have enabled the issuing of a warning when the difference between
the qualification temperature and the current stylus temperature is exceeded, a warning will be issued accordingly before the run begins. You
may decide either to cancel or to continue the run.
Printout
All of the measured temperatures and the calculated average will be included in the default printout.
Determining the workpiece temperature

externally
You can determine yourself the workpiece temperature for temperature
compensation outside CALYPSO and transfer it to CALYPSO by means of
a PCM function.
As required (e.g. for testing), you can read the value to be used from a
file or enter it via a dialog:
Reading the workpiece temperature from a file or a dialog

1 Activate temperature compensation in the Temperature Compensation window.
2 Use the setWPTemperature(temperatur) command in the measurement plan defaults. Enter the desired temperature in C for temperatur.
The following program code of the measurement plan defaults shows,
by way of example, the use of the PCM function:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-75
// DEFAULT DIALOG
//TEMP_VALUE=inquireNumber("Workpiece Temp. =")
// or
// LOAD FILE
ALIST=readListFile("wp_temp_value.txt")
// Access to the 1st value of the list parameter
TEMP_STRING=getParameterNamed(ALIST,1)
// Conversion of string to number
TEMP_VALUE=val(TEMP_STRING)
//
// DEFAULT OF TEMP. VALUE
setWPTemperature(TEMP_VALUE)
Entering temperatures manually

If your CMM does not have automatic temperature sensors, you must
enter the actual temperatures. This is done in the following two situations:
If you have activated temperature compensation and your CMM does

not have automatic temperature sensors, CALYPSO will display the
Temperature Compensation window before you run a measurement plan.
If the coefficients of expansion and temperatures displayed are correct, simply click OK. If not, enter the actual temperatures and start
Note: While the measurement plan is running, you cannot change the
temperature values.
If your CMM does not have automatic temperature sensors and you
do not conduct a temperature probing, you must activate the temperature compensation before starting the measurement plan. At this
point, it would be convenient to go ahead an enter the actual temperatures manually.
1 Click the Temperature Compensation icon in the measurement

plan area on the Measurement Plan tab.
3-76
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 Tick the Temperature Compensation on/off check box.

3 If the workpiece temperature is not exactly 20C, click in the Temperature input field under Part and enter the actual temperature
(e.g. the temperature of the room in which the workpiece was stored).
4 If the workpiece is made of a material with an expansion coefficient
different from the one specified, click in the Coefficient input field
under Part and enter the correct coefficient of expansion for the
workpiece.
Note: If the workpiece consists partly of other materials, enter the coefficients of expansion for the corresponding features in the Measurement plan editor features.
5 If the temperature in the room which contains the CMM is not exactly
20C (68F), click the Scales fields and enter the temperatures from
the X, Y and Z scales. (The coefficients of expansion for the scales are
already known to CALYPSO.)
The compensation values are calculated automatically and displayed.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-77
Temperature compensation of the base

alignment
Basics about temperature compensation of the
base alignment
CALYPSO compensates the different temperature- and material-related
expansions of the clamping and workpiece. The offset of the base alignment with respect to the clamping is taken into account.
Application
This two-step temperature compensation may be useful in the following

case: Aluminum motor parts remain firmly clamped in the clamping during the entire processing and measurement. The steel clamping has the
ambient temperature (approx. 15 - 37C), but the workpieces may be
heated up to 40C during production. Clamping and workpieces therefore expand to different degrees.
Principle of the two-step

compensation
To compute the different expansions, the base alignment is connected to

the clamping and its offset with respect to the machine alignment is
computed from the expansion of the clamping. The expansion of the
workpiece with regard to the clamping is added and both together form
the total expansion.
The prerequisite is that the workpiece is firmly connected to the clamping
at a certain point. This fixed point, the part reference point, is used to
compute the offset of the base alignment zero point.
If the workpiece and the clamping are tightly screwed together at more
than one point, tensions and deformations may be caused in the workpiece
in the event of larger temperature differences. Measuring errors resulting
from these deformations cannot be compensated by CALYPSO.
The two-step temperature compensation corrects positions of elements on
the workpiece, based on the zero point of the base alignment. Distances
between elements consisting of different materials cannot be corrected by
CALYPSO.
Chronological order
CALYPSO performs the measurements and computations for the temperature compensation at the beginning of the CNC run. Any temperature variations of the workpiece and clamping occurring during the CNC
run will not be considered. This is particularly important if you wish to
measure additional elements manually after the CNC run.
Redefining the base

alignment
When redefining the base alignment, the position of the part reference
point will not be recomputed automatically. You must change the part
reference point yourself after you have redefined the zero point of the
base alignment.
Printouts
Temperature compensation switching is indicated in the default printout.

The temperature compensation of the workpiece or base alignment is
highlighted by means of the comment workpiece or base alignment
in the temperature and correction value specifications.
3-78
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
If the base alignment temperature is to be shown in the custom printout,

you must edit the printout header. Use the Temp. Base Alignment list
entry in the SYS column.
The base alignment temperature is output in the "temperaturebasesystem" column in the table result file (*_hdr.txt).
Using the temperature compensation of the

base alignment
CALYPSO makes it possible to compensate the different temperatureand material-related expansions of the clamping and workpiece. To do
this, the offset of the base alignment with regard to the clamping is taken
into account.
1 Select Resources Measurement Plan Temperature
Compensation or click the Temperature Compensation icon
in the measurement plan area on the Measurement Plan tab.
2 Activate the temperature compensation of the workpiece, enter the
required specifications and confirm with OK.
3 Select Resources Measurement Plan Base Alignment
or click the Base /Start Alignment icon in the measurement plan
4 Activate the Temp. comp. for base alignment tab.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3-79
5 Activate Temperature compensation for different materials and enter the specifications for the temperature compensation of
the clamping.
6 If the part reference point is not the origin of the base alignment, you
must enter the coordinates of the part reference point based on the
base alignment.
The temperature compensation of the base alignment is thus prepared.
CNC run with temperature compensation of the base

alignment
CALYPSO computes the offset of the base alignment during the CNC run
directly after the measurement of the CNC base alignment on the clamping elements.
If necessary, CALYPSO begins by measuring the start or base alignment
manually. If defined, the temperature sensors are then read out and temperature probing is performed. Then CALYPSO switches to the temperature compensation of the clamping. The base alignment is measured
during the CNC run (if Automatic Run is activated). It is only then that
the temperature compensation is switched back to the workpiece and
the base alignment is offset. During the further procedure, CALYPSO uses
the expansion coefficient of the workpiece for temperature compensation.
Rules for measurement
To obtain correct measuring results, all elements of the base alignment

must only be measured on the clamping. During the CNC run, only features may be measured on the workpiece. Otherwise, incorrect measuring
results may be caused as the measuring points are corrected with an incorrect expansion coefficient and an incorrect temperature.
Expansion coefficients for individual features

You can define different coefficients for individual features under
Units Part expansion coefficient in the Measurement Plan
Editor Features. Thus you can take this into account for form characteristics if individual parts of the workpiece consist of another material
(ceramics).
However, this setting is not suitable for the consideration of different
material of the clamping as, in this case, it is not possible to consider the
position of all features and alignments.
3-80
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Chapter
Defining features
.................................................................................................................

Defining features ..................................................................................... 42
Details on definition of the features ....................................................... 438
Linking features in constructions ............................................................ 495
Measurement strategies for features .................................................... 4160
Path generation measuring features automatically ............................. 4178
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-1
Defining features
Defining features
Options for defining features
What is a feature?
A feature is an element that is to be measured by the CMM. Features

contain the nominal geometry, which is used for the purpose of evaluating the size, shape and position. The features are assigned to the associated characteristics.
NOTICE
The various methods for defining features in general are listed below.
Details on the individual features (e.g. how many probing points does a
cone need?) can be found in Details on definition of the features [ 438].
Defining features
There are the following ways of defining a feature:
Defining features using automatic feature recognition [ 414]

Probe the feature with the CMM. The automatic feature recognition
will recognize the geometry of the probed feature and will fill the
appropriate definition template.
This procedure is recommended in most cases.
If necessary, you can deactivate the automatic feature recognition for
each feature type (Defining the automatic feature recognition [ 413]).
Defining features using definition templates [ 47]

Enter a feature into the measurement plan and fill the definition template.
This possibility is also quite useful if you have already devised a measurement plan or if programming is to be effected away from the machine.
You only need to define frequently occurring similar features once
when using the Keep Position function.
Deriving features from CAD files [ 415]

Load an existing CAD model and extract its features into your measurement plan.
This possibility is useful if you want to program away from the machine.
You have the option of defining a constructed or theoretical feature

that cannot be probed by the CMM.
A feature of this kind consists of features that have already been defined, e.g. an intersection of two features (see Linking features in
constructions [ 495]).
Importing features
4-2
The additional options of CALYPSO offer further options of importing

features:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
The DMIS Input Postprocessor option makes it possible to import runs

programmed in DMIS and thereby create a new regular CALYPSO
measurement plan with features (see DMIS Import (option)).
You can use the Characteristic IN option to import features together

with the characteristics from the ProE and UG CAD systems into CALYPSO if they are available in a given format (STEP file in the AP 203
or AP 214 format and ASCII data in the Q-DAS format, specification
of WEPROM) (see Characteristic IN (option)).
Import of Agipp data for manufacturing segments (by means of the

Characteristic IN option) (see Characteristic IN (option)).
NOTICE
Details on the individual features (e.g. how many probing points does a
cone need?) can be found in Details on definition of the features [ 438].
Special measurement
plan features
In addition to the actual features, you can include special measurement

plan features in the list of features:
Branch to GEAR PRO (Holos and Gear additional features [ 479])
HOLOS macros (Holos and Gear additional features [ 479])
XML files for Blade (Turbine Blade additional feature [ 481])
Measurement plan macros (Using macros in the measurement

plan [ 650])
Preassignments for features

You can define various presettings for the features of your measurement
plan.
Strategy defaults
Select Resources Save / Load Defaults to preset strategy details
on the Strategy index card.
Alignment and projection plane

Select Resources Preassignment for New Features to preset
the coordinate system to be used and a projection plane for the relative
measurement, if necessary (Relative measurement [ 425]).
Default settings for the measurement

Proceed with further presettings for features under Extras Settings Measurement:
Definitions of the travel paths
Feature recognition and automatic feature end
Automatic feature default
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-3
Defining features
Measuring method
Point density
Point masking
SCAN limits
Definitions of the nominals and tolerances
Start angle
Form datum
MMC/LMC mode
VAST Navigator
Manual run
For additional information, please refer to the Online Help under System
Set Up (Measurement Methods).
Features index card

Context menu of the Features index card
The features of the measurement plan are displayed in the measurement
plan area on the Features index card. Use this list to manage the features: You can rename, edit, assign parameters and group them.
Context menu
The context menu of the list of features offers the following options:
Menu command
Function
Rename
Another name is assigned to the feature.
Check use of feature se- Shows in which characteristics, constructions or coordinate systems
the feature is used.
lected
References for selected Opens an overview of all defined features, references, parameters
and PCM commands for this feature in the References window.
Features
Edit functions
Cut, Copy, Copy with References, Paste, Paste Contents, Paste with
References
Parameter
Opens the Settings for the input and output parameters of the
feature.
Open
Opens the definition template of the feature.
Details
Displays clearance data, evaluation and references.
Delete
Deletes the feature from the list.
Delete Actuals
Deletes only the actuals of the feature. When using a pattern, you
can restrict the deletion to selected pattern features.
4-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
Menu command
Function
Export Points
Opens the Export Points dialog box where you can immediately
export the nominal values, actual values and deviations to a file.
Execute Now!
Starts the measurement of the selected feature.

The CNC-Start button in the action bar of the index card makes it possible to open the Start Measurement window and to start the CNC
run.
About the color-coding of features

On the Features index card, the feature buttons and the color bars next
to them show the type and status of the feature:
Icon
Meaning
Light gray: The feature has not yet been defined fully.
Dark gray: The feature has been defined fully but has not yet been
measured.
Green: The feature has been defined and measured results have been
gathered.
Letter T: The feature is a theoretical element.
Groove symbol: The feature is probed using self-centering probing.
Definition template for features

Contents of the definition template for
features
The definition template includes the following information:
Comment
Measurement strategies
Degrees of freedom for the calculation
Clearance groups
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-5
Defining features
Type of projection (only for the Circle feature)
Mode for nominal value definition
Evaluation of the position data / part alignment
Characteristics and their tolerances
You will find more information under Definition template (Feature) in the
CALYPSO Online Help.
The definition template is shown in the Features window. This illustration shows the definition template for the Circle feature.
Features
Circle 1
Comment
Projection
Strategy
Circle
Projection to nominal
Evaluation...
Clearance Group
Nominal Data
Tolerance For:
Alignment
Options
(Base alignment)
Nominal
Actual
X
Y
Z
D
A1 Y/Z
A2 Y/Z
Space Axis
Length
Start angle
Angle Segment
Sigma
Form
Min
Point no.
OK
4-6
61212-2011002
Points
Point no. Max
Reset
CALYPSO
Defining features
Defining features using definition templates

You can define the feature by entering the suitable values in an empty or
already completed definition template.
This definition methods makes it possible to variably define the feature
by parameterizing, for example, its coordinates and clearance planes/
groups.
1 Click the Features tab.
2 Select the desired feature in the Measure menu.
The feature appears in the measurement plan.
3 Double-click the feature to open its definition template.
4 Enter the nominal values in the input fields.
5 To variably define a nominal value, click the input field and select
Formula in the context menu.
6 Select the Formula entry in the menu of the input field to variably
define the clearance planes/groups.
Defining a feature by probing

You can define the feature by probing.
2 Select the desired feature in the Measure menu.
The feature appears in the measurement plan.
3 Double-click the feature to open its definition template.
CALYPSO is ready to record measured values.
4 Probe the feature.
The values that are determined are entered in the definition template.
If you do not wish to probe a feature manually, CALYPSO can take care
of this for you. For more details, please refer to Path generation measuring features automatically [ 4178].
Variably defining features

Variable definition of features is possible by means of formulas. To do so,
parameterize the nominal values, the clearance cuboid, the travel paths
and the clearance planes/groups. A variable assignment is useful especially for the application of macros.
Parameters for clearance planes/clearance groups

You can use formulas to define the assignment of clearance planes and
groups in the clearance data and travel paths of a feature. In the formulas,
you must assign a language-neutral designation to the clearance planes
and groups.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-7
Defining features
Element
Name *
Internal
name
Clearance plane
CP +X
SP +X
Clearance group
CG +X
GRP +X
RT clearance plane
RTCP +x
RTSP +X
RT clearance group
RTG +X
RTG +X
Example: If you define param=SP +Z and enter param - then CP +Z

will be displayed.
You do not open the window for formula input in the usual way via the
context menu, but instead by selecting the "Formula" entry in the menu
of the input field. After input of the formula, the background of the input
field will be highlighted in yellow. The value of the parameter will be
computed and displayed if possible. To cancel the entered formula, select
the Input field entry.
NOTICE
The current value of the formula is displayed in the Measurement Plan
Editor Features, but cannot be modified there.
Duplicating features
If features and groups of features of the same form and configuration
exist several times on your workpiece, you do not need to define each
individual feature.
When using the Keep Position function, you define a feature occurring
several times only once, duplicate it and reposition it.
Playing a video
To play a video about duplication of features using Keep position

function, click 4_8Update_Movie27_e/4_8Update_Movie18.htm.
If you assign a new alignment to a feature, the nominal values change as
the feature has different coordinates in the new alignment.
4-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
Keep Position
By assigning a new alignment to a feature and ticking the Keep Position box, the nominal values do not change, i.e. the feature is transferred
to the new alignment.
Defining several features at a time

Coordinate systems
To make the preparations:

1 Define an own alignment for each similar configuration of features.
The position of the alignments must be completely identical for each
configuration relative to the features.
2 Assign a useful name to the alignments.
Keeping the nominal values
To define several features only once:

1 Define the corresponding feature via the definition template.
2 Copy it and add it to the list of features as often as it exists on your
workpiece.
3 Switch to the corresponding alignment in each copy of the feature and
activate the Keep Position check box.
4 Save the changes with OK.
The feature always keeps its entered nominal values which now refer
to the new alignment. Thus this copy of the feature has a new position
with reference to the previous alignment.
In this way, you have positioned two similar features at two different
positions.
Preassignments for new features

You can preassign the coordinate system and the projection plane for
new features.
Purpose of the function
By default, the Base alignment is preassigned to the coordinate system.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-9
Defining features
In the case of manually probed features, this means that for each probed
feature you have to go back and forth between the CMM and the CALYPSO PC, in order to change the coordinate system.
The preassignments for new features allow you to determine the coordinate system on the CALYPSO PC and probe the features one after the
other. Use the RETURN key of the control console to close the automatically
detected features. The desired coordinate system is already entered in the
feature.
Defining preassignments
1 Select Resources Preassignment for New Features.
- or Select CAD Preassignment for New Features.
2 Select the desired coordinate system.

3 Select the desired projection plane or work plane which is to be used
for all new features subsequently created.
NOTICE
The preassignments are only effective as long as the Preassignment
for New Features window is open.
As soon as you close the window, the Base Alignment and No Working Plane default settings will apply again.
Validity of the preassignment

Preassignment of coordinate systems
4-10
The preassignment of a coordinate system applies to all features which

were created in the following way:
Probing and automatic feature recognition on the CMM or CAD

model
Pasting via the Features menu or the toolbox (except for GEAR PRO,
HOLOS and turbine blade)
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
Selection window of geometrical features, constructions, coordinate

systems, etc.
Extraction from the CAD model
The coordinate system is also preassigned to the Simple distance characteristic.

NOTICE
New coordinate systems which are inserted into the measurement plan
always refer to the base alignment even if the preassignment window is
open.
Preassignment of projection planes
The preassignment of the projection plane applies to the following features: point, circle, 2D line, ellipse, slot and rectangle. The preassignment
will only be made if it is possible and useful.
NOTICE
The type of projection Projection to nominal is only valid for the Circle feature. If Projection to nominal is set in the preassignment, then
no projection plane will be entered for newly created features that are
not a circle.
Automatic feature recognition and

automatic feature end
CALYPSO is able to recognize the feature after just a few probings. This
applies to the following features:
Element
Min. probings:
Point
2D line
Plane
Symmetry point
Circle
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Torus
Symmetry plane
Ellipse
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-11
Defining features
Settings
Element
Min. probings:
Rectangle
Slot
In the default settings, you can define the features for which automatic
feature recognition is to be used (Defining the automatic feature recognition [ 413]).
You can exclude error codes or define only certain features, for example,
in optical measurements of bores where bores are just to be identified as
circles.
Procedure
If you use the automatic feature recognition, probe the geometric element on your workpiece. CALYPSO enters the recognized feature in the
list of features and opens the definition template (see Defining features
using automatic feature recognition [ 414]).
The definition template offers you several options for working with the
feature (see Definition template for features [ 45]).
Automatic feature end

Use the Automatic Feature End function to define how many times
CALYPSO should probe the feature to determine it if the feature type is
known.
Settings
Procedure
4-12
In the default settings, you can specify the number of probings. The default setting is as follows:
Element
Max. probings
Point
2D line
Plane
Sphere
Torus
Symmetry plane
Circle
Cylinder
Cone
12
Ellipse
Rectangle
Slot
During probing, CALYPSO must know the feature you want to measure.
Begin by adding the feature to the measurement plan, then open the
definition template and take probings.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
The CMM will stop the measurements automatically when the specified
number of measuring points for a particular feature have been taken.
Defining the automatic feature recognition

In the default settings, you can define the features for which automatic
feature recognition is to be used. You can exclude error codes or define
only certain features, for example, in optical measurements of bores
where bores are just to be identified as circles.
1 To do so, select Extras Settings Measurement and open
the Features notebook page.
2 Activate the Feature Recognition tab.
3 Untick the check box for each feature that you want to exclude from
the automatic feature recognition.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-13
Defining features
Defining features using automatic feature

recognition
The automatic feature recognition only functions if Surface measurement with single points is not activated. Close, if necessary, the
Surface measurement with single points dialog box.
If you use the automatic feature recognition, probe the geometric element on your workpiece. CALYPSO enters the recognized feature in the
list of features and opens the definition template (see Definition template for features [ 45]).
(The features used for the definition of the base alignment should already be displayed.)
2 Select the correct stylus.
3 Probe the first point.
Example: If the feature is a sloping plane on the side of a workpiece,

move with the X/Y joystick over one corner of this plane and then
probe in the Z axis.
The Point1 feature is shown in the template for the feature definition. (For more information on the features template, see Defining
features using definition templates [ 47].)
4 Probe the next point.
Example: On a sloping plane, move over another corner of the plane

and probe again in the Z axis.
The feature is updated to a 2D line.
5 Probe additional points if required (at least 3 points for a plane, for
example; 5 points for a cylinder, and so on).
Example: On a sloping plane, move to the remaining two corner points

and probe each in the Z axis. Make sure that the points are not on the
same line. (You should therefore move the stylus a little in the X and
Y axes). CALYPSO recognizes the plane this way and displays it in the
evaluation field.
6 If the right feature has not been recognized, you can choose it manually from the CAD Entities selection list.
Note: You cannot change the type of geometric element subsequently.

4-14
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
Deriving features from CAD files

Suitable files for deriving features
CALYPSO makes it possible to extract features for a measurement plan
from CAD files (see also Creating a new measurement plan from a CAD
file [ 244] in the Online Help).
NOTICE
By default, this possibility only exists for ACIS files with the .sat file
name extension. You must purchase the corresponding options for all
other file types.
Prerequisite
The CAD file must have one of the following file name extensions:
Creating program
Extension
ACIS
.sat
CAD systems such as AutoCAD and Caddy, etc.
.dxf
CATIA
.exp
CATIA
.model
CATIA V
.CATPart
IGES
.igs
Inventor
.ipt
JT Open (exclusively versions 8.0 and 8.1)
.jt
Parasolid
.x_t
Pro-E / Unigraphics
.prtxx, .prt
Pro-E
.asm
Solid-Works
.sldprt
STEP
.stp
VDAFS
.vda
NOTICE
When you load an .asm file, the individual parts must also be in the
same directory. CALYPSO assembles the individual parts automatically to
form a CAD model.
With CAD files of the following programs, CALYPSO allows you to transfer also the dimension, form and position data together with the features
to the measurement plan:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-15
Defining features
Creating program
Extension
CATIA V
.CATPart
Pro-E / Unigraphics
.prtxx, .prt
Pro-E
.asm
NOTICE
The structure of the CAD data determines whether CALYPSO can transfer
the dimension, form and position data to the measurement plan. Manual
changes may especially be required for constructions.
Procedure
Perform the following steps:
Convert CAD files in the background [ 416] (optional)
Load CAD files [ 417]
Define the parameters of the global measurement strategy [ 417] (optional)
Extract features [ 418]

Or
Extract features and characteristics [ 59]
NOTICE
If you have loaded 2D data (e.g. in IGES, VDA or DXF format), you will
have to define the third coordinate manually either by entering an offset
in the Modify CAD Model dialog box or subsequently by changing
the nominal geometry.
NOTICE
(Only for CALYPSO older than version 3.8:) If you have a ProE or Unigraphics license, you are not permitted to change the host name and server
code of the computer, as otherwise your license becomes invalid. If the
license is lost, the interface no longer functions.
Converting CAD files in the background

CALYPSO can extract features for a measurement plan from CAD files.
As this process takes a longer time in the case of complex CAD models,
it is possible to convert CAD files in the background in advance. Converted files can be loaded more quickly.
1 Select CAD File Convert CAD files in background.
2 Highlight the desired CAD files and click Open.
The selected files are converted in the background. As the result of
this, files with the same name and with the .sab file name extension
are stored in the same directory.
This operation is logged in a log file.
4-16
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
NOTICE
The background conversion may impair the performance of other applications.
Loading CAD files

Before you can load CAD files, a measurement plan must be open. The
measurement plan is expanded when CAD files are loaded and the features are extracted.
1 Open a new measurement plan. (See Creating a new measurement
plan [ 33] or Opening and displaying a measurement
plan [ 34].)
2 Select CAD CAD File Load.
3 Select the CAD files of your choice and click Open.
The files will be loaded.
If this is an .asm file of Pro-E, CALYPSO searches for the respective
individual parts in the same file directory and combines these automatically to form a CAD model.
If you are loading an IGES file, the progress of the data conversion will
be shown in a window.
Note: When converting an IGES file, a log file with information on the
converted features that are contained in the file will be created. Select
CAD Logfile IGES to display this file.
Once the model has appeared in the CAD window, you will be able to
include the features in the measurement plan.
For more information, please see Working with the data of the CAD
model [ 244] in the Online Help.
You can now proceed to specify metrology parameters (see Specifying
metrology parameters for the CAD features to be loaded [ 417]).
Specifying metrology parameters for the CAD

features to be loaded
Before extracting features from a CAD file, you can specify the measurement strategy for the features in question.
Specifying the measurement strategy for CAD features

to be loaded
1 Select CAD Filter Save / Load Defaults.
2 Click the Strategy tab.
The Settings - Strategy window appears on the screen.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-17
Defining features
3 Tick the check box of the desired feature and click Settings.
The strategy dialog box opens:
4 Double-click the list entry for which you want to make strategy settings.
The definition dialog box opens.
5 When you have finished defining the strategy, click OK.
As soon as you extract a solid geometry from the CAD model or extract
a feature via the filter (using CAD Filter ...), CALYPSO assigns the
predefined strategies to these features.
Deriving features from CAD files

During the extraction, the regular geometric elements in the CAD model,
as well as the elements defined in a different manner, are detected and
added to the list of features.
Conditions:
A CAD file is loaded and, if necessary, the measurement strategy is
defined (see General settings for the path generation method [ 4180]).
1 Select CAD Filter All Features (or alternatively, planes, circles, cylinders, cones or points only, as applicable).
4-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
The features are displayed in a separate window (example: test cube):
2 Select Edit Select All or highlight the individual features you want
to insert into your measurement plan.
Note: CALYPSO assigns the stylus currently activated on the control

console or via the CAD window to all features.
3 Click Apply.
The features are extracted and transferred to the measurement plan.
This can take a few seconds to complete.
4 When transfer is completed, confirm by clicking OK.
You can edit the individual features in the usual way.
Keep in mind:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-19
Defining features
You must define the probing points with the CMM or the CAD window
if there are none defined in the strategy list of the feature. You will find
more information in the Online Help under Defining probing points in
the CAD window [ 211].
CALYPSO assigns all features the same stylus. You will have to assign a
more suitable stylus for some features, i.e. one with which the CMM can
probe the features in question (see Editing a measurement
plan [ 68]).
Importing features from the CAD model

to the measurement plan
You can import individual features from the CAD model into the measurement plan. To do so, use the Selection list on the CAD toolbar.
1 To define a probing point:
Open the feature in question.
Click Strategy and select the appropriate stylus.
Select the Define points icon.
Click the probing point of your choice on the surface of the CAD
model.
2 To define a single point:
Select the Define a Space Point icon.
Click the point of your choice on the surface of the CAD model.
3 To define an edge point:
Select the Define Edge Point icon.
Click a point on the CAD model.
The point closest to the selected point on the edge of the plane is
inserted as an edge point in the list of features. Any additional parameters must be entered in the definition template of the feature.
Note: If the Preassignment for New Features window is open
and the projection plane is set to edge point, the d1, d2 and d3
distances of the preassignment will be transferred into the new feature.
4 To define a circle on a cylinder:
Select the Define Circle on a Cylinder icon.
Click a point on the cylinder.
The circle is shown at the corresponding level.
5 To define a line on a plane:
Select the Define Line on a Plane icon.
4-20
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
Click a point on the line you want to define and use the mouse to
drag the line.
6 To define a rectangle:
Select the Define Rectangle icon.
Click a point of the rectangle you want to define.
7 To define two mutually opposite space points:
Select the Distance check icon.
Click a point on the model.
The two space points and the connection between them are shown
at the selected position. With the aid of these two points, you can
check the wall thickness or the material deviation at the place in question.
8 To import a plane, cylinder or cone into the measurement plan:
Select the Extract Features icon.
Click the desired feature in the CAD model.
Multiplying features by patterns

Pattern types
If a feature exists on a workpiece more than once in a regular pattern,
the feature can be defined once and multiplied by means of a pattern.
NOTICE
Patterns are not permitted for the following features:
General curve, general surface, free form surface, curve, 3D curve, all
constructions
Pattern procedure
CALYPSO supports regular and free pattern types. The available regular
pattern types are linear and circular patterns:
Linear patterns
Circular patterns
Free patterns
1D Linear Pattern
Polar Pattern Offset
Pattern with position list
2D Linear Pattern
Rotational Pattern (use for scallop)

In the case of linear patterns, the feature is repeated at regular intervals
along one or more axes.
In the case of circular patterns, the feature is arranged with a certain angle
offset around a center.
In the case of polar pattern offset, the local feature alignment keeps
its orientation with respect to the workpiece coordinate system.
In the case of a rotational pattern, the local feature alignment keeps

its orientation with respect to the center of rotation.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-21
Defining features
With free patterns, the additional positions of the feature can be freely
defined. To do so, complete a position list in CALYPSO.
Pattern types
If you require a certain pattern type not only on one individual feature,
define this pattern type with its parameters and save it.
You can use this pattern type for other features.
NOTICE
If you edit a pattern type, all patterns that are based on this type will also
be changed.
Switching a pattern on
and off
If a pattern is defined, switch it on and off again via the Measurement

Plan Editor Features.
Coordinate system for pattern

You can enter a reference coordinate system for the definition of the
center, projection plane and rotation direction of a pattern. This coordinate system is exclusively used for calculating the nominal positions.
NOTICE
If you select a pattern for a coordinate system which depends on the
pattern, a warning message appears.
Keeping position
Similar to the definition of features, you can use the Keep Position
function. When you change the alignment while the Keep Position
check box is active, the pattern including the center, projection plane and
direction of rotation will be moved to the same position, relative to the
new alignment, as that in the old alignment.
Pattern for group of features

You can also define a pattern for a group of features.
The pattern is used for all features and sub-groups of the group unless
a pattern has already been defined and activated for them.
If a feature or a group is removed from a group with pattern, it loses its
pattern.
If a feature or a group is placed into a group with a pattern, it adopts the
pattern unless another pattern has been defined and activated beforehand.
Switching a pattern on
and off
The pattern for a group can be defined and activated via the context menu
or via the Measurement Plan Editor Features.
Deleting actual values
If the results of only certain pattern features are unusable, it is not necessary to repeat the entire measurement. In the context menu of the features, you can call the Delete Actuals window and delete the actual
values of the features in question.
4-22
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
Formulas in patterns
You can also use formulas in features that are multiplied by means of a
pattern: for example in the case of a circle for the determination of the
center. When using formulas in a pattern, different procedures for the
determination of the pattern features are possible:
Algorithm
Meaning
First formula then pattern
When processing the measurement plan, CALYPSO calculates the

value of the formula, uses this value to determine the definition of
the feature and uses then the entered pattern for this feature.
(general default)
First pattern then formula
(default for getActual and
LOOP in formulas)
Default setting
When processing the measurement plan, CALYPSO calculates for

each individual pattern feature the formulas and enters them in the
pattern features.
CALYPSO automatically sets one of the two algorithms when defining
the pattern in the Selection (Pattern) window:
Default setting
For
First formula then pattern
All other cases
First pattern then formula
For features for which getActual or LOOP is used in formulas.

You can apply this presetting or change it. CALYPSO recognizes if you
make entries which are relevant for the calculation method, e.g. when
inserting a formula. CALYPSO then generates the current setting and
permits a modification.
Why first pattern then formula?

In some cases, the procedure for the First formula then pattern algorithm may cause undesirable results.
A series of stepped bores is an example. The larger circle and the smaller
circle are provided with a pattern. The center of the smaller bore is defined
as a result of a getActual formula resulting from the measured center of
the larger bore.
In the case of the standard algorithm, the first feature of the pattern
would be defined by means of the getActual formula and the pattern
would be applied. The calculation, however, would be more exact if the
getActual formula relative to the corresponding feature is used again for
each individual feature of the pattern.
Therefore, CALYPSO always sets the First pattern then formula algorithm if getActual or LOOP is used in the formulas of a feature. First the
pattern is used and then the corresponding indexed formula (with LOOP
= 1, ..., n) in each pattern feature.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-23
Defining features
Defining a pattern
1 Open the definition template of the feature.
2 Go to Nominal Definition and select the Pattern entry.
3 To use a new pattern, click New, select the desired pattern type and
click OK. Enter the parameters in the corresponding window.
For additional information, please refer to the Online Help under Polar
Pattern Offset, 1D Linear Pattern, 2D Linear Pattern, Rotational Patterns and Pattern with position list.
By using a pattern, this will be entered automatically in the list of patterns with the name Patternx (x = 1, 2, ...). You can rename the
feature via the context menu.
4 To use an existing pattern type, click Selection of Pattern, select
the desired pattern type and click OK.
For additional information, please refer to the Online Help under Polar
Pattern Offset, 1D Linear Pattern, 2D Linear Pattern, Rotational Patterns and Pattern with position list.
5 Click Edit to change the pattern type settings.
You will be informed if formulas were used in the feature and the
selection does not comply with your default setting.
4-24
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
6 Select the mode depending on the need.

The feature is created with a pattern.
Relative measurement
Applications for relative measurement
During relative measurement, the determined measured points are not
evaluated where they were recorded. That could be for various reasons.
Relative measurement is useful in the following cases:
Deformations
Larger components made of sheet metal with a thickness of a few
millimeters may slightly bend when they are clamped on the CMM.
This deformation must be taken into account when measuring with
the CMM. In this case, it may not be possible to directly approach the
actual positions of circles in the surface.
Immersion depth
In drawings for workpieces made of thin sheet metal, the thickness
of the workpiece is specified as a number and not as a third dimension. Bores are shown as circles. If a bore is measured with a certain
immersion depth, the measuring location deviates from the nominal
position of the circle.
Bent surface
Measuring lines or circles on bent surfaces (cylinder, cone, torus) normally generates contours deviating from the regular form. To enhance
the form results, you can project the points rotationally on a plane.
Positions of flat bore holes in different directions

The positions on the surface should be determined for cylindrical holes
with low depth which are generally not parallel to the coordinate axes.
To do so, circles are measured with offset. Due to the coordinate axes
which are not parallel, the coordinates of the center point calculated
from the measuring points do not represent the position on the surface. The measurement of a projection plane would take a long time.
The Projection to nominal function makes it possible to rationally
determine the position of these holes without any difficulties.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-25
Defining features
Edge measurement
A point of an edge or the run of a circular bore in a surface is to be
determined. However, an edge cannot be probed correctly with a
stylus. Instead, CALYPSO measures, for example, auxiliary points on
a working plane and calculates the edge location.
Offset
The features to be measured are all equally offset from the nominal
position. The actual position of a feature can be determined. Enter
the determined deviation, as a result of which the features will be
measured offset by this vector.
Missing bore
Sometimes, bores provided in the drawing are missing in the workpiece. By setting CALYPSO accordingly, you can avoid faulty probings
and collisions.
Defining relative measurements in the definition template of the feature

1 Click the button located below Projection.
The Relative Measurement dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Set the parameters as necessary on the Working Plane, Meas.
Ref. or Bore Missing tab.
Measurement with working planes

Purpose of the working
plane
You must define a Working Plane if you want to measure the feature not
at the nominal location but with a vertical offset. Use the working plane
to indicate in CALYPSO the location of measurement.
In general:
4-26
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
To measure a circle with a working plane, the normal vector of the

plane is used as the normal vector of the circle to be measured.
To measure a point with a working plane, the standardized projection

of the point to be measured into the plane is used as the normal
vector.
Definition via measured plane

Define the working plane in the Relative Measurement window:
Select the Measured Planes option on the Working Plane index

card.
Select for the measured plane the plane on which the feature lies. During
the CNC run this plane is measured in order to obtain actual values. Under
Measurement you have two options for determining the measuring
location:
Calculate d1: The distance between the actual plane and the nominal position of the working plane determined during the CNC run is
used as an offset in order to determine the actual probing location on
the feature.
Distance d1: The distance entered is used as the offset from the
working plane. Positive values mean an offset counter to the normal
vector into the material, negative values mean an offset in the direction of the normal vector out of the material.
Under Evaluation you determine the treatment of actual values:
Calculate d3: There is a fixed distance (offset) between the feature

to be projected and the selected plane (e.g. circle and plane). This
offset is used for the selected plane in the direction of the actual normal vector of the plane.
Distance d3: By selecting this option and entering 0 for the distance,
the measured actual values are projected onto the actual working
plane.
You can enter a separate immersion depth for the evaluation. A positive entry means an offset counter to the normal vector into the material. A negative value means an offset in the direction of the normal
vector out of the material.
Actual position: The measured actual values are evaluated as such.
Definition via the base alignment

You can determine the working plane by means of the base alignment.
NOTICE
Usually, the working plane is determined by means of a measured plane.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-27
Defining features
In this case, the working plane of the feature is determined by means of

the selected coordinate plane and, if necessary, an offset d1 counter to
the normal vector of the plane.
The evaluation height of the feature (the actual values used for the evaluation) is determined by means of the working plane and, if necessary,
an offset d3 counter to the normal vector of the plane.
Measuring edge points and circle edges

To measure the actual values of edge points, CALYPSO offers two additional relative measurement methods in addition to the working plane
method:
the Edge Measurement method for the measurement of an individual

edge point
the Three Points method for the measurement of a circle edge
NOTICE
You do not require an additional working plane feature for these
methods and you will have the result faster. Disadvantage: These methods are not as accurate as the working plane method.
Edge measurement
The Edge Measurement method enables the measurement of an individual edge point via auxiliary points. Define the distances between the auxiliary points and the edge point to be measured. It is possible to easily
move the edge point to be measured by means of a formula or a loop;
the auxiliary points are always at the correct position.
d2
d1
d3
The first auxiliary probing is carried out by means of the Offset d2

counter to the normal direction of the point. If you have activated the
measurement of normal function, the actual normal of the auxiliary point
d2 will be determined within the predefined radius using three probing
points. The last, actual probing is carried out by means of the offset d1
counter to the direction of the entered vector of the working plane which
is located in the coordinate system of the feature. The actual value of the
edge point is determined by means of the d3 distance.
Three Points
4-28
The Three Points method enables the measurement of a circle. The working plane is determined by the circle.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
Probing points
d2
Here you must also enter the location parameters for the auxiliary points.
The actual value of the plane is determined by means of three or more
auxiliary points which lie at regular angle distances on an arc around the
circle to be measured.
The radius offset defines the difference between the radius of the points
and the radius of the circle to be measured. The distance d1 is the measuring depth of the circle to be measured counter to the normal vector of
the working plane. The height in which the actual value for the evaluation
is used is determined by the distance d3.
d2
d1
d3
CAD support
You can define an edge point via the CAD window:
Select the Define Edge Point icon in the Switch to Feature
Menu selection list. Each time you click the CAD model, CALYPSO creates an edge point on the edge located closest to the selected point.
Any additional parameters must be entered in the definition template of
the new feature.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-29
Defining features
Projection on nominal plane

With Projection to nominal, the measured points are projected onto
the nominal plane of the circle. The nominal normal of the circle is used
as projection plane.
You can thus also determine the position of flat holes with any axis direction. You can, for example, use this function if the circle is measured
with a starting height as the edge cannot be probed directly. Due to the
non-parallel position in the coordinate system, the calculated coordinates
do not represent the position on the surface. However, the Projection
to nominal function provides you with easy-to-evaluate coordinates for
the position.
The following magnified representation shows how the measured points
are projected on the nominal position of the circle:
Nominal
position of
the circle
Offset
(Start height)
Projection
to nominal
Measured
points
NOTICE
The Projection to nominal function is only available for the Circle
feature.
Defining projection on nominal plane

1 Click in the definition template of the feature the button under Projection.
2 Select the Projection to nominal option on the Working
Plane tab.
The measured points are projected onto the nominal plane of the circle.
Rotational projection
For certain measuring jobs, the projection of the measured actual points
along a cylinder surface is useful. This projection method requires the
definition of a projection plane and a rotation axis.
The rotational projection produces enhanced form results for circles
measured on a torus or sphere and for 2d lines measured on the surface
4-30
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
of a cylinder or cone: If the scanned 2d line is not measured exactly parallel

to the axis, then its form corresponds to a hyperbola.
The following illustration shows the principle of the rotational projection.
Point 1
Rotation axis
Projection plane
CALYPSO allows rotational projection for the measurement of 2d lines,

circles and ellipses. To do so, you must determine the axis of a suitable
feature as rotation axis. The projection plane is defined via the rotation
axis and the first measured point.
You must define the rotational projection in the Relative Measurement window.
Defining rotational projection

1 Click in the definition template of the feature the button under Projection.
2 Select the Rotational Projection option on the Working
Plane tab.
3 Select the feature whose axis is to be used as rotation axis.
The measured points are projected along the cylinder surface in the projection plane.
NOTICE
The rotational projection cannot be preassigned for new features under
Resources Preassignment for New Features.
Measuring with measuring reference

The measuring reference allows you to move the measurement position,
relative to that of another feature.
This can be useful if the features to be measured are all equally offset
from the nominal position (e.g. small punched circles around a larger circle).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-31
Defining features
You can easily determine the actual position of the larger circle but not
the actual positions of the smaller circles (risk of collision!). In this case,
you measure with measuring reference and specify the larger circle as
reference feature. CALYPSO probes the features offset by the deviation
determined on the larger circle.
Two methods
The following methods can be selected:
Element
CALYPSO determines the actual position of the selected feature. The
difference vector between the actual and nominal value represents
the offset.
Main orientation
You enter the offset in the coordinate axes of the base alignment.
Select a reference feature as offset for each coordinate axis.
Own Geometry
CALYPSO determines the offset during a separate search run for
which you indicate a search distance and a measuring height.
Measuring with the Own Geometry

reference
If the actual position of a feature deviates considerably from the nominal
position, the relative measurement method has to be used to avoid collisions.
If it is not possible to derive the required translation from other features,
you must define them explicitly as Own Geometry reference. You can
use this method for the following features: circle, rectangle, slot, ellipse.
Then CALYPSO starts a search run prior to each measurement to locate
the feature. Once the actual position of the feature has been found, CALYPSO internally moves the nominal data temporarily for the measuring
run.
4-32
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
Two dimensions are required for the search run:
The measuring height indicates the search height.
The search distance indicates for outside features the distance around
the feature at which the actual position is searched for. The stylus
moves around the feature by observing the distance defined by you
to the predefined nominal contour.
Travel path
Actual position
Nominal position
Search path
The search distance is not important for inside features. The search
run starts in the center of the nominal position and is carried out in
all four directions.
Travel path
Actual position
Nominal position
NOTICE
After the search run, CALYPSO knows the actual position of the feature
and carries out the actual measurement on the shifted position with correspondingly large deviations of the position. The nominal data of the
feature are not affected.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-33
Defining features
Recognizing a missing bore

Sometimes, bores provided in the drawing are missing in the workpiece.
By setting CALYPSO accordingly, you can avoid faulty probings and collisions. The movement and the speed are adjusted so that damage is
avoided.
Activating the function
The Bore Missing function is set for each individual feature. You have
two options:
Activate the Bore Missing tab in the Relative Measurement

window.
Select Probing Missing Hole (Search Distance) in the Features Settings Editor.
Activate the function and set the Search Distance. The search distance
specifies the depth of the first probing position in the material.
1st CMM POS

Required search distance
Clearance distance
1st probing
Material if bore is
missing, hollow space if
bore exists
Movement if a bore is missing

If the Bore Missing function is activated, the CMM carries out a search
run as of the first position of the feature, i.e. it moves at reduced speed.
NOTICE
To ensure that the function provides the required protection against collisions, the first intermediate position of the feature must lie outside the
material.
4-34
If the CMM does not reach any material during the search process,
the measurement of the bore is continued in the usual way.
If the CMM reaches material during the search process, the current
feature is omitted. The CMM moves back to the 1st CMM POS of the
feature and from there to the next feature.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
NOTICE
This is only possible as long as no intermediate position is programmed
for reaching the next feature.
CALYPSO can only compensate missing bores correctly if the travel paths
between the features and within the features are independent of each
other.
CALYPSO recognizes whether the feature to be measured is required

for the measurement plan.
If the required measurement plan information is missing because

the measurement has not been executed, CALYPSO stops the
measuring run. The stylus system is removed from the clearance
planes and the user may remove the workpiece from the clamping
device.
In all other cases, the measurement is resumed. Information about
the features which have not been measured is shown on the
screen and in the printout.
NOTICE
Observe that missing measured values may cause the output of incomplete plot images. Position deviations may be caused.
PCM commands
The Bore Missing function can also be activated via the setMissingBore PCM command. Thus, the function and the search distance are parameterized. The PCM function overwrites the corresponding setting for
the feature.
The getActual("feature_name").boreIsMissing command supplies a
Boolean value.
true: the bore is missing
false: the bore is not missing.
Copying properties of features

Properties which can be copied
You can copy properties of a feature and assign them to other features.
You can copy the following properties to all features:
Coordinate system
Keep position
Clearance group
Stylus system
Stylus (only if different styli were not used for the points of the feature)
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-35
Defining features
Clearance distance
Retract distance
Pattern
RT position
Parameter: Presettings
Parameter: Postsettings
You can copy the following properties exclusively to similar features:
Projection plane (if defined)
Evaluation settings
Measurement strategy (measured features only)
Characteristics
Features are referred to as similar features if they are of the same type
(e.g. circle, cylinder) and their nominal values have been defined in the
same way (e.g. via recall).
Copying properties of a feature to other

features
You can copy properties of a feature and assign them to other features.
1 Click the feature from which you want to copy properties.
2 Click the Transfer format icon in the upper toolbar.
3 Select the properties that you want to copy to other features.
Note: When copying properties into a construction, the Keep Position check box is not taken into account.
4 Select the features to which you want to copy the properties (multiple
selection with the Ctrl key).
5 Click OK.
Tips and tricks for defining features
4-36
You can cancel the definition of a feature at any time while probing
is in progress: Click Reset and then click OK.
You can restart the definition of a feature at any time while probing
is in progress: Click Reset and then repeat probing.
If the CAD model of the part's features is not fully on the screen or is
not displayed at all, the image may have been zoomed or shifted in
the CAD window. Click Fit to resize the model to fit into the CAD
window.
If the feature does not seem to be properly defined but you have
clicked OK to save it, you can delete it from the measurement plan
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining features
and then define it again. See Deleting features or characteristics [ 632].
If you want to change the order of the details, drag the feature to the
new location.
If the probing point you used is unsuitable, you can delete it by clicking
the Undo icon (or pressing F3 on the standard control console).
If you want to delete a probing point defined some time in the past,
proceed as described in the section entitled Using the context menu
of the strategy list [ 4163].
Probing or position points can be added to a feature at any time. Open

the definition template of the feature.
To add a probing point, probe the point with the CMM. The point
is added automatically.
If you want to add an intermediate position, you must check that
the original stylus is activated.
Move the stylus to the appropriate position, then press the button
on the right-hand joystick to accept the position or click the Position CMM without probing icon in the strategy dialog box.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-37
Details on definition of the features

Further information on the definition of
the features
In this section, you will find, among other things, the list of all features
that can be measured with CALYPSO. You can find more detailed information on each feature in separate topics.
Basics of probing
Inside or outside feature?
When you probe features, the following basic rules apply:
Produce as large a measurement basis as possible. If, for example, you

define the face of a cube as a plane, probe close to the corners of the
workpiece.
Probe as many points as possible (taking into account the time within
which you want the CNC run to complete). This is particularly important when you record and evaluate shapes on a workpiece.
In most instances, CALYPSO can identify the feature as an inside or outside feature from the probing direction.
You also have the option of defining a feature as an inside or outside
feature. However, bear in mind that this affects the combination of the
travel paths and the calculation of the tangential features.
You define a feature as an inside or outside feature in its definition template by clicking on the Inside/Outside Feature icon.
Correction of stylus radius
The measured value sent to the CMM is always the center coordinates of
the stylus. The measured value, therefore, differs from the contact point
- the measured value you want - by the radius of the stylus.
probing
direction
probing
radius
desired
measured value
4-38
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
measured
value
CALYPSO corrects the measured values, so you always receive the coordinates of the contact point. However, there may be a residual error, but
you can usually prevent this.
Tolerance For ...
In the Tolerance For: group, you enter a tolerance for the corresponding nominal value. CALYPSO adds a characteristic to the measurement
plan that checks the tolerance.
Selecting the references

of the angles
If you tick the A (for angle) check box, you can freely select the reference
axis and the orientation for specification of the angle.
With the Reference to Projection angle icon, you select one of the
six axes of the coordinate system as reference axis for the projected angles. The space axis of the feature is changed automatically.
NOTICE
The direction and orientation of the feature does not change.
Selecting a space axis
By selecting another axis in the Space Axis field, the reference of the
projected angles is changed but not their values. Therefore, the reference
axis of the feature and thus its direction and orientation are changed.
Reversing a space axis
By reversing the space axis, the direction and orientation of the feature
are also changed.
Click the Mirrors geometry and strategy icon. The whole feature
including the strategies at the coordinate plane that is perpendicular to
the set space axis is mirrored.
Selecting the angle format
The angle symbols indicate the axis and orientation of the start angle and
other angles.
To change the type of representation of the angle, click the angle symbol
and select the desired orientation.
Overview of the features

The Features menu contains the CALYPSO features.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-39
The Special Geometries submenu contains the features for complex geometries such as torus and stepped cylinder.
The Additional Features submenu offers a selection of features

for special applications such as gears.
Default features
Menu: Features
Feature
Description
Point
Point feature [ 442]
Circle
Circle feature [ 445]
Plane
Plane feature [ 446]
2D Line
2D Line feature [ 448]
3D Line
3D Line feature [ 450]
Cylinder
Cylinder feature [ 450]
Cone
Cone feature [ 452]
Sphere
Sphere feature [ 455]
Curve
Curve feature [ 455]
3D Curve
3D Curve feature [ 455]
Special Geometries
Menu: Features Special Geometries
4-40
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Feature
Description
Ellipse
Ellipse special geometry [ 456]
Slot
Slot special geometry [ 457]
Rectangle
Rectangle special geometry [ 458]
Torus
Torus special geometry [ 458]
Offset Plane
Offset Plane special geometry [ 462]
Symmetry Point
Symmetry Point special geometry [ 463]
Symmetry Plane
Symmetry Plane special geometry [ 463]
Step Cylinder
Step Cylinder special geometry [ 464]
Radius Point
Radius Point special geometry [ 467]
Sphere Point
Sphere Point special geometry [ 468]
Angle Point
Angle Point special geometry [ 469]
Circle on Cone
Circle on Cone special geometry [ 470]
General Surface
General Surface special geometry [ 472]
General Curve
General Curve special geometry [ 472]
Free Form Surface
Free Form Surface special geometry [ 473]
Additional Features
Menu: Features Additional Features
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-41
Feature
Description
HOLOS
Holos and Gear additional features [ 479]
Gear
Holos and Gear additional features [ 479]
Turbine Blade
Turbine Blade additional feature [ 481]
Profile Elements
Profile Elements additional feature [ 483]
Point Set
Point Set additional feature [ 484]
Station Point
Station Point additional feature [ 489]
Point feature
Basics of the Point feature
Menu: Features Point
Use the Point feature to determine the coordinates of individual points
on the workpiece, in order to size the workpiece, for example.
Probing strategy
You can measure a point anywhere on a surface.
probing direction
measured
value
correction
4-42
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
To obtain the right correction for the stylus radius for normal vector directions which are non-parallel to the coordinate system, it is possible to
switch to the space point procedure by clicking Evaluation in the definition template. In case of an unknown normal vector direction, the correction will be automatically defined.
Evaluation
Use the Evaluation button to enter details relating to the conversion

and correction of the measured values. Under Space Point Mode, you
can now select the manner in which the point is to be calculated:
Mode
Type of correction/conversion
Touch Point
Radius correction in the direction of a coordinate system axis corresponding to the probing direction. Here, probing is effected in a coordinate axis direction; otherwise the radius correction will be effected in the direction of the coordinate axis which is closest to the probing direction.
(Default setting)
Plane Point
Radius correction in normal vector direction.
Space Point
Radius correction in normal vector direction, followed by projection

onto the normal of the nominal point.
The radius (length of the tripod) used to measure the normal can be
set using the Radius for space point normal measurement
entry in the Measurement Plan Editor Features.
Net Point
Radius correction in normal vector direction, followed by projection

onto the coordinate system axis which corresponds to the reference
axis of the nominal plane.
Midpoint
No radius correction. This can be useful, for example, in the case of

self-centering probing (see Alternative probing methods (self-centering probing) [ 4170]) between two teeth of a gear wheel in
order to use this point for alignment (plane rotation).
CAD Face Point
(only with the Free Form Surface option) Several probings are possible! The stylus radius correction is performed for all measured points
in direction of the (corresponding) perpendicular on the CAD surface.
The actual coordinates of the point are determined from the center
of gravity of all measured points corrected by the stylus radius.
The corrections that are made for the respective point type are shown in
the diagram.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-43
Probe direction
z
Nominal contour
Nominal
normal
Actual
normal
4
3
Actual contour
5
1
Nominal point
2
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
Touch Point
Plane-Point
Space Point
Net Point
Midpoint
CAD Face Point
NOTICE
The contact point on the surface must always be entered as the nominal
position for a point, regardless of the desired Space Point Mode.
Working Plane
By selecting a working plane under Projection and entering a value for

the d3 distance, Space Point is automatically set for the Space Point
Mode.
Measurement of Normal
Normal measurement (CNC and Manual) is not possible for the CAD surface point. As for the touch point and the center point, the button is not
visible in the definition template.
Details on the CAD surface point

Calculation run for the
CAD surface point
CALYPSO calculates the center of gravity of all probing points corrected

by the stylus radius for the CAD surface point. This center of gravity determines the actual value of the point feature.
CALYPSO calculates the perpendicular from the center of gravity on the
CAD model and thus receives the perpendicular base point and the normal for the actual geometry.
Space Point Distance

characteristic
With the Space Point Distance characteristic, the distance between the
actual point corrected by the stylus radius and the nominal point is determined for the space point and net point evaluations.
However, with the CAD surface point, the distance between the center
of gravity and the perpendicular base point of the center of gravity is
checked with the Space Point Distance characteristic.
Form error
4-44
The form deviation represents the minimum and maximum deviation of

each point referenced to its actual perpendicular base point. The point
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
numbers for the maximum and minimum deviation are output accordingly. If only one probing point is used for the calculation, no form is
possible.
Alternative alignment methods

When using a CAD surface point for an alternative alignment method
such as 3D Best Fit, RPS or P6 the nominal value for the best fit is calculated from the perpendicular base point at the current position of the
actual geometry (in relation to the base alignment).
The keyword CAD will then be shown in parenthesis in the column for
the reference. This means that this nominal value cannot be changed
because it is calculated automatically.
When using a reference, the nominal value of the actual geometry is used;
regardless of whether the feature is a CAD surface point or not.
NOTICE
Note that the coordinates corrected by the stylus radius are used for the
calculation.
Special aspects of 3D
best fit
If only point features are used for the 3D best fit, the features are fitted
according to the nominal plane. Usually, the plane normal according to
which the fit is to be carried out is taken from the nominal geometry. The
plane normal of a CAD surface point is determined via the perpendicular
of the actual coordinate on the CAD model. The nominal point for the
best fit represents the perpendicular base point of the actual point on the
CAD model in the base alignment.
Best fit on CAD model
By activating Best fit on CAD model, an iterative method is used to

fit all features in a CAD model. The feature reference points of the actual
geometries are fitted. In the case of the CAD surface point, the probing
center points of all valid and determined points and their stylus radii are
made available for the calculation. If only CAD surface points are used for
the 3D best fit (and best fit on CAD model is selected), the result is identical to the result of a free form surface. However, you cannot select a
coordinate system for the 3D best fit.
Circle feature
Menu: Features Circle
Using the Circle feature, you can probe bores, plugs and shafts with a
circular cross section or workpiece parts with arcs. You can project the
circle or arc onto any measured plane. CALYPSO uses the probed points
to compute the circle or arc which best fits the probing points.
The start angle A and the partial angle PA (for an arc) are specified in the
definition template.
Probing strategy
Probe at least 3 points. The probing points should be on a section perpendicular to the axis of the circle you want to measure. It is advisable to
probe at least 4 points.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-45
Make sure that all the points you probe are at approximately the same
height. If the height differences between the individual points are excessive, CALYPSO will compute a cylinder. You can reconstruct a circle manually in the Geometry menu.
The origin of the local feature alignment is in the center of the measured
circle (not in a projection plane of the coordinate system).
Gage Correction Qualification
Gage correction qualification is a method by which you determine the

dynamic bend parameters for circles and cylinders occurring during measurement and correct them mathematically during further measurements.
NOTICE
Gage correction qualification is only useful for scanning with a measuring
probe.
Plane feature
Menu: Features Plane
Use the Plane feature to probe plane surfaces of the workpiece the position or inclination of which you want to determine.
CALYPSO computes the plane from the points which you probe. In the
definition template, the computed length and width of the plane are displayed along with the coordinates of the probing points.
Probing strategy
Probe at least 3 points. Take care to spread the points as evenly as possible
over the plane.
If the points are all in a line (an arc of minimal curvature), CALYPSO will
compute a line. You can reconstruct a plane manually in the Geometry menu.
Result output
This illustration shows the positions of the projected angles A1 and A2.
4-46
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The origin of the local feature alignment depends on the position of the
plane relative to the axes of the coordinate system:
Bottom left for a viewing position in +X, -Y, and +Z.
Bottom right for a viewing position in -X, +Y, and -Z.
The illustration below is an example showing how this applies to 5 planes

of a cube.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-47
2D Line feature
Menu: Features 2D Line
The 2D Line feature is for probing lines and straight lines on any plane on
the surface of the workpiece. CALYPSO computes a mean-value line
through the points you probe.
You can restrict the degrees of freedom in X, Y and Z as well as with
regard to the normal direction for the determination of the mean-value
line.
Types of display
The 2D line can be defined and represented in two different ways:
with X, Y and Z values for the start and end points of the line,
with one point (X, Y, Z) of the line, the specified length and the projected angles A1 and A2.
You can toggle between the two types of display by selecting Resources Features representation.
Probing strategy
Probe at least two points (three are recommended, however).
Make sure that all the probing points are roughly in line. Otherwise, CALYPSO will compute a plane. You can open the Geometry menu and
regenerate the feature as a line.
The origin of the feature's local coordinate system is at the first point on
the line which defines the line fully when first registered in these examples points 1, 4 and point 3.
4-48
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
or
6
1
or
3
Result output
After measurement, the following results are output in the definition

template and in the printout.
Result
Meaning
X, Y, Z
Coordinates of the origin of the local feature

alignment
A1 (Z/X)
Projected angle 1. Projection in this case is in the

X/Z plane; the reference axis is X.
A2 (Y/X)
In the printout, the projected angles are referenced to the position of the feature.
In the definition template, the projected angles are referenced to the position of the feature's plane normal (the 2D line corresponds
to a reduced plane).
Projected angle 2. Projection in this case is in the

X/Y plane; the reference axis is X.
In the printout, the projected angles are referenced to the position of the feature.
In the definition template, the projected angles are referenced to the position of the feature's plane normal.
Sigma
Scatter referenced to the best-fit computed feature
Min/Max
Minimum and maximum deviation, referenced to

the best-fit computed feature
Form
Difference between minimum and maximum deviation, referenced to the best-fit feature.
The illustration below shows the positions of projected angles A1 and A2

for a straight line on a cube. The reference axis is always the coordinate
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-49
axis with which the projected angles are both less than 45 in this case
the X axis.
Y
projection into the X/Yplane
spatial view
Z
A1
projection into the X/Z plane
example line
A2=0
X
3D Line feature
Menu: Features 3D Line
A 3D line cannot be measured: it is computed from a recall of at least two
features. You can, for example, employ a 3D line to represent the axis of
a shaft by using several circles for the purpose of definition.
Open the Nominal Definition selection list and select Recall and the
desired features.
The resulting 3D line is placed through the center point of the selected
features.
Cylinder feature
Menu: Features Cylinder
You can use the Cylinder feature to probe bores, plugs, and shafts.
Probing strategy
Probe at least 5 points:
4-50
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1 Probe a circle first, i.e. at least the first three points on a section perpendicular to the cylinder axis.
The axis of this section will be the provisional cylinder axis.
2 Probe at least two more points on another section perpendicular to
the axis of the first section.
CALYPSO computes the data of the cylinder from the circular sections
at the different levels. The axis of the cylinder is computed perpendicularly through the centers of the two circular sections.
If you probe nine or more points, there is no need for a probing strategy.
If the geometrical error is excessive for a cylinder or if the circular sections

are too close together, CALYPSO computes a cone instead of a cylinder.
You can reconstruct a cylinder manually in the Geometry menu.
Result output
Z
projection into the Z/X plane
spatial view
Z
X
Y
A1
example cylinder
Z
projection into the Z/Yplane
X
Y
A2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-51
The origin of the local feature alignment is on the plane with the lowest
probing point (not on a projection plane of the coordinate system).

NOTICE
probe.
Cone feature
Menu: Features Cone
Use the Cone feature to probe the location and position of inside and
outside cones, the direction of the cone axis and the cone's taper angle.
The cone has the following defining aspects:
Probing strategy
Position of the X, Y, Z circle center points
Diameter of the D circle
Position and orientation of the A1, A2 cone axes
Cone's taper angle AC
Probe at least 6 points:

1 Measure three points on a circular section parallel to the axis of the
cone.
2 Move the CMM to another height.
3 Measure three points at this height.
4 Measure other sections, as in steps 2 and 3.
4-52
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CALYPSO computes the data of the cone from the circular sections at
the different heights. The axis of the cylinder is computed perpendicularly through the centers of the circular sections.
If you probe nine or more points, there is no need for a probing strategy.
If cone angle AC is very small, CALYPSO computes a cylinder instead of a

cone. The measuring uncertainty for the cone axis will be too high if the
height difference between the circular sections is very small, and CALYPSO computes a circle instead of a cone.
You can reconstruct a circle manually in the Geometry menu.
Result output
In this example, the reference axis is -Z.
Z
projection into the Z/X plane
spatial view
A1
Y
Z
projection into the Z/Yplane
example cone
Y
A2
The origin of the local feature alignment is in the center of the circle of
smaller diameter. The direction of the axis is from the smaller toward the
larger circle.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-53
Moving the intersection height along the axis

By changing one or more coordinates of the circle center, the geometrically unchanged cone in the measuring room is also moved.
However, the coordinate change also makes it possible to move the circle
center along the cone axis and thus to change the diameter. The cone
keeps its original geometric form. However, the base circle has now a
different position.
To do so, click Move nominal position along the axis in the definition template of the cone and enter the new coordinates in the Move
nominal position along the axis window. It is sufficient to enter a
new coordinate; the other coordinates result from the unchanged cone
axis. CALYPSO immediately recomputes the defining aspects of the cone.
Measuring speed
4-54
For the helix strategy, you can select between the Standard (scanning according to nominal data) and Fast measuring methods. Select
the Fast method only if measuring times have been predefined and you
are sure that the stylus does not loose contact with the material.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Sphere feature
Menu: Features Sphere
Use the Sphere feature to compute the diameter and the center coordinates of a sphere, spherical cap or spherical zone.
Probing strategy
Probe at least 4 points distributed as evenly as possible over the surface

of the sphere. If the stylus system and sphere position allow this, it is best
to probe from different directions. The first two points should be probed
near the sphere's pole and the remaining points along the equator of the
sphere.
If you fail to probe the points in the recommended manner, CALYPSO

will not automatically recognize a sphere. In this case, you can reconstruct
a sphere manually in the Geometry menu.
Result output
There are no projected angles for a sphere. D represents the diameter of

the sphere.
Curve feature
Menu: Features Curve
Use the Curve feature to measure planar sections of bodies and lift curves
(planar curves on the surface of a cylinder). This feature is extremely versatile and, consequently, it is described in a separate section (see in the
operating instructions for the CNC Curve Measuring Software option under Curve Measurement (option)).
Bear in mind that this feature must be obtained as an option.
3D Curve feature
Menu: Features 3D Curve
Use the 3D Curve feature to measure free form surfaces. This feature is
extremely versatile and, consequently, it is described in a separate section
(see in the operating instructions for the CNC Curve Measuring Software
option under Curve Measurement (option)).
Bear in mind that this feature must be obtained as an option.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-55
Ellipse special geometry

Menu: Features Special Geometries Ellipse
Use the Ellipse feature to probe bores, plugs, and shafts having axes not
parallel with an axis of the base alignment, as well as true ellipses. Bear
in mind that automatic feature recognition is not available for ellipses.
The ellipse can be defined in two different ways:
by specifying the center (with X, Y and Z) and the two diameters D

(major diameter) and D2 (minor diameter),
by specifying the two focal points (with X1, Y1, Z1 and X2, Y2, Z2)
and one of the two diameters (diameter D and note indicating whether this is the larger diameter).
You can toggle between the two types of display by selecting Resources Features representation.
In the definition template, the angles A1 and A2 indicate the position of
the ellipse in relation to the respective plane (X in XY plane, Y in YZ plane
and Z in ZX plane).
If the defining specifications (second type of representation) do not produce an actual ellipse, the second diameter is set to 0 and the ellipse
is no longer shown.
Probing strategy
Probe at least 5 points in a planar section. Distribute the points as evenly

as possible around the circumference of the section.
Result output
The following illustrations show the definition of the minor diameter D2

and the major diameter D, as well as the location of the focal points.
Dlarge
D2
4-56
M (X, Y, Z)
Dsmall
(X1, Y1, Z1)
(X2, Y2, Z2)
The origin of the local feature alignment is in the center of the ellipse. It
is not projected onto a plane of the coordinate system.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Slot special geometry

Menu: Features Special Geometries Slot
Use the Slot feature to measure the length, width, depth, and position of
a slot. Projected onto a plane, a slot consists of two opposite semicircles
and two opposite straight lines.
Probing strategies
You can use two different probing strategies to measure the slot. In both
cases, you must probe at least five points (in any order).
NOTICE
If there are several points on a segment, make sure that they are distributed as evenly as possible.
How to distribute the probing points according to the first strategy:
2
5
4
at least two points on one side of the slot,
at least one point on the other side of the slot,
at least one point on each of the semicircles.
How to distribute the probing points according to the second strategy:

1
at least three points on one semicircle,
at least two points on the other semicircle.
You can distribute other probing points as you wish.

The origin of the local feature alignment is in the slots center of gravity,
i.e. its center point.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-57
Rectangle special geometry

Menu: Features Special Geometries Rectangle
Use the Rectangle feature to measure the position, length, and width of
a cube or a cuboidal hollow. The Rectangular Path path generation method is available for this purpose.
Manual probing
Probe at least 5 points. Distribute all points as evenly as possible over the
sides. Probe at least two points for each side of the rectangle. You must
enter the value for the depth of the rectangular hollow or the height of
the cube manually in the Depth field.
Rectangular path
The Rectangular Path path generation method allows you to probe the
sides of the cube and evade the corners. You can enter different distances
to the corners for each individual side and for each individual corner.
In the Strategy defaults, you can enter absolute distances, distances
in percent or as a multitude of the stylus radius. In the Rectangular
Path technology window, these specifications are converted into absolute values (mm or inch) depending on the current stylus or the nominal
values of the rectangle.
Torus special geometry

Basics of the Torus special geometry
Menu: Features Special Geometries Torus
Use the Torus feature to measure circular workpiece parts. CALYPSO can
measure single points and the two possible circle paths on the torus surface. Bear in mind that automatic feature recognition is not available for
the torus.
Geometry
4-58
The torus has the following identifying characteristics:

Center
(x0, y0, z0)
Normal vector
(nx, ny, nz)
Main radius or main diameter
R1, D1
Subsidiary radius or subsidiary diameter
R2, D2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
D1
N (nx, ny, nz)
D2
R2
Z (x0, y0, z0)
R1
Dimensions and radius

ratios
CALYPSO can measure a torus only with certain dimensions and radius
ratios. The following radius ratios are possible:
0 R2 R1
If the main radius is larger than the subsidiary radius, the subsidiary
radius may be as small as necessary. There are no restrictions for the
location of the measuring points.
0 < R1 R2
If the main radius is smaller than or equal to the subsidiary radius, the
main radius may be larger than zero.
Probing strategy
At R1 < R2, the cross section surfaces overlap. No measuring

points may be on the surface of the overlapping zone (lemon).
At R1 = R2, the cross section surfaces are touching. There are no
restrictions for the location of the measuring points.
To define the nominal geometry:

NOTICE
Make sure that the probing points are distributed as far apart as possible.
2 Probe the P1, P2, and P3 points at any radial angle, but maintain constant poloidal angles.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-59
n
P1
P3
P2
P5
P4
R
X0
3 Check the P4 and P5 points at any radial, but maintain unequal axial
angles relative to the P1, P2 and P3 points.
4 Probe two additional points.
Best-fit method
For the torus, the best-fit method according to Gauss can only be used.
Size Characteristics
The following size characteristics can be used for the torus:
X, Y, Z value
Projected rotation and inclination angle
Diameter and radius (R1, R2, D1, D2)
Polar position Radius, Angle, Height
2D, 3D Polar Distance, Simple distance (measured from the center of

the torus)
The following form and location characteristics can be used for the torus
(MMC/LMC not possible):
Constructions
4-60
Form
True Position
Coaxiality
Concentricity
The Intersection construction is not possible for the torus. The other constructions are possible, with the exception of defined constructions.
When defining the position of the Cone Addition, a torus can be used as
reference. However, the main diameter of the torus must be used for the
diameter definition.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Measurement strategy for the torus

You can measure the torus by using single points or by scanning. There
are two special scanning technologies for the torus: the large and the
small circle path.
Special features
You cannot define any strategy default for the torus as the automatic
feature recognition does not function.
Both, the large and the small circle paths cannot be scanned by self-centering probing.
The torus must also be probed perpendicular to the surface like the sphere
and cone features. The navigation paths from one path to the next path
always run on a curved helix path.
Large Circle Path

The Large Circle Path path generation method is used to measure the
circle paths with the center on the primary axis.
Z0
Xp
X0
Yp
Unlike spheres and cones, the measuring height can be entered as length
as the path is not clearly defined. Therefore, the position of the circle path
is defined by an angle.
The center of the secondary circle (xP, yP, zP) serves as the vertex of the
angle. The start axis (angle = 0) is formed from the center to the outside
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-61
by means of a vector (perpendicular to the normal of the torus). The direction of rotation is downward in relation to this axis.
Small Circle Path

The Small Circle Path path generation method is used to measure circle
paths with subsidiary radius. Their centers lie on the base circle, i.e. on
the circle around the center of the torus with the main diameter.
The start angle and the angle range are defined at the smaller radius. The
reference axis and the direction of rotation of the angles are the same as
those used for the measuring height definition of the large circle path
(see above).
The measuring height of the small circle path is also defined by an angle.
The angle is referenced to the uv plane or the surface area of the torus.
Offset Plane special geometry

Menu: Features Special Geometries Offset Plane
Use the Offset Plane feature to define from three reference points a plane
which does not exist on your workpiece. You can offset the datum points
at will along the probing direction.
Probing strategy
Probe no more and no less than three points and then enter the offsets:
1 Click Evaluation.
2 In the Point Modification group, click the Edit button.
The Points offset dialog box appears on the screen.
4-62
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3 Enter an offset for each point. The points are offset along the probing
direction.
4 Close the dialog box to accept the modified settings.
An offset plane is not recognized automatically by CALYPSO.
Symmetry Point special geometry

Menu: Features Special Geometries Symmetry Point
Use the Symmetry Point feature to have CALYPSO compute a point which
is symmetrical with two probing points.
Probing strategy
Probe two points:

2 Probe the first point.
3 Probe the second point from the opposite direction.
4 Close the definition template.
CALYPSO automatically recognizes a symmetry point.
Result output
CALYPSO computes the coordinates and the normal vector of the symmetry point and the distance between the original two probing points.
Symmetry Plane special geometry

Menu: Features Special Geometries Symmetry Plane
Use the Symmetry Plane feature to have CALYPSO compute a plane which
is symmetrical with two planes. The calculation of the symmetry plane
requires at least 4 points.
Probing strategy
You must probe no more and no less than four points in order to compute
a symmetry plane.
2 Probe the first three points on one side.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-63
3 Probe the other points either on this side or the other side.
4 Close the definition template.
Display in CAD window
Only the center plane is displayed in the CAD window for the symmetry
plane. The side planes remain hidden.
Result output
CALYPSO computes the coordinates of the symmetrical plane and displays the distance between the two initial planes.
Characteristics
By activating Distance in the definition template, CALYPSO adds a Distance_Symmetry characteristic to the measurement plan.
Feature recognition
Automatic feature recognition is not available for symmetry planes.
Automatic Feature End
This is where you define the number of probings after which the definition
template is closed automatically. Enter the number in the default settings
under Extras Settings Measurement on the Features notebook page.
Restrictions
The restrictions X, Y, Z, normal vector and distance are allowed.
Particularities for the intersection
For the intersection of a symmetry plane with another feature, you can
select whether the symmetry plane or one of the side planes should be
intersected. Activate Wall for the intersection with the side planes.
Table file
The idSymbol column in the table file shows the keyname MidPlane.
The actual distance between the side faces of the symmetry plane is
shown in the distance column. The distance from the nominal geometry is shown in the nom_distance column.
Step Cylinder special geometry

Menu: Features Special Geometries Step Cylinder
The Stepped Cylinder feature allows CALYPSO to compute a feature
composed of one or more cylinders.
Geometry
A stepped cylinder consists of several individual cylinders with a common

axis and different diameters. Each individual cylinder (step) can be defined
as an inside or outside feature.
Use
The stepped cylinder can be used, for example, to check the dimensional
accuracy of a bearing block. The bearings for the shaft must meet certain
tolerances regarding the position of the axes and their diameters to ensure that the shaft diameter fits the bearings.
Similarly to a mechanical gage, it is possible to check the dimensional
accuracy and the eccentricity of each step.
Measurement strategy /
nominal definition
A stepped cylinder cannot be measured directly. The individual steps must

be available in the form of features (or files) and interlinked using the
point recall function. The point recall function can also be opened by
clicking Strategy.
Select a cylinder for each step or load its data from a file. The cylinders
must be on the same axis but they do not need to touch each other.
4-64
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
NOTICE
As of the second step, it is possible to recall other features instead of
cylinders. CALYPSO evaluates the points of these features as points of
cylinders.
Pattern
The stepped cylinder can be defined with pattern. If you select Add loop
to all marked Features for a feature with pattern in the context menu
in the Recall Feature Points dialog box, CALYPSO recalls all points of
the feature with pattern in one individual step of the stepped cylinder and
handles them in the same way as points of one individual cylinder.
If you select Delete loop from all selected Features for a feature
with pattern in the context menu in the Recall Feature Points dialog
box, CALYPSO recalls the individual pattern features of the feature as
individual steps of a stepped cylinder with pattern. This is only useful if
the same pattern is used for all steps and you select this option for all
steps. CALYPSO creates as many pattern features as possible in the stepped cylinder with pattern: The number of pattern features represents the
minimum number of features of individual pattern for all steps.
Feature reference point

and axis
Each step has its own feature reference point the nominal position of
which must lie on the axis of the stepped cylinder. The position of the
first step becomes the feature reference point of the stepped cylinder.
The axis of the stepped cylinder is determined by best-fit alignment. The
total length of the stepped cylinder results from the difference between
the highest end point and the lowest start point of the individual steps
on the common axis.
NOTICE
In case of subsequent changes of the individual steps, the total length of
the stepped cylinder is not changed any more.
Total length
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-65
The nominal positions of the feature reference points of the individual

steps are projected onto the axis of the computed feature and produce
thus the actual positions of the feature reference points. The same procedure applies to the end points of the individual steps to determine in
this way the actual lengths of the individual steps.
Result output
Depending on your specifications, CALYPSO determines on the basis of

the measured values the position of the axis, the position and the total
length of the stepped cylinder as well as the diameter or the radius of the
individual step.
Characteristics
If the corresponding check boxes are activated, CALYPSO can automatically add the corresponding characteristics to the measurement plan.
CALYPSO adds an individual characteristic to the measurement plan for
the diameter (or the radius).
You must define in the definition template for the stepped cylinder which
steps are to be checked and whether the step is to be handled as an inside
or an outside feature. This does not depend on the corresponding original
cylinder.
Use of the stepped cylinder
Special features
4-66
Certain particular aspects must be taken into account when using the
stepped cylinder in characteristics:
If the stepped cylinder is selected as feature, the total length will be

used by characteristics requiring a reference length for evaluation (e.g.
True Position).
Characteristics which apply the most-material condition (MMC) or the

least-material condition (LMC) for the determination of tolerances of
form and position of a stepped cylinder calculate with special tolerance additions (Specifying tolerance additions for MMC/LMC evaluation [ 536]).
The Minimum, Maximum and Average characteristics always only

evaluate the diameters or the radii of those steps that have been activated on the Steps - Radii tab.
For output to file, the chr.txt and fet.txt table files are written in a separate
result line for each step.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The values of user-defined attributes are output in additional columns in

the table file for characteristics (*chr.txt) during each run.
Radius point special geometry

Menu: Features Special Geometries Radius Point
Use the radius, sphere and angle points features to select the applicable
radius correction with discrete-point measurements in order to define the
point of contact correctly.
The Radius Point feature is intended for probing cylindrical elements. The
measured value is corrected in the measuring plane towards the connecting line between the stylus center and the specified center point.
Measuring plane
Cylinder axis
Probing strategy
Perform the following steps to measure a radius point:

2 Specify a point on the cylinder axis and the vector of the cylinder axis.
3 Probe a point.
Result output
The actual radius and the coordinates of the probing point are read out
in the definition template.
A radius point is not detected automatically by CALYPSO. Insert the feature in the measurement plan, define the sphere center point and then
perform probing.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-67
Sphere Point special geometry

Menu: Features Special Geometries Sphere Point
With the sphere point, the measured value is corrected towards the connecting line between the stylus center and the specified center. The
sphere point is intended for probing sphere surfaces. Use the radius point
for cylindrical features.
Probing strategy
Perform the following steps to measure a sphere point:

2 Enter the coordinates for the sphere center point and the desired radius in the Center Point column.
3 Probe a point.
Result output
The actual radius of the sphere, the vector from the sphere center point
to the probing point and the coordinates of the probing point are read
out in the definition template.
Using the Sphere Point feature, you can define the radius of a sphere with
a single probing and specification of the sphere center point.
A sphere point is not detected automatically by CALYPSO. Insert the feature in the measurement plan, define the sphere center point and then
perform probing.
4-68
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Angle Point special geometry

Menu: Features Special Geometries Angle Point
With the angle point, the measured value is corrected towards the normal
for the probed plane.
Probing strategy
To measure an angle point, you must specify a reference plane through

the plane origin, a space axis and an angle and then probe exactly one
point.
Perform the following steps to measure an angle point:
2 Enter the values for the location of the plane origin in the left column.
3 Select how you want the reference plane to lie by specifying a space
axis and an angle.
4 Probe a point on the plane that has to be measured.
Result output
The actual angle of the probed plane and the coordinates of the probing
point are read out in the definition template.
Using the Angle Point feature, you can compute the angle between two
planes, for example, by probing. Specify one plane first. CALYPSO computes the second plane from a probing and the origin of the specified
plane.
An angle point is not detected automatically by CALYPSO. Insert the feature in the measurement plan, define the plane origin and then perform
the probing.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-69
Circle on Cone special geometry

Menu: Features Special Geometries Circle on Cone
Using the Circle on Cone feature, you can probe arcs on conical workpiece parts.
You can project the circle or arc onto any measured plane. CALYPSO uses
the probed points to compute the circle or arc which best fits the probing
points.
The center point (X, Y, Z) and thus indirectly the height as well as the
diameter D and the cone angle CA must be entered in the definition
template.
Probing strategy
The minimum number of points is 3. The probing points should be on a

section perpendicular to the axis of the circle you want to measure. It is
advisable to probe at least 4 points.
Make sure that all the points you probe are at approximately the same
height. If the height differences between the individual points are excessive, CALYPSO will compute a cone instead of a circle on cone. If this
happens, you can reconstruct a circle on cone manually in the Geometry menu.
The origin of the local feature alignment is in the center of the measured
circular section (not in a projection plane of the coordinate system).

NOTICE
probe.
Defined Height
4-70
CALYPSO performs the probings on a circle on cone perpendicular to the

cone surface. If the X/Y position of the actual cone is offset from the
nominal cone, the height of the probing points is no longer equal. An
ellipse is produced. This change increases with the cone's taper angle.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
To reach a circle at the defined height, activate the Defined Height

check box in the Evaluation window.
This option is used to convert the measured points internally with reference to the desired height via a projection along the wall of the cone.
NOTICE
For a new circle on cone, the Defined Height function is deactivated
by default. Otherwise, qualification with automatic feature recognition
would not be possible because CALYPSO takes the height as the value 0
for the automatic feature recognition.
Moving the intersection height along the axis

By changing one or more coordinates of the base circle center, the geometrically unchanged cone in the measuring room is also moved.
However, the coordinate change also makes it possible to move the circle
center along the cone axis and thus to change the diameter. The cone
keeps its original geometric form. However, the base circle has now a
different position.
To do so, click Move nominal position along the axis in the definition template of the cone and enter the new coordinates in the Move
nominal position along the axis window. It is sufficient to enter a
new coordinate; the other coordinates result from the unchanged cone
axis. CALYPSO immediately recomputes the defining aspects of the cone.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-71
General Surface special geometry

Menu: Features Special Geometries General surface
Tool Box: Measurement General surface
The General surface feature corresponds to the FEAT/GSURF DMIS
feature. For the evaluation of a general surface, no mathematically defined free form surface is computed to obtain the result of a nominalactual comparison of two surfaces. The General Surface feature is merely
a container for a set of points belonging to a surface.
Special features
Each point of a general surface is probed, measured and processed individually. Each point possesses its own strategy and resources.
The entries in the strategy list are thus structured as trees in the Strategy dialog box. The associated clearance data and strategy information
can be found under each entry of a point. If no feature or strategy is
selected, clicking the probing point icon will produce a new point here.
NOTICE
The actual values of individual points are shown neither in the definition
template nor in the point list; they appear only in the printouts and protocols (default printout, compact printout and custom printout).
Nominal Definition
Nominal input and the definition as a theoretical feature are options for
the nominal definition. A change in the nominal definition refers to all
associated points of the general surface.
Point from the CAD model
You can add a nominal point to the general surface by clicking the desired
position of the CAD model in the CAD window (the definition template
must be open when you do this).
Point by probing
You can add a point to the general surface by probing with the CMM.
A general surface is not detected automatically by CALYPSO.
General Curve special geometry

Menu: Features Special Geometries General curve
Tool Box: Measurement General curve
Special features
The General curve feature corresponds to the FEAT/GCURVE DMIS

feature. No mathematically defined curve shape is computed from splines
in the evaluation of a general curve to obtain the result of the nominalactual comparison of two curved lines. The General Curve feature is
merely a container for a set of points belonging to a curve.
Strategy
Each point of a general curve is probed, measured and processed individually. Each point possesses its own strategy and resources.
The entries in the strategy list are thus structured as trees in the Strategy dialog box. The associated clearance data and strategy information
4-72
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
can be found under each entry of a point. If no feature or strategy is

selected, clicking the probing point icon will produce a new point here.
The points may be in any spatial location. The actual values result after
projection of the data onto a plane specified in the definition template of
the general curve (with X, Y, Z, NX, NY, NZ).
NOTICE
The actual values of individual points are shown neither in the definition
template nor in the point list; they appear only in the printouts and protocols (default printout, compact printout and custom printout).
Nominal Definition
Nominal input and the definition as a theoretical feature are options for
the nominal definition. A change in the nominal definition refers to all
associated points of the general curve.
Point from the CAD model
You can add a nominal point to the general curve by clicking the desired
position of the CAD model in the CAD window (the definition template
must be open when you do this).
Point by probing
You can add a point to the general curve by probing.
A general curve is not detected automatically by CALYPSO.
Free Form Surface special geometry

Basics of the Free Form Surface special
geometry
Menu: Features Special Geometries Free Form Surface
Tool Box: Measurement Free Form Surface
Alternatively, add the feature via CAD Creating features. Here,
you can also define additional free form features such as space points and
curves.
You can use the Free Form Surface feature only if a CAD model is
loaded and the assignment to the surface is valid. Otherwise, no free form
surface can be computed.
Special features
A free form surface is connected with a surface in the appropriate

CAD model.
The Free Form Surface feature is limited by the CAD model and has
no infinite expansion.
The free form surface can be interrupted by bores.
A coordinate system can be created with the best fit of the free form
surface.
The accuracy of the best fit of the free form surface can be controlled.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-73
Defining the path on a free form surface in the

strategy window
You can define the points for measuring a free form surface in the
Strategy window.
1 Click Strategy in the definition template.
2 Click the Define points icon.
The Create Point Set dialog box appears on the screen.
3 Define the path generation type.

If you have selected Intersection or Two Points, you can create
additional parallel lines on the left and right of the main line in
addition to the intersection line.
If you want to apply the point set from a file, you must specify a
file in the VDA or TXT format. CALYPSO applies from the file only
the points which are located close enough to the surface of the
CAD model.
4 Define the distribution of the points of the path to be generated in the
Settings group.
5 Define the curvature function and the corresponding parameters in
the Point Distribution group.
The curvature function cannot be activated for single points.
6 Click as many points or features in the CAD model as you have defined.
7 Click Create and check the result by means of the CAD model.
4-74
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8 Transfer the displayed space point distribution to the strategy by

means of Create Point Set or click Delete and repeat the process
by starting with step 6.
9 Close the window.
Format of the text file for the point set

(reference)
You can define the points for measuring a free form surface in the
Strategy window. The coordinates of the point set can be loaded from
a text file.
Format of the file
Examples
In the text file, the points must be represented in Cartesian coordinates

as follows:
A row is provided for each point.
Each row shows the values for the X, Y and Z coordinates and optionally also the components of the corresponding Nx, Ny and Nz normal vectors.
The comma or point can be used as decimal marker. Only one type
of decimal marker can be used in a file.
A blank, semicolon, comma, point and slash can be used as separator

for the individual numerical values. Only one type of separator can be
used in a file.
If you use points and commas in a file, the point is interpreted as

decimal marker.
Some examples of TXT files for the definition of a point set:

Text file for the point set, example 1
0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 1.0000
0.0000 0.2542 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 1.0000
0.0000 1,5234 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 1.0000
0.0000 2,3434 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 1.0000
0.0000 2,5543 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 1.0000
0.2340 3,0204 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 1.0000
Text file for the point set, example 2
0/0/0/0/0/1
0/0,2542/0/0/0/1
0/1,5234/0/0/0/1
0/2,3434/0/0/0/1
0/2,5543/0/0/0/1
0.2340/3,0204/0/0/0/1
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-75
Defining the path on a free form surface via

the CAD model
You can define the points for measuring free form surfaces in the Modify CAD Model window.
3 Click the feature in the CAD window which you want to transfer as a
free form surface.
The name of the feature saved in the CAD model is displayed in the
uppermost line in the window.
4 Select Free Form Surface to define a free form surface.
6 Define the distribution of the points of the path to be generated under
Settings.
7 Define the curvature function and the corresponding parameters in
the Point Distribution group.
The curvature function cannot be activated for single points.
8 Click as many points or features in the CAD model as you have defined.
4-76
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9 Under Points, click Create and check the result by means of the CAD
model.
10Transfer the displayed strategy to the feature by means of Create
Feature or click Delete and repeat the process by starting with step
5.
11Close the window.
Best fit of the free form surface with variable

accuracy
You can change the accuracy of the best fit of the free form surface.
Reduced accuracy leads to satisfactory results with short duration.
Evaluation window
The settings are defined in the Evaluation Free Form Surface window.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-77
Enter an A value between 0.01 and 0.000005 or set it by means of the

slider under Best Fit. The A value is used a abortion criterion during best
fit. A smaller A value leads to a faster end of the iteration.
You can also predefine the A value for the entire measurement plan or
for each free form surface in the Measurement Plan Editor Features under Geometry Best fit accuracy (free form surface).
NOTICE
The A value is composed of the translational and rotational elements of
the transformation matrix.
4-78
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Holos and Gear additional features
Menu: Features Additional Features Holos or Gear

Tool Box: Measurement Holos or Gear
You can integrate any HOLOS or GEAR PRO macro into a measurement
plan and have it executed during the CNC run. The programmed macro
is started by the CMM OS during the CNC run.
You can add the Holos or Gear utility to both the list of characteristics
and the list of features. In this manner, the selected macros can be executed after either a characteristic or feature is run.
NOTICE
Before starting a measurement, either HOLOS or GEAR PRO must have
been started, otherwise the CNC run will be canceled.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-79
Strategy
Comment
Makro Call
Selection
Select coordinate system for macro

Current Base alignment
Coordinate system received from macro
New name in Calypso
OK
Entries for HOLOS or

GEAR PRO
Reset
Enter the following in the definition template:
the macro to be executed

You can either enter the macro directly or by selecting it from a catalog.
the coordinate system for the macro

You can select a coordinate system in CALYPSO, which will be passed
to HOLOS or GEAR PRO. The manner in which the coordinate system
will be used must be specified in HOLOS.
a coordinate system from the macro

You can receive a coordinate system from the macro and use it further
in CALYPSO. To do so, enter the name under which the coordinate
system should be used in CALYPSO.
4-80
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Turbine Blade additional feature

Basics of the Turbine Blade additional feature
Menu: Features Additional Features Turbine Blade
Tool Box: Measurement Turbine Blade
Use of the feature
The Turbine Blade feature is used to transfer nominal data and measured data for turbine blades to the BLADE PRO program for evaluation.
It creates several XML files.
The import of nominal data, the definition of the measurement strategy
as well as the measurement itself are carried out in CALYPSO. Use the
Curve feature for this. The BLADE PRO program is used for evaluation
only.
Printout header variables
Together with the nominal data and the measuring results, all printout
header variables belonging to the measurement plan are also transferred
to BLADE PRO. The variables of the SYS data group are assigned the
type=static in the XML file, all other variables receive the type=dynamic.
Example in an XML file:
<Property operid="Master" type="static" />
<Property creationswi="3.8.00" type="dynamic" />
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-81
Entries
Enter the following in the definition template:
Group
Entries
Specification file
For additional information, please refer to the BLADE PRO document.
Results
Output formats of the results.
Features
Shows all Curve Form characteristics or curves of the measurement

plan. Select those curves or characteristics the curves of which you
want to evaluate with BLADE PRO as turbine blades.
Restriction with respect to

features
Activate Only export features already measured to export

only features with measured values.
4-82
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CNC run with the Turbine Blade additional

feature
In the case of measurement plans with the Turbine Blade additional
feature, you must observe the following:
Prior to the CNC run
Prior to the CNC run, export the nominal data to BLADE PRO if necessary.
For this purpose, you open the definition template for the Turbine Blade
feature, mark the desired intersections and click Export Nominals.
The nominal data for each of the selected intersections is written in an
XML file named Section_xxx_nominal.xml. The printout header variables
are also transferred.
The files are saved in the directory that is defined as BladeNomPath in the
<user directory>\curveParameter.txt file.
Run after start
After starting the CNC run, the following files are created and transferred
to BLADE PRO:
Startup.xml: File with a referral to the BLADE PRO specification file.

The specification file is used by BLADE PRO but must have been selected beforehand in CALYPSO.
Section_xxx_actual.xml: Measured data files corresponding to Section_xxx_nominal.xml. After each measurement of a curve selected in
the definition template, the corresponding data is written in the
measured value file. The files are saved in the directory that is defined
as BladeActPath in the <user directory>\curveParameter.txt file. The
printout header variables are also transferred.
Finish.xml: End code of the measurement. BLADE PRO will only start
evaluation if this file is available. The data for the result output in
BLADE PRO is transferred to this file. Once the evaluation has been
completed, this will be deleted by BLADE PRO.
Once the Finish.xml file has been created, the BLADE PRO program starts
the calculation and evaluation.
The results are created in the formats specified in the definition template.
Once Blade has deleted the Finish.xml file, CALYPSO continues the CNC
run.
Profile Elements additional feature

Menu: Features Additional Features Profile Elements
Tool Box: Measurement Profile Elements
Use of the additional
feature
The Profile Elements additional feature is used to create sections

through the workpiece and features in these sections for a CT dataset.
This additional feature can also be used for manual measurements on the
CT dataset and the created sections. The additional feature also allows
you to create profile elements for your measurement plan which can then
be measured in the CNC run.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-83
You can find more details in the operating instructions for the Metrotomography option under Measuring in intersection planes.
Point Set additional feature

Basics of the Point Set additional feature
Menu: Features Additional Features Points Cloud
Tool Box: Measurement Points Cloud
feature
The Point Set additional feature is used to evaluate points.

You have the following options:
Calculating and representing deviations from the CAD model
Modifying the representation of the deviations
Defining features on the point cloud and transferring them to the

measurement plan
You can find more details in the operating instructions for the Metrotomography option under Nominal-actual comparison on a CT dataset.
Origin of the measuring
values
You have several options for the takeover of measuring values:
Measuring points on the workpiece
Recalling measured points via the point recall function
Reading point file with measuring values
Defining a point set

Define the point set in the definition template Point Set on the Select
Points index card.
4-84
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Measuring a point set

1 Select the Measurement option et set the clearance group.
2 Click Strategy.
The Strategy window is opened.
3 Click the Define points icon.
The Create Point Set dialog box appears on the screen.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-85

The further procedure is described under Defining the path on a free
form surface in the strategy window [ 474].
Recalling a point set

1 Select the Recall Feature Points option.
2 Click the icon and define in the Recall Points window the points to
be used to form the point set.
The procedure is described Using the point recall [ 4105].
Point set from file

1 Select the File... option.
2 Enter the path and the file name in the input field and define the path
as absolute or relative path.
- or Click the File Selection icon and enter the desired file in the file
selection dialog.
The format of the point file is described under Format of the text
file for the point set [ 475].
The file is loaded.
4-86
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Evaluating a point set

Use the Evaluation index card of the definition template for the Point
Set additional feature to edit the point set, define its representation in
the CAD window and carry out the evaluation.
1 To add a comment to the feature, click Comment and enter the

memo.
2 To modify the point set, activate Filter, enter the point distance and
click Apply.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-87
3 To eliminate wrongly determined points from the point set, activate

Eliminate points, enter the critical angle and the maximum distance and click Apply.
All measuring points exceeding the maximum distance to the corresponding nominal point or of which the normal has a larger angle than
the specified critical angle with regard to the nominal normal are eliminated from the point set.
4 For triangulation, activate Triangulation and click Apply.
The point set is shown as a triangular grid.
5 To calculate the deviations between the measuring values and the
CAD model, enter the corresponding parameters and click Calculate.
6 To define the view in the CAD window, enter the desired parameters
under View.
Use the icons to determine the point density.
Use Properties to open the Color map window where you can
modify the colored representation in the CAD window.
7 To output a graphic representation of the CAD view, activate Graphic and click Properties.
4-88
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8 Enter the desired properties of the graphic in the Graphics Settings window:
Plot The view of the CAD window is shown as a plot.
Transparency: The CAD model is shown transparently.
Hide: The CAD model is hidden; only the point set is displayed.
9 Click the Save icon to save the actual values of the point set in a TXT
or STL file.
10Click the Save with nominal values icon to save the point set
with nominal values in a TXT or STL file.
11Click OK to close the window.
Station Point additional feature

Menu: Features Additional Features Station Point
The Station Point additional feature is only required when using CALYPSO with a laser tracker.
The procedure for the measurement with a laser tracker is different to
the procedure for the measurement with a CMM. A measurement plan
is usually not available, but it is created point by point by probing individual points with the laser tracker.
Large workpieces require the position of the laser tracker to be changed
one or more times. A base alignment match is required for the conversion
of the coordinate values measured at the individual stations into a common system.
feature
The Station Point additional feature enables an extended base alignment match with an alternative best fit algorithm. In this case, the station
point corresponds to a position of the laser tracker device.
Use the definition template to define the station point.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-89
Entries
The nominal values of the station point should specify the expected position of the laser tracker but do not need to be entered.
The actual values of the station point are calculated later and represent
the exact position of the laser tracker.
Selection of the bundle

points
By selecting the Strategy button, the List of Bundle Points window

is opened.
4-90
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
You enter here the points that are measured from several stations and
are thus suitable for the conversion. You define also whether the station
point is a base station or a follow-on station.
NOTICE
A base station is not absolutely necessary. If no station is a base station,
the calculation takes place via a free net adjustment (freier Netzausgleich).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-91
Greater accuracy by gage correction

qualification
Prerequisites for gage correction qualification
Gage correction qualification is a method by which you can measure circles and cylinders to a very high degree of precision and at very high
scanning speed.
For gage correction qualification, CALYPSO must record the bend parameters of the stylus used. When a circle or an arc or a cylinder is subsequently measured, you can correct the result by applying the bend parameters.
Prerequisites
The preconditions for recording and correcting bending parameters are

as follows:
A new measurement plan for the reference workpiece is open and

you have defined the clearance planes.
You know how to start a CNC run.
Creating a new measurement plan [ 33]

Defining the clearance planes [ 356]
Defining the scope of measurement [ 73]
The circle or cylinder is measured on the same primary plane of the

workpiece coordinate system as was used in recording the bend parameters.
Recording the bend parameters

In order to record the bend parameters, you need a workpiece with a
reference bore or a reference plug.
The bore or plug must be of known diameter.
NOTICE
The bend parameters have no effect unless you have installed a measuring probe.
The plug or bore is measured as an overlapping full circle in a separate
measurement plan.
1 Position the base alignment in the center of the reference bore or plug.
2 Select Resources Utilities Gauge Correction Qualification.
CALYPSO adds the icon for gage correction qualification to the list of
features.
3 Open the definition template.
4 Enter the qualified diameter of the bore or the plug in the D field.
4-92
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5 Select the scanning method for the circle:

The window used to enter the scanning speed is opened.
Click Strategy.
Click the Circle Auto Path Definition icon.
In the list, double-click Circle Path (1 Section).
6 Enter the desired scanning speed.
7 Click OK to close all dialog boxes.
Click Yes at the prompt shown below.
8 Perform a CNC run of the measurement plan so that CALYPSO can

measure the bend parameters.
Now that CALYPSO knows the bend parameters of the stylus, it will be
possible to correct measuring results of full circles and arcs accordingly
(see Applying the bend parameters [ 493]).
Applying the bend parameters

Use the definition template of the circle or cylinder to have the bend
parameters corrected for all future full and partial circles.
Activating correction by the bend parameters

Conditions:
The prerequisite is that for the measurement the values for the diameter, measuring location, orientation and scanning speed are as
close as possible to the values of the bend parameter definition.
However, the height for the cylinder measurement is not decisive.
1 Open the definition template of the circle or cylinder and click Evaluation.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-93
2 Tick the Gage Correction check box.
4-94
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Linking features in constructions

What is a construction?
What is a construction?
Specially constructed elements of a workpiece that cannot be probed directly, e.g. the center of a bore or the intersection of two features. These
features can be calculated using features that can be probed.
With CALYPSO, you can mathematically construct regular geometric elements and, in this way, define the feature you require. You can also
parameterize the features to be constructed, i.e. by using formulas.
You can use either the actual or nominal geometry for the construction.
NOTICE
As constructions cannot be probed, automatic feature recognition is not
available here.
In the measurement plan, constructions are indicated by the letter T
next to the icon because these are theoretical features. Apart from Recall, CALYPSO supports 15 different constructions.
Overview of constructions
Recall is a special construction. It is called from within the definition template of the feature.
Name
Call
Description
Recall
From within the Defining features by recalling [ 497]

definition template of the feature
You an call all other constructions from within the Construct menu.
CALYPSO offers the following constructions:
Construction
Description
Perpendicular
Perpendicular construction [ 4115]
Intersection
Intersection construction [ 4116]
GDT Symmetry
Symmetry construction [ 4132]
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-95
Construction
Description
Edge Point
Edge Point construction [ 4141]
Projection
Projection construction [ 4141]
Tangent
Tangent construction [ 4142]
Minimum Point
Minimum Point construction [ 4144]
Maximum Point
Maximum Point construction [ 4145]
Minimum Feature
Minimum Feature construction [ 4145]
Maximum Feature
Maximum Feature construction [ 4145]
Average-Feature
Average-Feature construction [ 4146]
Cone Addition
Cone Addition construction [ 4146]
Plane with Offset
Plane with Offset construction [ 4148]
Circle in contour
fit
Circle in contour best fit construction [ 4148] (available

only if the CNC Curve Measuring Software option is enabled)
Kink Point
Kink Point construction [ 4154]
Step Point
Step Point construction [ 4156]
4-96
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining constructions
The procedure for defining a construction is very similar to that for defining a feature.
1 Add the construction of your choice to the measurement plan by selecting it in the Construct menu.
2 Double-click the construction icon.
This opens the definition template of the construction.
3 Select the features required for the construction using one of the following methods:
When selecting a feature, you can specify that the nominal geometry
is to be used for the evaluation.
Click Feature and select the feature of your choice from the selection list.
Enter the name of the feature in the input field and confirm with
.
Select the Formula entry in the context menu of the input field.
Enter a formula for the name of the feature (Result: Text).
The value of the formula is calculated during run time and the construction defined accordingly.
When selecting a feature, you can specify that the nominal geometry
is to be used for the evaluation.
The features you selected are now interlinked in a construction.
Certain special aspects have to be borne in mind with the following constructions:
Cone Addition (Cone Addition construction [ 4146])
Circle in contour best fit (Circle in contour best fit construction [ 4148])
Defining features by recalling

Recall construction
The recall is a special type of construction. You can use a recall to derive
a new feature from one or more features.
Let us suppose you have measured four circles. You would now like to
learn the circle on which the center points of the measured circles are
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-97
located. To this end, define a new circle from the recalled center points
of the four measured circles.
You can realize the following recall types with CALYPSO:
Playing a video
Recall: Returns the reference point(s) (the origin of the local feature
alignment) of one or more features.
Recall One Feature: Returns the entire feature.

To play a video about recalling one element into a new coordinate
system, click 012_e_Rueckruf2/012_e_Rueckruf2.htm.
Playing a video
Recall Feature Points: Returns individual points, individual paths,

specific areas (specified in coordinates) or all points of one or more
features or one file.
To play a video about recalling a 3D line from three circle centers, click
011_e_Rueckruf1/011_Rueckruf1.htm
During recall and recall feature points, you can parameterize the features
to be recalled by means of the formula input. In this case, the features
are only determined during run time.
NOTICE
Proceed very carefully when defining a feature by recalling. Theoretically,
you could recall any number of features but this would not make any
sense.
4-98
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Recall and pattern

You can combine recall and pattern for the nominal value definition: For
each of the three recall types, you can also select features with patterns,
and you can also define a new feature with a pattern via the recall function.
You can define how the patterns are to be evaluated when they are recalled.
Recall One Feature

In the case of Recall One Feature, CALYPSO takes over the pattern of
the selected feature even if you have not yet assigned a pattern to the
new feature.
Once you have assigned a pattern to the new feature, an individual feature or an individual pattern feature will be used as original feature of the
new pattern. However, a feature with pattern keeps its pattern and
overwrites the assigned pattern of the new feature.
Recall and point recall

The behavior for Recall and Recall Feature Points depends on the
fact whether the new feature has already been assigned a pattern and
on the way in which the features to be recalled are shown in the selection
window.
Loop and index transfer
If a potential feature for the points recall has a pattern, this can be shown
in the selection window in two ways:
with loop: with brackets and start and end index,
with index transfer: with brackets and asterisk.
This representation determines the recall.

To change between these representation types, use the context menu:
Add loop to all marked features: the marked features with

pattern are shownwith loop.
Delete loops from all selected Features: the marked features

with pattern are shown with index transfer.
Select loops individually: the window shows all marked features

of the list with pattern and you can individually select each entry:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-99
New feature without

pattern
If the new feature does not yet possess any pattern, the following applies:
If you select a feature with the with loop pattern, the reference
points or the specified points of all pattern features of the feature are
recalled.
If you select a feature with the with index transfer pattern, you are
prompted whether a pattern is to be assigned to the new feature. A
pattern with the minimum actual number of all marked features with
the with index transfer pattern is offered as default.
By confirming this, the reference points or the specified points of the
original feature of the patterns are recalled and the proposed pattern
is assigned.
If you reject this, a pattern with only one pattern feature is created.
New feature with pattern
If you select one individual pattern feature, the reference points or the
specified points of all pattern features of the selected pattern feature
are recalled.
If a pattern has been assigned to the new feature beforehand, the following applies:
If you select a feature with the with index transfer pattern, the reference points or the specified points of the original features are recalled and the pattern of the new feature is assigned.
If you select a feature with the with loop pattern, the reference
points of all pattern features of the feature or the specified points of
all pattern features of the feature are recalled.
If then the assigned pattern of the new feature contains more actual
pattern features than the minimum of all actual numbers of patterns
(of all marked features), you are prompted whether the pattern with
the smallest actual number is to be used for the feature.
By confirming this, the new feature will receive the corresponding
pattern.
4-100
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
By rejecting this, the previous pattern will be maintained.

NOTICE
This leads to a stop of the CNC run. Since the number of pattern features
of the newly defined feature is larger than the number of pattern features
of the individual recalled features, some of the pattern features of the
new feature are not defined.
If you select one individual pattern feature, the reference points or the
specified points of all pattern features of the selected pattern feature
are recalled.
Recalling reference points of features

The Recall function makes it possible to recall the reference points (the
origins of the local feature alignment) of one or more already defined
features and to determine a new feature.
Thus, two circles define a straight line that goes through both center
points of the circles.
1 Open the definition template of the geometric element that you require to be created by a recall.
2 Go to Nominal Definition and select the Recall entry.
The Selection dialog box with the features is opened.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-101
3 Open in the tree the features with loop to recall individual pattern
features.
Features with loop are shown with brackets and the specification of
the index range, e.g. Circle1(1-4).
Features with index transfer are shown with brackets and asterisk, e.g.
Circle2*.
4 If you want to define the recall by means of the formula input, do not
select anything here and select Formula in the context menu. Enter
a formula which will furnish a list of names. To do this, use the list
PCM function.
Example: list("Plane1","Plane2")
Proceed with step 7.
4-102
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5 If you do not want to define the recall by means of a formula:

To adapt the features with pattern, mark the corresponding entries
and select the context menu:
Add loop to all marked Features: All marked features with
pattern are shown with loop and with the index range.
Delete loop from all selected Features: The loops of all
marked features with pattern are shown with index transfer
(with asterisk).
Select loops individually: Opens a window with all marked
features with pattern. Here, for each individual feature, you can
select or deselect loop and index transfer.
6 Select the features you need.
7 You can define the evaluation method, filtering and outlier elimination
for the required features.
Filter and outlier elimination are valid equally for all selected features.
The reference point(s) is (are) are accepted.
Recalling a feature in its entirety

You can recall a feature in its entirety. In this way, you recall the whole
selected feature (possibly transformed into a different coordinate system)
and derive from it a new feature of identical geometry.
NOTICE
The result is a theoretical feature that accesses the original feature with
the getActual formula.
2 If the new feature should posses a certain pattern, select under Nominal Definition the Pattern entry.
3 Go to Nominal Definition and select the Recall One Feature
entry.
The Selection dialog box with the features is opened.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-103
Only those features are displayed that are of the same type as the
feature to be defined.
4 Open in the tree the features in loops to recall individual pattern features.
You can then access individual features of a pattern.
5 Select the corresponding feature and confirm with OK.
The feature is accepted and determines the new feature.
Playing a video
To play a video about recalling one element into a new coordinate system,
click 012_e_Rueckruf2/012_e_Rueckruf2.htm.
Recalling one feature

and pattern
Once you have accepted a feature with a pattern, the new feature will
also receive this pattern, regardless of whether you have assigned a pattern to this new feature beforehand or not.
4-104
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Once you have assigned a pattern to the new feature and you have accepted an individual pattern feature, this becomes the original feature of
the assigned pattern.
Using the point recall

The Recall Feature Points function supports the recall of any measured
points of other already defined features to evaluate them in a different
manner.
You can recall individual points, individual paths, specific areas (specified
in coordinates) or all points of one or more features.
You can recall all points of one or more features [ 4105].
You can parameterize the features to be recalled and its ranges by

means of the formula input [ 4107].
You can determine the points with the mouse [ 4109].
You can recall individual points, individual paths or specific

areas [ 4109] (specified in coordinates) of one or more features.
You can import point coordinates from a file and use the nominal
value definition [ 4112].
NOTICE
Use the Recall Feature Points window to define the point recall. The
feature will be recomputed with the respective current actual values
when closing. If this is not necessary since you only want to check entries,
untick the Re-calculate Nominal Geometry check box.
Recalling individual points and ranges

2 Go to Nominal Definition and select the Recall Feature
Points entry.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-105
The features available to you are displayed in the Recall Points window.
At the same time, two new icons appear in the top right corner: Show
selection of Actual points and Select Actual-points via
Mouse cursor.
All the potential features for the point recall are listed in the Recall
Feature Points window.
3 Activate Show all Features in Patterns or Loops to recall individual pattern features.
Features with loop are shown with brackets and the specification
of the index range, e.g. Circle1(1-4).
Features with index transfer are shown with brackets and asterisk, e.g.
Circle2<*>.
4 To adapt the features with pattern, mark the corresponding entries
and select the context menu:
Add loop to all marked Features: All marked features with
pattern are shown with loop and with the index range.
Delete loop from all selected Features: The loops of all
marked features with pattern are shown with index transfer
(with asterisk).
4-106
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Select loops individually: Opens a window with all marked

features with pattern. Here, for each individual feature, you can
select or deselect loop and index transfer.
5 To add the individual circle paths of a cylinder to the list, click the
cylinder and select Open in the context menu.
You have two options to recall points:
You can recall all points of one or more features.
You can recall certain points of one or more features.
6 To recall all points from one or several features into the new feature,
select these points and confirm with OK.
The new feature is created from the points.
7 To recall certain points from one feature into the new feature, select
Add Range Limits in the context menu of the feature and specify
the desired points. For more details, please refer to Specifying recall
points more accurately [ 4109].
Parameterizing features and recall points

The Recall Feature Points function supports the recall of any measured
points of other already defined features to evaluate them in a different
manner. You can recall individual points, individual paths, specific areas
(specified in coordinates) or all points of one or more features.
During recall feature points, you can parameterize the features to be recalled and its ranges by means of the formula input.
Points entry.
3 Do not mark anything and select Formula in the context menu.
4 Enter the list of desired features as the formula. To do this, use the
list PCM function.
Example: list("Circle1","Circle2","Circle3")
Note that the color of the field with the features has changed to yellow.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-107
6 You have two options to recall points:

You can recall all points of one or more features.
You can recall certain points of one or more features.
7 If you want to limit the points to be recalled, select Add Range Limits in the context menu and specify the points and the point ranges
(Specifying recall points more accurately [ 4109]).
The feature has now been defined. The entries are evaluated during run
time.
4-108
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining the recall points with the mouse

With the point recall function you have the option to recall all points
from one or several features or certain points from a single feature and
to create a new feature.
Select the Recall Feature Points entry under Nominal Definition in the definition template of the new feature to be created.
1 In the list, select the feature with the points from which the new feature is to be produced.
2 Click the Show selection of Actual points icon in the toolbar to
represent the measured points of the feature with crosses in the CAD
window.
3 Click the Select Actual-points via Mouse cursor icon in the
toolbar and use the mouse to drag a rectangle (a cuboid is internally
generated from the rectangle) around the desired points.
In the list of features, the box (X,Y,Z,+X,+Y,+Z) entry appears
behind the name of the feature in question. The coordinates of two
diagonally opposite corner points of the cuboid are specified in the
brackets.
Note: The sides of the cube are first aligned with the feature alignment.
To change and edit this box, use the Add Range Limits [ 4109]
function. Here you can also change the alignment with which the sides
of the cube are aligned.
Specifying recall points more accurately

With the point recall function you have the option to recall all points
from one or several features or certain points from a single feature and
to create a new feature.
Select the Recall Feature Points entry under Nominal Definition in the definition template of the new feature to be created.
The Feature Point Recall window allows you to specify the points to
be recalled more accurately. For example, it is not necessary that the box
is parallel to the base alignment.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-109
Base alignment
Box with
recalled points
Coordinate system
Recalling certain points from a single feature explicitly

into the new feature
1 In the list, select the feature with the points from which the new feature is to be produced and select Add Range Limits in the context
menu.
The Feature Point Recall window opens.
4-110
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 Click one of the icons to copy a point, an area, a box, a circle path, an
angle range or a cylinder into the feature list.
3 Enter the corresponding parameters in the lower part of the window.
4 Click OK.
The defined points are included in the new feature. In the list of features, the ranges appear behind the name of the feature.
Range specification syntax
The following syntax applies to the range specification:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-111
Input
Meaning
point(1)
Point 1
points(1,5)
Point 1 to point 5
point(1) point(4) point(5)
Points 1, 4 and 5 (entries separated by

blanks)
box(x1,y1,z1,x2,y2,z2),"coord_system", box_distance)
All points within a cuboid parallel to the

axis with the corner coordinates in the
defined coordinate system and with the
defined distance to the sides of the cube
path(2)
The points of the 2nd circle path
angles(10,90)
The points in the angle range from 10 to

90 (only for circle paths)
cylinder(x1,y1,z1,x2,y2,z2,diameter)
The points within a cylinder with the center of the base area (x1,y1,z1), the center
of the top surface (x2,y2,z2) and the diameter.
Recalling points from files

You can also recall the points from text files for the nominal value
definition. For each point, the x, y and z coordinates are defined and
optionally also the coordinates of the normal vector and the stylus radius.
The path type can also be entered.
Evaluation of the file
When loading, the resulting geometry is calculated from the points. The
stylus radius that may be defined is considered relative to the normal
vector of the geometry.
If no path type is indicated, the loaded points will be treated as single

points.
If a path type is indicated, the loaded points will be evaluated as a

scanning path (filtering, outlier elimination and evaluation range.
The path types mainly differ in the automatic handling of overlappings in

case of measurements beyond 360. The following path types are possible:
Path type
Suitable for ...
Line
Planes and 2D lines
Circle on Plane
Plane with the Circle on Plane strategy

Any possible overlapping is taken into account and
eliminated
Radial circle
4-112
61212-2011002
Circles and cylinders (not usable for surface lines)
CALYPSO
Path type
Suitable for ...
Helix
Cylinder with the Helix strategy

Possible overlappings are not eliminated as they are
useful for the screw line
Universal type
2D and 3D curves as well as for all paths

Any possible overlapping is eliminated depending on
the geometric element
Selected features are

measured
By selecting additional features in the list for Point recall from file, these
features will be measured first before the files will be loaded.
In this way, it is possible to create the file to be loaded for the point recall
only when the selected features are measured. If you use the PCM Technology option, you can have PCM files run in the same way. If you use
the CNC Curve Measuring Software option, you can export the files directly (see in the operating instructions for the CNC Curve Measuring
Software option under Output of curve points and tolerances in text files).
If the selected features cannot be measured or if an error occurs during
the measurement, the point recall will not be carried out.
Points entry.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-113
3 Tick the From file check box.

4 Select the features to be measured prior to loading the files (multiple
selection with the Ctrl key).
5 Enter the paths of the files to be loaded in the From file input field.
- or Click the File selection for point recall icon and select the desired files.
The feature is now defined by the points from the files.
Reference: Format of the recall files

You can also recall the points from text files for the nominal value
definition. For each point, the x, y and z coordinates are defined and
optionally also the coordinates of the normal vector and the stylus radius.
The decimal separator is the point, numerical values are separated by tabs.
The first line may contain the column headers. The line will be ignored if
it does not start with a number.
If no path type is indicated, the points will be evaluated as single points.
As soon as a line in the form TypeOfScanningPath=<type> occurs, the following lines are evaluated as points of a path with the indicated type until
the next path type assignment takes place. The following values are possible for <type>:
4-114
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Line
Line
Circle On Plane
Circle on Plane
Circle
Circle
Helix
Helix
Any
General path
NOTICE
CALYPSO can only evaluate the points correctly if they are sorted and (in
case of several paths) assigned to the correct path. Otherwise, filtering,
outlier elimination and overlapping may lead to incorrect results.
Format description
Example of a file format:

x
y
TypeOfScanningPath=Circle
1.172944143 0.200792127
2.346667482 0.404625934
3.522572338 0.609053019
4.703111961 0.810897707
5.889935115 1.023098404
6.903111961 0.817923879
7.889935115 1.118267624
8.603111961 0.893874987
9.489935115 1.088267824
9.703111961 0.810895545
9.989935115 1.036485024
7.703111961 0.839084757
TypeOfScanningPath=Any
8.889935115 1.008267624
8.703111961 0.810897707
8.889935115 1.008267624
8.703111961 0.810897707
8.889935115 1.008267624
8.703111961 0.810897707
9.889935115 1.008267624
9.703111961 0.810897707
9.889935115 1.008267624
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
The x, y and z coordinates are the coordinates of the nominal points; u,

v and w are the coordinates of the normal vector and r is the coordinate
of the stylus radius.
The header and the last four columns can be omitted.
Perpendicular construction
Menu: Construct Perpendicular
Using the Perpendicular construction, CALYPSO computes the shortest
distance between two features.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-115
Feature 1
With Feature 1 in the definition template, define the point from which
the perpendicular will be struck. You can select any feature as Feature 1.
The table below shows which coordinates are used:
Feature 1 ...
Returns as perpendicular output:
Point (probing)
Coordinates of probing point
Circle, ellipse, slot, rectangle
Coordinates of center point
Plane, 2D line, 3D line, cylinder, stepped cylin- Coordinates of center of gravity

der, cone
Feature 2
With Feature 2 in the definition template, set the direction of the perpendicular. The perpendicular is vertical on feature 2. Therefore, feature
2 must be a spatially defined element.
Interpretation of results
Result of the calculation:
The straight line on which the perpendicular is located by the specification of two projection angles.
The length (distance) of the perpendicular. The calculated distance of

the perpendicular is the distance of the point in feature 1 to feature
2. CALYPSO automatically adds a Length of Perpendicular characteristic to the measurement plan.
Intersection construction
Basics of the intersection construction
Menu: Construct Intersection
With the Intersection construction, you can intersect straight lines,
planes, symmetry planes, free form surfaces, circles, cylinders, stepped
cylinders, spheres and cones with each other and have tangents computed.
Two features
To do this, you enter the two features and obtain one or more results.
Depending on which feature you entered first, not all options are available
to you for the second one.
Three features
With the Intersection construction, you can also intersect three features,
i.e. planes and symmetry planes. Once two features of the Plane or Symmetry Plane type have been entered, it is possible to enter a third feature.
Intersection with wall or

axis?
If you select an axial element such as a cylinder, stepped cylinder or cone

for the intersection, CALYPSO assumes that you want to intersect the
axis of the element with a different element. If, however, you want to
intersect the section surface of the element, you must select the Wall
check box in the definition template of the intersection.
NOTICE
Stepped cylinders can only be intersected as axes.
4-116
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
NOTICE
Free form surfaces can only be intersected with axes.
Depending on the intersection, one to eight results are shown in the
Result Selection group of the definition template, and you select the
intersection result you want to proceed with.
Automatic correction
With this construction, CALYPSO supplies results even if the objects do

not intersect geometrically but a meaningful, different interpretation (for
example, tangent) is possible.
When a cylinder or cone intersects a plane, CALYPSO performs automatic
corrections under certain circumstances the plane is interpreted as vertical or parallel (refer to Intersection of a plane with a cylinder [ 4124] and Intersection of a plane with a cone [ 4125]).
When rotationally symmetrical, three-dimensional surfaces intersect, CALYPSO performs automatic corrections under certain circumstances the
surfaces are interpreted as concentric or coaxial.
Individual topics describe the special features and results of different intersections.
Intersection of a straight line with a straight

line
The straight lines can be located in any part plane. However, they must
not be parallel or antiparallel.
CALYPSO delivers four points as results.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-117
If you select the Spatial option in the definition template, you obtain
as the intersection the center of the perpendicular between the two
straight lines - the point closest to the two straight lines.
If both straight lines are in one plane, this point coincides with the
actual intersection of the two straight lines.
If you select one of the other results in the definition template, you
obtain in each case the intersection of the projections of the two
straight lines to one of the three part coordinate system planes.
Intersection of a plane with a plane

You can intersect two or three planes with each other. The normals of
the planes must not be parallel or antiparallel.
The result of the intersection of two planes computed by CALYPSO is

the spatially defined intersection line. The point of the computed intersection line that is closest to the origin is used as the origin of the
local feature alignment (reference point) of the intersection line.
When intersecting three planes, there is either no result or a point.
Intersection of a circle with a circle

Both circles must lie in one plane. There are two options:
4-118
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 intersection points
In the Result Selection group of the definition template, specify

the intersection you require as the result: Result 1 for intersection 1
and Result 2 for intersection 2.
If exactly one intersection is present because the circles are touching,
two identical points are read out.
No intersection found
CALYPSO cannot compute a result.
Intersection of a straight line with a circle

The straight line and the normal of the circle must not be parallel or antiparallel. This means that the projection of the straight line into the plane
of the circle is again a straight line.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-119
Line
Circle
P2
P1
Projection line
CALYPSO computes as the result the intersections of the projected

straight line with the circle. If the straight line only touches the circle and
does not intersect it, two identical points are determined.
There are two options:
4-120
2 intersection points
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
In the Result Selection group of the definition template, specify

the intersection you require as the result: Result 1 for intersection 1
and Result 2 for intersection 2.
No intersection found
CALYPSO cannot compute a result.
Intersection of a straight line with a sphere

CALYPSO computes as the result the intersections of the straight line with
the sphere. If the projected straight line only touches the sphere and does
not intersect it, two identical points are determined.
Intersection of a straight line with a plane

The straight line and the normal of the plane must not be perpendicular
to each other.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-121
CALYPSO computes as the result the piercing point of the straight line
through the plane.
Intersection of a straight line with a cylinder

The straight line and the cylinder axis must not be parallel or antiparallel.
CALYPSO computes as the result
the piercing points of the line through the cylinder section if the
Wall check box is activated
Otherwise: the intersection point of the line with the axis of the cylinder.
Intersection of a straight line with a cone

4-122
the piercing points of the line through the wall of the cone if the
Wall check box is activated
Otherwise: the intersection point of the line with the axis of the cone.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Intersection of a plane with a circle

The normals of the plane and the circle must not be parallel or antiparallel.
CALYPSO computes as the result the intersections of the circular line with
the plane.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-123
Intersection of a plane with a sphere

CALYPSO computes as the result the intersection of the sphere with the
plane.
Intersection of a plane with a cylinder

a circle or an ellipse if the Wall check box is ticked
Otherwise: an intersection point.
z, k
K
E
Geometry type
There are two options when the Wall check box is ticked:
4-124
Circle geometry type: CALYPSO creates as the intersection element

the circle the center point of which represents the intersection point
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
of the cylinder axis with the section plane and which intersects the
cylinder vertically.
The plane is corrected orthogonally to the cylinder axis if the plane
does not deviate too greatly from the vertical position, i.e. if the angle
between the normals of the plane and the cylinder axis is less than
45.
No intersection is measured in all other cases.
Ellipse geometry type: CALYPSO creates the exact mathematical ellipse as the profile element.
Intersection of a plane with a cone

Geometry type
a circle or an ellipse if the Wall check box is ticked
Otherwise: an intersection point.
There are two options when the Wall check box is ticked:
Circle geometry type: CALYPSO creates as the profile element the

circle the center point of which represents the intersection point of
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-125
the axis of the cone with the section plane and which intersects the
cone vertically.
The plane is corrected orthogonally to the cylinder axis if the plane
does not deviate too greatly from the vertical position, i.e. if the angle
between the normals of the plane and the cylinder axis is less than
45.
No intersection is measured in all other cases.
Ellipse geometry type: CALYPSO creates the exact mathematical ellipse - if it exists - as the profile element.
If the angle between the plane and the axis of the cone is not larger
than the cone's taper angle and, therefore, no intersection ellipse exists, no intersection is calculated.
Intersection of a free form surface with an axis

You can intersect a free form surface with an axis.
NOTICE
The ACIS 3D Toolkit program must be open for the intersection calculation of a free form surface with one axis.
When intersecting a free form surface with an axis, CALYPSO supplies a
3D point. If several intersections are possible (since the free form surface
has for example a wavy profile), only the first determined intersection
point will be output.
The axes of the following features can be intersected with the free form
surface:
4-126
Cylinder (wall intersection not activated)
Cone (wall intersection not activated)
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Stepped cylinder
Torus
3D line
When defining the intersection, you can specify the free form surface as
first or second feature.
Intersection of a sphere with a cylinder

The sphere indicated here is not used for the intersection of the sphere
and the cylinder but a sphere of identical size whose center point is the
projection of the original sphere center point onto the cylinder axis.
The distance between the actual center point of the sphere and the cylinder axis must be less than half the cylinder radius.
Intersection of a sphere with a cone

The sphere indicated here is not used for the intersection of the sphere
and the cone but a sphere of identical size whose center point is the
projection of the original cone center point onto the cone axis.
The distance between the actual sphere center point and the cone axis
must be less than half the radius of the theoretical resulting circle.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-127
Intersection of a sphere with a sphere
CALYPSO computes the exact intersection of the two spheres.
Intersection of a cone with a cylinder

the intersection of the cylinder with the projected cone - this is a

cone of the same aperture, the point of which is the projection of the
cone point onto the cylinder axis and the axis of which runs parallel
to the cylinder axis if the Wall check box is ticked.
The angle between the (actual) cone axis and the cylinder axis must
not be greater than 45. The distance between the intersection of the
cone axis and the theoretical resulting circle must be less than half the
radius of the theoretical resulting circle.
Otherwise: the intersection point of the two axes.

The same conditions apply here as for the intersection of two lines.
Intersection of a cone with a cone

The intersection of a cone with another cone is generated in the following
manner: The cone with the blunter opening angle is set coaxially to the
other cone, the tip of the new cone results as the projection of the old
tip onto the cone axis of the cone having the more pointed opening angle.
The circle resulting from this is generated as the intersection of the two
cones.
A condition for this is that the angle between the two cone axes is smaller
than 45. The distance between the axis of the blunter cone and the plane
of the theoretical resulting circle and the center point of the circle must
be less than half the radius of the circle.
4-128
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The two cones can lie parallel or antiparallel to each other.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-129
Intersections of the symmetry plane

The symmetry plane can be intersected with a 2D line, 3D line, plane,
circle, cylinder, stepped cylinder, cone, sphere and with itself.
By selecting symmetry plane or plane, you can also intersect three elements.
For the symmetry plane, you must select the component for the intersection:
4-130
If Wall is activated, both side planes are used for intersection.
If Wall is not activated, the middle plane is used for intersection.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Intersection with ...
Results
2D line
One 3D point: the piercing point of the straight line through the
symmetry plane
3D line
Two 3D points: the piercing points of the straight line through the
side planes (wall)
Plane
One 3D line: the intersection line of the plane with the symmetry
plane
Two 3D lines: the intersection lines of the plane with the side planes
(wall)
Symmetry Plane
One 3D line: the intersection line of the symmetry plane with the
symmetry plane
Two 3D lines: the intersection lines of the symmetry plane with the
side planes (wall)
Four 3D lines: the intersection lines of the side planes (wall) with the
side planes (wall)
Two planes / symmetry One to eight 3D points, depending on whether the wall is intersected
planes
Circle
One or two 3D points: the Intersection points of the symmetry plane

with the circle
Cylinder
One 3D point: the piercing point of the cylinder axis through the
symmetry plane
(axis)
Two 3D points: the piercing points of the cylinder axis through the
side planes (wall)
Cylinder
(wall)
One circle or one ellipse: the wall intersection at the height of the
intersection point of the cylinder axis with the symmetry plane
Two circles or ellipses: the wall intersections at the height of the intersection points of the cylinder axis with the side planes (wall)
Step Cylinder
One 3D point: the piercing point of the axis of the stepped cylinder
through the symmetry plane
Two 3D points: the piercing points of the axis of the stepped cylinder through the side planes (wall)
Cone
(axis)
One 3D point: the piercing point of the cone axis through the symmetry plane
Two 3D points: the piercing points of the cone axis through the side
planes (wall)
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-131
Intersection with ...
Results
Cone
One circle or one ellipse: the wall intersection at the height of the
intersection point of the cone axis with the symmetry plane
(wall)
Two circles or ellipses: the wall intersections at the height of the intersection points of the cone axis with the side planes (wall)
Sphere
One circle: the intersection circle of the sphere with the symmetry
plane
One or two circles: the intersection circles of the sphere with the side
planes (wall)
Symmetry construction
Basics of the Symmetry construction
Menu: Construct Symmetry
You can use the Symmetry construction to determine a symmetry feature
between Feature 1 and Feature 2. You can use the symmetry feature
in other constructions.
Features
You can select any feature as Feature 1 and Feature 2, except for the
curve, free form surface, general curve and general surface.
If two planes or lines are not parallel, two different symmetry results are
delivered. In this case, you can choose the desired result.
If you wish to know which feature 1 can be combined with which feature
2 to form a symmetry and the result of such a combination, please refer
to the following topics:
Construction symmetry with 2D line as feature 1 [ 4134]
Construction symmetry with 3D line as feature 1 [ 4134]
Construction symmetry with plane as feature 1 [ 4135]
Construction symmetry with circle as feature 1 [ 4135]
Construction symmetry with ellipse as feature 1 [ 4136]
Construction symmetry with cylinder as feature 1 [ 4137]
Construction symmetry with stepped cylinder as feature
1 [ 4137]
4-132
Construction symmetry with cone as feature 1 [ 4138]
Construction symmetry with sphere as feature 1 [ 4138]
Construction symmetry with point as feature 1 [ 4139]
Construction symmetry with 3D point as feature 1 [ 4140]
Construction symmetry with torus as feature 1 [ 4140]
The symmetry feature is output in the form of coordinates common to

the two features.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Examples:
Symmetry point of two circles
Result: Coordinates of the symmetry point
Symmetry plane of two planes
Result 1: Position, length and width of the symmetry plane on which

the symmetry point from the two start points of the two planes is
located.
Result 2: Position, length and width of the perpendicular symmetry
plane.
Symmetry axis of two lines
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-133
Line 1
Line 2
Symmetry axis 1
Symmetry axis 2
Result 1: Coordinates of the symmetry axis on which the symmetry
point from the two start points of the two lines is located.
Result 2: Coordinates of the perpendicular symmetry axis.
Construction symmetry with 2D line as feature

1
A symmetry can be formed by combining the 2D line with the following
features:
Feature 2
Result
Description
2D line
2D line
Symmetry line between the two 2D lines
3D line
3D line
Symmetry line between the 2D and the 3D line
Plane
Plane
Symmetry plane between the 2D line (as a plane) and the plane
Cylinder
3D line
Symmetry line between the cylinder axis and the 2D line
Cone
3D line
Symmetry line between the cone axis and the 2D line
3D line
Symmetry line between the torus axis and the 2D line
Circle
Ellipse
Sphere
Point
3D point
Torus
Construction symmetry with 3D line as feature

1
A symmetry can be formed by combining the 3D point with the following
features:
4-134
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Feature 2
Result
Description
3D line
Symmetry line
Cylinder
3D line
Cone
3D line
3D line
Symmetry line between the torus axis and the 3D line
2D line
3D line
Plane
Circle
Ellipse
Sphere
Point
3D point
Torus
Construction symmetry with plane as feature

1
A symmetry can be formed by combining the plane with the following
features:
Feature 2
Result
Description
2D line
Plane
Symmetry plane between the 2D line (as a plane) and the plane
Plane
Symmetry planes between the two planes
3D line
Plane
Circle
Ellipse
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Point
3D point
Torus
Construction symmetry with circle as feature 1

A symmetry can be formed by combining the circle with the following
features:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-135
Feature 2
Result
Description
2D line
Point
Symmetry point between the circle center and the center of

gravity of the line
3D line
Point

gravity of the line
Plane
Point

gravity of the plane
Circle
Point
Symmetry point between the two circle center points
Ellipse
Point
Symmetry point between the circle center and the elliptical

center
Cylinder
Point

gravity of the cylinder axis
Cone
Point

gravity of the cone axis
Sphere
Point
Symmetry point between the circle center and the sphere center point
Point
Point
Symmetry point between the circle center and the point
3D point
Point
Symmetry point between the circle center and the 3D point
Torus
Point
Symmetry point between the circle center and torus center

point
Construction symmetry with ellipse as feature

1
A symmetry can be formed by combining the ellipse with the following
features:
Feature 2
Result
Description
2D line
Point
Symmetry point between the elliptical center and the center of

gravity of the line
3D line
Point

gravity of the line
Plane
Point

gravity of the plane
Circle
Point
Symmetry point between the elliptical center and the circle

center
Ellipse
Point
Symmetry point between the two elliptical center points
Cylinder
Point

gravity of the cylinder axis
Cone
Point

gravity of the cone axis
4-136
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Feature 2
Result
Description
Sphere
Point
Symmetry point between the elliptical center and the sphere

center point
Point
Point
Symmetry point between the elliptical center and the point
3D point
Point
Symmetry point between the elliptical center and the 3D point
Torus
Point
Symmetry point between the elliptical center and the torus

center point
Construction symmetry with cylinder as

feature 1
A symmetry can be formed by combining the cylinder with the following
features:
Feature 2
Result
Description
3D line
Cylinder
3D line
Symmetry line between the two cylinder axes
Cone
3D line
Symmetry line between the cylinder axis and the cone axis
3D line
Symmetry line between the cylinder axis and the torus axis
2D line
3D line
Plane
Circle
Ellipse
Sphere
Point
3D point
Torus
Construction symmetry with stepped cylinder

as feature 1
A symmetry can be formed by combining the stepped cylinder with the
following features:
Feature 2
Result
Description
3D line
Symmetry line between the stepped cylinder and the 3D line
2D line
3D line
Plane
Circle
Ellipse
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-137
Feature 2
Result
Description
Cylinder
3D line
Symmetry line between the stepped cylinder axis and the cylinder axis
Stepped Cylinder
3D line
Symmetry line between the two stepped cylinder axes
Cone
3D line
Symmetry line between the stepped cylinder axis and the cylinder axis
3D line
Symmetry line between the cylinder axis and the torus axis
Sphere
Point
3D point
Torus
Construction symmetry with cone as feature 1

A symmetry can be formed by combining the cone with the following
features:
Feature 2
Result
Description
3D line
Cylinder
3D line
Symmetry line between the cone axis and the cylinder axis
Cone
3D line
Symmetry line between the two cone axes
3D line
Symmetry line between the cone axis and the torus axis
2D line
3D line
Plane
Circle
Ellipse
Sphere
Point
3D point
Torus
Construction symmetry with sphere as feature

1
A symmetry can be formed by combining the sphere with the following
features:
Feature 2
Result
Description
2D line
Point

gravity of the line
3D line
Point
Symmetry point between the sphere center and the center of

gravity of the line
4-138
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Feature 2
Result
Description
Plane
Point
Symmetry point between the sphere center point and the center of gravity of the plane
Circle
Point
Symmetry point between the sphere center point and the circle
center
Ellipse
Point
Symmetry point between the sphere center point and the elliptical center
Cylinder
Point
Symmetry point between the sphere center point and the center of gravity of the cylinder axis
Cone
Point
Symmetry point between the sphere center point and the center of gravity of the cone axis
Sphere
Point
Symmetry point between the two sphere center points
Point
Point
Symmetry point between the sphere center point and the point
3D point
Point
Symmetry point between the sphere center point and the 3D

point
Torus
Point
Symmetry point between the sphere center point and the torus
center point
Construction symmetry with point as feature 1

A symmetry can be formed by combining the point with the following
features:
Feature 2
Result
Description
2D line
Point
Symmetry point between the point and the center of gravity of

the line
3D line
Point

the line
Plane
Point

the plane
Sphere
Point
Symmetry point between the point and the sphere center point
Point
Point
Symmetry point between the two points
3D point
Point
Symmetry point between the point and the 3D point
Circle
Ellipse
Cylinder
Cone
Torus
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-139
Construction symmetry with 3D point as

feature 1
A symmetry can be formed by combining the 3D point with the following
features:
Feature 2
Result
Description
2D line
Point
Symmetry point between the 3D point and the center of gravity

of the line
3D line
Point

of the line
Plane
Point

of the plane
Circle
Point
Symmetry point between the 3D point and the circle center
Ellipse
Point
Symmetry point between the 3D point and the elliptical center
Cylinder
Point

of the cylinder axis
Cone
Point

of the cone axis
Sphere
Point
Symmetry point between the 3D point and the sphere center

point
Point
Point
Symmetry point between the 3D point and the point
3D point
Point
Symmetry point between the two 3D points
Torus
Point
Symmetry point between the 3D point and the torus center

point
Construction symmetry with torus as feature 1

A symmetry can be formed by combining the torus with the following
features:
Feature 2
Result
Description
2D line
Point
Symmetry point between the torus center point and the center
of gravity of the line
3D line
Point
of gravity of the line
Plane
Point
of gravity of the plane
Circle
Point
Symmetry point between the torus center point and the circle
center
Ellipse
Point
Symmetry point between the torus center point and the elliptical center
4-140
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Feature 2
Result
Description
Cylinder
Point
of gravity of the cylinder axis
Cone
Point
of gravity of the cone axis
Sphere
Point
Symmetry point between the torus center point and the sphere
center point
Point
Point
Symmetry point between the torus center point and the point
3D point
Point
Symmetry point between the torus center point and the 3D

point
Torus
Point
Symmetry point between the two torus center points
Edge Point construction

Menu: Construct Edge Point
Use the Edge Point construction to compute a corner between two features. This corner is the intersection of two imaginary extensions.
Features 1 and 2
Point (generally a space point) is the feature you can use as feature 1
and feature 2. Each space axis of the points determines a plane. The
planes must intersect each other. The edge point lies on the intersection
line of the planes.
Feature 3
Use a plane or a point as feature 3. If you specify a point, this also defines
a plane via the normal. The edge point is computed as the intersection of
this plane with the intersection of plane 1 and plane 2.
CALYPSO computes the coordinates of the edge point as the result.

Example:
The coordinates of the imaginary corners are computed for two planes.
The third plane is the drawing plane.
element 1
contour point
element 2
If the third plane is not defined, the edge point is defined centered between Feature 1 and Feature 2 (Feature 1 and Feature 2 usually differ at
least slightly in height).
Projection construction
Menu: Construct Projection
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-141
Use the Projection construction to determine the position of a feature

that was projected onto another feature (e.g. the position of a point projected onto a plane).
Features 1 and 2
Feature 1: The feature you want to project.
Feature 2: The feature onto which you want Feature 1 projected.
Result output depends on the feature that results from the projection.
Examples:
Projection of a circle onto a plane

The circle is shifted perpendicularly to the plane until it is on the plane.
Result: Coordinates of the circle center point on the plane
Projection of a cylinder onto a plane

A straight line is created on the plane by the end points of the cylinder's axis.
Result: Two projected angles and the coordinates of the origin of the
local feature alignment
Exception: The cylinder is perpendicular to the projection plane.
The projection produces a point on the plane.

Result: Coordinates of the point
Tangent construction
Menu: Construct Tangent
The Tangent construction offers two options:
You interlink two features and obtain as the result one of the tangents connecting the two features. Circle, Circle on Cone, Point and
3D Point are suitable features.
You interlink two features and obtain as the result one of the tangential circles with predefined diameter. Two 2D lines or two features
of the 3D line, cylinder, stepped cylinder or cone type are suitable
characteristics.
Enter the two features in the definition template and select the desired
result.
Tangent (line) as result

Results
4-142
By interlinking two features of the circle, circle on cone, point or 3D point

type, you always obtain a 3D line as the tangent.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
There is a maximum of two results for a point and a circular feature.
There is a maximum of four results for two circular features.
The following table shows the possible number of results depending on

the position and type of feature with the various combinations of features.
Tangent of:
Point
Circle
3D point
Point and ...
One result
Two results
One result
Two or four results
Two results
Circle and ...

3D point and ...
One result
The results are shown in the Result Selection group of the definition
template. Select here the result you want to proceed with.
Automatic corrections
If the features do not lie exactly in one plane, CALYPSO computes the
corresponding tangents in a projection plane.
Point and point

Point and point always lie in one plane.
Circle and circle

The point is projected onto the plane of the circle. If the point does
not lie within the circle, there are always two tangents.
Circle and circle

Two circles serving as features must lie on parallel planes. Then the
tangents lie on the middle plane which is symmetrical with two
planes. In the case of a height difference of both circles, the height
of the tangents results from the average of the two center points.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-143
Tangential circle as result

By specifying two 2D lines or two features of the 3D line, cylinder, stepped
cylinder or cone type for the features, you obtain as the result one of the
possible tangential circles with predefined diameter contacting the lines
or feature axes.
R1
Automatic correction
R2
CALYPSO computes the tangential circles even if both features do not

intersect each other although this is the mathematical prerequisite for the
existence of the tangential circles.
CALYPSO then computes the tangential circles in relation to the projections of both lines onto their common symmetry plane.
Selecting the result
Use the button in the definition template to select the plane sector in
which the tangential circle should lie.
Minimum Point construction

Menu: Construct Minimum Point
Use the Minimum Point construction to compute the coordinates of the
point at which negative deviation from feature geometry is at its maximum. You can reference the deviation to the feature's actual or nominal
geometry.
Feature 1
Use a regular geometric element, a stepped cylinder or a curve as feature

1.
As a result, CALYPSO calculates the coordinates of the point having the

largest negative deviation (or, in the case of the stepped cylinder, the
4-144
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
deviation to the inside). Depending on the selection, the result is a

Point (with normal vector) or a 3D Point.
Nominal
You can enter a nominal value and check the compliance with the tolerance.
Maximum Point construction

Menu: Construct Maximum Point
Use the Maximum Point construction to compute the coordinates of the
point at which positive deviation from feature geometry is at its maximum. You can reference the deviation to the feature's actual or nominal
geometry.
Feature 1
Use a regular geometric element, a stepped cylinder or a curve as feature

1.
As a result, CALYPSO calculates the coordinates of the point having the

largest positive deviation (or, in the case of the stepped cylinder, the deviation to the outside). Depending on the selection, the result is a
Point (with normal vector) or a 3D Point.
Nominal
You can enter a nominal value and check the compliance with the tolerance.
Minimum Feature construction

Menu: Construct Minimum Feature
Use the Minimum Feature construction to determine which is the smallest
in a group of similar features.
Select existing features
Use the Select existing Features button to select the features you
want to compare with each other.
Selection list
From the selection list, select the characteristic (radius, angle, etc.) for
which you want the minimum computed.
CALYPSO computes the minimum for the characteristic you selected and
displays the feature in question in the CAD window.
For example, you can ascertain which cylinder in a group of three has the
smallest diameter.
Maximum Feature construction

Menu: Construct Maximum Feature
Use the Maximum Feature construction to determine which is the largest
in a group of similar features.
Use the Select existing Features button to select the features you
want to compare with each other.
Selection list
From the selection list, select the characteristic (radius, angle, etc.) for
which you want the maximum computed.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-145
CALYPSO computes the maximum for the characteristic you selected and
displays the feature in question in the CAD window.
For example, you can ascertain which cylinder in a group of three has the
largest diameter.
Average-Feature construction
Menu: Construct Average-Feature
Using the Average-Feature construction, you calculate a new feature from
certain averages of several features.
Use the Select existing Features button to select the features for
whose measured values you want to compute the average.
Selection list
In the selection list, define the characteristic (radius, angle, etc.) for which
you want the average computed. Values for characteristics that are not
indicated here will be adopted from the first feature in the list.
Cone Addition construction

Menu: Construct Cone Addition
Use the Cone Addition construction to compute the following data:
Diameter Definition: The diameter of the cone at a defined

height.
Position Definition: The position of the cone axis which corresponds to a defined diameter.
Feature
The only feature you can select is a cone.
Diameter Definition
If you have selected the Diameter Definition option, you can either
enter the height directly or determine this indirectly using another feature.
CALYPSO requires the following specifications:
At L: Height L at which the diameter should be calculated
4-146
Referenced To: Cone Origin
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Height L will be measured from the cone origin (the intersection point
of the cone axis with the surface area closest to the cone center).
Referenced To: Part Alignment
The coordinate axis which lies closest to the cone axis will be computed. The diameter will be output on the point of the cone axis for
which the coordinate on this axis is equal to L.
Position Definition
Or at: Feature that (if necessary, via the intersection point with the
cone axis) defines the height of the required diameter. Only the Point,
2D Line and Plane features are suitable.
If you have selected the Position Definition option, you can either
enter the appropriate diameter or determine the required position indirectly using another feature. CALYPSO requires the following entries:
At D: Diameter for which the height should be calculated.
Or at: Feature at the height of which the position should be determined (the height above the cone origin). Only the Circle, Circle on
Cone, Cylinder, Sphere, Cone, Torus and Ellipse features are suitable.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-147
CALYPSO will either calculate a specific diameter or the coordinates of a

specific height on the cone depending on what you have selected.
Plane with Offset construction

Menu: Construct Plane with Offset
Use the Plane with Offset construction to define a plane offset by a certain
amount above a reference plane.
Feature 1
The only feature you can select is a plane. The plane is the reference plane.
Offset
Enter the Offset.
CALYPSO computes the coordinates of the plane with offset as the result.
Please note that the offset plane is usually a plane which does not really
exist and, consequently, no probing points can be taken.
Circle in contour best fit construction

Basics about circle in contour best fit
construction
NOTICE
The Circle in contour best fit construction is available only if the CNC
Curve Measuring Software option is enabled.
Menu: Construct Circle in contour fit
With the Circle in contour best fit construction, you receive a circle
or a space point that is determined through the best fit of a circle in a
plane profile of gothic or elliptical shape.
Use this construction to determine how a sphere behaves in a path with
a certain profile, for example.
CALYPSO adds special characteristics to the measurement plan for this
construction (depending on your result selection). These characteristics
cannot be added in another way.
Plot for circle in contour
The graphic element allows you to define a plot for the circle in contour
best fit. (Plot for circle in contour construction [ 858]).
Circle in contour best fit construction

You define the contour, the circle and the desired result in the definition
template.
4-148
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Feature
You select a 2D or a 3D curve as the feature. The curve must be gothic

or elliptical in shape.
Elliptical shape
Gothic shape
Sphere
Sphere
Angle
Angle
Gap
Contact points
NOTICE
You cannot change the filter, outlier and evaluation settings in the selection window for the curve. You can change filters and outliers only in
the feature itself.
Diameter
You enter the diameter of the circle for the best fit process under Diameter. You can also calculate the diameter with a formula.
Offset in Touch Point
The Offset in Touch Point allows you to simulate the pressing of the
circle against the curve. The center point of the circle and the contact
points change. The contact between circle and contour is no longer lim-
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-149
ited to one point; now, they contact along an arc. CALYPSO then computes the contact point from the center of gravity of this arc.
Circle
Circle with
offset
Contour
Contact point
Contact curve
NOTICE
The offset is added to the radius of the fitted circle and not to the diameter.
Wavelength for filter
For a better fit, enter a wave separation length (WTL) for filtering the
profile (no filtering if you enter 0). Filtering can avoid excessive deviations between the determined and actual contact points.
Consideration of the wave separation length differs from the filtering of
measured values otherwise used. It is a special method for the circle in
contour best fit.
Minimum contact angle
You can also specify a Minimum contact angle. This can exclude
ambiguities during the best fit process (in case of real, distorted data records). Contact points that are no further apart than by this angle are
regarded as a single contact point.
If one of the following error messages appears at the bottom of the window, you can attempt to achieve an unambiguous result by increasing
the minimum contact angle.
No two-point contact with contact point greater than minimum

angle
There are several possible positions for the circle with the
contact angle greater than the minimum angle
NOTICE
The minimum contact angle is not taken into consideration if the curve
contains points from measurements performed with different stylus radii.
Result Selection
4-150
You can choose from different result types and receive a circle or a space
point depending on your selection:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Result
Icon
Output (characteristics highlighted)
Left tangent point
Tangent point X, Y, Z (the left circle-curve contact point

positioned closest to the start point of the curve)
Circle in contour best fit
Center point (X, Y, Z) of the fitted circle

Gap (the radial distance between circle and curve at the
position of the bisecting line of the angle between the two
contact points)
Start angle (angle of the right contact point on the circle)
Angle range (angle between the right and left contact
points)
End angle (angle of the left contact point on the circle)
Right tangent point
Tangent point X, Y, Z (the right circle-curve contact point

positioned closest to the end point of the curve)
Point at maximum gap width
Curve point X, Y, Z with maximum radial distance to the

circle
Gap (the maximum radial distance between circle and curve)

Center point X, Y, Z of the bend circle
Left Bend Circle
Bend circle radius R of the curve in the left contact point.

Center point X, Y, Z of the bend circle
Right Bend Circle
Bend circle radius R of the curve in the right contact point.

Calculation of the bend
circle radius
For the Bend Circle result, a section of the curve is interpolated via
polynomials of the fourth degree. Therefore, CALYPSO requires for the
calculation the points located on the left and right of the contact point.
You also predefine the determination of these points:
explicitly by specifying the point numbers
implicitly by specifying the angle ranges
R2
R1
Even if the best fit has been completed successfully, it is not possible to
calculate the bend circle in the following cases:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-151
Starting best fit
There are not enough points for the section.
The section is a straight line.
Each time a value is changed, CALYPSO performs the best fit and calculates the results.
If the initial data is insufficient for the best fit or is conflicting, an error
message will appear at the bottom edge of the window.
Further information about the circle in contour best fit and about the error
messages is available under Details on circle in contour best
fit [ 4152].
Details on circle in contour best fit

With the Circle in contour best fit construction, you receive a circle
or a space point that is determined through the best fit of a circle in a
path profile of gothic or elliptical shape projected onto the plane.
Results of the plane calculation
Prior to the best fit process, CALYPSO uses the points of the specified
curve to calculate a compensating plane and then projects the curve onto
this plane.
The greater the form deviation, the less precise the result of the best fit
will be. So that you can estimate the accuracy of the best fit, the following
results from the calculation of the compensating plane are displayed on
the right side of the window:
Form deviation (distance between minimum and maximum deviations)
Number of points
Minimum deviation (largest negative deviation)
Number of the point with the largest negative deviation
Maximum deviation (largest positive deviation)
Number of the point with the largest positive deviation
These results are also output in the default printout and compact printout.
Characteristics from the
definition template
You can automatically add characteristics to the measurement plan by

activating the check boxes. It is not possible to add these characteristics
to the measurement plan via the menu.
Added characteristic
Checks (depending on the result selection) ...
X value of the left or right contact point on the

circle center point.
XValue_Circle in contour best fit

Y
YValue_Circle in contour best fit
4-152
61212-2011002
Y value of the left or right contact point on the

CALYPSO
Added characteristic
Checks (depending on the result selection) ...
Z value of the left or right contact point on the

ZValue_Circle in contour best fit

R
Radius_Circle in contour best fit
Gap
Bend circle radius at the left or right contact

point.
Gap width at the angle bisecting line or the
maximum gap width.
Gap_Circle in contour best fit

Start angle
Feature_Angle_Circle in contour best fit
Angle Range
Angle_Range_Circle in contour best fit
End angle
End_angle_Circle in contour best fit
Angle between the first contact point and the

reference axis or between the alignment line
and the first contact point.
Angle between the contact points. Only circles
can be used as the features in this case.
Angle between the second contact point and
the reference axis or between the alignment
line and the second contact point.
You can subsequently edit the definition templates of these characteristics. However, the results will make sense only in combination with the
Circle in contour best fit.
Alignment line
The Select angle format window makes it possible to change the

reference of the start angle and the end angle. By activating the Alignment Line check box, the angles are measured based on the alignment
line. The alignment line is the connecting line from the coordinate origin
projected onto the plane of the fitted circle to the center of the circle.
Contact angle 2
Alignment line
Contact point 2
Contact point 1
Contact angle 1
If the alignment line is too inaccurate due to the geometric conditions,

nothing will be evaluated and the error is logged in the printout.
Error types and error
messages
Two types of error can occur with the circle in contour best fit:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-153
Primary errors are errors that prevent results from being calculated.
Examples of these errors include contours with fewer than three
points or an incompletely defined nominal geometry.
Secondary errors occur if it was not possible to reach a result during

calculation of the best fit due to insufficient input parameters.
Secondary errors are displayed in the error line at the bottom edge of
the window (below the geometry).
This error message is preceded by an indication of whether the error
occurred in the calculation of the nominal geometry or the actual geometry. If both geometries are faulty, only the error text for the actual
geometry is output and printed in the protocol/printout.
If CALYPSO is able to calculate the actual geometry but not the nominal
geometry, 0 will be entered for Vector, Diameter/Radius, Normal Vector, Gap and Start Angle and 360 will be entered for the
angle range for a circle.
Actual to Nominal
In the case of constructions, the nominal values calculated from the nominal values of the linked features may excessively differ from the actual
values.
In this case, you can enter nominal values instead of actual values. The
value is entered as a formula with a constant value; the input field is
highlighted in yellow.
By clicking the Actual -> Nominal button, you enter the corresponding
actual value as a formula for each nominal value (x, y, z, w1, w2...). The
actual value is rounded beforehand using the set rounding factor.
Kink Point construction

Menu: Construct Kink Point
The Kink Point construction is used to define the transition from one feature to the other. This is useful if both features form a matching unit.
Feature and nominal features
Result
4-154
This construction requires a contour with determined points and the

nominal dimensions of the two features.
You use a curve, a 2D line or a circle (circle on cone) as the feature.
You select any combination of 2D lines and circles (or circles on cones)
as nominal features.
The result of the construction is a 3D point which represents the transition

between the two nominal features.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Start point
line
End point
line
End point
circle
Nominal feature 1
Nominal
feature 2
Start point
circle
Features
It must be possible to measure the feature according to the Unknown
Contour method.
If you have the CNC Curve Measuring Software option, you must use
a 2D curve.
If you do not have the CNC Curve Measuring Software option, you
can also use a 2D line or a circle.
NOTICE
If you use the 2D line or the circle as a nominal feature, you must neither
filter this contour nor eliminate its outliers. Otherwise, certain points in
the kink area may be eliminated and the result might be incorrect.
Outliers
Mean-value line
Measured contour
Nominal features
Select 2D lines or circles (or circle on cone) as a first and second nominal
feature. Make sure that the nominal features are defined exactly:
For a circle, make sure that the start angle and the angle range as well
as the inside/outside are defined in addition to the center point, alignment and radius.
For a 2D line, the normal vector (negative probing direction of the

points) must be defined in addition to the feature reference point,
direction and length.
The sequence of the start and end points of the nominal features must
correspond to the recorded measuring points.
NOTICE
Only the definitions in the definition template of the feature are important; the strategy definitions (paths, technologies) are not evaluated by
CALYPSO.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-155
While selecting a nominal feature, CALYPSO activates by default the Use

nominal feature evaluation setting. Retain this setting.
Result calculation
The result of the Kink Point construction is a 3D point at the transition
from one feature to the other.
Direct input
You can also enter this point directly. The entered coordinates of the
nominal point are interpreted as formulas with the corresponding numerical value.
No result
If feature and both nominal features are defined, but the nominal kink
point cannot be calculated, a zero vector is output as nominal value.
Step Point construction

Menu: Construct Step Point
The Step Point construction is used to measure narrow edge transitions
which cannot be probed due to their small dimensions. This function allows you to determine in particular the reaming depth in a bore hole.
100:1
The difference between a bored and a reamed diameter ranges approx.

from 0.1 to 2 mm. For most styli, this difference is too small to be measured directly.
Procedure and calculation
The Step Point construction is used to calculate a 3D point from a scanned

2D line as feature and a reference feature of the 2D line, 3D line, plane
or cylinder type.
The calculation of the step point is based on the feature which was scanned from above over the step, i.e. in the case of a reamed cylinder,
from the unreamed side.
4-156
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
In this case, however, the searched step point is not probed. CALYPSO
can calculate this point from the probing data, the reference and the
entered step angle.
Definition of the step point

The Step Point construction is defined in the definition template.
Feature and reference
The following features are possible features and references:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-157
Step Point
Feature
Datum
Remark
in a bore
2D Line
Cylinder
Reference axis parallel to the feature
3D Line 2D Line
Reference axis parallel to the feature
Plane
Parallel to the feature
2D Line
Parallel to the feature
on a plane
2D Line
NOTICE
Filtering and outlier elimination are disabled for the feature.
Recalled line as reference
You can also use a line as reference which has been generated via point
recall from the measured points of the lines used as feature.
NOTICE
Make sure that only those points are recalled that lie on the same level.
Otherwise, an inclined computed feature is calculated and the result is
thus falsified.
Step Angle
For the calculation of the step point, you also define the step angle, which
is, for example, the angle at the cutting edge of the reamer. CALYPSO
will then calculate based on the upper step point the lower step point
using a trigonometric function.
The unit of measure of the step angle is predefined in the system settings.
Entries from 10 to 90 are allowed; the entry 90, i.e. a vertical edge, is
preset.
You can also enter a formula in the input field. The result of the formula
is always interpreted in radian measure.
Nominal position of the step point

The nominal position of the step point cannot be calculated automatically, as is the case with most other constructions. Therefore, CALYPSO
approximately accepts the nominal position from the feature's center of
gravity. You can also enter the nominal value manually.
4-158
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Result calculation
The result of the Step Point construction is a 3D point. You can select
between two results: the upper and the lower step point. The lower step
point is output by default.
Measurement strategy
The following prerequisites are important for the precise calculation of
the step point:
Highest possible point density
Sufficient start-up time at the beginning and run-out time at the end
of the path
Scanning direction from the higher to the lower step (side of the
bore towards the reaming side).
When scanning in the opposite direction, the stylus could bounce off
the step and lead to an inaccurate measurement.
Smallest possible stylus
Cylinder reference feature measured on the reamed surface.

This reduces the scattering of the measured points.
Calculation of the reaming depth

The step point makes it also possible to determine the reaming depth.
For this purpose, you can use the Distance characteristic which is determined between the step point and a feature on the face of the bore.
You can also project the perpendicular of the step point onto the face of
the bore and determine the reaming depth from the Length of Perpendicular characteristic.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-159
Measurement strategies for features

What is a measurement strategy?
The nature of the feature and the location of the measurement must be
known before CALYPSO can perform a measurement with the CMM. In
most cases that is enough because CALYPSO defines default settings.
Not infrequently, however, additional decisions have to be made because
of special considerations relating to measurement or the material or on
account of other, specific requirements.
What is a measurement
strategy?
A measurement strategy describes all the additional definitions you make

to obtain an optimum measuring result when measuring a certain feature. A measurement plan can contain several strategies.
Which measurement
strategy is used?
Depending on the available strategies in the measurement plan, CALYPSO behaves differently at the CNC start.
If no additional strategy exists in the features, there is no input option

for the strategy in the Start Measurement window.
In all other cases, the Start Measurement window shows the

Strategy to be performed selection field with the strategies defined in the measurement plan at the CNC start.
The strategy selected here is used for the measurement. If a feature
does not show the set strategy, the evasion strategy containing default settings will be used.
Managing measurement strategies

One or more measurement strategies may be assigned to a feature. You
create, edit and delete the strategies. One of the measurement strategies
must be defined as the default strategy.
The strategies of a feature are managed in the Strategy window. To do
so, click Strategy in the definition template of the feature.
For each strategy there is an individual index card in the Strategy window.
4-160
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The context menu of the index cards offers the following options:
Create New Strategy Name: Creates an additional strategy for

the measurement plan. It is possible to define this strategy in the current feature.
Delete Strategy Name: Deletes the current strategy for the entire
measurement plan.
Edit Strategy Name: Opens the window for editing the strategy
name.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-161
Editing a measurement strategy

Creating a new strategy for the measurement plan
1 Select Create New Strategy Name from the context menu of the
index cards of a feature.
After entering the new name, a new index card opens. All features of
the measurement plan are also assigned an additional (still empty) index card.
New Strategy
2 Select the procedure for adding a new strategy:

Adds a new index card with the entered name.
New Strategy with Pre- Adds a new index card with the entered name and the strategy defined in the Settings - Strategy for this feature.
settings
Copy Existing Strategy
Copies the strategy to be selected by you and adds it to a new index

card with the entered name.
3 Then, define the strategy lists of the new strategy for all features in
question.
If not, the index card with the strategy remains empty.
Performing a strategy
During measurement, the tasks in the current strategy list are executed
one after the other. The tasks to which a condition is assigned will be
skipped if the condition is not fulfilled.
If the current strategy has not yet been defined for a feature, CALYPSO
uses the defined evasion strategy.
Defining the measurement strategy for a

feature
The tasks that defining a measurement strategy involves are as follows:
Selecting Utilities and inserting them in the strategy list (Stop, Position
CMM without probing, Stylus System Change, Clearance Data, etc.)
Using strategy macros (discrete-point mode)
Selecting a path generation method

(see Path generation measuring features automatically [ 4178])
Defining the evaluation range

(See Evaluation range [ 4164])
Editing the point list

(see Point list [ 4169])
4-162
Editing the travel paths
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
(see Editing the travel paths [ 664])
Checking and editing clearance data

(see Checking the travel paths [ 667])
These tasks are executed in the Strategy window. To do so, click

Strategy in the definition template of the feature.
For each strategy in the measurement plan there is a tab in the Strategy window. During measurement, the tasks in the activated strategy
list are executed one after the other. The tasks to which a condition is
assigned will be skipped if the condition is not fulfilled.
The diagram shows an example of the Strategy window with a Circle
feature.
Path generation
Point list
Utilities
Single Points / Auto
Path Switch (paths)
Edit strategy
Strategy tab
Strategy macro
Strategy list
You will find more information on this window under Strategy in the
CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
Using the context menu of the strategy

list
The strategy list contains certain entries (e.g. probing points, tools used
and scanning methods) for all the points and tasks that CALYPSO is to
execute when measuring a feature (in the sense of the travel paths).
Editing a list entry through the context menu

1 Highlight the list entry.
2 Select the desired entry from the context menu:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-163
Execute Now!: The CMM runs the list entry immediately. First
make sure that the CMM can move freely.
Cut, Copy and Paste are standard Windows functions.
Edit: Opens a window with the input parameters (also with a double click).
Sort Nominal Directions: Corrects all normal vectors matching
the normal direction of the first point.
Single Points => Point Set: Converts the selected single points
into a point set.
Point Set => Single Points: Converts the selected point set into
single points.
Reverse Order: Reverses the order of the marked features in the
strategy list.
Condition: Opens a window in which you can assign a condition
to the current task. The task is not executed unless the condition is
fulfilled.
List: (Only for curves) Opens the point list containing the measured
values (coordinates, normal vector, deviation) of the segment.
Invert: (Only for curves) Reverses the start and end point of the
segment and thus the measuring direction.
Evaluation range
Basics about the evaluation range
If during scanning you notice that certain ranges are not suitable for the
desired evaluation, you can exclude these ranges from the evaluation: To
do so, you define an evaluation range for the corresponding strategy.
The reasons why the ranges are not suitable may be rounded edges or
deviating geometries.
4-164
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The measured points of the evaluation range are exclusively used for the
calculation of the computed feature. However, the excluded points are
included in the plot.
Paths with evaluation
range
You can set an evaluation range for the following path generation methods:
Path generation method
Features
Circle Path
Circle, Cylinder, Cone, Sphere
Large (radial) circle path
Torus
Small (axial) circle path
Torus
Circle on Plane
Plane
Linear paths
Cylinder
Line Auto Path
2D Line
NOTICE
The definition of an evaluation range does not make any sense if the
angle range of the path exceeds 360.
Definition of the evaluation range
Define the evaluation range using one of the following methods:
by specifying the start and end length or start and end angle referenced to the total length or the total angle of the contour.
All measuring points are evaluated of which the appropriate length
or angle lies within the specified range.
by specifying the start and end points referenced to the coordinate

system to be selected.
The perpendicular is drawn from the start and end point to the nominal contour and all measuring points located within this range are
evaluated.
When making entries, the specifications for the dialog elements of the
other definition method are calculated and displayed automatically.
Specification with formula
You can enter a formula in each input field for the evaluation range.
However, the input fields of the other definition method are disabled. If,
for example, you enter a formula for the start length, you can no longer
enter the coordinates of the start point.
NOTICE
When entering the formula, you must also enter the PCM reference system for the start and end coordinates. This reference system applies to
all positions in the current feature that are specified in formulas.
Defining the evaluation range

If during scanning you notice that certain ranges are not suitable for the
desired evaluation, you can exclude these ranges from the evaluation: To
do so, you define an evaluation range for the corresponding strategy.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-165
1 Open the corresponding strategy in the strategy list.

2 Activate the Special Settings tab.
3 Under Evaluation Range, tick the Enabled check box and click
the Settings button.
The Evaluation Range window appears on the screen.
4 Enter the evaluation range:

between lengths or angles or
between start and end position
Definition of the evaluation range

Length units
You can define the beginning and end of the evaluation range for lines
and form lines using length units. The feature reference point of the geometry is used as the origin (zero point) of the lengths. By way of confirmation, the total length is indicated.
The start and end points can also be exchanged the range between the
two specified points is always used as the evaluation range.
CALYPSO checks the plausibility of the entered points. If both the start
and end point of the evaluation range are out of the defined path, a
warning message appears: Start and end point of evaluation range are
outside the strategy. \Do you still want to continue?
4-166
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Under certain circumstances, the correct points are selected: If, for example, you used formulas of which the variables have not yet been specified. In this case, you can confirm the question and accept the values.
Angle units
You can define the beginning and end of the evaluation range for circle
paths, large (radial) circle paths and circles on a plane using angles. These
refer to the surface area of the geometry. In the case of the Sphere feature
with inclined strategy axis, the surface area and the axis are also inclined.
The start and end angles can also be exchanged the range between the
two specified angles is always used as the evaluation range.
You can enter angles between 0 and 360. All other entries are converted to modulo 360.
The intersection of the u axis of the element system of the geometry with
the plane of the geometry represents the origin for the angle units. By
way of confirmation, the total angle of the strategy is indicated.
An exception to this procedure is the small (axial) circle path (scanned on
the small radius) at the torus. With this strategy, the angle specifications
are not applied to the surface area but to the intersecting surface at the
point of the first axial section. If the small (axial) circle path contains several sections, the start and end points around the axis of the torus are
turned in relation to the corresponding sections.
When closing the input page with OK , the program checks whether the
start and the end point of the evaluation range are in the center of the
circle. In this case, it is not possible to determine any angle range for the
evaluation range.
Coordinate system type
The second option of defining the evaluation range is to determine two

points. The start and end points are projected at a right angle onto the
path. The projected points determine the evaluation range.
The following applies to circular paths: The evaluation range is evaluated
according to the direction of the strategy. If the angle range of the strategy is positive, the evaluation range expands from the start point to the
end point in the mathematical positive direction of rotation (normal of
the geometry seen from the top). In the case of a negative angle range,
the evaluation range expands in the opposite direction.
The following applies to straight paths: The start and end points can be
exchanged.
You can switch over the coordinate system for the point definitions. The
following systems are available:
Base alignment (the coordinates are shown in the base alignment)
Coordinate system (the coordinates are shown in the coordinate system of the geometry)
Feature (the coordinates are shown in the feature alignment of the

geometry)
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-167
NOTICE
The coordinate system is switched over at the same time for all path generations of the feature.
NOTICE
If the strategies are set to Base Alignment or Workpiece Alignment, the points of the evaluation ranges are not offset with the feature
if the nominal position of the geometry is changed.
NOTICE
If the strategies are set to Feature Alignment, the points of the evaluation ranges are offset if the nominal position of the geometry is
changed. This behavior is the same as the strategies of single points, intermediate points, etc.
When closing the definition template for the feature, the program automatically switches back to Feature System. During the CNC run, the
points of the evaluation range are calculated back to the base alignment
and compared with the determined points (these are stored in the base
alignment).
Particularities for the evaluation range

Features with pattern
In the case of features with pattern, the points of the evaluation range
are offset and/or turned with the geometry. Therefore it is not necessary
to define a separate evaluation range for each index of the pattern.
Use the formula and the LOOPx loop index if you require a separate evaluation range for the individual pattern features.
Invalid evaluation ranges
An evaluation range is invalid if one of the limit points is located in the

center of the circle path. Then no angle range can be determined for the
evaluation range as one of the two limits is no longer used.
A message indicating that the evaluation range is invalid appears in the
default printout. As the error has nothing to do with the evaluation of
the feature (but with the measurement), the text does not appear with
the calculated result of the feature. It appears separately. However, the
error is printed even when the feature could not be calculated for another
reason.
Calculation of the geometries
Prior to evaluating a geometry and its determined points, all points which
are outside the evaluation range are removed during the calculation.
In contrast to other evaluation settings (procedure, filter, outliers, restrictions), a feature is always calculated with its defined evaluation range
whether for a characteristic or for a getActual formula.
The number of points included in the printout represents the number of
points which lie within the evaluation range (minus outliers).
4-168
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Qualifying a feature
with the evaluation
range manually
The evaluation is inactive if you measure the feature manually (e.g. in the
case of manual base or start alignment).
Recall feature points
If you access the determined points via the recall feature points function,
the points which are outside the evaluation range are also recalled. The
recalled points retain their mark.
The evaluation range can also be restricted with regard to features which
are determined by recalling points. This is the only way of evaluating a
feature which was once measured with various evaluation ranges.
Representation of the evaluation range

When the feature is open, you can display the determined points in the
CAD window if you select Show Actual Points in the context menu
of the CAD window. Each actual point is shown as a red arrow.
Only the points that are outside the evaluation range are shown in pink
color.
The positions of the start and end points of the evaluation range can be
shown in the CAD window when the feature is open. To do so, you must
tick the Display position of evaluation range check box on the
Strategy index card in the CAD settings (menu: CAD View Settings...). If a feature contains one (or more) paths with evaluation ranges, the positions of the start and end points are drawn as pink squares.
The direction of the square depends on the nominal geometry. The start
and end points are projected perpendicular to the nominal geometry. The
tangent direction at this projection point forms the normal of the square.
If the start and end points are located in the center or on the axis of the
circle, the plane normal of the nominal circle forms the normal of the
square.
The appropriate positions of the evaluation range and the path in the
CAD window are marked.
Representation on the
plot
All measured points are shown in a form plot (roundness, straightness).

The evaluation range is identified.
Point list
Basics about the point list
The point list contains the coordinates for all the points together with the
normal vectors that have been collected for the feature. You can edit
these coordinates and, for example, define optimum probing points.
Additionally, the styli to be used are included in the list of points (under
Stylus).
The illustration below shows an example of the Point List window with
a cylinder measured at 8 points.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-169
Changing the point list

In the point list, you can change the stylus and change the coordinates
or the normal vectors of the probing points.
Note: Be careful when changing the list, because the CMM goes to each
point in the list as soon as you run the measurement plan.
2 Click the point list icon.
3 To change a coordinate, overwrite the value.
4 Click OK.
Alternative probing methods (selfcentering probing)

Principle of self-centering probing
The probe is usually unlocked only in the probing direction. This means
that the probe can move in one direction only, namely the direction corresponding to the movement of the joystick on the control console.
4-170
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
In this example, self-centering probing of the V-groove necessitates cancelation of the lock in the X axis in order to avoid faulty probing.
Then the stylus can slowly approach with less movement the bottom
of the V-groove in the X axis.
Special features of self-centering probing

Certain particular aspects have to be taken into account during self-centering probing. In addition, notes are shown for self-centering probing
with the XDT and VAST XXT styli.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-171
Restrictions self-centering probing

The following restrictions and special features apply to the self-centering
probing:
Topic
Special features
Control
Using the C98 / C99 control units, self-centering probing is an option

only for probing a circle path with a rotary table.
Rotary table
If a circle path or curve is to be measured with a rotary table, the circle

path must be in a rotationally symmetrical position with respect to
the rotary table axis. Otherwise, the control unit cannot measure the
circle path.
Scanning / Single Points
Probing points can only be measured as single points.

Lines and circle paths can only be scanned.
Tangential probing
Tangential approaches (with the VAST Navigator) are not possible.
Path form
If possible curves should have one rotation direction similar to a circle

path.
It is not possible to use self-centering probing for grooves with sharp
changes of direction.
Notes on self-centering probing with XDT and VAST

XXT
The following special features apply to self-centering probing with the
XDT and VAST XXT styli:
Self-centering probing with the VAST XXT is not allowed.
For self-centering measurement, the TL3 type shows the most suitable
properties whereas the TL2 type shows the most unfavorable properties. It might not be possible to use the XDT type for self-centering
measurement on certain CMMs, e.g. large machines.
For self-centering measurement, it is useful to to choose largest possible stylus diameter.
The recommended stylus lengths for the TL1, TL3 and XDT types range
between 30 mm and 80 mm. For the TL2 type, 150 mm should not
be exceeded.
Workpiece-specific influences such as the centering angle and material-related influences such as roughness require the stylus to be qualified. This is usually done by means of repeat measurements.
Activating self-centering probing

NOTICE
Self-centering probing is an option only for measuring probes.
4-172
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Call
To call the Probe Self Centering window, you have three options:
Activation for all features of a measurement plan:

Select Edit Deselect and select Resources Stylus system Probe Self Centering.
Activation for a certain feature

Highlight the feature in the measurement plan and select Resources Stylus system Probe Self Centering.
Activation only for a certain strategy (e.g. probing point) of a feature

Click Strategy in the definition template. Open the corresponding
strategy in the strategy list (e.g. the probing point) and click Probe
Self Centering.
1 Tick the Probe Self Centering check box and set the parameters.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-173
The corresponding features are identified with an orange frame in the

measurement plan.
The next time it probes, CALYPSO will use the settings you activated.
Self-centering probing of circle paths

The probe is usually unlocked only in the probing direction. This means
that the probe can move in one direction only, namely the direction corresponding to the movement of the joystick on the control console.
Self-centering probing of the V-groove necessitates cancelation of the
lock in transverse direction to the groove in order to avoid faulty probing.
Then the groove guides the stylus in the path. This is called self-centering
probing.
When performing self-centering probing of a circle in a V-groove, you
cannot touch the actual nominal circle with a spherical stylus. With a cylinder that touches a plane, it is also not possible to probe the circle of the
surface area directly. You must decide here which circle is to be defined
as the nominal circle.
Circular V-groove
To probe a V-groove that forms a circle on the plane or at a cylinder, you

define the course of the groove base as the nominal circle even if it cannot
be probed.
Measuring point
Contact points
Nominal point
used
Desired
nominal point
After the stylus radius correction, a minimal difference remains uncalculated. Depending on the characteristic used, this difference has no permanent effect because its results cancel each other out or the difference
is of a negligible amount.
Circle of a surface area
4-174
If you want to define the Circle feature by self-centering probing but

probing at the desired height of the surface area is not possible, you must
use the actual probing points (contact points) as nominal points.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Contact point
Measuring point
Desired
nominal point
Self-centering probing of circle paths

You can also activate the self-centering measurement for the helix path
measurement strategy for cylinders and cones. This is realized in the Helix strategy window on the Special Settings tab.
Use Settings to open the Probe Self Centering window and set the
parameters for the self-centering measurement.
NOTICE
Self-centering scanning without rotary table is only possible with the C99
control.
Restrictions
Self-centering scanning is intended for circles. Therefore, avoid extreme

slopes.
NOTICE
The slope refers to the section surface and not to the cone axis.
Pitch
Automatic stylus search

Principle of the automatic stylus search
The automatic stylus search is best suited for use with an RDS, but it can
also be used with other sensors.
Purpose
There is a difficulty involved if geometric elements with rotational pattern

are to be measured on a CMM without rotary table and without RDSCAA: The identical features of the pattern cannot be measured with one
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-175
and the same stylus because the probing direction is different for each
feature.
Example: 8 bores
Eight bores are to be measured on a rotationally symmetrical part; these

bores are defined in CALYPSO as cylinders with rotationally symmetrical
pattern. This pattern cannot be measured at first without a rotary table
and without RDS-CAA, as it is unclear which styli are to be used for the
individual positions.
If you have activated the automatic stylus search and a stylus is available
for each required direction, CALYPSO can measure the cylinder without
difficulty.
Principle of the automatic stylus search
This is how the automatic stylus search works: CALYPSO searches

through all qualified positions of a stylus system and compares the shaft
direction of each stylus with the planned probing direction.
For a cylindrical or circular feature, CALYPSO uses the axis of the feature.
In the case of a planar feature, CALYPSO uses its normal.
CALYPSO uses the stylus with the smallest angle between stylus shaft and
axis or normal to perform the measurement. In order to make the result
unambiguous, you have to specify how this angle is to be measured i.e.
whether the axis or normal is to be oriented nearly in the direction of the
shaft or in the opposite direction of the shaft.
Angle at
shaft against normal
Angle at
shaft along normal
NOTICE
The shaft direction is defined as the direction from the fastening point to
the tip of the stylus.
CALYPSO minimizes either the angle between the stylus shaft and the
axis or normal, or the angle in the opposite direction of the axis or normal.
The direction you have to choose depends on the geometry of your workpiece.
4-176
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Maximum angle
To reduce the danger of shaft probing (e.g. in the case of cylinder measurements), you can restrict the maximum permitted angle between the
shaft and normal or axis.
If there is no stylus in the permitted angle range, CALYPSO is unable to
probe. The CNC run is halted, and you receive a corresponding message.
Activating automatic stylus search

If you want to measure a feature with rotational pattern on a CMM without rotary table and without RDS-CAA, you must activate the automatic
stylus search. This is done when the stylus is selected in the measurement
strategy of the feature in question.
NOTICE
A requirement for the automatic stylus search is that all the required styli
or stylus positions must be qualified.
The shaft direction must also be specified for qualification. (A query appears asking for the probing angle if probing has not been in the direction
of the main axis of the CMM.)
2 Open the strategy window for the probing, e.g. Probing point.
3 Under Stylus, select one of the two Auto entries:
Auto1: Shaft away from normal: The stylus whose angle between shaft direction and opposite direction to the normal or axis of
the feature is the smallest is set.
Auto2: Shaft along normal: The stylus whose angle between
shaft direction and normal or axis of the feature is the smallest is set.
Note: The shaft direction is defined as the direction from the fastening
point to the tip of the stylus.
In the CNC run, the corresponding styli are dynamically selected and
assigned.
Note: You can also make the Auto1 and Auto2 entries via the Measurement Plan Editor Features.
Restricting the angle range

To reduce the danger of shaft probing (e.g. in the case of cylinder measurements), you can restrict the maximum permitted angle between the
shaft and normal or axis.
To do so, enter the maximum permitted limit angle under Angle range
for stylus search in the Measurement Plan Editor Features.
An error message appears if the restriction of the angle range means that
no suitable stylus is found in the CNC run. The CNC run is canceled.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-177
Path generation measuring features

automatically
Purpose and use of the path generation
Unlike the probing of individual points, path generation procedures feature rapid multi-point measurement in a single operation. Path generation
will help you arrive at optimum and highly accurate measuring results.
NOTICE
You must have qualified your stylus with the Tensor setting in order to
use path generation for scanning (see Preparing the stylus system [ 315]).
A measurement strategy depends on a number of parameters, from the
group of the feature (shape, position, size) through tolerance up to the
stylus used. CALYPSO uses these parameters to calculate starting parameters of the CMM that lead to the best possible compliance with the
tolerance you demand. You only have to enter the minimum data.
With path generation you can
continuously record measuring points and generate paths from single

points, if you have a CMM with measuring probe.
or you can just generate a path from single points, if you have a CMM
with trigger probe (pseudo scanning).
Path generation is a macro that automatically measures a feature with set

parameters, for example a certain number of surface lines or screws on
a cylinder or cone. With this you can reach a high point density and thus
adequate information about the workpiece surface. High point densities
are the prerequisite for standardized, extremely accurate evaluation of
your features.
To use a path generation method, follow these steps:
Set the global settings for evaluation of the characteristics groups in

the default settings (see Changing the measurement parameters of
the CMM [ 1014]).
Enter the feature in the measurement plan and probe its geometry.
Alternatively, you can load a feature from a CAD file. See Defining
features [ 42].
Assign a path generation method.
Check and/or change the settings of the path generation method.
Assigning the path generation method is split into three steps:
4-178
Adding the path generation method to the strategy list.
Making general settings.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
These settings are common to all path generation methods.
Setting values for the path generation method.

These settings are described separately because they depend on the
selected path generation method.
Adding a path generation method to a

strategy list
The path generation method has to be added to the strategy list of the
feature, so it can be taken into account when generating travel paths.
The Strategy dialog box is opened.
Path
generation
method
Strategy list
2 Choose the path mode.
To change the setting, click the displayed icon. (You have chosen path
generation if the points are displayed connected.)
3 Click the button for the path generation method you want.
The path generation method is entered in the strategy list. At the same
time, CALYPSO immediately generates the path from the single points if
you choose this in step 3.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-179
General settings for the path generation

method
You can now change general settings for the method irrespective of
which path generation method is set for a feature.
CALYPSO supplies default values for the fields in the dialog box of the
chosen path generation method. The data comes from:
the geometric data of the feature,
the default values in the default settings and
the tolerances from
the characteristics and

the feature.
If you have not defined any tolerances yet, you can do it in this section.
CALYPSO calculates the parameters according to the narrowest tolerance
which you entered for testing the feature and the point density for the
characteristics group (see Basics about characteristics [ 52]).
NOTICE
If filtering is active for the feature, make sure that all scanning paths on
the feature have the same step width (step distance).
Otherwise, the results are not in accordance with standards.
A description of the parameters for each path generation method can be
found in:
Path generation methods for circle, cylinder and cone [ 4185]
Path generation methods for planes: the Polyline [ 4190]
Path generation methods for planes: the Grid [ 4192]
Path generation methods for planes: the Circle Path [ 4192]
Path generation of lines [ 4193]
Path generation methods in detail

List of path generation methods
The available path generation methods are automatically offered with
every feature. The following path generation methods are available:
4-180
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Feature
Various features
Icon
Path generation method/discrete-point measurement

Unknown Contour
Measurement takes place from point 1 to point 2 using the shortest
path (see Unknown Contour path generation [ 4184]).
Line
Line Measurement
Plane, Cylinder,
Cone, Sphere
Define Point Set
Plane/Offset
Plane
Grid measuring
The plane is acquired in a grid of user-definable pitch.
Polyline Measurement
A polyline is measured on the plane.
Circle path on plane
A circle path is measured on the plane.
Multi Polyline
Several polylines at a distance from the edge.
Circle, Cylinder,
Cone
Four-Point Circle Macro (also suitable for thread measurement)

This measurement is semiautomatic. To execute this measurement,
move the stylus to the center of the circle (cylinder, cone) that is to
be measured. CALYPSO performs four probing operations and calculates the values for the circle from them.
Group Circle Paths
Combines the selected circle paths in a group and undoes the existing
grouping. A group is evaluated the same way as a circle path scanned
with a stylus.
Support function for special applications, e.g. if a circle is to be measured with several styli.
Circle, Sphere,
Slot, Curve, 3D
Curve
Circle Auto Path Definition (Circle Path Measurement)
Circle
Helix path (screw line measurement)
The start angle and angle range can be set.
Suitable for special applications (threads). Gradient, number of turns,

start angle and rotation direction can be set.
Cylinder
2 Circle Auto Paths

Two circles are measured the first at the top of the cylinder and the
second at the bottom of the cylinder. The measuring heights can be
set individually.
1 Circle Auto Path
This intersection is measured at the center of the cylinder. The measuring height can be set.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-181
Feature
Icon

Surface lines
The number of form lines is editable. The starting height and the
target height can be parameterized.
Gradient, number of turns, start angle and rotation direction can be
set.
Helix path variable (screw line measurement with VAST Navigator)
Gradient, number of turns, start angle and rotation direction as well
as the number of additional circles can be set.
Sphere
Define Sphere Position

CALYPSO probes the sphere and in so doing defines the position of
the sphere. The probing locations cannot be influenced. In CNC runs,
you will also be requested to take manual probings.
Sphere Macro
You can enter the sphere coverage for the area in which these probings are to be taken.
Cone
2 Circle Auto Paths

Two circles will be measured the first at the top of the cone and the
second at the bottom of the cone. The measuring heights can be set
individually.
1 Circle Auto Path
One or more intersections will be measured between the base surface
and top surface of the cone. The number of intersections and their
measuring heights can be set.
Suitable for special applications (threads). Gradient, number of turns,
start angle and rotation direction can be set.
Rectangle
Rectangular Path
Measures an inside or outside rectangle by evading the corners.
Torus
Large Circle Path

Measures one or more circles on the torus of which the centers are
on the axis of the torus.
Small Circle Path
Measures one or more circles on the torus of which the centers are
on the primary circle of the torus.
4-182
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Feature
Curve
Icon

Curve segment measurement.
The segment to be measured is defined by three or more points:
If you define three points, they represent start point, end point
and direction of curvature (direction around circumference) of the
curve segment, in that order.
If you define more than three points, they represent a full circle;
the first point defines the start point and the direction around
circumference is clockwise (from the top or outside).
Unknown Cut
3D Curve
3D Curve
Measures 3 paths beside one another to compute the transverse curvature of the curve.
3D Grid
Measures several paths positioned next to each other in a meandering
style.
Stroke curve
Measures a radial or axial lift curve on the cylinder section.
Cam Groove
Measures a cam groove on the cylinder section.
Setting parameters for a path generation

method
Specifying tolerances and making general settings
1 Double-click the corresponding entry in the strategy list to open the
window for the path generation method.
2 To enter the point density, click Basic Settings.
You switch to the corresponding page in the default settings (you will
find more information on this in the Online Help under Changing
the measurement parameters of the CMM [ 1014]).
3 Enter the tolerance for the feature in the Expected Tolerance input
field.
4 Click Calculate.
CALYPSO computes the parameters of the Settings group. The scanning speed proposed by the system depends on the required accuracy.
5 Enter the number of the desired stylus in the Stylus field.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-183
6 Enter the values for the path generation method. For more details,
please refer to Path generation measuring features automatically [ 4178].
7 Click OK to save the settings and close the dialog box.
You are returned to the Strategy window.
8 If you do not want to set any more path generation methods for this
feature, click OK. Otherwise repeat the steps from Features you can
measure with path generation [ 4180].
The path generation method has now been fully defined and will be executed once a CNC run is initiated.
Unknown Contour path generation

The Unknown Contour method is available for the following features:
Circle
Ellipse
Slot
Rectangle
Cylinder
Sphere
Cone
Curve
For the curve, the Unknown Contour method is activated in the strategy window:
For all other given features, you can insert a path in the strategy list using
the Unknown Contour icon.
4-184
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Enter the start point and end point of the travel path in the strategy window for the unknown contour.
CALYPSO executes the measurement using the shortest path while,
of course, observing the feature and keeping in contact with the workpiece.
Immersion depth
To avoid unintentional scanning in the air when scanning an unknown

contour, an immersion depth of 0.3 mm is set. This default value may
be too high for very flat objects so that there is a risk of touching the
material. For such cases, you can set the Immersion Depth for Scanning Unknown Contour to Middle or Low in the Measurement
Plan Editor Features.
Path generation methods for circle, cylinder

and cone
The path generation methods for circle, cylinder and cone are identical.
In the following illustration, you see the input field for a circle path.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-185
Generating the path

from the CAD model
You can extract the data for path generation straight from the CAD
model. When you use this method, the system returns a series of either
start and end angles or start and end points.
Open cylinders and cones are taken into account: Each new path is
checked directly against the CAD model in order to identify material
flaws, if any, and eliminate them from the path. The path can thus be
generated with restrictions, or you may be able to generate different
paths. (At this time, the function is implemented only for the circle and
circle path.)
If you make subsequent, manual changes to the path data, CALYPSO
does not recheck the information. This means that you have a great deal
of latitude in defining paths.
Assembling a circle path
If the workpiece does not allow scanning the circle path with a single
stylus (e.g. in the case of a full circle on a camshaft), split the circle path
into circle sections to scan each section with an appropriate stylus.
The individual arcs can be combined in a circle path by means of the
Group Circle Paths function.
After the measurement, the circle path is assembled from the selected
circle sections and evaluated.
Entering formulas for

path parameters
4-186
The entries for path generation can be parameterized. Select the Formula entry in the context menu of the fields. You can use the variables
that are defined in the measurement plan to make formulas and enter
PCM commands if you use the PCM Technology option.
The following entries can be parameterized.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Parameterizing single
points and intermediate
positions
Scanning speed
Step width
Number of points
Start angle (input in radians!)
Angle range (input in radians!)
Stylus
Single probing points and intermediate positions can also be parameterized. Here, it will be necessary to define the reference system. To do so,
click PCM-Ref in the Point List window.
In the Datum Reference Frame for PCM variable window, you

can define which coordinate system should be used as the basis for the
conversion of parameters to numerical values.
This coordinate system will apply to all parameters of the feature that is
currently open. All technological parameters of this feature will always be
calculated on the basis of this coordinate system irrespective of the view
that has been selected.
Measuring range
The term measuring height and the resulting measuring range are explained by the following illustration:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-187
Origin of feature's
local
Coordinate System
min. measuring
height
Measuring range
max. measuring
height
Evaluation range
If certain start and end points are not suitable for the evaluation, you can
define an evaluation range.
Scanning a circle path with several styli

If it is not possible to scan the circle path with one stylus, then you can
probe the circle path using several styli. The arcs determined in this way
can be combined in a circle path by means of the Group Circle Paths
function.
You can use this method for the following features:
Combining circle paths
Cylinder
Cone
Circle
Circle on Cone
To scan a circle path using several styli, you must define which circle path
is to be scanned with which stylus. Bear in mind that no circle path may
contain single points.
To group circle paths, select these in the strategy window and click the
Group Circle Paths icon.
The circle paths are assigned to a group. You can identify this by the
annotation to the name (group n) in the strategy list. The group is
treated and evaluated the same way as a circle path scanned with a stylus.
If one of the selected circle paths is already included in a group, this will
be removed from the group and added to the new group. Under certain
circumstances, the original group might thus be deleted.
4-188
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Resulting circle path
Start, end and direction of rotation of the assembled circle path result
according to the following rules:
The direction of rotation of the assembled circle path corresponds to

the direction of rotation of the first circle section in the strategy list.
The assembled circle path begins after the largest gap between two
adjacent circle sections.
The illustration below shows the relationships.
(3)
(1)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
(1)
(2)
Removing a group
To remove a group, select one of the appropriate circle paths and choose
Select Group in the context menu.
Click the Group Circle Paths icon. The group is removed.
Removing from group
To remove individual circle paths from a group, highlight the desired circle
paths and select Remove From Group in the context menu.
Measuring thread
Conditions:
To measure cylindrical tapped holes, you must define a feature of
the Circle type for the tapped hole. The circle macro is used for the
thread measurement.
1 Click Strategy in the definition template for the circle.
2 Click the icon for the Circle Macro path generation method.
3 Tick the Thread check box and enter the desired number of probings,
pattern and orientation of the thread.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-189
You are prompted whether the stylus is in the center of the circle.
5 Position the stylus with the shaft parallel to the axis of the circle in the
center of the tapped hole and confirm with Yes.
Starting at the current height, CALYPSO performs 4 probings at a distance of 90 each by considering the pattern and orientation of the
thread. The center of the circle is computed from the 4 points gained.
Then CALYPSO carries out the actual thread measurements. They are
entered as individual points in the strategy list.
The further procedure is the same as for the circle measurement.
Note: You can also use the circle macro for the thread measurement
several times in succession, e.g. at different heights of the thread.
Path generation methods for planes: the

Polyline
Automatic measurement of a polyline allows you to measure a track of
lines, arcs and full circles on planes. This helps you measure planes very
easily that are strongly segmented or ruptured.
You see the input window for the generation of polylines in the following
picture.
4-190
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Coordinates list
Marking frame
Creating a polyline
1 Probe the points on the plane from which you want to create the
polyline. You can do this with the CMM or the CAD window (you will
find more information in the Online Help under Defining probing
points in the CAD window [ 211]).
Each entered measuring point is displayed in the coordinates list (from
bottom to top). CALYPSO connects these points with lines by default.
You can select the coordinate system for the display of the points. The
points are saved in the local feature alignment.
2 You always need the start point, direction point and end point if you
want to create an arc or full circle. The three points have to be displayed in the coordinates list. Use the arrow buttons next to the
Number field to do so.
3 Click the arc or full circle icon.
The green border now encloses the three points from which the arc
or full circle was calculated. You see the new connection in the CAD
window.
4 Continue in this way with all following points.
The order does not matter for this: You can probe new points at any
time and/or choose/edit connection types between any points.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-191
Path generation methods for planes: the Grid

With the grid measurement, you can create a plane right down to very
small sections.
The input window for path generation of planes with a grid can be seen
in the illustration below.
Make sure that you have entered a value for the rounding-off of corners
in the default settings. Check this value by clicking Basic Settings and
then the SCAN Limits tab.
Path generation methods for planes: the Circle

Path
You can have a plane calculated from a circle path using the path generation method for the circle path.
The input window for path generation of a circle path on a plane can be
seen in the illustration below.
4-192
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
There are two ways to define the circle path:
Accept the default setting:
Scanning with rotary table
Center of the circle = center of the plane

Diameter = minimum of the length and width of the plane, corrected by 1.5 times the stylus radius.
Enter the circle center and the diameter.
To scan a circle path using the rotary table, tick the Scan circle path
with rotary table check box.
Prerequisite:
The rotary table is activated for the current measurement plan.
The space axis of the plane points in the direction of the rotary table
axis.
Path generation of lines

With the path generation method for lines, a line is scanned whose points
are already defined in the feature. CALYPSO therefore does not need any
more information, and you merely see the parameters of the CMM and
the tolerance in the input window of the path generation method.
The input window for the generation of straight lines can be seen in the
illustration below.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-193
Path generation methods for rectangles: the

Rectangular Path
With the path generation method for rectangles, the stylus does not scan
the entire circumference of the rectangle. The stylus moves on four individual paths along the four sides of the rectangle and evades the corners.
Travel path
Enter the parameters for the rectangular path in the Rectangular

Path window.
4-194
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Any definitions already saved in the strategy defaults for the rectangular
path will be predefined here.
Entries
Enter here the Measuring Height and the distances of the probing
paths to the corners.
With Independent Lines, you can define different edge distances for
each side and each corner.
By means of Move to Safety Position, you initiate the stylus to move
to the safety position after each individual path. If the check box is unticked, the stylus moves around the corners on the measuring height level.
Strategy defaults
The strategy defaults for the rectangular path allow you to predefine the
input fields included in the Rectangular Path strategy.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4-195
As a special feature you can enter here the edge distances as absolute
values, as a multitude of the stylus radius or as a percentage. In the Rectangular Path technology window, the specifications are converted into
absolute values (mm or inch) depending on the current stylus or the
nominal values of the rectangle.
4-196
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Chapter
.................................................................................................................

Basics about characteristics ...................................................................... 52
Calculation of geometric elements ........................................................... 53
Defining characteristics ............................................................................ 57
Evaluation parameters for features ......................................................... 542
User-defined characteristic attributes ..................................................... 557
Details on defining characteristics .......................................................... 563
Utilities ................................................................................................ 5112
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-1
Basics about characteristics
Basics about characteristics

The characteristics enable you to check the tolerance limits that your
workpiece should meet. You integrate the characteristics in the measurement plan and link them with the features.
CALYPSO supports any given order in which you define the features or
characteristics of your measurement plan.
For defined features, you can set the characteristics for measuring the
size (dimensions), form, position, and so on. In this way, you ascertain
whether the features are within the limits you specified.
You can also define characteristics in the list of characteristics without

defining the associated feature. You select the associated feature
when entering the settings for the characteristic. If this feature is already defined, will be defined or maybe is to be imported from a CAD
file later on, it makes no difference.
The characteristics are split into three groups (see table below). To evaluate these characteristics, different point densities are required for each
group, depending on which best-fit method is used (see Best-fit methods [ 53]). See the Online Help under Changing the measurement
parameters of the CMM [ 1014] to check the settings.
Group
Point density
Size Characteristics Small
Comment
Normally these characteristics are rated by a small number of measuring points.
Recommendation: Use more points than required to get
a statement about the standard deviation (Sigma).
For a function-oriented evaluation (pairing-dimension
evaluation), a higher number of points is required.
Location Character- Medium

istics
These characteristics require a higher point density, because the position deviation overlaps the form deviation
of the features.
Form Characteristics
The evaluation of the characteristics needs a high point

density on their measurement plane.
High
Recommended for the evaluation of the form: Low-pass

filtering of the measuring points to minimize the influence of the surface roughness.
You can add other special features as characteristics. In this case, they are
not actually characteristics, but they will be processed during the CNC
run. For more information, please refer to Utilities [ 5112].
5-2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Calculation of geometric elements

Computed feature
To understand and correctly interpret measured results, you need to
know how CALYPSO calculates the corresponding standard geometric
element from the CMM's measured points.
Using the measured points, CALYPSO calculates a computed feature.
Mathematically, the computed feature is the feature which best fits the
resulting measured values in terms of the standard geometry. The computed feature is the basis for evaluating the measuring results. Depending
on the best-fit method used, the features determined in this manner can
differ slightly from each other. Thus, there are also different deviations of
the measured feature from the specified nominal feature.
This is why the computed feature and the corresponding best-fit method [ 53] are fundamental to the accuracy of nominal-actual comparisons carried out via the characteristics.
NOTICE
The optimum best-fit methods are the default settings for the respective
characteristic groups.
Best-fit methods
Overview of best-fit methods
This topic shows and explains the advantages and disadvantages of the
mathematical best-fit methods. This means that for each measuring requirement that arises within the framework of a measuring strategy you
can now select the best-fit method which is best suited to your individual
requirements.
CALYPSO uses the following best-fit methods:
Specifying the best-fit

method
Gauss (LSQ feature)
Chebyshov (Minimum Feature)
L1 feature
Calculation as circumscribed or inscribed feature
Calculation as tangential element (outside/inside).
To specify the best-fit method:
Open the definition template of the feature and click Evaluation.

- or Open the definition template of the characteristic and click Evaluation.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-3
The selected method will be used to calculate the characteristic when

the data is evaluated. If you select Default, the best-fit method defined in the feature will be used.
Only best-fit methods that are suitable for the feature are available (see
Using the best-fit methods [ 56]).
View and change the parameters for the best-fit method under Extras Settings Measurement on the Point density notebook
page.
Example
The following diagram shows the actual shape of a scanned circle with
the ideal geometric shapes. Those shapes result from the different bestfit methods.
outlier
Gauss element
Minimum element (Chebyshov)
Circumscribed element
Inscribed element
Actual outline
As can be seen from the illustration, depending on the best-fit method

used, results can differ when dimensions (e.g. diameter), form deviations
and position (e.g. center) are checked.
Best fit according to Gauss (LSQ feature)

The Gauss (LSQ feature) best-fit method calculates the average best-fit
element. From the calculated ideal outline and the actual probed outline,
5-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
a sum of square distances is calculated. The minimum of this sum results

in the best-fit element.
This best fit is insensitive against outliers and leads to a clear result with
low computational effort. If there is just a small amount of points, the
Gauss (LSQ feature) method is always the standard evaluation method
for dimension, form and location testing.
Best fit according to Chebyshov (Minimum

Feature)
The best fit according to Chebyshov (Minimum Feature) calculates the
smallest maximum deviation between the calculated ideal outline and the
actual probed outline.
As the extreme values of the probing have an impact on the result of the
best fit, this best-fit method is very susceptible to outliers.
Recommendation: a large number of points and additional outlier elimination and/or low-pass filtering, depending on the measuring requirements (see Eliminating outliers [ 549] and Setting and activating
a filter [ 543]). Used for ISO 1101 shape testing.
Best fit as least absolute value feature (L1

feature)
With the calculation as least absolute value feature (L1 feature), the geometric element is determined in such a way to minimize the sum of the
deviation values.
This best fit is insensitive against outliers and leads to a clear result with
low computational effort.
Calculation as circumscribed/inscribed feature

The circumscribed feature is the smallest possible feature outside which
no probing points are situated. The inscribed feature is the largest possible
feature inside which no probing points are situated.
This method is useful for pairing-dimension evaluation and for evaluating
the references in case of position tolerances.
Prerequisite: Large number of points.
Recommendation: Outlier elimination and/or low-pass filtering, because
the circumscribed or inscribed feature can only be mapped on the basis
of the extreme points.
Calculation as tangential element

The tangential element lies completely outside the material.
It is either the largest possible element outside which all probing points
of the element are situated (inscribed feature), or the smallest possible
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-5
element inside which all probing points of the element are situated (circumscribed feature).
Prerequisite: Large number of points.
Recommendation: Outlier elimination and/or low-pass filtering, because
the tangential element can only be mapped on the basis of the extreme
points.
Using the best-fit methods

The table below shows the best-fit methods you can select for each feature.
Feature
Gauss (LSQ
feature)
Minimum
L1 feature
2D Line
3D Line
Plane
Circle
Sphere
Cylinder
Cone
Symmetry Plane
Ellipse
Rectangle
Torus
Slot
Point
5-6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Circumscribed/inscribed
Tangential
element
X
X
Options for defining characteristics
To go from merely obtaining measurements to their evaluation, it is necessary to define the characteristics.
Characteristics, features and the links between them are assigned to a
measurement plan.
CALYPSO
CALYPSO offers the following options of adding characteristics to the

measurement plan and linking them to features:
You add a characteristic [ 59] via the menu bar or from the
toolbox to the list of characteristics and specify it in the definition
template.
In the definition template, you assign the features to the characteristic
(Connecting characteristics to features [ 518]).
Options
You add one or several characteristics implicitly to the measurement

plan by defining them in the definition template of a feature. See
Definition template for features [ 45].
You load a CAD file (SAT, ProE or UniGraphics) and extract form and
location data from it. The features are added to the measurement plan
together with the characteristics. For more details, please refer to
Extracting characteristics from CAD files [ 59].
The additional options of CALYPSO offer further options of importing

measurement plan data:
DMIS import (DMIS Input Postprocessor option)

You import runs programmed in DMIS and thereby create a new regular CALYPSO measurement plan (see the operating instructions for
DMIS Import (option)).
Import of CAD files from ProE and UG (by means of the Characteristic
IN option)
You import features together with the characteristics from the ProE
and UG CAD systems into CALYPSO if they are available in a given
format (STEP file in the AP 203 or AP 214 format and ASCII data in
the Q-DAS format, specification of WEPROM) (see the operating instructions for Characteristic IN (option)).
Import of Agipp data for manufacturing segments (by means of the

Characteristic IN option) (see the operating instructions for Characteristic IN (option)).
You can find more detailed information regarding the different characteristics in Overview of characteristics [ 563].
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-7
Characteristics index card

Context menu of the Characteristics index card
The characteristics of the measurement plan are displayed on the Characteristics index card. Use this list to manage the characteristics: You
can rename, edit, assign parameters and group them.
Context menu
The context menu of the list of characteristics offers the following options:
Menu command
Function
Rename
Another name is assigned to the characteristic.
Check use of feature se- Displays the characteristics and utilities in which the characteristic is
used.
lected
References for selected Opens an overview of all defined features, references, parameters
and PCM commands for this characteristic in the References winFeatures
dow.
Characteristic attributes
Opens the Characteristic attributes window.
Edit functions
Cut, Copy, Copy with References, Paste, Paste with References
Loop
Inserts a loop around the characteristic.
Condition
Adds a condition to the characteristic.
Parameter
Opens the Settings for the input and output parameters of the
feature.
Open
Opens the definition template of the characteristic.
Delete
Deletes the characteristic from the list.
Delete Characteristic
and Feature actuals
Deletes the actual values in the characteristic and feature.
Delete Characteristic
actuals
Deletes only the actuals of the characteristic.
Masked
Masks the characteristic and adds a small mask to the icon. Masked
characteristics are not measured or calculated during the CNC run.
Execute Now!
Starts the measurement of the selected characteristic.
About the color-coding of characteristics

On the Characteristics index card, the characteristic buttons and the
color bars next to them show the type and status of the characteristic:
5-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Color
Meaning
Light gray The characteristic has not yet been defined fully.
With
The characteristic has been masked in the Measurement Plan Edimask icon tor Characteristics. It is not checked during the CNC run and it is not
evaluated in printouts.
Dark gray
The characteristic has been defined fully.

Measuring results are not yet available.
Green
The characteristic has been defined.

The measured results are within the tolerance.
Yellow

The measured results exceed the warning limit but are still within the
tolerance.
Red

The measured results are outside the tolerance.
Inserting characteristics into the

measurement plan
1 Click the Characteristics tab.
2 Choose the characteristic you want:
Select the characteristic from the submenus in the Size or Form
and Location menu. You can add other features using Resources Utilities.
- or Open a toolbox (Working with the toolbox [ 658]) and drag
the characteristic to the measurement plan area.
Extracting characteristics from CAD files

Options for extracting characteristics
CALYPSO allows you to extract characteristics relating to the size, form
and location from the CAD file and to insert them in the measurement
plan.
NOTICE
This function is currently only available for the CAD files in the CATIA V,
ProE (with limitations), and UG formats.
For better understanding, the characteristic information included in

the CAD data can be displayed or hidden according to different cri-
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-9
teria and arranged as desired (Displaying the dimension, form and

position from a CAD file [ 510]).
You can also use the desk structure contained in the CAD data and
edit it in CALYPSO (Dimension, form and position from a CAD file
with desks [ 512]).
All characteristics of a certain type or individual or several selected

characteristics can be extracted in one process. The features assigned
to the characteristics in the CAD data can be applied automatically
(except for the ProE format). You can also extract individual or all reference features separately.
It is also possible de define naming conventions according to which
the new characteristics in your measurement plan are named (Ex-
tracting the dimension, form and position from a CAD

file [ 514]).
Once the transfer in the measurement plan has been completed, the
characteristics can be edited, e.g. a feature can be assigned to an
empty characteristic or a characteristic can be replaced by another
characteristic (Editing the dimension, form and position [ 515]).
Displaying the dimension, form and position

from a CAD file
Characteristics can be extracted from CAD files in the Dimension,
Form, Position from CAD dialog box.
Opening the dialog box
If you load a suitable CAD file into an empty measurement plan, CALYPSO proposes automatically to open the Dimension, Form, Position from CAD dialog box.
To open the Dimension, Form, Position from CAD dialog box

manually, load a suitable CAD file and select CAD Display Form
and Location.
The settings on the Filter / Layer tab serve to visualize the features
for form and location. You can switch between both views of the tab
by means of the Layer or Filter button. The Filter view is enabled
by default.
Displaying characteristics in the CAD window

1 If necessary, restrict the selection to characteristics with information
on a certain direction of view or a certain number range on the
Filter tab.
5-10
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 Restrict the characteristics to those characteristic types that interest you, e.g. to all characteristics of the Dimension and Location type.
Characteristics that have not yet been extracted are identified by
white banners in the CAD window.
If the Display option under Accepted Characteristics on the
Creation tab is activated, characteristics that have already been
extracted are identified by blue banners.
3 To get more information on the characteristics in the CAD window:
Click the banner of a characteristic. The characteristic and all associated reference features are highlighted in color in the CAD model.
Click the banner of a reference feature. The reference feature is
highlighted in color.
4 If necessary, change the scope of the displayed information (Display group) and the representation of the banners in the CAD window (Presentation and Scale Factor groups) on the View tab.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-11
5 If required, you can move the banners in the CAD window with the
mouse.
Dimension, form and position from a CAD file

with desks
If you load a suitable CAD file into an empty measurement plan, CALYPSO proposes automatically to open the Dimension, Form, Position from CAD dialog box.

and Location.
The settings on the Filter / Layer index card serve to visualize the
features for form and location. You can switch between both views
of the tab by means of the Layer or Filter button.
Displaying and editing desks in the CAD model
5-12
1 Activate the Filter / Layer tab.

61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 Click, if necessary, Layer to call the desk view.

The desk view shows the existing structure in the CAD model in a tree
structure. The structure was read from the CATIA file.
If the CATIA file does not contain any structure, CALYPSO creates a
structure using the TOLERANCES, DATUMS and TEXT desks.
3 Use the commands of the context menu in the structure tree:
Select Delete to delete an entire desk.
Select Edit to rename a desk.
Select Clipping Plane to display a section plane contained in the
CAD data.
Select Remove From Group to remove the marked feature from
the desk.
4 To create a new desk, highlight the desired features in the CAD window and click New layer from screen.
The features marked by a flag in the CAD window are summarized in
a new desk and the current view of the CAD window is saved at the
same time.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-13
5 To add additional features to a desk, highlight the features in the CAD

window and click Add selection to layer.
A window showing a list of all desks is opened. Select OK to add the
features marked by flags in the CAD window to the desk selected in
the window.
Use Filter to switch to the filter view of the index card.
Extracting the dimension, form and position

from a CAD file
Scope of extraction
The Dimension, Form & Position from CAD dialog box makes it
possible to extract characteristics from a CAD file in different ways:
Extraction of an individual characteristic
Extraction of the selected characteristics
Extraction of all characteristics of a certain type
Extraction of reference features
Extracting characteristics from a CAD file

1 If necessary, select the representation of those characteristics that interest you on the Filter tab (Displaying the dimension, form and
position from a CAD file [ 510]).
3 Define under Settings the properties to be assigned to the extracted

characteristics.
5-14
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Create Geometry: CALYPSO extracts the features automatically

together with the characteristics (except for the ProE format). A
message is displayed if no feature is assigned to a characteristic.
CALYPSO enters this also in the default printout
(View Default printout).
Create characteristic identifier from: Define whether the
characteristic name in the measurement plan is to be created from
the characteristic name and/or the characteristic number assigned internally CALYPSO.
Characteristic name from CAD model: If you have activated
the Name of Characteristic under Create characteristic
identifier from, CALYPSO accepts the name defined in the CAD
file as characteristic name.
4 To extract all characteristics of a certain characteristic type (dimension,
form or position): Click the Create <characteristic_type> button
of the desired characteristic type in the Selected Characteristics
group.
CALYPSO extracts all characteristics of the selected characteristic type.
5 To extract all reference features: Under Settings, tick the Create
Geometry check box and click the Create Reference Features
button in the Selected Characteristics group.
CALYPSO extracts all reference features from the CAD file.
6 To extract an individual characteristic or reference feature from the
CAD file, double-click the characteristic or the reference feature.
7 To extract several characteristics or reference features: Select the desired characteristics or reference features in the CAD window by pressing CTRL and clicking with the mouse.
For better understanding, the characteristics can be hidden and displayed again.
8 Click the Create button in the Selected Characteristics group.
CALYPSO extracts all characteristics or reference features that are
marked by a banner in the selected color in the CAD window.
The extracted characteristics are added to the list of characteristics.
Editing the dimension, form and position

If you load a suitable CAD file into an empty measurement plan, CALYPSO
proposes automatically to open the Dimension, Form, Position
from CAD dialog box.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-15

and Location.
On the Filter and View index cards you define the representation of
the characteristics [ 510].
On the Creation index card you extract the desired characteristics [ 514].
On the Creation index card you define the properties of the characteristics to be added to the measurement plan and start the extraction [ 514].
Editing extracted characteristics
You can edit the extracted characteristics:
You can subsequently assign features to a characteristic that has been

extracted without features.
If desired, you can convert an extracted characteristic to another characteristic.
Subsequently assigning a feature to a characteristic

1 Select the characteristic in the measurement plan and select Create
Feature in the context menu.
If the CAD data contains the associated feature, the feature will be
extracted by CALYPSO, added to the list of features and assigned as
feature to the characteristic.
Subsequently converting a characteristic to another

characteristic
1 Select the characteristic in the measurement plan and select Convert
to in the context menu.
5-16
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 Click the desired characteristic in the Convert FDT Feature dialog

box and confirm with Apply.
3 If necessary, rename the characteristic in the measurement plan.
NOTICE
The converted characteristic will not be renamed automatically.
Characteristic definition templates

To assign features to a characteristic and select their desired tolerances,
the definition template must be open.
NOTICE
The content of the characteristic definition template varies with the selected characteristic.
There are three ways of opening a definition template:
Highlight the characteristic and click the Open selected object

icon.
Select the Open entry in the context menu of the characteristic.
Double-click the characteristic.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-17
The definition template contains fields for tolerance and actual value. The
buttons for the required references of this characteristic will still be shown
as empty.
Example: Definition template of the True Position characteristic:
Playing a video
To play a video about the definition of the True Position characteristic,

click 015_e_DINPos1/015_e_DinPos1_CZLogo.htm.
Connecting characteristics to features

Overview for connecting characteristics to
features
A characteristic must receive information relating to the feature which
will be used as a basis for the check. You have the following options of
connecting the characteristic to the feature:
5-18
Direct input in the definition template
Input via selection window
Input via formula
Transfer from the CAD window
Automatic feature predefinition
Connecting one or more characteristics to certain features in a single

step.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Direct input
Enter the name of an existing feature in the input field.
After the entry, two icons are displayed on the right-hand side. The name
is accepted by clicking the checkmark. The name is not accepted by clicking the cross, pressing Esc or by changing to another dialog box.
If the entered name does not exist, the first name in the list of features
that contains the entered character string is shown.
Input via selection window

Use the button in the template window. You can connect new features
or features that have already been defined to the characteristic.
You establish the connection to the characteristic in the Selection dialog box.
Input field
List of features
Input via formula

You can enter a formula for the name of the feature. Thus you can use
different features and reference features for a characteristic depending
on the situation.
Select Formula in the context menu of the input field. The Formula
dialog box appears on the screen.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-19
You enter the formula for the feature or reference feature and transfer it
to the input field by selecting OK. The input field will be highlighted in
yellow.
NOTICE
The result of the formula input must be a text. CALYPSO transfers only
the entries to the input field which can be selected in the list of features.
CALYPSO checks whether the defined feature exists and whether is may
be used as a feature or reference feature. This means that it is also not
possible to specify a plane as feature for a roundness by means of a formula.
If a feature does not exist or may not be used, the evaluation of the tolerance does not produce any result. This applies to both the parameterized features and the parameterized reference features.
Transfer from the CAD window

Use the CAD window to assign an already defined feature.
Click the feature of your choice in the CAD window. Don't forget to make
sure, however, that Select Already Extracted Features is set in the
CAD window (you will find more information in the Online Help under
Selecting features in the CAD model [ 210]).
The first feature you click will be adopted as Feature, the second as
Primary Datum, the third as Secondary Datum etc. corresponding
to the sequence of the buttons.
Automatic feature predefinition

You use the Automatic Feature predefinition function. To do so, select
Extras Settings Measurement and open the Features notebook page. Activate the Automatic Feature predefinition check
box. When a new characteristic is opened, the last feature that was open
will be entered automatically as the first feature.
Example: You create a Circle1 and close the window. You then add diameter, roundness, X value and Y value, etc., to the measurement plan
in the list of characteristics. When you open these characteristics one after
5-20
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
the other, Circle1 has already been entered for the first feature of each
characteristic.
Checking use
You can check for which characteristics a feature is used. Use the Check
use of selected Features command which you can find in the context
menu in the list of features.
Characteristics with indexes
You can assign indexes to characteristics. Thus, you define with one definition template several characteristics of the same type. For details, please
refer to Characteristics with indexes [ 528].
Assigning a defined feature via selection

Assigning a feature to a characteristic using the definition template
1 Open the definition template of the characteristic.
2 Click Feature (or Feature1).
The Selection (Features) window appears on the screen. The All Features icon is generally activated.
3 Select the feature you wish to assign.
Note: You can limit the scope of the model of the features by, for
example, clicking the appropriate icon.
4 Set the desired filter, outlier elimination and best-fit method.
You will find more information on filters and filtering in the section
entitled Setting and activating a filter [ 547].
You will find more information on outlier elimination in the section
entitled Eliminating outliers [ 549].
5 Click OK.
You will find more information on the Selection window under Selection (Features) in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
Assigning a feature that has not yet been

defined via selection
When you entered the characteristic in the measurement plan, maybe
you did not define the feature. You can create a new feature within the
definition template of the characteristic and directly assign it.
3 Click New.
All the types of feature possible for the characteristic in question are
displayed.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-21
4 Select the feature type and click OK to confirm your choice.

This opens the definition template of the feature.
5 Define the feature.
See Defining features using definition templates [ 47].
6 When you have probed all the points, click OK.
Assigning and editing a defined feature

If you are about to assign a feature to a characteristic and notice that the
definition of the feature has to be changed (measuring strategy, additional probing points, etc.), you can do so in the course of defining the
characteristic.
3 Click Select existing Features.
4 Select the desired feature.
Note: You can limit the scope of the model of the features by, for
example, clicking the appropriate icon.
5 Click Edit.
This opens the definition template of the assigned feature.
6 Make the necessary alterations to the feature (see Definition template for features [ 45]).
Assigning characteristics to certain features

You can assign one or more characteristics to certain features in a single
step.
This means that the information in question has to be defined only once,
while at the same time you can be sure that the common properties are
exactly the same for all the features concerned.
1 Open the list of characteristics.
2 Select the characteristics you want to assign (multiple selection with
the Ctrl key).
5-22
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The Assign Characteristics to Features dialog box appears on

the screen.
At the same time, the list of features is opened in the background.

Note: The window contains a second page on which you can copy the
properties of characteristics. To open the second page, click the symbol for the characteristics at the bottom left of the dialog box or on
the work area.
4 Set a radio button in the Name Default block to specify whether
the characteristics will be entered with standard names or whether you
will define the names in a dialog.
If you do not want to be prompted to enter names, CALYPSO will
assign each new characteristic a standard name.
5 Set a radio button in the existing Characteristics block to specify
whether or not existing characteristics will be overwritten.
6 Select the features to which you want to copy the selected characteristics in the list of features (multiple selection with the Ctrl key).
7 Click OK to start the assignment.
If you activated the Request all names radio button, the number
of boxes suggesting names will be equal to the number of characteristics you selected times the number of features. If a characteristic already exists, the default is the current name, whereas a standard name
(see above) is suggested for new characteristics.
8 Overwrite the names suggested by the system, if applicable.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-23
Datums for characteristics

Setting datums for characteristics
Geometrical features
You must assign one or two features in its definition template. The characteristic is determined on these features and the compliance with the
tolerance is checked.
Datums
For many characteristics, it is also necessary to specify features as datums,

e.g. for the True Position. Datums allow you to define what has to be
checked. Depending on the characteristic, you require one to three datums. CALYPSO uses the datums to calculate a datum reference frame
with one origin point.
Selection of datums
Datums are selected on the basis of the following criteria:
A primary datum should constrain the following degrees of freedom:
two rotational degrees of freedom for the calculation of the geometrical feature
one or two translational degrees of freedom
The primary datum must be set by a three-dimensional feature: a

plane, a 3D line, a cylinder or a cone.
The secondary datum constrains usually the remaining rotational degree of freedom.
The secondary datum must be set by the following features: a plane,
a 2D line or a 3D line, a cylinder or a cone.
A single additional feature provides the remaining one or two translational degrees of freedom.
NOTICE
The designations primary, secondary and tertiary datum do not refer to
the order in which they were entered in the definition template as primary, secondary and tertiary datum. For example, you can also enter the
tertiary datum as primary datum.
Calculation of the datum reference frame

You can define for all measurement plans whether the computation of
the datums is to be carried out according to the CALYPSO standard or to
ISO 5459.
NOTICE
For computation according to ISO 5459, only the Outer Tangential Element evaluation method is useful. Moreover, the datums must be
measured with a large number of points.
5-24
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Both methods produce a datum reference frame with the same orientation. However, the systems have different origins.
CALYPSO standard
According to the CALYPSO standard, a feature (a plane in the example)

is computed from the first datum by means of the LSQ best fit. A feature
(a plane in the example) is also computed from the secondary datum. The
origin of the datum reference frame to be created lies on the intersection
line of both features. The second feature is not necessarily perpendicular
to the first feature. Therefore, the plane perpendicular to the first plane
is used as the coordinate plane of the datum reference frame. Proceed in
the same way for the tertiary datum.
0,1 A B
0,1 B A
Bezge nach Calypso
ISO 5459
The ISO 5459 requires that the origin of the datum reference frame is
defined as intersection point of perpendicular planes. Consequently, the
secondary datum cannot be calculated as a computed feature from the
defined feature. It is created as the outer tangential element with restriction of constraints whereas the direction of the coordinate plane is preset
by the required perpendicularity relative to the first coordinate plane.
Proceed in the same way for the tertiary datum.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-25
0,1 A B
0,1 B A
90
Bezge nach DIN ISO 5459
Datums for parallelism

It is possible to specify one or two datums for the parallelism of a plane
relative to an axis.
CALYPSO makes it possible to select a secondary datum for both the
cartesian tolerance form and the standard tolerance form.
The possible selection depends on the geometry type of the primary datum.
5-26
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Shape Of Zone
Geometrical feature
Primary Datum
Standard
Plane
Plane
Symmetry Plane
Symmetry Plane
2D Line
2D Line
Secondary Datum
[Nothing]
3D Line
Plane
Cylinder
Symmetry Plane
Step Cylinder
2D Line
Cone
3D Line
Cylinder
3D Line
Plane
Step Cylinder
Cylinder
Symmetry Plane
Cone
Step Cylinder
2D Line
[Nothing]
Cone
3D Line
Cylinder
Step Cylinder
[Nothing]
Cone
Cartesian
3D Line
3D Line
Plane
Cylinder
Cylinder
Symmetry Plane
Step Cylinder
Step Cylinder
2D Line
Cone
Cone
3D Line
Cylinder
Step Cylinder
Cone
Torus
[Nothing]
Datums for perpendicularity

It is possible to specify one or two datums for the perpendicularity of a
plane relative to an axis.
CALYPSO makes it possible to select a secondary datum for both the
cartesian tolerance form and the standard tolerance form.
The possible selection depends on the geometry type of the primary datum.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-27
Shape Of Zone
Geometrical feature
Primary Datum
Standard
Plane
3D Line
Symmetry Plane
Cylinder
2D Line
Step Cylinder
Secondary Datum
[Nothing]
Cone
Plane
Plane
Symmetry Plane
Symmetry Plane
2D Line
2D Line
3D Line
Cylinder
3D Line
3D Line
Step Cylinder
Cylinder
Cylinder
Cone
Step Cylinder
Step Cylinder
[Nothing]
Cone
Cone
Plane
Symmetry Plane
[Nothing]
2D Line
Cartesian
3D Line
3D Line
Plane
Cylinder
Cylinder
Symmetry Plane
Step Cylinder
Step Cylinder
2D Line
Cone
Cone
3D Line
Cylinder
Step Cylinder
Cone
Torus
[Nothing]
Characteristics with indexes

Characteristics in loops
To assign indexes to characteristics, place a loop around the feature.
Then, the loop parameters are included in the name of the characteristic.
Example: You place a loop with the start index 1, end index 5 and the
step width 2 around the X-Value1 characteristic. The characteristic
generated in this way is named (1,5,2)X-Value1.
This characteristic represents a series of characteristics that differ in the

value of the loop variable (e.g. LOOP1). The LOOP1 loop variable must,
of course, have been used for the definition of the characteristic to make
sure that these characteristics differ from each other.
Example: You use the LOOP1 loop variable in the name of the feature to
which the characteristic refers. This gives a 1:1 relation between several
features (of the same type) and several characteristics (of the same type).
5-28
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Special aspects with patterns: Index exchange

For certain characteristics and constructions, a function is required instead
of a 1:1 relation between the feature and characteristic or construction.
Example: The characteristic has a loop from 1 to 4. The feature has a
rotational pattern (rotation by 45) with an index of 1 to 8. The four first
pattern elements of the feature should not be used for the feature as
pattern elements but only every second pattern feature (rotation by 90).
You can achieve this via the index exchange. You assign parameters
for the index exchange to the feature in question, whereas a certain value
of the loop variables of the feature is assigned to each value of the loop
variables of the characteristic.
You define the index exchange in the Loop (index exchange) dialog
box. Here, you can create several groups of parameters for the index exchange. While the loop variable of the characteristic runs through its values from start to end, the parameters for the index exchange group are
run through, in parallel thereto, group by group. Thus, you can define
any desired index sequence via one or more groups with parameters for
the index exchange.
Example: You defined the (1,8,1)Roundness1 characteristic. You want
the following representation of the characteristic on the feature:
Characteristic
Feature
Roundness1(1)
Circle1(4)
Roundness1(2)
Circle1(6)
Roundness1(3)
Circle1(8)
Roundness1(4)
Circle1(4)
Roundness1(5)
Circle1(2)
Roundness1(6)
Circle1(8)
Roundness1(7)
Circle1(6)
Roundness1(8)
Circle1(4)
You define for the Circle1 feature an index exchange with three
groups:
Start index
End index
Step width
-2
-2
In the feature, the characteristic is referred to as Circle1(4,8,2;4,2,-2;8,4,-2).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-29
NOTICE
The example shows that the relation between the characteristic and the
feature may not be clear after the index exchange: The Circle1(4) feature
is not only measured in the Roundness1(1) characteristic but also in the
Roundness1(4) characteristic.
Only the first use found is recorded in the compact printout.
Defining the index exchange

1 Click Feature in the definition template of the characteristic.
2 Select the feature with pattern to be measured and select Index exchange in the context menu.
3 Enter the definitions for the index exchange.

4 Close the dialog box to accept the modified settings.
A loop is automatically assigned to the feature or a pattern is assigned
to the construction and the defined index exchange is entered.
Note: By selecting Delete Index Exchange in the context menu,
you delete the index and the index exchange as well as the loop placed
over the characteristic.
Example: Determining the distances between

circles of two patterns
The distance between two circles with pattern is to be determined. Without any specific entries, CALYPSO places automatically a loop over the
Distance characteristic and calculates the following distances:
5-30
Distance1(1) between Circle1(1) and Circle2(1)
Distance1(3) between Circle1(3) and Circle2(3) etc.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Job
Calculation of the following distances:
Distance1(3) between Circle1(3) and Circle2(4) etc., i.e.
Distance1(i) between Circle1(i) and Circle2(i+1) with i = 1, ...,7.
Solution
Index exchange between the current loop index of the characteristic and
the Circle2(*) feature.
1 Click Feature in the definition template of the characteristic.
2 In the context menu of the Circle2(*) feature, select Index exchange....
3 Enter the parameters in the Loop window: Start = 2, End = 8, Step =
1.
The distance is calculated as shown above.
Nominal values and tolerances in

characteristics
Working with nominal values and tolerances
CALYPSO compares the measured and computed actual values with the
nominal values and checks whether the differences are within the tolerance. The results are output in printouts. The features and characteristics
are shown in color dependent on their compliance with the tolerances.
Define the tolerances in the definition template of the characteristic [ 531]. For certain characteristics, you can transfer the predefined
tolerances from selection lists.
If necessary, you can define individual tolerance tables [ 537].
You can apply the most-material condition or the least-material condition (MMC/LMC) [ 535] when you specify tolerances of form and
position.
The result of certain form and position characteristics depends on the
reference length of the feature. To do so, you must define the projected
tolerance zone [ 539].
Defining nominal values and tolerances

You can predefine each nominal value and tolerance that the characteristic has to check.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-31
Note: The tolerances determine the calculation of the scanning speed for
the measuring strategy. See Path generation measuring features automatically [ 4178].
2 Enter the desired nominal values in the Nominal input field (or
Nominal Position input field).
3 Enter the tolerance values:
Direct input
Upper Tolerance and Lower Tolerance input fields
Selection list for the tolerance group
Enter the appropriate values in the Upper Tolerance and Lower
Tolerance fields. The Last input list entry allows you to enter the
most recently selected tolerance.
None check box
This box allows you to define the maximum and minimum tolerances.
4 Click OK.
The elements in this dialog box are fully described under Definition template (Characteristic) 1 in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online
Help.
Keep in mind that the icon of the characteristic is now displayed with
either a green, yellow or red bar, depending on whether it is inside or
outside of the warning limits and tolerance.
If a completely defined feature has not been measured yet, the icon is
displayed with a dark gray bar.
Tolerance specifications for characteristics

CALYPSO provides predefined tolerances in selection lists. Here you will
find General Tolerances and a number of material-specific tolerances
(Rough castings of various manufacturing methods, Plastic parts):
5-32
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Tolerance type
Tolerances
General Tolerances
fine, medium, coarse, very coarse
DIN 1680 Rough castings
DIN 1683 Rough steel castings
General tolerances
group GTA
DIN 1680 General tolerances GTA 12 to GTA 21
General tolerances
group GTB
DIN 1680 General tolerances GTB 12 to GTB 21
Linear measures
DIN 1683 Linear measures GTB 20 to GTB 16/5
Thickness measures DIN 1683 Thickness measures GTB 20 to GTB

16/5
DIN 1684 Rough castings of GTB 17/5

malleable iron
moulding/not
moulding
GTB 17
moulding/not
moulding
GTB 16/5
moulding/not
moulding
GTB 16
moulding/not
moulding
DIN 1684 GTB 17/5 m. linear measures / not m.

linear measures
DIN 1684 GTB 17/5 m. thickness measures / not
m. thickness measures
DIN 1684 GTB 17 m. linear measures / not m.
linear measures
DIN 1684 GTB 17 m. thickness measures / not
DIN 1684 GTB 16/5 m. linear measures / not m.
linear measures
DIN 1684 GTB 16/5 m. thickness measures / not
DIN 1684 GTB 16 m. linear measures / not m.
linear measures
DIN 1684 GTB 16 m. thickness measures / not
DIN 1685 Rough castings of Linear measures

DIN 1685 Linear measures GTB 20 to GTB 15
cast iron with spheroidal
Thickness measures DIN 1685 Thickness measures GTB 20 to GTB
graphite
15
DIN 1686 Rough castings of Linear measures
DIN 1686 Linear measures GTB 20 to GTB 15
cast iron with foliated graph- Thickness measures DIN 1686 Thickness measures GTB 20 to GTB
ite
15
DIN 1687 Rough castings of Sand rough
heavy metal alloys
Gravity die casting
DIN 1687 GS GTA 20 to GTA 16 m. / not m.
Pressure die Linear

measures / thickness measures for
low-melting alloys
DIN 1687 GD L / T l. melt GTA 14 to GTA 12

m. / not m.
61212-2011002
DIN 1687 GK GTA 15 to GTA 14 m. / not m.
CALYPSO
5-33
Tolerance type
Tolerances
Pressure die Linear DIN 1687 GD L / T h.melt GTA 15 to GTA 13/5
measures / thickm. / not m.
ness measures for
high-melting alloys
DIN 1688 Rough castings of Sand rough Linear

heavy metal alloys
measures / thickness measures
DIN 1688 GS L / T GTA 16/5 and GTA 15/5 m. /

not m.
Gravity die casting DIN 1688 GK L / D GTA 15/5 to GTA 14/5 m. /

Linear measures /
not m.
thickness measures
Die casting Linear
measures / thickness measures
DIN 1688 GK L / D GTA 14/5 to GTA 12/5 m. /

not m.
DIN 16901 Plastic tolerances General Tolerances DIN 16901 Gen. 160 A / 160 B to 130 A / 130
B
Tolerances for values with directly
entered tolerances
DIN 16901 directly entered A. 160 A / 160 B to

110 A / 110 B
DIN 169091 directly entered A. Precision Techn.
A/B
If necessary, you can define individual tolerance tables (Defining custom tolerance tables [ 537]).
Tolerances with MMC/LMC

You can apply the most-material condition or the least-material condition
as necessary when you specify tolerances of form and position. The mostmaterial principle is laid down in DIN ISO 2692. It applies to axes and midplanes and allows for the interrelationships between dimensional tolerance and tolerance of form and position.
When the most-material condition (MMC) or the least-material condition
(LMC) is applied, tolerance extensions are permissible for tolerances of
position for which diameter tolerances are not fully exploited.
MMC/LMC-Mode
There are two modes for the calculation of admissible tolerance extension:
Mode
Tolerance extension
As mechanical
gauge
Difference between actual dimension and minimum dimension
Restriction to di- Difference between actual dimension and minimum dimension restricted to the complete dimenmension tolersion tolerance
ance
As mechanical gauge is preset by default.
5-34
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Settings
There are two options for changing the MMC/LMC mode:
for all measurement plans in the default settings (Extras Settings Measurement, MMC/LMC tab)
for individual measurement plans in the Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics
Specifying tolerances with MMC/LMC

Applying MMC or LMC to tolerances of position
2 If you have not assigned features, click Feature and select the feature
whose position you want to check.
This illustration shows the template for the True Position characteristic for checking a cylinder.
Selection list
3 From the RFS (= Regardless Feature Size) selection list, select the entry:
The Nominals button appears beside the selection list.
MMC to apply the most-material condition, or
LMC to apply the least-material condition.
4 If Diameter has not been defined as a characteristic for the feature,
click Nominals.
CALYPSO opens the definition template of the characteristic:
Enter the nominal value for the diameter.
Press OK to confirm.
5 Define reference features if necessary.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-35
You can apply MMC or LMC to the reference features as well. To do

this, click the button of the reference and proceed as described above,
starting at step 3.
6 Click OK.
CALYPSO uses the MMC/LMC mode that is valid for the measurement
plan.
Specifying tolerance additions for MMC/LMC

evaluation
The tolerance addition for the MMC/LMC evaluation for a feature is calculated from the nominal diameter, the upper and lower tolerances and
the actual diameter. You must check in this case whether the feature is
an inside or an outside feature.
Cylinder
The tolerance addition (for MMC) of a cylinder is calculated from the following formulas:
As mechanical gauge
Inside feature
dAct - (dNom + tlower)
Outside feature
(dNom + tupper) - dAct

Restriction to dimension tolerance
Inside feature
min {dAct - (dNom + tlower) , (dNom + tupper) - (dNom + tlower)}
Outside feature
min {(dNom + tupper) - dAct) , (dNom + tupper) - (dNom + tlower)}

This means:
Stepped cylinder
dNom
Nominal diameter
dAct
Actual diameter of the computed feature
tupper
Upper tolerance (value with sign)
tlower
Lower tolerance (value with sign)
In general, there are several diameters for the stepped cylinder. For the
calculation of the tolerance addition, first the tolerance additions for all
pitch cylinders are calculated for which the Diameter characteristic is activated. The smallest of these values applies to the tolerance addition for
the stepped cylinder. If the smallest calculated value is negative, the tolerance addition will be zero.
If the stepped cylinder is used as reference for a True Position or Best
Fit of Bore Pattern with MMC/LMC characteristic, no tolerance addition
will be calculated but the 2D best fit function is used instead.
5-36
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining custom tolerance tables

CALYPSO provides predefined tolerances in selection lists. Here you will
find General Tolerances and a number of material-specific tolerances
(Rough castings of various manufacturing methods, Plastic parts).
The tolerances offered in the menu are saved in XML files named
dinxxxx.xml in the <user directory>\data\toldat directory.
If necessary, you can define individual tolerance tables. To do so, create
an XML file named userXXXX.xml (e.g. userworkroom1.xml) and
copy it into the <user directory>\data\toldat directory.
The manner in which the file should be structured can be seen in XML
File with custom tolerances (example) [ 537].
xml file with custom tolerances (example)

With this file, the selection list will have another item called Feinmessraum1, and this item, in turn, will offer you 10 tolerances.
<?xml version="1.0" ?>
<!DOCTYPE tolerancesDefinitionFile SYSTEM "tolerancesDefinitionFile.dtd">
<tolerancesDefinitionFile>
<userNorm name = "Feinmessraum" group = "3" description =
"Feinmessraum1">
<range stop= "18">
<value name = "UT" value = "+4.5"/>
<value name = "LT" value = "-4.5"/>
</range>
<range start = "18" stop="30">
</range>
<value name = "UT" value = "+8"/>
<value name = "LT" value = "-8"/>
</range>
</range>
</range>
</range>
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-37

</range>
</range>
</range>
</range>
</userNorm>
</tolerancesDefinitionFile>
Meanings of the entries
The following entries are customizable:
group=3
Defines the sequence of the user-defined tolerances in the selection
list
description=Feinmessraum1
Name of the list entry
range stop=18
Nominal range from 0 mm to 18 mm, inclusive
value name=UT value = +4.5

Upper tolerance of nominal range 0 to 18 (+4.5 mm)
value name=UT value = -4.5

Lower tolerance of nominal range 0 to 18 (-4.5 mm)
range start=18 stop=30

Nominal range from 18 mm to 30 mm, inclusive
Projected tolerance zones

The result of certain form and position characteristics depends on the
reference length of the feature. To do so, you must define the projected
tolerance zone. Change the position, direction or length of a tolerance
zone if it is not possible to measure the critical range directly.
Characteristics
5-38
CALYPSO makes it possible to define a projected (pre-installed) tolerance

zone (according to DIN ISO 10 578 and DIN 1101):
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Position tolerances
Direction tolerances
Position
Perpendicularity
Symmetry
Parallelism
Coaxiality
Angularity
Example of a projected tolerance zone

Two strong sheets are to be connected by means of a pin. The pin should
pass through two bores, one bore in each of the two sheets. To ensure
that the pin fits the two bores and it does not jam, not only the compliance with the tolerance of the individual bore is important but also the
compliance with the tolerance resulting from the extension of the bore
by a certain distance.
The tolerance required at the bore is directly dependent on the distance
from its effective point. It is therefore easier to define the required tolerance at the bore and project it onto the point where it is actually to be
checked.
Defining the projected tolerance zone

1 Select the feature in a characteristic of the position, coaxiality, symmetry, perpendicularity, parallelism or inclination.
If the feature is axial (cylinder, cone, 3D line) or a theoretical or linked
plane or a 2D line, the icon for the projected tolerance zone appears.
2 Click the icon.
The Projected tolerance zone window is opened.
3 Define the projected tolerance zone.

61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-39
Axial features or 2D line: a reference feature plus offset and reference length
Theoretical or linked plane: two reference features
Position tolerance (position, symmetry or coaxiality): an offset and
a reference length for each available feature
You can also enter 0 for the reference length, which, for example,
corresponds to a circle.
Direction tolerance: a reference length not equal to 0
Instead of a feature as reference, you can also select a coordinate system with one of its planes. If a reference feature suitable for the definition of the projected tolerance zone has already been defined for
the characteristic, this reference feature will also be shown in the selection list.
To deselect the coordinate system, select the Nominal position of
Feature entry.
Note: The default value for the offset is 0. The default reference length
corresponds to the nominal length (and nominal width) of the feature.
Note: As long as a feature is already selected as reference in another
characteristic, you cannot change its settings for filter, outlier, method,
etc.
The projected tolerance zone is now defined. The measured results are
evaluated and displayed depending on the compliance with the tolerance
in the projected tolerance zone.
Copying properties of characteristics

Properties of characteristics that can be copied
You can copy certain properties of a characteristic and assign them to
one or more other characteristics. This means that the information in
question has to be defined only once, while at the same time you can be
sure that the common properties are exactly the same for all the features
concerned.
The following are the properties you can copy to all characteristics:
5-40
Nominal
Tolerance Class
ISO286
Upper Tolerance
Lower Tolerance
Shape Of Zone
Evaluation method Characteristic
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Datum Reference Frame
Graphic
Parameter: Presettings
Parameter: Postsettings
Copying properties of characteristics into

other characteristics
2 Highlight the characteristic from which you want to copy properties.
The Assign Characteristics to Features dialog box appears on
the screen.
4 Click the characteristics icon at the bottom of the window.
The Copy properties from <characteristic_name> window
appears on the screen.
5 Tick the check boxes of the properties you want to copy to other characteristics.
6 Select the characteristics to which you want to copy properties.
7 Click OK.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-41
Evaluation parameters for features

Overview of the evaluation parameters
Once a feature has been defined, the evaluation parameters for this feature are also determined. The evaluation parameters determine the way
measured results for a feature are evaluated for the characteristic:
Evaluation method (Best-fit methods [ 53])
Filtering (Filtering and outlier elimination [ 543])
Handling of outliers (Filtering and outlier elimination [ 543])
Degrees of freedom
Reference point (Reference point for feature [ 555])
Actual geometry / nominal geometry
CALYPSO first defines the default settings that are taken from the general
measurement plan settings or the feature. It is also possible that the settings for filtering and outlier elimination were imported from a file.
Changes of the settings defined in this way are performed in the Evaluation window. To do so, open the definition template of the characteristic and select Evaluation parameters in the context menu of the
feature.
5-42
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The window shows a summary of the current settings. Changes are performed on the other tabs.
Playing a video
To play a video about filters and outliers elimination, click 018_e_AusreisserFilter/018_e_AusreisserFilter.htm.
Filtering and outlier elimination

Options for filtering and outlier elimination
CALYPSO can edit measured values and exclude certain values from further analysis. A variety of filters are available for this purpose, along with
the functionality for eliminating outliers.
Filters can segregate the waviness profile of a geometric element from

the effects of surface roughness. Filters, therefore, are of assistance
in maximizing measuring accuracy. Gauss (LSQ feature) (ISO
16610-21/28), Spline (ISO 16610-3) and 2 RC (ISO 4291) are filter
types. The filter methods are low-pass, band-pass and high-pass.
The new statistical data of the geometric element is obtained from
the filtered measuring data after the compensating calculation.
Individual measuring points of the geometric elements 2D Line, Plane,

Circle, Cone, Cylinder and Sphere can be purged from the measured
values as Outliers.
The number of outliers eliminated is documented in the printout.
ViSCAN
For the manual optical measurement in the camera image, you define the
parameters of filtering and outlier elimination after the measurement
(Filtering and outlier elimination for ViScan [ 551]).
For more information about filtering and outliers, please refer to Basics
about filtering and outliers [ 543] and Defining filters and outlier
elimination [ 545].
Effect of filtering and outlier elimination

Minimum number of
points for filters
The use of filters is recommended only for a large number of points, i.e.
only for scanned features.
The current standard calls for at least seven points (earlier standards: five
points) as the prerequisite for using filters. This value is set as the default
value for measurement plans in version 3.8 and higher. You can toggle
the minimum number of points between 7 and 5 for the current measurement plan in the compatibility settings.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-43
NOTICE
Once the minimum number of points has been changed to 7, filtering
might no longer be possible for certain features in measurement plans
created with older versions of CALYPSO because the number of points is
no longer sufficient. The No result message appears in the default
printout.
Using filter types

The available filter types have the following effects:
Low-pass
Filtering with a low-pass filter (low frequencies pass the filter, high frequencies do not) yields an average line in which waviness and other longwave profile components are present, while the effects of surface roughness are eliminated.
The average line is produced by analyzing measuring points within equal
sections (double the wave length): The measuring points are analyzed
with weighting within each section. The profile obtained in this way is
compensated and serves as the basis for calculating parameters of waviness.
High-pass
Filtering with a high-pass filter (high frequencies pass the filter, low frequencies do not) yields an average line in which waviness is suppressed,
while the effects of the surface roughness are still present.
1/2
Blockage
Passage
Low-pass
Band-pass
High-pass
s/100
s/2
100
UPR
Band-pass
Blockage
A band-pass filter results from the combined use of a low-pass and a highpass filter. This suppresses both the long-wave (waviness) and short-wave
(surface roughness) profile components that exceed the respectively
specified limit.
Eliminating outliers
Outliers are measured points that differ significantly from the geometric
form yielded by the other measured points and as such, they can produce
a large error when the computed feature is calculated. An error of this
nature would easily propagate through the actual-value determination of
the characteristic.
Repeated outlier elimination
Outlier elimination runs iteratively. You can predefine the number of iterations. Outlier recognition becomes more precise with each iteration step.
5-44
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
NOTICE
If the selected number of iterations is too high, the number of remaining
points may decrease to the minimum number of points.
Prefilter
Prior to the outlier recognition, the measured points are filtered through
a band-pass. Thus, measured values that are otherwise not detectable as
outliers can likewise be eliminated.
A measured (prefiltered) point is tagged as an outlier if it is further than
a defined threshold (threshold = factor * standard delta) from the computed Gaussian element (LSQ feature).
For measurement plans version 4.0 and higher, you define the characteristic of the band-pass (Eliminating outliers [ 549]). In previous
versions of CALYPSO measurement plans, the prefilter is not variable. To
activate prefilter setting, you must set the outlier elimination to version
4.0 in the compatibility settings.
Defining filtering and outlier elimination

Validity of the settings for filtering and outlier
elimination
There are several different points in CALYPSO at which you can parameterize and activate filtering and outlier elimination:
Which setting is valid?
As defaults for the characteristic groups and the references and alignment features of the coordinate systems
For a characteristic
For a feature
Priority of the different definitions for evaluation:

1. Setting for the characteristic
2. Setting in the feature
3. Presettings for the characteristic groups
Bear in mind that filtering requires a minimum number of points to be
probed.
A feature obtained by recall from a feature filtered beforehand is automatically not filtered subsequently, even if filtering is activated.
NOTICE
If filtering is active for the feature, make sure that all scanning paths on
the feature have the same step width or the same step distance. Otherwise, the results are not in accordance with standards.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-45
Selecting general settings for filter and

outliers
You can define general settings for filtering and outlier elimination per
characteristics group.
1 Select Resources Save / Load Defaults....
The Settings (Measurement Plan) window appears on the screen.
2 Activate the Filter/Outlier tab.
3 Open the file containing the desired presettings if necessary.

4 Edit the settings on the index card:
5-46
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Activate the desired filter or the desired outlier elimination and click
Settings.
Make the required settings.
5 Click OK.
Setting and activating a filter

1 Open the definition template of the characteristic and click Feature.
The Selection dialog box appears on the screen. At the bottom right,
you can see whether or not a filter is activated.
2 Click the button with the information about filtering.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-47
The Evaluation (Feature) - Filter index card is opened.
3 Tick the Accept Filter from Feature check box.

- or Tick the Filter on check box and enter the special filter parameters
for the characteristic.
Filter Method and Filter Type
Limit values for the selected filter via the Undulations Per Revolution or via Wavelength Lc.
5-48
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4 Tick the Connect Segments check box if the segments of an interrupted contour are to be connected to form a continuous contour
during filtering, with as many points as possible being taken into account.
This means that you can select a stronger filter.
1 Open the definition template of the characteristic and click Feature.
The Selection dialog box appears on the screen. At the bottom right,
you can see whether or not outlier elimination is activated.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-49
2 Click the button with the information about outlier elimination.

The Evaluation (Feature) - Outlier index card is opened.
3 Tick the Take Outlier from Feature check box.

- or Tick the Outlier on check box and enter the special parameters for
the outlier elimination for the characteristic.
Factor For Outlier inside and outside the workpiece
Range Of Data Reduction:
Only Outlier: Only the real outliers are eliminated
Include Adjacent Points: The number of adjacent points to be
eliminated in addition to the outliers can be determined in tests for
manual measurement.
To Computed Feature: For CNC operation, it has been shown to
be effective to eliminate adjacent features until the first probing point
again lies beyond the computed feature.
5-50
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Include
Adjacent
Points
Include
Adjacent
Points
Outliers
+3s
Computed Feature
-3s
Permitted value range
Repeated Outlier Recognition: Enter the number of iterations.

Enter the prefilter:
Circle, Cylinder, Cone and Sphere: Enter the lower and upper value
for the Undulations Per Revolution.
All other features: Enter the lower and upper value for the Wavelength.
For more information about the function of the prefilter realized as a
band-pass, see Filtering and outlier elimination [ 543].
Filtering and outlier elimination for ViScan

For the manual optical measurement in the camera image, you define the
parameters of filtering and outlier elimination after the measurement and
prior to the creation of the circle, circle path and line features.
In this case, you exclude from the evaluation the points which would falsify the result.
These settings can only be made in manual mode or set-up mode. The
settings will then be used in the CNC run.
Once you have determined the edge points, the ViSCAN Filter Settings window is automatically opened in the camera view.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-51
Use the slider or the direct input option to set the outlier elimination and
the filtering continuously as a percentage of the nominal point number.
It is possible to enter the number of iterations for outlier elimination: In
this case, the algorithm of the outlier elimination is used again for the
points which have already been eliminated.
The effects of your setting are immediately shown in the camera image:
The points to be applied are displayed in green, the measuring points to
be eliminated are shown in red.
In addition, the number of all points and all applied points is shown in
the dialog box.
Select OK to transfer the measuring points to the new segment.
NOTICE
When performing a CNC run at a later stage, the settings made are saved
for the corresponding segment.
Excluding ranges by masking from the

form characteristics
Manual masking of measuring points scenarios
CALYPSO allows you to exclude certain ranges of a feature from the
Roundness and Straightness form characteristics prior to the CNC run or
after a measurement. The masked points will then be shown in another
color than the valid points in the CAD window.
5-52
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
As this manual outlier elimination is carried out in the feature, CALYPSO

uses the same number of points as for the form evaluation for the size
and location definitions.
Application scenarios
Manual outlier elimination can be performed in three different ways:
Prior to the beginning of the CNC run

The definitions are used for the evaluation.
During the measurement plan run

After measuring the features, the features are opened one after the
other with the outlier marking to be used (sorted according to run of
the feature list) and you can define the outlier range. Then the evaluation and logging takes place.
After measurement plan run

To obtain the corresponding results, a new evaluation is required, e.g.
by opening and closing the corresponding characteristic.
Representation in the
plot
In the plot representation, the manually masked points are treated in the
same way as automatically masked outliers. They can be shown either
with dashed lines or hidden.
Eliminating outliers in the CAD window

CALYPSO allows you to exclude certain ranges of a feature from the
Roundness and Straightness form characteristics prior to the CNC run or
after a measurement. The masked points will then be shown in another
color than the valid points in the CAD window.
Defining ranges
1 Click Evaluation in the definition template of the corresponding
Line Auto Path or Circle feature.
2 Click in the Evaluation window the Manual button under Point
Masking.
The Manual Point Masking dialog box appears on the screen. At
the same time, the CAD window is changed: The view is centered with
regard to the selected feature and rotated accordingly. If a measurement has already taken place, the actual points will be shown with the
selected magnification.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-53
3 Click the corresponding icon and enter the ranges to be excluded from
the evaluation in the Masked Areas list.
For a circle you must enter angle ranges with start and end angle, for
a line you must enter line segments with start and end value.
Your entries are immediately shown in the CAD window; the ranges
are marked with read (start) and blue (end) lines.
You can remove a superfluous line from the list using DEL or Delete
in the context menu.
5-54
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Note: All angle and coordinate definitions refer to the local alignment
of the feature. Thus the defined ranges are stable with regard to position changes.
4 If required, you can change the size and location of the displayed range
in the CAD window with the mouse.
5 Select the behavior during the CNC run:
Accept areas automatically: In the CNC run, your defined
ranges are excluded from the evaluation.
Manual Input: During the CNC run, you can define ranges by
means of the displayed measuring results immediately after the
measurement of the feature. The representation of the measuring
points is defined by clicking Properties in the Meas. Point Display window.
Note: You may also define the same setting for each feature in the
Measurement Plan Editor Features under Geometry Manual Point Masking.
6 Click Apply to display in the case of existing measuring points the
current evaluation according to the set evaluation ranges.
Afterwards you can make additional changes.
7 If the ranges are correct, confirm your entries with OK.
Reference point for feature

A characteristic referred to a point such as a certain coordinate usually
refers to the origin of the local feature alignment in the case of non-point
features.
To refer the characteristic to another point of the feature, change the
reference point in the evaluation parameters.
To do so, open the definition template of the characteristic and select
Evaluation parameters in the context menu of the feature. Define
the new reference point on the Reference point index card. You can
select the following points:
Feature type
Possible reference points
Plane
One of the corners of the plane

Point (X, Y, Z) in the specified alignment:
Alignment (of the feature)
- Base alignment
- Feature alignment (of the feature)
Center of mass
2D Line, 3D Line, Cylinder,

Cone
Axis start point
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-55
Feature type
Possible reference points

Axis end point
Point (X, Y, Z) in the specified alignment:
- Alignment (of the feature)
- Base alignment
- Feature alignment (of the feature)
Center of mass
5-56
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
User-defined characteristic attributes

Working with user-defined characteristic
attributes
You can set user-defined attributes with different value ranges for characteristics.
Example: You set the quality class attribute with the three values
low, medium and high. You can assign one of these quality
classes to each characteristic.
NOTICE
There is no default presetting for user-defined characteristic attributes. If
no value is assigned to an attribute, the corresponding field will remain
empty.
Defining attributes with value ranges

Configuration file
Define the attributes and their value ranges in the userattributes.ini

configuration file in the <program directory>\data\config\ path.
When you open a measurement plan with CALYPSO on another computer and want to use the characteristic attributes, you must create a
suitable configuration file on the other computer.
NOTICE
After each modification of the configuration file, you must establish again
the connection to the CMM to activate the changes.
The format of the configuration file corresponds to the format of the INI
file for printout header data (userfields.ini). For more information, please
see Reference: INI file for characteristic attributes [ 560].
Outputting attributes
The values of user-defined attributes are output in additional columns in
the table file for characteristics (*chr.txt) during each run.
NOTICE
If the corresponding setting in the configuration file of the Q-DAS converter was made, these values are transferred to the Q-DAS statistics
program.
You can set the printout output for each attribute in the configuration
file. The characteristic attribute is output if a value is assigned to it.
To do so, you must change the setting of the value from protocolOutput to true. If the entry is missing or it is set to false, the attribute
is not shown in the printout.
The characteristic attributes are only output with the characteristics.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-57
Creating attributes during the generation from CAD

data
When generating a measurement plan from CAD data, you can load the
characteristic from the K2002 field and assign the value of the K2001
field to the characteristic number characteristic attribute.
Assigning values for characteristic

attributes
You have two options for assigning values to characteristic attributes.
Assigning the values in the list of characteristics

1 Select Characteristic attributes in the context menu of the characteristic.
The Characteristic attributes window opens.
2 Enter the values of the attributes.
Assigning values in the measurement plan editor

1 Select Resources Characteristics Settings Editor.
2 Select the desired attribute in the menu under Characteristic attributes.
5-58
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3 Enter the values of the attributes for one or more characteristics.
Importing characteristic attributes with

values
You can import characteristic attributes with the appropriate values from
an ASCII file.
File import
To import a file with characteristic attributes, select File Import

Characteristic Attributes.
Alternatively, you may also use the readUserAttributes PCM command.
By importing, the values entered in the file are assigned to already existing
characteristic attributes. Characteristic attributes which do not yet exist,
are created and the appropriate value of the file is assigned to them.
Format of the file
The file is a table file. It contains lines and columns separated by tabulator.
The first line contains the column headings (1st column: identifier,
2nd to nth column: keyword of the respective characteristic attribute).
Any further line contains the characteristic name in the first column
and the values of the corresponding attributes in the other columns.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-59
NOTICE
Save in simple ASCII format a file that has been edited in a spreadsheet
program and use tabulators as separators.
NOTICE
If you also want to edit the imported characteristic attributes in CALYPSO,
the userattributes.ini configuration file must contain the corresponding entries with the same keywords.
Reference: INI file for characteristic

attributes
If a userattributes.ini file exists, CALYPSO refers to this file to determine
which attributes are queried in the Characteristic attribute window
and displayed in the Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics
and which values can be entered for the individual attributes.
Name and location of the
INI file
You must create the INI file as a text file and store it in the <user directory>
\data\config directory.
Format of the INI file
The format of the userattributes.ini file largely corresponds to that of a

normal Windows INI file:
The file consists of individual sections:
The names of the options are firmly assigned. A number of values for
one option are separated by commas. If a value itself contains one or
more commas, this value must be placed in quotes ("). Example:
<option>=X,Y,Z means three individual values <option>="X,Y,Z"
means one value
Comments are ignored. Comments are:
Structure of the userattributes.ini file
5-60
Each section is introduced by a line with the section name in

square brackets.
Each section consists of lines in the form <option>=<value>.
All characters that follow a semicolon. Exception: The semicolon

is located between two quotes (";").
A line that starts with REM.
For the userattributes.ini file, the following has been agreed for the section and option names:
The [Fieldnames] section contains the names of the sections that can
represent an attribute. Deviating from the usual format, this section
consist of lines of the form <option>.
For each of the options defined in the [Fieldnames] section, there is

a separate section with the name of the attribute which contains the
following lines:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
<option>
name
<value>
= <fname>
Meaning
selectiveList
= true
For input via combo box or selection list

Otherwise
false
protocolOutput
The designation of the attribute in the Characteristic attribute window
Output in the default printout and possible inclusion in the

custom printout
= true
No output in the default printout and no inclusion in the

custom printout
false
Additionally for combo boxes and selection lists

selectiveListValues
= <aname>
The name of the section with the entries of the combo box
or selection list
editable
= true
Combo box
false
Selection list
For each attribute with a selection list or combo box, the file contains
an additional section with the list of entries of the selection list or
combo box.
Each line in this section has the form <value>=<display>. The entries
under <display> are offered for selection; however, the entries under
<value> are only entered as attributes.
Example: Configuration file for userdefined characteristic attributes

The configuration file for user-defined characteristic attributes may have
the following structure:
REM userattributes.ini example
[Fieldnames]
REM By convention the userfieldnames begin with "u_"
u_k2005class
u_k2001number
REM Now defining the first userfield named u_k2005class
[u_k2005class]
name=K2005 Class
; the text shown as the name for the inputfield/list
selectiveList=true
; it is a list - either a drop down list
or a combo box
selectiveListValues=u_k2005class_valueList ; the values for this
list are found
; in the profile named "u_field1_valueList"
editable=false
; there's keyboard input possible for the
user ; it is a combo box (not a drop down
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-61
list)
REM Now defining the second userfield named u_k2001number
[u_k2001number]
name=K2001 Number
selectiveList=false ; it is not a list, so it must be an input
field
editable=false
protocolOutput=true ; output in protocol
REM Now defining the valuelist for the userfield with the name
"Part"
[u_k2005class_valueList]
0=0 unimportant
1=1 little important
2=2 important
3=3 significant
4=4 critical
5-62
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Details on defining characteristics

Overview of characteristics
Characteristic types
CALYPSO offers the following characteristics:
Characteristics for size characteristics
Standards
Angle
Distance
Curve Dimensions
More
Characteristics for form and location characteristics
The tables below list the items of information you need to define the
characteristics for size, form and location:
Characteristics for Size - Standards

Under Size Standards, you will find the following characteristics:
Characteristic
Location in
toolbox
X Value
Size Characteris- Determines the position of a given feature in X.

tics
The location is stated in coordinates for X, Y and Z.
The position of a circle, for example, is defined by its
center. The values are referenced to the part alignment.
Y Value
Size Characteris- Determines the position of a given feature in Y.

tics
Y Value
Size Characteris- Determines the position of a given feature in Z.

tics
Diameter
Size Characteris- Determines the diameter of a round feature.

tics
Radius
Size Characteris- Determines the radius of a round feature.

tics
61212-2011002
Description
CALYPSO
5-63
Characteristic
Location in
toolbox
Description
Radius Measurement
Size Characteris- Determines the radius and the angle (specified in the
tics
local feature alignment) of each individual probing
point in a specified sector. In this way the results for
a small arc segment can be enhanced (Radius Measurement characteristic [ 573]).
Note: The angles are only output, if Additional Position Result is activated in the Measurement Plan
Editor Characteristics.
2 Point Diameter
Size Characteris- Determines a minimum and a maximum diameter for

tics
a circle or cylinder measured by scanning using one
of three methods (2 Point Diameter characteristic [ 574]).
Length of perpendicular
Size Characteris- Determines the length of a perpendicular on a feature

tics
(Length of Perpendicular characteristic [ 573]).
Polar position
Radius
Size Characteris- Determines the position of a given feature with the

tics
Radius polar coordinate.
The location can be defined in terms of the polar coordinates (Radius, Angle, Height). The position of a
circle, for example, is defined by its center. The values
are referenced to the part alignment.
Polar position
Angle

tics
Angle polar coordinate.
Polar position
Height

tics
Height polar coordinate.
Characteristics for Size - Angle

Under Size Angle, you will find the following characteristics:
5-64
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Characteristic
Location in
toolbox
Projection Angle
One
Size Characteris- Determines the first projected angle of a certain featics

ture based on the part alignment. In a spatial system
of coordinates, the axial direction can be defined by
two projected angles. A projected angle is an angle
on a workpiece plane viewed from the third axis. Projected angle No. 1 is based on the reference axis (the
axis common to the two planes of projection) of the
feature.
Projection Angle
Two
Description
Feature axis
Angle 1
Y/X
Z/Y
X/Z
Size Characteris- Determines the second projected angle of a certain

tics
feature based on the part alignment. In a spatial system of coordinates, the axial direction can be defined
by two projected angles. A projected angle is an angle
on a workpiece plane viewed from the third axis. Projected angle No. 2 is based on the reference axis (the
axis common to the two planes of projection) of the
feature.
Feature axis
Angle 2
Z/X
X/Y
Y/Z
Cone Angle
Size Characteris- Determines the angle of aperture of a cone.

tics
Half Cone Angle
Size Characteris- Determines the half angle of aperture of a cone (the

tics
angle between the axis of the cone and the cone's
lateral surface).
Inclination Angle
Size Characteris- Determines a features angle of inclination from the Z

tics
axis of the part alignment.
Rotation Angle
Size Characteris- Determines a feature's angle of rotation about the Z

tics
axis, referenced to the X axis of the part alignment.
Feature Angle
Size Characteris- Calculates the angle that the axis of rotation of a featics
ture assumes with the part alignment.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-65
Characteristics for Size - Distance

Under Size Distance as well as under Form and Location Distance, you will find the following characteristics:
Characteristic
Location in
toolbox
Description
2D Polar Distance
Location Characteristics
Determines the two-dimensional distance between

the midpoints of two features.
This characteristic is used to determine the distance
between the projections of two two-dimensional features on a datum plane.
3D Polar Distance
Determines the direct three-dimensional distance between the midpoints of two features.
This characteristic is generally used for two points defined in all three dimensions (e.g. the centers of
spheres).
Cartesian Distance
Determines the distance between two features in Cartesian coordinates (along the X, Y and Z axes).
Distance Symmetry point
Size Characteris- Determines the distance between the two reference

tics
features of a symmetry point.
Size Characteris- Determines the distance of a space point or net point

tics
referenced to its nominal value.
Simple distance
Size Characteris- Determines the distance of a point feature from the

tics
origin of a coordinate system or the distances of two
point features from each other.
The distances output are those along the Cartesian
axes, along with the point-to-point distance (radius)
and the vector angle.
The reference point for a circle, ellipse, sphere, rectangle or slot is always the midpoint.
Characteristics for Size - Curve Dimensions

Under Size Curve Dimensions, you will find the following characteristics:
5-66
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Characteristic
Location in
toolbox
Description
Curve Slope
Size Characteris- Determines the slope (height or radius difference per

tics
revolution) between two points of a lift curve or spiral
curve.
Curve Stroke
Size Characteris- Determines the axial and radial deviations of a lift

tics
curve.
Curve Distance
Size Characteris- Determines the distance between two curves.

tics
Curve Expansion
Size Characteris- Determines the expansion of a curve in a predefined

tics
direction.
Curve length
Size Characteris- Determines the length of a curve.

tics
Surface Area
Size Characteris- Determines the surface area of a closed 2D curve.

tics
Characteristics for Distance - More

Under Size More, you will find the following characteristics:
Characteristic
Location in
toolbox
Focus 1
Size Characteris- Determines the X value of the first focal point of an

tics
ellipse.
Focus 1
Size Characteris- Determines the Y value of the first focal point of an

tics
ellipse.
Focus 1
Size Characteris- Determines the Z value of the first focal point of an

tics
ellipse.
Focus 2
Size Characteris- Determines the X value of the second focal point of

tics
an ellipse.
Focus 2
Size Characteris- Determines the Y value of the second focal point of

tics
an ellipse.
Focus 2
Size Characteris- Determines the Z value of the second focal point of

tics
an ellipse.
Focus 1
Size Characteris- Determines the radius of the first focal point of an

tics
ellipse.
61212-2011002
Description
CALYPSO
5-67
Characteristic
Location in
toolbox
Focus 1
Size Characteris- Determines the angle of the first focal point of an eltics
lipse.
Focus 1
Size Characteris- Determines the height of the first focal point of an

tics
ellipse.
Focus 2
Size Characteris- Determines the radius of the second focal point of an

tics
ellipse.
Focus 2
Size Characteris- Determines the angle of the second focal point of an

tics
ellipse.
Focus 2
Size Characteris- Determines the height of the second focal point of an

tics
ellipse.
Diameter Two
Size Characteris- Determines the second diameter of an ellipse.

tics
The first diameter of the ellipse is measured with the
Diameter command.
Radius Two
Size Characteris- Determines the second radius of an ellipse feature.

tics
The first radius of the ellipse is measured by the Radius characteristic.
Slot Length
Size Characteris- Determines the length of a slot or a rectangle.

tics
Slot width
Size Characteris- Determines the width of a slot or rectangle.

tics
Circular Pitch
Size Characteris- Determines the individual pitch error, cumulative

tics
pitch error, pitch error, radial runout and roundness
for a feature with rotational pattern or polar pattern
offset (Circular Pitch characteristic [ 580]).
Linear Pitch
Size Characteris- Determines the individual pitch error, cumulative

tics
pitch error, pitch error for a feature with pattern
(Linear Pitch characteristic [ 584]).
Minimum
Size Characteris- Determines the minimum of multiple characteristics.

tics
Maximum Result
Size Characteris- Determines the maximum of multiple characteristics.

tics
Average
Size Characteris- Determines the average of multiple characteristics.

tics
5-68
61212-2011002
Description
CALYPSO
Characteristic
Location in
toolbox
Description
Result Element
Size Characteris- Determines an actual value via formula or user input

tics
during the CNC and checks the compliance with the
tolerance (Result Element characteristic [ 590]).
Special Program
Size Characteris- Runs a special program or transfers data from a spetics

cial program to a printout (Special Program characteristic [ 591]).
Pipe Evaluation
Size Characteris- This characteristic is optional. It enables the definition,

tics
measurement and evaluation of curved tubes (see
Measuring a tube in the operating instructions for the
Tube Measurement program option).
Characteristics for Form and Location

Under Form and Location, you will find the following characteristics:
Characteristic
Location in
toolbox
Description
Roundness
Form Character- Determines the roundness or circularity of a given ciristics

cular feature (Circle or Circle on Cone). The definition
template includes a button labeled Graphic for form
plots (see Outputting form and location plots for
characteristics [ 872]).
Roundness Ref
Form Character- Defines the roundness or circularity of a given circular

istics
feature within defined sectors. The circle can be on a
cylinder, a sphere, or a cone.
The definition template includes a button labeled
Graphic for form plots (see Outputting form and
location plots for characteristics [ 872]).
Waviness
Form Character- Determines the waviness of a circle or a circle on cone

istics
using the Fourier analysis or roundness evaluation
(Maximum Waviness characteristic [ 593]). The
tolerance can be entered differently referenced to the
frequency length ranges.
Flatness
Form Character- Determines the flatness of a flat feature. The definiistics

tion template includes a button labeled Graphic for
form plots (see Outputting form and location plots
for characteristics [ 872]).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-69
Characteristic
Location in
toolbox
Description
Flatness with
reference length
Form Character- Defines for a flat feature the flatness within given recistics
tangular zones.
Straightness
Form Character- Determines the straightness of a line.

istics
The normal tolerance direction reflects straightness
in the probing direction; the parallel tolerance direction reflects straightness parallel to the surface of
the workpiece.
Straightness
with reference
length
Form Character- Defines for a 2D line the straightness of the line within
istics
given sections.
Cylindricity
Form Character- Determines the cylinder form of a cylindrical feature.

istics
Profile
Form Character- Defines the deviation of a plane from its nominal geistics
ometry. Its value depends on the selected shape of
zone (see Profile [ 576]).
Line Profile
Form Character- Defines the form deviation of a curve from its nominal
istics
geometry analogous to the Profile (see Defining the
Line Profile characteristic in the operating instructions
for the CNC Curve Measuring Software option).
Form
Form Character- From the extreme values of features, determines form

istics
deviation as the difference between the maximum
and minimum measured values perpendicular to the
feature (e.g. cone form or sphere form).
Curve Form
Form Character- This characteristic is optional. It defines the deviation

istics
of a defined curve (see Defining the Curve Form characteristic in the operating instructions for the CNC
Curve Measuring Software option).
5-70

61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Characteristic
Location in
toolbox
Description
True Position
Determines the deviation of the position of a given

feature from the nominal position in a datum reference frame. You have the choice of defining the reference features, the base alignment, or one of the
systems of coordinates. Each defined part alignment
can be used as the datum reference frame.
When you define the position tolerance, you can click
the Special button to apply the Offset and Rotate functions with reference to the base alignment
(see Moving or rotating the base / start alignment [ 334]).
Alternatively, you can use the best fit of bore pattern function (see Using best fit of bore pattern [ 5108]).
Concentricity
Determines the concentricity of a given feature (e.g.

of a circle) relative to one or two reference features.
DIN ISO 1101

Coaxiality
Determines the coaxiality of the axis of a feature (e.g.

of a cylinder) relative to another feature.
Perpendicularity
Determines the perpendicularity of a planar, cylindrical, conical or a straight-line feature relative to one or
two reference features.
Parallelism
Determines the parallelism of a planar, cylindrical,

conical or a straight-line feature relative to one or two
reference features.
GDT Symmetry
Determines the symmetry of a feature relative to two

reference features.
Angularity
Determines the deviation of a feature from a reference feature and a defined angle.
Radial
Determines the deviation of a feature (circle, circle on

cone, cylinder) normal to the reference axis in the radial direction or the deviation of a cone normal to the
wall of the cone.
If the reference feature has no axis (point or 3D point),
CALYPSO uses, as the reference axis, the axis of the
feature that is moved to the position of the reference
feature.
A measured point is only useful as reference feature,
if it is acquired by self-centering probing.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-71
Characteristic
Location in
toolbox
Description
Cumulative Radial Runout
Determines the total error of a cylinder's circle paths

perpendicular to the reference axis in radial direction.
If a reference feature has no axis (point or 3D point),
CALYPSO uses, as the reference axis, the axis of the
feature that is moved to the position of the reference
feature.
A measured point is only useful as reference feature,
if it is acquired by self-centering probing.
Axial
Determines the deviation of a feature in the direction

of the reference axis.
Cumulative Axial Runout
Determines the total error of a feature's paths in the

direction of the reference axis.
Angle between
Features
Determines the angle between two features. You

have a choice of results: acute angle, this angle's supplement to 180 and the supplementary angles of
both to 360.
Generated characteristics
CALYPSO generates the following characteristics automatically:
Characteristic
From construction
Description
X Value
(from the Circle

in contour best
fit construction)
Determines the X value of the circle for the circle in

contour best fit (Circle in contour best fit construction [ 4148]).
Y Value
(from the Circle

in contour best
fit construction)
Determines the Y value of the circle for the circle in

Z Value
(from the Circle

in contour best
fit construction)
Determines the Z value of the circle for the circle in

Radius
(from the Circle

in contour best
fit construction)
Determines the radius of the bend circle of the profile

at the contact point for the circle in contour best fit
(Circle in contour best fit construction [ 4148]).
Gap
(from the Circle

in contour best
fit construction)
Determines the gap between the profile and circle for

the circle in contour best fit (Circle in contour
best fit construction [ 4148]).
5-72
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Characteristic
From construction
Description
Feature Angle
(from the Circle

in contour best
fit construction)
Determines the start angle for the circle in contour

best fit (Circle in contour best fit construction [ 4148]).
Angle Range
(from the Circle

in contour best
fit construction)
Determines the angle range between the contact

points for the circle in contour best fit (Circle in
contour best fit construction [ 4148]).
End angle
(from the Circle

in contour best
fit construction)
Determines the end angle for the circle in contour

best fit (Circle in contour best fit construction [ 4148]).
Radius Measurement characteristic

Menu: Size Standards Radius Measurement
Tool Box: Size Characteristics Radius Measurement
The radius measurement characteristic determines for a feature whether
the points of the feature lie within a predefined radius ( a tolerance).
Circle, cylinder, cone, sphere and ellipse are possible characteristics.
Evaluation Range
You have the option of restricting the check to an evaluation range. To

do so, define the corresponding sector via the start angle and angle range.
The angles refer to the local feature alignment of the feature.
CALYPSO converts the entries automatically: the start angle into values
between 0 and 360 and the angle range into values between -360 and
+360.
Both angle specifications can be entered as a formula.
Degrees of freedom
If there is no full circle but a circle section, you can improve the stability
of Size Characteristics by specifying the center point of the circle and
checking only the radius.
Printout
All of the evaluation range remaining from the filtering and outlier elimination are output with name and actual-nominal comparison in the
printout. The name is composed of the name of the characteristic and
the point number, e.g. Radius Measurement1^417. The points of an
evaluation range keep their original numbers and are not renumbered.
Length of Perpendicular characteristic

Menu: Size Standards PerpLength
Tool Box: Size Characteristics Length of perpendicular
The Length of Perpendicular characteristic determines for the Perpendicular feature whether the length of the perpendicular lies within a
predefined tolerance.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-73
NOTICE
The Perpendicular construction is only useful as geometrical feature
for this characteristic.
This characteristic cannot be used to check the length of a measured
rotationally symmetrical feature, e.g. a cylinder or cone. The length of
such a feature is always the same as the nominal value.
For this reason, it cannot be used to check the distance between two
bores by means of a 3D line. You must use the Distance characteristic
to check the distance between two points.
2 Point Diameter characteristic

Menu: Size Standards 2 Point Diameter
Tool Box: Size Characteristics 2 Point Diameter
The 2 Point Diameter characteristic determines a minimum and a maximum diameter for a circle or cylinder measured by scanning.
Prerequisites
Circles and cylinders must be measured with scanning paths whereas only
circle paths are permitted as scanning paths. Each scanning path must
cover an angle of at least 180.
Tolerances
When entering tolerances, definitions in tolerance classes according to

ISO 286 are possible.
Calculation modes
You have the following options for calculation:
Pure two point distance dimension

The circle is fitted into a Gaussian element (LSQ feature). For each
point of each scanning path, the symmetrical point is determined. The
smallest and largest two point distance is determined from all two
point distances. The corresponding points are assigned to them.
a = min
b = max
Gaussian element
5-74
Dimension Definition as per ISO 8015
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The size definition according to ISO 8015 allows you to check whether
both the tangential element and all two point distances comply with
the tolerance.
With an outside feature, the circumscribed feature is evaluated and
with an inside feature the inscribed feature. For each point of each
scanning path, the symmetrical point is determined.
The two point distances are used to determine the smallest distance
(A) for a circumscribed feature and the largest distance (B) for an inscribed feature. The corresponding points are assigned to them.
Circumscribed feature
Inscribed feature
Two point distance dimension with evaluation range definition

The circle is fitted into a Gaussian element (LSQ feature). The evaluation range is predefined by an angle and an angle range. For each
point of this evaluation range, the symmetrical point is determined.
v
The smallest and largest two point distance is determined from all two
point distances. The corresponding points are assigned to them.
For the angle and angle range you may enter formulas.
Calculation of point facing each other
As there is generally no point-symmetrical equivalent to a point, CALYPSO

interpolates between the two closest points.
If the angle between the two nearest points facing a given point is too
big, CALYPSO assumes a gap between the scanning paths and does not
calculate any two point distance dimension.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-75
Definition of the angle

position
The angle positions for the evaluation range and the result definition refer
to the u axis of the feature's local feature alignment. The axis vector of
the feature determines the direction of the w axis.
The local feature alignment is displayed in the CAD window when opening the feature.
Result output
The 2 Point Diameter characteristic determines up to two results which
are distinguished by min. and max. designations. Each individual result is
output as an individual characteristic and contains the following definitions:
the designation (e.g. 2 Point Diameter1(2)^Max)
the feature
the position of the corresponding extreme value as an angle (if the

extended position output is activated in the Measurement Plan Editor
Characteristics)
the mode used to calculate the 2 point diameter (not required in the
compact printout)
In the DMIS printout, the 2 point diameter is output as a normal diameter.
Access to result via formula

The getActual PCM function allows you to access the minimum and maximum of a 2 point diameter and the appropriate angles.
Access to minimum and minimum angle:

getMinActual(feature_name[,loop index]).actual
getMinActual(feature_name[,LoopIndex]).angleOfRadiusPoint
Access to maximum and maximum angle:

getMaxActual(feature_name[,loop index]).actual
getMaxActual(feature_name[,LoopIndex]).angleOfRadiusPoint
Enter the name of the characteristic without the ^Min or ^Max suffix. You can access results with indexes by means of the loop index.
Use of the results of average, minimum, maximum

Both results of the 2 point diameter are used for the evaluation in the
average, minimum and maximum characteristics.
Profile characteristic
Menu: Form and Location Profile
Features
CALYPSO determines the profile for the following features:
5-76
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Plane
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Stepped Cylinder
Free Form Surface
Symmetry Plane
General Surface
Point
NOTICE
The Profile corresponds to the TOL/PROFS defined in DMIS.
Direction of deviations
The deviations between the actual surface and the nominal surface are
required for the determination of the Profile characteristic. It is assumed that the values increase in outward direction (away from the material) and decrease in inward direction. Depending on whether you use
an inside or an outside feature, the calculated result may be vice versa for
CALYPSO. Therefore, CALYPSO first calculates the difference between
the actual and nominal points and reverses the sign, if necessary.
Further considerations are based on the assumption that the deviations
increase in outward direction (away from the material) and decrease in
inward direction (towards the material).
Shapes of zone
When defining the Profile, you can choose from eight shapes of zone:
Shape Of Zone
The tolerance band is defined by ...
Bilateral one result
Identical distances of the nominal surface to the inside and outside
Bilateral with unequal distri- Unequal distances of the nominal surface to the inside and outside
bution one result
Unilateral (nominal contour
inside)
Nominal contour and distance to the inside

outside)
Nominal contour and distance to the outside
Bilateral two results
Identical distances of the nominal surface to the inside and outside
Bilateral with unequal distri- Unequal distances of the nominal surface to the inside and outside
bution two results
Outwards into infinity
Distance of the nominal surface to the inside
Inwards into infinity
Distance of the nominal surface to the outside
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-77
For the bilateral tolerance with unequal distribution, a further input field
is activated for the Tolerance (one side) where you additionally specify the side to which the tolerance applies using the Inside / Outside
Switch icon.
Result of profile
The result of the profile depends on the selected shape of zone.
Shape Of Zone
Will be output:
Example
Bilateral one result
Double the largest deviation (inside

and outside)
Bilateral with unequal distri- Double the largest deviation (inside

bution one result
and outside) from one of the calculated theoretical center lines
inside)
Double the largest deviation from

the tolerance average to the inside
or outside

outside)
Double the largest deviation from

the tolerance average to the inside
or outside
Bilateral two results
The largest deviation inside (minimum) and the largest deviation

outside (maximum) the workpiece
Bilateral with unequal distri- The largest deviation inside (minibution two results
mum) and the largest deviation
outside (maximum) the workpiece
Outwards into infinity
The largest deviation inside the

workpiece
Inwards into infinity
The largest deviation outside the

workpiece
Calculation of deviations
for the general surface
The General Surface feature contains only a set of points and not a mathematical description of the surface. Therefore, the points can be evaluated only individually: Each actual point is compared with its associated
nominal point. The stylus touch point is calculated based on the stylus
center, stylus radius and the normal vector of the nominal point.
The deviation D of the point is formed from the nominal point and actual
point along the normal vector of the nominal point. The deviation perpendicular to the normal vector of the nominal point is ignored. This corresponds to the procedure for the space point.
5-78
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The greatest absolute deviation of all point comparisons is then used as

a measure for the profile.
Restrictions
Particularities for the

general surface
Profile with reference

features
The following restrictions apply to the profile:
No restrictions may be set for the best fit.
Negative tolerances are not permitted.
The following particularities apply to the profile of a general surface:
No filters or outlier elimination.
Only the Gauss (LSQ feature) evaluation method is possible.
As in general, the following applies to profile with reference features:

Either no reference feature or all three reference features are defined.
Otherwise, no result will be output.
The free form surface is the only exception: Individual reference features
are permitted in this case.
GDT Symmetry characteristic

Menu: Form and Location GDT Symmetry
CALYPSO determines the symmetry for all features, except for the curve
and the free form surface.
NOTICE
Starting from version 4.4, the definition of reference features for the
GDT Symmetry characteristic is changed and extended. This change
does not apply to older measurement plans; they are still calculated according to the previous algorithm.
Tolerances
The shape of zone determines the direction - referenced to the datum

reference frame - in which the deviation is calculated. Only one-dimensional shapes of zone are possible (Only X, Only Y, Only Z). The list is
further limited depending on the feature type. If a cylinder is the feature,
you cannot select the direction parallel to the axis. The shape of zone for
a plane can only be evaluated in one direction.
The GDT Symmetry characteristic enables the definition of a projected
tolerance zone. If the feature is a circle or a cylinder, it can be evaluated
by means of MMC/LMC.
Result calculation
You can enter a coordinate system instead of reference features. The
procedure is the same as for the True Position characteristic.
A temporary coordinate system is formed from the reference features.
The primary, secondary and tertiary constraints of the coordinate system
are defined according to the sequence, direction and feature type of the
references.
CALYPSO determines the datum reference frame (from reference features or as a coordinate system). The distance to the characteristic is
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-79
measured based on the origin of the coordinate system. The direction of

the measurement is predefined by the shape of zone: If the shape of zone
is Only X, evaluation takes place in the X axis of the datum reference
frame. The distance corresponds to the actual value. The actual value is
compared with the nominal value (the nominal value is always zero). The
value of the tolerance determines whether the characteristic is inside or
outside of the tolerance.
Feature as part of the datum reference frame
A special feature of the GDT Symmetry characteristic is that the feature

may become a part of the datum reference frame. If the datum reference
frame is formed based on the three reference features and the primary
or secondary alignment is still free, CALYPSO tries to use the feature for
the determination of the coordinate system. If the direction of the feature
corresponds to the free alignment of the coordinate system, the feature
is entered.
The reason for this is as follows: One of the applications of a GDT Symmetry is a plane as a feature and an axis as a reference feature. Here the
X, Y origins and the spatial alignment are defined by the axis. However,
the plane alignment is still free. Thus the result of the symmetry would
not be clearly defined, as the feature (the plane) can still be freely rotated
about the axis of the reference feature. By integrating the plane in the
coordinate system, the plane rotation is no longer free.
The function of the projected tolerance zone is still possible according to
the old symmetry.

The display of the True Position, GDT Symmetry and Profile characteristics
in the CAD window does not only comprise the marked features but also
the display of the datum reference frame. The prerequisite is that you
activated the CAD CAD Model Control Highlight selected
Feature(s) menu items.
Circular Pitch characteristic

Menu: Size More Circular Pitch
Tool Box: Size Characteristics More Circular Pitch
CALYPSO determines the circular pitch for all features, except for the 2D
curve, 3D curve, free form surface, general surface and general curve
features and outputs the results either to CALYPSO or according to DIN
3960.
Feature
You have two options for selecting the feature:
You select a feature with rotational pattern or polar pattern offset.
You select several features which are handled in the same way as a
pattern.
Evaluation characteristics
The circular pitch comprises the following evaluation characteristics which

can be enabled and disabled individually:
5-80
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Individual pitch error
Cumulative pitch error
Pitch error
Radial runout (center of the rotational pattern as a circle center)
Roundness (circle center calculated via the pattern features)
Each characteristic has an own nominal value as well as an upper and

lower tolerance for the evaluation according to CALYPSO. The nominal
value is calculated automatically for each characteristic and index. The
tolerances can be defined via formulas (example: getActual("Circle1").x).
For a pattern with n features, n results per evaluation are calculated. The
difference between two geometric elements is calculated cyclically as an
evaluation characteristic. Exception: The difference between two evaluation characteristics is calculated cyclically for a pitch error.
Evaluation characteristic
Definition
Individual Pitch Error fp
Difference between the actual and the predefined distance of two

adjacent features.
The result is an angle or an arc length. The arc length is calculated
based on the distance between the first nominal geometry and the
pitch center point.
The nth result of this evaluation characteristic is the pitch error between the last (the nth) and the first feature.
Cumulative Pitch Error Fp
Total of individual pitch errors. Distance between actual and nominal

distance of a feature from the first feature of the pitch measurement.
pitch center point.
The nth result of this evaluation characteristic is always 0 (the angle
between the first feature and the feature itself).
Pitch Error fu
Difference between the current and the previous (for the first result:
the last) individual pitch error (cyclic difference).
pitch center point.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-81
Definition
Fr Rad.Runout
Radial deviation between a feature and the pitch circle radius of the
pattern. The center point of the pitch circle corresponds to the center
of the pattern. The radius is the distance between the center and the
first actual feature of the pattern.
The result is a length. The nominal value is 0.
The n-th result is always 0.
Fre Roundness
Radial deviation between a feature and the pitch circle radius of the
pattern. The center point of the pitch circle is calculated based on the
actual features of the pattern. The pitch circle is calculated via the
best-fit method according to Gauss (LSQ feature). The radius is the
distance between the calculated pitch circle center point and the first
actual feature of the pattern.
The result is a length. The nominal value is 0.
If the pattern comprises less than 3 features, there will be no result
for the roundness. The n-th result of this evaluation characteristic is
0.
Evaluation mode
The selected evaluation mode is decisive for the evaluation of the results.
With the evaluation according to CALYPSO, the minimum and maximum values for the individual pitch error (fp), cumulative pitch error
(Fp), radial runout (Fr), roundness (Fre) and pitch error (fu) are shown
in the printout. Furthermore, the deviations are compared with the
upper and lower tolerance.
With the evaluation according to DIN 3960, the values for Fp and Fr
are shown as difference between the maximum and minimum value.
The range between maximum and minimum is compared with a tolerance band without reference to a nominal value. All single values
of the pitch error (fu) are shown as absolute values.
The deviations are compared with a single tolerance value. The tolerance band ranges from the zero line to the tolerance value. The individual pitch error (fp) is shown as the highest value of the maximum
and minimum. Unlike fu, all single values are absolute values so that
the tolerance band is symmetrical to the zero line, its width being
twice the tolerance value.
The illustration shows the differences in the evaluation:
5-82
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Evaluation according to CALYPSO
Evaluation according to DIN 3960
mm
mm
0,2000
0,2000
0,0000
0,0000
10
11
-0,2000
12
Pkt.
10
11
-0,2000
0,2 mm
12
Pkt.
12
Pkt.
12
Pkt.
12
Pkt.
12
Pkt.
0,2 mm
50 : 1
50 : 1
mm
1,0000
mm
1,0000
0,0000
0,0000
10
11
12
Pkt.
-1,0000
10
11
-1,0000
1 mm
1 mm
10 : 1
10 : 1
mm
mm
0,2000
0,2000
0,0000
0,1000
10
11
0,1 mm
0,2 mm
-0,2000
0,0000
100 : 1
50 : 1
10
11
12
Pkt.
10
11
12
Pkt.
mm
0,0000
mm
0,0000
1
10
11
-0,5000
-1,0000
-1,0000
0,5 mm
1 mm
-2,0000
20 : 1
10 : 1
mm
mm
0,0200
0,0000
1
10
11
12
Pkt.
0,0000
-0,0100
10
11
-0,0200
-0,0200
10 m
20 m
1000 : 1
500 : 1
Printout
The result name in the printout is composed of the name of the characteristic, the current index number and the abbreviation of the evaluation
characteristic (example: Circular pitch1(3)^Fp).
In the case of individual pitch error, pitch error and cumulative pitch error,
pitch spread and table, the name of the characteristic type is followed by
the unit of measure (arc length or angle) for the results.
The reference names are the feature name and the current indexes which
were relevant for the result (example: Cylinder1(3)-(4)).
The standardized reference sizes for individual and cumulative pitch errors
are shown in the errors of those results. The nominal and actual values
correspond to the angular pitch p or cumulative angular pitch pk.
Extended Pitch Task
After the individual results of the circular pitch, all results of the selected evaluation characteristics are output in tabular form in the default printout.
The compact printout shows the results of the circular pitches and the
table if the scope of the printout is set to All Characteristics or
All Features and all Characteristics. The individual pitch error,
cumulative pitch error, pitch error, radial runout and roundness specification factors are highlighted in color in the table.
In the custom printout and table file, only the individual results (only
minimum/maximum or all) are output without any table.
By activating Extended Pitch Task in the Measurement Plan Editor

Characteristics, not only the extreme values but also all results are output
in the default printout and the table file. Each of these results consists of
the nominal and actual value, upper and lower tolerance, error and histogram of the error.
This setting applies to all circular and linear pitches of the measurement
plan.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-83
Further use of the circular pitch results

You cannot recall the individual results of the circular pitch via getActual.
Linear Pitch characteristic

Menu: Size More Linear Pitch
Tool Box: Size Characteristics More Linear Pitch
CALYPSO determines the linear pitch for all features, except for the 2D
curve, 3D curve, free form surface, general surface and general curve
features and outputs the results either to CALYPSO or according to DIN
3960.
Feature
Evaluation characteristics
You have two options for selecting the feature:
You select a feature with a 1D linear pattern.
You select several features which are handled in the same way as a
1D linear pattern.
The linear pitch comprises the following evaluation characteristics which

can be enabled and disabled individually:
Individual pitch error
Cumulative pitch error
Pitch error
Each characteristic has an own nominal value as well as an upper and

lower tolerance for the evaluation according to CALYPSO. The nominal
value is calculated automatically for each characteristic and index. The
tolerances can be defined via formulas (example: getActual("Circle1").x).
For a 1D linear pattern with n features, n-1 results per evaluation are
calculated. The difference between two geometric elements is calculated
as an evaluation characteristic. Exception: The difference between two
evaluation characteristics is calculated for a pitch error.
Definition
Pitch distance p
Distance between the two features of a pitch step.
Cumulative pitch distance pk Distance between the first feature of the pitch measurement and the
second feature of the corresponding pitch step.
Individual pitch error fp
5-84
Difference between the actual and the predefined distance of two

adjacent features in mm or inch.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Definition
Cumulative pitch error Fp
Total of individual pitch errors. Distance between actual and nominal

distance of a feature from the first feature of the pitch measurement.
Pitch error fu
Difference between the current and the previous (for the first result:
the last) individual pitch error (cyclic difference).
Evaluation mode
The selected evaluation mode is decisive for the evaluation of the results.
With the evaluation according to CALYPSO, the minimum and maximum values for the individual pitch error (fp), cumulative pitch error
(Fp) and pitch error (fu) are shown in the printout. Furthermore, the
deviations are compared with the upper and lower tolerance.
With the evaluation according to DIN 3960, the value for Fp is shown
as difference between the maximum and minimum value. The range
between maximum and minimum is compared with a tolerance band
without reference to a nominal value. All single values of the pitch
error (fu) are shown as absolute values.
The deviations are compared with a single tolerance value. The tolerance band ranges from the zero line to the tolerance value. The individual pitch error (fp) is shown as the highest value of the maximum
and minimum. Unlike fu, all single values are absolute values so that
the tolerance band is symmetrical to the zero line, its width being
twice the tolerance value.
The illustration shows the differences in the evaluation:

Evaluation according to CALYPSO
Evaluation according to DIN 3960
mm
mm
0,2000
0,2000
0,0000
0,0000
10
11
-0,2000
12
Pkt.
10
11
-0,2000
0,2 mm
12
Pkt.
12
Pkt.
12
Pkt.
0,2 mm
50 : 1
50 : 1
mm
1,0000
mm
1,0000
0,0000
0,0000
10
11
12
Pkt.
-1,0000
10
11
-1,0000
1 mm
1 mm
10 : 1
10 : 1
mm
mm
0,2000
0,2000
0,0000
0,1000
0,1 mm
10
11
0,2 mm
-0,2000
0,0000
100 : 1
1
10
11
50 : 1
12
Pkt.
Printout
The result name in the printout is composed of the name of the characteristic, the current index number and the abbreviation of the evaluation
characteristic (example: Linear pitch1(3)^Fp).
The reference names are the feature name and the current indexes which
were relevant for this result (example: Point1(3)-(4)).
The nominal and actual values correspond to the pitch distance p or cumulative pitch distance pk.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-85
Extended Pitch Task
After the individual results of the linear pitch, all results of the selected
evaluation characteristics are output in tabular form in the default
printout. A comment can be output together with the table.
The compact printout shows the results of the linear pitches and the
table if the scope of the printout is set to All Characteristics or
All Features and all Characteristics. The individual pitch error,
cumulative pitch error and pitch error specification factors are highlighted in color in the table. A comment can be output together with
the table.
In the custom printout and table file, only the individual results (only
minimum/maximum or all) are output without any table.
By activating Extended Pitch Task in the Measurement Plan Editor

Characteristics, not only the extreme values but also all results are output
in the default printout and the table file. Each of these results consists of
the nominal and actual value, upper and lower tolerance, error and histogram of the error.
This setting applies to all circular and linear pitches of the measurement
plan.
Display of references used

The references of the highlighted feature can be displayed via the context
menu of the linear pitch. This tree structure is similar to the tree structure
of the simple distance.
Further use of the linear pitch results

You cannot recall the individual results of the linear pitch via getActual.
Minimum, Maximum and Average

characteristics
Menu: Size More Minimum, Maximum or Average

Tool Box: Size Characteristics More Minimum, Maximum or Average
The Minimum, Maximum and Average characteristics allow you
to determine the minimum, maximum or the average of a series of characteristics.
5-86
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Select the desired characteristics in the definition template. As soon as

you have made a selection, the tolerances and the nominal and actual
values will be recalculated automatically.
Once all selected characteristics have been determined, the minimum,
maximum or the average can be determined. The curve is displayed as
actual value. With Minimum and Maximum, the name of the characteristic which was determined as minimum or maximum appears in the field
above the actual value.
In the default printout, the name of the characteristic which was determined as minimum or maximum is highlighted with a preceding asterisk.
NOTICE
The Minimum and Maximum characteristics are not exported to DMIS
and are not output in the DMIS report.
In the case of display with banner, the arrow points to the feature with
the maximum or minimum in the graphic window (in contrast, the arrow
at the Average characteristic points to the first characteristic in the list).
Roundness with reference angle

characteristic
Menu: Form and Location Roundness Ang
For the Circle and Circle on Cone features, the Roundness with reference angle can be determined. In contrast to Roundness, the roundness
of individual part segments of the circle segment concerned is checked.
NOTICE
The Roundness Ang cannot be determined for cylinder and cone. Features created by constructions have no result since they do not have any
measured points. The exceptions are Recall and Recall Feature Points.
You set the size of the part segment (indicated as partial angle 0) and
their degree of overlap (in %).
Overlapping 0%
1
...
Overlapping 25%
1
...
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-87
The measured values received from the roundness check of the part segments can be evaluated in different ways:
Every roundness based on own partial circle

For each part segment, an own partial circle is calculated from its
points and the difference between the maximum and minimum distance of the actual points of the segment to the fitted partial circle is
specified.
Every roundness based on overall circle

For each part segment, the difference between the maximum and
minimum distance of the actual points of the part segments to the
fitted part segment of the circle is specified.
The Circumscribed and Inscribed and Outer and Inner Tangential
Feature evaluation methods cannot be selected as the angle range
could be too small for this.
NOTICE
The Roundness Ang can only be evaluated according to Gauss (LSQ feature) or Minimum. The standard evaluation method is Minimum.
The Circumscribed and Inscribed and Outer and Inner Tangential
Feature evaluation methods cannot be selected as the angle range could
be too small for this.
This provides you with a measure for the roundness of each part segment.
For output, you can specify which of these single results is to be displayed:
the maximum roundness,
all roundnesses that exceed the given tolerance,
all roundnesses.
A roundness plot is possible in the same way as with the conventional

Roundness. Minimum and maximum of the part segment with the greatest roundness are shown in the plot with *.
Flatness with reference length

characteristic
Menu: Form and Location Flatness Ref
For planes, the Flatness with reference length can be determined. In contrast to Flatness, the flatness of partial rectangles of the plane concerned
is checked. You set the size of these rectangles and their degree of overlap.
Using the limit angle, you can specify in addition a limit that the angle
between an individual part rectangle and the entire plane must not exceed.
The measured values received from the flatness check of the rectangles
can be evaluated in different ways:
5-88
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Reference plane in each zone
For each rectangle, the difference between the maximum and minimum distance of the actual points of the rectangle to the fitted part
plane of the rectangle is specified.
Reference overall plane
For each rectangle, the difference between the maximum and minimum distance of the actual points of the rectangle to the fitted overall
plane is specified.
This provides you with a measure for the flatness of each rectangle. For
output, you can specify which of these single results is to be displayed:
all flatnesses
all flatnesses that exceed the given tolerance
the maximum flatness.
A flatness plot is possible in the same way as with the conventional flatness. Minimum and maximum of the rectangle with the greatest flatness
are shown in the plot with *.
Straightness with reference length

characteristic
Menu: Form and Location Straightness Ref
For 2D lines, the Straightness with reference length can be determined.
In contrast to Straightness, the straightness of sections of the 2D line
concerned is checked.
NOTICE
Features created by constructions have no result since they do not have
any measured points. The exceptions are Recall and Recall Feature Points.
You set the size of sections (the reference length) and their degree of
overlap.
Overlapping 0%
1
...
Overlapping 25%
1
...
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-89
The measured values received from the straightness check of the sections
can be evaluated in different ways:
Every straightness based on own partial length

For each section, the difference between the maximum and minimum
distance of the actual points of the section to the fitted partial length
is specified.
Every straightness based on overall length

For each section, the difference between the maximum and minimum
distance of the actual points of the section to the fitted total 2D line
is specified.
This provides you with a measure for the straightness of each section. For
output, you can specify which of these single results is to be displayed:
the maximum straightness,
all straightnesses that exceed the given tolerance,
all straightnesses.
NOTICE
In contrast to Straightness of a 2D line, the shape of zone of the Straightness Ref cannot be switched over. The deviation is calculated in the probing direction this corresponds to the normal shape of zone in the
case of Straightness.
A straightness plot is possible in the same way as with the conventional
Straightness. Minimum and maximum of the tolerance zone with the
greatest straightness are shown in the plot with *.
Result Element characteristic

Menu: Size More
The Result Element characteristic determines a result, irrespective of a
feature, and evaluates its compliance with the tolerance. The result can
be a dimensionless number, a length or an angle.
There are now two options for the result determination:
Formula calculation
Result input during the CNC run
Formula calculation
For example, you can enter a PCM expression with getActual commands
and PCM variables for the formula. If a result element accesses the actual
value of a feature that has not yet been measured during the CNC run,
the missing measurement is automatically processed with priority and the
result element is determined.
Result input
A window showing the name of the result element and the dialog text
appears for the entry of a value during the CNC run. You can enter a
number.
5-90
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
If the entry is invalid, you will receive a message.
The CNC run will only continue after entering a number and confirming
with OK. When clicking Cancel, the CNC run is interrupted and the stop
light will turn red.
Tolerances
If the unit of measure length is set, it is possible to enter the tolerance

class (ISO286) instead of the upper/lower tolerance.
Special Program characteristic

Menu: Size More
The Special Program characteristic represents the interface between
CALYPSO and a selected special program. A correctly installed special
program is the prerequisite for a correct program run.
The Special Program characteristic calls the selected special program, executes it and transfers its data to CALYPSO. The results are included in
the printouts.
The Special Program characteristic is defined via the definition template.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-91
To do so, select the desired special program, transfer in the list the required features and the associated coordinate system.
Creating an alignment
Click Create Alignment in the definition template to insert a new

alignment in the measurement plan below the special program. Its name
is composed of the name of the Special Program characteristic preceded
by WP_. The corresponding Special Program characteristic is entered
as a feature.
During the measurement plan run, this alignment is calculated by means
of the values transferred by the special program.
Use Execute Program Now to start the entered special program from
within the definition template.
Select OK to confirm your entries and close the window.
5-92
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Measurement plan run
Characteristic
Characteristic
Special program
characteristic
Data of the
features
Special program
Results
Characteristic
During the measurement plan run, the selected special program is executed based on the entries made and the results are returned to CALYPSO.
Maximum Waviness characteristic

Basics about the Maximum Waviness
characteristic
Menu: Form and Location Waviness
Tool Box: Form Characteristics Waviness
For the Plane, Circle and Circle on Cone features, the Maximum Waviness can be determined. The waviness is important for the optimum run
of shafts in slide bearings.
Evaluation types
CALYPSO checks the waviness and offers two evaluation types: the Fourier analysis and the roundness evaluation.
In the Fourier analysis, the determined surface contour is shown as a

weighted sum of ideal curves (harmonic waves or harmonics) of a
certain frequency. The result of the Fourier analysis is thus an ampli-
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-93
tude function of the frequency: for each frequency, the amplitude is

determined with which it enters the start contour.
To avoid balance errors, these amplitudes may not exceed certain values. This is checked by means of the maximum waviness.
Feature
Defaults
In the roundness evaluation, the maximum deviations from the roundness of different, linearly ascending sector sizes are determined and
checked. In this case, the sectors are arranged with a predefined
overlap in the circle and the corresponding deviation from the roundness is determined for each defined sector size.
You can select a feature of the following types as the characteristic:
Plane (only Fourier analysis)
Circle
Circle on Cone
The default for the evaluation method of the feature is Minimum.

The Maximum Waviness characteristic belongs to the Form Characteristics group and uses the outlier elimination set for this purpose. You can
define the treatment of outliers for a measurement plan under Resources Filter / Outlier Elimination in the Form group.
If a filter is set, it will also be used. If you do not require the filtering for
the Fourier analysis, you must deactivate it.
The determination of the characteristic requires at least 7 points (for
meaningful results a considerably higher number of points is required)
which must be spread evenly over the total circle.
Specifying tolerances
The tolerance is specified as a function of the frequency (Fourier) or the

sector size (roundness). As it is not allowed to enter a nominal value for
the maximum waviness, you may only enter one single positive tolerance
value for each frequency or sector size.
Tolerance function
For the Fourier analysis, the frequencies can be specified as number

of harmonics (in undulations per revolution) or as oscillation length
(in angular measure). You can use floating point numbers for both
specifications. The conversion of the number of harmonics n to the
oscillation length T is based on the formula T = 2 / n.
Four options are available for the specification of the tolerance function:
Tolerance steps:
You can enter different tolerances for certain blocks of frequency
ranges/angle ranges. At the limit of both frequency ranges/angle
ranges, the higher tolerance applies.
Single values from file

You can import the tolerance curve from an ASCII file.
5-94
Tolerance polynomial:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
By specifying the coefficients for a polynomial (from the harmonic

waves/sector sizes), you create a continuous and smooth tolerance
curve.
RTA Curve:
The roundness deviation R and the construction form parameters n0
and k saved in a file allow you to define the limit curve for the amplitude.
Results
As a result of the Maximum Waviness characteristic, the following is

output depending on the evaluation type:
the amplitude which belongs to the frequency with the highest difference between the amplitude and tolerance as well as the frequency
itself
the maximum deviation from the roundness for all sector sizes as well
as this sector size itself.
In the default printout and the compact printout, the amplitude, tolerance and deviation are specified in m or 1/1000 inch as well as the appropriate frequency and the information whether the frequency is specified as number of harmonics (number of harmonic waves) or oscillation
length.
The appropriate frequency is not specified in addition in the custom printout.
Use tolerance steps for waviness

CALYPSO can determine the Maximum Waviness for the Plane, Circle and Circle on Cone features. The waviness is important for the
optimum run of shafts in slide bearings. CALYPSO performs a roundness
evaluation with Fourier analysis.
The tolerance for the maximum waviness can be defined in steps you
enter different tolerances for the individual sections of a block of frequency ranges (Fourier) or angle ranges (roundness). At the limit of two
frequency ranges, the higher tolerance applies.
The procedure for specifying the tolerance steps is as

follows:
1 Select Form and Location Waviness.
The characteristic is transferred to the measurement plan.
3 Go to Tolerance Curve and select the Tolerance steps entry.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-95
4 Click Feature and select the feature of your choice (Plane, Circle or
Circle on Cone).
5 Select the Evaluation type.
6 Select the specification of the frequency values for Fourier: as number of harmonics (harmonic waves) or as oscillation length.
7 Enter the permissible lower limit value of the range to be checked.
8 Define the tolerance steps in the table.
5-96
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CALYPSO makes sure that the limit values in the table are arranged in
a monotonically ascending order (or in the case of oscillation length in
a monotonically descending order).
Note: You can also determine the tolerance value with a formula. The
numeric result of the formula calculation is assigned to the m or
1/1000 inch unit and evaluated.
Note: The designations lower limit and upper limit refer to the
specification of the number of harmonics (harmonic waves) or the angle. If you select Oscillation length, the values will be arranged in
descending order.
Add new ranges with Add.
Enter the upper limit of the range and the tolerance which is
valid from the previous limit to the current limit.
Note: If you want to define tolerance steps in several Maximum Waviness characteristics:
Copy the characteristic and only make the required changes.
- or Copy the tolerance property of an already completed characteristic into a characteristic which is not yet completed (Copying
properties of characteristics [ 540]).
Importing tolerance curve from ASCII file

You can import the tolerances for the maximum waviness from an ASCII
file. This files contains the defined tolerances. The corresponding tolerance is defined for each harmonic.
To import the tolerance curve:

1 Select Form and Location Waviness
3 Go to Tolerance Curve and select the Single values from file
entry.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-97
Circle on Cone).
The default setting for Evaluation type is Fourier.
6 Enter the path and the file name of the tolerance file under Download tolerance curve from file. You can also enter a formula
here.
- or -
5-98
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Click the Select file for tolerance curve import icon and select
the file in the file selection dialog.
The imported values are displayed as table in the definition template
but cannot be modified.
Note: If you do not enter any path, CALYPSO searches for the file in
the measurement plan directory.
7 If you want to change the data after importing, go to Tolerance
Curve and select the Tolerance steps tab.
The table containing the imported data can be edited. You can modify
the values. Please note that this change does not modify the values in
the file.
After editing the file, the single values in the CNC are no longer imported from the specified file.
Specifying the tolerance polynomial for the

waviness
The tolerance for the maximum waviness can be defined in the form of
a continuous and smooth function by means of a polynomial from the
harmonic waves.
3 Go to Tolerance Curve and select the Polynomial function entry.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-99
Circle on Cone).
The displayed formula is adjusted. If the ai and bi coefficient sequences
are identical, the corresponding formula computes the number of
harmonics and once the oscillation length.
5-100
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7 Enter the lower and upper limit value for the frequency range or sector
size range to be checked.
specification of the number of harmonics (harmonic waves) or the angle. If you select Oscillation length, the values will be arranged in
descending order for the limit values.
8 Define the tolerance polynomial in the table.
Note: The unit m or 1/1000 inch is assigned to the numerical value

of the polynomial.
Note: If you want to define a tolerance polynomial in several Maximum Waviness characteristics:
Copy the characteristic and only make the required changes.
- or Copy the tolerance property of an already completed characteristic into a characteristic which is not yet completed (Copying
properties of characteristics [ 540]).
Specifying the RTA curve for the waviness

You can define the tolerance for the waviness via a limit curve (RTA curve)
by specifying the roundness deviation R and the construction form parameters n0 and k.
3 Go to Tolerance Curve and select the RTA Curve entry.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-101
Circle on Cone).
7 Enter the lower and upper limit value for the frequency range or sector
size range to be checked.
specification of the number of harmonics (harmonic waves) or the an-
5-102
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
gle. If you select Oscillation length, the values will be arranged in

descending order for the limit values.
8 If the desired data record is not available in the RTA parameter file:
Select the file and enter the required values.
9 Select the suitable parameter record.
By closing and opening again the definition template, the correct values for the feature are entered.
10Enter the parameter R.
11If needed, activate Double Amplitude (PeakToValley).
12Press OK to confirm.
Reference: Format of the RTA parameter file

The RTA parameter file RTAParameter.txt is used for the transfer of the
construction form parameters n0 and k to the definition template
of the Maximum Waviness characteristic for the specification of the
tolerance via a limit curve.
The RTA parameter file is stored in the <user directory>\data\config directory and can be edited. It contains a table formatted with tabulators.
The first line shows the column headers for the name of the data record
and the n0 and k parameters for the outside circle, the inside circle and
the plane.
The data records are shown in the following lines. The decimal separator
is the point. It is not necessary to enter values for all columns in a line.
NOTICE
If parameters are missing for certain features, these cannot be selected
as a geometrical feature.
The following shows an example of such a text file:
name n0_outerCircle k_outerCircle n0_innerCircle k_innerCircle
n0_plane k_plane
Deep_groove_ball_bearing
0.0 1.0 1.0 0.0
Angular_ball_bearing
0.0 1.0 1.0 0.0
Four-point_ball_bearing 0.0 1.0 1.0 0.0
Taper_roller_bearing
1.2 1.0 1.0 1.0
Reference: Format of the ASCII file with the

tolerance curve
The ASCII file with the tolerance curve serves for the takeover of tolerance
values into the definition template of the Maximum Waviness characteristic.
You can name the file as desired and save it in any directory.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-103
The file contains several lines showing the upper limit values in UPR of
the tolerated range and the corresponding tolerance in m, separated by
tabs.
Example
The first line may have any column header. If the first character of the
file is not a number, the entire first line is ignored.
The first column shows the limit values [UPR] of the tolerated range
as consecutive natural numbers. Missing or double values in the first
column lead to an error.
The second column shows a tolerance in m for each value in the first
column. The decimal separator is the point.
Other units are not allowed; if a different unit is defined in the default
settings, the values will be converted.
The following shows an example of such a text file:

Upper limit value [UPR] Tolerance [m]
12
2.2
13
1.0
14
0.7
15
2.2
Form plot (Fourier analysis) for waviness

For the Maximum Waviness characteristic, the Fourier analysis can be
created and called as a form plot.
5-104
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Form plot for tolerance steps
Structure of the form

plot
Form plot with tolerance polynomial
The structure of the form plot is similar to the structure of the Fourier
analysis of the roundness. It consists of the graphic with the amplitudes
per frequency and the appropriate value tables.
The unit of the X axis and the left column in the value table depends on
the setting in the characteristic: scale in harmonic waves (without unit) or
in oscillation length (angular unit of the measurement plan).
Special aspects with

maximum waviness
Additionally, the following applies to the maximum waviness form plot:
The tolerance steps or the tolerance polynomial is drawn in the graphic (in blue by default). Only those frequencies that lie within the frequency range will be shown. The X axis is also scaled to this width.
Frequencies that are outside of the tolerance are shown in red by
default; frequencies that are inside of the tolerance are shown in
green.
Selection of table values
The frequency with the largest deviation is set in boldface in the value
table. The values in the table are also highlighted in color.
Usually, there is not enough space in the table of the frequencies with
amplitudes to show all values. Therefore, only a selection of the largest
amplitudes will be output.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-105
All frequencies whose amplitudes are outside of the tolerance have

priority, especially frequencies with the largest deviations.
If then there is still enough space in the table, all frequencies which
are inside of the tolerance are listed weighted according to the deviation values.
True Position with Best Fit of Bore

Pattern characteristic
Basics about the True Position with Best Fit of
Bore Pattern characteristic
Menu: Form and Location Position
The True Position characteristic offers options for best fit of bore pattern.
Initial values
The nominal points and the appropriate actual points can lie in one or
more parallel planes. For the best fit, the nominal points are moved by
means of plane coordinate transformation so that the selected best-fit
condition is fulfilled.
Results
As the result of this operation, CALYPSO computes the rotation and offset
of the bore pattern. Additionally, the best fit data is used to generate
another coordinate system. You can access the origin of this coordinate
system using formulas.
Best-fit methods
The following best-fit methods are available for the best fit of bore pattern:
5-106
Gauss Best Fit (LSQ feature). With this method, outliers have only a
minimal influence. Limitations due to reference features are not taken
into consideration. Optimum setting parameters can be derived from
this for the machine tools.
Minimum Best Fit (Chebyshov - Minimum Feature). Outliers have a

significant effect on the result when this method is used. Limitations
due to reference features are not taken into consideration. Optimum
setting parameters can be derived from this for the machine tools.
Tolerance Best Fit. Iterative attempts are made to bring all values into
tolerance. Possible movement and rotation ranges are limited due to
the reference features. This corresponds to a good/bad evaluation of
a mechanical gauge with an additional evaluation of the single deviations.
Best fit according to least absolute value feature (L1 feature). Outliers
have less effect with this method than is the case with the Gauss (LSQ
feature) method. Limitations due to reference features are not taken
into consideration. Optimum setting parameters can be derived from
this for the machine tools.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Evaluation method
The evaluation method for the features used to calculate the best fit of
bore pattern can be changed in the multiple selection dialog box for features.
The Outer Tangential Element evaluation method is set by default.
Some results may not be reproducible, because this method is very susceptible to outliers. Better reproducibility can be achieved using the LSQ
feature evaluation method.
Filter and outlier elimination
In addition to the evaluation method, you can select filtering and outlier
elimination for the selected features.
Shape Of Zone
For the shape of zone, you can select between rectangular and circular
tolerance zone.
Parameterizing the number of features

You can parameterize the number of features of a best fit of bore pattern
indirectly. To do so, select a pattern with variable number of features as
the feature. CALYPSO prompts whether you want to cancel the pattern.
If you cancel the pattern, CALYPSO generates an own nominal value

line for each feature of the pattern. In this case, the number of features is not variable.
If you do not cancel the pattern, only one line is generated, e.g. Circle1(1-x). The number of features depends on the variable.
Coordinate system from best fit of bore

pattern
The True Position characteristic offers options for best fit of bore pattern. The nominal points are moved by means of plane coordinate transformation so that the selected best-fit condition is fulfilled.
When you use best fit of bore pattern, CALYPSO automatically computes
a coordinate system using the rotation and offset of the bore pattern.
The coordinate system is named after the best fit of bore pattern (default:
Best Fit of Bore Pattern x, with x being a serial number in the measurement plan). You can access the origin of the coordinate system using
formulas.
Coordinate system calculation method

The coordinate system is created as soon as the Best Fit of Bore Pattern
option is selected in the True Position characteristic. This coordinate
system is initially identical to the current base alignment.
Once you have selected the references of the True Position, a nominal
coordinate system is calculated using the nominal values of the geometries.
After measurement and computation of the best fit of bore pattern, the
result of the best fit of bore pattern (rotation angle, Y translation and Z
translation) is added to this coordinate system.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-107
If there are no references for the True Position, the result of the best fit
of bore pattern (rotation angle, Y translation and Z translation) is added
to the nominal datum reference frame of the best fit of bore pattern.

When a best fit of bore pattern is selected in the CAD window, the associated coordinate system and the references of the True Position used
to calculate the bore pattern are also displayed.
Access to the origin of the coordinate system

It can be useful to have access to the coordinate system origin for further
operations in the measurement plan, e.g. constructions.
You can use the following formulas to obtain the coordinate system origin:
getActual("bore pattern name").characteristic
getNominal("bore pattern name").characteristic
characteristic is a dummy for the following:
Characteristic
returns:
Origin in x of the coordinate system (calculated from the bore pattern)
Origin in y of the coordinate system (calculated from the bore pattern)
Origin in z of the coordinate system (calculated from the bore pattern)

NOTICE
These functions can also be used for any other coordinate system.
You can thus access the x, y and z origin of the best fit of bore pattern in
the definition template of any feature by entering a formula. This also
allows you to use constructions (e.g. recall) on the bore pattern.
Restricted selection of coordinate systems

Coordinate systems whose calculation depends on the currently open
feature are not offered in the selection menus for coordinate systems.
Otherwise, a circular statement would result.
Using best fit of bore pattern

The True Position characteristic offers options for best fit of bore pattern. As the result of this operation, CALYPSO computes the rotation and
offset of the bore pattern.
1 Select Form and Location Position.
3 Click the Best fit of bore pattern icon.
5-108
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
This generates the coordinate system with the name of the Best Fit of
Bore Pattern it is initially identical to the base alignment.
4 Use the buttons labeled Primary Datum, Secondary Datum and
Tertiary Datum to specify the reference features so that the bore
pattern can be computed later.
This defines the coordinate system with the name of the best fit of
bore pattern.
If you do not enter a reference, the base alignment is used by default.
5 Click Bore Pattern to call the settings for evaluating the bore pattern.
6 Click the features you need for best fit of bore pattern (Select Features).
- and/or Use the Select Bore Pattern selection list to include bore patterns
(i.e. feature groups) defined beforehand.
7 Select the Shape Of Zone and enter the tolerances.
8 In the case of a parameterized pattern, define here whether you want
to cancel the pattern or whether you want to include it together with
the parameter in the best fit of bore pattern.
In the first case, you will receive several lines with the individual pattern
features, in the other case, you will receive one line with one parameterized pattern.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-109
Note: In the multiple selection window for features, you can change
the evaluation method for the features (default: Outer Tangential
Element) and set filtering and outlier elimination.
Note: All the features you select are listed in the Features List. The
coordinates as shown here are referenced to the references selected
beforehand. The values are editable and can be shown in Cartesian or
polar form.
Note: You can parameterize the tolerances. You can enter formulas
and nominal values via the context menu.
9 Select a best-fit method from the Best Fit Method group:
Select the best-fit method of your choice from the selection list.
Select Translation and/or Rotation for the means of fitting.
10Click Calculate now to start the calculation.
When computation is completed, the result is displayed in the Best
fit result group.
Note: The coordinate system with the name of the best fit of bore
pattern [ 5107] is automatically corrected by the result of fit.
To see a graphic representation of the best fit bore pattern, tick the
Graphic check box (see Outputting form and location plots for
characteristics [ 872]).
11Click OK.
Characteristics in practice (instructions)

Overview of the characteristics in practice
The following instructions are intended to show you how to work with
the measurement features, characteristics and prerequisites of CALYPSO
in practice.
In the process, you use the possibilities of the desktop and CAD window
of CALYPSO.
The following section contains these instructions:
Checking the wall thickness and wall deviation [ 5110]
Checking the wall thickness and wall deviation

With the aid of the selection menu items in the CAD model, you can
define two space points with a click of the mouse and use these points
to check the wall thickness or the material deviation at this point.
How to define two space points for the distance check

1 Turn the CAD model, so that the position with the wall thickness to
be checked can be seen in the foreground.
5-110
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 Select the Distance check menu item from the selection list for selection and definition shown in the CAD toolbar.
3 Click the position on the model at which you wish to check the wall
thickness.
The two space points that are opposite to each other and the connection between them are shown at the selected position.
Two new features of the Space Point type appear in the list of features.
With the aid of these two points, you can check the wall thickness or the
material deviation at the place in question.
How to check the wall thickness

You have created two opposite space points by means of the Distance
check function.
1 Select Features Additional Geometries Symmetry
Point
A symmetry point is added to the list of features.
2 Select the Recall entry under Nominal Definition in the definition
template of the symmetry point.
3 Select the available space points for the definition of the symmetry
point.
4 Add the Distance Symmetry Point characteristic to the list of characteristics and assign it to the symmetry point that was just created.
The wall thickness will be checked at the desired position during the
measurement plan run.
How to check the wall deviation

You have created two opposite space points by means of the Distance
check function.
1 Add two Space Point Distance characteristics to the list of characteristics and assign them the space points just created.
During the measurement plan run, it will be checked whether there is
too much or too little material at the desired position.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-111
Utilities
Utilities
Overview of the utilities
In the Utilities group in the toolbox and under Resources Utilities in the menu, you can find some special elements that are not characteristics. However, they are required for the measurement plan run:
Utilities
Description
Alignment
Utilities for alignments [ 5113]
3D Best Fit Alignment
RPS Alignment
P6 Alignment
Geometry Best Fit
Geometry Best Fit utility [ 5113]
Alignment from Sever- In the operating instructions for the CNC Curve Measuring
al Curves
Software option under Coordinate system from best fit alignment of several curves
Probing system qualifi- Probing System Qualification utility [ 5114]
cation
Qualification of stylus
system holders
Qualification of stylus system holders utility [ 5115]
Gauge Correction
Qualification
Greater accuracy by gage correction qualification [ 492]
Erosion Module (option)
Erosion Module utility [ 5115]
Text element
Text Element utility [ 5118]
5-112
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Utilities
Utilities
Description
Graphics Element
Graphics Element utility [ 5120]
Save Alignment
Saving an alignment [ 5121]
Load Alignment
Loading an alignment [ 5121]
Delete Alignment
Deleting an alignment [ 5121]
Base Alignment Match Base Alignment Match utility [ 5122]
Set Base Alignment to Setting a base alignment to zero [ 349]

zero
CAD Presentation
CAD Presentation utility [ 5127]
Utilities for alignments

Use Resources Utilities Alignment to add the Alignment
utility to the measurement plan.
This alignment is determined according to the default method using the
features that you predefine in the definition template.
To determine an alignment according to an alternative alignment method
(3D best fit, RPS, P6), select the method of your choice under Resources Utilities.
You also obtain the same definition templates, extended by some functions, if you create a new base/start alignment under Prerequisites (for
the start alignment, use the default method only).
For details on the determination of alignments, see Creating a new
base/start alignment [ 324] and Alternative alignment methods [ 349].
Geometry Best Fit utility

Use Resources Utilities Geometry Best Fit or the toolbox to
add the Geometry Best Fit utility to the measurement plan.
The Geometry Best Fit utility makes it possible to define a new coordinate system using the common best fit of several measured features in
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-113
Utilities
their corresponding nominal geometries. Best fit according to Gauss (LSQ

feature) is used.
The best fit movement produces the translation vector and the rotation
about the X/Y/Z axes which are applied to the set coordinate system. The
result is a new coordinate system.
Features
Degrees of freedom
You can use the following features for the geometry best fit:
Planes
2D lines
Points
Cylinders
Circles
Tori
You can restrict the degrees of freedom of the best fit. Click the Evaluation Constraints button and activate the check box for the movements which are to be blocked during the best fit.
Probing System Qualification utility

Use Resources Utilities Probing system qualification to
add the Probing system qualification utility to the measurement
plan:
Here you can define the stylus system qualification settings.

CALYPSO automatically performs qualification during the CNC run of the
measurement plan. If you use a stylus system changer, the correct stylus
system is automatically used. Otherwise, you will be prompted to insert
the stylus system.
5-114
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Utilities
Qualification of stylus system holders

utility
Use Resources Utilities Qualification of stylus system
holders to add the Qualification of stylus system holders utility
to the measurement plan:
Here you can define the stylus system holder qualification settings.
CALYPSO automatically performs qualification during the CNC run of the
measurement plan. If you use a stylus system changer, the correct stylus
system is automatically used. Otherwise, you will be prompted to insert
the stylus system.
Erosion Module utility

Basics about the Erosion Module utility
NOTICE
The erosion module is available in the Preset option which you can
purchase in addition and have enabled.
You can add the Erosion Module utility to the measurement plan by
selecting Resources Utilities Erosion Module.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-115
Utilities
The erosion module provides a file with translation and rotation values
for two related alignments which is suitable for erosion machines.
It will be necessary to enter the type of erosion machine that is being used
along with the name and directory of the file that will be created.
NOTICE
The directory path must be available. It is not created automatically.
These alignments refer to the clamping device on the one hand and to
the erosion electrode on the other. Here, the alignment of the workpiece
or tool (erosion electrode) (Xe, Ye, Ze) will be determined on the basis of
the alignment of the clamping device (X, Y, Z).
5-116
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Utilities
NOTICE
Here you cannot select alignments with index that are based on references with pattern.
NOTICE
If you specify the alignments in an order that is the wrong way around,
you receive other compensation values.
When measuring the feature, the alignments will be formed and the parameter file of the erosion module will be saved.
Procedure
First, your inputs and the manufacturer-specific entries in the Conf.dat

configuration file are used to create an Erodier.Edm parameter file as an
ASCII file.
NOTICE
By editing the Conf.dat configuration file [ 5117], you can control
the output of the file for the erosion machine.
Result
Once the erosion module has been executed, an ASCII file will be available
that can be used with the erosion machine.
Conf.dat configuration file for the erosion

module
The entries in the Erosion machine selection list and the settings for
the coordinate transformation are controlled by the manufacturer-specific settings in the Conf.dat file, which is stored in the same directory as
the Epost.exe file.
The Conf.dat file is an ASCII file that you can edit with an ASCII editor.
Description of Conf.dat
file
For each erosion machine type, two lines in the following form are saved
in the file:
;MachName<serial_number> = <machine_name>
<machine-specific_switch>
The details for the coordinate transformation are in the machine-specific
switches, an 8-digit binary number.
Example:
;MachName01 = Erode de luxe
11110000
The 8 digits of the switch (counted from the left) have the following
functions:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-117
Utilities
Digit
Function
1 changes sign of X
1 changes sign of Y
1 changes sign of Z
1 changes sign of C
1 changes the datum reference frames
Manufacturer-dependent
Not used
Code electrode/tool; e.g.:

0 = ELEKEle,X-38.611,Y34.783,Z50.202,C-7.023
1 = WKSEle,X-38.611,Y34.783,Z50.202,C-7.023
A 1 in the 5th digit thus has the same effect as swapping the alignments
of the clamping device and the erosion electrode.
Text Element utility

Use Resources Utilities Text element to add the Text element utility to the measurement plan.
Double click to open a window which will allow you to enter a text.
5-118
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Utilities
Text output
In the case of a CNC run of the measurement plan, the text will be output
in the printouts and protocols (the default printout, the custom printout
and the compact printout).
Only the text itself is output in the default printout and compact printout.
The custom printout also includes the name of the feature (e.g. Textelement7).
The text will only be written in the printouts and during CNC run and not
when opening or closing the definition template (as is usual in the case
of characteristics).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-119
Utilities
Graphics Element utility

Use Resources Utilities Graphics Element to add the
Graphics Element utility to the measurement plan.
Double click to open the definition template for the graphics element.
Defining the graphics element
In addition to the form and locations plots in the characteristics, the

graphics element offers another possibility to output results in graphic
form.
You must define the form (layout) and the contents of the graphic to be
output. Various default layouts are available.
Use the icons to define whether the graphic is to be displayed and output
to the printer during the CNC run.
Saving an alignment
CALYPSO can save, load and delete alignments again during a CNC run.
In the definition template for the Save Alignment utility, enter the file
name and select the alignment to be saved. If the alignment has a pattern,
you must determine the desired index.
5-120
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Utilities
When the utility is executed in the CNC run, the actual alignment (calculated from the actual values) is saved in the <user directory>\workarea
\basesystems directory. A subdirectory is created with the name that was
entered in the definition template. Use backslashes \ to create further
subdirectories.
If there is no actual alignment of the set alignment, this will be calculated
during the CNC run and, if necessary, measured.
If the alignment cannot be measured and calculated, the symbol for the
utility will turn red in the measurement plan.
Loading an alignment
In the definition template for the Load Alignment utility, enter the file
name for the alignment to be loaded. If the alignment has a pattern, you
must determine the desired index.
When the Load Alignment utility is executed in the CNC run (e.g. because
a feature refers to this alignment), the alignment is loaded from the <user
directory>\workarea\basesystems directory.
If the file name contains backslashes \, the program will branch to the
appropriate subdirectories.
If a Load Alignment utility is contained in the measurement plan, it will
be treated as a normal alignment. Its name (not identical to the file name)
appears in the geometry datum reference frame lists and the lists for
linked alignments, for example.
No distinction is made between nominal values and actual values when
loading.
In the case of a DMIS run, the loaded alignment is used as the current
alignment.
Special aspects
The name of the alignment to be loaded need not necessarily be the file
name.
An error message will be issued if an alignment cannot be loaded (because the file is not present). In addition, a message stating this will appear
in the status window, and the CNC run will be interrupted if necessary.
The base alignment is returned for critical calls such as the nominal alignment for the nominal geometry.
Deleting an alignment
In the definition template for the Delete Alignment utility, enter the
file name for the alignment to be deleted.
All alignments are listed in the <user directory>\workarea\basesystems
directory.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-121
Utilities
If the file name contains backslashes \, the program will branch to the
appropriate subdirectory.
The file you specified in the definition template is deleted during the CNC
run.
If the file is not present, the run will continue without a message. The
symbol for the utility in the measurement plan will turn red. If the file is
write-protected, an error message will appear. The CNC run is resumed.
Base Alignment Match utility

Basics about the Base Alignment Match utility
Purpose
Mobile measuring systems, e.g. a Leica laser tracker, allow you to measure
very large parts. However, the position of the measuring system must be
changed during the CNC run. To ensure that the data recorded beforehand and afterwards match, the coordinate systems must be converted.
The Base Alignment Match utility makes it possible to obtain again a valid
coordinate system after changing the position of the measuring system.
Use Resources Utilities Base Alignment Match to add it to
Principle
5-122
For the base alignment match, CALYPSO measures a number of features

once in the old position and once in the new position.
At the old position (prior to changing the position), it is possible for

CALYPSO measure the selected features automatically during the
CNC run.
After changing the position, CALYPSO does not recognize the locations of the features. Therefore, you must probe these features manually. This corresponds to the manual probing of the base alignment
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Utilities
at the beginning of the CNC run with unknown position of the workpiece in the CMM measuring range.
NOTICE
For the base alignment match, it is irrelevant whether the position of the
measuring system or workpiece has been changed, the procedure is the
same for both applications.
CALYPSO uses the coordinates of the feature datum targets to carry out
an internal 3D best fit. The resulting coordinate system becomes the new
internal base alignment in the CNC run.
The new base alignment is saved under the name of the base alignment
match in the <user directory>\workarea\basesystems directory. During
the automatic run, the file name is assigned the (CNC) extension.
Bundle Alignment
If your mobile measuring system has the corresponding equipment, you

can also use the more accurate Bundle Alignment trigonometric method.
CALYPSO is familiar with this calculation method.
Changing the position

several times
It is possible to change the position of the mobile measuring system several times and use an additional base alignment match for this. This will
enable you to measure also larger workpieces with the corresponding
precision.
Run according to list of

characteristics
The CNC run differs depending on whether the measurement according

to list of features or list of characteristics method is used. When using run
according to list of characteristics, the base alignment match is performed
as soon as the feature is to be measured. No preparations are required
for the run according to list of characteristics.
Run according to list of

features
The run according to list of features is performed differently. To enable

CALYPSO to carry out the run according to list of features, each feature
must know to which base alignment it is assigned.
Therefore, you must add the Base Alignment Match utility to the measurement plan and go to the Measurement Plan Editor Features to
define for each feature the position from which it is to be measured.
Warning limit
You can enter and define a warning limit for the standard deviation so
that CALYPSO stops as soon as the limit is exceeded during the measurement. It is possible to repeat the measurement or to cancel the run.
Printout
The results of the manually measured features in the new base alignment
are saved in the default printout. The base alignment match is output in
the printout in much the same way as a 3D best fit.
Preparing a base alignment match

Purpose
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-123
Utilities
2 In the list of characteristics, go to the position at which the measuring

system must be changed.
3 Select Resources Utilities Base Alignment Match.
Here, you add the Base Alignment Match utility to the measurement plan.
4 Open the definition template for the base alignment match.
Base Alignment Match
Base Alignment Match1
Comment
Bundle Alignment
Select Features
Feature
Check Standard Deviation
Executing During Run As:
Execute
Automatic Measurement
Manual Run
Now
OK
Reset
5 Click Select Features and add the features for the base alignment
match.
Alternatively, It is also possible to select the features in the CAD view,
extract them or probe them on the machine while the definition tem-
5-124
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Utilities
plate is open. This can be compared to the alternative alignment

methods (3D best fit, RPS, P6).
Note: The following features are suitable for the base alignment
match: point, circle, circle on cone, sphere, ellipse, 3D point, rectangle,
slot, torus, symmetry point, radius point, angle point and sphere point.
Note: When selecting the features for the base alignment match, observe that CALYPSO must measure all features required for the selected features. This also includes all features of a coordinate system, constructions, etc.
Note: To avoid that many of the features must be measured again, it
is recommended to select only features in the base alignment for the
base alignment match.
6 Activate Check Standard Deviation and enter the warning limit
upon exceeding of which CALYPSO should stop and repetition of the
measurement should be possible.
7 Activate Automatic Run if CALYPSO is required to probe again the
comparison features in the CNC run after changing their position and
probing them manually.
Thus, the base alignment match becomes more accurate.
8 If needed, add additional base alignment matches to the measurement
plan.
9 To carry out the measuring run according to list of features: In the
Measurement Plan Editor Features, select the Travel Sequence after base alignment match item and assign either the
base alignment or a base alignment match to each feature.
During the run according to list of features, CALYPSO sorts all features.
The sequence of the measurements depends on the sequence of the
base alignment matches in the list of characteristics.
10Save the measurement plan.
Example of a run according to list of features

The measurement plan contains four features (Circle1 to Circle4) and
three base alignment matches (Base Alignment Match1, Base Alignment
Match2 and Base Alignment Match3 in this sequence).
The features are assigned to the base alignment matches:
Feature
Circle1
Circle2
Base Alignment
Circle3
Circle4
The measurement sequence is as follows: Circle2, Circle3, Circle1, Circle4.

61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-125
Utilities
Performing base alignment match

Purpose
1 Start the measurement plan with the base alignment match.
After execution of the characteristics that can be measured at the first
position, CALYPSO measures the features that you defined in the Base
Alignment Match utility in the CNC run.
A remark window is displayed showing the name of the alignment
feature and the text Features for aligning the base alignment have to
be measured manually.
CALYPSO switches to manual control of the CMM.
2 Change the position of the mobile measuring system and click OK.
CALYPSO instructs you which features must now be measured manually at the new position.
3 When prompted, measure all features that are required for the calculation of the alignment.
CALYPSO calculates a new base alignment and uses it internally for
the rest of the run for the following characteristics.
If the standard deviation check is activated, an information window
opens once the warning limit has been exceeded in which you can
define the rest of the procedure: Cancel or repeat the last measurement.
If the alignment was not successful, the CNC run will be interrupted
and the stop light will turn red. The message CNC canceled: Base
Alignment cannot be computed appears on the status monitor.
The reason for the failed alignment may be, for example, that a feature
could not be calculated due to insufficient number of points or incorrect probing strategy.
Performing the base alignment match in the dialog

mode
By clicking Execute Manual Run Now in the definition template of
the base alignment match, CALYPSO checks whether all features have
been measured in the old base alignment. If not, the missing features
must be measured again in the old base alignment. The remark Features
for aligning the base alignment have to be measured manually is then
displayed. You must now change the position of the mobile measuring
system and measure all features manually at the new position for the
alignment.
5-126
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Utilities
CAD Presentation utility

Use CAD CAD Presentation to add a CAD-Presentation utility
to the list of characteristics.
Alternatively, you can also click the icon in the Results Presentation
window to add a CAD-Presentation utility in which the current CAD
view is already preset.
Double click to open the definition template for the CAD presentation.
You can define the output method (screen, printer).
You can select the format of the output (portrait or landscape) by

means of a format file.
You can select the CAD view to be represented.
By way of confirmation, you can immediately output the presentation

by clicking Plot.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5-127
Utilities
The selected CAD view is output on the selected media (screen, printer)
during the CNC run.
5-128
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Chapter
.................................................................................................................

Overview: Editing the measurement plan ................................................. 62
Editing the entire measurement plan ........................................................ 63
Editing features of the measurement plan .............................................. 629
Formula input and run control ............................................................... 637
Using macros in the measurement plan .................................................. 650
Toolboxes .............................................................................................. 657
Editing the travel paths .......................................................................... 664
Multimedia user information .................................................................. 675
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-1
Overview: Editing the measurement plan
Overview: Editing the measurement plan

You have the following options of editing the created measurement plan:
6-2
You can edit the entire measurement plan [ 63].
You can edit the features of the measurement plan [ 629].
You can enter formulas and define the run control [ 637].
You can use macros [ 650] in the measurement plan.
You can enhance the structure and processing of the measurement

plan by using the tool boxes [ 657].
You can edit the travel paths of the CMM [ 664].
You can add multimedia user information [ 675] to the measurement plan.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Editing the entire measurement plan

Overview: Editing the entire
measurement plan
With CALYPSO you have the following options of editing the entire
measurement plan:
You can save, copy and rename measurement plans [ 63].
You can activate the saving of measurement plan versions [ 64].
You can edit the compatibility of the measurement plan with certain program versions of CALYPSO [ 65].
The stylus system names and stylus names used [ 67] in the
measurement plan can be replaced.
You can use the measurement plan editors [ 68] to modify

settings that are effective throughout the measurement plan in one
or more measurement plan features.
You can define the names which CALYPSO then assigns to features,
characteristics, certain utilities and form and location

plots [ 618].
You can also mirror the entire measurement plan on a selected axis [ 624] (not with Calypso Light).
You can also combine several individual measurement

plans [ 627] to obtain combined evaluations.
Managing measurement plans

With CALYPSO you have the following options of editing an own entire
unlicensed measurement plan:
Copying a measurement plan
Renaming a measurement plan
NOTICE
You can use the Windows Explorer to save or to delete measurement
plans.
Measurement plan in the
file system
CALYPSO creates a separate folder with the name of the measurement

plan for each measurement plan in the <user directory>\workarea\inspections directory. All subfolders and files in this folder belong to the
measurement plan.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-3

To save the CAD model together with the measurement plan, you must
define this under File in the CAD settings. Otherwise, the CAD model
is saved separately and can be loaded into other measurement plans.
1 Click the Save Current Measurement Plan icon if you want to
overwrite the old measurement plan.
- or If you want to keep the old measurement plan, select File Save
As and save the measurement plan under a new name.
Copying a measurement plan

1 Select File Move....
2 Select the desired directory in the Search Folder window.
The measurement plan is copied with the previous name into the desired directory.
NOTICE
It is also possible to copy measurement plan directories and files using
the Windows Explorer.
Renaming a measurement plan

1 Save the measurement plan under a new name (File Save As...).
2 Delete the measurement plan with the old name.
Saving measurement plan versions

If the AutoSave function is activated, your measurement plans are
saved automatically at certain intervals. In this case, you can return to one
of the saved versions (depending on the settings).
Playing a video
To play a video about the AutoSave function, click 001_e_Autosave_/

001_Autosave_e.htm.
1 Select Extras Settings Environment Save.
6-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
System Set Up
File
Menus
Environment For User Master

Autom. backup copies of the respective active measurement plan
Start
Autom. Backup Copy
Paths
Con!rm activation at CALYPSO start
Language
Dialog before Saving
Dual arm
Optics
Dialog For Measurement Plan Change
Font
Switch off AutoSave for this measurement plan
Dynalog
Backup Copies Directory
Printer
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Zeiss\CALYPS
Dialogs
Export DMIS
Interval Time in Minutes
Default Name
Strategies
No. of Versions
Save
PCM
Current Status
OFF
Switch ON quick save
OK
Cancel
Apply
2 Define the parameters for automatic saving of the measurement plan

versions:
Backup interval
Number of available versions
Backup copies directory
Type of activation of the function
If the function is activated, backup copies of the measurement plan are
saved at regular intervals in the predefined directory.
Editing compatibility settings

Every new version of CALYPSO contains modifications and improvements
of the algorithms and evaluation methods. However, any new measurement plans created in CALYPSO contain the methods and modes of the
current version.
It may be useful for you to run older measurement plans with a more
recent behavior or new measurement plans with an older behavior.
You can define these settings for each individual measurement plan or
(with the appropriate rights) also for several measurement plans.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-5
1 To edit an individual measurement plan, select Resources Compatibility Settings for this Measurement Plan and define
the settings in the Compatibility settings for this Measurement Plan window.
2 To edit several measurement plans, select Resources Compatibility Settings for several measurement plans and define
the settings in the Compatibility settings for this Measurement Plans window.
3 Select the corresponding measurement plans.
4 The Performance as if created with Rev. list item allows you to
set the entire behavior of the measurement plan or the measurement
plans to a certain version of CALYPSO.
Filter limit points per wave
Outlier Elimination
Calculate Alignment as Base Alignment
Scanning speed circle referring to surface
Evaluate Features from point recalls
Point Recall via Box with Actual Geometry
Point recall of individual points with path()
Circle path on plane is calculated as for circle
Take into account the offset angle for RT axes measurement with start system
Old positioning for optical measurement fields
DMIS Printout: Unique Feature Names
DMIS Printout: Length of feature name
DMIS Printout: Definition of TOL/WIDTH
DMIS Printout: Source of nominal data for measured features
Take the retract distance for multiple safety data into consideration
Adapt font when printing the custom printout
Staggered end message to FACS
RT navigation: Move to a higher clear position when executing Retract to top.
Optimized travel paths with rotate/swivel position with preset path
Performance as if created with Rev.
Optimized travel performance before stylus system change
Always use Arc Motion mode
5 Define in addition certain additional functions and behaviors.

The Info button provides you with a short explanation of the corresponding setting.
6-6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Exchanging styli in a measurement plan

The stylus systems and styli to be used are saved with their names in the
measurement plan. When using other stylus system names and stylus
names for the current CMM, it is possible to exchange the names in the
measurement plan. To do so, you do not need to edit each individual
feature.
Prerequisite: The stylus system names to be assigned are known in CALYPSO.
1 Select Resources Stylus system Exchange the stylus
system names / stylus in the measurement plan.
The Exchange the stylus system names / stylus in the
measurement plan window opens.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-7
2 Select the stylus names to be exchanged in the list and assign the desired new name in the to selection field.
3 Click Execute Now! to apply the exchange.
Editing a measurement plan

Measurement plan editors
CALYPSO supports two measurement plan editors:
Purpose of the editors
the measurement plan editor for features (called via Resources Features Settings Editor or the icon in the measurement
plan area on the Measurement Plan tab)
the measurement plan editor for characteristics (called via Resources Characteristics Settings Editor)
The measurement plan editors provide you with a quick and easy way of
checking and changing measurement plan settings and values for the
entire measurement plan or for selected features.
NOTICE
Once you have selected features in the corresponding list of measurement plan features, these are also highlighted after opening the measurement plan editor.
Structure of the editors
The structure of both editors is identical. This illustration shows an example of the measurement plan editor for features.
** = from higher setting (Measurement Plan/Group)
Clearance Group
!! = Not Available On System

Travel
List of settings
Accept for:
selected features
Measurement Plan
Probing
Stylus system
Units
Selection list
of defaults
Set To

MAN CNC Mode
Type
Cylinder
Value
CP +Z
Setup Mode
Plane
CP -Y
Printer
Point
CP +Z
Plane
CP +Z
CMM Parameters
Evaluation...
Outlier Elimination
Warning Limits
Filter
Optical Settings
CircTopFroLe
CircTopFroRi
CylFroCe
Pattern
Export Points
Best fit accuracy (free form surface)
Features
CylFroRiDow
Cylinder
CP -Y
CylRiCe
Cylinder
CP +X
Feature types
CircRi
Circle
CP +X
CircRiTop
Circle
CP +X
CylFroRe
Currently valid
settings
2-D LineBack
2D Line
CP +X
PlaFroTop
Plane
CP +Z
ConeTopCe
Cone
CP +Z
Cone Addition1
Circle
OK
Cancel
Help
NOTICE
With settings that cannot be referenced to the feature, the list of features
is empty.
6-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Procedure
To make the settings:

1 Select the desired setting.
2 Determine the area of application (entire measurement plan or selected features).
3 Set the desired value.
Working with the context menu
The menu items of the context menu allow you to copy, check individual
columns or the entire measurement plan editor, highlight all or set all to
default.
You can open and close the view of the tree structure completely or partially.
Working with the table

menu
The menu items of the table menu allow you to modify the sorting of the
measurement plan features, browse the table columns and add additional
columns with nominal data to the list of measurement plan features. Depending on the setting, the additional columns are displayed only when
selecting nominal data or always.
Tabular editor
CALYPSO opens a tabular editor for setting the evaluation, filter and
outliers. Here, you can check and change the individual attributes without having to open each individual definition template (Working with
the tabular editor [ 611]).
Editing nominal data
The Geometry (Nominal Data) or Characteristics (Nominal

Data) menu items allows you to display the nominal data of the measurement plan features and to edit them for individual or several measurement plan features.
Further information
Additional information about the dialog boxes of the two measurement

plan editors can be found under Measurement plan editor features and
Measurement plan editor characteristics in the CALYPSO dialog reference
in the Online Help.
Working with the table menu

You can use the menu items of the table menu to edit the table of a
measurement plan editor.
Call the table menu by clicking with the left mouse button in the table
header.
Original order
Alphabetic order
Search...
Customize...
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-9
Menu item
Function
Original order
Sorts the measurement plan features in the table according to the

sequence in the measurement
plan.
Alphabetic order
Alphabetically sorts the measurement plan features in the table
Search
Opens the Search window that

can be used to search for texts in
the columns of the table.
Customize
Opens the Customize view dialog box. In this window, you can
define the displayed columns with
nominal data for the editor.
Customize view
You extend the table of a measurement plan editor by additional columns. These columns are only used for displaying the value and not for
editing.
Use Customize in the table menu to open the Customize view dialog
box.
Customize view
Edit
Displayed columns
Comment
Inside/Outside
Alignment
X
Y
Z
NX
NY
NZ
W1
W2
Inclination Angle
Display always
OK
Cancel
Here you select the additional columns to be displayed in the table. The
order of the additional columns is preset.
6-10
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
If the window of the measurement plan editor becomes too small to display all additional columns, the preset columns Name, Type and Value will be fixed and a scrollbar displayed.
Working with the tabular editor

CALYPSO opens a tabular editor for setting the evaluation, filter and
outliers. This illustration shows an example of the measurement plan
editor for features.
Selected line
Edit modes
List of settings
Edit line for multiple

selection
Table with all features and the

corresponding attributes
There are two edit modes available for the table. To switch between the
two modes, use F2 or select/deselect the Edit line entry in the context
menu.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-11
Individual mode
Carry out the changes directly in the individual lines.
Multiple mode (editing several lines at the same time)

Highlight the desired lines. Carry out the changes in the upper edit
line.
Measurement plan editor features
The Measurement Plan Editor Features makes it possible to show

and hide the characteristics of a feature (if available) in the lines underneath by double-clicking a line. You can edit these lines in the same way
as the other lines.
The Change to geometry entry in the context menu is active if you
selected exactly a line with a feature. By selecting Change to geometry, the line in which the feature which is used as the characteristic is
entered is selected.
Measurement plan editor characteristics
The Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics makes it possible

to show and hide the references of a characteristic in the lines underneath
by double-clicking a line. You can edit these lines in the same way as the
other lines.
Additional information about the dialog boxes of the two windows can
be found under Measurement plan editor features and Measurement
plan editor characteristics in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online
Help.
Editing nominal data in the measurement plan

editor
You can display and modify the nominal data of all features in your measurement plan in the Measurement Plan Editor Features.
You can display and modify the nominal data of all characteristics of your
measurement plan in the Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics.
The list form provides you with a better overview than in the definition
template of the individual feature.
If you select Geometry (Nominal Data) and the desired type of
nominal data in the submenu, the measurement plan editor changes its
appearance (example: measurement plan editor for features).
6-12
61212-2011002
CALYPSO

X
Travel
Probing
Stylus system
Units
Show formulas
Set To
Type
MAN CNC Mode
Value
Cylinder
Setup Mode
Plane
Point
Printer
Plane
CMM Parameters
Plane
Cylinder
Inside/Outside
Warning Limits
Alignment
Plane
Optical Settings
Circle
Circle
CircTopFroLe
CircTopFroRi
CylFroCe
NX
CylFroRiDow
NY
CylFroRe
Plane
Circle
Cylinder
Cylinder
Cylinder
CylRiCe
NZ
Cylinder
CircRi
W1
Circle
CircRiTop
W2
Circle
2-D LineBack
Inclination Angle
PlaFroTop
Rotation Angle
2D Line
Plane
Cone
ConeTopCe
Start Angle
Cone Addition1
Angle Range
PlaRe
Diameter
PlaBack
Circle
Plane
Plane
Diameter Two
Length
Width
Cancel
Help
This is where you can modify each individual value, but you cannot make
any modifications that are effective throughout the measurement plan.
If you select Show formulas, no numerical values will be displayed but
only the formulas defined in the features. You can modify the formulas.
Details on the measurement plan settings:

Offset for laser tracker
Laser measurement with
reflectors
When using a laser tracker together with a reflector tool for the measurement, the result of the measurement always refers to the center point
of the reflector sphere. The surface of the workpiece shows a tool-dependent distance in two possible directions between this point and the
point to be measured.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-13
Reflector
diameter
Workpiece
Offset 1
Offset 2
Reference plane
CALYPSO has to use the valid offset in the correct direction for the evaluation of the measuring results.
CALYPSO handles the reflector tools as a special stylus. Therefore, CALYPSO does not perform any stylus radius correction but adds a tooldependent offset, the reflector tool offset, or the reflector radius to
the measured coordinates.
The Offset 1 and Offset 2 applying to the corresponding reflector tool
must be entered in the stylus system management when creating the
stylus.
The offset to be used for the feature type is set by default in CALYPSO.
You can display this setting in the Measurement Plan Editor Features. This is where you can set the desired offset for feature types as
well as for individual features of the measurement plan:
Value
Meaning
Standard
The default tool offset for the feature.
No Offset
No tool offset. Instead, the reflector radius is used.
6-14
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Value
Meaning
Offset 1
Tool Offset1 for the stylus radius correction.
Offset 2
Tool Offset2 used for the stylus radius correction.

Point masking
Technical background
Involved strategies
Settings
During scanning, oscillations of the CMM may occur which have an effect
on the measuring results. This applies mainly to the acceleration phase at
the beginning and, to a lesser extent, to the deceleration phase at the
end of the scanning process. The inaccurately measured points can be
removed from the evaluation.
With closed scanning paths, CALYPSO compensates the effect by

scanning the path with overlapping by the CMM and CALYPSO does
not include the points of the overlapping area in the evaluation. This
does not depend on the point masking settings, except for curves.
With open scanning paths (and curves), you compensate the effect
by masking a certain area at the beginning and the end of the scanning path. This setting is used for each individual scanning path in the
feature.
The point masking applies to the following scanning paths (not in the
case of discrete-point measurement):
Circular section with circles, cylinders, cones or spheres if the scanned

angle range is less than or equal to 360
Large and small circle paths with a torus if the scanned angle range
is less than or equal to 360
Helix with circles, cylinders, cones
VAST helix with cylinders
Grid (lines and meanders) on planes
Polyline on planes
Circle on plane on planes if the scanned angle range is less than or

equal to 360
Line of 2D lines
Unknown contour with circles, cylinders, cones, spheres, ellipses,

slots, rectangles, torus, 2D and 3D curves
Curve segments of 2D and 3D curves
You can carry out masking of the points at two points at the beginning
and at the end of the scanning path:
for all measurement plans in the default settings (Extras Settings Measurement, Point masking tab)
for individual measurement plans and for individual features in the

61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-15
You have two options for point masking which may also be combined:
Point masking after time interval: You define the travel time
in seconds at the beginning and the end of the scanning process. The
points measured during this period are masked. In the default settings, you can transfer the values 0.25 sec and 0 sec to the input fields
using the Default button. These are values which are generally used
in practice.
Point masking according to the number: You define the

number of points to be masked at the beginning and the end of the
scanning path.
NOTICE
If you combine both masking options, all points which fulfill at least one
of the two conditions are masked.
Example
The following table shows the result of the point masking when both
options are combined:
Masked
Points
after time interval
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
according to the number 01

(2, 4)
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
05
06
07
08
09
points used
Effect
The masked points are treated in the same way as points which are outside the evaluation range. They can be displayed in the form plot and in
the CAD window, but are not used for the evaluation of the feature. The
masked points are also not counted in the number of points (printout).

Decimal places for output
CALYPSO makes it possible to set the number of decimal places for the
display of the values and the output of the results.
Display of the values
The settings for the display in the complete system are defined in the
default settings (Environment) on the Language index card. You can
enter between 0 and 6 decimals.
This setting applies to the values in all features and characteristics, i.e. for
actual and nominal values as well as for tolerances.
Output of results
For the output of results you can define the number of decimal places
which is different from the setting for the display of values.
You can define this setting for the entire measurement plan or for an
individual characteristic in the Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics. This setting has an influence on the representation of the
nominal and actual values and the tolerances in the following outputs:
6-16
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Default printout
Default printout, custom printout and BasicReport
Form and location plots
Table files for characteristics (furthermore, the table file contains the
decimalplaces column showing the number of decimal places of
the corresponding characteristic)
Define the setting under Units Number of decimal places in the

Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics. You have the following options:
Possible inputs
Input
Effect
** Proposal
Accept for measurement plan: Number of decimal places in the default settings
Accept for selected features: Number of decimal places in the higher-order
element (group or measurement plan)
0 to 6
Fixed number of decimal places
-1
Automatic mode 1: the tolerance width (the difference between the upper and
lower tolerance) determines the number of decimal places:
Tolerance width > 1 results in 1 decimal place
Tolerance width < 1 results in 2 decimal places
Tolerance width < 0.1 results in 3 decimal places
-2
Automatic mode 2: the effective decimal places of the tolerances and the nominal
value determine the number of decimal places of the output:
The highest value of the effective decimal places (decimal places without filled
zeros) of the tolerances and the nominal value increased by 1 determines the
number of decimal places for the output of the characteristic.
Example 1: Nominal value = 235.0500
Upper tolerance = 0.1000
Lower tolerance = -0.1000
Number of decimal places = max (2,1,1) + 1 = 3
Example 2:
Nominal value = 21.4500
Maximum dimension = 21.455
Minimum dimension = 21.445
Number of decimal places = max (2,3,3) + 1 = 4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-17
Specifying feature names in the

measurement plan
Name default in CALYPSO
CALYPSO assigns a name to new measurement plan features, utilities as
well as to form and location plots. You can influence the assignment of
names.
Newly defined features
Automatically assigned names

CALYPSO assigns element names to newly defined features. The serial
number is attached to the name. The numbering is also continued when
changing the language.
Example: Circle1, Circle2, Circle3, Cerchio4, etc.
Derived features
CALYPSO also assigns a derived name to the characteristics saved automatically by specifying tolerances in a feature. The name consists of the
name of the characteristic, a blank and the name of the feature.
Examples: X value Circle3, Z value Perpendicular1, etc.
Individually assigned names

You can influence the assignment of new names in CALYPSO.
Changing element
names
Changing derived names
You can define your own defaults for element names in the measurement plan.
You can change the way derived names are created.
Follow the following steps to enable own defaults for the element names:
You define own default names for the desired features, characteristics, utilities and form and location plots (see File with default name:
Internal feature names [ 620] in the CALYPSO Online Help).
Save these names in a text file with special format (Format of the
file with default names (reference) [ 619] and Creating and editing the file with default names [ 619]).
Activate the default names and load the prepared file (Loading a
file with default names [ 624]).
To change derived names:

1 Select Extras Settings Environment and open the Default
Name notebook page.
2 Under Derived names you select the order of the two elements of
the derived names as well as the separator.
6-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Creating and editing the file with default

names
The file with the default names must be stored as an ASCII text file. It can
be created and edited with a common text editor or with MS Excel.
Creating a file with default names using MS Excel

1 Enter the header line along with the lines with the default names in
Excel.
2 Save the file in the Text (separated tabs) format.
3 Confirm the message in Excel with OK and Yes.
Editing the file with the default names in MS Excel

1 Load the desired file with the default names into Excel and select Text
Files as file type.
2 Accept the defaults in the subsequently displayed Text conversion
assistant dialog box with Complete.
3 Edit the file in Excel.
4 After editing, save the file again in the Text (separated tabs) format.
Reference: Format of the file with default

names
CALYPSO accepts any ASCII text file as a file with default names that has
the form indicated below.
Structure of the file
The file consists of several similarly structured lines. Each line is composed
of eight entries that are each separated by a tab.
Header line
The first line of the file, the header line, contains the following entries
(divided by a tab):
Symbol Comment Name1 Name2 Name3 Name4 Name5 IndexColumn
Name lines
The lines with the default names follow thereafter. A separate line is created for each element type that is supposed to receive an individual default name.
A default name can be composed of up to five partial names. One of the
partial names must contain the start value for the sequential index. Which
partial name that is, is defined extra for each line in the IndexColumn
(column 8) by input of the column number.
Example:
Icon Comment Name1
Name2
Name3 Name4 Name5 IndexColumn
circle Bore Table_ Bore_ 1
5
line2d Edge
Table_ Edge_ 1
5
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-19
All features of the Circle type receive the names Table_Bore_x where
x is assigned a sequential number beginning with 1.
The columns have the following meanings:
Column
Meaning
Icon
The internal name used by CALYPSO for the corresponding feature,

e.g. circle for the Circle feature.
An overview of all the internal names can be found under File with
default name: Internal feature names [ 620] in the Online Help.
Comment
Any comment that, for example, explains the allocation of a feature

to the default name.
Name1
Partial names out of which the default name is composed.
...
One of these columns must contain the start value for the index.
Name5
IndexColumn
The number of the column that contains the start value for the index.
Value range from 3 (Name1) to 7 (Name5).
When the first character in the specified column is not a number, the
start value 0 is used.
If still other characters follow in the specified column of a number,
they will be ignored.
Example: 42_Circle_2 designates 42 as start value, Circle designates 0 as start value.
File with default name: Internal feature names

Individual default names can be defined for the following features of the
measurement plan:
Feature name (English)
Internal name
2 Point Diameter
2-Point-Diameter
twoPtDistance
2D Line
Line2D
line2d
Curve
Curve
d2Curve
3D Best Fit
Best Fit 3D
bestfit3d
3D Line
Line3D
line3d
3D Curve
Curve
d3Curve
General Curve
General Curve
gCurve
General Surface
General Surface
gSurf
Adjust Basesystem
adjustBS
Width
Width
width
6-20
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Internal name
Flatness
Flatness
gdtFlat
Flatness Ref
Flatness with reference
gdtFlatRef
Profile
Profile
gdtProfile
Straightness
Straightness
gdtStraightCart
Straightness Ref
Straightness with reference
gdtStraightCartRec
Coaxiality
Coaxiality
gdtCoa
Concentricity
Concentricity
gdtCon
Line Profile
Line Profile
gdtProfileofALine
Angularity
Angularity
gdtAngle
Parallelism
Parallelism
gdtPar
Axial Runout
Run flat
gdtRunFlat
Position
Position
gdtPosPol2d
Perpendicularity
Perpendicularity
gdtPerp
Roundness
Roundness
gdtRound
Roundness Ang
Roundness with reference
gdtRoundRef
Radial Runout
Run round
gdtRunRound
GDT Symmetry
Symmetry
gdtSym
Cylindricity
Cylinder form
gdtCyl
Distance
Distance 2d
distance2d
Cartesian Distance
Distance cartesian
distanceCart
2D Polar Distance
Distance polar 2d
distancePol2d
3D Polar Distance
Distance polar 3d
distancePol3d
Dist. Symmetry point
Distance symmetry point
distance
Rotation Angle
Rotation angle
rotationAngle
Diameter
Diameter
diameter
Diameter Two
Diameter 2
diameter2id
Plane
Plane and Offset Plane
plane
Plane with Offset
Plane with offset
planeOffset
Probing system qualification
Probe Calibration
probeCalib
Feature Angle
Element angle
elementAngle
Ellipse
Ellipse
ellipse
Elliptical Cylinder
Ellipse
ellipticalCylinder
Erosion Module
Eroding Module
erodingModule
Surface Area
Surface Area
area
Form
Form
form
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-21
Internal name
Gear
GEAR PRO
GEAR PRO
Geometry Best Fit
Geometry Best Fit
bestfit3dToNominalGeometry
Graphics Element
Graphics element
graphicElement
Group
Group
setOfTasks
Half Cone Angle
Half apex angle
apexAngleHalf
HOLOS
HOLOS
HOLOS
Cone
Cone
cone
Cone Angle
Apex angle
apexAngle
Cone Addition
ConeAddition
coneAddition
Inclination Angle
Inclination angle
inclinationAngle
Kink Point
Kink
kink
Alignment
Coordinate System
coordsys
Load Alignment
Load Coordinate System
recallPCS
Delete Alignment
Delete Coordinate System
deletePCS
Save Alignment
Save Coordinate System
savePCS
Circle
Circle
circle
Circle on Cone
Circle On Cone
circleOnCone
Circle in contour best fit
Circle in Contour - Best Fit
circleInContour
Sphere
Sphere
sphere
Sphere Point
Sphere Point
spherePoint
Curve Form
Curve form
ESCurveCurveForm
Length
Length
len
Slot
Slot
slot
Gauge Correction Qualification
Gauge Calibration
gaugeCalibration
Linear Pitch
Linear Pitch
linearPitch
Perpendicular
Perpendicularity
perp
lengthOfAxis
Maximum
Maximum
maximum
Maximum Point
MaxPoint
maxPoint
Maximum Feature
Maximum Element
maximumGeo
Minimum
Minimum
minimum
Minimum Point
MinPoint
minPoint
Minimum Feature
Minimum Element
minimumGeo
Average
Average
average
6-22
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Internal name
Average-Feature
Average Element
averageGeo
Offset Plane
Offset Plane
offsetPlane
P6 Alignment
P6 Alignment
p6Alignment
Polar position Height
Height in polar coordinates
coordPolHeight
Polar position Radius
Radians in polar coordinates
coordPolRadius
Polar position Angle
Angle in polar coordinates
coordPolAngle
Projection
Projection
projection
Projection Angle One
Projected angle 1
a1id
Projection Angle Two
Projected angle 2
a2id
Point
Point
point
Space point
gdtSpacePoint
Radius Measurement
Radians measurement
radiusMeasurement
Radius
Radius
radius
Radius Two
Radius 2
radius2id
Radius Point
Radius Point
radiusPoint
Rectangle
Rectangle
rectangle
Result Element
Result Element
resultElement
RPS Alignment
RPS Alignment
rpsAlignment
Circular Pitch
Circular Pitch
circularPitch
Intersection
Intersection
intersection
Step Point
Step Point
stepPoint
Stepped Cylinder
Stepped Cylinder
steppedCylinder
GDT Symmetry
Symmetry
symmetry
Symmetry Plane
Symmetry Plane
symmetryPlane
Symmetry Point
Symmetry Point
symmetryPoint
Tangent
Tangent
tangent
Text element
Text element
textelement
Torus
Torus
torus
Turbine Blade
Curve Blade
CurveBlade
Edge Point
EdgePoint
edgePoint
Maximum Waviness
Waveness
waveness
Angle between Features
Angle between features
anglebF
Angle Point
Angle Point
anglePoint
X Value
X-Value
xValue
Y Value
Y-Value
yValue
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-23
Internal name
Z Value
Z-Value
zValue
Gear
GEAR PRO
GEAR PRO
Cylinder
Cylinder
cylinder
You find all this information in the NamePatternsdefault.txt file in the

<user directory>\data\config directory.
Loading a file with default names

Default names can be set for features, characteristics, some utilities, as
well as for form and location plots, and then be stored in a text file.
This text file can be assigned to a measurement plan that then utilizes
your default names for newly created features.
Note: When a file with default names is loaded in which not all possible
default names are defined, only those names contained in the file replace
the names already defined.
1 Select Extras Settings Environment and open the Default
Name notebook page..
2 Tick the Activate name allocation check box.
3 Select the file with the default names and click Open.
Mirroring a measurement plan

Mirrored measurement plans
You can mirror an entire measurement plan along a coordinate axis of
the base alignment.
All features with their strategies (e.g. probing points) are mirrored on the
plane formed by the other two coordinate axes.
6-24
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Mirror along x axis
About mirroring
Bear the following in mind:
No actual values are mirrored. The actual values are deleted prior to
mirroring.
After mirroring, the nominal values of the characteristics that mirroring can change (these include distances and X values, for example)
are updated.
You have to assign styli to the mirrored measurement plan manually.
The coordinate systems in the measurement plan are not mirrored,

because the mirrored direction of rotation would be counterclockwise. The coordinate systems are computed again on the basis of the
mirrored elements.
The DSE angles are saved in the machine system in CALYPSO. If you
want to mirror also DSE angles, you must specify this separately. A
valid base alignment is needed for this purpose.
NOTICE
Parameters and patterns are not mirrored. If your measurement plan
contained parameters or patterns, they would have to be re-entered after
mirroring.
Formulas can also not be adapted automatically. If you mirror a measurement plan with formulas, you must check the formulas in the mirrored
measurement plan with regard to correctness and correct them if necessary.
Mirroring a measurement plan

When a measurement plan is mirrored along a coordinate axis of the base
alignment, all features with their strategies (e.g. probing points) are mirrored on the plane formed by the other two coordinate axes.
Note: The exceptions are 2D curves and 3D curves.

61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-25
1 Open the measurement plan you want to mirror.

2 Select Plan Advanced Mirror Measurement Plan.
You will be informed if formulas are used in the measurement plan.
In this case, you can interrupt the process and see in the Features
with Formulas window which features contain formulas in order
to check and adapt them if necessary. To access the function again,
select Plan Advanced Mirror Measurement Plan.
3 Use Yes to proceed with the mirroring of the measurement plan.
The Mirror Measurement Plan dialog box appears on the screen.
4 Click Mirror on plane and select the mirror plane.
6-26
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5 Go to Change stylus system data and select a different stylus

system, if applicable.
The data applicable to your selection is listed in the display area.
6 When using a DSE: Activate Mirror DSE Angle (base alignment
required) to mirror its angle.
7 Click Mirror.
8 Save the mirror measurement plan under a different name.
Combining several measurement plans

Combining several measurement plans
You can combine measurement plans and thereby create combined evaluations. The measurement plans you combine in this way need not necessarily be on the CMM they can be created and run on CMMs at different points in the network.
The primary use of this function, however, is to generate a common log
for measurements on a horizontal-arm CMM with two measuring columns.
NOTICE
If you want to combine the measurement plans of a horizontal-arm CMM
with two measuring columns, you should, if possible, use the same features for alignment (definition of the base alignment).
To combine measurement plans, you must create a master measurement plan on a CMM designated for the purpose, and import the measurement plans from other CMMs into this master.
Creating a master measurement plan

After performing measurements on a horizontal-arm CMM with two
measuring arms, you can combine the measurement plans to form a
master measurement plan in order to create combined evaluations.
1 Select File Create Master Measurement Plan.
CALYPSO opens a new, empty measurement plan whose name begins
with the character $. CALYPSO uses the character $ to identify a
master measurement plan.
The next step is to import the measurement plans run to date on individual networked CMMs onto your computer.
2 Select Resources Import Measurement Plan.
3 Navigate to the desired measurement plan in the Load Measurement Plan window and click Open.
4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for all desired measurement plans.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-27
All nominal values, actual values and tolerances are imported into the
master measurement plan.
The names of the individual features and characteristics have to be
unique only within a single measurement plan incorporated into the
master: In the master measurement plan itself, each name of a feature
or characteristic is preceded by the name of the original measurement
plan, with a point as separator.
Example: Two features of the same name, Cylinder1, from the
measurement plans Testblock1 and Base are named Testblock1.Cylinder1 and Base.Cylinder1 in the master measurement
plan.
5 Edit the master measurement plan: Delete superfluous characteristics
and add constructions of features across individual measurement
plans.
6 Save the master measurement plan.
Note: When saved in the file system, the $ will be removed from
the name. To make it easier to distinguish the master measurement
plans from regular ones, you should save them in a separate directory.
Obtaining a combined evaluation

The master measurement plan is not used to measure features: its purpose is only to calculate combinations of several measurement plans.
Performing the calculation with a master measurement plan

1 Open the master measurement plan.
2 Select Plan CNC-Start to start the CNC run.
The Start Measurement dialog box appears on the screen.
3 In the CMM group, go to Navigate-Feature To Feature and select the Use Position Points Only entry.
4 If individual measurement plans have been run in the interim and you
want to update the results: Tick the Clear existing results check
box.
The current values (actual values, nominal values and tolerances) of
the individual measurement plans are reimported and the results are
updated.
5 Click OK to start the CNC run.
Note: No further measurements take place in this CNC run. Instead,

the process is used for calculations only, and the results are printed
out or generated as result files.
6-28
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Editing features of the measurement plan

Overview: Editing features of the
measurement plan
You can edit a measurement plan at any time. You have the following
options:
adding features or characteristics [ 629]
highlighting features or characteristics [ 630]
editing features or characteristics [ 630]
copying features or characteristics [ 631]
copying features together with characteristics and datums [ 631] (copying with details)
moving features or characteristics [ 632]
moving features or characteristics to the Waste Basket or deleting

them [ 632]
restoring contents from the Waste Basket [ 633]
grouping features or characteristics [ 633]
copying features, characteristics and groups together with datums
into another measurement plan [ 633]
renaming features, characteristics or groups [ 635]
undoing unsaved changes [ 635]
searching for measurement plan features in the measurement plan

and [ 636]
converting the selected cylinders in the measurement plan to cir-
cles. [ 636]
NOTICE
All of the following sections assume that you have a measurement plan
open on the Calypso user desk.
Adding features or characteristics to a

measurement plan
You can extend your measurement plan:
You can learn how to add a feature at Defining features [ 42].
You can learn how to add a characteristic at Defining characteristics [ 57].
The features and characteristics are located in the measurement plan area
on different tabs. However, you can add characteristics and features ir61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-29
respective of which tab is on top. CALYPSO automatically adds new features or characteristics to the corresponding tab.
The icons on the tabs are a toggle for switching from one tab to the other.
Highlighting features and characteristics

To work with measurement plan features, you first have to highlight
them. You have the following options:
Selection
Operation
one feature
Click the icon
several features
Hold down the CTRL key and click icons
several connected features
Click the first feature, press and hold down the SHIFT KEY and click the
last feature
The selected measurement plan features have a dark gray background.
When you select a characteristic, its features in the CAD window are displayed in color.
Working with measurement plan features

1 Open the context menu and use the desired function for the selected
features.
Editing a measurement plan feature

You have two options of editing the values and properties of a measurement plan feature.
Open the measurement plan feature in the measurement plan area

by double clicking the icon or by highlighting it and clicking the Open
selected object icon.
You can then edit the values and settings of the measurement plan
feature in the definition template.
Open the corresponding measurement plan editor and edit the values
and settings (nominal data) of the measurement plan feature.
For features, you edit here the values for inside/outside, inclination
angle, rotation angle, start angle, angle range, diameter, diameter 2,
length and width.
For characteristics, you edit here the nominal value, upper and lower
tolerance, geometrical features and datums.
6-30
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Copying measurement plan features

Copying features or characteristics
Features or characteristics can be copied. This is a quick way to add another feature or characteristic of the same type.
What does a copy contain?
A copy does not contain the measured data of the original feature only
the properties, nominal data and tolerances.
1 Highlight the features you want to copy.
2 Press CTRL+C or click the Copy icon.
3 If you want to add the features to another measurement plan, open
the desired measurement plan.
4 Click the desired position in the list.
5 Press CTRL+V or click the Paste icon.
The features or characteristics will be pasted into the list at the position
you selected.
Simply copying and copying with details

When you just copy features, the corresponding characteristics and references are not copied. If you also copy the desired characteristic or the
reference, these copies are not connected with the copy of the feature,
but merely with the initial feature.
Example
You copy Cone1 and Cone Addition1(Cone1). This delivers Cone2 and
Cone Addition2(Cone1). However, if you want to obtain Cone2 and Cone
Addition2(Cone2), you must copy the Cone Addition1 together with its
references.
To copy characteristics and references with a feature, use the Copy with
details [ 631] function.
Copying features with details

To copy characteristics and datums together with a feature, use the
Copy with details function.
What does a copy with
details contain?
The Copy with details function creates a new feature with the properties, nominal values and tolerances of the original feature. The measured values are not copied. Furthermore, copies of the corresponding
characteristics and datums of the original are created and connected to
the copy of the feature.
1 Highlight the features you want to copy with details.
2 Press CTRL+C or click the Copy icon.
3 If you want to add the features to another measurement plan, open
the desired measurement plan.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-31
4 Click the new position in the list and then select Paste Contents in
the context menu.
The Paste Contents... window is opened.
5 Tick the check box for the desired details and confirm with OK.
The new features will be pasted into the list at the position you selected. The copies of the corresponding characteristics and datums are
pasted to the corresponding tab.
Moving features or characteristics

You can change the order of the features and characteristics in the list in
the measurement plan area. The order of characteristics determines the
order of measurements when the measurement plan is executed.
You have the following options of moving features or characteristics:
1 Highlight the features you want to move.
2 Drag the features to the desired position in the list.
Deleting features or characteristics

You can remove highlighted features and characteristics from the measurement plan in a variety of ways:
1 Cutting an element
Use CTRL+X to move the features to the clipboard. The feature that was
last cut can be pasted using CTRL+V.
2 Moving an element to the Waste Basket
Drag the feature to the Waste Basket icon.
You can drag the feature in the waste basket to any measurement
plan.
3 Deleting an element for good
In the context menu, select Delete.
6-32
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Working with the waste basket

CALYPSO gathers all of the elements which were dragged to the Waste
Basket icon in the Waste Basket.
Note: As soon as CALYPSO is terminated, the waste basket is emptied.
Showing the contents

1 To show the contents of the waste basket, click the Waste Basket
icon.
Loading an element from the waste basket

1 To load an element from the waste basket, drag it to the measurement
plan area.
A copy of the feature will be added in the measurement plan area while
the original copy will remain in the Waste Basket.
Deleting an element for good

1 To delete an element from the waste basket, highlight it and select
Delete in the context menu.
Grouping and ungrouping characteristics

Grouping measurement
plan features
Sometimes a measurement plan has so many characteristics that it gets

cumbersome to view and edit. In this case, group any measurement plan
features.
Each group is assigned a name and an individual icon in the list of features
or characteristics.
You can read about how to create these groups and ungroup them in
Defining the scope of measurement [ 73].
Defining mini-plans
If you want to evaluate only certain characteristics, define a characteristics

group, known as a mini-plan, within the measurement plan. Mini-plans
have the advantage that they can be selected as scope of measurement
when starting the CNC run.
This allows you to check, edit and run this mini-plan, but leaves the other
characteristics unchanged in the measurement plan area.
You can read about how to create mini-plans and ungroup them in
Defining the scope of measurement [ 73].
Copying features with references

Sometimes, certain already defined features and measurement plan components are required in another measurement plan.
During normal copying, the features and characteristics, but not the connected features and measurement plan components, are copied into another measurement plan.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-33
If you copy with references, you can use features and entire parts of
your measurement plan in another measurement plan without losing the
connections and references of the features.
1 Highlight in the corresponding measurement plan list the features you
want to copy with references.
2 Select Copy with References in the context menu.
3 Open the measurement plan into which you want to paste the features, open the desired list of features or characteristics and select
Paste with References in the context menu.
You will see the list of selected features which are currently to be
pasted.
4 Define the type of pasting into the measurement plan using OK just
in case names are identical.
The features will be pasted into the measurement plan with a new
name if necessary.
The copied features and references are then stored in the measurement
plan lists:
Once you have selected a feature, the copied features will be pasted. The
corresponding characteristics and alignments will be added to the end of
the measurement plan page.
Once you have selected a characteristic, the copied characteristics and
alignments will then be pasted. The corresponding features will be added
to the end of the feature page.
6-34
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
If no feature has been selected, the copied features will be added to the
end of their corresponding list.
Styli and travel path settings (e.g. retract distance, clearance distance and
speed) are generally transferred from the original measurement plan.
However, if this data in the initial measurement plan originated from the
measurement plan-specific predefinitions, the values will adopt new values after pasting according to the predefinitions of the measurement plan
in which the feature has been pasted.
Renaming measurement plan features

You can name each measurement plan feature individually.
Note: You should name features before you define them (probe them, in
other words).
1 Changing the name in the definition template
2 Changing the name in the measurement plan area
In the context menu, use the F2 key or the Rename entry to enter a
name and a comment.
The comment is output in each printout for this characteristic.
Undoing changes in the measurement

plan
In There is no way of undoing an action in CALYPSO while the measurement plan is being edited.
The Edit Undo last probing command makes it only possible to
delete single probing points within a feature.
However, you can revert to the last saved version of your measurement
plan.
Note: All changes made since the last time the measurement plan was
saved will be lost.
1 Save the measurement plan without saving it beforehand.
2 Reopen the measurement plan.
The contents of the measurement plan are now as they were when last
saved.
To limit the loss of routine procedures, you can use the AutoSave function (see Saving measurement plan versions [ 64]).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-35
Searching and replacing measurement

plan feature names
You can look for specific names of features, characteristics and groups in
a measurement plan and replace them with other names if necessary.
Note: CALYPSO always checks in the currently displayed list, i.e. either in
the list of characteristics or list of features.
1 Click the Search icon.
2 Select the name of the feature you need in the Find/Replace window.
You can specify the search:
Differentiate between cases
Search for whole words only
Search in comments and text elements only
CALYPSO checks in the current list and highlights the next entry found.
3 Activate the Replace tab to replace names.
Converting selected cylinders to circles

The measurement of a cylinder takes more time than the measurement
of a circle and in many cases delivers too much information. Therefore,
we recommend measuring circles instead of cylinders.
You can convert several cylinders of the measurement plan to circles. All
circles converted at the same time sit at their cylinders at the same relative
measuring height. You can predefine this relative measuring height.
Note: By selecting all cylinders for conversion, all cylinders will be converted - with the exception of the cylinders that are used as primary or
secondary reference in the base alignment.
1 Select Plan Measurement Plan Functions Convert cylinder to circles.
The Selected cylinders will be converted to circles window
shows a list of all cylinders of the measurement plan with the exception
of the cylinders that are used as primary or secondary reference in the
base alignment.
By default, all cylinders that you selected in the list of features are also
selected in this list.
2 Highlight the desired cylinders.
3 Enter the desired relative height at which the circles should be created.
Note: Specification is made in percent; the height is measured from

the origin of the local feature alignment. When a value of 50% (default) is entered, the circle is created at half the cylinder height.
6-36
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Formula input and run control

Overview of the formula input and run
control
The PCM Technology option gives you many options for the run control
and programming of CNC runs via CALYPSO. However, some basic options for the control of the CNC run are already included in the CALYPSO
base program:
Many input fields allow you to enter formulas [ 638] instead of

constant values.
You can conveniently adopt functions and parameters from the function and parameter list.
You can have the features and characteristics which contain formulas displayed on the screen [ 639].
You can set conditions [ 640].
You can place loops around characteristics [ 642].
With the aid of external batch files with Windows system commands,
you can start external programs and execute other commands during the CNC run [ 648].
Formula input
By entering formulas you can
calculate function values of measurement results (sin, cos...)
use operators to link measurement results with constants
use operators to interlink multiple measurement results.
NOTICE
The decimal separator in formulas is the point. The comma is used exclusively as separator.
Formulas in input fields for angles

NOTICE
If you enter a formula for an angle, the calculated value is read as a radian
measure. However, the corresponding value in degrees is shown in the
input field.
If the result of the formula you entered is, for example, 90, the field for
the angle shows the value -63.3798 (degrees). To ensure that the input
field for the angle shows 90, you must enter the corresponding radian
measure in the formula.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-37
If the expression does not produce a radian measure but a value in degrees, you must therefore add *pi/180 to it or use the rad function for
it: rad(value in degrees). Thus, the radian measure is calculated by the
formula and the input field for the angle shows the exact calculated numerical value in degrees.
Formula input
Calculation
Display in the input field
90
5156,6202
-63,3798
90*pi/180
90,0000
90,0000
rad(90)
90,0000
90,0000
1.570796
90,0000
90,0000
Entering formulas
Various input fields allow you to enter formulas instead of absolute values
and to make the value used dependent on other values or measuring
results.
Defining formulas
1 Select Formula in the context menu of the input field.
2 Enter the formula in the Formula window:
CALYPSO helps you when viewing the syntaxes for formulas:
Function opens a list of all operators, functions and commands
as well as of all available parameters.
Double-click a feature to transfer it to the formula input field.
Loop inserts a loop variable in the formula.
Double-click an attribute to insert the return value of the characteristic or feature into the formula.
Compute shows the formula's return value for test purposes.
The value returned by the formula is displayed in the input box from which
you called the formula input. Note that the color of this field has changed
to yellow.
Entering formulas for clearance planes/

clearance groups
You can use formulas to define the assignment of clearance planes and
groups in the clearance data and travel paths of a feature. In the formulas,
you must assign a language-neutral designation to the clearance planes
and groups.
6-38
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Element
Name
Internal
name
Clearance plane
CP +X
SP +X
Clearance group
CG +X
GRP +X
RT clearance plane
RTCP +x
RTSP +X
RT clearance group
RTG +X
RTG +X
Example: If you define param=SP +Z and enter param - then CP +Z

will be displayed.
Entering formulas for clearance planes/clearance

groups
Conditions:
The definition template of the feature is open.
1 Select the Formula entry in the in the menu of the Clearance
Group input field.
The Formula dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Enter the desired formulas.
After input of the formula, the background of the input field will be
highlighted in yellow.
The value of the parameter will be computed and displayed if possible.
3 Select the Input Field entry in the in the menu of the Clearance
Group input field to cancel the entered formula.
NOTICE
The current value of the formula is displayed in the Measurement Plan
Editor Features, but cannot be modified there.
Showing formulas in the measurement

plan
You can have the features and characteristics in a measurement plan
which contain formulas displayed on the screen.
Displaying features with formulas

1 Select Plan Advanced Search Features with Formulas.
The Features with Formulas dialog box is opened.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-39
The tree structure shows all elements (features, characteristics, base

alignments, rotary table functions, navigation paths, etc.) that contain
a formula.
2 Use the buttons to open and close the branches that interest you.
Under the feature, the formulas used in it are shown.
Setting conditions
Processing conditions
You can link the computation of characteristics to conditions that enable
CALYPSO to execute a jump in the CNC run in accordance with the
measuring results and not to measure the corresponding characteristic.
NOTICE
A basic knowledge of programming structures will help you understand
the following.
You can choose whether to have the condition queried before or after
the characteristic is computed. CALYPSO ascertains whether the condition is fulfilled or not.
If the condition is queried before computation, CALYPSO either computes
the characteristic and continues or executes the instruction linked to
6-40
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
compliance with the condition. This instruction can be either of the following:
cancel the automatic measuring run
do not compute the characteristic and continue.
If the condition is queried after computation, the only alternatives are:
cancel the automatic measuring run
continue.
If a loop has been defined around the characteristic, processing depends

on what was defined first.
Linking a condition to a characteristic

Setting a condition for a characteristic
1 Select Condition in the context menu of the characteristic.
The Condition window is opened.
2 Select Formula in the context menu of the yellow input field and
enter the condition (see Entering formulas [ 638]).
Note: The only possible return values for the condition are true and
false. Use the comparison operators.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-41
3 Enter additional settings for the condition:

Only with the PCM Technology option: Use Settings to enter the
presettings and postsettings.
Tick the Post condition check box if the condition is not queried
until the characteristic has been computed.
Yes button next to End program:
The automatic run is canceled or the measurement of the feature is
omitted if the condition is true (satisfied).
If this is not necessary, click Yes or No.
No button next to End program:
The automatic run is canceled or the measurement of the feature is
omitted if the condition is false (not satisfied).
If this is not necessary, click Yes or No.
The condition will be checked and evaluated in the next automatic measuring run.
Inserting loops
Processing loops
NOTICE
This section is intended for advanced users who are familiar with the
basics of programming structures.
Loops are used primarily in measurement plans in which identical or similar features are arranged in regular patterns (as is the case, for example,
with a perforated plate). You can also use loops when you configure the
base alignment.
If you place a loop around a characteristic or the entire measurement plan,
the characteristic or measurement plan is processed several times in succession.
NOTICE
Note that you cannot enter loops directly in the input/output parameters.
Loops for characteristics and features are realized in different ways:
Characteristics: direct loop definition

Select in the context menu of the characteristic the Loop entry and
enter the desired values:
The loop variable starts the first run with the start index. Prior to each
run, it is increased by the increment and compared with the end index.
As soon as the loop variable has exceeded the end index (with pos-
6-42
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
itive increment: greater than the end index; with negative increment:
smaller than the end index), the loop will not be repeated any more.
Features: indirect loop definition

You define a pattern for a feature or a group of features (see Multiplying features by patterns [ 421]).
Similar to the loop, a run is repeated several times, each time with a
modified index. Additionally, another abortion condition is defined
with Real number: As soon as the number of runs has reached the
value of the real number, the computation is terminated.
Loop variables and loop indexes

The loop variables have fixed names, and they are called LOOP1 to
LOOP4 in each loop. In the characteristic and the associated features,
you can use these loop variables in formulas to vary the way in which the
characteristic is processed.
If a condition is also linked to the object, the sequence of processing
depends on what was defined first.
CALYPSO uses the loop variable as an index to mark similar objects that
differ in the value of the corresponding loop variable.
Example: Circle1(1), Circle1(2), Circle1(3).
Each of the four loop variables corresponds to a certain loop index definition or type of bracket:
Loop variable
Nest Level
LOOP1
()
round
LOOP2
[]
square
LOOP3
<>
angle
LOOP4
{}
brace
Placing loops around features or measurement

plans
You can place the loop around a characteristic or the entire measurement
plan:
1 To place a loop around the measurement plan, select Loop in the
context menu of the measurement plan (none of the characteristics is
highlighted).
- or To place a loop around a characteristic, select Loop in the context
menu of the characteristic.
2 Enter the values for Start, End and Step for each loop index range.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-43
3 Under Nest Level, select a type of bracket for the loop.
Note: The PCM Technology option allows you to define input and
output parameters for the loop. To do so, click Settings.
4 If necessary, enter an abortion condition.
Note: You can define only one abortion condition per loop.
The loop will be executed in the next CNC run.
To ensure that something happens each time the loop is run, you have
to use the LOOPi (i = 1,...,4) loop variable in the characteristic and/or in
the features to vary the measurement run.
For example, you could multiply the loop variable with a constant offset
in order to increase an X value step by step.
Including features in loops

Loops are used primarily in measurement plans in which identical or similar features are arranged in regular patterns (as is the case, for example,
with a perforated plate).
If you defined a loop by a characteristic, the data of the associated feature
has to be varied in each loop run in order to ensure that the loop can be
executed correctly.
You accomplish this by using the loop variables in the definition of the
feature, or incorporating a pattern into the feature.
Make sure that the value for Real number corresponds to the number
of loop runs resulting from the loop placed around the characteristic.
Incorporating a pattern into a feature

2 Go to Nominal Definition and select the Pattern entry.
The Selection (Pattern) window appears on the screen.
6-44
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3 Click New and Edit.

4 Select the desired pattern type (Polar Pattern Offset, 1-D Linear
Pattern, 2-D Linear Pattern, Rotational Pattern, Pattern
with position list) and click OK.
The dialog box for defining the pattern (example: 1-D Linear Pattern)
appears on the screen.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-45
5 Enter the values for the pattern. Make sure that the value for Real
number corresponds to the number of loop runs resulting from the
loop placed around the characteristic.
6 Click OK to confirm and close the window.
7 Click OK to close the feature template.
The loop is executed as soon as you start an automatic measuring run
(see Running a measurement plan [ 72]).
Example: Loop for alignment to RPS

You can place a loop around a base alignment. If you do this, the alignment is repeated for the defined number of loop repetitions unless the
abortion condition is satisfied beforehand.
RPS alignment, for example, works best with a loop. The effect of this
loop is to repeat alignment until it achieves your user-defined fit.
The illustration below shows the definition of the loop.
6-46
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The baseSystem().valueA<0.1 abortion condition (for syntax, see in the

operating instructions for the PCM Technology option under baseSystem)
means that once measuring has commenced, the measuring process will
continue until the valueA best-fit value is less than 0.1.
Purpose of Nest Level

CALYPSO provides you with four forms of brackets for four loop levels.
Which are the applications of these four loop variables?
You have to use brackets of different types in independently defined
loops if:
you align two or more coordinate systems iteratively and
features with the same name are used in this context.
The following example shows why brackets of different types must be

used. It is assumed that a part alignment was created after RPS alignment
(see Using an alternative alignment method [ 351]).
Example
If, for example, coordinate system A uses the feature called 3-D Line1
and coordinate system B also uses a feature of this name, 3-D Line1 is
not measured again when coordinate system B is measured if you used
the same type of brackets when you defined the two iterations in the
Loop window. CALYPSO assumes that the line has already been measured and that it does not have to be measured again.
You have to use brackets of a different type to ensure that the 3-D
Line1 is measured again when coordinate system B is aligned. You could
do this, for example, by selecting round brackets ( and ) for loop 1
and angle brackets < and > for loop 2.
Points to note about multiple measurements

If you want to use a loop to measure one and the same feature more than
once or repeat probings, you must use the LOOP1 loop variable in the
definition template of the feature.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-47
CALYPSO remembers that it has already measured a feature and simply

recalls the measured value instead of probing for a second time. Under
these circumstances, this does not produce the desired effect.
Remedy: In the nominal definition, insert a formula in which you add the
product 0*LOOP1 (to the X value, for example). This means that the X
value remains the same every time the loop is run, but CALYPSO perceives
each iteration as a new calculation and a new probing.
Run control with external batch files

Run control with external batch files
You can start external programs from within the measurement plan as
well as execute batch files with Windows system commands, without
storing the call in the measurement plan.
Conditions for the execution
Order of the run
The external batch file must have a certain name and must be stored in
a certain directory. Then, it is executed in a certain CNC run situation.
You do not need to call up the file in the measurement plan.
If the file is stored in the general directory for measurement plans

(<user directory>\workarea\inspections) or actual values, the file is
executed each time a measurement plan is run.
If the file is stored in the general measurement plan directory (<user

directory>\workarea\inspections\<measurement plan name>) or in
the actual values directory, the file will be executed when the corresponding measurement plan is run.
If several batch files with the same name exist, the files are processed in
the following order:
Batch file in the current measurement plan directory
Batch file in the general directory for measurement plans
Batch file in the current actual values directory (if this deviates from
the measurement plan directory)
Batch file in the current actual values directory (if this deviates from
the general directory for measurement plans)
NOTICE
By saving external batch files with the corresponding names in the general directory for measurement plans, you change the run of all measurement plans on the system without having changed the measurement
plans.
NOTICE
If you use the PCM Technology option, you can have PCM files run in the
same way. For more information, please refer to Run control with external
PCM files in the operating instructions for the PCM Technology option.
6-48
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Reference: Names of the external batch files

You can start external programs from within the measurement plan as
well as execute batch files, without storing the call in the measurement
plan.
The name of the external batch files defines where in the measurement
plan run the file is executed. You can use the following file names:
Call
File name
Prior to the start dialog
Inspection_pre_start_dialog.bat
After loading the measurement plan
inspection_post_load.bat
At the beginning of the run
inspection_start.bat
After the end of the measurement; during the run after measurement_end.bat
features prior to the computation of characteristics
After the end of the computation, but prior to the report/ calculation_end.bat
file output (not during the run with a selection of features)
After the end of the run and the report output
inspection_end.bat
After completion of all (also externally) created reports report_end.bat

and files if they are started by CALYPSO (e.g. PDF, DFD/
DFX) (not during the run with a selection of features)
Prior to saving the measurement plan
61212-2011002
inspection_pre_save.bat
CALYPSO
6-49
Using macros in the measurement plan

Purpose of macros in the measurement
plan
CALYPSO allows you to use macros in a measurement plan. You can always use a macro. If the macro contains variables, you have to assign
values to them in accordance with the intended purpose of the macro.
Advantages of macros
Recurring measuring
jobs
Macros make it easier for you to create and handle recurring measuring
jobs:
You can measure several identical components in assemblies (e.g.

valve seats in an engine block).
You can measure multiple features, i.e. features with recurring but
varying fundamental quantities (e.g. stepped cylinders, stepped pyramids, rows of holes with increasing radius).
You can program measuring jobs that are repeated on different workpieces.
Distributed preparation
of measurement plans
This also facilitates distributed preparation of measurement plans by several employees.
Information
In an info file, you can include for each macro information about its function or parameters or also a technical drawing.
Parameterizing the macro measurement plan

To use a macro in a flexible manner, parameterize its variable fundamental quantities. In the example involving the valves in the engine block, this
would be the X coordinate of the cylinder axis. In the case of the stepped
cylinders, this would be the cylinder radius and the heights.
During integration into a measurement plan, you assign the currently required values to the parameters.
Standard storage location for macros

You can set the standard storage location for the macros created in CALYPSO. The default directory is <user directory>\workarea\macros.
The macros are saved in the subdirectories of this directory in the same
way as the measurement plans. The subdirectory bears the name of the
macro; the macro is contained in the subdirectory as a file named inspection.
6-50
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Basics about macros in measurement

plans
A macro is treated the same way as a group in the CNC run. Macro characteristics call the associated macro features.
Names in the macro

Name of the macro
The name of the macro is formed from the name of the macro measurement plan and a running counter. Example: If the macro measurement
plan is named Deep Hole, the (first such a) macro in the current measurement plan is named Deep Hole_1.
You can treat the macro the same way as any other elements in the
measurement plan, i.e. you can move and rename it.
Names of the features
The names of features in a measurement plan consist of the name of the

macro measurement plan and the name of the feature in the macro
measurement plan, with a separator between the names. Define the separator in the Settings for macros. If the separator is a point, for example,
the Plane5 feature from the Deep Hole macro is called Deep
Hole.Plane5 in the measurement plan.
Transferring a coordinate system to a macro

You can transfer a coordinate system defined in the measurement plan
to the loaded macro. Select the coordinate system in the definition template of the macro.
This coordinate system serves as a reference for all features in the macro
which previously referred to the base alignment or the previous macro
coordinate system.
Nominal values remain
the same
When assigning a new coordinate system, the nominal values of the

macro are not converted. You move the complete macro to another position by assigning the new coordinate system.
NOTICE
This behavior is in contrast to the usual behavior of CALYPSO: The coordinates of a feature are converted as soon as another coordinate system
is used to ensure that the actual positions of the features do not change.
NOTICE
When updating a macro, the assigned coordinate system is retained.
Permissible coordinate
systems
The selection of coordinate systems for the macro depends on the macro.
The following coordinate systems are excluded:
all coordinate systems which are defined in the macro
all coordinate systems to which references to any feature of the macro

are assigned
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-51
This means: If a base alignment is created by means of a feature of the

macro, only the base alignment appears in the list. As all other coordinate
systems in the measurement plan refer in any way to the base alignment
and thus to a feature of the macro, none of the coordinate systems can
be selected.
Access to features of the macro

In the measurement plan, you can directly access the features and characteristics of the integrated macro. For example, you can use macro features to recall points.
However, you can no longer edit the features of the macro.
Processing the macro parameters

The PCM parameters and the transfer parameters of the macro are processed in the following order:
the PCM parameters (presettings) that you assigned to the macro (as
a measurement plan feature) in the measurement plan (only with the
PCM Technology option).
the transfer parameters of the macro.
the presettings of the macro measurement plan (only with the PCM
Technology option).
execution of the macro.
the postsettings of the macro measurement plan (only with the PCM
Technology option).
the PCM parameters (output settings) that you assigned to the macro
(as a measurement plan feature) in the measurement plan (only with
the PCM Technology option).
The order thus results from the nesting of the individual units.
Separate parameters
The transfer parameters and PCM parameters of the macro are logically
separated from the parameters of the measurement plan. This permits
parameters with the same name to exist in both the measurement plan
and in the macro without this leading to misinterpretations.
CALYPSO treats them as two different parameters: Parameter a of the
macro named Test is known as Test.a parameter in the measurement plan. This allows CALYPSO to access the PCM parameters of the
macro by reading them from the measurement plan.
Integration into the measurement plan as a copy

A macro is not transferred to the measurement plan as a reference. When
you change a macro, you must update it in the measurement plan using
the macro. Otherwise, the old macro version is still used.
6-52
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Using macros in CALYPSO

Overview of the use of macros
You should familiarize yourself with the following procedures in order to
use macros in CALYPSO:
Defining the settings for macros [ 653]
Creating a macro [ 654]
Using a macro in a measurement plan [ 654]
Editing a macro [ 655]
Updating a macro [ 656]
Defining the settings for macros

When creating, editing, saving or updating macros, CALYPSO uses the
settings that apply to the macros. Therefore, these settings must be
checked before you can create a macro.
1 Select File Macro Settings and check the settings in the Settings for macros window on the following index cards:
Update
Search paths for the update of a macro
Define Directories/Paths
Default path for saving macros
Nomenclature
Separator between the macro names and the feature names for newly
created and for updated macros
2 Open the Measurement Plan Editor Features and check the macro settings:
Update Macros at every CNC Start:
On: All macros integrated in the measurement plan will automatically
be updated at CNC start before the measurement process will start.
Accept settings from macro when updating macro:
On: When updating macros, parameters such as Stylus, RT position
and Warning Limit which may have been modified in the measurement
plan will be overwritten.
Off: When updating macros, parameters such as Stylus, RT position
and Warning Limit which may have been modified in the measurement
plan will not be overwritten. New additional elements of the original
macro will be accepted unchanged in the measurement plan.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-53
Creating a macro
To create a macro, first create a normal measurement plan and then
save it as a macro.
If the measurement plan contains variable values, these must be assigned
initial values.
1 Open the measurement plan you wish to use as a macro.
2 Select File Macro Define Macro Parameters and edit the
list of macro parameters:
Create a list of all variable values in the measurement plan. To do
so, click Automatic.
Enter a default value for each parameter.
3 Save the measurement plan as a macro.
Select File Macro Save Measurement Plan as Macro to save the macro with the name of the open measurement plan.
Select File Macro Save Measurement Plan as Macro
as... to save the macro under any name.
Integrating a macro in a measurement plan

You can integrate a macro in any measurement plan in order to measure
and evaluate certain features or groups of features.
With a parameterized macro, you must enter the specific values that the
object to be measured has on the workpiece.
Note: The macro is not integrated as a reference. Instead, it is permanently integrated as a copy of the selected macro. This means that
changes in the original macro measurement plan are not automatically
made in the integrated macro.
1 Open the measurement plan into which you want to integrate the
macro.
2 Highlight the element behind which you want to add the macro in the
list of characteristics or features.
3 Select File Macro Integrate Macro and open the desired
macro.
4 Enter the desired values in the definition template of the macro:
A different coordinate system if you want to move the entire macro
with all its features.
Valid values for all transfer parameters (also as formula).
Note: You can no longer change the names of the transfer parameters
and the comments.
6-54
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
A symbol for the macro is displayed both in the list of characteristics

and in the list of features.
The elements of the macros are shown in the CAD window.

Note: During integration into the measurement plan, the styli, the parameters and the printout definitions are taken over from the macro
in addition to the features and the characteristics.
Note: The settings (e.g. clearance planes, CAD data, etc.) apply.
You can access the individual macro elements via the measurement plan
editor and, for example, define the clearance plane or stylus.
Editing a macro measurement plan

You can edit a macro at any time.
1 Select File Macro Open Macro Measurement Plan and
open the desired macro.
2 Edit the macro measurement plan.
3 Save the measurement plan as a macro.
Select File Macro Save Measurement Plan as Macro to save the macro under its previous name.
Select File Macro Save Measurement Plan as Macro
as... to save the macro under any name.
If you have made changes to a macro and want these changes to work
in a measurement plan in which the macro has already been integrated,
you will therefore have to update the macro [ 656].
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-55
NOTICE
A macro integrated in a measurement plan is not automatically updated
when the original macro measurement plan is changed.
Updating a macro
A macro integrated in a measurement plan is not automatically updated
when the original macro measurement plan is changed. If you have made
changes to a macro and want these changes to work in a measurement
plan in which the macro has already been integrated, you will therefore
have to update the macro.
What happens during the macro update?
If you have set Accept settings from macro when updating

macro to On under Macro in the Measurement Plan Editor
Features, all changes of the macro measurement plans are transferred to the macros integrated in the current measurement plan.
If you have set Accept settings from macro when updating

macro to Off under Macro in the Measurement Plan Editor
Features, the settings such as styli, RT position and warning limits
which may have been modified in the measurement plan will not be
overwritten.
Updating an individual macro in a measurement plan

1 Select the Update entry in the list of characteristics or features in the
context menu of the macro entry.
Updating all macros of a measurement plan

1 Select File Macro Update All Macros.
Updating all macros of a measurement plan automatically prior to a CNC start

1 In the Measurement Plan Editor Features, select the Macro Update Macros at every CNC Start menu item.
Note: Only if you have ticked the Rename macros during update
with separators check box in the Settings for macros, the feature
names will also be changed in the macros according to the current
definition.
6-56
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Toolboxes
Toolboxes
What are toolboxes?
A toolbox contains icons for certain measurement plan features and thus
simplifies the structure of a measurement plan: You can easily insert icons
into a measurement plan.
You create custom toolboxes. To do so, select those measurement plan
features that you require most frequently.
The master toolbox includes all features, characteristics and utilities
as well as the super characteristics added and selected by you.
NOTICE
You cannot change a toolbox subsequently. You can only delete it and
start it again from scratch.
Creating toolboxes
You create a toolbox in the master toolbox.
1 Click the Select Tool Box icon and select the master toolbox in
the Tool Box Selector window.
The Tool Box Builder window appears on the screen.
2 Overwrite Unknown with the name of the toolbox.

61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-57
Toolboxes
3 Now you can assemble your elements: Click and hold the left mouse
button on the desired toolbox button and drag it over to the right
column.
You cannot change the order of items in the custom toolbox.
4 To delete an item, select Delete from the context menu of the item.
5 Select File Save to save the toolbox.
Working with the toolbox

A toolbox contains the items you need most frequently.
1 Click the Select Tool Box icon.
The Tool Box Selector window is opened.
2 Open the desired toolbox.
3 Drag the required elements from the toolbox to the measurement plan
area.
NOTICE
As soon as you click anywhere else on the work area, the toolbox is hidden. To display it permanently, activate the View Always on top
menu item.
Deleting a toolbox
1 Click the Select Tool Box icon and open the Tool Box Builder
window.
2 Select File Delete.
3 In the list of custom toolboxes, click the toolbox you wish to highlight,
then click OK.
Super characteristics
What are super characteristics?
Super characteristics are elements in the toolbox which are created from
existing measurement plan macros. You can then drag these super characteristics to the measurement plan area in the same way as the other
toolbox elements to create an executable measurement plan.
A special aspect of this is that the actual measurement plan is created by
programming at the same time when you drag the macro to the measurement plan area. You are guided from one probing to another and the
nominals in the features are determined by the probings.
6-58
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Toolboxes
NOTICE
It is not possible to measure super characteristics on horizontal-arm
CMMs (HAM). This function is also not suitable for measurements with
optical sensors.
Super characteristics allow you to measure workpieces or parts of workpieces of a certain shape. CALYPSO recognizes the dimensions and other
parameters via probing and thus determines the nominals in the features.
Any existing nominals in the macro are ignored.
The nominal geometry of the new feature is derived from the computed
feature and rounded with the rounding measure defined in the default
settings.
It is thus possible to use a generally defined feature for measurements on
objects with different dimensions.
Example
For example, you have prepared a measurement plan macro which is intended for the measurement of the distance between two circles. You
define a super characteristic from this macro. By dragging this super
characteristic to the measurement plan area, the measurement plan starts
immediately and probings are performed. Then the nominals are determined in the measurement plan via the probings and from the dimensions
of the probed workpiece.
Next time, the dimensions can be completely different.
What is applied?
The characteristics, the features and the alignments are adopted from the
macro. Constructions and recalls are computed from the measured construction elements.
Compared with the simple automatic feature recognition, it is possible to
predefine general characteristics for features that still have to be measured.
What is not applied?
The measurement strategies and all strategies are not applied. A strategy
point is created for each probing performed in the manual run.
The currently selected stylus represents the stylus entered in the newly
created feature.
If you change the stylus configuration during the measurement and use
it for probing, a new clearance group is added of which the stylus configuration corresponds to the selected stylus.
Characteristics which contain nominals are recomputed once the necessary features have been measured.
Unsuitable features
The following features cannot be measured as a super characteristic:
Free form surface - CAD models are not adopted from the macro.
Points with the Space Point or Net Point space point mode the
determined point must be projected on the nominal for the computation of the computed feature.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-59
Toolboxes
Adding and removing super characteristics

Adding a super characteristic
1 Select the Super Characteristic Add Super Characteristic
menu items in the Tool Box Builder.
2 Select the desired measurement plan macro in the file selection dialog.
The super characteristic and the name of the macro are displayed under Elements in the toolbox; the first time the new Super Characteristic group is added under Group.
3 Repeat step 2 for any additional macros required.

Now, the super characteristics are available for toolboxes.
Removing a super characteristic

1 Select the Super Characteristic Remove Super Characteristic menu items in the Tool Box Builder.
Any super characteristic selected under Elements will be removed
immediately. A dialog appears if no super characteristic is selected.
6-60
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Toolboxes
2 Select the super characteristics you wish to remove from the Tool Box
Builder and click OK.
The super characteristics are removed.
NOTICE
By removing a super characteristic from the Tool Box Builder, only the
link to the macro is removed. The macro itself remains unchanged.
Creating a measurement plan from a super

characteristic
Super characteristics allow you to create measurement plans for differently sized features in an easy way. CALYPSO guides you through the
macro, you perform probings from which CALYPSO computes the feature
and its nominals.
1 Open the toolbox containing the super characteristics.
2 Double-click the desired super characteristic or drag it to your measurement plan area.
CALYPSO immediately starts a manual measurement.
3 Perform the probing operations requested by CALYPSO.
CALYPSO fills the feature added to the measurement plan with the
nominal data from the probing. Depending on the stylus used, CALYPSO automatically assigns the correct space axis and clearance
group.
4 Repeat step 3 until CALYPSO has created all features.
Note: If you cancel the manual measurement (e.g. by switching the

stop light to red), the super characteristic will be removed again from
the current measurement plan.
5 Check whether the created features comply with the workpiece and
make corrections if necessary.
Note: In certain cases, difficulties and incorrect interpretations may

arise, e.g. regarding the direction of a cone. This is why you must carry
out a plausibility check once the measurement plan has been created.
6 Save the created measurement plan.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-61
Toolboxes
Special features of measurement plans created

from super characteristics
Super characteristics allow you to measure workpieces or parts of workpieces of a certain shape. CALYPSO recognizes the size and other parameters via probing and determines in this way the nominals in the features.
The nominal geometry of the new feature is derived from the computed
feature and rounded with the rounding measure defined in the default
settings. Any existing nominals in the macro are ignored.
Run sequence
During probing, the list of features is processed in succession. If an alignment is necessary, it will be determined according to the definition in the
list of characteristics. Then the run for the features will continue.
Checking the measurement plan

Once the measurement plan has been generated via the probings, you
must check the following measurement plan features.
Nominals
It is not possible to determine or compute all nominals fully automatically.

For certain features and nominals, additional specifications are required
or the determined specifications must be checked and corrected if necessary.
Feature
Special feature
Circle on Cone
If the feature does not contain any alignment, CALYPSO cannot determine the correct space axis automatically.
Angle Point
The nominals cannot be computed and must therefore be entered

manually.
Radius Point
Sphere Point.
General Curve
The projection plane cannot be determined via the automatic feature

recognition and must be checked.
Patterns
If the macro contains features with pattern, CALYPSO measures the first
feature of the pattern and applies the pattern as defined. You must check
whether the pattern of the macro fits the new measurement plan.
Projection planes
If a feature in the macro contains a projection plane, the projection plan

will be applied. A firmly defined projection plan (e.g. XY plane) will be
applied even if you measure the circle in the YZ plane.
Theoretical features
Theoretical features must be checked as these features are directly adopted from the macro.
Formulas
Formulas are adopted from the macro. It is in particular important to

check the formulas if the nominal position is computed with a formula
which uses getActual or getNominal.
6-62
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Toolboxes
Clearance groups
Once the feature has been generated, the clearance group will be computed. Since CALYPSO cannot compute the correct clearance group in
individual cases, you must check the clearance groups of the new features
subsequently.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-63

Overview of the travel paths
CALYPSO needs travel paths in order to move the stylus around the
workpiece without colliding during automatic runs (CNC).
Automatically generated
travel paths
CALYPSO generates the travel paths automatically provided clearance

planes have been defined around the workpiece (see Defining the
clearance planes [ 356]) and the automatic travel generation has been
activated during the CNC start.
To avoid collisions with other objects on the table, generate outer clearance planes in addition.
Optimizing travel paths
You may be able to optimize the travel paths, depending on the geometry
of the workpiece and the resulting positions of the features.
You have the following options for checking and optimizing travel paths:
Checking the travel paths [ 667]
Editing travel paths between features [ 668]
Editing travel paths within a feature [ 671]
Additional travel paths and positions [ 672]
About travel paths

Travel paths contain all the relevant data for the CMM to reach and probe
the feature without collision. Along with the coordinates of the probing
points, this data set can also include data for intermediate positions, for
table control, for stylus changes, and so on.
Travel paths in CALYPSO can be divided into two groups:
If problem is with moves between features
Paths within features
Terms related with this concept include clearance plane, clearance group,
retract plane, clearance distance and retract distance these terms are
explained below.
Paths between features

The paths between features define how the probe moves from one feature to the next. These paths are computed during a CNC run and depend
on the following parameters:
6-64
Current status (current position referenced to the stylus, associated

clearance group, current stylus, etc.)
Settings for the clearance group (retract plane defined or not, etc.)
Clearance planes (dimensions, edge blocking)
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Automatic navigation
check
Outer clearance planes (dimensions)
Other stylus-specific data, position of a stylus system changer, etc.)
When the navigation check is activated, the end positions, the outer
clearance planes and the rack with the stylus systems are included in the
calculation of the travel paths between the features, each according to
the settings.
Paths within a feature

The travel paths within a feature influence the path traced by the probe
in carrying out the measurement strategy defined for a feature. These
paths comprise:
Defined probing points, intermediate positions, scanning paths as

well as
approach and departure positions of the probe relative to a feature

and possible intermediate positions between the probing points.
These components of the path are computed during the CNC run and
depend on the following parameters:
the clearance distance, i.e. the height of the first intermediate

position in the direction of the axis or normal,
the retract distance, i.e. the distance of the generated intermediate position from the probing point in the probing direction.
Additional travel paths outside the features

You can also define additional travel paths and positions outside the features:
Travel paths in clearance groups
RDS swivel position
Park position at end of the CNC run
You can find more details under Defining additional travel paths and
positions [ 672].
Clearance planes/clearance groups

When it is defined, each feature is assigned a clearance plane. This allocation defines the side of the clearance planes on which the probe is
located when approaching the feature. The orientation of the feature
(e.g. direction of cylinder axis or normal of the plane) is of no consequence
in this respect, and the same applies to the probing direction at the feature.
CALYPSO distinguishes between clearance planes (CP) and clearance
groups (SCP).
The clearance planes are assigned when the clearance planes are defined (see Defining the clearance planes [ 356]). The normals of
the clearance planes bear designations corresponding to the direc-
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-65
tions of the coordinate axes (positive or negative), referenced to the

base alignment of the workpiece.
A clearance group is a kind of a local clearance space in which two or

more features can be combined. The probe moves from one feature
of the clearance group to the next feature. This is a way of avoiding
unnecessary retractions of the probe to the clearance plane.
A clearance group, hierarchically speaking, is below a clearance plane
(parent group) from which the features of the clearance group in
question are reached.
Retract planes
Certain geometric conditions require a retract plane for the clearance
group. The illustration below shows what a retract plane signifies:
CP+Z
Retract plane
SCP+Z2
6-66
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
It is necessary to define a retract plane if the approach and departure

positions of all features in a clearance group are such that they cannot
be reached without collision when the probe moves from one to the other. This means that features on different sides of a common interior space
can be assigned to the same clearance plane.
Enter the retract plane when defining the clearance planes.
Travel paths in clearance groups

If the features in a clearance group cannot be reached from the clearance
planes without special travel paths, you can define travel paths in clearance groups.
The result is as follows:
The clearance group is reached safely.
The features of the clearance group are approached without retracts

to the clearance planes when the head moves from one to the other.
The clearance group is left safely.
You define travel paths in clearance groups as additional travel paths

(Defining additional travel paths and positions [ 673]).
Loop clearance groups

Generally, a feature has only one clearance plane and one clearance
group. Tick the Automatic Loop-Safety Group check box if the feature is measured in a loop and you want to use the same movements as
for a new clearance group (retract to parent group).
This makes sense if the feature is in a feature group with pattern. Afterward, the travel paths are optimized.
Checking the travel paths

If you create a measurement plan, some values for the generation of the
travel paths are automatically preset (e.g. clearance group, clearance distance, ...) in the definition template of the features.
Check these settings prior to the first CNC run and change them if necessary.
There is no guarantee that the run will be collision-free if you fail to check
the defaults.
We recommend the following procedure:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-67
Check the clearance planes, the clearance distance and the retract
distance in the definition template of the feature (more information
can be found in the Online Help under Clearance data).
The criterion for the correct clearance plane is the position of the
probe relative to the clearance planes (on the approach to the first
intermediate position of the feature in question).
When you finish programming the measurement plan, perform a test

move (see Testing the clearance planes [ 360]).
This is your opportunity to recheck the assignment of features to
clearance planes in the displayed CAD model.
NOTICE
Other travel paths might be generated, depending on the characteristics
selected or if the run takes place without a result reset.
Perform the first CNC run at reduced speed.
If routing turns out to be poor, click Help in the Start Measurement window and proceed in accordance with the instructions.
Editing travel paths between features

Overview: Editing travel paths between
features
On travel paths between features, the intermediate position of the probe
is computed from the current position and the approach position for the
next feature.
NOTICE
Consider edge blocking: It could be a help (see Blocking individual
edges of the clearance planes [ 361]).
You can influence the travel paths between features. You can find more
details under:
6-68
Defining clearance groups [ 669]
Deleting a clearance group [ 669]
Assigning clearance planes or clearance groups [ 669]
Defining retract planes in clearance groups [ 669]
Automatic navigation check [ 670]
Minimizing travel paths in feature group (see in the Online Help under
Selecting feature group for sorting).
Defining the outer clearance planes [ 671]
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining clearance groups

When you define clearance groups, remember that all the features in a
group must be reachable from each other and from a higher-order clearance plane.
1 Select Plan Navigation Sub Clearance.
2 In the Clearance Groups window, click New and enter a name for the
new clearance group.
3 Select under Parent Group the desired clearance plane.
Deleting a clearance group

You can delete a clearance group when you no longer need it.
2 Select the group you want to delete next to Clearance Group.
3 Click Delete.
Assigning clearance planes or clearance groups

A feature can often have different clearance planes. Automatic assignment does not always result in optimized travel paths, so you have the
option of changing the assignment or defining new clearance groups.
1 In the definition template of the feature, click Strategy and open the
Clearance Data.
The elements that make up this dialog box are described in Clearance
data in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
2 Select the desired clearance plane (CP) or clearance group (SCP) next
to Clearance Groups.
The new clearance plane or clearance group is taken into account in the
next automatic CNC run.
Use the Measurement Plan Editor Features if you want to assign
clearance planes or clearance groups to several features at a time (see
Editing a measurement plan [ 68]).
Defining retract planes in clearance groups

All features in a clearance group must be reachable from each other and
from the higher-order clearance plane. To ensure this collision-free accessibility, define a retract plane within a clearance group.
The Clearance Groups window appears on the screen.
2 Tick the Retract To Inner Plane check box.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-69
3 Type in the height of the retract plane relative to the datum of the
base alignment (perpendicular to the higher-order clearance plane).
Automatic navigation check

During the CNC run, you can check the travel paths between the features
and change them if necessary. This avoids collisions with outer obstacles
(other workpieces, the stylus system changer rack) as well as traveling to
the end positions.
If the navigation check is switched on, CALYPSO attempts to probe
around the obstacles. The form of the stylus is also considered: under
certain circumstances, long, narrow styli can only pass over the workpiece
on the side, and short, wide styli can only pass over the top of the workpiece.
If it is not possible to pass over at all, the run is stopped and you receive
a message. You can then either continue or cancel the run.
What is checked?
The navigation check takes the following information into account:
the end positions of the CMM (measuring range limits)

The values are taken from the default settings.
the outer clearance planes

You can determine the outer clearance planes by entering 6 coordinates.
the stylus changer rack

The stylus changer rack and the stylus system in the rack are considered automatically. The stylus of each rack projecting the farthest into
the measuring range specifies the plane on which the travel path is
checked.
Each of these three criteria can be switched on or off individually.

Activating the navigation check
To activate the navigation check:

1 Select Plan Navigation Navigation Check.
2 Activate the desired checks in the Navigation Check window:
CMM End Positions
Outer Clearance Plane
Magazine with stylus systems
The CAD window shows the measuring range and outer clearance
planes as a wire frame model. A transparent volume cube represents
the clearance planes. The foremost styli of the stylus system changer
rack are shown as points.
During the CNC run, CALYPSO checks the specified path with regard to
lack of collisions and changes the path if necessary.
6-70
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining the outer clearance planes

To avoid collisions with other workpieces or objects on the CMM table,
you can define outer clearance planes. Then CALYPSO performs movements between the features only within the space between the two
clearance planes.
Z
Y
Measuring
volume
Outer
clearance
planes
Clearance
planes
1 Select Plan Navigation Outer Clearance Planes.

2 In the Outer Clearance Planes window, enter the following:
Alignment
The coordinate system determines the inclination of the boundary
planes of the outer clearance planes with respect to the workpiece and
its clearance planes.
6 coordinates for limiting the outer clearance planes.
Editing travel paths within a feature

Overview: Editing travel paths within a feature
The paths within a feature define the path followed by the probe from
one probing point to the next.
Your options for editing the paths within a feature are described in the
following sections:
Moving the approach position closer to the feature [ 672].
Approaching the clearance distance after each probing [ 672].
Changing the point list [ 4170]. This will help you, for example,
to define optimum probing points.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-71
Moving the approach position closer to the

feature
The distance separating an approach position from the feature is defined
by the Clearance Distance parameter. If the clearance distance for a
feature is excessive, the result can be collisions in narrow grooves or gaps,
because when it attempts to move to the clearance distance the stylus
comes into contact with the material opposite.
Clearance Data.
2 Check that the correct clearance group is selected.
3 Untick the Clearance Distance check box and enter the new clearance distance.
Approaching the clearance distance after each

probing
For certain measurements of circles, cylinders and circle segments with
discrete points, you can set the travel paths so that the stylus moves back
to the clearance distance after each probing.
This avoids having to insert additional intermediate positions, e.g. when
measuring circular grooves with ridges or other obstacles.
Clearance Data.
2 Next to Move to ..., select the At each probing entry.
The stylus now moves forward and, after each probing, moves to an additional intermediate position at the height of the clearance distance.
Additional travel paths and positions

Overview: Additional travel paths and
positions
CALYPSO calculates the travel paths around the workpiece and, if necessary, a swivel position for the RDS automatically. To do this, Calypso
takes into consideration the size and form of the stylus and probe.
6-72
In certain cases, e.g. when the end positions are reached, you can also
define the swivel position.
You can define additional travel paths in clearance groups for special
feature positions.
You can define a park position for the end of the CNC run.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
All additional paths and positions can be defined and edited in a similar
way using the strategy window for paths. Call up the strategy window,
select the strategies as features of the strategy list and edit the strategies.
List of path features
CALYPSO manages these paths in a separate list. To display this list, select
Plan Navigation... Navigation Paths List.
Double-click a path in the list to open the corresponding strategy window.
Special aspects of travel paths in clearance groups

With paths for travel paths in clearance groups, remember that the path
after the last feature of the clearance group is executed again backwards.
Example: The stylus is swiveled to a certain angle to move into a cave.
However, the angle is changed when measuring in the cave. To ensure
that the stylus has the same safe position when moving out, the suitable
RDS position must be defined at the end of the path. The safe position is
ensured by executing the path backwards when moving out.
The same applies to rotary table positions in the path.
Defining additional travel paths and positions

Editing or defining additional travel paths and positions

1 Select Plan Navigation... and the corresponding menu item in
the submenu:
CNC End Park Position
RDS Swivel Position
Sub Clearance
Defining paths in clearance groups

1 Select the Sub Clearance menu item and click Path.
2 Select an existing path or create a new path.
Note: Alternatively, select Plan Navigation... Navigation

Paths List and double-click the desired path feature in the path list
on the left.
3 Click the icons for the desired path features to transfer them to the
strategy list one after the other.
The icons are described in Strategy (Path) in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
4 Open a strategy feature to edit it.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-73
Define the properties and parameters of the corresponding strategy

element.
5 By saving with OK, a new path feature is included in the list of path
features.
Example: CNC Park Position

You can define additional travel paths in clearance groups and a park
position. All additional paths and positions can be defined and edited in
a similar way using the strategy window for paths.
The following example shows a strategy for the approach to a park position in an upper corner of the CMM:
Path feature
Specifications
Remarks
Clearance Plane
Current clearance planes

with offset 30
The stylus system clears from the current

clearance planes and moves by an additional 30 mm (to avoid getting stuck in
the case of inclined clearance planes).
Pos. MPrb. MC
1 000 000 / 1 000 000 / -20 The stylus system moves to -20 in the Z
axis of the machine coordinate system.
Pos. MPrb. MC
20 / -20 / 1 000 000
6-74
61212-2011002
The stylus system moves to X = 20, Y =

-20 in the machine coordinate system.
CALYPSO
Multimedia user information

Information files in the measurement
plan
In CALYPSO, you can include information in audiovisual form in a measurement plan. Users can then access this information prior to running the
measurement plan. For example, you can integrate a video dealing with
correct clamping of a workpiece or a photograph or drawing with the
right alignment of the workpiece.
NOTICE
If you have the appropriate programs on your computer, you can view
files of the following formats: *.txt, *.rtf, *.doc, *. bmp, *.avi, *.flc, *.pdf
and *.gra.
The information is saved in a file. A measurement plan can be assigned
its own file for user information.
You can create video files on any PC with a video grabber board and a
video camera.
NOTICE
Files created using Microsoft Word (*.doc) should be saved in Word in
the Rich Text Format (RTF), and subsequently this file (*.rtf) should be
used. This has the advantage that the document is opened as write-protected with the CZViewer.
You can view the added information in the Start Measurement dialog
box by clicking User Information.
Adding an information file to a

measurement plan
2 Select Plan User Information Select.
3 Open the desired file.
The file is now available to everyone who uses the measurement plan.
Only one user information file can be selected for each measurement
plan. You can change which file is selected simply by following the same
directions for selecting a file the first time.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
6-75
Loading the information file of a

measurement plan
Calling the user information to be used with a measurement plan
2 Click the Run Measurement Plan icon.
The Start Measurement / Measurement Plan Definition window appears on the screen.
The <user directory>\workarea\ inspections\<measurement plan

name>\icon.bmp image file saved in the directory of the current measurement plan is displayed at the top left corner.
3 Click User Information.
The information file is displayed. The Windows Media Player is opened
for video files.
6-76
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Chapter
Running a measurement plan
.................................................................................................................

Measurement plan run ............................................................................. 72
Defining the scope of measurement ......................................................... 73
Entering printout header data .................................................................. 76
Starting a measurement ........................................................................... 77
Checking and controlling the measurement plan run ............................. 711
Repeating measurements ....................................................................... 723
Manual measurements ........................................................................... 730
Alternating operation with CALYPSO and UMESS .................................. 731
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-1

The preconditions listed below must be satisfied before you can run a
measurement plan:
The CMM must be initialized (you will find more information in the
Online Help under Initializing the CMM [ 1015]).
The scope of measurement must be defined.
A measurement plan defines what is to be measured, whether or not a

custom printout will be generated, and how the CMM will perform the
measurement. CALYPSO automatically measures all the features you defined and calculates the characteristics in the order you specified.
Before you run a measurement plan, make sure that the CMM is clear for
automatic movement around the part and fixture. To assure yourself,
move the stylus once around the workpiece.
If you want to combine two or more measurement plans (and evaluate
them together), you do so by starting a master measurement plan.
7-2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining the scope of measurement

Options for defining the scope of
measurement
If you want to run only selected parts of the measurement plan instead
of running the complete measurement plan, you can restrict the scope of
measurement.
Complete scope of measurement
Limited scope of measurement
You have the following options of restricting the scope of measurement:
Measuring the current

selection
Measuring the current selection
Measuring mini-plans
Masking characteristics
To measure a combination of measurement plan features once or twice

in succession, mark the individual features in the corresponding list and
start the measurement plan (see Measuring the current selection [ 74]).
If you want to measure repeatedly the same measurement plan features
together, combine them in measurement plan groups (see Working
with measurement plan groups [ 74]).
Measuring mini-plans
If you want to repeat certain characteristics and you prefer not to create
a measurement plan group (for example because you do not want a
group named in the default printout), you can create a mini-plan.
Masking characteristics
To exclude certain characteristics from the execution of the measurement

plan, mask the corresponding characteristics (see in the Online Help under
Measurement plan editor characteristics).
Masked characteristics are highlighted in light gray in the measurement
plan list and they are displayed with the image of a small mask.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-3
Measuring the current selection

1 In the list of characteristics or features, highlight the desired measurement plan features.
3 Choose Current Selection from the Selection group (see Starting a measurement [ 77]).
Working with measurement plan groups

Characteristics or features can be combined in a measurement plan
group. This allows you to select fixed combinations of measurement plan
features quickly for measurement.
NOTICE
You can also include an existing measurement plan group in a higherorder measurement plan group and create a hierarchy.
The functions available for measurement plan groups are as follows:
Edit Form group combines all marked measurement plan features in a group.
A double click on the icon of the group displays or hides the features
of the group.
Edit Undo group undoes an existing group.
Working with mini-plans

If you want to repeat certain characteristics and you prefer not to create
a measurement plan group (for example because you do not want a
group named in the default printout), you can create a mini-plan.
NOTICE
A mini-plan is assigned a unique name. The name is not shown in the list
of characteristics.
Creating mini-plans
There are three ways of creating mini-plans:
Combining single characteristics

Highlight the desired characteristics and select Plan MiniPlan Define.
7-4
Creating a mini-plan for each selected measurement plan group (see

in the Online Help under Create a Characteristic for each Feature selected)
Creating a mini-plan for each measurement plan group of a certain

hierarchical area. The naming of the mini-plans corresponds to the
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
hierarchy of the characteristics group (see Form Mini-Plans from group

hierarchy)
These mini-plans are suitable for the use of FACS (Flexible Automation
and Control System).
Working with mini-plans

The Plan Mini-Plan menu offers the following additional functions:
Show displays the features of a mini-plan in a window.

Mini-plans are not shown in the list of characteristics.
With Modify or Change Several you can change the composition

of one or more mini-plans.
If one of the characteristics is changed after the mini-plan has been

defined, you must update the mini-plans to apply the change. Select
the Update entry.
Delete deletes the mini-plans marked. The characteristics of the

mini-plans are not affected.
You can learn how to measure a mini-plan at Starting a measurement [ 77].
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-5
Entering printout header data
Entering printout header data

Overview of the printout header data
To document the measurement in a custom printout, enter the following
printout header data before you run the measurement plan:
Global printout header data refers to the measurement plan and has
to be entered only once for each measurement plan.
The global printout header data includes, for example, the name of
the operator and the name of the measurement plan.
Local printout header data refers to the measurement and has to be

entered before measurement starts each time a measurement plan is
run.
The local printout header data includes entries such as lot ID and
order.
You decide which data to include in the printout header. For more details,
see Preparing printout header data [ 827] and INI file for printout
header data [ 830].
Entering global printout header data

Global printout header data refers to the measurement plan and has to
be entered only once for each measurement plan.
1 Select Resources Printout header parameters and enter the
global printout header data.
If you want the system to prompt for the local printout header data at
the start of every CNC run, tick the Force Input at Start check box.
Entering local printout header data

Local printout header data refers to the measurement and has to be entered before measurement starts each time a measurement plan is run.
1 Click the Run Measurement Plan icon to start the measurement
plan.
2 Click Printout header data and enter the local printout header
data.
7-6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Starting a measurement
CNC run and manual run
As regards measurement, a distinction is drawn between two process
modes:
CNC run
The CMM is under the fully automatic control of CALYPSO. A prerequisite is that the CMM installed is CNC-capable. If you have activated the setup mode for a feature, the CNC run will be interrupted
before the feature and you can define further parameters in the strategy of the feature. This is particularly suitable for optical measurements where light and camera settings have to be adjusted.
Note: CALYPSO checks the licenses during the operations. If a license

violation occurs during the CNC run, the run will be interrupted to
avoid data loss. CALYPSO displays a warning message to inform you
about the interruption. You can exit CALYPSO or recheck the license
after elimination of the cause.
Note: Usually, CALYPSO cancels the CNC run if no probing takes place
along the probing search path. This can be avoided by activating
Continue at missing probing [ 711].
Manual run
In a manual run, CALYPSO only manages the measurement plan and
tells you which feature you must probe next, and how many probings
to take. As well as probing the features, you also control the CMM.
Both modes of measurement are started from the Start Measurement dialog box. This is where you set the options for the measurement
plan run, and where you start measurement. It contains the parameters
you use to
define the scope of measurement,
set the parameters for the printout, and
define the settings for the CMM.
Starting a CNC run

Before you can start a CNC run, define the details of the run in the Start
Measurement dialog box.
The dialog box is opened by means of the Run Measurement Plan
icon.
NOTICE
You will find more information on setting these parameters in Start
Measurement / Measurement Plan Definition in the Online Help.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-7
NOTICE
If you have activated the Setup Mode for certain features in the Measurement Plan Editor Features, the CNC run will be interrupted at
these positions. The feature's strategy opens and you can make settings.
The CNC run will only be continued after you have confirmed the settings.
This is particularly suitable for optical measurements where light and
camera settings have to be adjusted.
Quick launch via F9

The measurement plan can also be run with default settings. To do so,
select Execute Now! in the context menu or press F9.
CALYPSO measures the selected features or characteristics with the following presettings:
Group
Settings
Selection
Base Alignment
Current Alignment
Current Selection
Print plots
Clear existing results
Order of the run: From Characteristic List.
Movement between the features: Automatic.
Run Mode: Normal
Speed in mm/s: Maximum speed
Result
CMM
Manual run
Starting a manual run
In a manual run, CALYPSO guides you through the measurement process,
but you have to perform the probing manually. This will be the case, for
example, if you work with a manual CMM.
2 Select Manual from the CMM group under Run Mode.
3 If you want to measure the coordinate system manually as well, go to
the Selection group and select Manual Run for the coordinate
system.
4 Set the parameters as necessary for measurement.
You will find more information on setting these parameters in Start
Measurement / Measurement Plan Definition in the Online Help.
7-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5 Tick the Custom printout check box if you want the system to
generate a custom printout.
6 Click OK to start the measurement plan.
CALYPSO steps you through the process: This is done via the Manual
Alignment dialog box.
Controlling the manual run

You can intervene in a manual run:
You can declare the manual run as an automatic run at any time.
You can delete the last probing point.
If the warning limits are activated in the Measurement Plan Editor

Features, CALYPSO indicates probings which possibly have not been
performed exactly. It is possible to delete the measured values and to
repeat the measurement.
You can change the number of nominal probing points if, for example, some points are not accessible, or additional points are to be
probed.
You can cancel the manual run.
You will find more information under Manual alignment in the CALYPSO
dialog reference in the Online Help.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-9
Warning limits in the manual run

If the warning limits are activated in the Measurement Plan Editor
Features, CALYPSO indicates probings during the manual run which
possibly have not been performed exactly.
For this purpose, CALYPSO evaluates the values for scattering and form
once a feature has been measured. If a warning limit is exceeded, the
Question dialog box opens.
It is possible to delete the measured values and to repeat the measurement, to continue the measurement or to cancel the run.
Scattering via the control
console
7-10
You can also answer the dialog via the control console:
Answer
Control console
Control console blue
Remeasure
Correction
F3
Continue
OK
Return
CNC Cancel
ESC
ESC
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Checking and controlling the measurement

plan run
Basics about the measurement plan run
You can intervene in the process while the measurement plan is running.
For example, you can interrupt the run or cancel it.
Setup mode
Another way to intervene is to activate the Setup Mode (Setup mode

for features [ 711]). If you have activated the setup mode for a feature, the CNC run will be interrupted before this feature. You can then
make additional settings in the feature's strategy before you continue the
execution of the measurement plan.
Continue at missing
probing
If Continue at missing probing [ 711] has been activated, the CNC

run will also continue if no probing took place during a probing attempt
along the probing search path.
Stop Light window
CALYPSO's Stop Light (Working with the Stop Light window [ 712]) and (if installed) the Light signal window (Working
with the light signal window [ 719]) dialog boxes are the communication interface between you and the system.
Joystick
To avoid moving the joystick inadvertently in the wrong direction during

teach-in programming, you can lock the movement in the corresponding
direction.
Setup Mode for features

In the setup mode of the measurement plan, you define the features before which the CNC run is to be interrupted. You can then modify the
strategy of the respective feature. This is useful, e.g., for optical measurements to optimize light and camera settings.
The CNC run will then be interrupted at the defined positions and the
strategy setting window of the feature will open.
Activating the Setup
Mode
You activate the setup mode for a feature in the Measurement Plan Editor
Features. To do so, select the Setup Mode entry from the selection list
and highlight the feature in the list of features. In the Set To selection
menu, select ON.
Continue at missing probing

If no probing took place during a probing attempt along the probing
search path, the CNC run will normally be canceled and the message
Probing not found will be issued.
However, you can activate Continue at missing probing for the entire
measurement plan or for individual features. To do so, select the setting
On under Probing Continue at missing probing in the
Measurement Plan Editor Features.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-11
If the corresponding feature cannot be calculated due to an insufficient

number of points, a note will be displayed in the printout.
NOTICE
The Continue at missing probing function does not work for the following measurement methods:
- Scanning
- Self-centering probing
- Space point normal measurement
- Curves and free form surfaces
Workpiece recognition by probing attempt

If you want to use a successful probing or a missing probing directly for
workpiece recognition, you can use the getActual().elementIsMissing
PCM function.
NOTICE
To do so, you need the PCM Technology option.
The getActual("Point1").elementIsMissing PCM function returns
true if the Point1 feature could be measured. If not, the result is
false.
You can thus use the getActual(FeatureName).elementIsMissing function for workpiece and material queries. In this way you can determine
whether a workpiece is installed at the provided position. A point is recommended as feature. It makes sense to evaluate the return value in a
conditional instruction (IF ... THEN ...).
However, the getActual("Circlen").boreIsMissing function is used to
recognize a missing bore for a circle measurement.
NOTICE
The message No result: Not enough points normally displayed if a
probing is missing and in the message window is not displayed in case of
getActual(FeatureName).elementIsMissing - unless the feature is called
as a feature by a characteristic.
Working with the Stop Light window

Stop Light window
Stop Light window
In the Stop Light window, a stylized stop light helps control process flows
and displays important status information.
The Stop Light window is always on view after you start measurement. It
controls communication between the CMM and CALYPSO. It is also the
interface that enables you to intervene in a measurement plan run.
7-12
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
NOTICE
Do not close the Stop Light window, because if you do CALYPSO will lose
contact with the CMM.
However, you can always minimize the Stop Light window or put it behind another window. You can display the Stop Light window permanently in the foreground.
The illustration below shows the Stop Light window:
Configuring the Stop Light window

Elements of the Stop
Light window that can
be activated
You can also display the Stop Light window permanently in the foreground via View Always on top.
The following elements that can be activated via the View menu are used
for the control of the measurement plan run:
Stop Light
Base Alignment
Move in Part Alignment System
Stylus system information
Display Position
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-13
Position Display Extension (displays also the rotary table angle and the
A and B angles)
Separate Coordinate Display (displays the coordinates in a separate

window)
Probing On/Off
If you want to move the views in the Stop Light window, click the Move
Elements icon and position the views as you wish. To exit the movement
mode, click an unoccupied part of the window.
To save the arrangement of views, click the Save view, size and position icon.
Additional windows
Via the More menu, you can open the following windows in the Stop
Light window:
Taskbar
To call other ZEISS programs
Status Monitor
To display and log all routine procedures of CALYPSO
Joy Stick
Call of the CZ Control Panel Extension which allows you to lock
the joystick of any axis (see Locking the axes of the joystick [ 718])
Show RT loading (only for RT-AB)

Shows the center of mass of the workpiece on the rotary table
(Visualizing the loading of the RT-AB rotary table [ 1238])
Configure changer (only for DuraMax)

To display the stylus system changer for the DuraMax and activate the
changer protection
Measurement area illumination

Once the illumination of the measurement area has been switched off
automatically for working with the optical sensor, it will not automatically
be switched on again when returning to the tactile sensor.
Use More... O-Inspect to switch the measurement area illumination
manually on and off.
Interrupting or exiting a run

Canceling a run
There are many reasons why a run might have to be canceled. Certain
prerequisites have to be satisfied before you can restart a canceled run.
7-14
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1 Click red in the Stop Light window or press the ESC key on the control
console (not in case of Dynalog P!).
The CMM immediately cancels the measurement.
You have to click green before you can start a measurement plan again.
Interrupting a run
Interrupting means that the CMM comes to an immediate standstill, but
can continue at some subsequent point in time.
1 In the Stop Light window, click the yellow light.
The CMM comes to an immediate stop, the green light flashes.
2 To continue the run: Click green.
- or To stop the run for good: Click red.
Controlling the end of run

The Stop Light window allows you to control the end of run or a provisional interruption regardless of the operating mode (CNC, AutoRun or
FACS) of CALYPSO.
To interrupt, cancel or end a run:
1 In the Stop Light window, click the End program icon.
You have four options in the displayed window:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-15
Button
Function
Continue Run
The run is resumed (corresponds to a click on

green).
Cancel Run
The run is canceled (corresponds to a click on

red).
End Run and Save Data
The measurement of the current feature is completed.

Printout and data storage are performed as
specified. In a run after measured features, all
computable characteristics are automatically
output.
End Run without Saving Data
The run of the current characteristic and the

corresponding features is completed.
When using the run sequence of features, only
the current feature is processed.
The CMM is moved to a clearance position.
Printout and data storage are not carried out.
2 Select the desired type of continuation.

The functions performed at the end of a CNC run are run in the proper
manner by selecting the End program icon when exiting:
Clearing from the workpiece or moving to a park position
Processing the post parameters of the measurement plan
Printout (default printout, compact printout, custom printout)
Outputting results in a file
Calling batch files
Increasing the part number automatically
These functions are not performed upon Cancel.
Reaction of the CMM following a collision

In the case of a collision between the stylus and the workpiece, the CMM
control switches all drives off. This is designed to prevent damage to the
workpiece and the stylus. In the Stop Light window, the stop light goes
red.
Measurement can only be resumed if not all the buttons in the list of
features are red or green.
7-16
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Special aspects of collision with RDS

If your CMM is equipped with an RDS (incremental articulating probe
holder), bear the following aspect in mind if a collision occurs:
If the RDS collides while the CMM is not in motion and if the disk contacts
open, the collision will not be detected when the machine subsequently
moves (because the contacts are open).
A collision can be detected only if the adapter contacts are opened by
movement of the CMM.
Clearing the CMM after a collision

You have to clear the CMM if the stylus collides with the workpiece or
the fixture.
Note: Passive sensors: If you use an SP600, SP25 or XXT, you must clear
the stylus before you set the stop light to green. Otherwise, the weight
of the stylus itself is determined incorrectly.
1 In the Stop Light window, click the green light.
The connection between controller and CMM is reestablished.
2 Using the joysticks, carefully move the stylus away from the workpiece
until it reaches a safe position.
Resume your work. To be on the safe side, check the stylus system and
make sure that the stylus is not twisted or damaged.
Restarting a run after cancelation

You can restart an interrupted measurement run if not all the buttons in
the list of features are red or green.
Note: Passive sensors: If you use an SP600, SP25 or XXT, you must clear
the stylus before you set the stop light to green. Otherwise, the weight
of the stylus itself is determined incorrectly.
1 Set the stop light to green.
3 Deactivate the Clear existing results check box.
4 Start the run with OK.
CALYPSO reruns the measurement plan. This time around, however, it
measures only the features for which no measured values were recorded.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-17
Locking the axes of the joystick

To avoid moving the joystick inadvertently in the wrong direction during
teach-in programming, you can lock the movement in the undesired direction.
In the Stop Light window, select More... Lock Joystick.
In the CZ Control Panel Extension window, it is then possible to
define the side on which the operator is positioned by means of certain
function keys. Additional function keys allow you to lock the X, Y, Z or R
axis and to unlock them. Furthermore, the CZ Control Panel Extension can be moved to the foreground or hidden.
You must configure the CZ Control Panel Extension (see below)
before you can operate the function keys.
Use Quit to close the CZ Control Panel Extension window.
Configuring the CZ Control Panel Extension.

To configure the CZ Control Panel Extension, click the Options
button. The Config window appears on the screen.
Enter the function keys to be used for the corresponding function in the
input fields. A typical assignment is for example:
Function keys
Functions
F1, F2, F3, F4
The operator is positioned at the front, at the back, on the left or on

the right
F5, F6, F7, F8
Locking/unlocking the joystick in X, Y, Z, R
F9
Showing/hiding the CZ Control Panel Extension

Select Save Settings to save your settings.
Select Quit to close the window.
Configuring the stylus system changer for

DuraMax
For CMMs of the type DuraMax, the possible positions of the stylus
changer racks are predefined by the type. CALYPSO recognizes these positions and can thus block the area around the changers to avoid collisions
with the sensor. Activate this protection via the Configure tool
changer rack program.
Activating the sensor protection

Conditions:
You are logged in as the master user.
1 Select More DuraMax Configure changer in the menu of
the Stop Light window.
7-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The Configure tool changer rack window opens. A stylized representation of the work area of the DuraMax is displayed.
2 Click the buttons to the positions of which a stylus changer rack is

attached.
Left rack: Rack on the left
Middle rack: Rack in the center
Right rack: Rack on the right
3 Activate Enable rack protection and confirm with OK.
4 Exit CALYPSO / CMM-OS.
5 Switch the CMM off and on again.
6 Restart CALYPSO and establish the connection between CALYPSO and
the CMM.
CALYPSO know recognizes the position of the racks and uses this information for the travel paths.
Working with the light signal window

If you operate a light signal system with the CMM, you can have CALYPSO
configured by the Carl Zeiss Service so that the total result of the measurement plan and the operating state of CALYPSO are signaled to the
light signal system.
States that can be signaled
The following states can be signaled by CALYPSO:
Measurement completed with the result within tolerance
Measurement completed with the result out of tolerance
Measurement completed with the result warning limit exceeded
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-19
Configuration in CALYPSO
Measurement completed without result
Initialization of all lamps of the result display (e.g. when starting the
measurement)
Error (red stop light)
Measurement in progress
Idle state, CMM ready (green stop light)
Run stopped (yellow stop light)
Initial state after program start / CMM connection
The light signal can be controlled by different applications. To ensure that

CALYPSO controls the light signal system, you must configure the system
settings in CALYPSO.
1 Select Extras Settings CMM and open the Light signal
notebook page.
2 Tick the Control Light Signal check box.

The light signal of the CMM is controlled with immediate effect.
NOTICE
If you are interested in this function, contact the Carl Zeiss sales department.
7-20
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Working with the remark window

Use of the remark window
The Remark Window assists you in analyzing any occurring problems

quickly and easily.
During the measurements, the run is logged in the Events window.
Here, all messages relating to the run of the individual program modules
and the CNC run are displayed with date, time and a short description.
This short information, however, is not useful as remedy in the case of
large measurement plans.
Summarized detailed information about run-related errors and special
aspects as well as tips for problem elimination can be obtained easily in
the Info on the run window. This window makes it possible to analyze
and eliminate problems and errors that occur in the CNC run systematically and quickly.
Call
Depending on the settings, the remark window opens during the CNC
run or, if necessary, afterwards. The window is based on the measurement plan and is saved together with the corresponding measurement
plan.
You can always open it in the corresponding measurement plan after the
measurement using View Information on run. The Information list will then show the problems and events that occurred during
the last CNC run if the list has not been reset before closing the measurement plan.
Using the remark window

You can go through the entries in the Information list and evaluate
the descriptions. The Features concerned list displays the measurement plan features belonging to the currently highlighted remark. Re61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-21
marks and suggestions for solving the problem are provided in the Description text field below.
By clicking one of the entries in the Features concerned list, the corresponding feature in the measurement plan area is selected and by clicking Open or double-clicking, the corresponding feature is opened.
Here, you can make the changes according to the help information in the
Description field.
When you have analyzed and solved the problems that occurred, click
Reset. Thus, all remarks in the list are deleted and the window is closed.
NOTICE
The Clear existing results setting in the Start Measurement window also resets the remark list.
Status after cancellation
If the run was canceled by an error (collision or technical fault) or by

yourself (by activating the red stop light, Escape or Emergency-Stop), the
Information list shows the last feature or characteristic measured prior
to the cancellation. You can thus find out at which point the measurement plan was interrupted. This is particularly useful for large measurement plans with long measurement duration to determine the measurement plan progress and to find out at which point in the measurement
plan the fault occurred.
Printouts
If the corresponding setting is made, the run-related remarks are summarized in the custom printout and compact printout.
7-22
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Repeating measurements
Use of repeat measurements
Repeat measurements are performed to avoid the transmission of measuring errors to the statistics system. Measuring errors are, for example,
caused by soiled workpieces. In this case, the entire workpiece must be
measured again.
CALYPSO makes it possible to remeasure individual critical characteristics of a workpiece and to combine the new measuring results with the
already correctly measured results.
Repeat measurements are also suitable for the automatic measurement
of several similar workpieces, for example on a pallet. Repeat measurements can also be performed at a later stage. With the aid of the part
number, CALYPSO remembers which parts still cause measuring errors.
The settings for a repeat measurement are stored in the measurement
plan. You will be informed as soon as measuring errors occur. You can
then interactively control the type and number of repeat measurements
and decide which measuring results are to be accepted and which not.
Repeat measurements in CALYPSO

Critical characteristics
During a repeat measurement, CALYPSO measures all features and references of the activated characteristics. The already measured uncritical
values are combined with the values of the repeat measurement. The
values are then saved in a QDAS file and transferred to the statistics program.
Defining critical characteristics yourself
If critical characteristics are output by CALYPSO upon completion of a

measurement plan run, this may be due to measuring errors. The following characteristics are critical characteristics:
Characteristics that could not be calculated
Characteristics the feature references of which are not defined completely
Characteristics the features of which cause errors during the calculation
All characteristics that are out of tolerance and that are possibly limited by the badElement Formula function
If you want to limit the critical characteristics according to certain factors, you have to program a PCM function called badElementFormula.
Insert the criterion for the selection of the critical characteristics in this
PCM function.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-23
Example: Defining an exclusion criterion via

badElementFormula
You can limit the critical characteristics according to certain factors by
means of the PCM function called badElementFormula. To do so, insert
the criterion for the selection of the critical characteristics in this PCM
function.
In the example below, all characteristics that are out of tolerance (CONDITION_1) and the characteristic attribute of which is greater than or
equal to 2 or undefined (equal to 9999) (CONDITION_2) are recorded.
// Activating RecheckMode
ON_OFF=1
RESET=0
MAX_CYCLE_NUMBER=5
setRecheckMode(ON_OFF,RESET,MAX_CYCLE_NUMBER)
display("----------------------------------")
// Define recheck-partnumber with PCM-term
RECHECK_PARTNB_TERM="getRunID()+getRecordHead("order")"
defineRecheckPartNumber(RECHECK_PARTNB_TERM)
// Define "badElementFormula"
defineFunctionStart("badElementFormula")
OBJECT_NAME=getFunctionObjectName()
VALUE_K2005=val(getCFAttribute(OBJECT_NAME,"u_k2005class"))
CONDITION_1=(VALUE_K2005>=2) OR (VALUE_K2005==9999)
CONDITION_2=not(getActual(OBJECT_NAME).inTolerance)
RETURN_VALUE=CONDITION_1 AND CONDITION_2
// VVV Only for controlling
display(OBJECT_NAME)
display(VALUE_K2005)
display(RETURN_VALUE)
// ^^^
defineFunctionEnd("RETURN_VALUE")
Preparing a repeat measurement

The repeat measurement is a property of the measurement plan. You
must activate the repeat measurement before you can run it.
Activating a repeat measurement

1 Select Plan Repeat Measurement.
The Repeat Measurement window is opened.
7-24
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 Tick the Repeat Measurement ON check box.

3 Enter under Max. no. of repeat measurements the maximum
number of repetitions of the measurement.
4 If the series of repeat measurements of the same part has not been
completed (no more critical characteristics or series terminated with
Accept Measurement), you can terminate the series yourself by
selecting Reset.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-25
The run is then identical to the run of a new series of repeat measurements.
5 Tick the part numbers that are to be measured again in the Reset
part number window.
Activating a repeat measurement via PCM

You can also activate the repeat measurement via PCM commands. To
do this, use the setRecheckMode PCM function. The syntax is:
setRecheckMode(Recheck[,Reset][,Maximum})
The parameters have the following meaning:
Entering the PCM function
Parameter
Meaning
Recheck = 0
Repeat measurement deactivated
Recheck = 1
Repeat measurement activated
Reset: = 0
No reset
Reset: = 1
Reset
Maximum
The maximum number of repeat measurements of

0 means no limitation
You have the following options for entering the PCM function:
Entry in the presettings of the measurement plan
Entry via an external PCM file
Performing the repeat measurement

If a repeat measurement is active, CALYPSO checks the existence of critical characteristics during the CNC run and proposes a repeat measurement if necessary.
1 Make sure that the repeat measurement has been activated.
2 Make sure that the part numbers of the workpieces are entered incrementally in the printout header data of the Start Measurement dialog.
3 Start the measurement.
7-26
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The measurement plan run is performed. Critical characteristics are

determined. If critical characteristics exist, the Repeat Measurement window opens.
4 Check the workpiece for dirt or other reasons causing measuring errors.
5 Start the repeat measurement by clicking OK in the Repeat Measurement dialog.
The measurement plan run is performed again. If critical characteristics
still exist, the Select Characteristics for Repeat Measurement dialog is opened.
6 Define the characteristics to be used for the repeat measurement and

to be measured again in the Select Characteristics for Repeat
Measurement dialog.
This cycle is run until the Max. no. of repeat measurements is
reached.
- or Click Accept Measurement to transfer the measurement to QDAS.
The custom printout is displayed in both cases.
7 Start the CNC run to measure the same workpiece again.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-27
Evaluating repeat measurements

The results of the repeat measurement are shown in the default printout
and in the custom printout.
Default printout
The default printout shows the following information about the repeat
measurement:
Identification of the measurement as a repeat measurement
Repeat measurement counter
Part number
List of checked characteristics
Custom printout
Characteristics that are within the tolerance.

Characteristics for which no results exist.
Characteristics which show critical features and are therefore out
of tolerance.
In the custom printout, the values of all repeat measurements of a cycle

are combined as if they originate from one measurement. In this case,
the last measurement always overwrites the values of the previous measurement.
NOTICE
It is not noted in the custom printout that the displayed measuring results
originate from a repeat measurement.
Behavior in the case of insufficient

measuring force
If the deflection of a passive sensor for XXT exceeds the calibration range
or remains significantly below the predefined nominal deflection, there
is a risk of incorrect measuring results. CALYPSO therefore masks these
points and excludes them from the evaluation.
Causes
This can occur in the following cases:
The scanning speed is too high.
The predefined workpiece position or form deviates too strongly (e.g.

by more than the nominal deflection) from the actual position or form.
In this case, the following message is displayed in the status window:

Error while scanning with a passive measuring sensor.
The sensor did not perform the measurement with the expected
measuring force. Possible causes: Too high scanning speed or
workpiece form or workpiece position deviation greater than the
predefined
sensor deflection.
The CNC run is continued without any interruption. You can display the
good measuring points of the feature concerned in the CAD window
7-28
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
after the measurement. The context menu of the CAD window allows
you to display the masked points in red.
Remedy
If for a feature the number of points used for the evaluation is considerably smaller than the nominal number of points, CALYPSO has masked
certain measuring points due to insufficient or excessive measuring force.
For such features, you must correct the scanning speed or define more
precise specifications for the workpiece form or position, e.g. by means
of a discrete-point macro measurement.
Then repeat the measurement.
NOTICE
The remark window assists you in this and similar cases. It makes it possible to open and edit the features concerned quickly (Working with
the remark window [ 721]).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-29
Manual measurements
Manual measurements
Surface measurement with single points
You can define the coordinates of certain points by manual probing. To
do so, you must set the Surface measurement with single points mode.
Otherwise, CALYPSO attempts to recognize a feature from the probed
points.
Conditions:
The CAD model for the workpiece is loaded.
1 Select Features Surface measurement with single
points.
CALYPSO switches to the Surface measurement with single points
mode. The Surface measurement with single points dialog
box is opened.
2 Define the search distance.

CALYPSO searches for the corresponding surface within this distance
from the measured point.
3 Activate Check Normals if you want CALYPSO to perform a plausibility check of the surface normals.
4 Activate Surfaces Selected if you want CALYPSO to only search the
selected surfaces for the feature.
5 If CALYPSO cannot find the corresponding point on the surface within
the search distance, the point is shown as a faulty point. If you do not
want to repeat probing, extend the search distance and click New
Calculation.
If CALYPSO now finds the corresponding nominal point, the measurement result is within tolerance.
7-30
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Alternating operation with CALYPSO and UMESS
Alternating operation with CALYPSO and

UMESS
Within the software package, it is possible to change from one program
to the other, i.e. from CALYPSO to HOLOS, GEAR PRO, Dimension, point
program, etc.
CALYPSO and UMESS are included in various software packages. Thus,
direct switching between CALYPSO and UMESS is not possible.
To switch to UMESS, i.e. to another software package, the following procedure and principle apply:
NOTICE
Only one software package may be active at a time.
Switching the operation with the C99 control

To change between CALYPSO and UMESS (C99 control):
1 Exit the software package 1 completely.
2 Switch the C99 control off and on again.
Alternatively, you can also carry out a warm start via the control console. To do so, press Shift+Enter and then X. In this case, the reference
point travel is not necessary.
3 Start the software package 2.
When starting, a warm start of the control takes place automatically.
4 Check whether the current stylus assembly in the stylus changer rack
fits the software settings.
Switching the operation with the C98 control

To change between CALYPSO and UMESS (C98 control):
1 Exit the software package 1 completely.
2 Switch the C98 control off and on again.
3 Start the software package 2.
4 Check whether the current stylus assembly in the stylus changer rack
fits the software settings.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7-31
Alternating operation with CALYPSO and UMESS
7-32
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Chapter
Viewing, presenting and

editing measuring results
.................................................................................................................

Printouts in CALYPSO .............................................................................. 82
Preparing custom printouts and compact printouts ................................ 821
Outputting form and location plots with the graphics elements ............. 840
Outputting form and location plots for characteristics ............................ 872
Exporting measuring results into files ..................................................... 885
Evaluating measuring results subsequently ........................................... 8100
Programmed access to measuring results ............................................. 8104
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-1
Printouts in CALYPSO
Overview of the printouts in CALYPSO
There are single printouts and multiple printouts in CALYPSO.
The default printout, the compact printout and the custom printout
belong to the single printouts.
You can compile single printouts and individually created printouts as

desired in multiple printouts.
The results of form and location checks can be represented and output
graphically as a form plot or location plot or as a point list. You can also
output the CAD view as a plot.
You can configure CALYPSO so that printouts and plots or graphics are
output automatically on the screen, the printer or as a PDF file during the
CNC run.
If you want to save results in files as backups or for processing in subsequent evaluation runs, you can use the export functionality of CALYPSO
that supports a number of mainstream formats.
Combined evaluations
You can also combine several measurement plans and create combined
assessments (Combining several measurement plans [ 627]). The
measurement plans you combine in this way need not necessarily be on
the CMM they can be created and run on CMMs at different points in
the network.
Printout modes and printout types

CALYPSO distinguishes between two printout modes:
In the Single Printouts mode, you can output the predefined individual printouts such as the default printout, compact printout and
custom printout.
Multiple printouts can be output in the Multiple Printouts mode. Multiple printouts represent any combinations of default, compact and
custom printouts and of individual printouts created via the PiWeb
Basic Reporter.
NOTICE
Most options are available in the Multiple Printouts mode as these
printouts include all types of single printouts.
Default printout
The Default Printout is a log of all results obtained in measurement. You

can configure the representation to only a limited extent.
You can, for example, define in the Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics that all formulas used in features and characteristics should
also be output before the corresponding element. Additionally, the assignments and PCM function calls of the presettings and postsettings of
8-2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
the measurement plan and of all elements are also output. To do so, the
PCM option is not necessary.
If you want to output the deviations in the Amount mode, the corresponding column has the heading Dev. <->. <->.
Compact printout
The Compact Printout is shorter than the default printout. It lists the
characteristics together with the measured features for quick assessment.
The contents and representation of the compact printout can be configured.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-3
As an option, the results of the characteristics can be color-coded: green

means within tolerance, red means out of tolerance, yellow means warning limits violated.
If you want to output the deviations in the Amount mode, the column
has the heading Dev. <->. <->.
The compact printout is saved in the measurement plan directory as an
ASCII file (without color-coding information) called cprotocol.txt.
Custom printout
8-4
The contents and representation of the Custom Printout can be configured. Furthermore, you can influence the layout of parts of the custom
printout.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Multiple printout
A multiple printout is a combination of one or more single printouts and

individually created printouts.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-5
Working in the Single Printouts mode

Single Printouts mode
In the Single Printouts mode, you can output the predefined individual printouts such as the default printout, compact printout and custom
printout.
Activating the mode
The Single Printouts mode is activated if the Multiple Printouts

mode is deactivated. To do so:
1 Click Multiple Printout in the measurement plan.

2 Deactivate the Multiple Printouts Active option in the Definition of Multiple Printouts window.
8-6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Preparing printouts
Outputting printouts
during the CNC run
You can define the basic structure and the layout of the custom printout and compact printout by means of the printout format editors
under Resources Design custom printout (Preparing custom printouts and compact printouts [ 821]).
Special output features for individual characteristics can be defined

under Resources Characteristics Settings Editor (Measurement plan editor characteristics).
Select Resources Define printout to define the contents of

the three single printouts (Defining a printout (Single Printouts
mode) [ 88]).
By default, CALYPSO creates a default printout during the measurement.

If under User Defined Pages the To Back check box is ticked, the
printout window is hidden.
After starting the CNC run, select other printouts such as the compact
printout and custom printout in the Result area in the Start Measurement window. You define here whether the printouts are to be
printed or output as a postscript or PDF file.
NOTICE
To define which options can be selected or deselected in the Result area,
select Resources Results to File (see in the Online Help under
Results to File).
again
If you want to create a printout again after the CNC run, select the corresponding menu item in the View menu (Displaying and printing
printouts [ 813]).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-7
Defining a printout (Single Printouts mode)

The contents and representation of the three single printouts can be defined and further definitions for output can be made in the Single Printouts mode:
Printouts
Compact Printout:
You specify what (e.g. characteristics) the printout is to contain and
how (e.g. in what order) it is to appear.
Custom Printout:
You specify what (e.g. characteristics) the printout is to contain and
how (e.g. in what order) it is to appear.
Default Printout:
You can run the default printout in the background.
Excel report:
Define the desired report type for output to Excel.
Output to DMIS:
For the result output in DMIS format, you can select a dmi file for the
DMIS header.
Defining a printout
1 Select Resources Define printout.
The Format custom printout dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Define on the index cards the scope and sequence of the features in
the printout.
Note: If you also want to represent the grouping of characteristics in

the custom printout, set Group in Custom Printout to On in the
Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics.
3 To define the DMIS header for result output in DMIS format (Exporting measuring results into files [ 885]) related to the specific
measurement plan: Click Select DMIS header to select the desired
file.
Otherwise, a default printout header will be used.
4 To allow the measuring results to be output to an Excel file: click
Select EXCEL Report and select the required report type.
Note: The settings are only effective when the Multiple Printouts
function is not activated. By default, CALYPSO creates a default printout after each evaluation. You define any additional printouts to be
output in the Start Measurement window.
8-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
For more information, see Format custom printout in the CALYPSO dialog
reference in the Online Help.
Working in the Multiple Printouts mode

Multiple Printouts mode
In the Multiple Printouts mode, you can output any combinations of default, compact and custom printouts and of individual printouts created
via the PiWeb BasicReporter.
Defining the printout
mode
To work in the Multiple Printouts mode:

1 Click Multiple Printout in the measurement plan.
2 Activate the Multiple Printouts Active option in the Definition
of Multiple Printouts window.
Defining and managing

multiple printouts
You can define and manage your multiple printouts in the Definition
of Multiple Printouts dialog box:
You define here the single printouts and Basic Reports that should form
your multiple printouts. You can define the basic structure, layout, contents, output media, output format, etc. for each printout (Creating
multiple printouts [ 810]).
Creating individual
printout templates
The PiWeb BasicReporter allows you to create individual printout

templates (Basic Reports) that can then be used in multiple printouts
(Creating protocol templates with the PiWeb BasicReporter [ 92]).
during the CNC run
After starting the CNC run, select the prepared multiple printout to be
output in the Result area in the Start Measurement window.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-9
You define here whether the printouts are to be printed or output as a

postscript or PDF file.
If the Send results to printer check box is ticked, the printouts

for which output to a printer is defined in the multiple printout are
printed.
If the check box is unticked, the print definitions of the multiple printout are ignored. No printout is printed.
The same applies to other options such as EXCEL reports, PDF, etc.
NOTICE
The options that should be selectable in the Result area can be defined
under Resources Results to File (see in the Online Help under
Results to File).
again
If you want to create a printout again after the CNC run, select the corresponding menu item in the View menu (Displaying and printing
printouts [ 813]).
Creating multiple printouts

The Definition of Multiple Printouts window allows you to manage, create and edit your multiple printouts.
1 Click Define Multiple Printout on the Measurement Plan tab.
The Definition of Multiple Printouts window is divided into the
following area according to the typical working steps.
8-10
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1. Creating/selecting a multiple
printouts
2. Selecting characteristics and
printout header parameters
3. Defining the single printouts to be
created
4. Defining the single printout
2 Click Create New Multiple Printout and enter the desired name.
- or 3 Select the multiple printout to be edited from the list under Multiple
Printout.
4 To remove the results of certain characteristics from certain printout
features click Mark characteristics for hiding.
5 Select the characteristics that should all be hideable under the preset
Mark function in the Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics.
You can then select the Hide option for each individual printout
feature for which the marked characteristics are to be hidden.
Note: You can define additional output features for individual characteristics in the Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics
window (see Measurement plan editor characteristics).
6 To define the selection of the printout header parameters that are to
be entered: Click Select printout header parameters for input and select the desired printout header parameters for input at
CNC start and in the measurement plan.
7 Select under Printout Features the elements to be included in the
multiple printout and edit their structure.
- or -
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-11
8 Select under Printout Features the printout types to be included

in your multiple printout and edit their structure.
Frequently selected printouts are consecutively numbered.

Depending on the selected printout type, the lower part of the window
changes.
The Cut Printout Element Selected function allows you to delete
the marked printout element from the multiple printout.
9 Define for each selected feature of the multiple printout the output
media, the scope and sequence of the contents as well as the layout
of the corresponding printout in the lower part of the window.
The custom printout and individually structured printout templates offer many options for the configuration of the formats. Click the Edit
Format button.
Creating protocol templates with the PiWeb BasicReport-
er [ 92]
10Click Display Multiple Printout Now to check the result of your
modifications.
The function is active only if results are already available.
11Press OK to confirm.
NOTICE
You will find detailed information on all functions of the dialog box in
the Online Help under Definition of multiple printouts.
Outputting EXCEL reports

Predefined Excel reports
If you have installed MS Excel 2000, you will also be able to output the
measuring results in the form of an Excel report. Three predefined reports
are available in the <user directory>\data\excel_report directory:
Characteristic.xls for output of the characteristic data
Feature.xls for output of the feature data
FeatChar.xls for output of characteristic and feature data
The ReportINI.xls file containing defaults is located in the same directory

as the reports.
Defining Excel report
output
8-12
1 In the Single Printouts mode: Open the User Defined Pages window (Resources Define printout) and click the Select EXCEL
Report button on the Default Printout / Warning Limit tab.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 In the Multiple Printouts mode: Open the desired multiple printout,

insert a default printout in the Printout Features list and click
the EXCEL Report button in the lower area.
3 Select the desired report in the <user directory>\data\excel_report directory.
4 Start the CNC run and activate the EXCEL-printout output in the
Start Measurement window.
After execution of the CNC run, the results will be output in an Excel
document in the <user directory>\workarea\results directory. The name
of the document is a combination of the measurement plan name and
the part number.
NOTICE
The file names of the measurement plans used must not contain any
special characters (based on DOS conventions) or blanks.
Own Excel reports
Experienced MS Excel users can modify the existing report files and create
their own.
Displaying and printing printouts

Printout during CNC run
After starting the CNC run, select the printouts to be output and define
whether they are to be printed in the Result group in the Start Measurement window.
It is possible to create the printouts again at any time after the CNC run.
Creating printouts again after the CNC run

1 To do so, select the desired printout in the View menu.
Default printout
Compact printout
You can search the compact printout for character strings. You have
a choice of two font sizes for on-screen display.
Custom printout
Multiple printout (only in the Multiple Printouts mode)
The printout is displayed on the screen.
2 To print a printout, select File Print in the window of the printout.
The printout will be output on the default printer.
The toolbar contains the following icons for the output of the default
printout:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-13
Icon
Function
Show default printout
Print default printout
Examples of printouts
Overview: Examples of printouts
The following help topics show some examples of printouts:
Example: Standard custom printout [ 814]
Example: VDA printout (without values) [ 815]
Example: Standard custom printout (compressed) [ 816]
Example of the Characteristic.xls Excel report [ 817]
Example of the Feature.xls Excel report [ 818]
Example of the FeatChar.xls Excel report [ 819]
Example: Standard custom printout

Color highlighting is used for emphasis in the custom printout.
8-14
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Example: VDA printout (without values)

The test report is output in a VDA printout. This printout does not contain
any features.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-15
Example: Standard custom printout

(compressed)
The condensed form of the custom printout does not feature color highlighting.
8-16
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Example of the Characteristic.xls Excel report

Example of an Excel report of the Characteristic.xls type for output of
characteristic data:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-17
Example of the Feature.xls Excel report

Example of an Excel report of the type Feature.xls for the output of feature
data:
8-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Example of the FeatChar.xls Excel report

Example of an Excel report of the type FeatChar.xls for the output of
characteristic and feature data:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-19
8-20
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Preparing custom printouts and compact printouts
Preparing custom printouts and compact

printouts
Custom printout and compact printout
Custom printout
The custom printout is your way of presenting measuring results, for example, to a customer or client. You can generate your own custom printouts tailored to your needs and preferences or to those of your client.
Custom printouts are ideal for attractive graphical presentations. They
consist of the contents of various graphic files.
Compact printout
The compact printout offers less possibilities for layout.
The output format of the compact printout is automatically predefined by the output format for the custom printout.
You can customize the header of the compact printout via the Printout format editor.
Structure of custom printouts and

compact printouts
The custom printout consists of various sections that you can include in
or exclude from the printout and arrange to suit your preferences.
The data for each section is saved in separate files in the directory called
<user directory>\protocol\protform. These sections are listed in the table
below, alongside brief descriptions of their contents.
Area
Contents
Edit under
Printout header
Automatic fields with information

on:
Resources Design custom printout Printout
Workpiece
File name: vphead.gra
Measurement data
etc.
Header line
Specifications for presentation of

the results.
Resources Design custom printout Page Header File Editor

File name: header.gra
Printout area
Contains the characteristics and

the measuring results as well as coordinate systems, etc.
Characteristics
Contains the icons, the names and Resources Design custom printthe results of the characteristics.
out Characteristic Editor
File name: cffra.gra
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-21
Area
Contents
Edit under
Messelemente
Contains the icons, the names and Resources Design custom printthe results of the features.
out Feature Editor
File name: me.gra
Resources Design custom printout Characteristic Group Editor
Characteristic
groups
File name: grpcf.gra

Alignments
Contains the icons, the names and Resources Design custom printthe datums of the coordinate sys- out Characteristic Editor
tem.
File name: cfpos.gra
User-definable
pages
any
Resources Design custom printout User defined printout

Resources Design custom printout Printout header compact
printout
Printout header
compact printout
File name: cphead.gra
Automatic fields in the printout header

The printout header contains automatic fields or dummies, as they are
also known. The wildcards are replaced by CALYPSO or by you when you
run a measurement plan.
There are two kinds of dummy:
global dummies. You enter these dummies once for each measurement plan (such as the part number, for instance), while others(e.g.
time, measurement plan name) are automatically filled in by CALYPSO.
local dummies. These dummies are filled in by you or by CALYPSO

before each start of the measurement plan; they include the order
number and remarks, for example.
For more information, please refer to Preparing printout header data [ 827].
Result presentation in the custom

printout
The custom printout presents the measuring results as follows (shown
here without the printout header):
8-22
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Icon of
characteristi
Histogram
Name of
char.
Deviation from
tolerance
Along with the actual value and nominal value and upper and lower tolerances, the printout contains further information:
Icon of the characteristic:
Red: Characteristic is out of tolerance

Yellow: Characteristic is outside the defined warning limit (if defined)
Green: Characteristic is within tolerance
Histogram: The vertical line in the histogram represents the middle of

the tolerance range. The dashes represent the tolerance usage. Each
dash represents 25% of the tolerance usage. The illustration below,
for example, represents 50% of the upper tolerance limit.
If the value is out of tolerance, the numerical value of the deviation is

displayed instead of the histogram.
Designing printouts with the printout

format editors
Printout format editors
The printout format editors are used to create different templates
of custom printouts. You create and edit graphics elements and insert
measurement plan variables.
The illustration shows, by way of example, the printout format editor for
features.
Under Resources Design custom printout, you will find the
printout format editor for the following areas:
Printout header
Header lines
Characteristics
Features
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-23
Characteristic groups
Additional, user-defined pages
Printout header compact printout
NOTICE
You need some experience with drawing programs in order to use the
editor.
Structure of a printout format editor

The illustration shows the printout format editor for features.
Menu bar
Toolbar
Info bar
Graphic
toolbox
Drawing area
Special toolbox
The functions of the printout format editor do not differ greatly from
those of conventional drawing programs. They are not described in detail
in the following.
The special toolbox provides a number of variables or fields that you can
insert into the custom printout. These are filled either automatically by
CALYPSO while the measurement is in progress, or manually by the operator. The special toolbox of the characteristics contains two tabs. On
one tab, you will find the characteristic attributes.
8-24
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The graphic toolbox contains icons representing the usual graphics tools
for drawing simple graphics elements, and for inserting complete graphic
files (such as a company logo, for example) into the custom printout.
The info bar contains information on size of image, working directory and
current scaling.
The toolbar allows you to access a selection of commands for controlling
the printout format editor.
The commands available in the menu bar are as follows:
Menu
Menu item
Function
File
New
Creates a new printout.
Save
Saves the current printout.
Save as...
Saves the current printout under a new name.
Open
Opens an existing printout.
Format
Opens the Page Layout window.

You will find more information on this window under Page
layout in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
Edit
Draw
Print
Prints the current printout.
Close
Closes the dialog box.
Cut
Copies the selected element to the Clipboard and removes it

from the work area.
Copy
Copies the selected element to the Clipboard.
Paste
Pastes the contents of the Clipboard back into the printout.
Select All
Selects all elements in the work area.
Duplicate
Duplicates the selected element.
Make Polygon
Not yet available
New
Number
Field
Inserts a number field for numerical inputs.
Text Field
Inserts a text field for alphanumerical inputs.
Output Field Inserts an output field.
Data Output Inserts a data output field.

Field
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-25
Menu
Menu item
Function
Table Output
Inserts a table output field.
Graphics
Inserts a graphic (file, OMView or form and location plot).
Fill Color
Defines the fill color for an object.
Border Color
Defines the color for an object's border.
Line Width
Defines the line width for an object's frame.
Properties
Opens the Properties (Printout editor) window.

This window is fully described in Properties (Printout editor) in
the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
Width...
Defines the width of an object.
Height...
Defines the height of an object.
Object Name...
Defines the name for the object.
Object Visability...
Prompts whether you want to create a new view of the object.
Bring
Forward
Brings an object into the foreground.
To Front
Brings an object one layer forward.
Send
Background
Sends an object to the background.
To Back
Sends an object one layer back.
Group
View
8-26
For Symbols
Creates a group for symbols.
For Statistics Creates a group for statistics.
For Comments
For Referen- Creates a group for references.

ces
Group
Groups the selected objects.
Ungroup
Ungroups a group.
Creates a group for comments.
Align...
Aligns selected objects vertically and/or horizontally.
Refresh
Not yet available
Zoom In
Zooms in the view.
Zoom Out
Zooms out the view.
Grid Off
Switches the grid on and off.
Define Grid
Defines the size of the grid.
Scale Feature
Scales an object by the defined scaling factor.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Menu
Menu item
Function
Reset Page
Not yet available
Select Objects
Lists all objects that occur in the printout template.
Preparing printout header data

The printout header part contains data relating to the measurement environment, the operator, or the workpiece.
There are two kinds of header data:
Local data: You enter this data each time you start a measurement
plan.
Global data: You enter this data once only for each measurement
plan.
CALYPSO provides other information for the printout header data (such
as tester, date, etc.), which cannot be modified.
In addition, you can define your own printout header fields and, if necessary, their input mode and value (Defining your own printout header
data [ 828]).
Playing a video
To play a video about Inserting your own logo into the printout header,
click 003_e_Protkopf_aendern/003_2_demo.htm.
Printout header data
To define which data is incorporated into the printout header, select

Resources Design custom printout Printout and Resources Design custom printout Printout Header Compact
Printout.
The available printout header data is listed in a column reserved for this
purpose.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-27
Printout header
data
Within the column, the printout header data is arranged in groups, as

follows:
Data group
Type
Subsequently entered
SYS
local/global
automatically filled by CALYPSO
EDIT
global
once only per measurement plan under Resources Printout header parameters
START
local
for each measurement plan start in the Start Measurement dialog box, see Entering local printout header data [ 76]
OTHER
local/global
automatically filled by CALYPSO
Defining your own printout header data

The printout header part contains data relating to the measurement environment, the operator, or the workpiece.
INI file overwrites TXT file

CALYPSO uses the two userfields.txt and userfields.ini files when querying
the printout header data.
CALYPSO refers to the userfields.txt file to determine which data is to

be queried in the Input Parameter dialog box.
You can activate and edit the userfields.txt file (TXT file for printout
header data [ 829]).
8-28
If a userfields.ini file exists, CALYPSO refers to this file to determine

which data is queried in the Input Parameter window and which
values can be acquired for the individual printout header parameters.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The type and length of parameters or selection lists are defined in this
file.
You can also activate and edit this file. (INI file for printout header
data [ 830]).
NOTICE
If a variable defined in the userfields.ini file was already defined in the
userfields.txt file, the definitions in the userfields.ini file will overwrite
those from the userfields.txt file.
TXT file for printout header data

You can define additional input fields for the printout header in the
userfields.txt ASCII file.
Activating file
You activate this file by renaming the xxx_userfields.txt file you received
in the <user directory>protocol\protform directory to userfields.txt.
NOTICE
If an INI file [ 830] called userfields.ini is present in addition to the
userfields.txt file, its settings will overwrite those of the userfields.txt file.
Supplementing file
To define an additional input field, add one line with the following elements, separated by commas:
Element
Meaning
Labels
Will be used in the result file, must begin with

u_
Identifier
Will be displayed in dialogs
Display control
The field must be subsequently entered:

E = once only per measurement plan under Resources Printout header parameters
R = for each measurement plan start in the Start
Measurement dialog box
RE = appears in both windows
Examples:
u_field1,FELD 1,RE
u_field2,FELD 2,R
u_field3,FELD 3,E
The newly defined fields have been added to the selection column of the
printout header fields.
Print Results
The entered values will appear in the printout header of the custom printout and the compact printout.
The identifications (e.g. u_field1) and the appropriate values will be
output in the table file (*_hdr.txt).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-29
Reference: INI file for printout header data

If a userfields.ini file exists, CALYPSO refers to this file to determine which
data is queried in the Input Parameter window and which values can
be acquired for the individual printout header parameters.
Overwrites definitions
of userfields.txt
The settings in this file will overwrite the settings of any existing TEXT
file [ 829] named userfields.txt.
If no INI file is active, any parameter can be entered for the printout header
data.
Activating file
You activate this file by renaming the zzz_userfields.ini file you received
in the <user directory>\protocol\protform directory to userfields.ini.
Format of the INI file
The format of the userfields.ini file largely corresponds to that of a normal

Windows INI file:
The file consists of individual sections
Each section is introduced by a line with the section name in

square brackets.
Each section consists of lines in the form
<option>=<value>.
The names of the options are firmly assigned. A number of values for
one option are entered with separating commas. If a value itself contains one or more commas, this value must be placed in quotes (").
Example: <option>=X,Y,Z means three individual values <option>="X,Y,Z" means one value
Comments are ignored. Comments are:
Structure of the userfields.ini file
8-30
All characters that follow a semicolon. Exception: The semicolon

is located between two quotes (";").
A line that starts with REM.
For the userfields.ini file, the following has been agreed for the section
and option names:
The [Fieldnames] section contains the names of the other sections

that can represent an input field, a value list or a combo box. Deviating
from the usual format, this section consist of lines of the form <option>.
For each of the options defined in the [Fieldnames] section, there

is a separate section further below with this name which further characterizes the corresponding field.
Each section that represents an input field, a selection list or a combo

box contains lines with the following options:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
<option>
<value>
Mandatory for each input field

name
= <pname>
The name of the input field (is displayed in the

Input Parameters window to the left of the
input field or list)
editMode
= true
When you are editing the measurement plan

and a value for the field is to be entered (Resources Printout header parameters
menu items)
false
runMode
= true
false
selectiveList
= true
false
Otherwise
When a value for the field is to be queried on
CNC start
Otherwise
For input via combo box or selection list
Otherwise
Additionally mandatory for combo boxes and selection lists:

selectiveListValues
= <aname>
The name of the section with the entries of the

combo box or selection list
editable
= true
Combo box
false
Selection list
Additionally possible as an option:

defaultValue
= <dvalue>
The value to be displayed before a selection is

made. Important: If the default value is to be an
entry from a list (combo box or selection list), it
is not the actual entry that should be here
(<value>), but its name (<option>) in the
list of the <aname> section.
type
= A or a
Alphanumeric values (character strings of letters and numbers)
F or f
Floating point numbers
I or iI3 or i3I5
or i5I10 or i10
Integer values (integer) with three, five or 10

digits.
The length must be entered separately in the
maxLength field.
maxLength
= <dvalue>
In the case of alphanumeric values: Length of

character string
In the case of floating point numbers: No effect
In the case of integer values: Number of bytes
required
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-31
<option>
maximumValue
<value>
= <value>
minimumValue
= <value>
The minimum permissible value for a numeric

parameter. Only together with maximumValue.
Precedes an indication for maxLength.
forbiddenAnywhere
= "string"
Characters which are not allowed in the character string. The forbiddenChars.txt file overwrites this indication.
forbiddenFirst
= "string"
Characters which may not be the first character

in the character string. The forbiddenChars.txt
file overwrites this indication.
forbiddenLast
= "string"
Characters which may not be the last character

in the character string. The forbiddenChars.txt
file overwrites this indication.
Evaluation of the entries

for lists
The maximum permissible value for a numeric

parameter. Only together with minimumValue.
Precedes an indication for maxLength.
Each combo box and each selection list is assigned as a value of the
selectiveListValues option the name of the section in which the individual entries of the list appear line by line.
Each line in this section has the form <option>=<value>. The options
are entered in the protheadpara file; the assigned values, on the other
hand, are displayed in the relevant list.
NOTICE
This enables, for example, the entry of numerical values as UserIDs in the
protheadpara file for further processing, whereas the user names are
displayed in the Input Parameters window.
Then the user selects its user name but the UserID is entered in the protheadpara file.
Input check
If the type and maxLength entries are available, CALYPSO checks when
entering or changing the corresponding parameter whether the data type
and length are complied with and issues a message in case of non-compliance.
If the type, maximumValue and minimumValue entries are available, CALYPSO checks when entering or changing the corresponding parameter
whether the data type and value range are complied with and issues a
message in case of non-compliance.
If the directory of the userfields.ini file contains a forbiddenChars.txt file, the entries of the latter are used to check the alphanumeric
inputs. If the section contains lines with forbiddenAnywhere, forbiddenFirst or forbiddenLast, these indications overwrite those of the forbiddenChars.txt file.
8-32
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Reference: Format of the forbiddenChars.txt

file
When using the forbiddenChars.txt file, it is only required to define the
alphanumeric input once. The entries in this file are used for each section
when evaluating the userfields.ini file if nothing different is defined for
this entry.
The forbiddenChars.txt file must be stored in the same directory as the
userfields.ini file. It is composed of three lines with the following format:
forbiddenAnywhere="<all characters which are not allowed in the
character string>"
forbiddenFirst="<all characters which must not be used at the
beginning of a character string>"
forbiddenLast="<all characters which must not be used at the end
of a character string>"
You can see this in an example of a userfields.ini [ 830] file.
Example: INI file for printout header data

The following shows you an example of an INI file for printout header
data: Calypso comes with this example in the <user directory>\protocol
\protform directory, under the zzz_userfields.ini file name.
REM This is an example for the userfields.ini-File
[Fieldnames]
REM By convention the userfieldnames begin with "u_"
u_field1
u_field2
u_field3
u_field4
u_field5
; Now defining the first
userfield named u_field1
[u_field1]
name=Month
editMode=true
runMode=false
selectiveList=true
;
;
;
;
;
the text which is shown as the name for the inputfield/list

this field shall be edited while editing the inspection
Menu Prepare - Protocol Header Parameters
this field shall not be edited before starting CNC
it is a list - either a drop down list or a combo box
selectiveListValues=u_field1_valueList ; the values for this list are found in the

; profile named "u_field1_valueList"
editable=false
defaultValue=1
;
;
;
;
there's no keyboard input possible for the user - it is a

drop down list (not a combo box)
the default value to be shown is the value with the
optionname "1"
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-33
REM Now defining the second userfield named

u_field2
[u_field2]
; this field shall not be edited while editing the inspection
name=Greeting
; this field shall be edited before starting CNC
editMode=false
; it is not a list, so it must be an input field
runMode=true o
; this value is shown as long as no other input has been made
selectiveList=false
for this
defaultValue=Hello
; field
[u_field3]
name=Weekday
editMode=true
runMode=true
selectiveList=true
selectiveListValues=u_field3_valueList
editable=false
defaultValue=3
[u_field4]
name=Amount
editMode=true
runMode=false
selectiveList=false
defaultValue=0.0
[u_field5]
name=Currency
editMode=true
runMode=true
selectiveList=true
selectiveListValues=u_field5_valueList
editable=true ; the user
can type in values using
the keyboard (and not only
; selecting the values
from the given list)
defaultValue=Euro
8-34
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
REM Now defining the valuelist for the userfield

with the name "Month"
; this is also the default value - see option defaultValue
[u_field1_valueList]
; at definition for u_field1
1=January
2=February
3=March
4=April
5=May
6=June
7=July
8=August
9=September
10=October
11=November
12=December
REM this is the valuelist for the userfield named "Weekday"
1=Monday
2=Tuesday
3=Wednesday
4=Thursday
5=Friday
6=Saturday
7=Sunday
REM the following value list doesn't need special keys for the values. So the keys are the
REM same as the values.
Euro=Euro
Dollar=Dollar
Yen=Yen
Franc=Franc
DM=DM
Working with the custom printout template

The template for the printout header is used here by way of example to
illustrate how to create a custom printout template and what to bear in
mind when you save your work.
1 Open the editor for the section you want to edit by selecting Resources Design custom printout.
2 Select File Open and select a template sketch.
3 You can edit the sketch to create the template for your own custom
printout:
Highlight the element you want to use in the graphic toolbox or
the special toolbox.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-35
In the drawing area, click the position where you want to insert the
object.
4 Save the template:
Select File Format and enter the desired format.
Select File Save As and save the template under a new name.
Example: Programming a custom printout with

input prompt
NOTICE
You need the PCM Technology option for this example.
You can program a custom printout in such a way that before the printout
is printed, the user is prompted by CALYPSO to enter certain items of
information destined for inclusion in the printout. You do this with the
aid of the variables in the printout header (Reference: Printout header
data [ 837]) and the Inquire query function in the PCM language
(see PCM functions: Input and output in the operating instructions for
the PCM Technology option).
In this example, CALYPSO should prompt for the pallet number when the
measurement plan is started and include the number entered by the user
in the custom printout.
1 Select Resources Design custom printout Printout.
2 Select File Open and open the vphead.gra file.
The printout header is displayed.
3 In the list of fields on the left, go to the START section, mark the
Tool field and click in the printout header at the point where you want
8-36
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
to position the field. Delete the word Tool from the label and type
Pallet number instead.
4 Close and save the printout header you edited.
6 Make sure that no characteristic is highlighted and select Parameter in the context menu.
The Settings dialog box appears on the screen.
7 Under Presettings, enter the following:
PALLET=inquire("Enter the pallet number: ")
setRecordHead("tooldf",PALLET)
Explanation: What is found in the tooldf variable is output into the
pallet number printout header field.
The effect of the first line is that a prompt box opens and the user is
prompted to enter the pallet number.
The effect of the second line is that the number entered in this way is
assigned to the tooldf variable and is thus subsequently printed in
the printout under pallet number.
Commands entered in PCM apply to the entire measurement plan, which
means they are executed when the measurement plan starts.
Reference: Printout header data

All the printout header data is listed in the table below. The IDs are used
to identify the header data in the table result file (...hdr.txt).
Data group
Name of field
Labels
SYS
Operator
operid
Date
date
Short date
dateshort
Time
time
CMM type
dmeid
Device Administration
devicegropup
CMM No.
dmesn
Control Type
controllertyp
Software ID
dmeswi
Creation revision code MSW
dmeswv
Measurement Plan ID
planid
CT dataset
pointCloudFile
Extent of run
measRun
Page
actpgnr
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-37
Data group
EDIT
OTHER
8-38
Name of field
Labels
From
nrpgs
Length unit
lengthunit
Palette location number
palletlocationnumber
Name
partid
Department:
vda_departm
Telephone/Fax/E-Mail
vda_phone
Number
vda_number
Tolerance Mode
deviationmode
Tolerance Mode keyword
deviationmodekey
Temperature workpiece
temperatureworkpiece
Temperature scale X
temperaturescalex
Temperature scale Y
temperaturescaley
Temperature scale Z
temperaturescalez
Temp. Base Alignment
temperaturebasesystem
Meas. Duration
durationofrun
Decimals printout
outdecimalunits
Language Recognition
languageid
MMC/LMC-Mode
mmcmode
MCC Measurement Plan Version
mccplanversion
Part Name
partid
Drawing No.
drawingno
Workpiece Rev.
partrv
Workpiece Ser. No.
partsn
Meas. Plan Comment
partcomment
Clamp ID
clmpid
Clamp No.
clmpsn
Fixture
fixtid
Fixture No.
fixtsn
Previous Operation
prevop
Creation Date
creationdate
Revision Date
changedate
Created By (operator)
produceoper
Changed By (operator)
changeoper
Creation Of Software Rev.
creationswi
Creation Of CMM Type
creationdme
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Data group
Name of field
Labels
START
Incremental Part Number
partnbinc
Part No.
partnbLong
Start Comment
startcomment
Order
order
Tool
tooldf
Process Plan
mfgdev
Lot ID
partnbLong
Test ID
lotid
Pallet location
palletlocation
Pallet ID
palletid
Audit-No.
vda_auditno
Version
vda_version
Subject Number
vda_subjno
Remark:
vda_remark
Name
vda_name
Signature:
vda_signature
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-39
Outputting form and location plots with the graphics elements
Outputting form and location plots with the

graphics elements
Outputting form and location plots
CALYPSO can graphically display the deviations that are determined by
form and location checks on the measured geometric elements and can
output them. You can also output the CAD view as graphics.
Outputting a plot with
the graphics elements
This section provides you with information on the output of form and
location plots via the Graphics Element utility in the measurement
plan.
Plot from within the

characteristic
Form and location plots can also be output from within certain characteristics. You define the output of the corresponding plot in the definition
template of the characteristic. For more information, please see Outputting form and location plots for characteristics [ 872].
Examples
For examples of selected form and location plots, please refer to Examples of form and location plots [ 844].
Layout of a form and location plot

A graphic output via the Graphics Element utility will look like the
following:
8-40
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1 Printout header
2 Plots
3 Data table
Graphics forms with
printout header and data
table
Exactly one graphics form is selected in each graphics element. This

form defines the basic page layout, i.e. the page size and the page margins as well as the printout header and footer with texts, images and
variables for the date and page number.
The graphics forms predefined for CALYPSO show all important table
values; in addition, the best fit forms contain the best fit result.
In the printout header editor, you can adapt the predefined graphics
forms to your requirements and create your own form pages (Creating
graphics forms with the printout header editor [ 867]).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-41
Single templates for diagrams
Output of graphics
In the definition template of the Graphics Element, you can define

which form and location checks are to be shown and how the results are
to be represented (Defining graphics elements [ 842]).
Suitable diagrams are predefined as single templates for the representation of form and location plots. If necessary, you can change
existing single templates and create new ones in the graphics editor
(Creating single templates with the graphics editor [ 860]).
It is possible to include several diagrams for several characteristics in

a graphic.
To improve the comparison of measuring results, it is possible to summarize the measuring results of several characteristics of the same
type in one diagram (Grouping characteristics), e.g. several roundness checks.
Graphics can be displayed and output to the printer during the CNC run.
CALYPSO displays graphics in the Calypso Formplots window. This
window allows, e.g. printing and output as a PDF file as well as other
evaluation options (Working with the plot window [ 870]).
Defining graphics elements

The Graphics Element utility allows you to output measuring results
in graphic form.
Inserting a graphics element into the measurement

plan
1 Select Resources Utilities Graphics Element.
When running the measurement plan, a graphic with form and location plot will be generated and output here.
Defining graphics elements

1 Open the graphics element with a double click.
8-42
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 Use the buttons under Graphic to define whether the graphic is to

be displayed and output to the printer during the CNC run:
Graphic will be displayed/printed
Graphic will not be displayed/printed

3 Define the contents and the form (layout) of the graphics in the allocation list.
A diagram is created for each line.
Select a characteristic in each line and assign the desired single
template to this characteristic. You can identify the single templates
predefined by CALYPSO by the name default.
4 Click the Define graphics output icon in the right-hand column
of the allocation list to adapt the single template to your requirements
or create a new single template in the graphics editor (Creating single templates with the graphics editor [ 860]).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-43
5 If necessary, group characteristics of the same type. The measuring

results of the grouped characteristics are represented in a multiple diagram which makes it easier to compare them.
For grouping, mark the desired lines and select Group in the context menu.
The new group is displayed in the allocation list in a separate line with
the name GroupX, whereby X is incremented starting with 1.
Select Ungroup in the context menu to cancel the group.
6 Below the allocation list you can select the desired graphics form, the
orientation (portrait or landscape) and the arrangement of the diagrams on the page.
If no suitable form page is available, you can change existing form
pages or create new ones in the printout header editor (see Creating graphics forms with the printout header editor [ 867]).
Showing a preview on graphic

1 To check the settings for the graphics output, click the Define
graphics evaluation button under Graphic.
CALYPSO displays the graphic in the Calypso Formplots window.
This window allows printing and output as a PDF file as well as other
evaluations (Working with the plot window [ 870]).
Configuring the output as a PDF

1 To output the diagrams created during the CNC run as a PDF, you must
activate the output as a PDF under Resources Results to File.
All files for which display is activated in the corresponding graphics
element are output.
The PDF files are assigned a name which is composed of the measurement plan name, the part number and the _ptx suffix and are
saved in the <user directory>\workarea\results directory.
Examples of form and location plots

Overview of single templates for diagrams
The table contains all single templates that are made available by CALYPSO in the graphics element.
Characteristic / Feature
Roundness
Single templates
Pie chart
Line plot
8-44
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Roundness Ref
Single templates
Pie chart
Line plot
Straightness
Straightness Ref
Flatness
Line plot
Line plot
Line plot
See Form plot for flatness [ 846]
Plane plot
Flatness Ref
Line plot
See Form plot for flatness [ 846]
Plane plot
Cylindricity
Pie chart
See Multiple circle form plot for cylindricity [ 847]
Cylinder plot
Line plot
Surface line plot
See Surface line plots for cylindricity [ 847]
See Straightness plot for surface lines [ 850]
Curve Form
Line plot
See Form plot for curve form [ 851]
Curve plot
See Form plot for curve form [ 851]
Best fit of bore pattern

Curve Distance

See Location plot for bore pattern best fit [ 852]
Curve plot
See Curve distance plots [ 854]
Line plot
2-curve plot
Circle in contour fit

Waviness
Circle in contour plot

See Plot for circle in contour construction [ 858]
Fourier plot
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-45
Circular pitch
Linear Pitch
Single templates
Pitch plot
See Pitch plot [ 859]
Pitch plot
See Pitch plot [ 859]
My templates
You can use the standard templates or create and name your own templates. The graphics editor allows you to create and edit your own templates (Creating single templates with the graphics editor [ 860]).
Adjusting a plot
In this plot window, you can define additional settings for the representation and the scope of display (points, segments). (Working with the
plot window [ 870]).
Examples of form and location plots

The following sections describe particularities and show examples for selected form and location plots.
NOTICE
The displayed graphics have been created by means of the default graphics forms and single templates predefined in CALYPSO.
Form plot for flatness

CALYPSO provides a location plot for the flatness.
The location plot shows the measuring points of the plane probing.
8-46
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Mirroring measuring values
The single template allows you to determine whether the measuring values are to be mirrored. Thus, the deviations from the nominal values are
removed in the opposite direction: Positive deviations become negative
and negative deviations become positive.
Multiple circle form plot for cylindricity

CALYPSO provides a circle form plot for representation of the cylindricity:
Contents of the multiple

circle form plot
The multiple circle form plot shows the individual circular sections with
different radii in concentric form. If you do not wish the representation
with different radii, open the Define graphics output window and
activate Stack Multi Plots. The circles will then be plotted one upon
the other in the colors set.
Surface line plots for cylinder form

Surface line plot representation
CALYPSO provides a surface line plot for representation of the cylinder

form.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-47
Contents of the surface

line plot
The surface line plot shows individual surface line section segments with
magnified representation of the deviations.
The example shows a surface line plot with four surface lines. The surface
lines that are opposite to each other are represented in the same color:
Coloring surface lines
8-48
Surface lines
Position in the plot Color
left
blue
90
left
purple
180
right
blue
270
right
purple
In the basic settings, the surface lines in the plot are all displayed in the
same color.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
To represent surface lines in different colors, select the single template

and the Connect lines group and set the Color Scheme property to Color
Segments.
Selecting segments
To open the Segment window, click Segment Selection in the Define graphics output window.
In the Segment window you define the surface lines to be represented.
The different segments have consecutive numbers in the Segment window. These numbers result from the order of the segments in the measurement strategy.
Example
With the strategy you first measure a circular section and then two surface
lines. The following segments are displayed in the Segment window:
Number of the segment
Segment type
001
First surface line
002
Circular section
003
Second surface line
Scale factor
With the scale factor in the Data group you define the distance between
the represented surface lines.
Defining the position of

a deviation
The plots contain coordinate axes with mm scale. You can determine the
exact position of a deviation on the workpiece by using the rotary table
angle, the angle of the surface line and the determined height in the form
plot. The rotary table angle is stated in the data table in the Define
graphics output window.
Spatial view for cylindricity

CALYPSO provides a cylindricity plot in 3D view.
The graphics element makes it possible to output a representation of the
cylindricity as a grid using spatial graphic visualization. To so so, select
Graphics Element as single template Cylinder plots.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-49
Calypso Formplots - Unknown Report.ptx - Page 1 of 1

File
Navigation
Tools
Help
Page 1 of 1
Zoom:
Calypso
5.5.0116
Part Number
13
Date
January 31, 2013
Carl Zeiss
Order
Regression 2.0
Drawing No.
Department
CMM Type
Prismo
Operator
Master
Signature
Meas. Plan Name
Testblock1
Nr
Identifier
Actual [mm]
Tolerance
[mm]
Number
of Points
Vmess
[mm/s]
Stylus Radius
[mm]
F.Typ
L-C
UPR
The Define graphics output dialog box makes it possible to further

specify the representation of the measured points and the cylinder in the
single template:
You can change the size, the inclination and the number of automatic
surface lines.
It is possible to show the rear side of the cylinder weakly or to hide it.
Straightness plot for surface lines

Straightness plot representation
8-50
CALYPSO provides a straightness plot for representation of surface lines.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Contents of the straightness plot
The straightness plot shows a magnified representation of the measured

points along the surface line.
Selecting segments
To open the Segment window, click Segment Selection in the Define graphics output window.
In the Segment window you define the segments to be represented.
The different segments have consecutive numbers in the Segment window. These numbers result from the order of the segments in the measurement strategy.
Example: With the strategy you first measure a circular section and then
two surface lines. The following segments are displayed in the Segment
window:
Graphics output
Number of the segment
Segment type
001
Circular section
002
First surface line
003
Second surface line
Use the Define graphics output window to define the representation

of the plot.
With Point distance fixed you define that the points in the plot are
represented with identical distances on the axis.
Form plot for curve form

CALYPSO provides a form plot for the curve form (only possible with the
CNC Curve Measuring Software option).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-51
Selectable projection
plane
You can select the projection plane and its orientation for the representation of the curve form plot:
Auto (automatic selection via the measuring data)
X/Y
Y/X
X/Z
Z/X
Y/Z
Z/Y
The first axis is the horizontal axis and the second axis is the vertical axis.
Scaling curve
You can differently scale the representation of the curve in the X, Y and
Z direction.
Adjusting the plot
Use the right mouse button to open the Adjust Form Plot window
where you can make additional settings for the representation and the
scope of display (points, segments).
Location plot for bore pattern

CALYPSO provides a location plot for the bore pattern.
8-52
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Elements of the representation
The points projected onto the plane are shown on the location plot.
The nominal and actual positions of the bores are marked by crosses
which are connected by lines.
Tolerances are represented with circles around the nominal positions.
At each nominal position, the deviation of the actual value from the
nominal value and a designation are shown.
The reference point is represented in the same way as the positions

of the bores.
You can define the type and color of the crosses as well as the labeling
and the font.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-53
Best fit result
The best fit result includes the data table. The magnification is shown
below the scale.
Curve distance plots

CALYPSO provides single templates for different plots for the evaluation
of the curve distance (only with the Curve Measurement option):
Curve plot
8-54
Curve plot
Line plot
2-curve plot
If a curve plot or a multiple curve plot is selected as a single template, the

center curve from the two nominal curves is shown. At each point of the
center curve, the respective deviation between nominal and actual distance is shown.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
NOTICE
A curve plot shows the deviation between the nominal distance and the
actual distance in graphic form. It is not a representation of the actually
measured values and does not show the form of the workpiece.
The following applies to the standard template:
The largest and the smallest deviation is identified by a red circle.
The distance tolerances are shown as red lines.

The plot is scaled so that all nominal points of the curve are shown.
If the tolerance values are very high, they might not be visible in the
plot.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-55
Line plot
The line plot shows the difference between the actual distance and the
nominal distance for each measuring point based on the first measuring
point.
The following applies to the standard template:
The largest and the smallest deviations are identified by a red circle.
The distance tolerances are shown as red lines.

The plot is scaled so that all nominal points of the curve are shown.
If the tolerance values are very high, they might not be visible in the
plot.
2-curve plot
8-56
If a 2-curve plot or a multiple 2-curve plot is selected as a single template,

both curves are arranged one upon the other in a plot. The location of
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
the curves is immediately visible. A 2-curve plot is used, for example, to

perfectly align the punch back and matrix for deep drawing.
NOTICE
Please note that contact between or intersection of the curves is possible
in the case of magnified representation, although no real contact or intersection takes place. To determine the actual curve distance, the representation must not be magnified.
NOTICE
If the nominal curves are not identical or the magnification is very large,
the tolerance lines might not be completely visible in the plot.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-57
Tolerances are not displayed in the 2-curve plot.

The following applies in addition to the standard template:
The curves will be displayed in color to improve their identification.

You can change the colors in your templates or deactivate the use of
a color scheme.
Nominal curves are displayed as gray lines. If, as shown in the example
above, they are identical, the lines are superimposed.
The largest and smallest distances between the curves are identified
by red circles.
Plot for circle in contour construction

CALYPSO provides a plot for the circle in contour construction.
The plot consists of the fitted circle touching the contour at two points.
Based on the circle, the deviations of the contour are removed from the
circular form with magnification. The contact points as well as the point
of the maximum deviation are marked by a small red circle.
The following auxiliary lines are entered:
8-58
the contact lines: the auxiliary line through both contact points as well
as the parallel line through the circle center
the contact point lines from the circle center to the nominal and actual
contact points
the contact point tolerance from the circle center passing the nominal
contact points on the left and right
the orientation line: the angle bisecting line between the angle spanned by the contact points and the circle center
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The bend circles represent the curvature of the curve in the contact points.
They are drawn near the corresponding contact point.
You can set the following properties:
second deviation curve with different magnification
extreme points not marked
type of auxiliary lines
Pitch plot
CALYPSO provides a pitch plot.
Contents of the pitch
plot
In the pitch plot, the pitch features activated in the measurement plan
are shown in the following order:
Individual pitch
Cumulative pitch
Pitch error
Radial runout
Roundness
Use the Define graphics output window to define the representation

of the pitch plot.
The pitch plot shows the deviations as a bar located above and below the
X axis. The color of the bars is determined by the size of the deviation.
Colors of the bar
Determine the colors using the Out Of Tolerance, Above Warn

Level, Above Suppression Level and Below Suppression Level properties.
The suppression level is indicated as an absolute value in mm or inch. The
warning limit is set as a percentage referenced to the tolerance limit.
Extreme points
Use Extreme points visible to define that the largest positive and the
largest negative deviation is marked by small red triangles.
Coordinate axes
You may use linear or logarithmic scaling for the Y axis; linear scaling must
always be used for the X axis. The color of the coordinate axes is determined by the Pen: Basegrid property. The color and the font of the
labeling of the axes is defined via Text: Font.
Limits
The tolerance and warning limits are drawn in the plot. The color of the
lines are determined via the Pen: Tolerances and Pen: Warning level properties. If a property is not to be shown, you must set the corresponding color to transparent.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-59
Creating single templates with the

graphics editor
Graphics editor
The graphics editor makes it possible to create and edit single templates
for form and location plots of a graphics element.
CALYPSO provides predefined single templates for all characteristics for
which you can create plots with the graphics element. If necessary, you
can adapt the predefined single templates to your requirements or create
new individual single templates.
NOTICE
A software update or a new installation overwrites the predefined single
templates. Save the copies of the modified single templates with a new
name so that your changes will not get lost when a software update is
carried out.
NOTICE
CALYPSO uses functions of PiWeb for the graphics editor. Only limited
functions are available in CALYPSO.
Opening a single template for changing

1 Open the corresponding Graphics Element in the measurement
plan.
2 Click the Define graphics evaluation icon of the desired characteristic in the Allocation List.
The single template is opened in the Define graphics output window in the graphics editor.
8-60
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
1 Drawing area or preview for the result to be expected

2 Property list
3 Button for pasting text fields, lines and legends
4 Area for the definition of own system variables and the magnification
3 Change the single template as desired.
Changing the single template properties [ 862]
Inserting texts, lines and legends in the single template [ 863]
Magnified representation of the deviations [ 865]
Outputting variables in graphics [ 864]
4 Save your changes.
Saving changes of single templates [ 866]
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-61
Creating a new single template

To create a new single template, you must save a copy of an existing single
template with a new name.
1 Open an existing single template in the graphics editor.
Opening a single template for changing [ 860]
The single template must be of the same type as the single template
that you want to create. For example, if you want to create a single
template for the Roundness characteristic, you must open an existing single template for this characteristic. If necessary, you must first
insert a line in the Allocation List of the graphics editor for the
desired characteristic (Defining graphics elements [ 842]).
2 Click Save.
3 Enter the desired file name in the input field below the selection list.
5 Change the single template as desired.
Inserting texts, lines and legends in the single template
[ 863]
Magnified representation of the deviations [ 865]
Outputting variables in graphics [ 864]
6 Save your changes.
Saving changes of single templates [ 866]
Changing the single template properties

1 Open the desired single template in the graphics editor.
Define the properties of the plot, the text field, the line or the legend
in the left-hand area of the Define graphics output dialog box.
The properties of the plot are displayed when opening the single template.
2 To display the properties of another element, click the element in the
preview.
The property list is updated.
3 To change a property, click in the property list the current value of the
property (not the property name) and change the value as desired.
The short description below the property list provides help information
on the active property.
You can immediately check the effects of your changes in the preview,
provided the current measuring result contains suitable data.
8-62
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4 If the result is satisfactory, you can save your changes to the clipboard
by clicking Apply.
5 To start from the beginning, click the Reset button.
CALYPSO undoes all changes made since the last time the settings
were saved or saved to the clipboard.
Note: To maintain a clear structure of the property list, the graphics
editor shows by default only the most important properties of an element. To display all properties, activate the Extended option in the
title bar.
Inserting texts, lines and legends in the single

template
It is possible to insert user-specific elements such as texts (with variables)
lines and a legend in the single template.
1 Open the desired single template (see Opening a single template for
changing [ 860]).
2 Click in the Define graphics output dialog box the Customize
button and select the desired element.
3 Move the element to the desired position in the preview and, if necessary, change the size of the text field, the line, etc.
4 Define in the left-hand area of the window the properties of the element, e.g. line type, colors, font, etc.
Under Appearance, enter the Text to be output in the text field.
To edit longer texts and paste variables and parameters, click the button next to the Text property. You can edit the text in a multiline input
field and insert variables at the current position by clicking with the
mouse. The variables created by you are shown at the end of the list
named Variable.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-63
Deleting user-specific elements

1 Click the desired element in the preview.
2 Click the Customize button and select Delete.
Outputting variables in graphics

You can position variables anywhere in a graphic. The value of the variables is calculated and entered during the run time.
General procedure
You insert a text field in the single template and enter the desired text in
the Text property field.
You can insert in the text:
predefined system variables, e.g. for author, tolerances, icons ($, %,

+, -, etc.)
own system variables with any values (free texts, formulas, etc.)
The procedure is described in detail under Inserting texts, lines and

legends in the single template [ 863].
In the following, you will learn how to define your own system variables.
Defining variables
1 Open the desired single template.

8-64
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 In the Define graphics output dialog box, select the New... list
item in the Parameter / Any Input selection list.
The New Text / New Number input field is opened.
3 Enter a name in the Name input field.
4 Enter a value via the Value field or a formula via the context menu.
5 Select the format in the Format field.
You can select between Text, Integer, Scalar, Length, Angle and Temperature.
Editing variables
To edit an existing variable:

1 Select the variable in the menu of the Parameter / Any Input selection list and click the Edit button.
2 Modify the value and the format in the Value Change <parameter_name> window.
Magnified representation of the deviations

CALYPSO offers the following possibilities to show magnified deviations
in graphics:
Representation with automatically calculated factor

CALYPSO magnifies the representation according to the available
space.
Magnification with automatically calculated or

fixed factor
Representation with fixed factor
Representation based on a factor calculated with a formula, e.g. to

refer the magnification to the tolerances
Magnification with automatically calculated or fixed factor:

2 Define the desired Magnification Factor under Data in the property list of the plot.
3 Check the result in the preview.
Defining a formula for

the magnification
For magnification with a factor calculated with a formula:

2 In the Define graphics output dialog box, select the Magnification list item in the Parameter / Any Input selection list.
3 Tick the check box next to the selection list and click the Formula
button.
4 Define the formula for the magnification in the Formula... window.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-65
5 Check the result in the preview.

The currently used magnification is displayed in the preview of the Define graphics output dialog box.
The yellow background color tells you that a formula is used and that the
Magnification Factor defined in the property window is ignored.
Using magnification
To use the Magnification Factor defined in the property window:

1 Remove the check mark next to the Parameter / Any Input selection list.
Saving changes of single templates

You can save your single template changes in several ways.
If your changes should be applied to the currently loaded plot only:
1 Close the Define graphics output window with OK.
CALYPSO saves the changes in the graphics element.
If your changes should be applied to other plots, you must save the
changes in the current (or another) single template:
1 Click Save.
2 Select in the Save Plot Definition window an existing single template in which the modified single template is to be saved or enter a
new name in the field below the selection list.
You can find later the single template in the assignment list of the
graphics element under this name.
NOTICE
The installation of a new version or a service pack overwrites the predefined single templates (default). Save the copies of the modified single
templates with a new name so that your changes will not get lost when
a software update is carried out.
NOTICE
The changes of a single template are not automatically applied to graphics in which the single template is also used. The changes only become
effective when you assign again the single template to the characteristic
in the graphics element.
8-66
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Creating graphics forms with the

printout header editor
Printout header editor
Use the Printout Header Editor to customize the graphics forms for
location and form plots.
The printout header editor offers the following options for editing the
graphics forms:
Editing master pages
Editing report pages
Inserting elements in the report header
NOTICE
CALYPSO uses functions of PiWeb for the printout header editor. Only
limited functions are available in CALYPSO.
Calling the printout
header editor
Select Resources Design custom printout Printout Header Editor for Graphics Feature... to open the printout header editor.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-67
Loading PTX files
The type of a plot and its orientation are defined in a PTX file. To open a
file in the printout header editor, select File Open Report. The PTX
files are located in the <user directory>\protocol\formplott\PlotControlFiles\templates directory.
Calling the master and

report page
At the left margin of the window, click the Pages button to open the
list of existing pages.
Master page
The master page is used to ensure a uniform appearance for all pages of
your report. Elements of the master page are grayed out on all report
pages in the screen view.
NOTICE
All entries made on the master page become immediately active when
you quit the master page. To carry out additional modifications, call the
master page again.
The Properties tab allows you to deactivate the validity of the master
page for individual pages of the report. Untick the Use Master Page
check box.
Report page
The plot is displayed on the report page. It is possible to add elements

such as pictures and texts to the report page. To insert blank report pages,
select Add Empty Page.
Features
It is possible to insert and edit elements in the report. Select

Paste Element to insert an element in the report.
The following elements can be used for editing the printout header:
Image
Line
Text
Container
The elements can be edited either via the context menu or the Properties tab.
Properties tab
The Properties tab allows you to show and define all properties of the
elements. The element whose properties are displayed is shown in the
status bar of the list.
Image elements
To insert image elements, select Paste Element Image.
Text elements
The context menu and the Properties tab allow you to insert variables
such as the current time or the current page number in each text element.
Working with the Properties index card

The Properties index card of PiWeb has been applied and is used in the
printout header editor. The Properties index card allows you to display
and edit all properties of the plot and the elements contained in the plot.
8-68
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The element whose properties are displayed is shown in the status bar of
the Properties index card. A short description of the active property is
displayed in the lower field on the index card.
Assigning properties
In the drawing area, you can activate elements by clicking them and define their properties via the Properties index card. The modifications
become immediately active and are displayed in the drawing area.
Assigning variables to
text elements
It is possible to assign variables to each text element by means of the

Properties index card. Click the button located next to the Text property to open the Select variables dialog box.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-69
Working with the plot window

The graphics created by means of the Graphics Element utility are
output in the plot window during the measurement plan run.
Calling the plot window

Call the plot window in the graphics element by clicking the button under
Graphic.
Paging
You can move between the pages of the graphic using the Navigate
menu.
Zoom
The slider of the zoom at the top right corner of the toolbar allows you
to zoom the view of the plot in and out.
Adjusting the plot
Use the right mouse button to open the Adjust Form Plot window. In
this window, you can define additional settings for the representation
and the scope of display (points, segments).
Info mode
Click with the mouse in the info mode (Tools Info mode) to display
details on the individual points/segments. Information on the characteristic, segment, upper and lower tolerance, deviation, angle and status is
displayed.
8-70
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
To integrate this information in the representation of the report, click the

icon of the pin needle. The info window is attached to the representation
of the plot. To remove the information again, select Tools Remove
info.
Outputting as a PDF file
To save the graphic as a PDF file in any directory, select File Save
report as PDF.
NOTICE
Measurement plans created with older versions of CALYPSO can also be
saved as a PTX file. The current measurement plans only allow the saving
as a PDF file.
Page information
Select Tools Page Information to display the size of the paper and
the orientation used for the plot.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-71
Outputting form and location plots for

characteristics
Defining the output in the definition
template
CALYPSO can graphically display the deviations that are determined by
form and location checks on the measured geometric elements as a form
plot or location plot and can output them. You can also output the CAD
view as a plot.
Plot from within the
characteristic
The definition templates of certain characteristics contain the output of

the form and location plot. You will find more information in this section.
Graphic
Graphic outputs via

Graphics Element
You can also output form and location plots via the Graphics Element utility. For more information, please see Outputting form and
location plots with the graphics elements [ 840].
Form and location plots for

characteristics
Form plots for characteristics
Certain form plots are available for the following characteristics via the
definition template for the characteristic:
Straightness
Flatness
There is also a Fourier analysis plot [ 881] for this.
Roundness
There is also a Fourier analysis plot [ 881] for this.
8-72
Cylindricity
Curve Form and Curve Slope of the Curve Measurement option

(Graphical evaluation of curve deviations)
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
You can either select an existing format file or a format file that you have
created yourself (*.gra) to display the deviations in graphical form.
Location plots for characteristics
Certain location plots are available for the following characteristics via the
definition template for the characteristic:
Parallelism, Perpendicularity, Inclination

Line - Line
Line - Plane
Plane - Axis
Plane - Plane
Runout
Radial runout of circles
Total radial runout of cylinders
Axial runout or total axial runout of planes
You can either select an existing format file or a format file that you have
created yourself (*.gra) to display the deviations in graphical form.
CAD window as a plot
You can also freeze the representation in the CAD window and output
it as a drawing with spatial effect in a plot (Outputting the CAD view
as a plot [ 878]).
Output of form or location plot

Output types
You can manually call and output form or location plots or have them
displayed in the CNC run. In addition to that, you can use the Point List
to output a form plot in tabular form.
Calling form or location plots manually

Actual values must be available before a form or location plot can be
output manually. Therefore, the features required for the characteristic
in question must have already been measured.
You can then output the plot by calling the window for form and location
plots from the definition template of the characteristic, making the necessary settings and starting the printout.
1 Select the type of plot from the upper selection list.
CAD View means output of the CAD window as a plot.
2 From the selection list below that, select the format file to be used to
display the form or location plot.
NOTICE
For details, see Outputting a form and location plot manually [ 877].
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-73
Having the form or location plot output in the CNC run

Several preconditions must be met before the desired form or location
plot can be output in the CNC run:
Output of a form or location plot must be activated in the characteristic in question (Activating form and location plots [ 875]).
The desired type of plot (the format file) must be selected and the
desired properties of the form plot must have been set (Setting the
type and properties of the plot [ 876]).
The feature must exceed at least one of the values set in the Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics.
Minimum standard deviation

Min. tolerance deviation in %
Both values are set to zero by default so that an activated form or

location plot without additional entries will always be displayed.
Using the criteria in the Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics, you
can thus restrict the display of form or location plots to only those
cases that interest you.
Once these preconditions have been met, the Form and location
plot window will be displayed with the set plots during the CNC run.
After the CNC run, you can view the plots and, if necessary, edit and print
them (Working with the form and location plot window [ 882]).
Output as a PDF
You can output the form and location plots created during the CNC run
as a PDF. To do so, you must activate the output as a PDF in the Result
To File window.
All form and location plots displayed during the CNC run are output.
The PDF files are assigned a name which is composed of the measurement
plan name, the part number and the _gra suffix and are saved in the
<user directory>\workarea\results directory.
Point table in the form plot

In addition to the graphical output, the measuring results can also be
output in tabular form as a point list.
Output of the point list is activated in the selection list of the Form and
location plot window by selecting the Point List entry.
8-74
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The following data is output in the point list:
Actual and nominal values
Upper and lower tolerances
Deviation (extreme values with asterisk)
Activating form and location plots

A form or location plot must be activated before it can be output in the
CNC run.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-75

2 Complete the Tolerance and Feature fields if they do not already
contain the applicable data.
3 Click the desired icons in the top right corner below the Comment
button:
Icon
Meaning
Switches the display of the graphic evaluation
(plot) on and off.
Switches the printout of the graphic evaluation
(plot) on and off.
Activates the graphic evaluation (form or location plot) of the measured results.
The form or location plot will be displayed during the CNC run if the characteristic exceeds the
values set in the measurement plan editor.
Now set the type of plot and the properties of the plot [ 876].
Setting the type and properties of the plot

If a plot is to be output in the CNC run, you must define its type and
properties in advance.
Conditions:
The form or location plot has been activated [ 875].
1 Click the Graphic icon in the definition template of the characteristic.
The selection dialog box for the form and location plot is opened. The
appearance of the window differs, depending on the characteristic.
The illustration shows the window using the Roundness characteristic as an example:
8-76
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Selection list for the type of plot

Format file selection list
Selection list for characteristics
2 Select the type of plot from the upper selection list.

CAD View means output of the CAD window as a plot.
3 From the selection list below that, select the format file to be used to
display the form or location plot:
Default refers to the standard ZEISS format file.
All characteristics for which the type of form or location plot can be
used are listed in the Characteristics selection list.
4 Select the characteristic. You can select two or more in the case of
some characteristics.
The Form Plot window opens with the type of plot you selected. The
editing options in the Form Plot window are described in detail in
Working with the form and location plot window [ 882].
Outputting a form and location plot manually

If the characteristic for which the form or location plot is to be created
has already been measured, you can display form and location plots manually and print them.
2 Complete the Tolerance and Feature fields if they do not already
contain the applicable data.
3 Proceed as described under Setting the type and properties of the
plot [ 876].
4 Click again the selection window for form or location plots if you want
to view other form or location plots.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-77
This moves the Form Plot window to the background. You can now
display the form or location plots of other characteristics together with
the current form or location plot. Select the desired characteristic.
Outputting the CAD view as a plot

You can output any view in the CAD window as a plot. This provides you
with a drawn model with spatial effect.
Prerequisites
A condition for output of a CAD model is that you have previously created
the desired CAD model with its parameters (zoom factor, scope of model,
rotation angle, offset, magnifying factor etc.) in the CAD window and
saved it using CAD View Save View.
Activating the output
You activate the output of the CAD window as a plot in exactly the same
way as the form or location plot using the Graphic icon in the definition
template of the characteristic. Then select CAD View as the format. A
selection of possible CAD views appears. The current view has the name
model. Other previously saved views appear with their file names.
Select the desired view in the list and click the Plot button.
Format files for form and location plots

Overview of the format files for form and
location plots
CALYPSO provides several standard format files for displaying the form
and location plots. Additionally, you can also create format files.
You select the file you want for the form or location plot in the dialog
box for the form or location plot. The format files which are offered here
can be found under <user directory>\protocol\formplott\calypso or in
certain subdirectories of this directory.
Only the format files that have been provided in the respective subdirectory (or, if none available, in the <user directory>\protocol\formplott\calypso directory) and are appropriate for the plot type can be selected in
the selection window for the form and location plot.
If you create format files, you must, for this reason, store them in the
subdirectory with the corresponding name (see list). If the subdirectory
does not yet exist, create it.
Subdirectory
File name
Multiroundness
multiroundness
cz_mr.gra
Multiple roundness transposed
multiroundness
cz_mr_t.gra
Plot type
Roundness
8-78
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Plot type
Subdirectory
File name
Multiroundness with diameter
multiroundness
cz_mr_dia.gra
Fourier analysis
fourieranalysis
cz_fo.gra
3D Flatness View
flatness3d
cz_fn3d.gra
Flatness from Circle Segments
circlemulti
cz_fn_mc.gra
Flatness from Line Segments
linemulti
cz_fn_ml.gra
Multi-Flatness from Circle segments
multiflatnesscircular
cz_mfn_c.gra
Multi-Flatness from Line segments
multiflatnesscircular
cz_mfn_c.gra
Fourier analysis
fourieranalysis
cz_fo.gra
Straightness
straightness
cz_sn.gra
Multistraightness
multistraightness
cz_msn.gra
Cylinder form from Circle segments in 3D
Cylinderformcircular3d
cz_cf_3dc.gra
Cylinder form from Line segments
Cylinderformline
cz_cf_l.gra
Cylinder form using several circle segments
Cumradialrunoutmulticir- cz_crro_mc.gra
cle
Flatness
Straightness
Cylindricity
Cylinder form using a single cir- Cumradialrunoutsinglecle segment

circle
cz_crro_sc.gra
Curve Form
Linear curve form
curveformline
cz_cu_li.gra
Curve form 2D
curveform2d
cz_cu_2d.gra
Curve form 3D
curveform3d
cz_cu_3d.gra
Multi-Curve form 2D
multicurveform2d
cz_mcu_2d.gra
Multi-Curve form linear
Multicurveformline
cz_mcu_li.gra
CurveformSlope
cz_cu_sl_Type1_ls.gra
Curve Slope
Slope Type 1
cz_cu_sl_Type1_p.gra
Slope Type 2
CurveformSlope2
Slope Type 3
CurveformSlope3
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-79
Plot type
Subdirectory
File name
borepattern
borepattern_new.gra
Perpendicularity
perpendicularity
cz_pe.gra
Perpendicularity 3D
perpendicularity3d
cz_pe3d.gra
Multi perpendicularity on circle

segments
multiPerpendicularityOnCircle
cz_pe_mc.gra
Parallelism
parallelism
cz_pa.gra
Parallelism 3D
parallelism3d
cz_pa3d.gra
Multi parallelism on circle segment
multiParallelismOnCircle
cz_pa_mc.gra
Angularity
angularity
cz_an.gra
3D angularity
angularity3d
cz_an3d.gra
Angularity of circle segments
multiAngularityOnCircle
cz_an_mc.gra
Axial runout 3D
axialRunout3d
cz_ar3d.gra
Cumulative axial runout 3D
cumAxialRunout3d
cz_car3d.gra
Cylinder form using several circle segments
Cumradialrunoutmulticir- cz_crro_mc.gra
cle
Position
Bore Pattern
Perpendicularity
Parallelism
Angularity
Runout
Cylinder form using a single cir- Cumradialrunoutsinglecle segment

circle
cz_crro_sc.gra
Multi axial runout line
multiAxialRunoutLine
cz_ar_ml.gra
Multi cumulative axial runout

line
multiCumAxialRunoutLine
cz_car_ml.gra
Multiple radial runout
multiRadialRunout
cz_rro.gra
Multiple radial runout circle
radialRunoutOnCircle
cz_rro_sc.gra
AcisView
acis_3d.gra
CAD window (for all form

and location plots)
CAD View
Designing format files for form and location plots

To create your own format files, open the Header Editor using Resources Design custom printout Characteristic Editor.
To change the printout header of the plot, open the Header Editor using
Resources Design custom printout Printout and open the
8-80
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
mbhead.gra file in the <user directory>\protocol\formplott\calypso directory.

Details on how to work with the Printout format editor can be found
under Printout format editor [ 824].
Form plot for roundness

Connection lines
The measured points are generally connected by lines in the form plots.
In case of the roundness plot, however, two adjacent points will not be
connected if the distance between them exceeds 1/120 of the corresponding circle.
Fourier analysis for flatness and roundness

For flatness and roundness, you can also select a Fourier plot as the plot
representation.
Output
In the case of the Fourier representation for flatness and roundness, the
amplitudes for the different harmonics as well as a table with the largest
amplitudes and the associated harmonics are displayed.
The amplitudes are shown in radial direction in the Fourier analysis of
roundness and the amplitudes are shown in normal direction with respect
to the plane in the Fourier analysis of flatness.
NOTICE
The precondition for Fourier analysis is that a closed or overlapping circular path has been measured.
Presentation
You can enter the number of harmonics to be shown. The maximum

number of harmonics that can be shown is equal to half of the measured
points.
The graphic automatically fits into the intended space. The scale of the X
axis is logarithmic and starts at 1 = first harmonic.
Calculation process
To determine the values to be shown, all measured points are filtered first,
if necessary, and outliers are eliminated. Then, to calculate the various
amplitudes, a Fourier analysis is carried out, taking into account unequal
distances between the measured points.
In the Fourier analysis of flatness, the valid deviation is the deviation in
the direction of the normal with respect to the plane.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-81
Working with the form and location plot

window
Form and location plot window
Purpose of the form and
location plot
The form and location plot window allows you to define the appearance
of your form and location plots. You also use it both when manually calling and printing out plots for characteristics that have already been measured and when defining the appearance of plots that are to be displayed
automatically during the CNC run.
The illustration below shows the Form Plot window for a roundness
plot for a circle.
8-82
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
In this window, you can edit the representation of the form and location
plot and print the current representation.
Division of the window
Marking extreme points
The window consists of three areas:
The form plot header, containing the data of the printout header.
The form plot area. It shows the validated specified form along with
the actual contour as derived from the measured points. The two red
lines represent the upper tolerance limit and the lower tolerance limit.
You can see at a glance where a measured point deviates from specification, and in which direction.
A data table with the name of the characteristic, the actual value, the
tolerance, the number of points, and the data for the filter, if used.
You can mark extreme points. To do so, select Edit Plot Type in the
form plot window and tick the Extreme Points check box. You then
have a choice of different marking symbols.
Printing a form and location plot

To print the form and location plot, go to the Form Plot window and
select File Print.
The Windows printer dialog is opened.
Changing form and location plot settings

In the form and location plot settings, you can, among other things,
specify the scope of the model of the form and location plot. You can
change the settings temporarily (for the next output) or permanently:
1 Open the definition template for the characteristic.
2 Click the Graphic icon.
3 In the Form Plot window, select Edit View.
With this you open the Form plot attributes notebook.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-83
4 Make the desired settings on the respective pages.

5 Click OK to accept the modified presettings only for the current plot.
The Form Plot window reappears on the screen.
- or To incorporate the form and location plot settings permanently into
the measurement plan, click OK to close all sub-windows along with
the definition template for the characteristic.
Note: You will find more information on this window under Form plot
properties in theCALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
8-84
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Exporting measuring results into files

Overview of the export of measuring
results
CALYPSO saves the measuring results by default in the protocol file.
Additionally, the measuring results can be exported into different file
types.
Exporting measuring results independently of each other into different file formats
Exporting the results (points) of all curves into files with a certain file
format
Exporting the results (points) of selected features into files with a certain file format
The following table shows all possible exports of results from within CALYPSO:
File type
Contents, form, standard path and name
Table
The measuring results are saved in the following text files in table
format:
*hdr.txt: header data
*chr.txt: characteristics
*fet.txt: features
The results are available for use in other programs such as spreadsheet programs.
Files of this type are saved under <user directory>\workarea\results
under the name of the measurement plan which corresponds to the
measuring results, including part number indices.
Merge file
The measuring results from different CNC runs are written sequentially into the same file.
Before you can save the measured values in a merge file you have to
initialize them. Merge files always have table format.
They are saved in <user directory>\workarea\results under the name
merge.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-85
File type
DMIS available as option only The measuring results are saved in a file in DMIS format and are suitable for CMM acceptance processes.
Files of this type are saved in <user directory>\workarea\dmisout under the name of the measurement plan that belongs to the measuring
results.
Note: DMIS recognizes only one single tolerance mode. The deviations are therefore output as in the Number scale mode even if the
Amount mode is set.
Define the scope and sequence of the features in the printout.
Q-DAS available as option
only
The measuring results are saved in one or several files in Q-DAS format and are suitable for Q-DAS statistics programs (e.g. qs-STAT,
procella).
The system only saves the results of those characteristics that correspond to the characteristic set in the measurement plan editor
(Characteristic to Statistic on).
In the selection list you define the division into several files:
Default output: No separation, one complete file.
Split with highest Characteristic group: Separation in the

upper hierarchy level of the characteristics groups. There are no
groups above that level.
Split with lowest Characteristic group: Separation in the

lowest hierarchy level of the characteristic groups. The individual
files will not have any further sub-groups.
Split acc. to <attribute_name>: If you have configured

characteristic attributes, you can define the split according to
identical values of an attribute (User-defined characteristic attributes [ 557]).
Note: You can also define the attributes to ensure that certain
characteristics are added to all Q-DAS files.
The files are saved with the extensions .dfd and .dfx in the <user
directory>\workarea\qdas\ directory. The file names are composed of
the name of the measurement plan, the part number and the group
name, each one separated by underscores.
PiWeb
8-86
The measuring results are saved in a PiWeb report. The scope and
type of the representation can be defined in the Configuration
PiWeb Output window. It is possible to select templates, define
the output of the printout and insert additional files such as image
files.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
File type
PDF
The measuring results are saved as a PDF file (Portable Document

Format) in the <user directory>\workarea\results directory.
Note: You can limit the number of stored PDF files.

The custom printout is saved together with all created form and location plots, the graphic plots from the graphics elements and/or the
compact printout.
The file names consist of the name of the measurement plan, the part
number and a fixed extension:
*_gra.pdf for custom printouts with plots
*_ptx.pdf for the plots from the graphics elements
*_txt.pdf for compact printouts
Curve distance file
The results of the curve distance characteristic are saved in an ASCII

file in the <user directory>\workarea\results directory.
Measuring points
Saving of the measuring results for later re-evaluation, possibly according to different criteria.
You can limit the number of measuring runs to be saved.
Curve Points
The measuring results related to curves are generated during each

CNC run and stored as files in the <user directory>\workarea\results
\ASCII\<measurement plan name> directory.
You can select the data to be written into the file:
The nominal values or interpolated actual values with and without

normals and deviations and, if necessary, in polar coordinates.
The measured values that have not been interpolated and the
measured values that have not been interpolated and not corrected by the stylus radius in the curve coordinate system analogously to KUM-UX.
Result files that can be directly read from TiMS for contour and
surface evaluations.
The data is saved in the default ASCII format in files named

feature_name.txt. You can select alternative file formats for certain
contents:
VDA format: The curve points corrected by the stylus tip radius
are written in files named feature_name.vda as MDI.
DXF format: Export into files named feature_name.dxf
Points of features
During the CNC run, the points (nominal and actual values) of selected or all features are exported in one of the nominal-actual comparison, ASCII, VDA or DXF formats.
Stylus data
The stylus data are written in an ASCII or PDF file during the CNC run.
The scope of data is defined in an INI file.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-87
Individual path and file

names
You can define individual paths and names [ 888] for the following
data types:
Printouts (default and compact printout)
Table File (Characteristics, Features, Printout header)
Measuring points
Stylus Data
PDF File (Graphics, Text, PTX graphics, BasicReporter, All)
Q-DAS File
Graphics PTX File
DMIS File
dml file
Defining paths and names individually

for output files
You can specify an individual name and directory path for certain output
files. When defining the name by means of PCM functions, use, for example, the printout header data.
You can define the paths and name for output files for all activated
measurement plans as well as for a certain measurement plan.
For an individual measurement plan, you then select either the default
name or the generally defined individual names or the separately defined
individual names for each type of output files.
Note: You must have the right Define Paths.

1 If you want to define individual names for the active measurement
plan, select Resources Name for output files ...for this
measurement plan.
The Name definitions for output files for this measurement plan window opens.
- or If you want to define individual names as default for all measurement
plans, select Resources Name for output files for all
Measurement Plans.
The Name definitions for output files for all activated
Measurement Plans window opens.
2 In the Output File selection list, select the file type whose name you
want to define.
3 Tick the Name of output file variable check box.
4 Only in the Name definitions for output files for this Measurement Plan window: To ensure that the set assignments are ac-
8-88
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
tive for all measurement plans, you must activate Name from setting for all Measurement Plans.
You can only make the individual settings for the active measurement
plan if you do not tick this check box.
5 Enter the name of the output file with the appropriate extension in
the Name definition of output file in PCM Syntax (with or
without path) input field and confirm your entry by pressing the
Return key.
Note: If you do not enter any path, the path of the current measurement plan is used.
Note: The name is entered in the Current Name output field. If the
name contains parameters (e.g. part number) to which no values
have been assigned, these parameters are not displayed.
Note: All file types, for which you defined an individual name, as well
as the names themselves, are shown in the All name definitions
deviating from default output field.
The defined names will be used for the selected output files.
NOTICE
If a file already exists under a name used for the output files, the file will
be overwritten with the new output file.
The default printout is created in addition under a default name (protocol)
irrespective of the name definition.
Saving measuring results as files

Defining the mode for saving measuring results as a
certain file type
1 Select Resources Results to File.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-89
2 Select the file types to be saved and initialize the merge file, if needed.
Note: Initialization deletes existing entries in the merge file.

Tick the Select at CNC Start check box if you want CALYPSO to
prompt for confirmation before saving.
3 Select the contents and, if necessary, the file type in which you want
to save the measuring results of the curve measurement.
8-90
You will find more information on this window under Results to File in
the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Exporting points during CNC run

Exporting points of features into files during the CNC
run
2 Click Properties next to Export Points in the Result To File
window.
3 Select the output format and the scope of output.

4 Define the alignment the coordinates should refer to as well as the
point type.
5 Close the window.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-91
6 Open the Measurement Plan Editor Features, e.g. on the

Measurement Plan index card, and define under Geometry Export Points the features whose points are to exported
during the CNC run.
During the CNC run, the desired data of the specified features is written in files named feature_name+part_number in the current measurement plan directory.
NOTICE
The last settings made in the Export Points window will always be used
for the export. If points with other settings were exported manually prior
to the CNC run, then the settings made for this purpose apply. The following default settings apply as long as no settings have been made: text
file, actual values + normal vectors, base alignment, contact points.
Exporting points manually

Exporting the points of a feature manually into a file
1 Select Export Points in the list of features in the feature's context
menu.
8-92
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 Select the output format and the scope of output in the Export
Points window.
3 Define the alignment the coordinates should refer to as well as the
point type.
4 Select Export to start the export.
The points of the feature are written in the feature_name
+part_name file in the current measurement plan path.
NOTICE
The last settings made in the Export Points window will always be used
for the export. If a CNC run starts after the manual export, the points are
exported from the measurements with the settings defined for the manual export.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-93
Configuring the DMIS output

The Result To File dialog box is where you activate the output of measuring results in a file in DMIS format. This data is not suitable for CMM
acceptance processes.
After the CNC run, the files are saved in DMIS format under <user directory>\workarea\dmisout and the name of the measurement plan that
belongs to the measuring results.
As CALYPSO and DMIS use different structures, it is important to know
which data is used by CALYPSO in which form for DMIS. An example is
the tolerance mode: As there is only one tolerance mode available in
DMIS, the deviations are output to DMIS according to the Number scale
mode even if the Amount mode is set.
Additional properties of the DMIS output can be set in the Compatibility settings for this measurement plan or Compatibility
settings for several measurement plans window which can be
called via Resources Compatibility Settings. Four settings refer
to the DMIS printout:
DMIS printout:
Settings
Unique Feature Names
On: Presetting for new measurement plans from V4.6 and higher.
The uniqueness of the DMIS name is guaranteed internally.
Off: Use of the first 8 characters for the element names as before
version 4.6. The rest is cut off.
Length of feature name The length of the output feature names is:
10 / 64 / 255.
Definition of TOL/
WIDTH
Direction Vector: Presetting for new measurement plans from V

5.0.
Orientation: Presetting for new measurement plans from version
5.0.
Source of nominal data Features: The nominal data is adopted from the features.
for measured features Characteristics: The nominal data is adopted from the characteristics.
Special aspects of nominal values
If you have set the characteristics for the nominal data source, the nominal
data in the characteristics will be assigned to the following nominal data
in DMIS:
Category
Characteristic
Nominal
Size
Diameter
Diameter
8-94
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Category
Angle
More
Characteristic
Nominal
Radius
Diameter
Projection Angle One
Normal Direction
Projection Angle Two
Normal Direction
Cone Angle
Cone Angle
Half Cone Angle
Cone Angle
Inclination Angle
Normal Direction
Rotation Angle
Normal Direction
Feature Angle
Start Angle
Diameter Two
Diameter Two
Radius 2
Diameter Two
Slot Length
Length
Slot Width
Width
If a feature is used in several characteristics which contain different nominal values, an average is calculated, first within the identical characteristic
types and then a higher-order average is determined for the averages
calculated in this way.
Projection Angle One and Projection Angle Two as well as Inclination Angle and Rotation Angle form a logical unit. A feature's normal
direction is computed from the combination of such a unit. If only one
part of such a unit exists, the missing nominal data will be completed with
the corresponding data of the feature.
Table files with measuring results

Reference: Format of the table files
If output to table file is set, CALYPSO outputs the following three text
files in the <user directory>\workarea\results directory with each run:
File name
Content
planid_partnb_hdr.txt
Header data for measurement plan and measurement
planid_partnb_chr.txt
Measuring results for characteristics
planid_partnb_fet.txt
Measuring results for features

In this case, planid represents the measurement plan name and
partnb the part number.
The measuring results are available in these files for internal and external
processing (e.g. in spreadsheet programs).
Format of the files
All three files have the same format: The first line contains the column
headers of the table, the following lines contain the measured or calcu61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-95
lated values for the corresponding column and there is an END at the
end of the file.
The *_hdr.txt header file contains the general data for the measurement plan and the measurement.
The *_chr.txt characteristic file contains all values defined and measured or calculated in the characteristics.
The feature file contains all values (nominal and actual values) defined
and measured in the features.
The same identifiers as in the printout format editor are used for designation of the values.
Interface to DML
The table files represent the interface to various other output formats,
e.g. also to the DML files.
In addition to the direct measuring results, the table files contain further
information:
Curve results
Names of the datums for all characteristics.
Coordinate system of the True Position as a matrix and vector.
Tolerance zone
The results of the curve measurement are output as table files if the
Curve Points check box is ticked in the Result To File window.
If the Masked curve points check box is ticked in addition, the table
file also includes the masked points which are not used for the evaluation.
These lines contain in each column the entry 99999 instead of the
measuring values.
Representation of the DML data in the table

file
In addition to the direct measuring results, the table files contain further
information:
Names of the references for all characteristics.
Coordinate system of the True Position as a matrix and vector.
Tolerance zone
Names of the references
The names of the reference features (reference A, B and C) are saved in

the datumAid, datumBid and atumCid columns. If a reference has
not been defined, the corresponding field is empty.
Coordinate system of the

True Position
The nominal value of the True Position is transformed with a coordinate

system which is calculated by means of the nominal values of the corresponding features of the reference system. The actual value of the True
Position is transformed with a coordinate system which is calculated by
means of the actual values of the corresponding features of the reference
system.
8-96
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Matrices and vectors are represented as a character string and use only
one column of the table. The components are lined up and separated by
the @ separator:
Matrix A = a11@a12@a13@a21@a22@a23@a31@a32@a33
Vector v = v1@v2@v3
The coordinates of the vector refer to the base alignment.
The two coordinate systems are saved in lines which belong to a True
Position or best fit of bore pattern in the table file of characteristics
(*_chr.txt).
The matrix of the coordinate system, based on the nominal features,

is saved in the drfTransformNominalMatrix column. Sein Vektor in
der Spalte drfTransformNominalVector.
The matrix of the coordinate system, based on the actual features, is

saved in the toleranceTransformActualMatrix column. Its vector is
saved in the toleranceTransformActualVector column.
The vectors can be converted into inch but the matrixes not.
Tolerance zone of a True
Position
The tolerance zone of a True Position is entered in the tolerancezone

column. The tolerance zone may have the following values:
pol2dxy
Circular tolerance in the XY plane
pol2dyz
Circular tolerance in the YZ plane
pol2dzx
Circular tolerance in the ZX plane
pol3dxy
Spherical tolerance in space
polxyz
Tolerance form Polar (the direction is accepted by the nominal geometry)
Two parallel lines/planes as tolerance form in the X direction
Two parallel lines/planes as tolerance form in the Y direction
Two parallel lines/planes as tolerance form in the Z direction

NOTICE
The columns for the coordinate systems and the tolerance zone are only
completed if the DML output has been activated for the CNC run.
Characteristic names in the table file

If Additional Position Result is activated, you can change the notation of
the automatically generated CALYPSO characteristic names contained in
the *.chr table file.
This refers to the specification of the coordinate axes in the generated
characteristic names which are written in the id column (Name of
Characteristic).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-97
NOTICE
The original coordinate designations (X, Y, Z) are retained in the type
(translated characteristic type) and idsymbol columns (language-neutral characteristic type).
Instead of the automatically generated X and Y axis designations, you can
select any other designation and invert the order of the characteristics in
the table file.
NOTICE
The renaming and inversion take also place in the custom printout. The
two other printout types remain unchanged.
Changing coordinate names

You can define the name change for the table file and custom printout
for the entire measurement plan or for a single characteristic under
Printout Coord. name for ext. position output in the Measurement Plan Editor Characteristics.
To do so, enter the new names of the first and second coordinate axes
beside one another. If your coordinate axis names should contain several
characters, you must separate the two new coordinate axis names by
means of a comma. To invert the order of the characteristics, you must
enter in addition an *.
The table shows the effect of the specification in the Measurement Plan
Editor Characteristics on the table file.
Specification
id
type
idsymbol
AB
True Position 1A
True Position 2d Polar

X
gdtPosPol2d X
True Position 1B

Y
gdtPosPol2d Y
True Position 1B

X
gdtPosPol2d X
True Position 1A

Y
gdtPosPol2d Y
True Position 1A

Y
gdtPosPol2d X
True Position 1B

X
gdtPosPol2d Y
True Position 1anna

X
gdtPosPol2d X
True Position 1bella

Y
gdtPosPol2d Y
BA
AB*
anna,bella
8-98
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Copying the measuring results file

The results in the default printout and the compact protocol are automatically saved in files. Each time you run a measurement plan, these files
are overwritten.
The respective names of the files are protocol.txt or cprotocol.txt. They
are saved in the folder created for the measurement plan in the <user
directory>\workarea\inspections\ folder.
You can use the Windows Explorer to copy these files.
NOTICE
Custom printouts are not saved. Therefore, you cannot copy them.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-99
Evaluating measuring results subsequently

Basics about the subsequent evaluation
of measuring results
CALYPSO makes it possible to re-evaluate data that has been determined
during the measurements.
As long as the measurement plan is open, the data that has been determined during the measurement can be evaluated again and according to
changed criteria e.g. with respect to additional or modified characteristics. Once the measurement plan has been closed, this is not possible
anymore.
However, if you notice later that another evaluation of the measured data
would be more useful, you can use the function for subsequent evaluation. The prerequisite is that the measuring points of the measurement
have been saved.
You can select automatic saving of the measuring results or manual saving after the measurement.
NOTICE
This function is used to re-evaluate the data originating from the measured features. You cannot measure additional features. The constructions
and characteristics may only refer to the already measured features.
Procedure
The subsequent evaluation procedure comprises the following steps:
With automatic saving
With manual saving
Set automatic saving

Perform measurement
Perform measurement
Save measuring points
Close measurement plan
Close measurement plan
Open and modify measurement plan
Open and modify measurement plan
Load measuring points
Load measuring points
Perform evaluation
Perform evaluation
Saving measuring points

CALYPSO makes it possible to save and evaluate subsequently the measured points of a measurement.
File path and name
8-100
To directly load the measuring points of different parts (workpieces) of

the same measurement plan, the measuring points must be named clearly
for each measured part. To do so, the Incremental Part Number which
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
is automatically increased at the end of the CNC run is used when saving
the measuring points.
The measuring points of a part number are saved by default in a file
named <part_number>.zmp in the <user directory>\workarea\inspections\<measurement plan>\idmeaspoints directory.
The number of saved files relating to a measurement plan is limited by
the Limit setting (by default: 5 files). The oldest files will be overwritten
when the limit is exceeded.
NOTICE
If you modify the paths and names for the files containing the measuring
points via Resources Name for output files, this mechanism is
no longer effective. You must then ensure the unique assignment of the
measurement to the file.
Automatic saving
You must set the automatic saving prior to the measurement in the Result To File dialog box which is opened via Resources Results to
File.
Manual saving
If automatic saving is not activated, the measuring points can also be

saved manually after the measurement.
Saving measuring points manually

1 Select File Save Measured Points.
CALYPSO indicates the part number under which the measuring

points are saved.
Once the measurement plan has been closed, the measuring points are
available for subsequent evaluation.
Evaluating measuring points

CALYPSO makes it possible to re-evaluate data that has been determined
during the measurements.
The prerequisite is that the measuring points have been saved either automatically or manually directly after the measurement.
1 Open the corresponding measurement plan and select File Load
Measured Points.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-101
CALYPSO proposes the saved measurements belonging to the measurement plan:
2 Select the desired part number and confirm with OK.

3 Make the desired modifications to the measurement plan.
Since you have already loaded the measuring points, point recall as
well as additional modifications which access actual values are possible. Furthermore, the effects of your modifications are directly shown
in the CAD window.
4 Select Plan Subsequent Evaluation.
5 Set the desired evaluation parameters and start the subsequent evaluation.
8-102
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CALYPSO runs the measurement plan in the same way as when measuring with the CMM but without probing the workpiece. CALYPSO
uses the loaded measuring points for the calculation of the features
and characteristics.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-103
Programmed access to measuring results

Basics about the programmed access to
measuring results
CALYPSO possesses a communication interface for transferring measuring results to other programs. This interface has been developed in Visual
Basic 6.0, and its application represents an extension of the BASIC vocabulary.
You can use this interface with the aid of a process you program. This will
give you access to the measuring results of a measurement plan that is
currently running or already loaded.
NOTICE
Opening and closing of the communication interface, as well as launching of the external process, are performed by means of PCM commands.
You therefore must possess the PCM Technology option in order to access the measuring results.
Programming languages
Principle
The external process may be programmed in one of the following languages:
VisualBasic
VBA (VisualBasic for Applications)
VisualBasicScript (WSH) [WSH = Windows Scripting Host]
CALYPSO provides a DLL with the name CalypsoInterface.dll as the

interface. Using this interface, a CalypsoInterface object can be produced with the corresponding access methods.
This CalypsoInterface ActiveX component does not have an interface
of its own. It is installed together with CALYPSO and waits for its application.
The CalypsoInterface with its properties and functions (Syntax of the
CalypsoInterface [ 8106]) is used in the external process to access
the measuring results and data of the measurement plan.
Access procedure
If all preconditions have been met, access to the measured values takes
place in three steps:
CALYPSO opens a communication channel (socket) to the outside

world.
CALYPSO starts the accessing external process and waits until it is

complete.
CALYPSO closes the communication channel (socket) again.
CALYPSO adds three commands to the measurement plan for this

(Permitting access to measuring results [ 8105]).
8-104
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Permitting access to measuring results

Basics about the access to measuring results
Prerequisites
Calling the process
In order to allow external access to the measuring results of the current

measurement plan in CALYPSO, the preconditions listed below must be
satisfied:
The PCM Technology option has been enabled.
You have programmed a process that can access the desired measuring results using the functions of the interface (Syntax of the
CalypsoInterface [ 8106]).
The external process will run as soon as it is called by CALYPSO. For this
purpose, three PCM commands must be entered in the measurement
plan settings, for example (it makes sense to enter them in the postsettings).
openSocket()
systemCallForResultAccess("<executable program>")
closeSocket()
The content in <executable program> depends on the programming language.
Example
If you wrote a Visual Basic script with the name getValuesFromCalypso.vbs, the three lines would look like this:
openSocket()
systemCallForResultAccess("Wscript C:\getValuesFromCalypso.vbs")
closeSocket()
Programming the CalypsoInterface

Programming languages
You can program a process in one of the following languages in order to

access the measured values via the communication interface of CALYPSO:
VisualBasic
VBA (VisualBasic for Applications)
VisualBasicScript (WSH) [WSH = Windows Scripting Host]
CALYPSO must have been installed on the destination computer on which

you program the process.
Structure of the program
Your program should have the following structure:
Construction of the CalypsoInterface object
Define a host name if necessary
Define the timeout
Setup of the connection to CALYPSO
Accept measured values; generate messages if necessary
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-105
Setup of the connection to CALYPSO
End of the program
Example
You can find an example of a VBScript with a similar structure under .

VBScript application (WSH) [ 8112].
Syntax
The necessary properties and functions are listed in the following Help
topics sections.
Syntax of the CalypsoInterface

Basics about the syntax of the
CalypsoInterface
The syntax of CalypsoInterface is listed in this section and in its related
topics.
NOTICE
The examples for using the syntax refer to programming with VisualBasicScript.
Construction of CalypsoInterface
The syntax for constructing the CalypsoInterface object is as follows:
CreateObject("CalypsoInterface.Calypso")
Creates an interface object and returns an object of the type CalypsoInterface.
NOTICE
It makes sense to create only a single instance of the CALYPSO object
data exchange can take place through only one port of the server.
Example
Set MyCalypso = CreateObject("CalypsoInterface.Calypso")
Properties and functions

You have the following options for programming the accessing external
process:
Properties of CalypsoInterface [ 8107]
Connection functions of the CalypsoInterface [ 8108]
Measurement plan functions of the CalypsoInterface [ 8109]
Access functions of CalypsoInterface to measured values [ 8109]
Access functions of CalypsoInterface to characteris-
tics [ 8111]
These options will be explained in more detail in the following sections.
8-106
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Properties of CalypsoInterface
The CalypsoInterface object has the properties listed in the table below.
Property
Function
HostName
Specifies the host name of the server on which CALYPSO is running.
Example:
Default: "localhost"
MyCalypso.HostName =
"160.4.11.146"
If the client (VBS, VB or VBA program) is located on a different computer than that of CALYPSO, this property must be assigned the
computer name or the IP address of the server before the connection
is established.
TimeOutConnect
Specifies the latest time after which a connection setup attempt with
CALYPSO will be aborted.
Example:
MyCalypso.TimeOutConnect = 10
Default: 10 [seconds]
TimeOut
Specifies the amount of time after which a timeout is to take place

when waiting for a reply from CALYPSO.
Example:
Example: MyCalypso.TimeOut = 10
Default: 5 [seconds]
Port
Port number of the socket via which CALYPSO awaits contact.
Example:
Default: 9998
Example: MyCalypso.Port
= 9998
ErrNo
Contains an error code. Meaning:
(Read access only)
No error
-1
Error when calling the implemented object functions

Returned value of the respective function:
0 for numerical values
False for Boolean values
Empty character string for string values
If data exchange was successful but the requested element
is not present, nil is returned in the case of string values.
11
CalDataSent Data sent, but no response
-9
CalNoDataSent No data sent
-10
TimeOut. No response from CALYPSO
-11
No connection to CALYPSO
-12
Timeout during communication setup
-13
TimerError
Value immediately after connection setup (see State)
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-107
Property
Function
????
ErrName
(Read access only)
ErrMessage
Example:
MyCalypso.ErrMessage =
False
Windows system errors and their numbers
Calypso.ErrName is assigned the "Description" parameter of a system error. Specific errors of the CALYPSO object (-9 to -13, 11) currently contain no designation of the error.
Permits a message to be issued: If the property is Calypso.ErrMessage = True, a message window (MsgBox) with the error code will
be displayed as soon as the condition Calypso.ErrNo < 0 is met.
Default: False
Important! The use of a MsgBox in ActiveX components can cause

problems: A MsgBox interrupts program execution and must be acknowledged by the user.
WaitResponse
Example:
MyCalypso.WaitResponse =
True
State
Defines whether to wait for a response for the data exchange functions. The waiting duration then depends on the property Calypso.TimeOut.
Default: True
Returns a numerical value for the status of the socket connection.
Meaning:
0
SckClose
SckOpen
SckListening
SckConnectionPending
SckResolvingHost
SckHostResolved
SckConnecting
SckConnected
SckClosing
SckError
ConnectCalypso and CloseCalypso are assigning functions.
Connection functions of the

CalypsoInterface
The CalypsoInterface object has the connection functions explained
below.
8-108
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Function
Purpose
ConnectCalypso
Sets up the connection to CALYPSO. Successful execution is a precondition for all access functions.
Example:
e = MyCalypso.ConnectCalypso
If e <> 7 Then
err = MyCalypso.ErrNo
errTxt = MyCalypso.ErrName
MsgBox( err & " " &
errTxt)
End If
The return value is the State property (type: long). The ErrNo
property is possibly assigned an error number.
CloseCalypso
Ends a connection between the client VB/VBA program and the CALYPSO server.
State = 7 means: connection has been set up.

Any other return value indicates an error. See State property [ 8107].
The return value is the State property (type: long; see State
property [ 8107]).
The ErrNo property is possibly assigned an error number.
Measurement plan functions of the

CalypsoInterface
The CalypsoInterface object has the following measurement plan functions:
Function
Purpose
GetInspectionName
Returns the name of the measurement plan currently loaded in CALYPSO.

Type: String
The result is "Default" if no measurement plan is loaded.
Access functions of CalypsoInterface to

measured values
The table below lists all functions of the CalypsoInterface object that
are used for access to actual and nominal values in the features.
The name of the respective feature is designated in the table with Identifier.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-109
Function
Used for
Returned
GetMeasElement("Identifier")
Determining whether the feature is Boolean

present.
GetXYZ("Identifier")
Position
Vector
Example:
Reading X, Y, Z nominal value
ErrNo = -1 if invalid
Position
Vector
Set myVector =
MyCalypso.GetXYZ("Cone1")
X = myVector.X
Y = myVector.Y
Z = myVector.Z
GetActualXYZ("Identifier")
Reading X, Y, Z measured value

GetNormalVector("Identifier")
Example:
Normal Vector
Reading NX, NY and NZ nominal

value
Set myVector =
MyCalypso.GetNormalVector("Cone1")
NX = MyVector.X
NY = MyVector.Y
NZ = MyVector.Z
In the case of the 2D line, this is the

normal of the plane on which the
line is located.
GetActualNormalVector("Identifier")
Normal Vector
GetIoSign("Identifier")
Nominal
Double
Inside/outside identifier
-1 = inside 0 = outside
Vector
Reading NX, NY and NZ measured

value
GetRadius("Identifier")
Reading nominal radius value
Double
GetActualRadius("Identifier")
Reading measured radius value
GetLineDirection("Identifier")
Nominal direction of line
GetActualLineDirection("Identifier")
Actual direction of line
Vector
GetEllipseDiameter2("Identifier")
Reading nominal D2 value
Double
Ellipse
GetActualEllipseDiameter2("Identifier")
Reading measured D2 value
Double
Ellipse
8-110
Double
Vector
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Function
Used for
Returned
GetConeAngle("Identifier")
Reading nominal AC value
Double
Angle in Radians
GetActualConeAngle("Iden- Reading measured AC value

tifier ")
Double
GetLength("Identifier")
Double
Reading nominal length value
Angle in Radians
GetActualLength("Identifier")
Reading length measured value
Double
GetWidth("Identifier")
Reading nominal width value
Double
GetActualWidth("Identifier")
Reading measured width value
Double
GetHight("Identifier")
Reading nominal height value
Double
GetActualHight("Identifier") Reading measured height value
Double
Access functions of CalypsoInterface to

characteristics
The table below lists all functions of the CalypsoInterface object that
are used for access to values in characteristics.
The name of the respective characteristic is designated in the table with
Identifier.
Function
Used for
Type
GetCFNominal("Identifier")
Reading nominal value
Double
(for angles: radian measure)
GetCFActual("Identifier") Reading measured value
Double
(for angles: radian measure)
GetCFupperTolerance("Identifier")
Reading upper tolerance
Double
GetCFlowerTolerance("Identifier")
Reading lower tolerance
Double
GetCFInTolerance("Identifier")
Query whether the result is within Boolean

the tolerance zone or not
GetCFType("Identifier")
Type of the characteristic. E.g.: X, Y String

or Z.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-111
Example: VBScript Application (WSH)

The following getValuesFromCalypso.vbs program which is written in
Visual Basic Script shows you how to access measured values using CalypsoInterface.
'===================
' Create an Object
'===================
Set MyCalypso = CreateObject("CalypsoInterface.Calypso")
'===================
' Settings
'===================
MyCalypso.HostName = "localhost"
MyCalypso.TimeOutConnect = 10
MyCalypso.TimeOut = 10
MyCalypso.Port = 9998
'===================
' Connect to Calypso
'===================
If MyCalypso.ConnectCalypso <> 7 Then
err = MyCalypso.ErrNo
errTxt = MyCalypso.ErrName
MsgBox( "No connection to Calypso")
MsgBox( err & " " & errTxt)
WScript.Quit[1]
End If
'====================================
' Get a few Actual and Nominal Values
'====================================
Set myVector = MyCalypso.GetActualXYZ("PointTop")
if MyCalypso.ErrNo <> 0 Then
MsgBox("Error with: GetActualXYZ")
Else
X = myVector.X
Y = myVector.Y
Z = myVector.Z
MsgBox ( "X-Actual Pos of PointTop : " & X)
MsgBox ( "Y-Actual Pos of PointTop : " & Y)
MsgBox ( "Z-Actual Pos of PointTop : " & Z)
End If
Set myVector = MyCalypso.GetXYZ("PointTop")
XN = myVector.X
YN = myVector.Y
ZN = myVector.Z
RA = MyCalypso.GetActualRadius("CylFroCe")
RN = MyCalypso.GetRadius("CylFroCe")
8-112
Set myVector = MyCalypso.GetActualLineDirection("Line")

XA = myVector.X
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
YA = myVector.Y
ZA = myVector.Z
Set myVector = MyCalypso.GetLineDirection("Line")
XN = myVector.X
YN = myVector.Y
ZN = myVector.Z
'=====================
' Get Control Features
'=====================
DA = MyCalypso.GetCFActual("Diameter_CylFroCe")
DN = MyCalypso.GetCFNominal("Diameter_CylFroCe")
BR = MyCalypso.GetCFInTolerance("Diameter_CylFroCe")
SBR = MyCalypso.GetCFType("Diameter_CylFroCe")
'====================
' Close Connection
'====================
If MyCalypso.CloseCalypso = 0 Then
MsgBox( "Connection closed")
Else
MsgBox ( "Could not close the connection to Calypso")
End If
WScript.Quit[1]
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
8-113
8-114
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Chapter
Creating protocol templates

with the PiWeb BasicReporter
.................................................................................................................

Introduction to the PiWeb BasicReporter .................................................. 92
Designing the protocol template .............................................................. 93
PiWeb BasicReporter program window .................................................... 94
Setting up the pages of a protocol template ............................................ 95
Designing pages by means of the toolbox ................................................ 99
Linking an element to a characteristic .................................................... 922
Undoing and restoring changes ............................................................. 924
Designing interactive protocols .............................................................. 925
Saving the protocol template and closing the BasicReporter ................... 926
Modifying and creating element templates ............................................ 927
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9-1
Introduction to the PiWeb BasicReporter
Introduction to the PiWeb BasicReporter

In the Multiple Printouts mode, CALYPSO provides the option of outputting reports according to predefined or customized templates (PTX files).
To create your protocol templates, use the PiWeb BasicReporter, an
independent program which you can access from CALYPSO.
Measuring results can be represented in tabular form or in form and location plots. A special feature of the PiWeb BasicReporter is the use of
placeholders for images. In the final printout, these placeholders will be
replaced by the current images.
9-2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Designing the protocol template
Designing the protocol template

To use a custom protocol template in a multiple printout, proceed as follows:
Step
For more details, please refer to
Select an existing multiple printout or create a

new one.
Creating multiple printouts [ 810]
Under Printout Features, select an existing

protocol template, even if you want to create a
new one.
Click the Edit Format button in the lower part PiWeb BasicReporter program winof the window and edit the template in the Pi- dow [ 94]
Web BasicReporter as desired.
Setting up the pages of a protocol tem-
plate [ 95]
Setting up footers and headers [ 96]
Generating a table of contents [ 97]
Adding design elements from the toolbox
[ 99]
Linking an element to a characteris-
tic [ 922]
Changing element properties [ 919]
Arranging elements on one page [ 920]
Designing interactive protocols [ 925]
Save the protocol template and close the PiWeb BasicReporter
Saving the protocol template and closing the
BasicReporter [ 926]
Define output media, scope, order, etc. in the Creating multiple printouts [ 810]
Definition of Multiple Printout window.
Click Display Multiple Printout Now to
check the result.
The function is active only if results are already
available.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9-3
PiWeb BasicReporter program window
PiWeb BasicReporter program window

The PiWeb BasicReporter program window contains the following
sections:
Horizontal lines above the work area for operation and control
Configuration area with three tabs in the left part
Work area with representation of the template in the right part
Work area
Configuration area
Menu bar / Toolbar
The menu bar contains all functions needed for editing the template as
well as for importing, printing, and saving.
The toolbar contains the most important functions in the form of icons.
Configuration area
In the configuration area, you can use the following tabs to define the
protocol template:
Pages
Serves to set up the pages [ 95] and select the page to be

edited.
Toolbox
Provides general element templates and templates for form

plots [ 99] for designing the pages.
Data providers
Serves to link the features [ 922] on the template pages with

the characteristics.
Properties
Allows you to customize the element [ 919] activated in the

work area.
Work area
The work area shows the results of the settings and entries made.
To enlarge or reduce the view, use the slider in the upper right corner of
the work area or the functions available via View Zoom.
9-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Setting up the pages of a protocol template

Master pages and report pages
A protocol template is composed of a master page and one or several
report pages.
Master page
The master page defines the basic layout of all pages. Features you want
to use on all pages, only need to be created once on the master page.
They will appear on all pages. A master page is designed in the same way
as the report pages.
Tip: Select File Import master page to transfer an existing master
page into a new protocol template.
Tip: If you do not want to adopt the master page settings for a certain
report page, display the respective page in the work area, select the
Properties tab and disable the Use master page option for the report page.
Working with pages
The following instructions refer to the work with the report pages.
Changing the page size and margins

1 Display the Pages tab in the left area of the PiWeb BasicReporter
(configuration area).
2 Select Page setup from the context menu and make your settings.
Navigating between the pages of the protocol template

1 Click the desired page on the Pages tab.
- or Use the arrow keys in the upper left corner of the work area.
- or Press F12 and select a page via the Pages dialog.
The work area will be updated accordingly.
Inserting a report page

1 On the Pages tab, highlight the page behind which you want to insert
a new one.
2 Select New page from the context menu.
A new page named Report page is inserted.
Tip: The context menu allows you to copy pages in order to use them,
for example, as a template for a new page.
Tip: Select File Import pages to add one or several report pages
from another protocol template.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9-5
Renaming a page in the table of contents

1 Click the name of the page on the Pages tab and change the name
as desired.
Changing the order of the pages

1 Select the Pages tab and use the mouse to drag the page to the
desired position.
Deleting pages
1 Select the desired page on the Pages tab and select Delete from the
context menu.
Setting up headers and footers

Each page is divided into three sections:
Header line
Content area
Footer line
The header and footer lines of the master page appear on all report pages
the master page has been assigned to.
On each report page, you can change the size of the individual sections
and add further elements to the header.
1 Display the desired page in the work area.
2 Click the page margin.
Border lines with handles are displayed.
In the illustration, header and footer are shown in white, the content
area is dark gray.
Header line
Content area
Footer line
3 Drag the border lines to the desired position.
9-6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
If you do not want a header or footer on a certain page, drag the

corresponding border line all the way up or down.
4 Design the various sections as desired.
To change the visualization of a section, click the page margin of
the desired section and change the properties in the configuration
area (Changing element properties [ 919]).
If needed, add element templates from the toolbox to the header
(Adding design elements from the toolbox [ 99]).
Note: Make sure that the sections of the report page are at least as
large as those of the master page. If the header and footer sections
of a report page are smaller than those of the master page, not all
elements of the master page may be output on the report page.
Generating a table of contents

The PiWeb BasicReporter is able to generate a table of contents in the
form of a list view.
1 In the work area, display the report page you want to add the table of
contents to.
2 Drag the respective element template from the Toolbox (General
category) to the desired position in the report page:
Table of contents
The PiWeb BasicReporter generates a table of contents of the existing
report pages. The names of the report pages are entered into the table
of contents.
3 Adjust the frame of the table of contents.
The PiWeb BasicReporter fills the frame according to its height and
width, using a one-column or multi-column layout.
4 To format the table of contents, click it in the work area and change
the properties in the configuration area as desired via the Properties tab.
Example:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9-7
Merge pages
The table of contents combines all successive pages having the same
name.
Page status
The table of contents displays an icon for each report page, indicating
whether or not the measuring results of the respective page are within the defined limit values.
You can choose between several sets of icons.
Page Thumbnails
A thumbnail is displayed in the table of contents for each report page.

You can change the size of the thumbnails.
5 To rename a report page, click the name of the page on the Pages
tab and change the name as desired.
9-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Designing pages by means of the toolbox

Adding elements from the toolbox
The Toolbox in the configuration area contains grouped templates for
all design elements.
Tooltips provide help about the element templates.
Tip: Use the context menu of a category to group and re-arrange the
element templates of the area.
Adding an element to a page

1 Use the mouse to drag the element template from the Toolbox to
the desired position on the page.
2 In the work area, adjust the frame, i.e. the size of the element to the
content to be inserted. The following contents can be added:
Text and variables [ 910]
CAD views [ 911]
Lines [ 912]
Reports and tables [ 914]
Form plots [ 917]
3 Link the element to the desired characteristics (Linking an element
to a characteristic [ 922]).
Alternative procedure
1 Drag the characteristic from the Data providers tab to the page.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9-9
2 Select the desired element from the open selection list. The list contains only elements that are suitable for the respective characteristic.
3 In the work area, adjust the frame, i.e. the size of the element to the
content to be inserted. The following contents can be added:
Text and variables [ 910]
CAD views [ 911]
Lines [ 912]
Reports and tables [ 914]
Form plots [ 917]
Tip: You can use the context menu of an element and the Windows
standard shortcuts for cutting, copying, and pasting even spanning various report pages.
Changing the appearance
The Properties tab in the configuration area allows you to define the
appearance of the element, e.g. line type, colors and font. The most important properties may also be changed via the context menu of the element.
For a uniform design of several elements, you can simultaneously modify
the appearance of several elements or adopt it from other elements
(Changing element properties [ 919]).
Tip: Instead of repeatedly changing the properties of frequently used
elements, you can modify element templates and create your own templates (Modifying and creating element templates [ 927]).
Arranging elements on
one page
Elements can be easily positioned using the mouse. Like in other graphic
programs, you can align several elements to each other and distribute
them uniformly. Rulers and grids help you position the elements precisely
(Arranging elements on one page [ 920]).
Deleting an element
1 Highlight the element and press the DEL key.
- or Use the corresponding context menu function.
Text and variables in protocol templates

Double-click the text field and enter the text to be output directly in the
work area.
For formatting and aligning the text within the text frame:
9-10
Use the functions of the Text context menu.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Variables
If the content of a system variable is to be output in the text field:
Open Text Variable and select the desired variable from the
context menu.
Configuration area
To enter, select, and format text and variables, you can also use the
Appearance option in the Text field on the Properties tab in the
configuration area.
Labeling elements
The elements contain text fields to allow for labeling of individual elements such as autoshapes and lines. To enter the text or variable, proceed
in the same way as for the Text element.
Images and views in protocol templates

You can use the Image element template to insert images of common
image formats and views of CAD models (.meshModel, .stl, .mod) into a
page.
The context menu of the element contains functions for selecting, mirroring and trimming an image. These functions can be accessed via Image.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9-11
Tip: To access further editing options, double-click the image. You can,
for example, change the view or the color of the CAD model.
Tip: The MIBA flag element template allows you to include meta information on characteristics of the CAD model in the printout.
Tip: Once you have completed the definition of the CAD model view,
you can use the context menu to delete the CAD data from the protocol
template in order to save memory space (Image Remove CAD data).
The Dynamic image element template allows you to output the current image from any directory. This may be, for example, the image of a
measuring machine's monitoring camera or an automatically created
CAD view of components.
Example
By means of PCM commands, for example, you can save CAD model
views in a directory during the CNC run. Include a dynamic image in the
protocol template to allow for output of the image stored in this directory.
Result: The current image will then be included in the printout.
Lines in protocol templates

The Line element template allows you to draw any lines on printout pages.
Both the end points and the edge points (intermediate points) of a line
can be shifted as desired.
Dash style, end caps
Dash style and end caps (e.g. arrows) can be selected in the configuration
area via View on the Settings tab.
Bending a line
To create a new intermediate point:

1 Use Line Edge in the context menu to add an intermediate point
and drag this point to the desired position.
You may insert any number of edge points. The edge points can be removed again using the context menu.
Tip: To connect two lines, drag the end point of one line to the end point
of the other line.
Label
To label a line:
1 Enable the Text visible option in the context menu.
9-12
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 Enter the text or select a variable, as described for the

Text [ 910] element.
3 Use the functions of the Text context menu for text formatting.
4 To move the text, click it and move the blue point in the middle of the
text field along the line to the desired new position.
The alignment of the text along the line is set by default.

5 For a horizontal text alignment, disable Line Adjust to line in
the context menu.
Connection lines
To connect two elements by means of a line:

1 Insert a line.
2 Drag the desired end point to one of the green anchor points of the
element.
3 You can add anchor points to some elements, for example, to connect
a line to a certain object of a CAD view:
Use the context menu of the element to add an anchor point: for
example, via Image Add connection point.
Drag the anchor point to the desired position.
Drag the other end point of the line to the anchor point.
If you move one of the connected elements, the line will automatically
be moved, too.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9-13
1. Adding an anchor point
2. Connecting the line to the

anchor point
3. Arranging elements
Tip: The MIBA flag element template allows you to easily include information on characteristics of the CAD model in the printout. Drag the
MIBA flag element to the CAD model. Small circles indicate the points
where you can fix a banner. Then select the desired characteristic.
Printouts and tables in protocol

templates
The element templates of the Tables & Directories category allow you
to define the output of data in table format.
A table generally consists of a table header and several rows containing
the measuring results of the characteristics. For each characteristic type,
you can define a different row layout, e.g. to output measuring results in
columns or as form plots.
The table header is output on every page. The characteristics are output
in the order of the measurement plan.
Example:
Table header with column titles
Row for the roundness characteristic
Row for the flatness characteristic
Rows for additional characteristics in table

format
Inserting a table
To insert a protocol in table format into a page:

1 Drag the Protocol element template from the toolbox to the desired
page.
A frame with table header and content area is inserted.
2 Drag the frame to the desired size, the frame covering, for example,
the entire content area of the page.
3 Define the basic table properties on the Properties tab, for example:
9-14
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Expand following pages: On following pages, the table will

be output in the size of the content area (see further below under
Following pages).
Protocol header: Show table header
Subheadings: Use subheadings
The characteristics are grouped in the protocol in the same way as in
the measurement plan (on the upper level). A template row is inserted
into the table frame for designing the subheadings.
4 In the work area, use the context menu of the element to add row
templates for characteristics via Protocol Add template.
The basic table structure has thus been defined.
1 Vorlagenzeile fr Tabellenkopf
1 Vorlagenzeile fr Zwischenberschriften
5 Vorlagenzeilen fr Prfmerkmalstypen
Designing template
rows
To design a template row:

1 Use the element templates of the Toolbox.
Below you will find further tips about selecting table elements.
2 In the Properties of the template rows, specify the characteristic type
you want to use the template row for. To do so, select Miscellaneous and Measurable variable.
Tip: You can refer to the Data providers tab for the names of the
characteristic types. For this, double-click a characteristic of the desired
type and read the name in the window displaying detailed information
under Measurable variable, e.g. diameter for the circle diameter.
Tip: To make sure that the table contains all characteristics, add an extra
template row without assigning it a measurable variable. This template row is used for all characteristic types to which no other template
row has been assigned.
Linking characteristics to
a table
The table output contains all characteristics linked to it. See also Linking
an element to a characteristic [ 922].
Tip: If you want all characteristics of the current measurement plan to be
output in the table, just drag the folder from the Data binding tab to
the table in the work area.
Selecting elements
The title bar and the template rows of a table often contain a large number of elements. It may therefore not be easy to select a certain element
in the display area with the mouse.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9-15
Alternatively, you can also proceed as follows:

1 Click in the title bar on the Properties tab and select the desired
template row or element from the navigation tree.
The element is selected in the display area.
Tip: To select a template row, select an element of the template row and
press ESC. By pressing ESC once again, the table will be selected as parent
element.
Following pages
The protocol contains all measurement plan data to be output. The table
will be continued on following pages, if necessary.
The report page will be copied if not defined otherwise. Data will only
be output within the defined table frame.
9-16
...
By enabling the Expand on following page option in the table

properties, the table will have the size of the content area on following
pages, regardless of the table frame size in the protocol template. This
will save paper while printing.
...
The table may also be continued on a customized following page. If

you reduce or omit the header and footer lines on the following page,
the page will contain even more data.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
...
Configuring a following page

1 On the Pages tab in the configuration area, select the report page
with the table.
2 Add a new page via the context menu.
3 Select the new page and select Following page from the context
menu.
An arrow below the page number indicates that this page is a following page of the preceding one.
4 Design the following page as desired.
NOTICE
Bear in mind that the header and footer settings of the master page also
apply to following pages. If necessary, disable the use of the master page
in the following page properties.
Form plots in report templates

The Toolbox option of the PiWeb BasicReporter allows you to use various form plots in your report templates.
NOTICE
Form plots will be available if supported by the corresponding measuring
software.
To define the specific form plot properties, select 2D plot on the Properties tab.
The following table gives an overview of the various form plots and their
essential properties.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9-17
Plot
Function
Plane plot
Displays the flatness of a workpiece.

Tip: If the Peaks: Visible option is disabled, the shadow of the
measuring curve on the plane will no longer be hidden by the peaks.
Fourier plot
Displays the evaluation of the waviness.

For the representation, you can specify a suppression level and select
different colors for the values which are above or below this level.
Linear or logarithmic representation of the values is possible:
In the properties, select the Logarithmic Y axis option in the 2D
plot group.
Three options are available for the representation of the tolerance
lines:
Straightness plot
Individual lines
Connected steps
Curve
Represents the result of the linearity evaluation as well as the evaluation result of the unwinding of circle, plane and curve.
If you enable the Point distance fixed option in the in the Data group, the X axis will not be scaled in mm but in points. The points
are distributed at uniform distances on the X axis.
Circle in profile plot
Determines the fitting surface accuracy of a round component in a

profile.
The deviations are represented with two error scaling values. You can
enter a value for both error scaling types.
Circle plot
Evaluates the roundness.

The deviation between the measurement points and the ideal circle
is shown. The nominal circle always results from the size of the form
plot. The coordinate system determines the position of the circle in
the coordinate system.
If you enable the Stack multiple plots option in the 3D plot
group of the Properties, all measurement values will be adjusted to a
nominal value during the evaluation and displayed accordingly.
Curve form plot
Displays the result of the curve form evaluation.

The curve may not be a closed curve. This plot shows the nominal
curve, the tolerance curves and the connection line between the actual points.
9-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Plot
Function
Bore pattern plot
Evaluates the fitting surface accuracy.

You can, for example, show the arrangement of several bores. Only
the center of the bores is considered for the evaluation. Values located within or outside the tolerance bounds can be shown in various
pen colors and the actual and nominal positions can be marked with
different icons.
If a counterpart is to be evaluated, the fitting surface accuracy can be
determined by mirroring: In the properties, enable the Mirroring
option in the 2D plot group.
Pitch plot
Displays both the circular pitch and the linear pitch.

For the representation, you can specify a suppression level and select
different colors for the values which are above or below this level.
Changing element properties

Changing the appearance of an element
1 Display the Properties tab in the left area of the PiWeb BasicReporter
(configuration area).
2 Click the element to be modified in the right section of the PiWeb
BasicReporter (work area).
The property list is updated.
3 To change a property, click in the property list the current value of the
property (not the property name) and change the value as desired.
The short description below the property list provides help about the
active property.
In the work area, you can immediately check the effects of your modifications.
Tip: To maintain a clear structure of the property list, the PiWeb BasicReporter shows by default only the most important properties of an element. To display all properties, activate the Advanced option in the
title bar.
Tip: Many properties may also by changed via the context menu of the
element.
Changing the properties of several elements at the

same time
1 Select the elements in the work area while pressing the Ctrl key.
The property list displays those properties that can be changed for all the
selected elements at the same time.
Tip: As is the case in other graphic programs, you can group several elements and edit them as a group without having to select the elements
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9-19
separately. The functions for grouping and ungrouping can be found in

the context menu.
Transfering the appearance of an element to another

element by means of the brush
1 In the work area, click an element whose appearance you want to
transfer.
2 Click the Brush icon.
3 In the work area, click, one after the other, the elements to adopt the
appearance of the element clicked first.
4 To terminate, click the Brush icon again.
Tip: You can change element templates and create custom element templates (Modifying and creating element templates [ 927]).
The width, height, and size of one element are adjusted in the work area
using the mouse. To adjust the width, height, and size of several elements, you can use icons:
Adjusting width, height, size

1 Select the desired elements in the work area.
2 Select last the element whose width, height, or size you want to transfer to the previously selected elements.
3 Click the corresponding icon.
Icon
Function
Make same width
Make same height
Make same size
Arranging elements on one page

Moving elements
1 Select the desired elements in the work area (multiple selection with
CTRL) and drag them with the mouse to the desired position.
Rotating text elements

1 Click the desired element.
2 Click the green point above the element and rotate the element while
keeping the mouse button pressed.
Aligning elements
9-20
To align several elements to each other, use the following icons (or the
corresponding points in the Format menu):
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Icon
Function
Align left
Align right
Align top
Align bottom
Center horizontally
Center vertically
NOTICE
The function always affects the element selected last, which is highlighted
in color.
Distributing elements
To distribute elements uniformly along a horizontal or vertical line, use

the following icons (or the corresponding points in the Format menu):
Icon
Function
Distribute horizontally
Distribute vertically
Arranging elements in
an overlapping manner
Positioning elements
precisely
To arrange elements in an overlapping manner, use the context menu

functions:
Bring to front
Bring to back
For precise positioning of elements, you can enable the following utilities
in the View menu:
Icon
Function
Ruler
Grid
Snap to grid
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9-21
Linking an element to a characteristic

Simple and complex data
binding
Characteristics
You can link every element to a characteristic (simple data binding).

Additionally, you can link the following elements to several characteristics
(complex data binding):
XY plot
Table
MIBA flag
Protocol
Pie chart
The Data providers tab in the configuration area displays all characteristics of the currently loaded measurement plan.
By double-clicking a characteristic, detailed information on the characteristic will be displayed in a separate window.
The selection list at the bottom edge of the tab allows you to filter the
list of characteristics.
Linking an element to characteristics

1 Drag the characteristics from the Data providers tab to the desired
element in the work area.
- or Drag the characteristics to an empty section of the page and select the
desired element from the popup menu.
The selected element is inserted and linked to the characteristics.
- or Select the element in the work area and the characteristics in the configuration area. Select Set data binding from the context menu of
the characteristic.
The functions will only be active if linking between characteristic and element makes sense.
An icon in the report template indicates whether one or several characteristics are linked to the element. With a simple data binding, a tooltip
indicates the name of the linked characteristic. Double-click to highlight
the linked characteristics on the Data providers tab.
Simple data binding
Complex data binding
Tip: Use the context menu of an icon to define which information on

data bindings is to be shown in the report template.
9-22
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Linking an element to other characteristics

1 Drag the new characteristics to the element.
- or Select the element and the new characteristics and select Set data
binding from the context menu of the selected characteristic.
Canceling a reference
1 Select Remove data binding from the context menu of the icon.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9-23
Undoing and restoring changes
Undoing and restoring changes

The PiWeb BasicReporter records the changes you make in a history log.
1 To undo undesired changes step by step, click the Undo icon in the
toolbar.
- or To reset to a certain state, click the arrow next to the Undo icon and
select from the history log the changes to be undone.
2 For Restoring, use the Redo icon analogously.
9-24
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Designing interactive protocols
Designing interactive protocols

You can use the PiWeb BasicReporter to design interactive protocols. You
can, for example, insert links to other protocol pages or to open files.
The Hyperlink element is used to insert a textual link into the protocol
template. You can enter any text as the starting point; enter the target,
e.g. a URL, in the HRef field.
Moreover, you can add a link to any other design element, for example,
to convert the Square element into a button.
Once you click the element in the protocol, the action defined for the
element in the protocol template will be performed.
Setting a link
1 Select the desired element in the work area.
2 Open Reference in the context menu of the element and select the
action to be performed after clicking the element.
Tip: By selecting Edit reference , you open a dialog box for easy
setting of the parameters.
Removing a reference
1 Open the context menu of the element and select Reference No
reference.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9-25
Saving the protocol template and closing the BasicReporter
Saving the protocol template and closing the

BasicReporter
Overwriting an open protocol template
1 Select File Save report.
Saving the open protocol template as a new protocol

template
1 Select File Save report as....
Closing the PiWeb BasicReporter

1 Select File Exit.
The template is now available for selection in the opened multiple printout.
9-26
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Modifying and creating element templates

Instead of repeatedly changing the properties of frequently used elements, you can modify element templates and create your own templates.
Modifying the template of an element

1 Drag the desired element template into the work area.
2 Design the element in the work area as desired.
3 Select Use as default in the context menu of the element.
The modifications are only effective for elements newly inserted into the
report template.
Creating an element template

1 Design an element in the work area as desired.
2 Select Create element template in the context menu of the element.
3 In the Create new template window, enter a name and a short
description for the new element template.
4 Enable the Replaceable element template option and close the
window by clicking OK.
The element templates are displayed in the Replaceable element
templates category of the Toolbox.
Tip: Use the context menu of the category to group and rearrange your
element templates.
Tip: You can also combine several highlighted elements into an element
template.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
9-27
9-28
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
10
Chapter
Managing CALYPSO
.................................................................................................................

Saving and installing CMM data ............................................................. 102
If a software error occurs the error report ............................................ 103
Modifying system settings ...................................................................... 108
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
10-1
Saving and installing CMM data
Saving and installing CMM data

The installation of specific CMM data is required to guarantee the accuracy of your measuring results.
For CALYPSO versions prior to V4.4, this data was saved on your CMM
disk and loaded during installation. As of version 4.4, the CMM disk is no
longer necessary.
However, we recommend creating a CMM data CD to save the data and
for future installations.
Scope of data
The following data is saved:
CAA data
Temperature sensor data
Reference sphere data
Stylus data and stylus holder locations
Saving CMM data

NOTICE
Prerequisite: CALYPSO is installed correctly and the data is saved on the
hard disk.
1 Exit CALYPSO.
2 In the Windows Start menu, select Start Programs Zeiss Calypso Save CMM data and follow the
instructions of the program.
3 You can enter any folder.
After completion of the data backup, the config folder with the saved
data is stored in the specified folder.
4 Burn the config folder on a CD ROM.
Installing CMM data

Your CMM data is either saved on your CMM disk or on a CMM data CD.
1 Exit CALYPSO.
2 In the Windows Start menu, select Start Programs Zeiss Calypso Install CMM data and follow the
instructions of the program.
3 Select the drive of the CMM data CD or the CMM disk.
10-2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
If a software error occurs the error report

Components of the error report
CALYPSO is a program which undergoes continuous development. The
target of the development is to make CALYPSO better with every revision.
You can support this process by using the error report.
Scope of the error report
An error report is generated automatically by CALYPSO in the case of an

internal error, or you can trigger the process manually (see Using the
error report [ 103]).
The error report contains at least the following data:
the type of measuring machine
the current Service Pack version
the system's error messages
Additionally they contain a description of the situation (what was the

lead-up to this error?).
The error report can be printed and sent to Carl Zeiss by fax. You can also
save it as ERR file and send it to Carl Zeiss by e-mail.
Included files
You can also add the current measurement plan and, if necessary, additional data to the file containing the error report which makes analysis
easier. In particular, the PCM commands and the formulas and PCM files
processed by the PCM commands may furnish useful information. For this
purpose, define test outputs.
Presettings
This is where you define the additional files to be attached to the error
report each time when saving or the defaults to be offered in the saving
dialog.
Combining unhandled
exceptions
The Error Report window allows you to combine all unhandled exceptions that occurred during the program run and to save them in a compressed file for analysis by a Carl Zeiss service engineer.
Preparing the error report

The error report helps you in cases of serious errors but also helps you to
test certain situations.
1 Use Extras Error Report to open the Error Report dialog box
and select Settings Define Test Outputs in the window menu
of the error report.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
10-3
2 In the Define Test Outputs dialog box, tick the check boxes for the
desired test settings and close the dialog box.
Note: The Record geometry calculation check box should only

be ticked when instructed to do so as this triggers resource-intensive
processes.
3 Run the measurement plan with the test settings.
4 Note the paths and names of the files to be forwarded to Carl Zeiss.
Error report - preparing saving

internal error, or you can trigger the process manually after testing certain
situations.
When saving, you can attach certain files to the error reports. You can
preset this in the defaults.
1 Use Extras Error Report to open the Error Report dialog box
and select Settings Error Report for Defaults in the window
menu of the error report.
10-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 In the Error Report for Defaults dialog box, tick the check boxes
for those files that are to be attached when saving or for which saving
is to be proposed as default in the Save Error Report dialog box.
3 Activate Show dialog when saving if the Save Error Report
dialog box is to be displayed with these defaults when saving. Additional settings are possible in this case.
If you untick the check box, the files defined here will be attached
automatically when saving without any additional query.
Using the error report

internal error, or you can trigger the process manually after testing certain
situations.
Completing and sending the error report

1 Click Error Report in the System Error window.
- or To open the last error report, select Extras Error Report.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
10-5
2 If you want to include the accumulated error messages in the error

report, select File Create Package File.
CALYPSO creates a compressed file containing the error messages.
This file can be saved in any folder and e-mailed.
3 Enter an error description, the recipient and sender address in the
white input fields.
Note: You must type in an error description of at least 25 characters

before you can print or save the error report.
4 To send the error report to Carl Zeiss by fax, select File Print (for
output to standard printer) or File Printing to.
You will find the fax number in the Address group.
5 Select File Save.
10-6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
If you tick the Show dialog when saving check box under Settings Error Report, the Save Error Report dialog box will
open.
Select here the files to be saved with the error report.

The error report will be compressed with the defined files and saved
on your hard disk as a file called ErrorReport <datum>.err in the
<user directory>\hotline directory.
6 Send these files to the e-mail address specified in the Address group.
Note: The other menu items under File are used for special service
purposes: Open can be used by Carl Zeiss employees to unzip the
forwarded measurement plan.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
10-7
Modifying system settings

Overview of system settings
Click Extras Settings to open the menu for the system setup. Each
menu item in this menu (with the exception of Status Monitor) opens
a notebook together with a matching group of settings:
User
Here, you can define new users and manage the existing users. You
can also configure the login procedure, e.g. system login or automatic
login.
This notebook can only be edited by the Master user.
CMM
Here you can set up the configuration of the CMM (control type,
probe, control console, etc.) and the software drivers. You also initialize the CMM here.
You can define several measuring systems (device groups) and switch
between them.
Status Monitor
You can view all important events which occurred during the current
measurement.
Environment
You can modify the user-specific settings (language of the user desk
and printouts/protocols, units of measure, font, start conditions, colors of the CALYPSO windows).
Measurement
Here you can set the measurement parameters of the CMM (working
speed, clearance distance, retract distance, scanning parameters,
etc.).
Miscellaneous
Here you can view the license information and internals.
Most settings are valid globally, i.e. equally for all users. Exceptions here
are the settings for language, units of measure, font and color. Each user
can select these specifically. The same, of course, applies to the user settings (privileges).
You will find an overview of the settings in These system settings can
be modified [ 1015].
10-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Example: Modifying system settings

CALYPSO provides a notebook for each group of parameters. This notebook is used when altering the system setup. The general procedure is
explained on the basis of this example.
1 To open a notebook, select Extras Settings and the required
menu item.
The illustration shows the notebook for the system settings of the
Environment group.
Marker
Each notebook page has a bookmark in tab form.

2 To open to a page, click the desired bookmark.
3 Set the parameters as necessary.
4 Click OK to save all settings. The notebook is closed.
- or To save the settings of the current page, click Apply. The notebook
remains open
- or Click Cancel if you do not want to save the changes.
User management
Basics about users
The CALYPSO user management guarantees that only designated and
authorized users use CALYPSO.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
10-9
When starting CALYPSO, the user must identify himself by entering a

user name and password.
CALYPSO can be configured such that a previously defined user will

be logged in automatically at program start, e.g. if CALYPSO is always
used by the same user or if all users share one user account.
Activating the automatic login [ 1012]
CALYPSO can be configured such that the user logged in on the computer will not need to enter again his user name and password when
starting CALYPSO.
Activating the system login [ 1013]
About the master user

When starting CALYPSO for the first time, only one single user called
Master can be selected.
The Master user is Calypsos system administrator. He has special unique
privileges that are not available to normal users. These are:
Defining new users
Deleting users
Renaming users
Assigning privileges to other users
Changing passwords
The Master user manages the CALYPSO users under Extras Settings in the Users notebook.
Managing users
1 As the Master user, you manage your users in the system settings.
Open the Users notebook via Extras Settings User. The
Management page is displayed.
The name of the current user (Master) is shown in the User field.
Which options do you have?

Adding users
Deleting users
Renaming users
For more information, see System Set Up (Users).

The Master user can enter a description about each user, as well as his
telephone number, etc. The description is shown on the Profile page.
10-10
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Assigning user privileges

Only the Master user can assign privileges.
NOTICE
The selection of privileges the Master will assign to normal users usually
depends on the users task and experience.
The Master user can assign privileges for two areas:
General user privileges
General user privileges
User privileges for AutoRun
The following general privileges can be assigned:
Environment Setup
Define Directories/Paths
Equipment Setup
Save other users' measurement plans
Execute changed measurement plans of other users
Run Measurement Plans
Measurement Setup
Evaluation/Output Setup
Change printout header parameters in measurement plans
Change compensation settings for several measurement plans
Assigning privileges
1 Select Extras Settings Users and open the Privileges notebook page.
2 Click the name tab of the user you wish to assign privileges to.
Assigning AutoRun rights

1 Select Extras Settings Users and open the AutoRun
Rights notebook page.
2 Click the name tab of the user you wish to assign privileges to.
Note: You can also carry out these assignments in AutoRun.

3 If needed, open the Profile notebook page and activate the May
change password privilege.
Switching to another user

To switch the user currently logged in, you do not need to quit and restart
CALYPSO.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
10-11
1 Select Extras Settings Users and open the Management

notebook page.
The User field shows the name of the user who is currently logged in.
2 Click the tab at the bottom of the page that contains the name of the
user who is to be logged in now.
3 Click Switch to... and confirm the safety query.
The new user will be logged in as soon as he enters his password and
confirms with ENTER.
Changing the password

You can change the password at any time if you have been assigned the
privilege to do so. Otherwise contact your system administrator.
NOTICE
The Master user can change each users password.
Follow these steps to change a password:

1 Select Extras Settings Users and open the Profile notebook
page.
2 Make sure that the May change password check box has been
activated.
3 Click Modify and enter the new password and repeat the entry.
The new password is immediately active.
Activating the automatic login

In the automatic login mode, CALYPSO starts without the user identifying
himself by entering a user name and password.
Every user starting CALYPSO is automatically logged in as a previously
defined user.
Note: With the automatic login mode enabled, all persons starting CALYPSO on this computer will use the same user profile. CALYPSO does
not check whether or not the persons are authorized to use CALYPSO.
To be on the safe side, only use the automatic login if the computer is
used by one person only.
Note: Only the Master user has the right to activate or deactivate automatic login.
1 Select Extras Settings User.
2 Tick the Auto log-in should occur following system start
check box.
3 Select from the list the user to be logged in automatically.
10-12
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Activating the system login

Having enabled the system login (LDAP), CALYPSO will start without asking for the password if the user logged in on the computer is authorized
to use CALYPSO. The user does not need to enter again his user name
and password.
At program start, CALYPSO checks whether the user logged in on the
computer has been stored in the CALYPSO user management. If this is
the case, CALYPSO will skip the login procedure.
NOTICE
Only the Master user has the right to activate or deactivate automatic
login.
Activating the system login

Conditions:
The users are defined both in the LDAP directory used by the system
(e.e.the Microsoft Active Directory) and in the CALYPSO user management with the same user name and password (pay attention to
case sensitivity!).
1 Select Extras Settings User.
2 Tick the System login (LDAP) check box.
3 Enter the IP address of the LDAP server in the field with the same
name.
Changing the environment

The language and units of measure can be set specifically (and separately
for the user interface and the printout) for each user in the Environment
notebook. You can also specify the behavior of the program upon startup,
the font used in the program, the colors of the windows and the paths
that are used for saving measurement plans, actual values and table files.
If you are using the Dynalog P control console, you can activate the Dynalog keys here.
You open the notebook via Extras Settings Environment.
NOTICE
To be sure that all changes in the notebook take effect, save all open
measurement plans, close CALYPSO and log in again.
Changing the CMM configuration

The configuration of your hardware (device type, probe, control console,
master or client in duplex operation, etc.) and the respective software
drivers are set in the CMM Configuration notebook.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
10-13
Furthermore, you can, if necessary, enter the expansion coefficients of

the scales and initialize the CMM.
1 You open the notebook via Extras Settings CMM. Use the
tabs at the bottom of the notebook pages to select the system to which
your changes should apply.
Changing the measurement parameters

of the CMM
The measurement parameters of the CMM can be set in the Measurement Methods notebook (retract distance and clearance distance, parameters relating to feature determination, measuring methods, point
density, scanning parameters, nominal value treatment, etc.).
1 You open the notebook via Extras Settings Measurement.
Displaying system messages

The Events window allows you to view all important system messages.
All important messages are displayed with date, time and a short description.
1 To call the Events window, select Extras Settings Status

Monitor.
Activating licenses and displaying

program parameters
Information relating to activated licenses as well as to internal program
parameters can be found in the Miscellaneous notebook.
1 You open the notebook via Extras Settings Miscellaneous.
The Licenses page allows you to activate the required licenses and to deactivate the licenses that are not required.
10-14
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Initializing the CMM

During the initialization process you establish a connection between CALYPSO and the CMM. The Stop Light window will inform you of the current status.
If the Stop Light window is accidentally closed, you must initialize the
CMM again.
1 Select Extras Settings CMM and open the Light signal
notebook page.
2 Click Connect.
This initializes communication between the controller and the CMM and
the Stop Light window appears on the screen (see Checking and controlling the measurement plan run [ 711]).
At the same time, CALYPSO checks the device setup. CALYPSO detects
any probe of the VAST, VAST DT, ST3, RDS or HSS type.
The stylus data is not set invalid in the process.
NOTICE
Prerequisite for automatic detection of the probe is the firmware version
10.45.
Using the taskbar

The taskbar is a toolbar which you can find in a separate window. Use
the icons to call other programs which help you to work with your CMM.
These programs are: CALYPSO, HOLOS and the COUNTER with the POINT
PROGRAM and NOM-ACT-PROGRAM.
1 To call the taskbar, select in the Stop Light window in the menu bar
More... Taskbar.
The programs association to the icon can be seen in the following picture.
These system settings can be modified

The following table lists all of the system settings you can modify in CALYPSO. All the menu items listed in this table can be found under Extra Settings.
The instructions (column headed See) are in the corresponding sections
in the Basic Operating Instructions or in the Online Help system.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
10-15
Setting
Menu item
Tab
See
Configure the AAI interface
CMM
AAI
How to configure
the AAI interface
Retract distance
Measurement
Travel
Changing the
measurement parameters of the

CMM [ 1014]
Address for interface
CMM
Interface
Changing the
CMM configuration [ 1013]

Beeping upon probing
CMM
Probe
Changing the

Control light signal
CMM
Light Signal
Working with
the light signal window [ 719]

Number of decimal places
Environment
Language
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Changing the
Expansion coefficients of the CMM

scales
Temperature
Configure computed feature Measurement

calculation
Point Density
Alignment mode in the exported DMIS program
Environment
Export DMIS
Evaluation method for datums
Measurement
Assign AutoRun rights
User
AutoRun Rights
Assigning user
privileges [ 1011]
Save measurement plan automatically
Environment
Save
Changing the
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Form Datum
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
environment [ 1013]
Automatic login at start (only User

Master)
10-16
61212-2011002
Management
CALYPSO
Managing
users [ 1010]
Setting
Menu item
Tab
See
Measurement
Features
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
Automatic feature predefini- Measurement

tion
Features
Automatic feature end
Features
Measurement
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
Changing the
Automatic opening of an
Environment
AutoRun file at program start
Start
Automatic opening of a
measurement plan at program start
Environment
Start
Automatic path measurement
Measurement
Base alignment in the DMIS

program
Environment
Export DMIS
Configuring the
DMIS export
Control console type
CMM
Panel
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Methods
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]

Add user
User
Management
Managing
users [ 1010]
Delete user
User
Management
Managing
users [ 1010]
Rename user
User
Management
Managing
users [ 1010]
Computed feature calculation
Measurement
Point Density
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
Form datum as per CALYPSO Measurement

or DIN ISO 5459
61212-2011002
Form Datum
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
CALYPSO
10-17
Setting
Menu item
Tab
See
Activate/deactivate licenses
Miscellaneous
Licenses
Activating licens-
es and displaying
program parameters [ 1014]
Assign file with default name Environment
Default Name
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Position dialog boxes
Environment
Dialogs
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
DMIS preprocessor for DMIS Environment
export
Export DMIS
Articulating probe holder
Probe
CMM
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Changing the

Logging in the rotary table
CMM
Rotary Table
Logging in the
rotary table [ 127]

Fitted/transportable rotary
table
CMM
Use rotary table
CMM
Rotary Table
Changing the

Rotary Table
Changing the

Rotary table home position
CMM
Rotary Table
Changing the

Printer for CALYPSO
Environment
Printer
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Printer for measurement
plan
Environment
Dynalog keys
Environment
Printer
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Dynalog
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Discrete-point measurement Measurement
Methods
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
10-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Setting
Menu item
Tab
See
Extended DMIS output
Environment
Export DMIS
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Window colors
Environment
Colors
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Form of derived names
Environment
Default Name
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Device interfaces
CMM
Interface
Changing the

Device groups
CMM
Measuring Systems
Changing the

Speed of CMM for position- Measurement
ing and scanning
Speed
Hardware and drivers
Control
CMM
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
Changing the

Initialization of the CMM
CMM
Control
Initializing the
CMM [ 1015]
Internal parameters of software installation
Miscellaneous
Change password
User
Internals
Activating licens-
es and displaying
Profile
Changing the
password [ 1012]
Enable password change
User
Profile
Assigning user
privileges [ 1011]
Coefficients (expansion) for
scales
CMM
Drive allocation for duplex

mode
Environment
Temperature
Changing the

Dual arm
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
10-19
Setting
Menu item
Tab
See
Activate light signal control
CMM
Light Signal
Working with
the light signal window [ 719]

Activate/deactivate licenses
Miscellaneous
Licenses
Activating licens-
es and displaying
Define manual run
Measurement
Manual run
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
Machine type (CMM type)
CMM
Machine
Changing the

Master in duplex mode
CMM
Dual arm
Changing the

Measure unit of length (mm Environment
or Inch) (user interface)
Language
Measure unit of length (mm Environment

or Inch) (printouts)
Language
Maximum probe diameter
Probe
CMM
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Changing the

Probe configuration
CMM
Probe
Changing the

Probe diameter
CMM
Probe
Changing the

Measuring methods for circle, cylinder, cone and 2D
line
Measurement
Measured points (for automatic feature recognition)
Measurement
10-20
Methods
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
Features
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Setting
Menu item
Tab
See
Setting measuring uncertain- Measurement

ty data
VCMM
Changing the
Measuring range of CMM
Machine
CMM

CMM [ 1014]
Changing the

MMC/LMC mode
Measurement
MMC / LMC
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
Mode for mass moment of
inertia
CMM
Mode for nominal values
Measurement
Rotary Table
Mass moment of
inertia (MMI) of rotary tables [ 123]

Nominal
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
Changing the
Name allocation for new fea- Environment

tures and characteristics
Default Name
Only use optimized probing

points
Measurement
Probing Quality
Configure OVCMM
Measurement
VCMM
How to activate the

OVCMM
Parameters for computed

feature calculation
Measurement
SCAN Limits
Changing the
Define parameters for scanning
Measurement
Park position of the CMM
CMM
environment [ 1013]
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]

CMM [ 1014]
Point Density
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
Machine
Changing the

Path (directory) for actual val- Environment
ues
61212-2011002
Paths
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
CALYPSO
10-21
Setting
Menu item
Tab
See
Path (directory) for measure- Environment

ment plans
Paths
Changing the
Path (directory) for table files Environment
Paths
environment [ 1013]
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Preprocessor for DMIS export Environment
Export DMIS
Configuring the
DMIS export
Save measurement plan automatically
Environment
Save
Changing the
Point masking
Measurement
environment [ 1013]
Point Masking
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
Point Density
Changing the
Point density for features of

size, location features, features of form
Measurement
Computer allocation in duplex mode
CMM
Assign AutoRun rights
User
AutoRun Rights
Assigning user
privileges [ 1011]
Assign privileges
User
Privileges
Assigning user

CMM [ 1014]
Dual arm
Changing the
privileges [ 1011]
Master stylus in sensor system
CMM
Roundoff meas. for preset

nominal value
Measurement
Scanning speed
Measurement
Master Stylus
Changing the

Nominal
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
Speed
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
Scanning parameters
Measurement
SCAN Limits
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
10-22
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Setting
Menu item
Tab
See
Interface type
CMM
Interface
Changing the

Font
Environment
Font
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
CMM serial number
CMM
Machine
Changing the

Clearance distance
Measurement
Travel
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
Client in duplex mode
CMM
Dual arm
Changing the

Viewing software parameters
Miscellaneous
Rounding to nominal value

(roundoff meas.)
Measurement
Language (user interface)
Environment
Internals
Activating li-
censes and displaying program parameters [ 1014]

Nominal
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
Language
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Language (printouts)
Environment
Language
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Starting behavior
Environment
Start
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Management
Managing
Start procedure (automatic

login for Master)
User
Status messages of the system
Status Monitor
Displaying system messages [ 1014]
Control type (hardware and

drivers)
CMM
Control
Changing the
users [ 1010]
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
10-23
Setting
Menu item
Tab
See
System login (one-time login User

or single sign-on)
Management
Changing the
Temperature unit (Celsius or Environment

Fahrenheit) (user interface)
Language
Temperature unit (Celsius or Environment

Fahrenheit) (printouts)
Language
Consider tolerance for opti- Measurement

mum speed with VAST Navigator 2
Navigator
Tolerance class
SCAN Limits
Measurement

Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
Tolerance mode
Measurement
Nominal
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
VAST Navigator 2 settings
Measurement
Navigator
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
Reconnect during system
start
CMM
Connect
CMM
Control
Changing the

Control
Changing the

Travel speed
Measurement
Speed
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
Short travel during qualifica- CMM
tion
Movement
Dispersion
Simulation
Measurement
Qualification of
styli [ 1125]
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
10-24
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Setting
Menu item
Tab
See
Directory for actual values
Environment
Paths
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Directory for measurement
plans
Environment
Directory for table files
Environment
Paths
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Paths
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Preassignment of scanning
areas
Measurement
Preassignment of angle display for space axis
Environment
SCAN Limits
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
Strategies
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Preassignment of start angle Measurement

range
Start Angle
User-defined default names
Default Name
Environment
Changing the

CMM [ 1014]
Loading a file
with default
names [ 624]
Angle for home position
travel
CMM
Angle unit (measure unit)

(user interface)
Environment
Angle unit (measure unit)

(printout)
Environment
Probe
RTP20
probe [ 163]
Language
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
Language
Changing the
environment [ 1013]
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
10-25
10-26
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11
Chapter
Styli and stylus systems
.................................................................................................................

Overview of the chapter ......................................................................... 112
Editing stylus systems and styli ............................................................... 113
Qualifying the reference sphere ........................................................... 1122
Qualification of styli ............................................................................. 1125
Stylus system management .................................................................. 1143
Reference sphere management ............................................................ 1149
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-1
Overview of the chapter
Overview of the chapter

When you create a measurement plan, make sure that you have installed
the correct stylus system and that it is suitable for the measurement. To
ensure this, the stylus system must have been qualified and the limit values must be complied with. The necessary steps are described in the
chapter Preparing the measurement plan.
In this chapter you will find information on the creation, editing and
qualification of stylus systems and styli.
CALYPSO supports the use of several stylus systems, including optical
sensors (ViSCAN), and the automatic and manual stylus system change.
The stylus system management contains all the data that has been determined and entered. Stylus data can be edited, printed, exported and
imported from other systems.
11-2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Editing stylus systems and styli

Procedure for stylus systems and styli
Each stylus system and each stylus must be defined in CALYPSO (see
Defining a new stylus system [ 113]).
Only then will it be possible to proceed with qualification (see Qualifying styli manually [ 1134]).
Styli of an RDS
When you use an RDS, the CMM can probe the workpiece from a large
number of different directions by adjusting the A and B angles. Every RDS
position you want to use for probing is considered to be a particular stylus
and needs to be qualified separately (exception: if you use the RDS-CAA
option, see in the operating instructions for the RDS-CAA option under
Qualifying the RDS with CAA (option)).
To facilitate work, you can create a list of the angular positions for the
probe, thus defining the styli at the same time. After qualification of a
defined angular position, it is possible to calculate the values for the remaining angular positions.
During qualification, the CMM recognizes the styli in question, and you
do not need to qualify these manually. You can learn how to create this
list at Creating and editing the RC List [ 1117].
Then you begin the qualification of the stylus system via the Automatic
qualification icon.
Defining a new stylus system

Before you can qualify a new stylus system, you have to tell CALYPSO the
names of the stylus system and the corresponding styli.
1 Click the Stylus system icon in the measurement plan area on the
CMM tab.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-3

Stylus system Stylus
Management
Stylus system
Mode
Parameter
Standard
Tensor
Star
Stylus name / no.
Geometry
Taper Angle
Sphere
Star_1
Change stylus pos.
Qualify stylus
Ref. sphere position
Set Limit Values

Stylus
Reference sphere
Name
Date
No.
Star_1
5.10.11
Temp.
SNo
Date
R:
R:
S:
S:
X:
X:
Y:
Y:
Z:
Z:
Type:
Tilt:
VAST
Rotate:
OK
2 Click the Insert new stylus system icon.

The Create New Stylus System window appears on the screen.
3 Enter the names for the new stylus system and the first stylus.
CALYPSO does not distinguish internally between uppercase and lowercase characters.
Note: If you wish to import the defined stylus later into a DME version,
the stylus names may not contain any point and must be unique in the
DME system.
4 Click OK to close the window.
Note: Different windows open depending on the system settings for

the Probe. If a stylus system allowing one-stage stylus change is pro-
11-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
vided (i.e. a fitted probe with adapter plate), only the name of the
stylus system and the name of the first stylus can be assigned.
Note: If a stylus system with the option of a multi-stage stylus change
exists (e.g. an articulating probe holder with probes provided with a
stylus changer), different dialog boxes will open.
The selection box includes the installed probe.
The Simulation option offers all probes that have been selected in the
configuration of the measuring machine.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-5
In the case of the XXT
You may adopt the default designation of the RDS carrier or define a
name of your choice. This name is entered in the empty field and transferred to the system by clicking Add. The new designation is now displayed in the selection field. This RDS carrier may by assigned later to an
RDS holder. You have to define a designation in the New stylus system field. This stylus system may later be assigned to a stylus change
holder of the XXT type. The name of the stylus defines the individual
stylus.
Note: If you use several RDS carriers, you must already define here the
assignment to the RDS carrier here (e.g. XXT_TL1 or XXT_TL2). You cannot change the assignment subsequently.
11-6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
In the case of the SP25
Define the names of the RDS carrier and the stylus system as described
under 2. These may later be assigned to stylus holders. Additionally, in
the case of the SP25, a name for the module must be defined. This
module cannot be assigned to a holder.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-7
In the case of the TP 20
under 2. These may later be assigned to stylus holders.
11-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
In the case of the TP200
under 2. These may later be assigned to stylus holders.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-9
In the case of the RST
It is only possible to change the RDS plate. It is therefore necessary to

define the name of the stylus system and the stylus. The stylus system can
then be assigned to an RDS holder.
11-10
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
In the case of the TPXX (TP2 or TP6)
It is only possible to change the RDS plate. It is therefore necessary to

define the name of the stylus system and the stylus. The stylus system can
then be assigned to an RDS holder.
The names of the stylus system and the stylus are displayed in the Stylus
system and Stylus name / no. selection lists.
If the stylus system has other styli, you now have to add them in CALYPSO
(see Adding further styli to a stylus system [ 113]).
Adding further styli to a stylus system

All styli of the stylus system must be known to CALYPSO. Therefore, after
defining a new stylus system or modifying an existing one, it might be
necessary to add further styli and qualify them.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-11
CMM tab in CALYPSO.
You will find detailed information on this window in Probing system
qualification in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the Online Help.
2 Click the Insert new stylus button.
3 In the Create new stylus window, enter the name and number to
be used for referencing the stylus.
With respect to the name, CALYPSO does not distinguish between
uppercase and lowercase characters.
The number must be unique within the stylus system. Therefore, you
can only choose among the free stylus numbers or enter a higher
number than the last one of the selection list.
4 If you wish to add further styli, repeat steps 2 through 3.

The new styli are now displayed in the Stylus name / no. list
The next step is to qualify one stylus after the other (see Qualifying styli
manually [ 1134]).
In the Stylus System Management, you can delete styli created incorrectly or edit the names and numbers of the styli.
To delete, select the stylus in question in the navigation area and select
Delete from the context menu.
To edit the name and number of a stylus, select the Geometry branch
in the navigation area of the respective stylus system and click the corresponding cell in the table.
Renaming a stylus
In the Probing System Qualification window, you can change the name
of a stylus at any time, but you cannot change its number.
CMM tab.
2 Select the stylus whose name you want to change.
11-12
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3 Click the Rename stylus icon.

4 Enter a new name for the stylus.
5 Click OK.
It is not necessary to re-qualify a stylus after renaming it.
Further modifications can be made in the Stylus System Management: You can delete styli created incorrectly or edit the numbers of the
styli.
To delete, select the stylus in question in the navigation area and select
Delete from the context menu.
To edit the name and number of a stylus, select the Settings branch in
the navigation area of the respective stylus system and click the corresponding cell in the table.
Entering data of the master stylus

If you use an RDS, DSE or PH9/10 on your CMM, you must enter the
dimensions and the installation position of the master stylus in the System
Set Up.
Note: This is not valid if CALYPSO is used with MPS on a real CMM (not
in the simulation mode). In this case, the data of the master stylus is determined automatically via a reversal measurement.
Note: You do not have to enter the data of the master stylus for passive
styli as these are saved automatically by the system.
1 Select Extras Settings CMM MasterProbe.
The MasterProbe notebook is opened.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-13
Type
RDS
CMM
Arm 1
XS=
0/
YS=
ZS=
2 Enter the allocation of the sensor system to the machine system and
the dimensions (length) of the master stylus:
DSE
Arm 2 / Individ.
Bridge
Arm 1
Arm2 / Indiv.
XM
0/
-XM
0/
XM
0/
XM
0/
-XM
55 /
-ZM
55 /
-ZM
55 /
-YM
73 /
-ZM
73 /
-ZM
135 /
YM
135 /
-YM
135 /
-ZM
155 /
YM
155 /
-YM
These dimensions are valid for:

RST stylus system with a stylus length of 40 mm and a stylus diameter of 3 mm.
TP6 stylus system with a 20 mm extension, a stylus length of 28
mm and a stylus diameter of 3 mm.
3 Open the Control tab and click Connect.
This activates your settings.
Note: The selected stylus is the master stylus for CALYPSO. To change
it, you must delete and re-assign the measuring system.
11-14
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Setting the angle positions of an RDS

stylus
You can enter the desired angle position of an RDS and transfer it to the
RDS. At the same time, you can enter this angle position in a table in
which the angle positions you are using are defined as individual styli. The
list is saved as a file and corresponds to a stylus system.
Conditions:
You have already specified the dimensions and installation position
of the master stylus (Entering data of the master stylus [ 1113]) or the CMM has performed an automatic reversal
measurement.
1 In the toolbar or in the Probing system qualification window, click the
Stylus system management icon to open the Stylus System
Management.
Click the Create RC List button in the Stylus System Functions group
of the Stylus System Management.
- or In the toolbar of the work area or the Probing system qualification
window, click the Rotate stylus to new position icon.
The RC List window appears on the screen.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-15
2 Select the name of the stylus whose position you want to define.
You can see the currently valid values for the edited angle position
under Angle (A/B).
3 Define the desired angle position using one of the following methods:
Click To Feature to align the angle position parallel to the axis of
a feature.
Under System, select a coordinate system and an axis and click
System / Axis to align the angle position parallel to the selected
axis.
Under X, Y and Z, enter the direction of a vector and click System / Vector to align the angle position in the direction of the
selected vector.
11-16
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Click Invert position to reverse the previously defined angle position, i.e. to change all angles by 180.
Note: This function cannot be used for all systems.

You can see the current value for the A and B angles under Angle
position.
4 If the displayed values correspond to the desired values:
Click Execute to set the angle position on the stylus.
- or Click Transfer to list to transfer the stylus name and angle position
to the list of defined RDS positions of the stylus system. You can find
the list on the Styli list tab.
Creating and editing the RC List

To automatically generate and qualify the styli that correspond to the
various angle positions of an RDS, you can create a list that contains the
angle positions you are using. The list is saved as a file and corresponds
to a stylus system.
Conditions:
measurement.
1 In the toolbar or in the Probing system qualification window,
click the Stylus system management icon to open the Stylus
System Management.
Click the Create RC List button in the Stylus System Functions group of the Stylus System Management.
2 Activate the Styli list tab.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-17
3 Enter the name of the stylus system whose positions you want to define.
4 Enter here the maximum taper angle.
5 Edit the list of the angle positions of the RDS stylus and use the following functions:
11-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Icon
Function
Deletes the contents of the stylus list.
Loads an existing stylus list.
Saves the list in a file.
Adds a new line in the list below the marked line or at the end of the list.
Deletes the marked lines in the list.
(only with the RDS-CAA option)
The styli with RC-CAA are extracted from the features marked in the list of features and
inserted into the stylus list.
It is only possible to insert styli from one single stylus system in the list.
(only with the RDS-CAA option)
The features contained in the measurement plan are checked with regard to the use of
RC-CAA styli. If a stylus position used in the measurement plan coincides with a position
in the styli list, then, after response to the query, the listed stylus system and the stylus
with the same angle position are assigned to the feature (the measurement strategy).
If a measurement plan contains several stylus systems with RDS-CAA styli, you are
prompted to specify the system for which you want to use the function.
Note: When using RDS star styli, you must ensure the correct assignment as several
styli with the same stylus position exist in the list. It is possible to use the same list for
various stylus systems.
If there are several styli with the same angle position in the styli list, the first stylus will
be assigned.
Creates a new stylus system.
6 To edit a list cell: Click the list and enter the values directly.
- or Define the desired angle position on the RC position tab and click
Transfer to list.
7 In the Styli list, enter the stylus name and the corresponding positions of the articulating probe (angles A and B in degrees).
You can insert rows and delete individual rows or the whole list using
the context menu. We recommend using stylus names that contain
the angular positions that helps you later choose the correct stylus.
Note: Avoid those angular positions of the articulating probe in which
stylus shaft directions are close to the shaft direction of the reference
sphere, as there is a relatively high risk of shaft probing in this case.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-19
8 Click Close.
The data you entered is saved in an ASCII file and a new stylus system
is created in the stylus system management. Each row of the styli list
creates a separate stylus.
The data path and name are assigned by default and can be changed.
9 Close the RC List window.
In the Probing system qualification window, you can now click the CNC
Probing system qualification icon to begin qualifying the RDS positions.
Automated creation of a stylus list for an

RC system
To automatically generate and qualify the styli that correspond to the
various angle positions of an RC system, you can create a list that contains
the angle positions you are using. The list is saved as a file and corresponds
to a stylus system.
CALYPSO allows you to create such a table automatically with the same
angle distances.
To play a video about automated creation of a stylus list for an RC system,
click 4_8Update_Movie12_d/4_8Update_Movie12.htm.
Conditions:
measurement.
1 In the toolbar or in the Probing system qualification window,
click the Stylus system management icon to open the Stylus
System Management.
Click the Create RC List button in the Stylus System Functions group of the Stylus System Management.
2 Select Extras Angle Schema in the window menu.
11-20
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3 Enter the A and B angle values for the Start angle and End angle.
4 Define whether you want to determine the Step Width or the Step
Count.
5 Click Calculate Styli Angle.
The field shows the calculated angular positions as own styli together
with the standard <AngleA>_<AngleB> stylus name.
6 Edit the list as required.
You can also edit lines and delete lines via the context menu.
7 Confirm your entries with OK.
The dialog box closes and the table is transferred to the RC List window.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-21
Qualifying the reference sphere

Principle of qualification with reference
sphere
The reference sphere must be on the CMM for qualifying styli. The reference sphere is a sphere of known highly accurate diameter mounted
on the measuring table via a shaft. CALYPSO uses the sphere as a link
between the master stylus to which all computations refer and the
individual styli used for probing.
The reference sphere is, so to speak, calibrated on the master stylus
and the styli used for probing are calibrated on the reference sphere.
Thus, the usable styli are indirectly calibrated on the master stylus.
CALYPSO must know the exact position of this reference sphere for orientation and for analyzing the qualification correctly.
Qualification
Qualification
Master stylus for reference sphere qualification
Master stylus
Stylus for
measurements
You must use the master stylus for qualification of the reference
sphere. Master styli are usually identified by a red dot. You must always
set the angle position A = 0, B = 0 for articulating probe systems.
NOTICE
All corrections made to the measured data refer to the master stylus. The
master stylus must therefore be protected. Never use the master stylus
for a normal measurement during operation.
11-22
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Determining the position of the

reference sphere
You must probe the reference sphere with the master stylus if the reference sphere has been moved, if thermal conditions have changed since
the position was last determined or if the CMM has been moved to the
home position.
Moreover, reference spheres become invalid if certain changes have been
made to the reference sphere management.
Conditions:
You have opened a measurement plan.
The master stylus has been installed. [ 316]
CMM tab.
2 Make sure that the radius of the reference sphere and the serial number match the values on the qualification certificate of the reference
sphere.
If they do not match, proceed as described in Editing the data of the
reference spheres.
3 Make sure that the master stylus is displayed in the Stylus systems selection list.
4 Click Ref. sphere position.
In case the master stylus has not been inserted, CALYPSO asks if you
really want to determine the position of the reference sphere.
If you click No, the qualification process is discontinued.
If you click Yes, CALYPSO will use the data of the currently installed
stylus system.
Note: If you qualify the reference sphere using a stylus different from
the master stylus, a systematic error propagation will be caused.
Afterwards, you are prompted to enter the orientation of the reference
sphere post:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-23
Select Orientation of reference sphere
Inclination angle:
Rotation angle:
RSH Shaft Definition
OK
Cancel
5 Enter the orientation under Select Orientation of reference

sphere in the dialog box that opens:
Click the appropriate icon to copy the values automatically into the
input fields.
The icons show the view of the reference sphere and the shaft from
above (from the Z+ direction) in such a way that the X axis looks to
the right and the Y axis is looking up.
- or You can also enter the values freely into the input fields.
- or Click RSH Shaft Definition to qualify the sphere post semi-automatically [ 1154] (only for reference spheres with reference
sphere holder RSH).
6 Click OK to confirm the orientation of the reference sphere post.
7 Probe the reference sphere once in the stylus direction. You do this by
positioning the stylus over the north pole of the reference sphere and
by probing downwards.
CALYPSO automatically measures the reference sphere for CNC-compatible CMMs. The results are shown in the R, S, X, Y and Z fields
(see About the results of stylus qualification [ 1138]).
8 Click OK.
Risk of collision
With certain stylus designs, the travel path to the reference sphere automatically generated by CALYPSO may lead to collisions. In this case, define
your own travel path (Defining a manual path for stylus qualification [ 1136]).
11-24
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Qualification of styli
Basics about stylus qualification
A stylus must be qualified:
If you have installed a new stylus system that has not been qualified
yet.
If you want to re-qualify a stylus system, for example after a collision

or due to thermal changes.
On an RC-CAA-capable ZEISS probe, you can automatically qualify all the

angle positions of the articulating probe in a single process if you have
installed the RDS-CAA (Computer Aided Accuracy) option (see in the operating instructions for the RDS-CAA option under Qualifying the RDS
with CAA (option)).
Before you qualify styli, make sure that you have opened a measurement
plan and that CALYPSO knows the position of the reference sphere (see
Qualifying the reference sphere [ 1122]).
You qualify styli in the Probing system qualification window:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-25

Stylus system Stylus
Management
Stylus system
Mode
Parameter
Standard
Tensor
Star
Stylus name / no.
Geometry
Taper Angle
Sphere
Star_1
Change stylus pos.
Qualify stylus
Ref. sphere position
Set Limit Values

Stylus
Reference sphere
Name
Date
No.
Star_1
5.10.11
Temp.
SNo
Date
R:
R:
S:
S:
X:
X:
Y:
Y:
Z:
Z:
Type:
Tilt:
VAST
Rotate:
OK
The first qualification of a stylus must be done manually [ 1134].

Once the stylus has been qualified for the first time, future qualifications
can be done automatically [ 1138]. Using this function, however,
you can only qualify the stylus system that is currently located in the
probe.
You may define limit values for the stylus values [ 1127] determined
during the qualification. These limit values are checked prior to the CNC
run.
Playing a video
11-26
To play a video about stylus qualification, click 022_TasterEinmessen_XXT/022_TasterEinmessen_XXT_Music.htm.

61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Limit values for styli

List of characteristics
The compliance of the following stylus values with the defined tolerances
or limit values can be checked by CALYPSO:
During stylus qualification:
Stylus geometry (X, Y, Z, radius)

Stylus temperature
Deviation (sigma)
During the measurement of features:
Time elapsed since the last qualification
Definition of nominal
values
The nominal values for the stylus geometry and temperature are determined implicitly by manual qualification.
When does monitoring

take place?
The compliance with the limit values is only monitored during a CNC
qualification - except for the deviation which is monitored during each
qualification.
If one of the determined values exceeds its limit value during the CNC
qualification, the qualification is repeated until the limit value is complied
with or the defined number of repetitions is exceeded.
Global settings
The monitoring of the global limit values for stylus qualification is defined
in the system setup. To do so, select Extras Settings CMM and
click Define and Activate Limit Values on the Stylus system
notebook page.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-27
The required measurements of stylus values can be activated in the Definition of limit values during stylus qualification window.
Stylus-related settings
It is possible to define settings deviating from the global settings for each
stylus. To do so, click Set Limit Values in the Probing system
qualification window. In the Definition of limit values during
stylus qualification window you can select the Define limit values for this stylus option and make different settings.
Measuring the stylus values

You can configure CALYPSO so that the CNC run is interrupted as soon
as the limit values for the stylus qualification are exceeded or the measurement plan is executed with restrictions. All characteristics which would
require for their determination probing operations with a stylus that does
not comply with the limit values are ignored.
The decision can also be prompted during a CNC run.
The measurement of stylus values and the behavior of CALYPSO after
CNC qualification is defined for all measurement plans and individually
for each measurement plan.
Global setting
11-28
The global check of stylus values is defined in the system setup on the
Stylus system notebook page or under Resources Stylus system Stylus check during CNC start ...for all Measurement Plans.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Measurement plan-related setting
Deviating settings for the current measurement plan can be defined under Resources Stylus system Stylus check during CNC
start ... for this Measurement Plan.
Sensor monitoring for 3D microstyli on

the F25
Purpose of the sensor monitoring
The maximum permissible probing forces of 3D microstyli such as used
on CMMs of the F25 type for the measurement of microtechnical components are very low. The 3D microstylus may be damaged in case of
overload.
Sensitivity factor
CALYPSO uses a stylus-specific correction factor, the so-called sensitivity

factor, to optimize the probing force.
During qualification of a 3D microstylus of the SSP type, CALYPSO requests you to enter or select the sensitivity factor.
NOTICE
As of CALYPSO version 5.0.10, the external Bossfaktor.exe program is
no longer required for the entry of the sensitivity factor. CALYPSO
prompts you during the qualification of the stylus to enter the sensitivity
factor in CALYPSO.
Automatic functional
testing
When changing a stylus, CALYPSO automatically tests the functioning of

the 3D microstylus and indicates a defect in the Status Window.
Sensor signal monitoring
The sensor signal monitoring allows you to monitor the stylus deflection.
NOTICE
Sensor monitoring can only be called if CALYPSO is connected to a CMM
of the F25 type. In the simulation mode, it is not possible to open the
sensor monitoring.
Display Sensor Signals (sensor monitoring)

You open the sensor signal monitoring in the stop light window by selecting View Sensor Monitoring.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-29
If the sensor monitoring function has been activated, the current stylus
deflection is measured at regular intervals and displayed in an X-Y diagram in the Display Sensor Signals window. The diagram shows the
stylus deflections from Start or Reset.
The probing operations are represented on the X axis as consecutive

numbers. The current probing rate is displayed in Points / s below
the diagram.
The Y axis indicates the deflection:
The red curve visualizes the deflection in X direction.

The green curve visualizes the deflection in Y direction.
The brown curve visualizes the deflection in Z direction.
Below you will find a description of the most important sensor signal
monitoring functions.
Showing and hiding
curves
Use the X, Y, Z and zero line check boxes (at the right border below
the diagram) to show or hide the curves as required.
11-30
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Changing the probing

rate
The current probing rate is displayed in Points / s below the diagram.

You can change the probing rate using the slider located to the left of
Points / s.
NOTICE
If the probing rate is below 20 Point / s, the curves are not accurate
enough to reliably represent the changes in deflection.
NOTICE
The probing rate decreases automatically in the course of the recording.
This problem can be solved by restarting or resetting the sensor signal
monitoring (see further below).
Optimizing the display
The zooming functions enable you, for example, to examine certain sections in detail or to display the entire curves before printing them.
Use the sliders to the left and to the right of the Print button to scale
the axes of the diagram:
Left slider scales the Y axis.
Right slider scales the X axis.
FitSignals scales the Y axis in a way to display in the diagram all the
measuring results of the currently represented period.
Optimizing axis labeling
The arrow keys in the upper left corner of the dialog box increase or
reduce the number of decimals used for the Y axis.
Printing and saving

curves
You can print the curves, save them as images or output them in tables.
Controlling sensor signal

monitoring
Print
Prints the diagram as it is displayed
SaveAsBMP
Saves the diagram as it is displayed as bitmap
SavePoints
Saves all measurements recorded from Start or

Reset in an Excel table
By clicking the Start/Stop button, you start and end the sensor signal
monitoring.
To reset the sensor signal monitoring during operation, click Reset.
Click Close to close the window.
Other settings
The following settings are intended for the Carl Zeiss service and should
not be activated by you:
Temp Offset
DebugC99
Vector
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-31
Selection of the qualification method

In the Probing system qualification window, select under Mode the purpose and method for stylus qualification. The selected methods depend
on the type of the stylus system and the preceding qualifications.
List of qualification methods

The following qualification methods are available (depending on the
available options):
Mode
Use
Tensor
Determination of the (static) tensor.
(default mode
for measuring
probes)
Dyn. tensor
(only with the
VAST Navigator
option)
Procedure
30 probings at 15 points on the sphere. Each

point is probed twice with two different
The tensor indicates how the stylus forces. The static tensor is determined from
bends as a function of the applied the differences.
force.
Determination of the static and the Three great circles are measured on the refdynamic tensor.
erence sphere - once at 5 mm/s and once at
50
mm/s - and the ratio of the two results is
The dynamic tensor identifies how
determined. You can find more details in the
the stylus bends as a function of
operating
instructions for the VAST Navigathe scanning speed.
tor option under Dynamic stylus qualification.
Note: The dynamic tensor can be determined only if the static tensor is known. If
the static tensor has not been determined
yet, the static tensor and then the dynamic
tensor will be determined automatically.
Six Points
(default mode
for trigger
probes)
Initial determination of the stylus

geometry.
At first, four points are probed for position

determination, followed by six points for stylus qualification.
This is suitable for all probes with

spherical stylus tips (except for pas- Note: This qualification takes place in
sive styli).
clamped mode.
Important! For measuring probes, this mode

It is unsuitable for very short styli
and special stylus systems (e.g. an- is necessary only for special measuring jobs.
Slight accuracy reductions are possible!
gled configurations).
11-32
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Mode
Use
Procedure
Manual
Always in the case of manual

CMMs.
You select the probing points yourself.
Dyn. Tensor
Re-qualification
Re-qualification of the dynamic

tensor without determination of
the static tensor.
(only with the

VAST Navigator
option)
The static tensor must have been

determined in advance.
You will be prompted to probe in the shaft

direction. The first four points are used to
calculate a sphere. Afterward, the dynamic
tensor is determined.
The first probing point serves to determine

Otherwise, only if automatic quali- the probing direction. The following probing
fication is not possible (e.g. due to operations are used to calculate the stylus
the shaft geometry).
geometry (results are thus possible as of the
fifth
probing).
Also suitable for qualification of a
temperature stylus or for initial qualification of a cylindrical
stylus or a disk stylus.
Tensor Requalification
This is suitable for dynamic stylus

qualification on the virtual reference sphere (see in the operating
instructions for the VAST Navigator
option under Dynamic stylus qualification).
Re-qualification of the static tensor.
CALYPSO automatically re-qualifies the static tensor and the stylus geometry.
Any existing dynamic tensor is retained.
(only with the

VAST Navigator
option)
Geometry Re- Re-qualification of the stylus geom- This is in principle identical to the procedure
for the Six Points mode: At first, four
qualification etry if only this has changed.
points
are probed for position determinaAny existing static and dynamic
tion, followed by six points for stylus qualitensor is retained.
fication.
However, qualification takes place in the
unclamped mode (after all, there is a valid
tensor that is not deleted).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-33
Mode
Use
Procedure
Manual Requalification
Re-qualification of the stylus geom- This is in principle identical to the procedure

etry by manual probing if automat- for the Manual mode.
ic re-qualification is not possible.
However, qualification takes place in the
unclamped mode (after all, there is a valid
tensor that is not deleted). Used, e.g. for disk
styli.
Qualify passive stylus
This is the only possibility to qualify

the stylus geometry for passive
measuring probes. This is suitable
for all styli with spherical stylus tips.
At the beginning, the dead weight
offset (DWO) must be determined
that limits the measuring range of
the probe. Read the operating instructions provided.
Four points are first probed for position determination, followed by the required number of points for stylus qualification. The
dead weight offset (DWO) is determined by
means of the Probe in direction of the stylus
shaft prompt.
Performing stylus qualification

Qualifying styli manually
To qualify a stylus, instruct CALYPSO to use this stylus to probe the reference sphere, mounted on the measuring table, in a specific manner
(which will be explained in greater detail later).
CMM tab.
2 Select the name of the stylus system in the Probing system qualification
window.
4 Under Geometry, select the form or function of the stylus tip
(Sphere is the standard setting).
Select Temperature stylus to qualify a temperature stylus and
Cylinder to qualify a cylindrical stylus.
5 From the Mode list, select the qualification mode:
Select Tensor if you wish to use the stylus later for scanning or for
discrete-point measurements with high precision requirements
(available only on measuring systems such as HSS, VAST, VAST XT
and Dynatouch).
Select Six Points if you want to qualify the stylus by the automatic
default method.
Select Manual if, by preference or necessity, you are going to
qualify the stylus manually.
11-34
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
For example, you would select this mode to qualify a temperature

stylus or a cylindrical stylus.
There is danger of collision if the styli you use are very short. Under these
circumstances, reduce the value for Taper Angle.
The smaller the taper angle, the smaller is the section of the surface of the
reference sphere which is probed for qualification.
6 Click Qualify stylus.
The CMM automatically moves to a standby position in front of the
reference sphere.
Risk of collision
7 If you want to perform stylus qualification in the Tensor mode, enter
the measuring force in mN that you want to use subsequently with
the stylus.
If you want to use a particularly long and thin stylus or if the material
to be probed is soft, select a lower value for dynamic probing in %.
We recommend values between 10 and 50 %.
Note: This information is stored with the stylus data and can be viewed
in the Measurement Plan Editor Features and overwritten for
individual features.
Note: The probing speed is considerably reduced by a changed measuring force activation only with values below 50%. Correct probing is
not guaranteed with values below 10%. We recommend to carry out
tests to determine the optimum value for the corresponding application.
8 If you perform the qualification in the Tensor or Six Points mode:
When prompted, position the stylus over the north pole of the reference sphere and probe it in the direction of the shank. (If your stylus
is vertical, therefore, position it over the north pole of the sphere and
probe once vertically downwards).
- or If you perform the qualification in Manual mode:
After prompting, probe at first a single point in the shaft direction.
Manually create the probing points and return points (retract
points) in the desired order.
These points are assigned to the respective stylus.
Note: When qualifying a cylindrical stylus, the first point must be
probed in the shaft direction. This point serves only to determine the
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-35
shaft direction and will therefore not be probed again during the CNC
qualification.
Then you must probe three points on the cylindrical stylus in a circle
and the next three points in a circle that is offset with respect to the
first circle. After that, you can make any probings that you wish.
4
1
The number of probing and support points is displayed in the Qualify

stylus window. With Delete, you can remove the points backwards one after the other.
If you do not set a return point after the last probing point, a retraction
will be set automatically during the CNC run later.
If the sum of the projection angles is greater than 15 degrees, a window automatically appears during the run. You can change the angles
and confirm the change with OK in this window. This allows you to
adjust the values so that the shaft direction of the stylus is as close to
perpendicular as possible with respect to the calculated equatorial
plane of the reference sphere and shaft probing is avoided.
CALYPSO qualifies the stylus according to the mode selected. The results are shown in the R, S, X, Y, and Z fields (see About the results
of stylus qualification [ 1138]).
9 Click OK.
The styli are now qualified and the bar next to the Stylus system icon
is green.
Defining a manual path for stylus qualification

CALYPSO automatically determines the travel paths during stylus qualification. To avoid collisions in case of certain stylus geometries (e.g. hookshaped styli), you can define an own travel path towards the reference
sphere and back for each stylus.
Once a manual path has been defined, then only this path will be used.
11-36
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining a manual path

CMM tab.
2 Select the name of the stylus system in the Probing system qualification
window.
4 Select Manual path in the Stylus menu or select the Manual
path entry in the selection list under Stylus name / no..
The Point list for stylus [stylus_name] window opens.
5 Enter here the intermediate positions for the travel path of the stylus
to the reference sphere and back. To do so, use the Edit functions.
Use Read position or the button on the joystick of the control console to add the current position of the stylus system to the list.
Click Qualification as soon as you have reached a safe position in
front of the reference sphere from which CALYPSO can then take over
the qualification of the stylus. A line with X = 0, Y = 0 , Z = 0 and the
calib type is inserted and the Way back button is activated.
Click Way back if the stylus should return on the same path. The
points are automatically inserted in the list. Otherwise, define other
intermediate positions for the way back.
To check, use Scan points to have the entered points scanned by
the stylus system.
Risk of collision! Move slowly and carefully.
6 Save the path with OK.

7 Close the Stylus system qualification window with OK.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-37
The individual travel path for the qualification of the stylus is defined and
will be used for each subsequent automatic qualification.
Qualifying styli automatically

You can program CALYPSO to automatically re-qualify the stylus of a
stylus system already qualified.
CMM tab.
2 Select the name of the stylus system.
Risk of collision
4 Click the CNC Probing system qualification icon.
5 Click OK.
The styli are now qualified and the bar next to the Stylus system icon
is green. The qualified stylus system can now be used by all CALYPSO
users.
About the results of stylus qualification

Acceptable standard deviation depends at least on the following factors:
Resolution and accuracy of the CMM
Length and rigidity of the stylus
Quality of the stylus system
Quality of the stylus tip
Cleanliness of the environment
The standard deviation should lie in the range of a few micrometers.

In order to decide whether the qualification result is acceptable, you can
use the standard deviation as a basis for your decision. In addition, further
factors have to be taken into account (among other things, the size of
the tolerances to be determined with the stylus - if the tolerance values
are accordingly large, even standard deviations of 0.005 mm can be acceptable).
11-38
If in doubt, check the stylus system construction for stability and correct
assembly in accordance with the stylus system documents. Clean the stylus and the reference sphere and repeat qualification to aim at better
results.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
If the results are stable, you have reached the limit based on all of the
factors mentioned above. You can regroup the stylus system to increase
the rigidity. Qualification with a short, rigid stylus (e.g. the master stylus)
can determine systematic errors of the CMM.
Qualifying stylus system with

measurement plan
Advantages of the qualification with
measurement plan
You can use special measurement plans in the CNC run to qualify stylus
systems automatically. You may also use several reference spheres (real
or virtual) and carry out rapid re-qualifications.
Using several measurement plans differently
Example: All styli are qualified in the Tensor mode and should be qualified again once every shift because of possible changes in temperature.
In this case, it is not necessary to carry out a complete tensor qualification
every time. This is because, even though the geometry of a stylus changes
with the temperature, the flexibility does not.
For regular qualification, therefore, you can define a measurement plan
in which all styli are qualified with only 6 points. Select additionally the
Geometry Re-qualification mode.
In an additional measurement plan, select the Tensor mode for the same
stylus system, thus making a complete qualification.
Virtual reference spheres
If you use a virtual reference sphere (VAST Navigator option), it could be

helpful to divide the stylus system qualification into several characteristics.
In one characteristic, define the geometry specification (tensor, requalification geometry) for all styli as well as the dynamic qualification
for those styli that can be qualified on the real reference sphere.
Then define in further characteristics the dynamic repeat measurement on virtual reference spheres.
Creating a measurement plan for automatic

qualification
NOTICE
Try to gather all the geometric data on one single reference sphere. Use
the second reference sphere or the virtual reference spheres for the dynamic re-qualification.
Conditions:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-39
The positions of all needed reference spheres have been qualified

using the master stylus.
Should virtual positions of reference spheres be needed, they must
be created by being copied in the Reference sphere management.
All required styli must have already been qualified in the desired
mode. If manual paths are needed for qualification, these paths are
already defined.
1 Select File New and enter a name for the measurement plan, e.g.,
Stylus qualification.
2 Select Resources Utilities Probing system qualification.
A new Probing system qualification characteristic is created.
3 Define additional Probing system qualification characteristics.
You need a Probing system qualification characteristic for every
reference sphere and for every stylus system to be qualified.
4 Define the characteristics for the qualification of the various reference
spheres.
Open the first characteristic.
You see the data of the stylus system used. In the list on the left, all
available (qualified) styli of this stylus system, the current qualification
status as well as the respective reference sphere are displayed.
On the right side, the styli to be qualified with this characteristic are
displayed with mode and reference sphere.
In the CNC run, the position of reference sphere 1 is first measured
with the master stylus.
Select under Stylus system the MasterProbe entry.
11-40
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Highlight the stylus in the list on the right.

Select the mode with which the position of the reference sphere
should be determined under Mode.
Here, you can also set Geometry Re-qualification. The position
is measured using only 6 points; the existing tensor is maintained.
Select the position number of the reference sphere that is supposed
to be qualified with this feature under Reference sphere.
Give the characteristic the name Reference sphere 1 and confirm
with OK.
Edit, as in steps 4 through 9, the characteristics for all further (real)
reference spheres.
5 Define the characteristics for the qualification of the various stylus systems.
Define, using Add and Delete, the styli to be qualified with the respective characteristic.
Example: Only styli 2 and 4 of a star stylus are to be qualified. In this
case, mark stylus 1, 3 and 5 and click Delete.
For the marked stylus or styli, set the desired qualification mode for
this characteristic under Mode.
6 Select File Save to save the measurement plan.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-41
Running the measurement plan for

qualification
NOTICE
If the measurement plan contains exclusively characteristics for stylus
qualification, it is not necessary to define any base alignment or clearance
plane.
NOTICE
If you have changed the stylus name after creation of the measurement
plan, CALYPSO will skip these styli during qualification. You will have to
transfer the respective stylus in the corresponding characteristic from the
Styli available list on the left back to the Selected styli list on the
right.
1 Select Plan CNC-Start or click the Run Measurement Plan
icon.
2 Select in the Start Measurement window, under Selection, the
Current Alignment, and, under Navigate-Feature To Feature, the Use Position Points Only entry.
3 Start the measurement plan with OK.
Note: If using more than one (real) reference sphere, CALYPSO, when
changing to another reference sphere, always travels first in +Z to the
end of the measuring range, then to the next reference sphere in X
and Y.
The stylus systems have been qualified. You may proceed with the desired
measurement plan for measuring the workpiece.
11-42
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Stylus system management

Stylus system management window
In the Stylus System Management you have access to the stylus data. The
following operations are possible in the Stylus System Management:
Editing existing styli of a stylus system.
Adding new styli.
Editing the tabular overviews containing information on Geometry, Quality of the qualification and Settings of the styli.
Opening the Stylus System Management

1 In the toolbar or in the Probing system qualification window, click the
Stylus system management icon.
Navigation area
Display area
The Stylus System Management window consists of two areas:
Navigation area (left): This area is intended for navigation between

the different data categories.
Display area (right): This area shows the data associated with your
selection in the navigation area. Valid styli are highlighted in green,
invalid ones in red.
The following table provides an overview of the data categories in the

navigation area and the content shown in the display area:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-43
Select in the navigation Contents of the display area

area
<stylus_system_name>
Name of the stylus system and list of the styli.

The Common Stylus Data of the stylus highlighted in the list are displayed.
The Stylus System Functions allow you to edit the stylus system
data.
Stylus
Overview of the stylus data Geometry, Quality and Settings of the

respective stylus selected.
Geometry
Geometric data of all styli of the stylus system.
Quality
Results of the last qualification for all styli of the stylus system.
Settings
Settings of all styli of the stylus system.
Editing stylus data

You can modify the stylus name, stylus number and some geometric data.
Please keep in mind that other data is calculated on the basis of the edited
data. The calculated data and the qualification data cannot be modified.
1 In the navigation area for the respective stylus system, select the Stylus data category.
The Stylus area opens in the display area.
2 In the Styli available list, click the stylus you wish to edit.
The data of the selected stylus is displayed in the Stylus Data group.
3 Click the fields with a white background to edit the stylus data.
If you modify an angle, the geostat and shaft vector fields get a red
background. To update these fields, click the Recalculate Stylus
Data button.
Passive stylus become invalid after recalculation and are disabled for
slide gage calibration.
4 Click the Apply button to accept the changes.
NOTICE
Passive stylus become invalid after recalculation and are disabled for the
CNC probing system qualification. Only manual qualification will be possible then.
Creating a new stylus

There are two ways to create a new stylus:
11-44
You create a new stylus and enter its data.
You copy an existing stylus and give it a different name.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Creating a new stylus in the stylus system

2 In the Styli available list, click any stylus and select the New menu
item from the context menu.
The Create new stylus dialog box opens.
3 In the Stylus and Stylus no. input fields, enter the stylus name and
number and confirm with OK.
CALYPSO does not distinguish internally between uppercase and lowercase characters.
Note: If you wish to import the defined stylus later into a DME version,
the stylus names may not contain any point and must be unique in the
DME system.
4 Click the fields with a white background to edit the stylus data.
If you change an angle with articulating probes, the stylus coordinates
and shaft vector fields get a yellow background. To update these fields,
click the Recalculate Stylus Data button.
Copying styli
2 In the Styli available list, click the stylus whose data you wish to
accept and select Copy from the context menu.
The Create new stylus dialog box opens.
3 In the Stylus and Stylus no. input fields, enter the stylus name and
number and confirm with OK.
The data of the copied stylus is then used to create a new stylus.
Working with overviews

For the Geometry, Quality and Settings data categories, the stylus
system management contains tabular overviews allowing you to edit stylus data and to sort the contents in ascending and descending order.
1 To open the overview of a data category, click a data category in the
navigation area.
The selected window opens.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-45
The colored backgrounds indicate whether the stylus is valid and suitable for measurement (green) or invalid (red).
2 Click the header of the respective table column to sort the entries in
ascending or descending order.
You can edit the stylus names, stylus numbers and some geometric
data.
3 For editing, click the desired field and make your modifications.
Note: Please keep in mind that other data is calculated on the basis of
the edited data. The calculated data and the qualification data cannot
be modified.
4 Click Recalculate Stylus Data to reestablish data consistency.
Outputting stylus data

Printing the stylus data list
You can print selected stylus data in the form of an overview. Define the
selection list for the stylus data in an initialization file.
11-46
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CMM tab.
2 Click the Stylus system management icon. The Stylus system
management window will open.
3 In the Stylus System Functions group, click Print.
The Stylus system printout window is opened.
4 Select the desired data.

5 Start printing with OK.
NOTICE
The same data are also output to a file during the CNC run if you activate
the output of the stylus data under Resources Results to File.
Outputting stylus data as a file

You can output selected stylus data as a file during the CNC run. Define
the selection list for the stylus data in an initialization file.
The Results to File dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Select the New option under Stylus data.
The stylus data are written in an ASCII file during the CNC run. If you
want the output to a PDF file, you must set this under Resources Name for output files.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-47
Reference: Structure of the INI file for stylus

data output
The stylus data to be output when printing the stylus data list and when
outputting the stylus data to a file are defined in the probeProtocol.ini
initialization file.
The file is created automatically with default values when outputting the
stylus data list for the first time. The file is located in the <user directory>
\config\equip directory.
Example
An example illustrates the structure of the file:

Version: 1.0 %
typ
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
stylusdata:
% typ
setting:
setting:
Editing the INI file
11-48
name available
X
1
Y
1
Z
1
R
1
S
1
ForceX
1
ForceY
1
ForceZ
1
shaftX
1
shaftY
1
shaftZ
1
Temp
1
Date
1
geometry
0
Mode
0
Paranamest3 0
aAxis
1
bAxis
1
cncCalib
0
name
value
column
5
width
12
The file can be edited with a conventional text editor.
In the first block, you define which stylus date is included in the printout. 1 means in the printout, 0 means not in the printout.
In the second block, you define the number of columns in the table
(column) and the column width (width).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Reference sphere management

Basics of reference spheres
In CALYPSO all measured and corrected coordinates are defined relative
to the master stylus. To ensure this, the styli intended for the measurements must be aligned with the master stylus. This is the purpose of the
reference spheres.
Once a reference sphere has been qualified by means of the master stylus,
the other styli can be qualified on this reference sphere. CALYPSO can
then calculate their stylus data back to the master stylus.
Structure of a reference
sphere
Sphere
Reference
sphere shaft
Sphere shaft
Reference
sphere holder
The reference sphere consists of the reference sphere holder and the reference sphere shaft that is attached at a certain angle to the reference
sphere holder. The reference sphere shaft consists of the sphere and the
sphere shaft.
CALYPSO can work with several reference spheres. The data of the reference sphere used is considered for stylus qualification.
Use the Reference sphere management dialog box to manage your
reference spheres. This is where the data of all reference spheres used on
the CMM is stored.
Reference sphere correction

The reference sphere is not totally rigid but is more or less deflected during
qualification depending on the probing direction.
CALYPSO can consider this flexibility of the reference spheres depending
on the type during stylus qualification in the Tensor mode. Thus, qualification of the tensor of the stylus bend correction is even more accurate
as both the flexibility of the stylus to be qualified and the asymmetrical
flexibility of the reference sphere are compensated. This is especially useful for high-precision CMMs.
Reference spheres concerned
Type-related reference sphere correction is currently only possible for RSH

reference spheres:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-49
Reference sphere holder
Reference sphere
RSH-214
Standard CZ (diameter 8, 15, 25 or

30 mm)
RSH-364
RSH-514
RSH-Compact
RSH-105-A
RSH-187-M
CMMs concerned
The CMM type and the machine configuration determine whether your
CMM supports bending correction. For more information, please refer to
the operating instructions or the data sheet for your CMM.
Importing correction data

When creating a new reference sphere, the correction values determined
in the laboratory are automatically imported into CALYPSO and saved in
the reference sphere management. There is nothing more you have to
do.
The flexibility of the reference spheres is compensated by calculation for
each measuring value during stylus qualification when reference sphere
correction is active. The flexibility of the reference sphere is thus automatically considered for stylus data correction.
NOTICE
The exact direction (rotation/inclination angle) of the reference sphere
shaft is required for reference sphere correction. Semi-automatic RSH
shaft definition must be carried out to accurately determine the orientation of the reference sphere shaft.
Transfer of reference sphere data

New installation
At the first start after installation, CALYPSO creates an active reference

sphere of the Other type. The Other type is always used without
reference sphere correction.
To allow CALYPSO to consider the reference sphere data, you must recreate the reference spheres actually used and enter their data.
Update
When starting CALYPSO after an update, CALYPSO haves differently. The

reason for this is the modified reference sphere data management in V
5.6.
Update of a version V 5.6 (or higher)

CALYPSO generally transfers the data of all reference spheres of the
previous version to the new reference sphere management.
11-50
Update of a version < V 5.6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CALYPSO transfers the entire available reference sphere data of the

Other type.
To make the extended reference sphere data such as reference sphere
used, reference sphere holder and sphere used available to CALYPSO,
you must delete the applied data and create a new reference sphere
by selecting the reference sphere, reference sphere holder and sphere
used.
Note: Make sure to maintain the numbers of the reference spheres as

the CNC stylus qualification refers to these numbers. If, for example,
all stylus systems have up to now been qualified on sphere no. 1 and
you now define this sphere as sphere no. 2 and delete the transferred
sphere no. 1, the CNC stylus qualification will stop and issue an error
message.

window
The data of all reference spheres used on the CMM is stored in the Reference sphere management.
Opening the reference sphere management

1 Click in the Probing system qualification window the Reference
sphere management icon.
List of numbers
Reference sphere
Settings
Reference sphere
data
Clearance dist. -X
Serial Number
Clearance dist. +X
X Offset
Clearance dist. -Y
Y Offset
Clearance dist. +Y
Z Offset
Clearance dist. -Z
Sigma
Clearance dist. +Z
Roundness dev.
Reference sphere
components
Tilt and rotation angle
Update stylus data
Inclination Angle
No
Rotation Angle
Shaft radius
Virt. ref. sph.
Date
Ref. sphere components
Clearance Distance
Sphere Radius
Inclination Angle
No
Rotation Angle
31.1.2013
Temp. coeff.
pos. valid
No
Height
Functions
Buttons for functions
New
Copy
Delete
Activate
Copy as virtual reference sphere
RSH Shaft Definition
Print
Reset
Apply
Close
If the values of a reference sphere do not match the data on the certificate, you have to edit its reference sphere data [ 1153].
If you use another reference sphere, you can create a new reference
sphere [ 1152].
You can copy a reference sphere as virtual reference sphere for dynamic tensor qualification.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-51
You can carry out an RSH Shaft Definition [ 1154].
You can print the reference sphere data [ 1155].
Creating a new reference sphere

If you want to use a new reference sphere on the CMM, you have to add
it to CALYPSO.
Conditions:
The Reference sphere management dialog box appears on
the screen.
1 To create a new reference sphere: Click New in the Functions section.
The Create New Reference Sphere window appears on the
screen.
Create New Reference Sphere
Type
Reference sphere/combination
RSH-Compact
Sphere
CZSphereD30
CZSphereD30
Serial Number
Sphere Radius
CZSphereD25
Shaft Radius
CZSphereD15
Temperature Coefficient
Roundness Deviation
(m)
CZSphereD8
At Definition of Sphere Position

Update Stylus Data
Do not change stylus data
OK
Cancel
2 If necessary, select the reference sphere holder (RSH) type in the

graphical selection field named Reference sphere/combination
and the corresponding sphere in the graphical selection field.
- or 3 Select Other.
11-52
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4 Enter the values specified on the certificate or check the values preset
by CALYPSO:
Serial Number
Sphere Radius
Shaft Radius
Temperature Coefficient
Roundness Deviation
5 Select the behavior when defining the position with the master stylus:
Update Stylus Data: Recommended setting for conventional
reference spheres
Do not change stylus data: Recommended setting for optical
reference spheres (this requires definition of the master stylus on a
conventional reference sphere prior to optical definition of the optical reference sphere).
Editing reference sphere data

If the values of a reference sphere do not match the data on the certificate, you have to change its data.
Conditions:
The Reference sphere management dialog box appears on
the screen.
1 Click the corresponding reference sphere in the list of numbers.
2 Change the radius or the serial number if necessary.
3 If necessary, change the clearance distances to suit the type of clamping device you are using (clearance planes for mount) and the position
of the shaft.
The clearance distances define the clearance planes for qualifying the
stylus.
Note: Minimum clearance planes are kept even if the clearances are
set to zero; the datum target is an imaginary point slightly outside the
reference sphere (depending on the axial direction), not the center of
the reference sphere.
4 Check whether the correct shaft radius of the reference sphere is indicated.
The default shaft radius value is 6 mm which is possibly too high. CALYPSO indicates during the qualification, if necessary, that probing is
not possible by means of this reference sphere.
5 Save the changes with OK.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-53
Semi-automatically defining the RSH

shaft direction
CALYPSO makes it possible to semi-automatically define the shaft direction with any stylus for reference spheres with reference sphere holder of
the type RSH.
You can perform RSH shaft definition in two situations and in two different dialog boxes.
Performing RSH shaft definition

Conditions:
The inserted stylus is qualified.
The Reference sphere post [machine name] window is
open.
- or The Reference sphere management window is open.
1 Click RSH Shaft Definition.
2 If the sphere of the reference sphere holder has already been qualified,
you will be prompted to define whether you want to keep the previous
data.
If you answer no and the sphere of the reference sphere holder has
not yet been qualified, a remark window will appear on the screen.
3 Now probe a point on the sphere of the reference sphere holder as
shown in the illustration.
In this step, you can rotate the reference sphere shaft as desired and
perform the alignment in the next step. This is useful, e.g., for an inclination angle close to 180.
Then a further remark window is displayed. The same remark window
will also be opened if the sphere of the reference sphere holder is
already qualified and the question above is confirmed.
4 Probe a point on the sphere of the reference sphere shaft as shown in
the illustration.
CALYPSO evaluates the probings and positions the stylus used for
qualification centrally over the sphere of the reference sphere shaft.
The tilt and rotation angles are computed and assigned.
The result of the computation is shown in the Reference sphere
management in the Tilt and rotation angle group.
If the RSH shaft definition has been carried out during reference sphere
qualification, then the tilt and rotation angles are transferred to the Select Orientation of reference sphere dialog box.
11-54
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Outputting reference sphere data

1 Mark the desired reference sphere.
2 Click Print.
The Print dialog box appears on the screen. It shows a schematic
representation and the most important data of the reference sphere.
Print
Reference sphere
Qualification date
X:
Y:
Z:
R=
Nx=
Ny=
Nz=
Serial No.
Ident No.
OK
Print
3 Click Print to print the representation and the data on the default
printer.
4 Click OK to close the dialog box without any output.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
11-55
11-56
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12
Chapter
Measuring with the rotary

table
.................................................................................................................

General information on using the rotary table ........................................ 122
Prerequisites for the rotary table ............................................................ 127
Using the rotary table for measurements .............................................. 1234
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-1
General information on using the rotary table

Advantages of the rotary table use
When measuring rotationally symmetrical workpieces (shafts, gears) or
prismatic workpieces, the use of rotary tables provides the following advantages:
Use of simpler stylus systems.

All sides of a workpiece can be measured with the same stylus. Less
effort is required for qualification of the styli.
Shorter clearance paths.
Enlargement of the usable measuring range.
Higher precision when measuring form characteristics.
Straightforward programming.
The programming is simpler because you can always program on the
operator screen.
In addition, the rotary table can be used to position several equal workpieces easily if loops are used in the measurement plan for the workpiece
and rotary table position.
CALYPSO makes it possible to use the rotary table both vertically and
horizontally if your rotary table supports this function.
With suitable rotary tables (e.g. RT-AB (Rotary Table Air Bearing), CALYPSO uses the mass moment of inertia (MMI) of the loaded rotary table
for optimizing the angular acceleration.
NOTICE
The rotary table is a fourth axis for the CMM and thus contributes to the
expected measuring uncertainty. For an accuracy estimate in the case of
features measured with the rotary table, the permitted four-axis deviation
of the CMM must always be used.
In particular, the quality of the rotary table axis qualification has a strong
influence on the accuracy that can be achieved. For this reason, you
should proceed with great care (see Qualifying the rotary table axis [ 1215]).
Follow the safety instructions given in the respective rotary table operating
instructions.
Always make sure that the workpieces and their fixtures do not protrude
the edge of the faceplate; there is a risk of inadmissibly high peripheral
speeds.
Do not change the loading while the rotary table is in motion.
12-2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Safety instructions for RT-AB rotary

tables
More detailed safety instructions apply to RT-AB rotary tables.
When the CMM drives are switched off, the RT-AB can be rotated manually.
The CMM drives can be switched off, for example, by pressing the emergency stop button.
The drives drop immediately in case of an emergency stop. Then the rotary
table slows down depending on the mass moment of inertia of the loaded
rotary table. A fully loaded RT-AB requires a stopping distance of approx.
60.
In case of power failure, the air bearing of the rotary table is depressurized,
thus decelerating the rotary table.
In case of stylus collision (without dropping of the CMM drives), the rotational axis is decelerated according to the acceleration ramp set in the
control.
If a hard collision occurs, e.g. a collision of the ram with an object
clamped next to the rotary table, the CMM drives will drop. The rotary
table will then coast instead of being braked, which involves the risk of
another collision.
Mass moment of inertia (MMI) of rotary

tables
CALYPSO can have the mass moment of inertia of the workpiece determined automatically for suitable rotary tables. This enables automatic
optimization of the angular acceleration and higher rotational speeds in
case of lightweight workpieces.
The moment of inertia determined includes all rotating parts, i.e. the rotor
itself, the faceplate, the clamping fixture and the workpiece. It is saved in
Defining the moment of inertia range with the selector

switch
Operational safety
For safety reasons, you need to define the moment of inertia range yourself using a moment of inertia selector. This is to limit the maximum rotational speed of the rotary table. The moment of inertia selector is located on the switch panel of the control cabinet and has two stages in
the standard configuration. The application range of the stages is specified in the operating instructions for the corresponding rotary table.
For example, the following two ranges apply to the RT-AB:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-3
Switch position 0: only for loadings with a moment of inertia of up to

8 kgm2; rotational speed up to 50 /s.
Switch position 1: only for loadings with a moment of inertia ranging

from 8 kgm2 to 20 kgm2; rotational speed up to 30 /s.
With high moments of inertia, automatic reduction of the rotational

speed is necessary for safety reasons (risk of crushing on the rotary table).
NOTICE
For safety reasons, the C99 CMM control monitors the mass moment of
inertia. If the position of the MMI switch does not match the mass moment of inertia determined by the CMM control, CALYPSO will output
an error message and stop the CNC run.
Settings for the mass moment of inertia

CALYPSO uses a control macro to determine the mass moment of inertia
by rotating the rotary table. You can manually start this process or have
it performed automatically.
Procedure at CNC start
In the Rotary Table window, you define the behavior at CNC start.
If you tick the Redefine at every CNC start check box, the mass
moment of inertia will be redetermined by CALYPSO every time you
start the CNC run.
Otherwise, the value will be taken from the measurement plan without redefining it.
This procedure reduces the duration of the measurement. It can,
however, only be used if the mass distribution and the fixture are
always the same for all CNC runs.
Using existing measurement plans without saved MMI

Exception: Measurement
plan without specification of the mass moment
of inertia
If the mass moment of inertia is not defined in the measurement plan,

the setting of the RT home position check box in the Rotary Table window will be determining. This applies e.g. to measurement plans
from older CALYPSO versions.
12-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
If RT home position is activated, CALYPSO will automatically determine the mass moment of inertia before starting the reference
travel.
Otherwise, the definition made in the system settings (CMM Configuration notebook, Rotary Table page) will apply:
The mass moment of inertia is determined either automatically at CNC

start or the CNC run stops with a warning message displayed.
NOTICE
The control unit continuously monitors the MMI. If the value transferred
to the control unit at CNC start does not comply with the actual MMI, an
error message will appear.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-5
Manually determining
the mass moment of inertia
In the Rotary Table window, you can have the mass moment of inertia
determined manually, for example, if you create a new measurement plan
or want to use it for another workpiece. The value determined will automatically be used for the next CNC run.
When saving the measurement plan, the mass moment of inertia is permanently transferred to the measurement plan.
Visualizing the current
tilting moment
CALYPSO enables visualization of the current tilting moment caused by

the loading (Visualizing the tilting moment of the RT-AB rotary table [ 1238]).
Parameter-coded measuring runs with PCM
The PCM Technology option enables parameterization of measuring runs,

for example, to simplify measurement of similar workpieces with different
dimensions (parts families). In such cases, different moments of inertia
need to be taken into account.
Two PCM functions are used for this purpose:
With measureMTMValue, you add an automatic determination of the

mass moment of inertia at any point of the measuring run.
With setMTMValue, you define a certain value for the mass moment
of inertia of the rotary table with workpiece.
This procedure is only useful if the workpiece remains in exactly the
same position and orientation, e.g. in a firmly mounted fixture.
12-6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO

Steps for preparation
You can also use CALYPSO to measure workpieces on a rotary table. The
necessary prerequisites are described in the following sections:
Installation of a new rotary table [ 127]
Defining the REWI additional correction [ 1210] (only for RTAB-300 P and certain CMMs)
Manual positioning of the rotary table [ 1235]
Qualifying the rotary table axis [ 1215]
Logging in the rotary table

Logging in the rotary table to CALYPSO
A mobile rotary table is fastened with horizontal or vertical alignment (if
your rotary table supports this function) on the workbench of the CMM
and connected electrically to the control system.
Note: Exact mechanical alignment is not required, as the rotary table position and orientation are qualified.
To enable CALYPSO to make measurements with the rotary table and to
evaluate, the rotary table must be logged into CALYPSO and, besides this,
the rotary table must be connected to the control unit in the case of a
mobile rotary table.
1 Select Extras Settings CMM and open in the CMM Configuration notebook the Rotary Table page.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-7
2 Select the rotary table type.

3 Tick the Connect rotary table to control check box for a mobile
rotary table.
4 Tick the Activate rotary table functionality check box.
The rotary table illustration is no longer crossed off.
5 Click RT Reference Point.
The rotary table rotates to the starting position and resets the reference point.
6 The mass moment of inertia is generally saved in the measurement
plan. If you have connected a rotary table that supports the determination of the mass moment of inertia, define, in the MMI Mode area,
the behavior of CALYPSO if the measurement plan does not contain
a mass moment of inertia:
Determination at every CNC Start
Cancelation of the CNC run
If no mass moment of inertia has been entered in the measurement
plan and if neither the automatic determination of the mass moment
of inertia nor the RT home position has been activated in the Rotary
Table window, the CNC run will be canceled with a warning message.
For more information, see Mass moment of inertia (MMI) of rotary
tables [ 123].
12-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
7 Click Accept and then click OK to confirm.

After login and enabling of the rotary table, two additional icons appear
in the CALYPSO work area:
The Rotary Table icon in the measurement plan area on the Measurement Plan tab.
The RT travel commands icon in the toolbar.
You can now use the functionality of the rotary table.
Setting the RT position

If an integrated rotary table is being used for the first time or a mobile
rotary table is installed at a different position on the CMM, you have to
inform CALYPSO of the rough position of the rotary table in the measuring range.
1 Measure the rotary table top as a circle in a new measurement plan
without having first defined a base alignment.
2 Select Resources RT Functions RT position.
3 Click Feature for rough pos. of RT axis, select the measured
circle from the list of features and confirm with OK.
CALYPSO now knows the rough position of the rotary table in the
measuring range of the CMM. This is required for later automatic
qualification of the rotary table axis.
4 Select the Main orientation for the mobile rotary table.
Note: Select the main orientation so that the activation of the rotary
table in the positive direction causes a rotation in the mathematically positive direction (counterclockwise) (see schematic representation in the window).
5 When using rotary tables with RT-CAA, perform a self-centering probing of the CAA qualification point when prompted.
The CAA qualification point is a counterbore on the edge of the faceplate.
NOTICE
For a mobile rotary table, you must re-qualify the rotary table position
after each movement of the rotary table. Otherwise, the computation
with CAA generates incorrect results.
Special aspects of the horizontal rotary table

axis
When using the rotary table with horizontal axis orientation (if your rotary
table supports this function), you must observe a few special aspects:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-9
Clearance planes
On a rotary table with a horizontal rotational axis, only the clearance

planes which are not on the lower plane during the selected RT position
can be used.
It is therefore advisable to use RT clearance planes as here the RT position
is automatically taken into account.
Activated and deactivated modes
Block / release edges:
CALYPSO activates and deactivates the following modes automatically:
The Retract to top mode is deactivated.
The Rotationally symmetrical part near RT center is automatically

activated.
The edges of the planes at the beginning of the axis (negative axis side)
are automatically blocked.
If you fasten the positive end of the RT axis by means of a tailstock, you
must additionally block the 4 edges of the corresponding plane.
Otherwise you must release the two lower, normally locked edges which
are intersected when the rotary table rotates through the various planes.
Only then is it possible for you to reach all sides when the rotary table
rotates.
RT homing
Like the three linear axes of the CMM (X, Y, Z), the rotary table also has
a home position. This is approached automatically during every CMM
homing. It is, however, also possible to approach the home position manually or automatically during the measuring operation.
In contrast to the linear axes, the rotary table has no mechanical limit stop.
During homing, the zero marking on the scale is reached by the shortest
path and the counter is set to zero. The maximum rotational angle on the
rotary table is not restricted by a mechanical limit stop either; it is restricted by the memory of the counter. The number of possible revolutions
depends on the rotary table type. On an RT1 or RT-AB-300-P, for example,
155 revolutions are possible.
It therefore makes sense to run an automatic RT homing prior to each
CNC run.
REWI additional correction for rotary

table operation
Basics about REWI additional correction
What is REWI additional
correction?
12-10
The deviation of the angle between two guide elements from the nominal
angle of 90 specified in arc seconds is referred to as a perpendicularity
error. At startup of the CMM by a Carl Zeiss service engineer, the three
perpendicularity errors are determined for the complete CMM and compensated for in calculation. However, since the perpendicularity errors are
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
not the same in the entire measuring range, there may locally be different
residual errors.
Now, CALYPSO allows you to determine for certain high-precision CMMs
with RT-AB-300-P rotary table the residual perpendicularity errors at the
rotary table location and to compensate them mathematically during the
measurement. Thus, the REWI additional correction makes it possible to
increase the accuracy of your four-axis coordinate measuring machine.
For more information about whether your CMM supports the REWI additional correction function, please refer to the operating instructions or
the data sheet for your CMM.
NOTICE
The REWI addition correction function is only used for measurements
with the RT-AB-300-P rotary table.
Details on REWI additional correction
You can define and activate the REWI additional correction function
yourself using the Perpendicularity_RT_Vxx CALYPSO measurement
plan. You can install this measurement plan from the CALYPSO installation DVD under "Tools""Measurement Plan Examples". Then the measurement plan is located in the user directory of CALYPSO under workarea
\inspections_examples\inspections_rt_squareness.
A CMM Check, a Rotary Table Check or two reference spheres at different
heights is/are needed for running the measurement plan.
For more information, please refer to the User instructions for the Perpendicularity_RT_Vxx measurement plan. The document is located in
the <program directory>\userinfo\manuals\de directory. You can also
open it by clicking the User Information button in the CNC start window.
Once the residual REWI error has been determined, it will be automatically
compensated for mathematically during measurements with the rotary
table.
The REWI additional correction becomes invalid as soon as the location
of the rotary table changes.
Defining the REWI additional correction

Location-dependent REWI additional correction must be defined in the
following cases:
Before using the rotary table for the first time.
After installing a mobile rotary table at a different position on the

CMM.
Otherwise, the error message 359 REWI additional correction
deactivated, data for current rotary table location not valid is displayed in the Results window.
Additionally, it is appropriate to redefine the REWI additional correction

in the following cases.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-11
Prior to every rotary table axis qualification.
In case of strong temperature fluctuations or varying workpiece

weight, prior to every workpiece measurement.
Defining residual REWI errors

Conditions:
You have a CMM Check, a Rotary Table Check or two suitable
measuring spheres.
1 Fasten the CMM Check or the Rotary Table Check or the two
spheres at certain distances on the rotary table.
2 Insert the master stylus.
3 Define the approximate position of the rotary table.
4 Open the Perpendicularity_RT_Vxx CALYPSO measurement plan.
5 Start the measurement plan and proceed according to the instructions.
For more information, please refer to the User instructions for the
Perpendicularity_RT_Vxx measurement plan. The document is located in the <program directory>\userinfo\manuals\de directory. You can
also open it by clicking the User Information button in the CNC
start window.
6 Redefine the rotary table axis after the definition of the residual REWI
errors.
The REWI additional correction is thus determined and will be used for all
measurements with rotary table.
Practical notes
For high-precision measuring jobs, it may be of advantage if the dimensions of the device used for defining the local residual REWI errors correspond to the workpiece to be measured. The device for defining the residual REWI errors should be located at the same position in the measurement volume and should roughly have the same dimensions as the
workpiece. When measuring on the workpiece, approximately the same
guideway sections are then used for defining the residual REWI errors,
thus leading to more exact measuring results.
If maximum accuracy is important, you should perform the definition of
the REWI additional correction shortly prior to the corresponding measuring job if possible. External influences on the residual REWI errors such
as the influence of temperature and workpiece weight can thus be eliminated to a large extent.
12-12
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Setting the rotary table axis for

measurements
Methods of rotary table axis setting
The rotary table axis can either be re-qualified automatically at each CNC
start or it can be loaded as existing rotary table axis. To do so, this rotary
table axis must have been determined with an own measurement plan
beforehand.
The optimum method of rotary table axis setting depends on the accuracy
requirements, the available space on the faceplate, the desired measuring
time and the workpiece type.
The workpiece permits direct qualification of the rotary table axis (e.g.
shafts with minor defects in shape).
In this case, select the Measure RT axis option in the Rotary Table window and proceed with the workpiece in the same way as
described for the measurement cylinder method (see Qualifying the
rotary table axis using the measurement cylinder method [ 1224]).

For the CNC run in this case, you can also import an existing measurement plan for qualification of the rotary table axis and thus insert
it in your measurement plan (see Importing a measurement plan
for qualifying the rotary table axis [ 1213]).
The workpiece does not permit direct qualification of the rotary table
axis, because it only contains features that are not suitable for setting
the rotary table axis (prismatic parts, flat turned parts, shafts with
major defects in shape).
In this case, select the Load existing RT axis option in the Rotary
Table window. A requirement here is that the RT axis has been qualified beforehand with a corresponding measurement plan (see
Qualifying the rotary table axis [ 1215]).
Importing a measurement plan for qualifying

the rotary table axis
If a workpiece permits direct qualification of the rotary table axis and you
want to use an existing measurement plan to qualify the axis, you can
import this measurement plan into the current measurement plan for the
workpiece concerned.
Note: The imported measurement plan must have the same base alignment as the current measurement plan.
1 Click Rotary Table in the list of prerequisites and click Import
Measurement Plan in the Rotary Table window.
2 Select the measurement plan that is suitable for the axis qualification.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-13
Groups with the features of the imported measurement plan are inserted in both the list of features as well as the list of characteristics.
Displaying the current status of the RT axis

In the RT travel commands window, you can have information on the
RT axis displayed. For this, select File Current status of RT axis if
the window only shows the RT travel commands.
RT travel commands
File...
Angular Spacing
360 /
4.00
0
x 90.0000
Show loading of RT
Rotate to
0.000000
Degree
Rotate around
0.000000
Degree
Read
-9.000000
Lower RT
Current status of RT axis

Base Alignment rotating.
Mode: Measure Part
RT axis date
Wobble angle
November 20, 2009 / 9:54:17
0.010480
Position
Eccentricity
Orientation
393.0873
nx 0.0000443620
-1103.89
ny
0.00000
-0.000177442
nz 0.9999999832
RT pos absolute
-9.000000
1171.790259
Angle to main axis
0.010480
Presetting for new Features

Mode: Measure Part
Base Alignment not rotating.
Mode: Measure RT axis
12-14
Raise RT / Lower RT: The toggle button is only displayed when using
the lowerable rotary table. Lifts or lowers the rotary table.
Show loading of RT: Shows in a separate window the tilting moment of the workpiece on the rotary table (Visualizing the tilting
moment of the RT-AB rotary table [ 1238]).
Mode: Current mode: Measure Part or Measure RT axis.
RT axis date: Date and time of the last axis setting as well as position
and orientation of the rotary table axis in the machine coordinate system.
RT pos absolute: Current counter status of the rotary table. It is set

to zero with RT home position, not with Set RT position to
zero.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Wobble angle and Eccentricity specify the position of the current

base alignment in relation to the rotary table axis.
The Angle to main axis is the tilt of the base alignment in relation
to the machine coordinate system.
Presetting for new Features: The mode used to record new

features is displayed here.
Qualifying the rotary table axis

Rotary table axis and machine system
The rotary table axis defines the exact position of the rotary table in relation to the device zero point as well as the tilt in relation to the CMM
axes, that is, the position in the machine coordinate system.
Workpiece
coordinate system
Rotary table axis

Device coordinate
system
When the rotary table rotates, all features, characteristics and coordinate
systems are turned around the RT axis. Errors in qualifying the RT axis thus
have an immediate effect on the precision of the measurement.
Practical notes on qualifying the rotary table axis

When qualifying the rotary table axis, note the following practical information:
For qualification of the rotary table axis, always use a stylus that is as
rigid as possible (e.g. the master stylus).
Make sure that the stylus and normal and/or workpiece are as clean
as possible for the axis qualification.
If the workpiece to be measured can only be measured with a single

stylus system, also use this for qualifying the RT axis. This enables you
to avoid inaccuracies caused by qualification errors or stylus system
changes.
How often does the RT axis have to be qualified?

The rotary table axis must be qualified on the basis of the following factors:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-15
As a general principle, after every homing of the CMM.

The RT axis defines the position of the rotary table in relation to the
device zero point. However, this is reset during homing and cannot
be reproduced exactly.
Regularly, depending on accuracy requirements and ambient temperature:

In general, for each stylus qualification, the rotary table axis should
also be re-qualified.
In the case of strong temperature fluctuations, it frequently makes
sense to re-qualify the rotary table axis prior to every workpiece measurement.
Comparison of qualification methods

For qualifying the rotary table axis, there are four methods available, each
with advantages and disadvantages:
Method
Advantages
Disadvantages
1-sphere method
No additional normals are re- All measurements are carried out in

quired.
the same Z height of the CMM. Residual perpendicularity errors of the
Measurement can be run
CMM can lead to measurement errors
with the master stylus.
in the case of measurements at other
Z heights.
Depending on the position of the rotary table in the measuring range, it
might occur that the complete rotation range is not covered.
2-sphere method
The RT axis is qualified over

the entire height of the
workpiece. This compensates for residual perpendicularity errors of the CMM
and they have less of an effect on the measuring uncertainty.
with master styli.
12-16
61212-2011002
Relatively long qualification time.

Either special attachment required on
which both spheres are fastened, or
laborious manual setting of the base
alignment for each run.
CALYPSO
Method
Advantages
Disadvantages
Measurement cylinder meth- The RT axis is qualified over Measurement cylinder required.
od
the entire height of the cyl- Master stylus can not be used.
inder. This compensates for
residual perpendicularity errors of the CMM and they
have less of an effect on the
measuring uncertainty.
Short measuring time.
Simple attachment; the cylinder is fastened to the rotary
table in a way that it can be
reproduced at any time.
Self-centering method
Very fast method.

with master styli.
All measurements are carried out in

the same Z height of the CMM. Residual perpendicularity errors of the
CMM can lead to serious measurement errors in the case of measurements at other Z heights.
Accordingly, these methods are suitable for different applications:

Method
Use
1-sphere method
Standard method for relatively low accuracy requirements.

Ideal for flat workpieces with large diameters (e.g. ring gears). The
highest accuracy is achieved if the workpiece is located at approximately the same measurement height as the sphere was for determination of the axis.
2-sphere method
For tall workpieces.
Measurement cylinder meth- For tall workpieces.

od
This method can also be used for the measurement of shafts with
low deviations in shape. Instead of using a measurement cylinder, the
rotary table axis is set directly on the workpiece prior to each run.
Self-centering method
Use in proximity to production.

The feature for qualifying the rotary table axis can be secured directly
onto the workpiece palette. This makes it possible to re-qualify the
rotary table axis prior to every workpiece measurement without wasting a great deal of time.
The methods are described here:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-17
Qualifying the rotary table axis using the 1-sphere meth-
od [ 1218]
Qualifying the rotary table axis using the 2-sphere method

[ 1221]
Qualifying the rotary table axis using the measurement cylinder
method [ 1224]
Qualifying the rotary table axis using the self-centering method
[ 1227]
Qualifying the rotary table axis using the 1sphere method

In the 1-sphere method, the rotary table axis is qualified using a sphere
(e.g. reference sphere) with a precise shape. The sphere is measured in a
number of rotary table positions (usually six).
CMM
Rotary table axis
CMM
CMM
1 Secure the reference sphere onto the rotary table top, as far to the
outside as possible.
2 Use the master stylus or another qualified stylus.
3 Open a new measurement plan.
Note: An RT axis measurement plan is supplied with CALYPSO that

corresponds to the procedure described below.
4 Select Resources RT Functions Prepare RT or click the
Rotary Table icon in the list of prerequisites.
The Rotary Table window appears on the screen.
12-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5 Tick the RT activated for this Meas. Plan check box.

6 Click RT home position to move the rotary table to its home position.
7 Select Measure RT axis.
This specifies that the RT axis is qualified with this measurement plan.
You receive the following message:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-19
9 Click OK to confirm the message.

10Measure the reference sphere with 6 points.
Make sure that the BA not rotating with RT menu item is enabled
in the definition template of the spheres under Nominal Definition.
11Use this sphere to form a base alignment.
12Open the definition template for the sphere and use Nominal Definition Pattern Rotational Pattern to place a loop over
the sphere.
13Enter 0/0/0 for the Center.
The coordinates of the sphere are required here. As this sphere sets
the base alignment, the coordinates are 0/0/0.
14Under Angular Pitch, enter the desired value (e.g. 60) and under
Real number the matching number of sphere measurements (e.g.
6).
15Select Rotate rotary table as well and confirm with OK.
(This means the base alignment can no longer be run.)
16In the toolbox or via Measure, select a circle and a plane.
17Under Nominal Definition, select Recall at the two features.
18For the circle and the plane, select all spheres in the loop.
19Link the circle and the plane into a perpendicular.
20Select Resources RT Functions Prepare RT or click Rotary
Table in the list of prerequisites.
21Click the square Feature for RT axis button and select the perpendicular in the list.
22Click OK to confirm your input.
A message is displayed.
23Click YES to confirm.
24Define the clearance planes for the sphere.
25Start the CNC run.
You can either select all features and set the current selection as measurement scope, or you create features by, for example, specifying tolerances for the angles of the perpendicular.
After the CNC run, the RT axis is qualified and saved on the computer
(not in the measurement plan). This RT axis can now be used for workpiece measurements.
12-20
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Qualifying the rotary table axis using the 2sphere method

In the 2-sphere method, the rotary table axis is qualified using two spheres
(e.g. reference spheres) of exact shape at different measurement heights.
Both spheres are measured in a number of rotary table positions (usually
6).
Mechanical
rotation axis
CMM
Rotary table axis

qualified with Z'
CMM
CMM
CMM
1 Secure the reference spheres onto the rotary table top at different
heights, as far to the outside as possible.
The different heights should approximately represent the size of the
workpiece to be measured.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-21

8 Click OK to close the screen.
12-22
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
10Measure the two spheres manually with 6 points each.
Note: Make sure that the BA not rotating with RT menu item is
enabled in the definition template of the spheres under Nominal
Definition.
11Use the spheres to form a base alignment.
In doing so, place the zero point in the upper sphere; use the lower
sphere for the planar rotation.
12Open the definition template for the upper sphere and use Nominal
Definition Pattern Rotational Pattern to place a loop
over the sphere.
13Enter 0/0/0 at Center.
The coordinates of the sphere are required here. As this sphere sets
the base alignment, the coordinates are 0/0/0.
6).
16Repeat step 12 for the lower sphere. However, 0/0/0 must not be set
under Center, rather the actual coordinates of the spheres in the base
alignment.
17In the toolbox or via Measure, select a cone.
18Under Nominal Definition, select Recall.
19Select all spheres in the loops.
21Click the square Feature for RT axis button and select the cone in
the list.
24Define the clearance planes for the upper sphere.
You can either select all the features and set the current selection as
the measurement scope, or you create features by, for example, specifying tolerances for the angles of the cone.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-23
Qualifying the rotary table axis using the

measurement cylinder method
In the measurement cylinder method, the rotary table axis is qualified
using a measurement cylinder with an exact shape in two rotary table
positions.
Mechanical
rotation axis
xwz
180
Computed rotary
table axis at
Z' = Z+xwz
CMM
xwz
CMM
CMM
CMM
1 Secure the measurement cylinder onto the rotary table top using, for
example, 3-jaw clamps).
2 Insert a qualified stylus that you can use to probe the cylinder as far
towards the top and bottom as possible.
12-24
61212-2011002
CALYPSO

61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-25
10Measure the cylinder manually in 2 sections that are as far apart as
possible.
Note: In doing so, make sure that the BA not rotating with RT
entry is selected in the definition template of the cylinder under Nominal Definition.
11Open the definition template for the cylinder and use Nominal Definition Pattern Rotational Pattern to place a loop over
the cylinder.
13Under Angular Pitch, enter 180 and under Real number 2.
15Probe a point on the measurement cylinder from above.
16Using the cylinder and the point, set the base alignment.
Note: Make sure that you only use the first cylinder in the loop (Cylinder1(1)) for the base alignment.
17Link the two cylinders into a symmetry cylinder.
19Click the square Feature for RT axis button and select the symmetry cylinder in the list.
20Tick the Rotationally symmetrical part near RT center and
Retract to current side check boxes.
23Define the clearance planes for the cylinder.
You can either select all the features and set the current selection as
the measurement scope, or you create features by, for example, specifying tolerances for the angles of the symmetry cylinder.
Note: If your CMM is equipped with a scanning probe, you should record
the cylinder using scanning paths instead of discrete-point measurement
(see Scanning). This leads to more stable results and thus more exact
rotary table measurements.
12-26
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Qualifying the rotary table axis using the selfcentering method

In the case of the self-centering method, the rotary table axis is qualified by means of self-centering probing of an entity (hole, cone, triple
cone, etc.) in a number of rotary table positions (usually 6).
1 Secure the entity to be measured onto the rotary table top as far to
the outside as possible.

7 Select Measure RT axis. This specifies that the RT axis is qualified
with this measurement plan.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-27

10Select Resources Stylus system Probe Self Centering.
11Set the values shown above and confirm with OK.
12Probe the entity from -Z.
Note: Make sure that the BA not rotating with RT menu item is
enabled in the definition template of the point under Nominal Definition.
13Use this point to form a base alignment.
14Open the definition template of the point and use Nominal Definition Pattern Rotational Pattern to place a loop over the
point.
The coordinates of the point are required here. As this point sets the
base alignment, the coordinates are 0/0/0.
6).
18In the toolbox or via Measure, select a circle and a plane.
19Under Nominal Definition, select Recall at the two features.
20For the circle and the plane, select all points in the loop.
21Link the circle and the plane into a perpendicular.
12-28
23Click the square Feature for RT axis button and select the perpendicular in the list.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO

26Define the clearance planes.
You can either select all features and set the current selection as measurement scope, or you create features by, for example, specifying tolerances for the angles of the perpendicular.
Additional prerequisites for the rotary

table
Aligning the workpiece mechanically
Prior to the measurement, it frequently makes sense to align the workpiece mechanically with the axes of the CMM using the rotary table. You
have several options which may also be combined:
Alignment by eye
Alignment via normals
Alignment via base alignment axis
All prealignments are performed in the Rotary Table window.
Aligning a workpiece by eye

1 Secure the workpiece onto the rotary table and open a new measurement plan.
Rotary Table icon in the measurement plan area on the Measurement Plan tab.
3 Use the joysticks to turn the rotary table to the desired position.
4 Under By Eye / Manually, enter the desired angle value for this RT
position and click the Set to icon.
Thus, the current angle position is set to the desired value.
Aligning the workpiece mechanically with a feature

1 Secure the workpiece onto the rotary table and open a new measurement plan.
2 Probe a feature on the workpiece that should be aligned at a right
angle to the CMM axes (for example, plane, cylinder or 2D line).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-29

4 Click the button under Normal from Feature and select the desired feature for the RT alignment from the list.
5 Select Manual to activate manual probing for this feature during the
CNC run.
6 Click the Rotate Now icon.
CALYPSO now indicates how many degrees the rotary table has to be
rotated.
7 Move the probe out of the collision area and confirm with OK.
The rotary table is positioned in such a way that the probed feature
lies parallel to a CMM axis.
For the mechanical alignment, you can also use a complete base alignment. This makes sense when you want to align the workpiece parallel
with the CMM axes after manual setting of the base alignment.
Aligning the workpiece mechanically using the base

alignment
1 Open the measurement plan of the desired workpiece.
2 Qualify the base alignment manually.
4 Click Base Alignment Axis.
CALYPSO now indicates how many degrees the rotary table has to be
rotated.
5 Move the probe out of the collision area and confirm with OK.
The rotary table is positioned in such a way that the base alignment
lies parallel to the CMM axes.
6 Click the Rotate Now icon.
The current position of the rotary table is set to zero. All other RT
positions in this measurement plan now refer to this home position.

In CALYPSO, you can define how the rotary table is to behave at the start
of a CNC run.
1 Select Resources RT Functions Prepare RT or click Rotary
12-30
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 In order to carry out homing with the rotary table at the start of each
CNC run, tick the RT home position check box.
Note: The RT does not move to the home position immediately, only
when the CNC starts.
3 To mechanically align the workpiece at the beginning of a CNC run,
tick the check box for the desired type under Align part mechanically.
By Eye
Normal from Feature
Base Alignment Axis
In this case, after setting the base alignment, the rotary table is positioned in the CNC run in such a way that the axes of the base alignment run parallel to the CMM axes.
You can set the RT position again after RT prealignment.
Definition of the navigation paths

In order to be able to turn the rotary table, CALYPSO must move the stylus
out of the collision area. You can define how this is to take place in the
Rotary Table window (via Resources RT Functions Prepare
RT).
The clearance planes in CALYPSO are always rectangular. In order to position the stylus outside the clearance planes for rotary table rotations, it
must be retracted to the length of the diagonals.
However, this is not required in the case of shafts or other rotationally
symmetrical parts secured in the center of the rotary table.
In this case, tick the Rotationally symmetrical part near RT center check box in the Rotary Table window
The stylus is now no longer retracted to the diagonals of the clearance
planes, it is now retracted only to the corresponding clearance plane.
Furthermore, by activating the corresponding check boxes, you can specify whether the stylus is to be retracted to the current side or upwards
(+Z) when the rotary table rotates.
Loading mode for lowerable rotary table (LRT)

The lowerable rotary table (LRT - Lowerable round table) provides two
modes:
Loading mode
The LRT has been lowered and can be loaded. No measurement is
possible in this mode.
Measuring mode
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-31
The LRT is lifted. Measuring values can only be applied in the measuring mode.
The rotary table will automatically switch to the measuring mode as soon
as the CMM is switched on or a connection is re-established.
NOTICE
Do not clamp workpieces on the faceplate and the measuring table.
Do not attach the reference standard to the rotary table. The rotary table
is more flexible than the measuring table, thus causing calibration errors.
Lowering and lifting

CALYPSO provides the following options for lowering the LRT for workpiece clamping:
Manual lowering and lifting of the LRT
Lifting and lowering during the CNC run
Manual lowering and

lifting of the LRT
The RT travel commands dialog box allows you to lift or lower the LRT
(you will find more information in the Online Help under RT travel commands).
Lifting and lowering during the CNC run
At CNC start, the LRT is always lifted even if the RT activated for this
meas. plan and Passive RT check boxes are not ticked in the Rotary
Table window.
In the Rotary Table window, you can define that the rotary table is
lowered at the end and when canceling the CNC run. In the presettings
of CALYPSO, the rotary table is not lowered after the CNC run. By saving
the measurement plan, the settings made on the Rotary Table page
will also be saved.
Determining the mass moment of inertia

Before you start measuring a workpiece on the faceplate manually, you
must determine the mass moment of inertia (for more information, please
refer to Mass moment of inertia (MMI) of rotary tables [ 123]). If you
do not determine the mass moment of inertia, the rotary table will be
controlled using default parameters that are not suitable for measurements and may cause measurement errors.
CALYPSO automatically switches to the default parameters after a CNC
run. If you want to carry out a manual measurement after a CNC run, you
must therefore redetermine the mass moment of inertia.
As of FW29, the control automatically recognizes when the rotary table
is unloaded and switches back to the default parameters.
12-32
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining the rotary table position at the end of

the CNC run
It is frequently required that the rotary table is turned to a certain position
at the end of a CNC run (e.g. in the case of manual or automatic loading
systems).
In this case, define the corresponding RT position in the navigation paths.
Select Plan Navigation CNC End Park Position.
Open the corresponding path or create a new path and insert the desired
rotary table position into the strategy list in the CNC End Park Position window.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-33
Using the rotary table for measurements

Overview of the use of the rotary table
for measurements
In this section, you will find information related to measurements with
the rotary table:
Using the rotary table passively [ 1234]
Positioning the rotary table manually [ 1235]
Visualizing the tilting moment of the RT-AB rotary table [ 1238]
Using the loading mode for the RT-AB rotary table [ 1239]
RT clearance planes [ 1240]
Rotary table parameters in the feature [ 1241]
Measuring a feature in a number of rotary table positions

[ 1243]
Rotational pattern of a feature with rotary table cou-
pling [ 1244]
Using the rotary table passively

If you use the rotary table only to place things upon, without using the
rotary table function, measuring errors could occur if the rotary table
drifts.
Position after
drifting
Original
position
To correct these measuring errors automatically, activate the Passive

RT mode before the measurements.
12-34
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Rotary Table
RT activated for this meas. plan
Rotate Now
Passive RT
Activation for CNC run

RT home position
0.00
0.00
RT axis definition for this Measurement Plan

Load existing RT axis
Measure RT axis
Align part mechanically to

Set To
By Eye / Manually
Help Position
Normal from Feature
Manual
RT clearance paths
Rotationally symmetrical part near RT center
Retract to current side
0.00
Base Alignment Axis
Auto
Rotate to CMM side
+X
*
Move clear during RT rotation
Auto
Rotate to CMM side
Retract to top
Mass Moment of Inertia (MMI)
Redefine at every CNC start
0.00
and set RT position to

OK
Define MMI now

Lower RT at end of CNC
Reset
Measuring errors are avoided because the base alignment rotates along
with the rotary table. CALYPSO does not use the nominal position of the
rotary table for this, but the very precisely measured rotational angle of
the rotary table.
Measuring features on a passive rotary table

Prerequisites
When measuring a workpiece on a passive rotary table, the following

prerequisites must be met:
The RT axis of the rotary table has been qualified.
The drift correction has been switched on.
NOTICE
You should carry out a rotary table homing run before you use the rotary
table as a passive RT.
Positioning the rotary table manually

You can position the rotary table manually with CALYPSO or using the
joysticks.
In CALYPSO, use the RT travel commands window.
Positioning with CALYPSO

1 Select Resources RT Functions RT travel commands or
click the RT travel commands icon in the toolbar.
The RT travel commands dialog box appears on the screen.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-35
RT travel commands
File...
Rotate to
0.000000
Rotate around
0.000000
Read
-9.000000
Lower RT
2 To move to a certain absolute position: In the Rotate to field, enter

the desired angle position and click Rotate to.
3 To execute a relative angle increment: In the Rotate around field,
enter the desired angle increment and click Rotate around.
4 To manually lower the rotary table for loading or to lift it for measuring,
click Lower RT or Raise RT.
NOTICE
The Raise RT or Lower RT button is a toggle button that is only displayed when a lowerable rotary table is used.
Manual positioning
You can also use the joystick of the control console to move the rotary
table.
1 To do so, hold down the button in the left joystick and move it to the
left or right.
2 To display the position you have reached, click Read.
Entering patterns
Via File Current status of RT axis, you can also enter increments.
12-36
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
RT travel commands
File...
Angular Spacing
360 /
4.00
0
x 90.0000
Show loading of RT
Rotate to
0.000000
Degree
Rotate around
0.000000
Degree
Read
-9.000000
Lower RT
Current status of RT axis

Mode: Measure Part
RT axis date
Wobble angle
November 20, 2009 / 9:54:17
0.010480
Position
Eccentricity
Orientation
393.0873
nx 0.0000443620
-1103.89
ny
0.00000
-0.000177442
nz 0.9999999832
RT pos absolute
-9.000000
1171.790259
Angle to main axis
0.010480
Presetting for new Features

Mode: Measure Part
Base Alignment not rotating.
Mode: Measure RT axis
1 Enter the pattern number in the input field.

CALYPSO uses it to calculate the required incremental angle and displays the angle in the field below.
2 Use the + and - buttons to set which feature the pattern is to be positioned on.
The required angle position is displayed in the Rotate to field.
3 Position the rotary table by clicking Rotate to according to the displayed angle position.
Example
As an example, there is a cog with 25 teeth, and its 6th tooth is to be

measured.
360/25 = 14.4
6x14.4= 86.4
Enter 25 as the pattern number, click six times + and then Rotate
to. The rotary table positions itself to 86.4 and thus to the sixth tooth.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-37
Visualizing the tilting moment of the RTAB rotary table

The RT-AB rotary table has a maximum permissible tilting moment of 40
Nm. The center of gravity of a loading of e.g. 551.16 lb must therefore
be centered on the rotary table with a precision of 0.63 in.
The loading display of CALYPSO visualizes the tilting moment caused by
the workpiece to allow optimal positioning of the workpiece.
NOTICE
The tilting moment shown by the loading display might by inaccurate and
is only an approximate value. Only use the loading display with a loading
weight of at least 20 kg. A lower loading weight causes inaccuracies.
Initializing the loading
display
Before using the rotary table for the first time, the loading display needs
to be initialized. Initialization must be performed at startup by a service
engineer.
The loading display may only be used with the faceplate used during initialization. It is not permitted to use a faceplate with a different diameter
or weight.
Opening the loading display
The loading display can be opened via the RT travel commands window (Show loading of RT button) or via the stop light window
(More Show RT loading).
The loading display is opened in the RT-AB workpiece positioning
aid window.
Display of the current

loading
The green point indicates the tilting moment caused by the workpiece.
The current Tilt moment is displayed at the bottom edge of the display
area. If the green point is within the red circle, the tilting moment is within
the permissible range.
If the green point is within the green circle, the tilting moment is in the
optimal range.
The green arrow indicates the direction in which to move the workpiece
in order to set the tilting moment to the optimal range.
To show or hide further detailed information, click the Show / Hide
data button.
NOTICE
The loading display will only be updated if you tick Live view below the
display area. Otherwise, the display will not change, even if you shift the
loading on the rotary table.
Display options
12-38
The loading display shows the rotary table from above. The displayed
directions correspond to the machine coordinate system.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Using the loading mode for the RT-AB

rotary table
The air bearing RT-AB-300-P rotary table offers a special loading mode.
For loading, the rotary table is disconnected from the air supply. This prevents the bearing surface from damaging impacts during loading, thus
allowing safe loading.
NOTICE
The loading must must always be used during loading to prevent damage
to the rotary table bearing.
Using the loading mode

1 Call the loading display of the RT-AB.
2 Click the Load button in the RT-AB workpiece positioning

aid window.
The loading mode is thus activated.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-39
3 Load the rotary table.

4 Click the Measure button in the RT-AB workpiece positioning
aid window.
The air bearing of the rotary table is reconnected to the air supply.
NOTICE
In CALYPSO version 5.2.12, the loading function can not yet be automated (e.g. via PCM or CMM-OS). This function will be realized in future
versions.
RT clearance planes
A few particularities are involved for the clearance planes when a rotary
table is used.
As soon as the rotary table is active, additional clearance planes and
groups are available for the features. The designations of these clearance
planes are composed of RTCP or RTG and an axial direction.
If you use the rotary table to probe rotationally symmetrical objects always
from the same direction (direction of the CMM), it is recommended to
use these RT clearance planes (RTCP...) or RT clearance groups (RTG...).
12-40
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
If you use the usual clearance plane (CP), bear in mind that this clearance
plane is linked to the base alignment. In other words, it rotates about the
rotary table axis together with the workpiece (see illustration).
The RT clearance planes or groups do not rotate with the base alignment
(and thus the workpiece). The position of the RT clearance planes is referred to the unrotated base alignment at an RT position of 0 degrees
(see illustration).
RT position 0 degree
RT position 45 degree
Y
Probing direction
Probing direction
SE + X
SE + X RTSE + X
RTSE + X
Rotary table parameters in the feature

The following additional parameters are important for measurement with
the rotary table:
RT position
One rotary table position is assigned to each feature.
The rotary table can thus move to the required position for each
measurement, irrespective of the sequence of features in the measurement plan.
Base Alignment rotating / not rotating

The values received in the machine coordinate system are converted
to the base alignment of the workpiece after correction. When measurements are made on the workpiece, the base alignment is virtually
rotated along as well, of course.
However, if you want to determine the deviations of the RT axis with
a measurement, the base alignment must remain fixed. This is the
only way to determine deviations of the reference feature from the
expected position of an ideal axis.
You can change these RT parameters in the definition template of each

individual feature and in the Measurement Plan Editor Features.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-41
Changing RT parameters in the definition template of

a feature
RT position
1 To enter the RT position, click Strategy and open the Clearance

Data.
The RT position input field is shown in the Clearance Data window.
2 To set Base Alignment rotating / not rotating, select the desired entry
under Nominal Definition.
BA not rotating with RTThe base alignment does not rotate.
This setting is suitable for defining the RT axis.
Options: The base alignment rotates. This setting is suitable for
measuring the workpiece.
Changing RT parameters in the Measurement Plan Editor Features

You can also change the RT parameters in the Measurement Plan
Editor Features.
1 Choose the RT position or Base Alignment rotating with
RT entry in the selection list.
12-42
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 Highlight the desired feature and enter any angle under set to or
select an incremental angle. Select On or Off for base alignment rotating.
Measuring a feature in a number of

rotary table positions
Navigation paths when measuring in a number
of rotary table positions
If several rotary table positions are needed for measuring a feature (e.g.
when probing a plane from below (- Z)), you have to decide whether or
not the stylus is to be moved to a clearance position during rotation of
the rotary table.
Case 1: No clearance paths required

The rotary table can be rotated without the stylus having to be moved
to the clearance plane (see Example: Probing a bevel wheel from
below (1) [ 1243]).
Case 2: Clearance paths required

For certain or all rotary table rotations, the stylus must be moved to
the clearance plane (see Example: Probing a bevel wheel from below (2) [ 1244]).
Example: Probing a bevel wheel from below (1)

Case 1: No clearance paths required
The rotary table can be rotated without the stylus having to be moved to
the clearance plane.
1 Take a plane from the toolbox.
2 Click Strategy.
3 Click RT position.
4 Open the Rotary Position strategy and enter the desired angle.
5 Click Execute Now.
The rotary table moves to the specified position.
7 Probe the first point on the plane.
8 Click again RT position or RT step.
Another Rotary Position or Rotary Step strategy is inserted.
9 Open this rotary step.
10Enter the desired angle increment and click Execute Now.
11After the rotary table has reached the position, confirm with OK.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-43
12Repeat this procedure until all desired points have been probed.
Note: Only the first RT position is displayed in the clearance data as well
as in the Measurement Plan Editor Features.
Example: Probing a bevel wheel from below (2)

Case 2: Clearance paths required
For certain or all rotary table rotations, the stylus must be moved to the
clearance plane.
1 Take a plane from the toolbox.
2 Click Strategy.
3 If the stylus is not to be moved to the clearance plane, click RT position or RT step (see Case 1).
- or If the stylus has to be moved to the clearance plane, double-click
Clearance Data.
4 Select the clearance group (Use RTCP) and the desired RT position
and confirm with OK.
Rotational pattern of a feature with

rotary table coupling
With the rotational pattern, several similar workpieces or parts are arranged in a rotationally symmetrical configuration. The workpieces and
features possess the same orientation with respect to the center of rotation (see illustration).
Center of symmetry
When measuring workpieces with rotational pattern using the rotary table, it is not the stylus that moves to the feature but the workpiece is
12-44
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
rotated in such a way that each pattern features can be measured from
the same fixed probing direction.
Rotate rotary table as
well
In order to use the rotary table for the rotational pattern, select the Rotate rotary table as well option in the Rotary pattern dialog box.
Clearance planes
An RT clearance plane that defines the direction for probing the workpiece is to be selected as the clearance plane.
Angle on workpiece and

RT position
A particularity arises from the different reference systems for angles on

the workpiece and the angle specification for the RT position.
For measurement, the workpiece is rotated in the direction required for
the fixed probing direction. The rotary table must therefore rotate in the
direction counter to the pattern angle.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
12-45
90
90
Probing direction
180
180
270
270
90
180
90
270
180
Probing direction
0
0
270
In the example, the next feature to be measured in workpiece coordinates

is located in the 90 position. The rotary table must rotate by -90 so that
this feature can be measured without moving the bridge-type CMM (see
illustration).
12-46
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13
Chapter
.................................................................................................................

Stylus system change ............................................................................. 132
Special aspects with stylus system changers ........................................... 136
Setting up the stylus system changer .................................................... 1310
Qualifying the stylus changer rack in the CNC run ................................ 1341
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-1
Stylus system change

Stylus system change in CALYPSO
The automatic stylus system changer allows you to change stylus systems
without any manual intervention. Before you execute automatic changing
of stylus systems with CALYPSO, you need to define the exact configuration and location of the stylus system changer and the rack assignment.
NOTICE
CALYPSO supports multi-stage stylus systems and stylus system changer
racks. You can find more details under Multi-stage stylus system
change [ 133].
CALYPSO saves the stylus system used to measure a feature along with
the feature. If it is necessary to change stylus systems between features,
CALYPSO can do this automatically. The following prerequisites, however, must be satisfied:
Prerequisites
The stylus system changer must be configured in CALYPSO.
The appropriate stylus system must be in the correct holder in the

stylus system changer according to the rack assignment.
The rack assignment can be saved together with the measurement plan.
During a CNC start, CALYPSO checks whether the current assignment
complies with the assignment in the measurement plan and prompts you,
if necessary, to create the correct assignment.
Setting of the stylus system changer

Procedure
To configure the stylus system changer, the following steps are necessary:
Configure the automatic stylus system change

Define the assignment of you stylus system changers in the Stylus
system change window in CALYPSO.
ST, ST 3, MT, MT old and ProMax only: Define the length of the master
stylus
For RDS only: Determine the RDS geometry (only if no reversal measurement has been carried out)
Determine the position of each holder (for the FCR25, VAST XXT,
MCR20 and SCR200: qualify the rack)
This step must be repeated if the position of the changer was
changed.
13-2
Set the approach parameters of the holders
Save the rack assignment (optional)
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Stylus system changer for certain stylus

systems
Stylus system changer for TP20 or TP200
Automatic stylus system
change
The TP20 from Renishaw is designed for automatic stylus system changes
with the MCR20 stylus system changer modules, and the same is true of
the TP200 with the SCR200 module (see Renishaw MCR20 stylus system changer [ 136] and SCR200 stylus system changer [ 137]).
On a VISTA, the TP200 can be secured in the ram with a PH6. On an
Eclipse, the TP200 can be secured in the ram with a PH10.
Manual stylus system

change
Bear in mind that you can also change styli manually on the TP20 and the
TP200 (see the user data on the TP20 / TP200 and RDS).
Risk of damage to the RDS plate!
When you change stylus systems manually without the measuring system,
the retaining solenoid is deenergized immediately. In order to avoid damage, you must be holding the stylus system in your hand at this time.
If there is no measuring system in the TP20 and you are preparing to
change the stylus system on the RDS plate manually, remember that the
retaining solenoid for the RDS plate will be deenergized immediately, because the switch contact is open. There is a consequent risk of the RDS
plate dropping out and suffering damage.
Further stylus system changers

The Renishaw SP600 is intended for automatic stylus system change in
connection with the SCP600 stylus system change module.
The ACR3 stylus system changer is intended for the PH10 stylus system
with autojoint interface.
Multi-stage stylus system change

Multi-stage stylus system
In the case of a two-stage and multi-stage stylus system change, the

change can be performed at two and more places of the configuration.
To do so, the stylus system is equipped with one or several additional
adapter plates located between the probe and the stylus system. Different
stylus systems and styli can be attached to this adapter plate.
Changer with different

holder types
Additional racks are attached to the changer holder to render the storage
of various stylus systems and styli more comfortable. Thus the stylus system changer is equipped with different holders. In the case of a two-stage
stylus system change, the stylus system changer is equipped with holders
for complete measuring systems and probes without stylus system and
racks with holders for the stylus systems.
Supported configurations
CALYPSO supports the two-stage stylus system change for the following
configurations at bridge CMMs:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-3
RDS with FCR25 rack for the SP25
RDS with XXT rack for the XXT
RDS with SP600
RDS with SCR200 rack for the TP200
RDS with MCR20 rack for the TP20
The probe which is separated into the measuring system and the stylus
system is attached to the rotating and swiveling plate of the RDS. Depending on the need, different stylus systems can be attached to the receptacle of the adapter plate. These stylus systems are positioned in special racks. The FCR25, XXT and SCR600 racks can be bolted onto the
changer holder for the RDS stylus system changer.
Names of the components
In CALYPSO, unique names are assigned to all stylus systems and styli.
The name of the stylus and stylus system change defines the type of
change to be performed. To identify the individual parts of a two-stage
stylus system, the bearing part of such a stylus system including the
probe is also assigned a unique name.
Own changer racks

For each TP200/TP20 or XXT, you must create an own changer rack in
CALYPSO and qualify it with the RDS plate which is to be used to change
the module or the XXT plate on this changer.
Setting the change behavior for multisensor systems

For CMMs with several sensors (O-Inspect, F25), you can set the general
change behavior in the measurement plan to avoid unnecessary stylus
system changes and activate desired stylus system changes. Without this
setting, the change only depends on whether a holder is available for the
corresponding stylus system in the changer rack.
Setting the change behavior

Conditions:
CALYPSO is connected to a multi-sensor system.
The Optimized travel performance before stylus system
change compatibility setting is activated.
1 Select Resources Stylus system Probe Change Behavior.
The Probe Change Behavior window displays all stylus systems
used in the measurement plan. Firmly mounted stylus systems (optics)
are not displayed for selection in this screen.
13-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Probe Change Behavior

Set To
Always store
Store if there is a place available
Stylus system
Value
Piccolo
MasterStylus
Always store
Hook
Do not store
Star
Goliath
Always store
Do not store
OK
Cancel
Help
2 Make the settings you require:

When changing to a fixed system, the following settings are possible
for the stylus system:
Store if there is a place available (standard behavior)
Always store
Do not store
From now on, the CALYPSO will behave according to the setting.
Note: If you select Always store and no holder is available, then the
normal manual stylus system change will take place.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-5
Special aspects with stylus system changers

Overview: Special aspects with stylus
system changers
The special aspects with certain stylus system changers will be explained
in the following sections:
Renishaw MCR20 stylus system changer [ 136]
SCR200 stylus system changer [ 137]
ACR3 stylus system changer [ 138]
Stylus system changer for RDS [ 139]
Renishaw MCR20 stylus system changer

The MCR20 stylus system changer rack consists of a stand and a horizontal beam with six holders. It can be approached from the four approach directions (+X, -X, +Y, -Y).
Always comply with the instructions in the user guide supplied with the
MCR20!
In the case of a two-stage stylus system change with RDS and MCR20,
the MCR20 rack must be installed in such a way that the RDS does not
need to be swiveled or you set the corresponding RDS angle position on
the MCR20 rack. After picking up the TP20 without circuit module, the
RDS position must correspond to the pickup position in the MCR20.
NOTICE
The Renishaw user guide states that the MCR20 has to be aligned with
a machine coordinate axis. Deviation of up to 0.25 mm from the machine
axis over the width of the magazine (200 mm) is tolerated.
If the TP20 has been activated in the probe configuration, CALYPSO offers
the MCR20 rack type when creating the stylus system changer rack.
When this type is selected, 6 racks will be created.
Special features
13-6
On account of the special design in the case of a one-stage stylus system

change with the MCR20, you must bear the following in mind:
After the Store Stylus operation, the probe moves only to the
transfer point, because without a measuring module movement is restricted to the zone of magnetic force movement without a measuring module outside the MCR20s zone of magnetic force causes the
controller to issue collision messages.
No machine operations are triggered by a manual stylus system

change with the MCR20.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Strong solenoids may affect the TP20 probe. If probing fails, switch off the
solenoids if necessary or consult the operating instructions supplied with
the TP20/Renishaw.
Special aspects with

two-stage stylus system
changes
Whenever possible, always use the manual or automatic stylus system

change function to change stylus systems with the TP20 and MCR20,
because this is the only way that CALYPSO can monitor the status of
the probe (stylus system in probe or stylus system not in probe).
On account of the special design in the case of a two-stage stylus system

change with the RDS and the MCR20, you must bear the following in
mind:
The probe moves from the end point of the RDS stylus change to the
zone of magnetic force of the MCR20 rack with open contact. As soon
as the zone of magnetic force is reached, the closing of the contact
is taken over again by the MCR20.
In the case of a manual stylus system change, the RDS change is triggered by clicking the Drop arrow. No action in CALYPSO is necessary
to change the module of the TP20. Simply remove the module manually. To pick up the stylus, you must click the Pick up arrow regardless of whether a module or the RDS plate was used.
SCR200 stylus system changer

The SCR200 stylus system changer rack consists of a stand and a horizontal beam with six holders. It can be approached from the four approach directions (+X, -X, +Y, -Y).
If the TP200 has been activated in the probe configuration, CALYPSO
offers the SCR200 rack type when creating the stylus system changer
rack. When this type is selected, 6 racks will be created.
Always comply with the instructions in the user guide supplied with the
SCR200.
Special features
On account of the special design of the SCR200, you must bear the following in mind:
The SCR200 has a photoelectric barrier that is interrupted when a

stylus system change takes place. Movements between individual
holders take place inside the space delimited by the photoelectric
barrier. The stylus system does not move out of this space until the
change has been completed.
If the photoelectric barrier is interrupted during a CNC run, the controller

switches permanently to closed contact with probe. If this happens, the
probe no longer recognizes probings and collision is inevitable.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-7
Use of a PH10
Movement without a measuring module outside the zone delimited

by the photoelectric barrier is possible, but there is no protection
against collision. Consequently, it is best not to perform movements
with the machine if you change stylus systems manually.
If the machine is equipped with an articulating probe from Renishaw

(PH10) or with an RDS, you must also bear the following in mind:
If you have qualified stylus positions that could cause a collision with
the stylus system changer rack when stylus systems are subsequently
changed, you must use Approach Parameters to change the parameters for the holders in question.
The travel path above or in front of the holder must be parameterized

in such a way that the probe can rotate before and after the stylus
system change without any risk of collision.
Never change the stylus system without calling up the manual or automatic
stylus system change (e.g. by selecting another stylus system in the Probing system qualification dialog box and changing the stylus system
manually).
Whenever possible, always use the manual or automatic stylus system

change function to change stylus systems with the TP200 and
SCR200, because this is the only way that CALYPSO can monitor the
status of the probe (stylus system in probe or stylus system not in
probe).
In the case of a manual stylus system change, the RDS change is triggered by clicking the Drop arrow. No action in CALYPSO is necessary
to change the module of the TP 200. To pick up the stylus, you must
click the Pick up arrow regardless of whether a module or the RDS
plate was used.
ACR3 stylus system changer

CALYPSO can be used with the Renishaw ACR3 Automatic Change Rack
System and the motorized PH10M head.
Always comply with the operating instructions Installation and User's
guide H-1000-5787-01-A ACR3 autochange rack system!
The described instructions for definition of holders and change operations
apply.
Operation of the ACR3
The ACR3 can only be operated horizontally. Maximum two systems may
be interconnected with each other (max. 8 positions). When using extensions, only the changer located directly at the head of the PH10M may
be used. Otherwise, the resulting force at the PH10M becomes too high.
Meeting tolerances
Reliable operation of the stylus changer is only guaranteed if the tolerances for probe alignment are met. These are 0.2 for the inclination, roll
13-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
and yaw angles. If this is not possible, you must use the AM1 module of
Renishaw.
NOTICE
When using the AM1, measuring range is lost and you have to take an
amount of kinematic uncertainty into account.
NOTICE
For each TP20/TP200 or XXT, you must create an own changer rack in
CALYPSO and qualify it with the RDS plate which is to be used to change
the module or the XXT plate on this changer.
Stylus system changer for RDS

The illustration shows you what distances you need between the holders
as well as the stylus system movement when removing a stylus.
150 mm
Stylus system movement

when removing a stylus
The movement strategy to a holder is set up so that the stylus system

changer is outside of the measuring range.
Please be aware that a minimum distance of 150 mm (for ViScan 170
mm) between the holders is necessary.
A clearance of 120 mm is necessary below the holder. Without the clearance, it is not possible to mount a lateral stylus in the RST stylus system.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-9
Setting up the stylus system changer

Setup in the system settings
To ensure the functioning of the automatic stylus system change, you
must inform CALYPSO that an automatic stylus system changer is installed, and define the type. You do this indirectly when creating holders and
rack assignments.
CALYPSO always offers you exactly those types of stylus system changers
and holders or racks that are suitable for the probe selected in the system
configuration and the selected stylus systems. Select the probe and the
stylus system in the system setup.
To do so, select Extras Settings CMM and click the probe and
one or more suitable styli (for the multi-stage stylus change) on the
Probe notebook page.
13-10
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Configuring the stylus system changer

You can configure the stylus system changer in the Automatic stylus
system change window which opens by clicking the icon or calling
Resources Stylus system Automatic stylus system
change.
This is where you manage all holders and assignments of your stylus system changers.
NOTICE
The arrangement does not need to represent the actual position on the
stylus system changers.
Adding, naming, configuring and emptying holders
Defining approach parameters and paths for holders
Qualifying holders
Printing holder parameters
Deleting holders
Creating, saving, loading and deleting assignments
Showing and hiding holder positions
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-11
Setting up holders
To use your stylus system changer in CALYPSO, you must map it with all
holder positions by means of symbols in the Automatic stylus system change window.
Adding and naming holders

1 Select Resources Stylus system Automatic stylus system change.
The Automatic stylus system change dialog box is opened.
2 From the Edit selection list, select Add stylus system holder.
You will be prompted to select the stylus system changer type.
3 Select the type of your stylus system changer and confirm with OK.
4 Enter a new name for the holder.
(For the MCR20, SCR200, FCR25 and XXT stylus system changers, you
enter the name for a complete group of holders.)
An icon for this holder, accompanied by the name you selected, appears in the Automatic stylus system change window.
13-12
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
(With the MCR20, SCR200 and [FCR25] stylus system changers, six
holders are displayed and with the VAST XXT, three holders are displayed.)
Note: With the ProMax, all existing holders are automatically defined
when creating a changer. Possibly existing holders of other types (e.g.
MT) with the same names are replaced.
5 Add more holders and racks as necessary, until the configuration of
your stylus system changer in the system matches that at the CMM.
6 If necessary, move the holders and racks using the arrow icons.
Configuring holders
1 To configure the current holder, select the Set stylus system to
stylus system holder entry in the in the Changer selection list.
2 Select the stylus system you want to assign to the holder, and click
OK to confirm your choice.
The name of the stylus system is displayed below the holder.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-13
Approach parameters and approach paths

When you create a new holder, a default is defined for the intermediate
position before and after stylus system change: this is a safety precaution.
NOTICE
These values must be checked in any case! You can change the default
if the required value differs (see Checking and changing approach parameters [ 1321]). If the movements of your stylus system must meet
additional requirements, you can also define approach paths (see Defining and assigning approach paths [ 1325]).
Before setting the positions of the new holders in the machine coordinate
system, determine the approach direction (exception: ZCR) and for
MCR20 and SCR200 the holder angle setting.
Color coding of holders

The holders in the Automatic stylus system change dialog box are
color-coded. The color indicates whether the holder is qualified or currently active and whether safe approach paths are defined for the holder.
Holders with approach parameters (without approach paths)
Holder:
Qualified
Not qualified
Active
Not active
13-14
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Holders with safe approach paths

Holder:
Qualified
Not qualified
Active
Not active
Rack assignments
Using rack assignments
If you need different rack assignments in various measurement plans, it
is not necessary to create a new assignment each time. Define different
rack assignments and activate the required assignment for the measurement plan.
Check during CNC start
At the beginning of the CNC run, CALYPSO checks the real rack assignment and indicates in the Rack Assignment: <name_of_assignment> window which stylus system is to be loaded into which holder.
NOTICE
If you do not define any assignment, CALYPSO will use your holder definitions made in the Automatic stylus system change dialog box.
Creating a rack assignment

If you need different rack assignments in your measurement plans, CALYPSO must know the rack assignments. You then activate one for the
measurement plan.
Note: We recommend you to save a default assignment containing all

available holders.
2 Create the rack assignment as required for the measurement plan.
If you do not need a holder for the current assignment, hide the corresponding holder. If you delete it, it will no longer be available and
will also be deleted from existing assignments.
3 From the Management selection list, select the Save Assignment As... entry.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-15
4 Assign an explanatory name to the rack assignment.

The assignment is saved.
5 Create additional rack assignments, if required.
Note: An assignment must only be saved when it is created. Subsequent changes will be adopted automatically without saving.
When closing the active assignment, all available holders are visible again.
However, the assignment corresponds to the last active rack assignment.
Activating a rack assignment

Activating an assignment for the measurement plan
1 Select Resources Measurement Plan Rack Assignment.
2 Activate Use rack assignment during start and select the desired rack assignment or enter a formula for the name of the rack
assignment.
During CNC start, the formula is evaluated and the corresponding rack
assignment is set.
By way of confirmation, you can check the composition of the selected
assignment via Display.
13-16
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
At the beginning of the CNC run, CALYPSO checks the real rack assignment and indicates in the Rack Assignment window which stylus system is to be loaded into which holder.
It is only then that you can execute the measurement plan.
Defining length of master stylus

If you are using a rack for measuring or trigger stylus systems, you have
to define the length of the master stylus.
This is important, because the position of every single holder in the stylus
changer is defined relative to the machine coordinate system and the
adapter plate on the probe. To locate a holder, use the master stylus.
CALYPSO knows the length of the master stylus from this procedure.
Note: Racks for RDS stylus systems can be measured with any qualified
stylus. The angle position 180/0 is generally used; the angle position 90/0
is used for the XXT.
1 Insert the master stylus (see Inserting the stylus system [ 316]).
3 Click Length of MasterProbe.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-17
4 A prompt appears, asking you whether the master stylus has been
inserted. Check the control console to make sure that stylus 1 is selected and click OK.
5 At the prompt to probe on the adapter plate, use the joysticks to touch
the adapter plate to the surface of a holder.
You should probe in the area in which the adapter plate normally
touches the holder.
6 At the prompt to probe with the stylus, use the joysticks to probe the
same place on the holder, using the stylus this time.
The length of the master stylus is displayed.
7 Click OK.
Calypso now knows the length of the master stylus. The locations of the
holders can now be defined.
Defining the RDS geometry

Procedure for defining the RDS geometry
Before you can qualify the stylus system changer rack for the RDS, you
first have to define the RDS geometry.
Procedure
To define the geometry:
Compute the offset from the virtual axis intersection of the RDS axes.
Qualify the four preset angle positions for the RDS. CALYPSO uses this
information to compute the intersection of the axes.
Note: For the passive scanning sensors (SP25, XXT), their intersection of
the axes of the RDS is determined when qualifying the master stylus.
Normally, you enter the slot distance for these sensors only once. The
entry of the slot distance is sufficient even if a reversal measurement has
been performed. (see Defining the RDS slot distance [ 1318]).
Defining the RDS slot distance

The slot distance is necessary only for the startup of the RDS stylus system
changer and must only be defined once.
Note: You enter the slot distance for the passive scanning sensors (SP25,
XXT) once.
The illustration below shows an overview of the definition of the slot distance X. The probe is shown from above, e.g. from +Z.
13-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Probe from above in

position 2
Reference edge
Probe from above in

position 1
RDS stylus from above in

position 1
CALYPSO helps you when defining the slot distance. If you know the
value of the slot distance (offset), you can enter this directly in the Slot
Distance field.
1 Find an appropriate vertical reference edge in the measuring range.
An appropriate reference edge must be parallel to the machine coordinates.
2 Position the RDS stylus system so that the outer slot wall is in a plane
with the reference plane.
In the above illustration, this is position 1.
3 Click Apply position.
CALYPSO saves the current stylus position.
4 Turn the RDS 180 around its A axis.
In the illustration, this is position 2.
5 Position the RDS stylus system so that the outer slot wall is in a plane
with the reference plane.
6 Click Apply position.
CALYPSO saves the current stylus position.
7 Check the results in the Slot Distance field. Typical values are
around 38 mm.
The position of a holder is referenced to the intersection of the two rotational axes of the RDS. CALYPSO must therefore calculate the (virtual)
intersection of these axes. To do so, you must qualify the four additional
stylus positions of the CZ master stylus (refPos1 to refPos4) (styli 2 to 5):
A/B = 0/90
A/B = 0/-90
A/B = 90/0
A/B = -90/0
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-19
Defining approach parameters and paths

Approach parameters and safe approach paths
Configuring the automatic stylus system changer also involves setting the
approach parameters that are required for safe and collision-free change
operations.
CALYPSO supports two methods:
Specifications concerning the clearance distances to the transfer
position [ 1320]
These distances are defined from each given position (e.g. before entry into the rack) to the midpoint of the probe. The Position Over
Holder distance is from the stylus system adapter plate (on the
bottom of the probe) to the top of the rack. The default setting 0 mm.
You can change the settings for each holder of an assignment. If you
need to change these distances because of part or stylus clearance
problems, please be aware of how close the movements are around
the probe holders and the rack.
Specifications concerning safe paths towards the transfer position
and back [ 1324]

Enter a safe path in the form of a list of points that are approached
one after the other.
Select this way of specifying approach parameters if a one way movement in the axis directions to the position before or after change may
lead to collisions with workpieces or stylus system changers.
This enables safe operation of the stylus system changer not only
when measuring several, larger and higher workpieces but also in case
of complex stylus system and stylus system changer forms.
Approach parameters for holders

Enter the approach parameters defining the required clearance distances
to the transfer position for the stylus system change in the Approach
Parameters dialog box.
The positions before, after and during the change as well as the additional position are bound to the corresponding assignment.
The offset, transfer position, holder angle and position itself do not
depend on the assignment.
NOTICE
The stylus system approaches the specified positions by axis. If this movement collides with obstacles on the CMM or on the stylus system changer,
you can define explicit travel paths as safe approach paths.
13-20
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Reference for approach parameters

The approach parameters for all stylus system changers are referenced to
the transfer point to the macro in front of the holder, and not to the
holder point itself. If you enter the position Before Change = 0, the
probe moves directly to the transfer position.
An exception is the Additional position to be entered in machine
coordinates.
The approach direction is the direction the CMM must approach from
to access the stylus system holder. If your rack is at the back of the CMM,
the approach direction will be the positive Y axis. If it is on the left side
of the CMM, the approach will be the negative X axis.
An articulating probe rotates the stylus to the intermediate position. The
values for the positions Before Change, After Change and Additional position must be set such as to ensure collision-free rotation for
every stylus used!
Approach for RDS

The illustration shows a stylus system changer rack for RDS stylus systems.
The arrow shows how the approach has to be defined.
Checking and changing approach parameters

1 Establish the connection to the CMM.
3 Click the icon of the holder you want to change.
4 In the Changer selection list, select Approach Parameters. The
window with the approach parameters is opened.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-21
Risk of destruction! Unsuitable inputs in this window can lead to collisions

and thus to destruction.
5 Select the approach direction.
This setting applies to all the changers holders.
Note: After changing the approach direction, you must requalify the
holder (except for the DSE). The values entered by you under Position in the window are automatically rotated. Possible defined
paths are deleted.
6 For RC sensor mounts, select the corresponding required A or B angle
of rotation in steps of 2.5.
7 Enter the values for Side, Approach Direction and Top for the
following positions During Change, Before Change and After
Change.
Enter these positions relative to the position right in front of the holder
(corresponds to the transfer position).
13-22
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Note: The directions shown are referenced to this point with view angle to the holder: Side means to the right; Top means to the top;
Approach Direction means here out of the rack!
Top
Side
Approach In
8 (Only for the master user): If necessary, move the position in the
holder by a certain amount under Offset.
This allows subsequent compensation for slight shifts compared to the
initially measured reference position.
Note: After indirect qualification, you can also use Offset to add
holders and assign approach parameters to holders with probing
points that are so far out that they cannot be directly approached.
9 If necessary, enter the coordinates for the Additional position in
the machine system.
The additional location will be approached after each complete
change operation.
In the case of stylus system change with DSE, this definition is used for
navigation with an approach direction of X, e.g. to avoid collision
with a Perceptron stylus system.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-23
10Click OK.
Approach paths for holders

When configuring the automatic stylus system change, you can separately
define the following paths for each holder of a rack assignment:
Travel path from the transfer position of the holder to the transfer
position of any other holder of the same assignment
Travel path from the transfer position of the holder to the workpiece
Travel path from the workpiece to the transfer position of the holder
If you define all theoretically possible paths, you will get per rack assignment a path from the workpiece, a path to the workpiece and a path to
any other holder for each holder.
Then, the stylus system moves along these paths and no longer along the
axis directions from and to the position before, after and during change.
The additional position, too, is then no longer valid. The corresponding
definition of these paths makes it possible to avoid collisions with all obstacles on the CMM (workpiece, fixtures, stylus changer racks and other
stylus systems) during stylus system change.
Setup and properties of approach paths

Enter the safe path in the form of a list of intermediate positions and
rotation angles to be set (for RDS). You may choose between the entry
in the machine's system of coordinates and the entry relative to the transfer position.
NOTICE
Holders with paths are shown in a darker color in the Automatic stylus
system change dialog box.
13-24
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Direct movement and

movement by axis
The intermediate positions of this list are directly approached and not by
movement by axis as is the case with approach parameters. There are
exceptions regarding the transfer points:
When moving to the changer, the first intermediate position will be

approached by axis as usual: First, movement in the Z axis, then movement in the approach direction and finally movement perpendicular
to the approach direction in the X/Y plane. If the position is below the
current position, movement in the Z axis takes place last.
When moving to the changer, the transfer position is also approached
by axis as usual. You can avoid this by defining the target position as
the last position of the path, e.g. via Import destination.
When moving from one holder to the next, only the path from the
last intermediate position to the holder is approached by axis; in this
case, the first intermediate position is directly approached.
With travel after change, the first intermediate position will be approached by axis as usual. You can avoid this by entering the transfer
position itself as the first position of the path, i.e. 0 / 0 / 0.
With articulating probe holders, the rotation position is the end of the
path, unless otherwise defined.
During Change paths
If you have defined a path between two certain holders in the During
Change line, this path will be approached instead of the two During
Change positions. For all holder combinations for which you have not
defined any path, the During Change positions will continue to be approached. The intermediate positions are defined at the beginning of the
path relative to the transfer position of the holder. In this case, the rotation position is also at the end of the path, unless otherwise defined.
Changed approach direction
If you change the approach direction of a holder, the holder is no longer

qualified. Therefore, all paths to and from the holder are deleted in all
assignments.
Paths and assignments
If you hide a holder in an assignment, all defined paths for this holder will
be deleted in this assignment. If you show a holder, the default values for
the approach parameters will be used first. Paths are initially not active.
You can change the default values for the approach parameters if no
assignment is active. From the Administration selection list, select the
Close Assignment entry.
If you create a new assignment, the approach parameters of the previously active assignment will be applied.
Defining and assigning approach paths

The approach paths make it possible to guarantee safe use of the stylus
system changer, even in the case of complex conditions on the CMM.
1 Establish the connection to the CMM.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-25

3 Click the icon of the holder whose approach paths you want to edit.
4 In the Edit selection list, select Edit Orientation of Changer and
enter the approach direction.
This setting applies to all the changers holders.
5 In the Changer selection list, select Approach Parameters. The
window with the approach parameters is opened.
Risk of destruction! Unsuitable inputs in this window can lead to collisions

and thus to destruction.
6 Select the approach direction.
Note: After changing the approach direction, you must requalify the
holder (except for the DSE). The values entered by you under Position in the window are automatically rotated.
7 For RC sensor mounts, select the corresponding required A or B angle
of rotation in steps of 2.5.
8 Click the Define path to... or Define path button for During
Change, Before Change and After Change.
9 Select the destination holder for the During Change path.
The dialog box for the definition of the approach path is opened.
13-26
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
10Enter the point list for the safe path. To do so, use the Edit functions.
Use Import destination to add the destination holder's transfer
position to the list.
Use Read position or the button on the joystick of the control console to add the current position of the stylus system to the list.
To check, use Scan points to have the entered points scanned by
the stylus system.
Risk of collision! Move slowly and carefully.
11Save the path with OK.

12Close the Approach Parameters window with OK.
Defining holder positions

Defining the position of a holder
Every time a holder is created in a stylus system changer, the position has
to be defined in the machines system of coordinates. In the case of the
MCR20, SCR200, FCR25 and XXT, all holders are qualified jointly in a
single operation (see Defining the MCR20 holder positions [ 1330]).
The approach direction has to be set before you define the position of a
holder (see Approach parameters for the stylus system changer [ 1320]). Risk of collision if this procedure is not adopted.
2 Click the icon of the holder whose position you want to define.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-27
The color of the icon changes:

Green: the holder is already qualified
Orange: the position has not yet been qualified
3 In the Changer selection list, select the Define Holder Location
entry.
4 When you see the prompt asking whether you want to overwrite the
existing position, click OK.
5 Click Cancel if no stylus system has been qualified.
Note: Do not click OK as long as you have not completed the following
step. In addition, ensure that the dust cover is open.
6 CALYPSO reacts differently, depending on which type of probe is installed:
With a trigger probe you are asked to move the stylus to the center
of the circle. Ensure that you measure the holder location in the
area between the hexagon screw head and the surface.
With a measuring probe, a cone on the side of the holder is located
by self center probing.
With Renishaw probes (TP20 and TP200), you are prompted to
probe points on the MCR20 or SCR200.
With an RDS, CSC or ISC probe, the additional reference surfaces
are automatically probed after probing the upper reference surface.
The approach direction is determined automatically for the ISC and
CSC.
With an XXT, a cone on the rack is determined by self center probing. You must define the length of the stylus if necessary. Proceed
in the same way as for determining the master stylus length
(Defining the length of the master stylus [ 1317]).
When the measurement is finished, you will see a symbol for the stylus
system in the holder symbol. The name is below the symbol.
7 Repeat these steps for every holder which has not yet been defined.
Defining the SCP600 holder positions

The SP 600 probe of Renishaw enables two-stage stylus change:
The stylus change of the RDS is the first stage.
The second stage is the change of the plate of the SP 600 and the
SCP 600 (Stylus Change Port 600) holder.

2 Click a holder icon.
13-28
61212-2011002
CALYPSO

entry.
The information about the stylus system refers only to the holder active
at the start of the qualification procedure.
If you defined an RDS with SP600 as probe under Extras Settings CMM, you are prompted to enter the type of the new holder: RDS or SCP600.
existing holder, click OK.
Always use Reduced Speed (potentiometer on the control console) for
movement, as otherwise there is a risk of collision.
5 If no SP600 is loaded in the RDS, the following prompt appears:
Please use an SP600 for the qualification. In this case, insert an
SP600 in the RDS.
If this stylus has not yet been used for qualifying an SCP600 rack, you
must determine its length. Proceed in the same way as for determining
the master stylus length (Defining the length of the master stylus [ 1317]).
6 Open the cover of the SP600 as prompted, lock it by means of the
retention pin and confirm with OK.
CALYPSO checks the current angle position of the RDS. The nominal
angles of both axes depend on the approach direction set beforehand.
If the angles do not correspond, an error message appears. After confirmation of this message, CALYPSO stops the qualification operation.
7 If the angles correspond: Probe a point in the approach direction as
prompted.
CALYPSO takes care of everything else automatically.
8 Remove the retention pin and close the cover.
The covers have to be closed so that the magnets mounted in them
can function correctly and keep the switching contact closed during
stylus system changes.
9 Click OK.
The window will be closed.
Defining the ACR3 holder positions

With the ACR3, it is only possible to create four holders.
Read also the operating instructions that are provided.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-29

2 Click a holder icon.
entry.
existing holders, click OK.
5 A query Is the rack in the locked position? (On the right of the swivel
range) appears. Set the rack to the locked position (as shown in the
dialog) and confirm with OK.
6 Lock the covers with the tool and insert the autojoint gage in holder
1.
7 Remove the stylus from the probe as prompted.
8 Approach the position using the joystick. With Add point you record
the current position and close the window.
9 Remove the gage as prompted and insert the probe again.
By confirming, the creation of probing points is activated again. The
position of the next measured point is shown.
10Probe a point at the left corner of holder 1 in the Z axis.
CALYPSO takes care of everything else automatically. When the measurement is finished, you will see all holders of the ACR3 in the stylus
system change window.
11Remove the retention pin and close the cover.
12Click OK.
Defining the MCR200 holder positions

All the holders of an MCR20 are qualified in a single operation.
Before you define the holder positions of the MCR20, the covers must be
opened and the approach direction set (see Approach parameters for
the stylus system changer [ 1320]). Risk of collision if this procedure is
not adopted.
1 Open the covers of the MCR20.
3 Click a holder icon in the Automatic stylus system change window.
13-30
61212-2011002
CALYPSO

entry.
Note: Always use the PS2R stylus system without extension (2 mm

head, 20 mm shank) for the qualification procedure ! The deviation
between P1 and P2 in the Y coordinate (for approach direction in Y)
must not be more than 0.2 mm (see the operating instructions for the
MCR20).
5 If the current stylus system has not yet been qualified and you want
to define the position of the holder, click Cancel.
7 Probe point 1 on the left end face of the MCR20 as prompted.
P5
P4
P3
P1
P6 P7
Z+
Y+
P2
X+
CALYPSO takes care of everything else automatically. When the qualification is completed, all six holder positions of the MCR20 are labeled
from 1 to 6.
8 Close the covers when prompted.
The covers have to be closed so that the magnets mounted in them
can function correctly and keep the switching contact closed during
stylus system changes.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-31
9 Click OK.
Defining the SCR200 holder positions

All holders of an SCR200 are calibrated at once.
Before you define the holder positions of the SCR200, the covers must be
opened and the approach direction set. The cable between SCR200 and
SI200 (controller for TP200) must be disconnected for the qualification
process, in order to interrupt the signal from the photoelectric barrier (see
Approach parameters for the stylus system changer [ 1320]). Risk of
collision if this procedure is not adopted.
1 Open the covers of the SCR200.
3 Click a holder icon in the Automatic stylus system change window.
entry.
Note: Always use the PS2R stylus system without extension (2 mm

head, 20 mm shank) for the qualification procedure ! The deviation
between P1 and P2 in the coordinate of the corresponding approach
direction must not be more than 0.25 mm (see the operating instructions for the SCR200).
5 If the stylus system has not yet been qualified and you only want to
define the position of the holder, click Cancel.
7 Probe point 1 on the left end face of the SCR200 as prompted.
13-32
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CALYPSO takes care of everything else automatically. When the qualification is completed, all six holder positions of the SCR200 are labeled
from 1 to 6.
8 Close the covers when prompted and reconnect the cable between
the SCR200 and the SI200 to reactivate the photoelectric barrier.
9 Click OK.
Assigning a stylus system to a holder

In this step, you define which stylus system will belong to which holder.
2 Click the icon of the holder to which you want to assign a stylus system.
The color of the icon changes:
Green: the holder is already qualified
Orange: the position has not yet been qualified
3 In the Changer selection list, select the Set stylus system to stylus system holder icon.
A list of all stylus systems or components suitable for this changer is
displayed.
4 Select the stylus system or component you want to assign to the holder, and click OK to confirm your choice.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-33
The stylus system is assigned, which can be seen if the stylus system
name appears below the icon for the holder.
5 Repeat the above steps for the holders to which no stylus system has
been assigned as yet.
Note: In the case of multi-stage stylus systems, it is also possible to

place, for example, an RDS plate with XXT without stylus system on a
holder. If an XXT stylus system is, for example, assigned to an RDS
holder, the corresponding XXT holder is also automatically assigned to
this holder.
Automatically changing the stylus

system
When storing or getting a stylus system for the first time, you should be
prepared to cancel the procedure quickly. If the approach parameters are
incorrect, you can avoid a possible collision by canceling.
Automatic changing between stylus systems that are

both stored in the changer rack
2 Click the holder icon that contains the stylus system you would like to
install.
3 Click the Changer selection list and select the Change Stylus System entry.
The CMM first stores the currently installed stylus system, then loads the
new stylus system you selected.
Semi-automatically changing the stylus

system
When storing or getting a stylus system for the first time, you should be
prepared to cancel the procedure quickly. If the approach parameters are
incorrect, you can avoid a possible collision by canceling.
Storing an installed stylus system automatically and

installing a different stylus system manually
13-34
2 Click the stylus system holder icon where the currently installed stylus
system should be stored (the icon for an empty holder on the rack).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3 Click the Changer selection list and select the Store stylus system in holder entry.
The CMM places the stylus system in the selected holder. There is then
no longer a stylus system installed in the probe.
4 Click OK.
5 Proceed with the steps for manually changing a stylus system, as described in Inserting the stylus system [ 316].
Changing stylus system assignments

You can change the assignment of a stylus system to a certain holder.
2 Click the icon for the new holder to which you want to assign the stylus
system.
The icon turns green.
3 In the Changer selection list, select the Set stylus system to stylus system holder icon.
A list of all stylus systems or components suitable for this changer is
displayed.
4 Select the stylus system you want to newly assign to the holder.
The stylus system is assigned. and by way of confirmation the stylus system name appears below the icon for the holder.
Setting up an SP25 stylus system with an

FCR25 rack
When setting up a two-stage stylus system change with the SP25 and
FCR25 on the RDS, bear the following in mind:
Qualifying a stylus changer and stylus

1 Create a new measurement plan.
2 Click the Stylus System button in the list of prerequisites.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-35
3 Click Ref. sphere position and enter the direction of the reference
sphere post.
4 Select the probing mode (recommended: Standard) and probe the
reference sphere in the shaft direction.
When defining the geometry of the master stylus, the reference sphere
must be in the 45, 135, 225 or 315 position to prevent collisions with
the reference sphere post.
If the difference between the previous dead weight offset and the new
dead weight offset of the master stylus exceeds 30 m, you are prompted
to determine the dead weight offset again. The calculation can take a
few seconds to complete.
NOTICE
During the recalculation, the stylus must stand free (without contacting
the material).
Adding new holders to the stylus system changer

13-36
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
If you entered several probes in the configuration, a selection window
appears.
3 Select the required holder.
When using several different holder systems, you must observe the different clearance distances of the holders.
When using the FCR25 holder together with the RDS holder, the During
Change position must be increased to a value of 150 for the FCR25, otherwise a collision with the holder of the RDS may be caused.
4 Assign a name to the group if necessary.
Qualifying the FCR25 holder

Note: We recommend you use the shortest possible stylus which is
suitable for your module for qualifying the holder.
2 Determine the stylus length by probing any horizontal plane with the
adapter plate.
3 Then probe the same plane with the master stylus.
The result is displayed.
4 Start qualification as shown in the remark windows.
The holder must be aligned to a machine axis (see operating instructions for the FCR25 stylus changer).
5 Change the stylus according to the instructions.
The qualification is continued.
6 Insert the stylus from the start of the measurement and remove the
triangular adapters.
7 Position the stylus system on the holder.
8 Only for two-stage stylus system change: Select the stylus system
name.
Setting up an XXT stylus system with an

XXT rack
When setting up a two-stage stylus system change with the XXT stylus
system and the XXT rack on the RDS, bear the following in mind: In particular, the probe must be aligned for 5-pole XXTs.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-37
You will find more information about the alignment of the VAST XXT probe
in the separate operating instructions for probing systems.
1 Click Extras Settings CMM and create a new measuring system on the Measuring Systems notebook page.
2 Check the interface type on the Interface notebook page.
3 Select all probes (i.e. the XXT) used for the RDS on the Probe notebook page by selecting the menu item in the submenu.
The activated probe and stylus system types are ticked.
4 Check the data on the Machine index card and set up the connection
to the CMM.
The currently inserted probe is stored as the master stylus.
Note: A later change of the master stylus is only possible by deleting
and assigning the measuring system again.
Qualifying a stylus changer and stylus

1 Create a new measurement plan.
2 Click the Stylus System button in the list of prerequisites.
13-38
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
3 Click Ref. sphere position.

Subsequently, the announced five sphere measurements are performed during which the XXT stylus system is rotated in the defined
direction prior to each measurement.
When defining the geometry of the master stylus, the reference sphere
must be in the 45, 135, 225 or 315 position to prevent collisions with
the reference sphere post.
4 Select the probing mode (recommended: Standard) and probe the
reference sphere in the shaft direction.
Adding new holders to the stylus system changer

If you entered several styli in the configuration, a selection window
appears.
3 Select the required holder.
When using several different holder systems, you must observe the different clearance distances of the holders.
When using the XXT holder together with the RDS holder, the During
Change position must be increased to a value of 150 for the XXT holder,
otherwise a collision with the holder of the RDS may be caused.
4 Assign a name to the group if necessary.
Qualifying the XXT holder

If the stylus system is not in the required position, you will receive a
message.
Note: We recommend you use a straight stylus with a length of 50 mm
and a stylus radius of 2.5 mm for qualifying the holder.
2 If necessary, create a new stylus with the (A90.0/B0.0) position and
qualify it.
3 Determine the stylus length by probing any horizontal plane with the
adapter plate.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-39
Never probe with the orientation nose of the adapter plate!

The holder must be aligned to a machine axis (see separate operating instructions for probing systems).
4 Then probe the same plane with the master stylus.
The result is displayed. You will be instructed how to continue qualification.
5 Start qualification as shown in the remark windows.
6 Position the stylus system on the holder.
7 Only for two-stage stylus system change: Select the stylus system
name.
When creating an additional stylus system for the XXT, you can select
again this component or create a new one (for example, if you have
more than one XXT probes). In this case, you must create an additional
XXT changer rack if required.
13-40
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Qualifying the stylus changer rack in the CNC run
Qualifying the stylus changer rack in the CNC

run
Suitable holders for CNC qualification
CALYPSO allows you to qualify the stylus changer rack during the CNC
run. In this case, add the Qualification of stylus system holders
Purpose of the qualification
This method allows you to qualify the stylus changer racks that are arranged together with the workpiece on a pallet.
Suitable holders
Automatic qualification in the CNC mode is possible for the following

holders:
MT and ProMax (VAST (Gold), VAST XT (Gold), VAST DT)
XXT
RDS
ZCR (changer for CSC/ISC and for VAST XTR)
Styli to be used for the qualification

The stylus used for the qualification of the holders must fulfill the following conditions:
Holder type
Conditions
MT and ProMax
Master stylus with determined length (distance between the plate

and the reference sphere).
The stylus reaches the qualification point of the holder.
XXT
Sphere having a sphere radius of 2.5 mm.

The RDS angle position is the same as for storing (in the case of approach direction +Y this would be A=90, B=0).
Length of the stylus has been defined (in the same way as with the
VAST master stylus by probing a point with the adapter plate and
then with the stylus itself).
The rack has been qualified with the XXT_Carrier that also uses the
holders for changing.
RDS
Any stylus.
Collision-free qualification is possible.
Slot distance is already saved in the system.
Intersection point of the axes has been defined (e.g. after a reversal
measurement).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-41
Holder type
Conditions
ZCR
VAST XTR probe:
Length of the stylus has been defined (in the same way as with
the VAST master stylus by probing a point with the adapter plate
and then with the stylus itself).
Other probes:
Any stylus.
Collision-free qualification is possible.
Intersection point of the axes has been defined (e.g. after a reversal measurement).
The length of the master stylus and the length of the XXT stylus are defined in the Automatic stylus change window.
NOTICE
The conditions for the automatic qualification of the holders is only
checked directly before the execution of the Qualification of stylus
system holders utility.
If one of the conditions is not fulfilled, the CNC run is canceled and a
message is displayed informing you that the qualification is not possible.
Qualifying holders in the CNC run

Prior to the qualification, one of the following prerequisites has to be
satisfied.
NOTICE
Another prerequisite is that the holders are positioned as accurately as
possible and the rack is aligned parallel to the axis. The exact requirements can be seen in the specification for the individual holders. For example, the XXT holder requires a more accurate alignment than the MT
holder.
Conditions:
The stylus used for the qualification is inserted at the start of the
CNC run.
The stylus (styli) used for qualification is (are) stored in an already
defined holder (e.g. which is firmly mounted to the machine).
The stylus used for qualification is not assigned to any holder and
is picked up via a manual change during the CNC run.
1 Use Resources Utilities Qualification of stylus system
holders to add the Qualification of stylus system holders
13-42
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
2 Select the desired holders in the left list and add them to the right list
using Add.
3 Change the order for the CNC run by means of the arrow icons, if
required.
The following information is shown in the list:
Holder name
Holder type
Approach Direction
4 Define the parameters for the qualification procedure in the list:
Mode: CNC / Manual / Compute
CNC: Qualification in the CNC run
Manual: Switch-over to manual qualification during the CNC run
Compute: No qualification. The data is adopted from the information about the holders.
Stylus system and styli used for qualification
Datum reference frame
Machine system: The changer is firmly arranged on the measuring
table.
Base Alignment: The changer is arranged together with the workpiece on the pallet.
(In the case of RC_CAA) Angle A and Angle B which are used
for qualification
Note: If you have changed and re-qualified holders, this information

is not automatically transferred to this utility.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
13-43
5 If necessary, click Update.

Thus, the information about the holders is called again.
6 Click CNC-Start if you want to qualify the holders now.
The holders are qualified in the CNC run or calculated by CALYPSO
depending on the mode. You have to carry out the probings yourself
for the Manual mode.
If qualification is not possible due to missing conditions, the CNC run is
canceled and a message is displayed. The same applies to a canceled
manual qualification performed via the measurement plan.
If qualification of a holder is not possible due to a collision or certain
circumstances, the measuring run is canceled. The holders which have
not been qualified previously, retain their old positions.
About travel paths

For approaching the holders during qualification, CALYPSO uses the approach parameters of the stylus changer settings which you can change
via Approach Parameters. The positions are approached offset by the
difference between the holder position and the qualification point. First,
the position before change is approached. After qualification, the position
after change is approached. It is not possible to change the approach
direction during the CNC qualification!
13-44
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14
Chapter
AutoRun interface
.................................................................................................................

Introduction to AutoRun interfaces ........................................................ 142
Basics about AutoRun interfaces ............................................................ 143
Working with AutoRun ........................................................................ 1410
AutoRun for system administrators ...................................................... 1421
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-1
Introduction to AutoRun interfaces
Introduction to AutoRun interfaces

As system administrator, you can use the AutoRun function to create
AutoRun interfaces. The AutoRun interface allows you to combine
measurement plans and to map measuring configurations and sequences.
AutoRun interfaces enable you, as the user, to automatically execute
measuring plans without editing them yourself. Thus, even users who do
not have specialist knowledge of how to work with CALYPSO can run
measurement plans.
14-2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Basics about AutoRun interfaces

Purpose and basic terms
Purpose of AutoRun
The AutoRun interface allows you to combine measurement plans and to

map measuring configurations and sequences.
The CNC start parameters are defined for each individual measurement
plan.
Finally you can have executed in a CNC run the measurement plans contained in the AutoRun interface.
Important AutoRun
terms
A certain number of new terms are encountered in the context of AutoRun interfaces. These terms are important for understanding the functions of AutoRun.
AutoRun interface
In an AutoRun interface, you no longer work in a measurement plan
but rather with measurement plans as objects. The measurement
plans are represented by measurement plan icons (see Layout of
the AutoRun interface [ 143]).
Desk
An AutoRun interface can contain one or more hierarchically linked
desks. A desk contains measurement plan icons and pallets (see
Basics about desks [ 144]).
Measurement plan icon

A measurement plan icon is a symbol that represents a measurement
plan (see Basics about measurement plan icons [ 145]).
Pallet
You can space several workpieces over a defined grid on a pallet and
then measure them all at once (see Basics about pallets [ 146]).
Branch
A branch is a direct link between desks (see Basics about branches [ 149]). The hierarchical structure of the desks is mapped by
branches.
Keyword
Each icon (measurement plan or pallet) can have its own unique keyword. You can use the keywords to find a desired icon (see Basics
about keywords [ 149]).
Layout of the AutoRun interface

To open the AutoRun interface, select Plan AutoRun.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-3
The illustration below briefly describes the major features of the AutoRun
interface.
Display of the measurement plan comment
Toolbar
Desk
Buttons for controlling

measurements
Basics about desks

An AutoRun interface can comprise more than one desk, and you can
switch from desk to desk. This allows you to map various measuring configurations, workpieces or measurement plans within one AutoRun interface.
You can structure your AutoRun interface with the aid of desks. A desk
contains measurement plans and pallets that belong together. By means
of branches, you can change to different desks along a tree structure.
14-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Measurement
plan icon
Pallet
Desk link
Automatic Run
File
Con!guration
Edit
Layer
Measurement
Stylus system
Navigation
Tools
View
Testblock1
unnamed(Testblock1)
User Information
CNC Start parameter
Send results to printer
Q-DAS
Print plots
Manual Alignment
Measurement
Measurement type
Run
User de!ned
Loops
Stop
Sequence
You can thus represent the following structure, for example:

Machine processing stage type workpiece.
On every level, you then create as many branches as there are levels below
it. By selecting the appropriate branch, you access the desk with the
measurement plan for the desired workpiece.
Basics about measurement plan icons

A measurement plan must be provided for each workpiece to be measured. In order to map a workpiece on the AutoRun interface, add the
associated measurement plan there.
On the AutoRun interface you then see an icon a symbol labeled with
the name of the measurement plan.
With the appropriate rights, you can also export measurement plan icons
from another AutoRun interface and import them into your AutoRun interface.
Several icons
Several icons from the same measurement plan can be contained in one
desktop, distinguished, for example, by different start parameters or parameter files. CALYPSO then assigns a serial number in brackets to the
name of the measurement plan (e.g. test block1 (2)).
When you select a run in the CNC start parameters, the name of the run
is appended with a hyphen to the measurement plan name (e.g. test
block1 - test run).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-5
Basics about pallets

On a pallet, you arrange similar workpieces freely or regularly and then
measure them all at once. The pallet is loaded into the measuring range
of the CMM as a complete unit for this purpose.
Several conditions must be met to enable CALYPSO to determine the
positions of the workpieces on the pallet:
CALYPSO needs to know the position of the pallet. This means you
have to define a base alignment for the pallet and this, in turn, means
that each pallet requires its own measurement plan.
CALYPSO must be able to locate the individual workpieces on the

pallet with good accuracy.
With regular arrangement, the pallet is split into regular columns

and rows based on the coordinate origin of the first pallet location.
The intersections of columns and rows are the reference points
for the position of additional workpieces. The illustration below
shows a pallet from above (-Z direction):
Basing points for
further pieces
X
Pallet alignment
14-6
Part alignment of the

first pallet location
With irregular arrangement, the position of each individual workpiece is defined by a separate part alignment.
CALYPSO must know whether the part alignments on the pallet refer
to the pallet system or to the machine system.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
If the part alignments refer to the pallet system, an offset of the

pallet system automatically causes an offset of the part alignments.
Y
X
If the part alignments refer to the machine system, they are not
moved when offsetting and rotating the pallet system. Therefore,
the base or start alignments of the workpieces must be re-qualified if you wish to change the position of the pallet on the machine
and to maintain the assignment of the pallet and workpieces.
Y
X
X
Pallet types
There are four different pallet types:
Regular
Pallet
Irregular
The workpieces are positioned ac- The workpieces are freely distributcording to a predefined, regular X- ed on the pallet; the location of
Y grid on the pallet.
each workpiece is defined.
With fixed assignment

The base or start alignDuring a CNC start, only the pallet During a CNC start, only the pallet
ment of the workpiece on system is loaded. The part alignsystem is loaded. The part alignthe first pallet location (or ments are calculated.
ments are calculated.
all pallet locations) refers
to the pallet system.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-7
Regular
Irregular
During a CNC start, the pallet system and the part alignment of the
first pallet location are loaded. All
other pallet locations are computed.
During a CNC start, the part alignments of all pallet locations are
loaded.
Without fixed assignment

The base or start alignment of the workpiece on
the first pallet location (or
all pallet locations) refers
to the machine system.
The pallet system is not required for

this arrangement.
The pallet type is determined when defining the pallet (Adding a pallet
to a desk [ 1431]).
3D pallet
CALYPSO also supports 3D pallets for METROTOM evaluations. In this

case, CALYPSO must be connected to a CMM of the METROTOM type.
Additionally, it is possible to specify a Styli List for a regular pattern.
You thus define the number and the distance of the layers in the Z direction.
Then the pallet icon is provided with tabs on the right-hand side for
switching between the individual layers.
If you enter a positive value for the distance of the layers, then the
tabs are arranged from bottom to top.
Pallet1 (Metrotom)
If you enter a negative value for the distance of the layers, then the
tabs are arranged from top to bottom.
Pallet1 (Metrotom)
14-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
NOTICE
When you open an AutoRun file with 3D pallets, but CALYPSO is not
connected to a CMM of the METROTOM type, the layers of the 3D
pallets will not be displayed. The pallet will be shown as a 2D pallet with
only the pallet locations of the first layer. In this case, it is only possible
to measure the pallet locations of the first layer.
All layers of the 3D pallet will be available as soon as you connect CALYPSO to METROTOM.
Basics about branches

A branch is a button that you can place on a desk. If you have defined
multiple desks, a branch allows you to switch from one desk to another
desk.
Use
This makes sense, for example, if you want to map the workpieces in a
tree structure. You can thus represent the following structure, for example: Machine processing stage type workpiece.
On every level, you then create as many branches as there are levels below
it. By selecting the appropriate branch, you access the desk with the
measurement plan for the desired workpiece.
Basics about keywords

Each icon (measurement plan or pallet) can have a unique keyword. You
can use the keywords to find a desired icon in a complex AutoRun interface.
If all measurement plans and pallets have their own keywords, you can
also use the barcode reading technique to search for an icon.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-9
Working with AutoRun

Preset AutoRun interface
Your system administrator has already configured the AutoRun interface
for you. This interface makes it much easier for you to run measurement
plans, since most of the work has already been done. You can start measuring right away in most cases.
You will find basic information about the AutoRun interfaces under
Basics about AutoRun interfaces [ 143].
Your user privileges

The system administrator who configured the AutoRun interface for you
will be able to tell you what tasks you have to perform before or during
measurement.
The scope of tasks you have to perform depends on the privileges (and
obligations) your system administrator has assigned you.
At some point during your work with the AutoRun interface, you might
encounter the message shown below:
It appears when you have attempted to execute a command for which

you do not possess access privileges.
Preparing a measurement start for

AutoRun
Prerequisites for a measurement start
The illustration below shows what could be an AutoRun interface.
14-10
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Prerequisites
The preconditions that have to be satisfied before you can start a measurement are as follows:
Your AutoRun interface must be loaded (see Loading the AutoRun

interface [ 1411]).
The correct desk must be selected (see Selecting the measuring

configuration [ 1413]).
The correct measurement plan must have been found and marked
beforehand.
The scope of measurement must be defined (see Defining the scope

and sequence in AutoRun [ 1413]).
These preconditions must be satisfied before measurement can be started.
Loading the AutoRun interface

Every AutoRun interface is saved in a file with the extension .arn. You
have to load your AutoRun interface before you start measuring. Your
system administrator will tell you which interface is yours.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-11
1 Click the Open icon and open the desired file.

If changes have been made and not saved in the current AutoRun
interface, CALYPSO will display a note:
With Save and Open you save the current interface.
With Open you discard all changes made to the current interface.
NOTICE
Please note that the noname.arn file must not be overwritten. The
name of the current AutoRun interface is shown at the bottom left in the
status bar.
Finding a measurement plan

Measurement plans are represented by icons in the AutoRun interface.
If the system administrator has assigned keywords for all icons, you can
quickly find the desired one. You can also search for an icon via the name
of the corresponding measurement plan.
Note: If you possess the necessary equipment, you can also scan the required keyword using a barcode reader.
Conditions:
The AutoRun interface is loaded (see Loading the AutoRun interface [ 1411]).
The workpiece to be measured is at the correct position on the
CMM.
1 Select Tools Looking for run... from the menu.
The Looking for run window is opened.
Looking for run
Enter a keyword:
Selected icons: (Nothing)

Search for ..
Keyword
Measurement plan name
2 Select the Keyword or the Measurement plan name option

depending on how you want to find the icon.
3 Enter the keyword or the measurement plan name for the desired icon.
Note: In the search criterion it is possible to use the wildcard * for

any number of characters or the wildcard # for any character.
- or Scan the keyword with a barcode reader.
14-12
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
While entering the search criterion, CALYPSO shows a list of all icons
containing the current search criterion as keyword or measurement
plan name. No distinction is made between upper and lower cases.
4 If the desired icon is shown in the list, select the icon from the list.
5 To display the list again, click Search or ENTER.
If necessary, CALYPSO changes to the layer that contains the desired icon
and highlights this icon. The highlighted icon is displayed in the dialog
box next to Selected icons.
If no icon matching the entered search criterion is found, the text (Nothing) will be displayed in red next to Selected icons.
NOTICE
If a measurement plan is included several times in a layer, then the search
via measurement plan name shows several icons found. Therefore, check
whether the icons found correspond to the desired search result.
Selecting the measuring configuration

Your AutoRun interface might consist of several desks. Each desk displays
a different configuration of workpieces to be measured.
1 Make sure that your AutoRun interface is loaded.
2 Check whether the workpiece to be measured is at the correct position
on the CMM.
3 Click the arrow buttons in the toolbar until you have found the desk
with the desired measuring configuration.
The name of the desk is displayed in the selection box beside the arrow
buttons.
Once you have selected the appropriate configuration, the next step is to
select the workpieces to be measured.
Defining the scope and sequence in AutoRun

A desk can contain several measurement plans or pallets. This allows you
to measure several workpieces one after the other if they are already on
the CMM table.
You define which workpieces of a desk will be measured in a CNC run
and in which order this will occur. Additionally, you may define that only
one mini-plan of a measurement plan is executed.
You can save and reload sequences.
Selecting workpieces for measurement

Conditions:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-13
You have the authorization Define List of Characteristics

CNC parameter or Define Run Parameters (see Assigning
AutoRun user rights [ 1422]).
For measurement plans with several mini-plans, the Choose run
on icons check box in the Measurement Plan Definition
dialog box is ticked.
1 Highlight the icons of the measurement plans (or pallets) that you want
to run.
The text fields containing the icon names are displayed with a dark
background. The Start button is highlighted in green.
2 To run a certain mini-plan of a measurement plan, select the desired
mini-plan from the selection list of the icon.
Please select
run
AutoRun 5.0 - Roundness1 (6)
(All Characteristics)
- AutoRun
5.0 - A
Diameter1
Plane
Run
Roundness1
Text
After the start of the CNC run, the marked icons will be executed in the
sequence in which you selected them.
Changing and saving sequences

1 Select Measurement Sequence....
The Define Sequence dialog box with the currently valid sequence
of processing appears.
2 Change the order of the entries using the arrow buttons.
- or Click the Load Sequence icon to load a stored sequence.
3 To change the sequence without saving the changes, confirm with
OK.
- or -
14-14
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
To save the sequence, click Save Sequence and assign it a name.
4 To delete a sequence which is no longer required, click in the Define

Sequence window the Delete Sequence icon and select the sequence to be deleted.
See Starting a measurement in AutoRun [ 1415] for instructions on
starting the CNC run.
Keeping the CAD window open

By default, the CAD window is closed automatically after every measuring
run. However, you can define to keep the CAD window open.
Keeping the CAD window open

1 Select Tools Show CAD.
The menu item is checked.
2 To undo the setting, select again Tools Show CAD.
The check mark is removed and the CAD window will once again be
closed automatically.
See Starting a measurement in AutoRun [ 1415] for instructions on
starting the CNC run.
Starting a measurement in AutoRun

You can start the measurement once you have selected the desired measuring configuration and defined the scope and sequence for processing
the measurement plans.
1 Check the four CNC start parameters displayed and enter them,
if necessary, for this CNC run.
All other CNC start parameters have already been defined and cannot
be changed here.
2 Click Start.
A green border appears around the selected icons of the measurement
plans. CALYPSO begins by checking the CNC parameters.
CALYPSO starts measuring. Two windows are opened: the Stop Light
window and, if running is not set in the background, the default
printout.
Once a CNC run has been started, the message Measurement plan xyz
running appears in the status bar.
If measurement fails to start in AutoRun

An error message is issued if a measurement does not start in AutoRun.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-15
If you have privileges to enter CNC start parameters, define the CNC
start parameter (see Defining CNC start parameters [ 1438]).
Then restart the measurement.
If you do not have privileges to define CNC start parameters, notify

your system administrator.
Entering printout header parameters

If the Forced Input of Printout Header Data at CNC Start setting
was activated via Resources Printout Header Parameters in the
measurement plan in CALYPSO, you are prompted to enter the values for
the printout header data after the measurement plan has been started.
The Input Parameter dialog box appears on the screen: Enter the desired values to be displayed in the printout.
If you run several measurement plans one after the other, you can enter
the printout header parameters for all started measurement plans for
which the forced input at CNC start has been activated. This saves you
from entering the parameters at the end of one and prior to the start of
the next measurement plan.
Use the Continue > and < Back buttons to page in the Input Parameter window through the input pages for all concerned measurement plans and make your settings. On the last page, click OK to start
processing of the marked icons.
14-16
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
After clicking Cancel and confirmation of a query, the CNC run for all
marked icons is started. All entries confirmed with Continue > will be
accepted. For all other measurement plans, the available printout header
parameters will be used.
NOTICE
If, in your measurement plan, the Forced Input of Printout Header Parameters at CNC Start has been used for a forced stop of the CMM (to
insert new components, for example), you can no longer use these measurement plans in version 4.0 and higher.
However, the stopping of the CMM can be defined in the pre-parameters
of a measurement plan.
Controlling measuring runs in AutoRun

A measurement started by means of an AutoRun interface can take some
time to complete.
Intervention is possible at any time. This may be necessary if you detect
an imminent collision.
You use the Stop Light window to control the measuring run in AutoRun.
If the stop light window is hidden, you can have it displayed again using
the Stop Light to front function.
If you want to interrupt a running measurement [ 714], click yellow.
If you want to resume an interrupted measurement [ 714], click

green.
If you have to cancel a measurement [ 714], click the Cancel

button or red.
You will find more information on the Stop Light window in Checking
and controlling the measurement plan run [ 711].
When a measurement in AutoRun is

completed
Once the measurement has been completed, the default printout will be
displayed, listing all measuring results in the sequence in which they were
computed.
Moreover, CALYPSO shows the quality of the measuring results directly
on the AutoRun interface (see Visualization of the quality of the measuring results [ 1418]).
Depending on how the CNC start parameters were set, the measuring
results are saved in a custom printout and in special files.
The custom printout is displayed on screen - the result files are intended
for further evaluation.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-17
NOTICE
The CAD window is closed by default after every measuring run. If you
want to keep it open, activate Tools Show CAD.
Visualization of the measuring results

After a CNC run, CALYPSO shows the quality of the measuring results
directly on the AutoRun interface.
Color coding
The following color coding is used:
Green
The measuring results are OK.
Yellow
The measuring results are within the warning limit range.
Red
The measuring results are not OK.
Any icon that is not color-coded has not been measured.

In case of pallet icons, the quality of the measuring result is shown for
each individual pallet location.
DIN PAR
DIN REC
No Name (AutoRun 4.2)
The color coding is displayed until the icon is remeasured or the AutoRun
interface is closed.
Result summary
You can show a short summary of measuring results for each measured
icon. To do so, highlight the desired measurement plan or pallet icon. The
Result tab shows the following information:
Short summary
This is where the part number, date and time of the measurement are
shown.
Visualization of the overall result

The visualization of the overall result is similar to that of the custom
printout. It contains, e.g., the following information:
14-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Number of characteristics
Characteristics within tolerance
Characteristics outside tolerance
Characteristics exceeding the warning limit
Characteristics not calculated
Number of coordinate systems
Number of text elements
Saved printouts in PDF format
If you highlight a pallet icon, the summaries of all measured pallet locations will be listed one below the other together with the number of the
pallet location. In this case, the pallet locations are not sorted according
to the number but according to the moment of the measurement.
Displaying printouts subsequently

You can subsequently open the custom printout and the default printout
of the last CNC run that was started by AutoRun. It is not necessary to
close AutoRun.
You cannot access additional printouts such as the penultimate run of a
pallet from within AutoRun. Only the last run is displayed even when the
measurement plan was started with different mini-plans.
If the CNC run of a measurement plan was canceled, the printouts for
the features processed prior to cancellation are displayed.
Prerequisite
To do so, you must have the privilege Show Custom Printout or Show
Default Printout.
Procedure
Highlight the measurement plan or pallet icon whose last default printout
or custom printout you want to open.
In the context menu of the icon, select the entry Printout from last
run <printout_type>.
If you selected Custom Printout, the measurement plan will be loaded
before the custom printout is displayed. This can take a few seconds. The
custom printout of the last run started by AutoRun is loaded.
The Default Printout is usually displayed immediately regardless of
whether the run was started by CALYPSO or AutoRun.
Default printout
Contents of the printout

The contents of the protocol file in the measurement plan directory are
shown. If this file is empty (size = 0 KB), an empty printout window appears.
Custom printout
The printout header data of an AutoRun icon may differ from those of
the original measurement plan. The printout header data of the AutoRun
icon is shown.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-19
NOTICE
The assignment of pallet location and saved actual values of the last CNC
run is not possible with pallets, since the pallet location is not saved.
Thats why the printout header data of the original measurement plan is
used.
An exception is the part number, whose count is incremented by AutoRun.
14-20
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
AutoRun for system administrators

Tasks of the system administrator
One of your functions as system administrator is to set up an AutoRun
interface, so that inexperienced users have a convenient way of running
measurement plans. You will be familiar with some of the tasks involved
from CALYPSO, and others will be new to you.
The system administrator has the following tasks:
configure AutoRun, i.e. assign privileges to the users and check the
settings of the CMM in the system configuration (see Configuring
AutoRun [ 1421]).
map the measuring configurations of the CMM, each in a separate

interface (known as a desk) (see Mapping the workpieces [ 1426]).
prepare the measurement, i.e. make the settings for the CNC run (see
Preparing a measurement [ 1437]).
administrate AutoRun, i.e. save and edit AutoRun interfaces or modify

the directory names for the corresponding features after copying or
moving AutoRun interfaces (*.arn) (see Managing AutoRun [ 1443]).
NOTICE
For many of the following instructions you can also use the respective
context menu instead of the menu items of the menu bar.
Configuring AutoRun
Steps for configuring AutoRun
With the aid of AutoRun interfaces, CALYPSO processes are defined and
mapped such that even inexperienced users will have no trouble running
them.
Before you start mapping desks, the first thing to do is assign privileges
for the future users. You also have to check the parameters set in the
system settings for measurement and for the CMM and make any
changes that might prove necessary.
Starting AutoRun
1 Close all open measurement plans.
2 Select Plan AutoRun.
AutoRun is started and opens the Automatic Run window with a new,
empty AutoRun interface named noname.arn.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-21
Assigning AutoRun user rights

As the system administrator, you determine which tasks a user may perform.
NOTICE
Only the Master user may set up new users.
1 Select Configuration Users Privileges.
The User Rights window will open.
2 In the left column, highlight the name of the user for whom you want
to define privileges.
All existing privileges for the AutoRun interface are displayed.
3 To assign a privilege, tick its check box in the Status column.

The settings are saved and are active for this user with immediate effect.
NOTICE
For purposes of documentation, you can print the list of privileges of the
selected user. To do so, click the printer icon.
If you do not mark an individual user, the privileges of all users will be
printed.
14-22
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
NOTICE
It is also possible to define the user privileges in the system setup. To do
so, select Extras Settings Users and enter the privileges on the
User Rights notebook page.
Details on the user privileges

The table below shows the privileges you can assign to users in the order
they appear in the User Rights window.
Privileges that every user should have are highlighted.
Privilege
Special aspects
Change Privileges
May change the user privileges (except those of the

master).
Exit
Privilege to end the AutoRun interface.

End/Start CALYPSO
You can change to CALYPSO without changing

the user if the Start with AutoRun system setting is activated.
New Document
Privileges for creating, saving and opening an AutoRun interface.
Save Document
Save Document As
Open Document
Change paths in document
Privileges for adapting the fixed paths after copying the AutoRun interfaces.
Copy/Paste Icon(s)
Privileges for working with icons.
Delete Icon(s)
Move/resize icon(s)
Load/remove picture(s)
Privileges for the background image.
New Desk
Privileges for creating, defining and deleting of

AutoRun interface elements.
Delete Desk
New Measurement Plan
New Pallet
Define Pallet Parameters
Define Loop in Pallet
Add Meas. Plan to Pallet
New Desk Link
Export of Measurement Plan Icons
Import of Measurement Plan Icons
Define Sequence
Privileges for the measuring run.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-23
Privilege
Special aspects
Start/Stop Measurement
Define keywords
Privileges for keywords and for searching for icons

via keywords or measurement plan names.
Open Find run window
Workdesk disabled if Find run dialog is open If you assign this privilege, mouse actions will be
disabled in the workspace when the Looking for
run window is open.
This is intended to prevent an unintentional focus
change (and thus unintentional runs) when barcodes are being scanned.
Close Find run window

Display Alignment
Menu items under Tools.
Display Stop Light

Start GEAR PRO manually
Privilege for starting GEAR PRO from within CALYPSO.
Configure Stop Light
Privileges for additional functions in the Stop Light

window. Cancel, Continue and Reconnect
are also possible without these privileges.
Define Run Parameters
Access to the parameters Speed, Results, Base

Alignment, List of Characteristics, Printout Header
Data, information on the measuring run and Parameter File in the Start Measurement window, irrespective of which privileges are set for the
individual parameters.
Define Speed CNC parameter
Access to the speed parameters and to information

on the measuring run in the Start Measurement window even if the privilege for Define
Run Parameters is not set.
Define Results CNC parameter
Access to the result parameters and to information

on the measuring run in the Start Measurement window even if the privilege for Define
Run Parameters is not set.
Define Base Alignment CNC parameter
Access to the base alignment parameters and to

information on the measuring run in the Start
Measurement window even if the privilege for
Define Run Parameters is not set.
Define List of Characteristics CNC pa- Access to the List of Characteristics parameters
rameter
and to information on the measuring run in the
Start Measurement window even if the privilege for Define Run Parameters is not set.
14-24
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Privilege
Special aspects
Define run selection on icons
Access to the Choose run on icons parameter

in the Start Measurement window even if the
privilege for Define Run Parameters is not set.
Define Parameter File CNC parameter Access to the Parameter File in the Start Measurement window even if the privilege for Define Run Parameters is not set.
Define printout header data
Access to the printout header data parameters and

to information on the measuring run in the Start
Measurement window.
Note: The forced input of printout header data

upon CNC start as set in the measurement plan is
not affected by the blocking of this privilege.
Open Measurement Run Info
Access to Academy Web
Define printout
Privileges for printouts.
Open last custom printout

Open last default printout
CMM
Privileges for system setup.
Measurement
Environment
Change stylus
Privileges for stylus data.
Qualify stylus system
Checking the system settings

Usually, the parameters for the CMM, the measurement and the work
environment have already been defined in the system settings.
1 Select Configuration CMM to check the parameters for the
CMM configuration.
There is an explanation in the Online Help under Changing the CMM
configuration [ 1013].
Note: On the Machine page of the CMM Configuration notebook, make sure that the measuring range is defined completely and
correctly.
2 Select Configuration Measurement to check the parameters
for the measurement method.
There is an explanation in the Online Help under Changing the CMM
configuration [ 1013].
3 Select Configuration Environment to check the parameters
for the environment of the users.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-25
There is an explanation in the Online Help under Changing the environment [ 1013].
Loading and removing a background image

The AutoRun interface can be provided with a background image.
Several functions are available for this in the menu Edit Background
Image...:
1 To load a background image, select Create New Background Image:
All common Windows-compatible image formats are permitted.
2 To change the size of a background image, select Change Size of
Background Image.
3 To delete a background image, select Remove Background Image.
Mapping the workpieces

Overview: Mapping the workpieces
You can streamline the process of measuring different workpieces by
grouping them on the table or on the base plate of the CMM. You can
map the arrangement of these workpieces accurately in the AutoRun interface - you do this by defining what are known as desks.
The tasks involved in mapping the measuring configuration are as follows:
Defining desks [ 1426]
Adding a measurement plan [ 1427]
Positioning a measurement plan icon [ 1428]
Setting the size of an icon [ 1428]
Changing the appearance of a measurement plan
icon [ 1428]
If a measurement plan is needed several times on the AutoRun interface,
then you can easily and quickly copy and paste the corresponding icon to
the AutoRun interface.
Copying and pasting an icon [ 1445]
Defining desks
You can structure your AutoRun interface with the aid of desks. A desk
contains measurement plans and pallets that belong together. You can
change to different desks via branches.
14-26
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
This makes sense, for example, if you want to map the workpieces in a
tree structure. You can thus represent the following structure, for example: Machine - processing stage - type - workpiece.
1 If you have not yet defined a desk in this interface, select
Desk Rename and assign a new name to the No Name layer.
(Each time a new AutoRun interface is defined, CALYPSO creates a
desk named No Name, which you should rename before use).
- or If you have already defined a desk, select Desk New and enter a
name.
The name of the new desk appears in a selection list in the toolbar.
Adding a measurement plan to a desk

To map a workpiece in the measuring range, add the measurement plan
of the workpiece to the desk.
NOTICE
Make sure that no measurement plan is open in CALYPSO, because it
would be overwritten in an AutoRun process.
1 Click the Measurement Plan icon and open the desired measurement plan.
CALYPSO creates an icon for the measurement plan and places it in the
top left corner of the desk. Now position the icon and check the CNC
start parameters.
You may also add measurement plans to the desk by importing them as
measurement plan icons (Importing measurement plan
icons [ 1427]).
Importing measurement plan icons

Measurement plan icons exported from another AutoRun interface can
be imported into your AutoRun interface.
1 Select File Import Measurement Plan Icons.
2 Open the desired ARZ file in the file selection window.
Question
Do you want to copy the measurement plans to the directory
c:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Zeiss\CALYPSO 5.6\workarea\inspections
?
Ja
Nein
Abbrechen
3 Confirm the import.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-27
If a measurement plan of the same name already exists in the directory,

you will be informed, allowing you to cancel the import.
4 The measurement plan or plans is/are saved along with all the associated information and its/their icon(s) is/are immediately displayed on
the current desk.
The new measurement plan icons will automatically be saved when saving
the AutoRun interface.
Positioning and configuring icons on the desk

You can freely position the icons on the desk, change the icon size, provide the icon with an image (*.bmp, *.jpg, *.gif), a color or a color gradient or add a text to the icon.
To improve the appearance, you can choose the position of the icon in
such a way that it corresponds to the position of the workpiece on the
measuring table or base plate and place an image of the respective workpiece on the icon.
Now you can also snap the icons to a grid or to each other.
Snapping icons to grid [ 1428]
Arranging icons on the AutoRun interface [ 1429]
1 To position an icon, draw the icon to the desired position using the
mouse.
2 To adapt the appearance of an icon:
Highlight the desired icon.
Select Icon properties... from the context menu.
Adjust the settings as desired in the Icon properties... dialog
box. For more details on the settings, please see Icon properties...
in the Online Help.
Snapping icons to grid

You can define that the icons can only be moved in defined steps in a
grid. If the grid is enabled, then you can only change the size of the icon
in defined steps in the grid.
Conditions:
You have the authorization Move/resize icon(s) (see Assigning AutoRun user rights [ 1422]).
1 Select Edit Grid from the menu.
The Grid dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Adjust the settings as desired. E.g. enter the grid size.
All defined settings are automatically transferred to the AutoRun interface. These settings are active until they are changed or the AutoR-
14-28
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
un interface is closed. For details on the settings, please refer to Grid

in the Online Help.
Arranging icons on the AutoRun interface

You can arrange the icons on the AutoRun interface as follows:
Snap icons to the last icon selected

To do so, you must highlight at least two icons.
Distribute icons uniformly in horizontal or vertical direction

To do so, you must highlight at least three icons.
Adapt the size of the icons

To do so, you must highlight at least two icons.
The name of the last icon highlighted has a dark gray background.
Conditions:
You have the authorization Move/resize icon(s) (see Assigning AutoRun user rights [ 1422]).
1 Highlight the desired icons.
2 To snap the icons, select Alignment <Alignment method>
from the context menu.
CALYPSO provides the following alignment methods:
Alignment methods Description
Align left
The icons are aligned along the left margin of the last icon selected.
Horizontal center
The icons are centered horizontally and

aligned to the last icon selected.
Align right
The icons are aligned along the right

margin of the last icon selected.
Align top
The icons are aligned to the last icon selected at the top.
Vertical center
The icons are centered vertically and

aligned to the last icon selected.
Align bottom
The icons are aligned to the last icon selected at the bottom.
3 To evenly distribute the icons, select Spacing <Distribution>

from the context menu.
CALYPSO provides the following methods for distribution:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-29
Methods for distribu- Description

tion
Equal horizontal
spacing
The two rightmost or leftmost icons remain at their position. All icons in between are distributed in horizontal direction such that the intermediate distances
are equal.
Equal vertical spacing
The two topmost or bottommost icons

remain at their position. All icons in between are distributed in vertical direction
such that the intermediate distances are
equal.
4 To harmonize the size of the icons, select Adapt size <Size

adaptation> from the context menu.
CALYPSO provides the following methods for size adaptation:
Methods for size
Description
adaptation
Same width
The width of the the last icon selected is

applied to all icons.
Same height
The height of the the last icon selected is

applied to all icons.
Same height and

width
The width and the height of the the last

icon selected are applied to all icons.
Mapping a pallet
Pallets in AutoRun
Multiple workpieces of similar type are mounted in a regular pattern or
in a free arrangement on a pallet. CALYPSO determines the position of
the pallet on the table by computing the pallet's base alignment. The
position of the workpieces is derived from the alignment of the measurement plan and the column and rows of the pallet.
3D pallet
CALYPSO supports 2D and 3D pallets. However, a 3D pallet is only available if the METROTOM measuring machine is connected to CALYPSO.
You will find more information on 2D and 3D pallets in Basics about
pallets [ 146].
Preparing a pallet
Preparing a pallet entails creating a new measurement plan. This step
does not involve dividing the pallet into rows and columns.
14-30
1 In CALYPSO, create a measurement plan specially for the pallet.

61212-2011002
CALYPSO
It is important that the pallet should have a unique base alignment so

that the program can unequivocally determine the location of the pallet.
Adding a pallet to a desk

You can add a pallet to a desk.
To add a pallet, CALYPSO must know the following:
the pallet system
with regular arrangement: the part alignment of the first pallet location
with free arrangement: the part alignments of all workpieces on the

pallet
Adding a pallet
1 Click the Pallet icon and open the desired measurement plan.
The Pallet Parameters dialog box appears on the screen:
Pallet Parameters
Pallet Name:
Input box for the

pallet name
Unnamed
Comment:
Pallet type
Pallet System:
Part Alignment:
Regular
Base Alignment
Parts refering to pallet
Start Alignment
Selection of the
pallet system
Group Rows
Group Columns
Input fields for the

number and distance
of the pattern in the
X and Y axes for a
regular pallet
Only for METROTOM:
Input fields for the
number and distance
of the layers for a
regular pallet
Number
Number
Distance
Distance
Styli List
Number
Distance
Apply
Reset
OK
Cancel
2 Enter a name for the pallet in the Pallet Name input field.
3 Tick the Regular check box for a regular pallet and enter the pattern:
In the Group Columns group, enter the Distance and the
Number of columns.
In the Group Rows group, enter the Distance and the Number of rows.
If CALYPSO is connected to a METROTOM measuring machine,
you must enter the Distance and the Number of layers in the
Styli List group.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-31
4 Determine the pallet system depending on the type of pallet you wish
to define:
If the part alignments refer to the pallet system, you must activate
Parts referring to pallet.
If the part alignments do not refer to the pallet system but to the
machine system, you must deactivate Parts referring to pallet.
5 Select the base alignment for the pallet from the Pallet System selection list.
6 Click LOS Position for a pallet with free arrangement and transfer
the appropriate part alignment for each individual workpiece into the
list in the LOS Position window.
7 Click OK.
The icon is created and appears in the top left corner of the desk. You
still have the option of defining the size and the appearance of the icon
(Positioning and configuring icons on the desk [ 1428]).
Adding a measurement plan to a pallet

The workpieces on the pallet are all similar. You must now select a measurement plan that suits this type of workpiece and add it to the pallet, so
that CALYPSO can subsequently perform the CNC run.
1 Highlight the icon of the pallet.
2 Select Edit Pallet Add Measurement Plan... and open the
desired measurement plan.
The name of the measurement plan is displayed below the pallet.
Defining measuring runs for a pallet

Overview: Measuring runs for a pallet
There are two ways of defining the workpieces on the pallet to be measured in the CNC run:
Define a loop [ 1433].

In this way, for example, you can measure every third workpiece on
the pallet take samples, in other words.
Select individual positions on the pallet [ 1434] with the mouse.

This enables you to exclude specific positions on the pallet from measurement, e.g. if there are positions on the pallet that do not contain
workpieces.
14-32
If you want to approach a pickup position [ 1435] after a pallet run

to replace the measured workpiece with the next workpiece, you can use
PCM commands.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Defining measuring runs for a pallet with a

loop
1 Highlight the icon of the pallet.
2 Select Edit Pallet Define Loop....
The dialog box for entering loop parameters is opened.
3 Enter the loop parameters: Click Insert to insert a line and enter the
start value, end value and step width of the loop.
5 Select the Loops option to prepare the pallet for the CNC run.
At this point, you should define the CNC start parameters (see Preparing a measurement [ 1437]), so that the pallet can be measured.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-33
Defining measuring runs for individual pallets

CALYPSO shows the pallet locations selected for the measurement on the
AutoRun interface. The pallet locations that are to be measured are highlighted in color. The pallet locations that are not to be measured are
marked with an X.
No Name (09.04.08 Test 4.8 beta 32)
Selecting individual positions on the pallet

1 Click the pallet positions you want to have measured during the measuring run.
The locations that you clicked are highlighted in gray.
2 Select the User defined option to prepare the pallet for the run.
At this point, you should define the CNC start parameters (see Preparing a measurement [ 1437]), so that the pallet can be measured.
Approaching the start position prior to

measuring the pallet
NOTICE
You can only use this function if the PCM Technology option is provided.
A start position is to be approached prior to a pallet run to avoid collisions
with obstacles on the granite table. However, the position should not be
14-34
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
approached prior to every pallet measuring run as this would be very time
consuming. The start position should only be approached prior to the
measurement of the first pallet location. This can be accomplished with
the aid of PCM commands.
In the case of a single pallet, the current pallet location number and the
number of the first pallet location are additionally included in the printout
header data.
Add a query to the pre-parameters of the measurement plan. This query
is used to check whether the current pallet location number corresponds
to the first pallet location number. When the numbers correspond to each
other, the CMM should move to a defined position.
Example:
if (getRecordHead("palletlocationnumber") ==
getRecordHead("firstpalletlocationnumber")) then
positionCMM(100,-100,-50)
endif
NOTICE
The query functions in any case, regardless of whether the pallet was
started via a loop or via highlighted pallet locations.
Approaching the park position after

measuring the pallet
NOTICE
You can only use this function if the PCM Technology option is provided.
After a pallet run, a pickup position should be approached to replace the
measured workpiece with the next workpiece. However, the position
should not be approached after every pallet measuring run as this would
be very time consuming. The pickup position should only be approached
after the run of the last pallet location has been completed.
This can be accomplished with the aid of PCM commands.
In the case of a single pallet, the current pallet location number and the
number of the last pallet location are additionally included in the printout
header data.
Add a query to the post-parameters of the measurement plan. This query
is used to check whether the current pallet location number corresponds
to the last pallet location number. When the numbers correspond to each
other, the CMM should move to a defined position.
Example:
if (getRecordHead("palletlocationnumber") ==
getRecordHead("lastpalletlocationnumber")) then
positionCMM(100,-100,-50)
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-35
endif
NOTICE
The query functions in any case, regardless of whether the pallet was
started via a loop or via highlighted pallet locations.
Assigning keywords to icons

As the system administrator, you can assign keywords for the icons of an
AutoRun interface.
This can speed the search for measurement plan icons and pallet icons
for the user in an extensive AutoRun interface. This also makes it more
likely that the correct icon will be chosen.
Automated selection
with barcode
The assignment of keywords permits automated selection of the correct

measurement plan for the workpiece or pallet of workpieces in question.
Precondition:
You possess the required barcode readers.
The barcode of the measurement plan icon or of the pallet icon with
which the workpiece is to be measured is affixed to each workpiece
or pallet.
Assigning and changing keywords

1 Highlight the icon.
2 In the context menu of the icon, select Define keywords.
The Define keywords window appears with a list of all icons from
all desks of the current AutoRun interface.
14-36
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The line with the previously marked icon is selected.

3 For automatic generation of the keyword, click Default.
- or Enter a keyword.
Creating branches between desks

You can use the selection list in the toolbar to switch between the desks.
However, you will need a branch if you want to switch from one desk to
another specific desk quickly and reliably.
Creating a branch
1 Make sure that the desk displayed on the screen is the one from which
you want to link to another desk by means of a branch.
2 Click the Desk symbol and enter the name of the desk to which the
branch is to lead.
If you want to go to a new desk that has not been defined yet, enter
the new name.
3 Click OK.
CALYPSO creates the icon for the branch (together with the name of the
destination desk).
Preparing a measurement
Overview: Preparing a measurement
Once you have defined desks with measurement plans or pallets, you can
prepare for measurement. You can perform all preparations for measurement or only some - this depends on the privileges you have assigned
to the user who is going to perform measurement.
You have the following options for preparing the measurement:
Displaying the position of the probe [ 1438]
Defining CNC start parameters [ 1438]
Defining the input of printout header data [ 1440]
Defining stylus settings [ 1441]
Changing the sequences in desks [ 1413]
Defining printout [ 1441]
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-37
Displaying the position of the probe

In some situations it is useful to know the position of the probe. The
position is indicated in machine coordinates.
1 Click the Display Alignment symbol.
The current machine coordinates for the position of the probe are displayed in the Simulation-Position dialog box.
Defining CNC start parameters

You must define the CNC start parameters before a measurement plan
or a pallet measurement can be run.
Conditions:
You have the authorization Define List of Characteristics
CNC parameter or Define Run Parameters (see Assigning
AutoRun user rights [ 1422]).
1 Highlight the icon of the measurement plan or the pallet that you want
to run.
2 Click the Define CNC start parameters symbol.
The Measurement Plan Definition dialog box appears on the
screen.
14-38
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Measurement Plan Definition

Name
Testblock3
User Information
Result
Selection
CMM
Order of run
Base Alignment
Custom Printout
Start Alignment
Compact Printout
From Characteristic List
Display plots
Navigate-Feature To Feature
Print plots
Automatic
EXCEL-printout
Copies
Run Mode
All Characteristics
Send results to printer
Current Selection
PDF
Slow Through First Feature
PostScript
Speed in mm/s
Result To File
Choose run on icons
Table File
Parameter File
Merge File
Q-DAS
PTX
PiWeb
DMIS
OK
Cancel
Help
3 Under Selection, enter the following parameters:

Coordinate systems:
Various options are available depending on the pallet type.
Scope of measurement:
To add all characteristics to the scope of measurement, select All
Characteristics.
- or To select single characteristics, select Current Selection and open
the list of characteristics by clicking the Feature selection from
Measurement Plan icon.
Select the desired characteristics and confirm with OK.
- or To add only a certain mini-plan to the measurement scope, select the
option under Current Selection and select the desired mini-plan in
the selection field next to it.
- or To define that the mini-plans can be selected directly on the icon on
the AutoRun interface, you must tick the Choose run on icons
check box.
Parameter File (only for variable measurement plan).
In the case of a single pallet, the same parameter file must be assigned
to all pallet locations.
For detailed information on parameter files, please refer to the operating instructions for the PCM Technology option under Variable
measurement plans in PCM.
4 Enter all the other parameters of the Result and CMM groups.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-39
Further information on the CNC run and on this window can be found
under Starting a CNC run [ 77] and under Start Measurement /
Measurement Plan Definition in the CALYPSO dialog reference in the
Online Help.
Defining input of printout header parameters

The printout header parameters for a CNC run from within AutoRun can
be entered as follows:
in the CNC standard settings for an icon,
upon CNC start by answering a query.

The appearance of this query must be set in the measurement plan in
CALYPSO.
1 Open the corresponding measurement plan in CALYPSO.

2 Select Resources Printout Header Parameters.
The Input Parameter dialog box appears on the screen.
3 Enter global printout header parameters.

4 If you want the user to enter certain (local) printout header parameters
only directly before the measurement, activate Force Input at
Start.
14-40
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
In the CNC start parameters, the system administrator or the user can
enter additional printout header parameters, overwrite default parameters or accept the data of the original measurement plan after clicking
Data Input in the Input Parameter window.
As soon as the user performs the CNC start, the Input Parameter
window opens for all measurement plans activated via Force Input at
Start, one page for each icon involved. In this way, the user can determine the printout header data for all following measurements upon CNC
start.
NOTICE
If, in your measurement plan, the Forced Input of Printout Header Parameters at CNC Start has been used for a forced stop of the CMM (to
insert new components, for example), you can no longer use these measurement plans in version 4.0 and higher.
However, the stopping of the CMM can be defined in the input parameters of a measurement plan.
Defining stylus settings in the AutoRun

interface
The dialogs for changing and qualifying styli can be called from the AutoRun interface. This task can be performed by the system administrator
or an authorized user.
The Stylus system menu contains the following items:
Modify Automatic: Calls the automatic stylus system change

(see Automatically changing the stylus system [ 1334]).
Modify Manual: To manually change the stylus system (see

Inserting the stylus system [ 316]).
Qualify Manual...: Starts the stylus qualification. The stylus

qualification procedure is described under Qualifying styli manually [ 1134].
Defining a printout
You can define the printout header output specifically for each measurement plan and each pallet in the AutoRun interface.
The user privilege for defining the printout is called Define Printout.
The printout output via AutoRun is icon-related. Settings which are
changed in a measurement plan icon are only valid for this specific icon
even if the same measurement plan applies to another icon.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-41
If you want to change the printout for several icons of the same measurement plan, edit the original measurement plan and load the settings
of the measurement plan for the individual icons.
These settings are also active when the last custom printout is opened
subsequently. Thus it is possible to open for one measurement several
custom printouts with different formats and settings one after the other.
Defining the printout for an icon

1 Highlight one measurement plan or pallet icon.
2 Select Define printout... in the context menu.
The Format custom printout dialog box appears on the screen.
3 Make the desired settings for the printout on the three index cards.
The settings correspond to those in the Format custom printout window for the original measurement plan. The settings for the
default printout, the selection of the Excel and DMIS report and the
printout reset are not included.
- or To transfer the settings for these icons from the original measurement
plan to AutoRun, click Load settings from measurement
plan.
4 Tick the Apply settings for next run check box if you would like
that the settings made should only apply to the next CNC run.
The settings made here will be reset after the next CNC run of this
icon.
14-42
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The check box is ticked by default.

Managing AutoRun
Overview: Managing AutoRun
One of your functions as system administrator is to set up the AutoRun
interface and make sure it remains up to date.
The following tasks are possible:
Saving AutoRun interfaces [ 1443]
After copying or moving, modification of the directory names for

the AutoRun interfaces [ 1443]
Renaming and deleting desks [ 1445]
Copying and deleting icons [ 1445]
Exporting icons [ 1446]
Saving the AutoRun interface

Each AutoRun interface is stored in a separate file with the file name
extension .arn.
1 To save an interface, select File Save or File Save as.
Editing paths for measurement plans

In an AutoRun interface (*.arn), measurement plans, image files and
parameter files are saved with absolute directory names.
In case an AutoRun interface is copied to another computer or the measurement plan directories are restructured, AutoRun can, under certain
circumstances, no longer find the measurement plans. In this case, you
must adapt the paths for the measurement plans.
Adapting the paths for the measurement plans

1 Select Edit Replace paths for Measurement Plans.
The Replace paths for Measurement Plans window is opened.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-43
This window shows a list of all desks, measurement plans and icons of
the AutoRun interface and the actual paths. The Valid column shows
whether the path exists.
Note: The setting Yes under Valid means that the path exists. This
must not necessarily be the path which contains the object displayed,
however. The setting No under Valid means, in contrast, that this
path is not the correct path for the displayed object.
The list shows all desks in the same way in succession.
The first line is a subheading with the name of the desk.
The second name contains the path for the background image if
available.
The following lines contain the desk, pallet and measurement plan
icons included in this desk as well as the paths of the pallet and
measurement plan icons. Additionally with regard to pallets, if no
measurement plan has been inserted in a pallet, the path cannot
be entered and the column with the validity always indicates No.
If an icon is linked to an image, a line with the text (Image) and the
path of the image file appears after the line with the icon name.
If the icon contains the absolute path for a parameter file (see Loading
parameter file in the CNC run), an additional line with the text (Parameter File) and the path of the parameter file appears after the line
for the image.
2 You can modify the paths by overwriting them.
- or Highlight the lines you want to modify. To do so, use the context menu
with its menu items.
Use the Search for and Replace with fields to replace the paths
in the highlighted (or all) lines.
14-44
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
To complete the Replace with field, you can use the Reset and
Looking for directory symbols.
Start replacement by clicking Replace or with OK.
The replacement process is executed.
When ticking the Request Each Replacement check box, you
have the option of confirming or retracting each individual replacement or canceling the entire process.
Otherwise, a message about the number of replacements made appears upon completion of the replacement.
Note: The names of the image files and measurement plans are not
changed by the replacement. CALYPSO ensures that these names remain unchanged.
This prevents, for example, a measurement plan change. Thus, it is not
possible to transfer CNC start parameters or printout header data accidentally from one measurement plan to another measurement plan.
If a measurement plan is to be replaced, you must assign the corresponding icon again. The same applies to images.
Managing desks
You can change the name of a desk or delete it from the AutoRun interface. Use for this the Rename or Delete menu item in the Desk menu.
Before renaming or deleting a desk, make sure that the desired one is
displayed on the screen.
Managing measurement plan icons

You can copy selected icons from a desk and paste them to another desk.
It is also possible to delete icons.
You can export one or several measurement plans as measurement plan
icons in order to import them later into another AutoRun interface.
Exporting measurement plan icons [ 1446]
1 To copy an icon, select Copy from the context menu of the desired
icon.
- or Press CTRL+C.
2 To paste an icon, select Paste from the context menu.
- or Press CTRL+V.
3 To delete an icon, select Edit Delete Icon from the menu.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
14-45
Exporting measurement plan icons

By exporting, the measurement plan icons are available for the import to
another AutoRun interface.
1 Highlight the desired measurement plan icons and select File Export Measurement Plan Icons or select Export Measurement Plan Icons in the context menu.
2 Enter the path and name of the export file in the file selection window.
The file extension is *.arz.
3 In the Export Measurement Plan Icons window, define for each

of the selected icons whether or not you want to export the image file
and information on the measurement run along with the icon.
The data is exported.
The exported icons can be imported into other systems (Importing
measurement plan icons [ 1427]).
14-46
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
15
Chapter
Duplex mode
.................................................................................................................

Duplex mode with CALYPSO .................................................................. 152
Preparing the duplex mode .................................................................... 154
Using the duplex mode ........................................................................ 1515
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
15-1
Duplex mode with CALYPSO

Very large workpieces can be measured using CMMs with two measuring
columns (duplex CMMs) to increase the measuring volume.
Each of the measuring columns is connected to a computer for correction
and evaluation of the measurements; one of these computers is the
master, the other is the client.
Master
Slave
Measured
values
Measured
values
Calculation
Evaluation
Make the preparations for duplex mode. In particular, CALYPSO must
know how the two measuring ranges, originally independent, relate to
each other (see Preparing the duplex mode [ 154]).
Important when measuring in any given run: log on, measure, log off (see
Measuring with a duplex CMM [ 1515]).
Asynchronous run
15-2
The duplex mode runs in the asynchronous mode. The measurement plan
is measured From Feature List. Master and client measure parallel to their features. Both machines move at the same time. If the
master requires data from the client for calculating a specific feature,
the master will only continue after having received the data.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
NOTICE
In the same way as in duplex mode, you can also control more than two
measuring columns in multiplex mode. In this way, you can increase the
measuring range and you can save measuring time in asynchronous
mode. The procedure is principally the same as in duplex mode; you have
a master and several clients.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
15-3
Preparing the duplex mode

Prerequisites for the duplex mode
The prerequisites for duplex mode are as follows:
CALYPSO is configured for the duplex mode [ 154].
The files for duplex mode [ 157] are available and correct.
Both computers are connected via the network [ 1510].
Both measuring ranges are coupled [ 1513].
Configuring CALYPSO for duplex mode

For duplex mode, you must carry out the following settings on both computers:
1 Select Extras Settings CMM and open the Dual Arm notebook page.
This page is available only if the machine is defined as a horizontalarm CMM.
2 On the master computer, select the Master option and enter the parameters for coupling:
15-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Column: number of measuring columns

Port number: taken from the services file in the ..\winnt\system32\drivers\etc directory.
Mapping of the measuring columns to the computers: on the
basis of the network names in the hosts file, in this case, for
example, cmmws_1, or on the basis of the computer names in the
intranet.
Some possible configurations for column1 and column2 as master or
client:
Column 1
Column 2
Master = cmmws_1
Slave = cmmws_2
Slave1 = cmmws_2
Slave = cmmws_1
Master = cmmws_2
Slave1 = cmmws_1
Master = name1 (intranet name) Slave = name2

Slave1 = name2 (intranet name)
Slave = name1
Master = name2
Slave1 = name1
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
15-5
3 On the client computer, select the Slave option and enter the parameters for coupling:
Port number: taken from the services file in the ..\winnt\system32\drivers\etc directory.
Mapping of the measuring columns to the computers: on the
basis of the computer names in the hosts file, in this case, for
example, cnc2.
Check the connection before coupling.
4 On the client computer, select Extras Settings Environment and open the Dual Arm notebook page.
15-6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5 Enter the directory paths for the measurement plans and the base
alignments:
Directory path: locally valid designation of the corresponding
path on the client computer.
Mounted as...: valid network designation under which the client
system can access the path on the master system.
The connection in the network must be enabled and active.
Files for duplex mode

Some Windows system files have to contain certain entries for duplex
mode. These files are pre-configured on both computers of a system designed for duplex mode.
The files are in the ...\winnt\system32\drivers\etc directory and are called
services and hosts. The lines required for duplex mode are listed here
just in case the system files are modified in some way.
services file
Examples of entries in the services file:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
15-7
czcol1
czcol2
czcol3
czcol4
ZVICONTROL
counter
8881/tcp
8882/tcp
8883/tcp
8884/tcp
8888/tcp
9888/tcp
#Column1
#Column2
#Column3
#Column4
# Services for HOLOS-NT

holos1
holos
holos3
holos4
4960/tcp
4959/tcp
4961/tcp
4962/tcp
It is important to make sure that there is a czcol1 line.

hosts file
Entries in the hosts file (example):

##############################################################
########
192.4.1.56
192.4.1.55
#
192.4.1.201
192.4.1.200
cmmws_2
cmmws_1
CMMWS_2
CMMWS_1
#PC-column2
#PC-column1
cmm_2
cmm_1
CMM_2
CMM_1
#Controler2
#Controler1
##############################################################
########
cmmws_2 is here the address of the 2nd network card of the PC at
column 2.
cmm_2 is here the address of the control unit at column 2.
Establishing the connection and coupling

the measuring ranges
Steps for establishing the connection and
coupling the measuring ranges
The two measuring ranges have to be couples so that CALYPSO can
combine the results from both. Reference probings have to be taken at
one or three reference spheres in the zone that is common to both measuring ranges, so that the two can be coupled.
The results are combined in calculation and yield the basis for common
measurements and evaluations.
A coupling matrix is computed on the master and sent to the client, and
the client uses the matrix to convert its measured coordinates into the
coordinate system of the master CMM.
Perform the following steps:
15-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Step 1:
Selecting the coupling method for duplex mode
[ 159]
Step 2:
Configuring CALYPSO for duplex
mode [ 154]
Step 3:
Setting up the connection between the com-
puters [ 1510]
Step 4:
Checking the measurement plans before cou-
pling the measuring ranges [ 1511]

Step 5:
Defining the coupling [ 1513]
Step 6:
Resetting the coupling [ 1514]
Selecting the coupling method for duplex

mode
For the coupling it is required that the reference spheres can be probed
by both measuring columns.
Coupling methods
There are two methods:
Translational coupling
A reference sphere is positioned in the center of the common area.
Translational coupling involves computing the offset of the two device
zero points.
Translational and rotational coupling

Three reference spheres are arranged to form a triangle in space. They
should delimit the common zone of the measuring space vertically
and horizontally.
Translational and rotational coupling involves computing the residual
angle of the two machine coordinate systems relative to each other
remaining despite alignment.
CALYPSO has a measurement plan for each method with which you can
proceed with coupling.
Stylus
Install the appropriate master stylus in each column for coupling. This
ensures maximum accuracy. You have the option of using some other
qualified styli if less accuracy is sufficient.
Subsequent coupling
Once the two measuring ranges have been coupled for the first time, the
relevant data is stored in CALYPSO and is evaluated for measurements in
duplex mode. The coupling has to be readjusted under the following
circumstances:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
15-9
Reason for coupling
Method
Always after a mechanical alteration
Translational + rotational
From time to time in operation (e.g. once a

week if use is frequent)
Translational + rotational
Every time the system is restarted
Translational
Every time a measuring column homes
Translational
Setting up the connection between the

computers
Once all settings are correct [ 154], establish the connection between
the computers.
The connection is established via the Stop Light windows.
Note: Always proceed exactly as described, otherwise the connection will

not be successful.
1 In the Stop Light window on the client computer, select
View Duplex Master and click Initialize....
The Waiting for Master ... prompt appears on the screen.

2 In the Stop Light window on the master computer, select
View Duplex Master.
3 Tick the Connected with Clients check box to establish the

connection to the client computer.
The following prompt appears:
15-10
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
4 Do not click OK to confirm until the client reports that its status is
Wait for Master ...:
When the connection is successfully established, the following dialog

box appears on the screen:
Important: Make sure that the Define Coupling entry is labeled in

black (not gray).
You can now proceed to redefine the coupling [ 1513] or, if this
has already been done, you can start measuring.
Checking the measurement plans before

coupling the measuring ranges
Once you have set up the connection, the next step is to couple the two
measuring ranges. CALYPSO provides two measurement plans for this
purpose:
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
15-11
The col2_trans plan for translational coupling
The col2_rotate plan for rotational and translational coupling
It is best to check the measurement plan before using it if you are unsure
whether all the settings are correct.
1 Open the desired measurement plan for coupling.
2 Select Resources Features Settings Editor.
3 Make sure that the following settings are selected:
Stylus System Stylus: MasterProbe (or the qualified stylus
you are going to use) is the setting for all features.
MAN-CNC mode: The MAN setting applies to all features.
Dual Arm Columns: The Slave1 setting applies to all features to be measured with column 2.
4 Open the definition template of the 3-D Best Fit 1 characteristic.
15-12
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
5 Make certain that the Slave1 (arm ID slave) entry is set under
Receiver.
6 Save the measurement plan.
Defining the coupling

When you are satisfied that all settings in the measurement
plan [ 1511] are correct, you can run the measurement plan for the
coupling.
1 Open CALYPSO on the master computer.
2 In the Stop Light window, click Define Coupling in the Duplex
Master group and select Translate or Translate and Rotate.
3 In response to the prompt, manually probe six points in succession on
a sphere using measuring column 1 (the master).
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
15-13
The number of the point to be probed appears in the window under

Next probing point.
4 In response to the prompt, manually probe six points in succession on
the same sphere, this time using measuring column 2 (the client).
In the case of translational and rotational coupling, repeat this procedure at two more positions on the measuring plate.
5 In response to the prompts, probe sphere 2 and sphere 3 in succession,
first with measuring column 1 (master) and then with measuring column 2 (client).
When measurement is completed, the master sends its computed
coupling matrix to the client.
As soon as this process is completed, you can start measuring in duplex
mode. Alternatively, you can clear down the connection between the two
computers and establish it again later when measurements are to be
made.
Resetting the coupling

Coupling corrects the coupling matrix on the client, but the matrix is not
entirely rebuilt.
Deleting the coupling matrix on the client and rebuilding it from scratch
1 In the Stop Light window, go to Duplex Master and click Special.
2 Click Reset connection data.
The coupling matrix is deleted. You have to redefine coupling before you
can use the duplex mode.
15-14
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Using the duplex mode

Notes on measuring in duplex mode
Bear the following points in mind when you measure in duplex mode:
Each feature can be measured with only one measuring column. This
means that large holes, for example, have to be interlinked by means
of individual points. (Each feature is assigned to exactly one measuring
column).
Unless otherwise defined in the Measurement Plan Editor Features,
the master is generally used for measuring features.
When you assign features, remember to make sure that measurement

must be collision-free, and that this applies to both measuring columns.
Measurements in the common measuring range of the two arms merit
special care and attention. Make sure that there is no risk of an arm
colliding with the other arm as it retracts or moves to an intermediate
position.
Measuring with a duplex CMM

Measuring run with duplex CMM
Important when measuring in any given run: log on, measure, log off.
You do not have to log on if you have just finished coupling the measuring
ranges; the two measuring columns are already coupled. For more information, refer to Measuring in duplex mode [ 1515]. In all other
circumstances, start by setting up the connection.
The log-on phase is described in detail in Setting up the connection
between the computers [ 1510].
Measuring in duplex mode

The recommended procedure for measuring in duplex mode is as follows:
Construct the measurement plan successively by manual probings and
generating features. Then start the measurement plan in CNC mode.
The measurement can also be constructed offline using empirical values,
but this requires specialist knowledge and experience.
Proceed by working on the master computer as if you were measuring
with a single-column CMM. Bear the following additional points in mind:
Each feature can be measured with only one measuring column.
Probing the first point or the first position defines the measuring column to which the feature belongs.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
15-15
View this information in the Measurement Plan Editor Features under Columns (default or Master means master;
Slave1 means slave).
Clearance Planes: The measuring column flagged as active by the

stop light is the arm that executes the go to clearance plane movement.
Risk of collision: Do not forget the intermediate positions, as otherwise

there would be a risk of collision.
If you are preparing a measurement plan, make absolutely sure that the
measuring columns cannot collide under any circumstances. The areas in
which the measuring columns move must never overlap.
If the areas of movement overlap, the possibility of a collision cannot be
excluded, because the two measuring columns move independently of
each other.
If you set a locking distance larger than zero in the Measurement

Plan Editor Features under Dual Arm, CALYPSO checks the
movements of both measuring columns and locks automatically the
measuring column movements which cause collisions.
Check the following functions and settings using the Features Settings Editor:
Columns
Move Clear Offset
Blocking Distance
Stylus system
Stylus
Clearance Group
Stylus angle
NOTICE
You have to save the measurement plan after every alteration. Otherwise
the client will not be able to read the current alterations.
Testing a measurement
plan
You can test the measurement plan by opening the list of features and
selecting Edit Select Duplex Master Features (or Select Duplex Client Features). Thus you select from the list as well as in the
CAD window exactly those features that are to be measured by the master and the client respectively.
When you start the measurement plan for the Current Selection, CALYPSO measures all selected features - and, possibly, also other features
if they are included as a reference in one of the selected features.
15-16
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Starting the duplex mode

After you have completed all the preparations and you have connected
the two computers together, you can start the duplex mode.
1 Select Plan CNC-Start.
The Start Measurement dialog box appears on the screen.
2 Under Order of run, select the From Feature List mode.
4 Confirm the warning.
The run begins.
Clearing down the coupling for duplex mode

Clear down the connection between master and client when you
have finished measuring.
1 On the master computer, untick the Connected with Clients
check box.
2 On the client computer, untick the Connected to the Master
check box.
This clears down the connection.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
15-17
15-18
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
16
Chapter
Setup and use of the RTP20

probe
.................................................................................................................

Contents and purpose of this chapter .................................................... 162
RTP20 probe .......................................................................................... 163
Particular aspects of semi-automatic operation ....................................... 165
Entering the current angular position in CALYPSO ............................... 1611
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
16-1
Contents and purpose of this chapter

When using the Renishaw RTP20 probe, the procedure to follow according to CALYPSO differs in some points from the procedure prescribed by
Renishaw.
This document describes all the requirements and special aspects to be
considered in order to ensure accurate measurements and collision-free
operation of your CMM with the RTP20 probe. Failure to follow these instructions may cause measuring errors and damage to the CMM.
16-2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
RTP20 probe
RTP20 probe
Basics about the RTP20 probe
The RTP20 is an articulating probe without integrated motor. The stylus
can be rotated around the A and B axes of the probe in steps of 15, thus
allowing 168 different angular positions.
( LL )
( OC )
( LL )
Locking lever for locking and unlocking the probe
( OC ) Orientation cup (for semi-automatic angle positioning)

As the RTP20 has no motor of its own, angle positioning can only be done
manually or semi-automatically:
For manual positioning, release the locking lever, engage the probe
in the desired position and lock the lever again. Then enter the new
angular position in CALYPSO (see Entering the current angular position in CALYPSO [ 1611]).
If the current angular position is not known to CALYPSO, this will affect
the measuring results and the probing system may be destroyed during
CNC operation.
In semi-automatic mode, CALYPSO changes the angular position itself.

For information on the requirements, particular aspects and procedure, please refer to Particular aspects of semi-automatic operation [ 165].
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
16-3
RTP20 probe
Configuring the RTP20 in the system

settings
In order to use the RTP20 for measurements, it must be configured in the
system settings:
1 In CALYPSO, select Extras Settings CMM and switch to the
Probe tab.
2 Under Sensors, select TP20 from the RTP20 list.
3 Tick Rotate to Angle if a collision-free reference point travel is not

possible in all angular positions due to the design of your CMM and
long styli.
Before each reference point travel, CALYPSO will then request you to
manually rotate the RTP20 to an appropriate angular position and to
enter the angles set in the request window.
4 Confirm by clicking OK or Apply.
16-4
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Particular aspects of semi-automatic operation

Semi-automatic operation with RTP20
In semi-automatic mode, CALYPSO changes the angular position by
means of a pivot bar that is firmly attached to the measuring table.
The probe moves along the pivot pole up to the pivot sphere at the end
of the pivot pole. There, the probe is unlocked, indexed to the required
angle and locked again.
(PR)
(PP)
(ST)
( PR ) RTP20 with locking lever and orientation cup

( PP ) Pivot pole with pivot sphere at the upper end
( ST ) Stylus changer rack
Prerequisites for semi-automatic

operation with RTP20
The RTP20 may only be used for semi-automatic measuring operations if
the following prerequisites are met:
Using the MCR20 stylus

changer rack
Only single probes are used.
The pivot sphere of the pivot pole has been qualified (see Qualifying
the pivot sphere with the RTP20 [ 166]).
If the RTP20 is used in combination with the MCR20 stylus changer rack,
select the approach parameters of the individual stylus holder locations
in a way to ensure collision-free movements between the pivot pole and
the stylus changer rack.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
16-5
Moreover, make sure that the pivot pole (PP) and the stylus changer rack
(ST) are mounted to the same side of the CMM (see illustration).
PP
SC
PP
PP
SC
SC
In the illustration, the red arrow represents the approach direction. The
pivot pole can be placed to the left or right of the stylus changer rack.
If your configuration is different from the one shown here (for example, if
the pivot pole protrudes further into the measuring range than the stylus
changer rack), you will have to adapt the approach parameters accordingly
to ensure a collision-free automatic stylus system change. To do so, select
Approach Parameters and adapt the positions Before Change,
After Change and Over stylus system holder. Further information
on this subject can be found in the chapter Stylus system changer [ 131] of the Basics Instructions.
Qualifying the pivot sphere with the

RTP20
CALYPSO is not able to check the angular position of the stylus. Therefore, for semi-automatic operation, you first need to to let CALYPSO
know the angular position of the stylus and the location of the pivot
sphere at the end of the pivot pole. This requires a correct qualification
of the pivot sphere.
An inaccurate qualification of the pivot sphere may lead to errors during
the semi-automatic positioning. The stylus may, for example, slide to a
neighboring angular position.
Note: The procedure for pivot sphere position qualification prescribed by
Renishaw differs from the one given in these instructions. For CALYPSO,
you have to define the position of the pivot sphere by direct positioning of
the orientation cup above the pivot pole.
Qualifying the pivot sphere

1 In the toolbar of the work area or the Probing system qualification window, click the Rotate stylus to new position icon.
16-6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO

2 On the Settings tab click the Define pivot position button.
You are requested to align the probe to the pivot sphere.

3 Position the probe at A = 90, B = 0.
4 Move the probe via manual control until the orientation cup is located
exactly above the pivot sphere.
5 Carefully and precisely align the orientation cup to the pivot sphere.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
16-7
Position of the pivot sphere and the orientation cup:

Protect the pivot pole!
Any contact between the pivot sphere and the orientation cup must be
avoided. The sphere must have sufficient space on all sides (see illustrations).
Side view:
View from below:
Avoid touching the pivot sphere and do not apply any pressure to the pivot
pole. If the pivot pole is deformed, safe functioning of the semi-automatic
positioning is no longer guaranteed. The pivot pole needs to be replaced.
6 Once the correct position is reached, click OK in the request window.
The pivot sphere has now been qualified and CALYPSO is ready for semiautomatic angle positioning.
Semi-automatic angle positioning by

CALYPSO
As soon as a different stylus position is required in the CNC run, CALYPSO
changes the angular position of the stylus by using the pivot pole and
moving the probe accordingly. The probe is moved around the firmly attached pivot pole.
Procedure
Half-automatic angle positioning is performed in the following steps:
16-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
The probe moves to the pivot pole (PP) mounted on the measuring
table.
(PP)
The probe moves along the pivot pole up to the top. The locking lever
(LL) is thus pushed downwards and turned down.
The probe is now unlocked.
(LL)
The orientation cup (OC) of the probe is positioned exactly above the
sphere at the end of the pivot pole.
(OC)
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
16-9
The CMM motion is used to rotate and tilt the probe until the required
angular position of the stylus is reached.
The pivot sphere remains within the orientation cup during the entire
process.
To relock the probe after indexing, proceed in the same way as for
unlocking the probe.
The positioning process has now been completed.
16-10
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Entering the current angular position in CALYPSO
Entering the current angular position in

CALYPSO
The RTP20 is not able to autonomously determine the current angular
position of the stylus. In the following cases, the angles set in CALYPSO
are no longer valid and have to be manually entered in CALYPSO:
The angular position of the stylus has been changed manually.
During semi-automatic operation, the angle positioning process has

been interrupted or canceled (for example, in case of emergency stop,
power failure or after pressing the ESC key).
Risk of collision!
If the current angular position is not known to CALYPSO, wrong measuring
points may be probed. Moreover, there is a risk of collision between the
probe and the workpiece, stylus changer rack or pivot pole.
Entering the angular position after cancelation or interruption

If the angle positioning process is interrupted or canceled during semiautomatic operation, CALYPSO will automatically request you to enter
the current angular position:
Entering the current angular position

1 Enter the A and B angles of the current stylus position and confirm by
clicking the Set RTP20 angle button.
CALYPSO now has the necessary information on the angular position of
the stylus and semi-automatic operation can be continued.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
16-11
Entering the current angular position in CALYPSO
Entering the angular position after manual change

If you have manually changed the angular position of the stylus on the
probe, you have to enter this new angle.
Entering a new angular position

1 In the toolbar of the work area or the Probing system qualification window, click the Rotate stylus to new position icon.
2 Click the Settings tab.
3 Enter the A and B angles of the current stylus position and confirm by
clicking the Set RTP20 angle button.
CALYPSO now has the necessary information on the angular position of

the stylus and can continue operation.
16-12
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
17
Chapter
Using the VAST XTR gold probe
.................................................................................................................
The VAST XTR gold probe presents certain particular aspects to be considered when using it. This chapter describes all structural features and
the procedure for the use of the VAST XTR gold probe.

Contents and purpose of this chapter .................................................... 172
VAST XTR gold probe ............................................................................ 173
Particularities for the use ........................................................................ 176
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
17-1

The VAST XTR gold probe presents certain particular aspects to be considered when using it.
This chapter describes all structural features and the procedure for the
use of the VAST XTR gold probe.
17-2
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
VAST XTR gold probe
VAST XTR gold probe

Basics about the VAST XTR gold probe
So far, Carl Zeiss has proposed for contact measurements the VAST XT
gold as active scanning sensor. The VAST XTR gold probe completes the
family of active scanning sensors. It is based on the design of the VAST
XT gold and is suitable for styli with a maximum weight of 500 grams.
The VAST XTR gold and VAST XT gold support the VAST navigator and
VAST performance options.
What is new?
The most important distinctive feature of the VAST XTR gold is the installed rotary joint. This joint is used to rotate the stylus receptacle in steps
of 15 degrees about a vertical axis and to thus position it at the correct
angle to the component. In some cases, the rotary table is therefore not
required.
Technical solution
The new feature of the VAST XTR gold is the extended rotation function
of the plate: The rotational axis is driven by internal power generators.
The rotation function is only guaranteed in combination with the ZSH-70R-24 plate.
First, the solenoid of the VAST XTR gold stylus changer releases the plate
for rotation. The plate is fitted with a lock to guarantee fixed connection
to the rotational axis of the VAST XTR gold which is firmly connected to
the stylus changer. The rotational axis has a travel range of 2 mm in the
Z axis and holds the plate during the rotation. After reaching the nominal
position of the plate, the plate is loaded again into the stylus changer of
the VAST XTR gold.
During both manual and automatic plate change, the two unlock buttons
must be pressed at the same time to enable locking and unlocking of the
rotational axis.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
17-3
VAST XTR gold probe
IMPORTANT
Changing the plate without pressing the unlock buttons leads to damage
of the probe and plate.
Special advantages
The VAST XTR gold demonstrates its strengths for a number of workpieces:
It measures components with many characteristics and angle positions such as gear boxes of helicopters and locomotives. The rotatability of the plate makes it possible to minimize stylus configurations
and thus stylus changing times.
It is suitable for rotationally symmetrical workpieces such as vent gears

or turbines. In special cases, a rotary table is not required for these
parts.
The rotary joint allows the sensor to also access internal gears which
so far could only be measured with complex stylus configurations.
The new sensor is also especially suitable for large and heavy parts, for
example in shipbuilding and in the construction of wind power engines
and heavy machinery: For workpieces with a weight of more than five
tons, it is difficult to find a suitable rotary table for the required accuracy
and workpiece weights.
Prerequisites and conditions

You can use the VAST XTR gold if the following equipment-specific requirements are met:
Software
CALYPSO version 5.2 and higher
Control
At least C99-FW 26.xx
Plate
ZSH-70-R-24 1)
Stylus changer
ZCR-70 stylus changer rack
When using the conventional VAST plates, the rotation function is

locked in the control.
1)
Conditions for the use of the VAST XTR gold

Please pay attention to the following conditions for the use of the VAST
XTR gold:
17-4
The VAST XTR gold probe may only be used on CMMs which are
specially prepared by the service or development department.
The rotation function can only be used in combination with the

ZSH-70-R-24 plates. Rotation is not possible with the VAST standard
plates.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
VAST XTR gold probe
VAST standard plates can only be changed in the known position. It

is particularly important to check the position when changing, as the
VAST XTR gold is not fitted with the normally usual coding pin.
Automatic stylus system change with the VAST XTR gold is only possible in combination with the ZCR-70 rack and the ZSH-70-R-24 plates
or the VAST standard plates.
You must create a new CMM (measuring system) with the VASTXTR probe in CALYPSO.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
17-5
Particularities for the use

Particularities for the measurement
Observe the following aspects for the VAST XTR gold probe.
Configuration of the stylus system
Compensate the weight of a lateral stylus by means of counterweights.
Inserting and removing
Always press the two unlock buttons after the release prompt prior to
inserting or removing the plate.
After the manual change of the plate, make sure that both unlock buttons
protrude outwards from the plate edge. This is the only way to clamp the
plate correctly.
Fine angle adjustment
The ZSH-70-R-24 plate can be loaded in maximum 24 different positions

into the probe. This results in the minimum step width of 15. Any positions in between you may require for certain tasks can be realized by
rotating the cube on the lower side.
To do so, loosen the four screws on the lower side so that the cube can
be rotated. Then tighten the screws again.
Qualifying the stylus
All styli must be calibrated in any angle position.
Mounting the plate after collision

The collision protection of the probe is partly realized in the plate: If the
plate is moved away from the probe during a collision, one part of the
plate is pulled off and the other part remains on the probe. You must
reinsert the locking slide and push the anchor disc correctly in the plate.
Prior to inserting the anchor disk, you must replace the spring ring with
a new one as the spring ring is subject to a certain wear.
Proceed as follows:
17-6
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Prepare a new spring ring
Mount the spring ring
Insert the locking slide
Push the anchor disc centrically

in the plate
Stylus system change with VAST XTR

gold
You can only use the ZCR-70 rack for the stylus system change with the
VAST XTR gold probe. When selecting the holder, choose the type ZCR.
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
17-7
Qualifying the holders for the VAST XTR gold

When qualifying a holder for the VAST XTR gold, you have to define the
stylus length of the stylus in the usual manner by probing the lower
plate edge and stylus tip on the same flat plane.
And only then probe the qualification slope. Then CALYPSO automatically
recognizes the type and the approach direction of the rack.
NOTICE
Now the plate can be loaded into a rack position. To do so, the plate is
automatically rotated to this position prior to loading.
Manual assignment of the stylus system changer

For manual assignment with the ZSH-70-R-24, make sure that the plate
is inserted into the changer rack so that the plate's type plate is visible on
the front side. It is also possible to load the previous VAST standard plate
into the ZCR-70.
In both cases, make sure to first rotate the coding wheel manually to the
correct position according to the approach direction.
NOTICE
A plate is loaded correctly if the plate cover returns to the front initial
position after loading.
17-8
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Alphabetic index
1
1D linear pattern 421
1-sphere method (rotary table) 1218
2
2 point diameter
Details 574
2D linear pattern 421
2D objects
In the CAD model 225
2-sphere method (rotary table) 1221
3
3D best fit 349
On the CAD model 350
3D curve 455
Intersection with cylinder in the CAD
window 242
Unknown cut in the CAD window
241
3D microstyli 1129
3D mouse 18
3D objects
A
Access
To measuring results, programming
8104
Accuracy, variable
Best fit of the free form surface 477
ACR3
Defining holder positions 1329
Special aspects 138
Adding
New user 1010
Stylus 1111
Additional feature
Gear 479
HOLOS 479
Additional positions 672
Additional travel paths 672
Air scanning 728
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Alignment
3D best fit 349
Access to origin 5108
By means of computed iteration 330
Deleting 5121
From the CAD model 348
Loading 5121
Preassigning 49
Saving 5120
Alignment method
Using alternative 351
Alignments via utilities 5113
Alternating operation
CALYPSO and UMESS 731
Alternative alignment method
Using 351
Angle 572
Angle point 469
Angle range
Characteristic 573
Angular dimensions in formulas 637
Angular position
Entering ~ for RTP20 1611
Angularity 571
Any inputs
In single template/graphic 864
Approach paths
Holders 1324
ASCII file
Importing with tolerance curve 597
ASCII file with tolerance curve
Format 5103
ASCII files (curve) 887
Assigning privileges 1011
Assigning, privileges 1011
Assignments
Stylus system changer 1315
Audiovisual information 675
Automatic backup 64
Defining 413
Automatic login 1012
Automatic mode, decimal places 616
Automatic navigation check 670
Automatic stylus system change 1334
Alphabetic index
AutoRun
Basics 143
Branches 149
CNC parameters 1438
Configuring 1421
Configuring icons 1428
Controlling measuring runs 1417
Copying and pasting icons 1445
Creating branches 1437
Defining desks 1426
1413
Desk 144
Displaying printouts 1419
1416
Finding a measurement plan 1412
For users 1410
Keywords 149
Layout 143
Loading the interface 1411
Managing 1443
Mapping a pallet 1430
Measurement end 1417
Measurement plan icons 145
Moving to park position 1435
Moving to start position 1434
Pallets 146
Paths for measurement plans 1443
Positioning measurement plan 1428
Preparing a measurement 1437
Showing the quality of the measuring
results 1418
Starting a measurement 1415
Tasks of the system administrator
1421
User rights 1422
Auto-Run
Assigning keywords 1436
Background image 1426
1413
AutoSave 64
Average 568
Details 586
Axial runout 572
B
Background image
Auto-Run 1426
Alphabetic index
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
badElementFormula
Example of application 724
Banners
In the CAD window 229
Base alignment
Adapting 327
Basics 321
Calculating back to CAD origin 347
Creating new 324
Customizing iteratively with abortion
condition (example) 328
Defining 319
Deleting 349
Editing 333
Loading 323
Loading secondary alignment 342
Moving 334
Offsetting 334
Resetting 349
Rotating by distances 336
Setting temperature compensation
379
Temperature compensation 378
Base alignment match 5122
Performing 5126
Preparing 5123
Basic concept CALYPSO 115
Basics 32
AutoRun 143
Characteristics 52
Clearance planes/groups 665
Computed alignment 320
Measurement plans 32
Retract planes 666
Travel paths 664
Batch files 648
File names 649
Bend parameters, stylus
Applying 493
Recording 492
Best fit
3D ~ on the CAD model 350
3D best fit (alignment) 349
According to Chebyshov (Minimum
Feature) 55
According to Gauss (LSQ feature) 54
As circumscribed/inscribed feature 55
As least absolute value feature (L1 feature) 55
As tangential element 55
Several features 5113
Best fit of bore pattern 5106, 5108
Best-fit methods 53
Use 56
Bore missing 434
Boundary curves
Bubble help 123
Buttons
In protocol templates 925
C
CAD
~ program window, displaying 225
~ views, displaying and printing 225
Conversion settings 225
Defining the display 216
Extraction settings 225
CAD entities
Editing the hierarchy 248
CAD face point 443
CAD file
Creating a measurement plan 244
CAD file, importing 415
CAD files
Converting in the background 416
Loading 417
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CAD model
Accepting local alignment 348
Adding a coordinate system 250
Always displaying points 216
As a solid 221
Changing perspective 219
Comment 217
Controlling loading 217
Creating a curve by means of an intersection with a cylinder 242
Creating a curve with the unknown cut
method 241
Creating a space-point grid 240
Creating new entities 238
Defining a 2D line 213
Defining a circle 213
Defining a geometry feature 215
Defining a probing point 211
Defining a rectangle 214
Defining a space point 212
Defining an edge point 213
Defining features for the distance check
214
Defining the display 216
Deleting 225
Deleting view 224
Displaying actual points 228
Displaying all features 210
Displaying characteristics 228
Displaying clearance planes 216
Displaying feature 210
Displaying features 216, 228
Displaying form and location 217
Displaying measuring results 227
Displaying text line 217
Editing bodies 237
Editing features 236
Editing the hierarchy 236
Exporting 247
Extracting characteristics 59, 514
Extracting coordinate system 214
Extracting features 418
Faces from either side 217
Hiding 216
Hiding CT point cloud 216
Hiding features 216
Hiding form and location 217
Hiding probing object 217
Hiding texts 217
Loading the view 223
Alphabetic index
Mirroring 238
Moving 218
Redrawing 225
Remedying problems 246
Rotating 219
Saving 247
Saving the view 223
Selecting features 210
Selecting/defining features 210
Settings 225
Showing 216
Showing CT point cloud 216
Showing form and location icons 216
Showing model coordinates 217
Showing points 216
Showing probing object 217
Showing silhouettes 216
Showing texts 217
Specifying strategy for features 417
Splitting into areas 221
Storage location 225
Surface measurement 730
Transforming 235
Transforming a CAD entity 253
Transforming the coordinate system
252
Updating 245
Zooming the view out or in 218
CAD models
Views in protocol templates 911
CAD presentation
Utility 5127
CAD surface point
Details 444
CAD window
Basics 22
Buttons 27
Mapping work area 248
Modifying a representation 229
Output methods 232
Outputting as a plot 233
Outputting view 232
Representing banners 229
With CAD model 22
Work area 23
Working in ~ 24
CALYPSO
Alternating operation with UMESS
731
Exiting 130
Alphabetic index
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
CalypsoInterface
Programming the interface 8105
Canceling
Measurement plan run 714
Canceling measurement plan run 714
Carl Zeiss Metrology Academy 127
Cartesian
Characteristics 566
Change behavior
Multi-sensor systems 134
Changing
Assignment of styli 1335
CMM configuration 1013
Measurement parameters 1014
Password 1012
Point list 4170
User-specific settings 1013
Changing the CMM configuration 1013
Characteristic
Linking ~ to a characteristic 641
Characteristic attributes
Assigning values 558
Basics 557
Importing ~ with values 559
INI file 560
Characteristic name
Replacing 636
Characteristics 115, 569
Adding 629
Assigning to several features 522
Basics 52
Best-fit methods 53
Color coding 58
Connecting with feature 518
Copying 631
Copying ~ with references 633
Copying into other features 436
Copying properties 541
Decimal places 616
Defining 57
Definition templates 517
Deleting 632
Extracting from CAD model 59, 514
For distance - more 567
For form and location 569
For size - angle 564
For size - curve dimensions 566
For size - distance 566
For size - standards 563
Generated 572
Grouping 633
Index card 58
Index exchange 530
List of all ~ 563
Moving 632
Name default 618
Nominal values 531
Renaming 635
Searching 636
Setting datums 524
Special program 591
The calculation 53
Tolerances 531
Ungrouping 633
Waviness, details 593
With indexes 528
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Characteristics, details
Angle 572
Angularity 571
Average 568
Axial runout 572
Cartesian 566
Circular pitch 568
Coaxiality 571
Concentricity 571
Cone angle 565
Curve distance 567
Curve expansion 567
Curve form 570
Curve length 567
Curve slope 567
Curve stroke 567
Cylinder form 570
Diameter 563
Diameter two 568
Distance symmetry point 566
Feature angle 565
Flatness 569
Flatness with reference length 570
Focus 1 cartesian 567
Focus 1 polar 567, 568
Focus 2 cartesian 567
Focus 2 polar 568
Form 570
Half cone angle 565
Inclination angle 565
Length of perpendicular 564
Line profile 570
Maximum result 568
Minimum 568
Parallelism 571
Perpendicularity 571
Pipe evaluation 569
Polar 2D 566
Polar 3D 566
Polar position angle 564
Polar position height 564
Polar position radius 564
Profile 570
Projection angle one 565
Projection angle two 565
Radial runout 571, 572
Radius 563
Radius measurement 564
Radius two 568
Rotation angle 565
Alphabetic index
Roundness 569
Roundness with angle 569
Simple distance 566
Slot length 568
Slot width 568
Space point distance 566
Straightness 570
Straightness with reference length
570
Surface area 567
Symmetry 571
True Position 571
Waviness 569
X value 563
Y value 563
Chebyshov (Minimum Feature) 55
Checking the wall thickness 5110
Circle 445
Circle in contour best fit 4148
Details 4152
Circle path
Self-centering probing 4174, 4175
Circle path on plane 4192
Circular patterns 421
Circular pitch 568
Details 580
Circular projection 430
Clearance distance 672
Approach each time 672
Clearance group
Via formula 638
Clearance groups
Assigning 669
Defining 669
Retract plane in 669
Alphabetic index
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Clearance plane
Via formula 638
Clearance planes 116
Assigning 669
Blocking individual edges 361
Closer to the workpiece 672
Defining by probing 359
Defining with CMM 357
Displaying in the CAD model 216
General 356
Generating automatically 360
Manually defining 358
Outer 671
RT clearance planes 1240
Testing 360
Clearing after collision 717
Clearing the CMM 717
CMM
Connecting 313
Index card 311
CMM data
Saving 102
CMM disk 102
CMM index card 311
CNC
Exporting points 891
CNC parameters
AutoRun 1438
CNC run
Continue at missing probing 711
Rotary table position at the end 1233
RT prealignment 1230
Starting 77
Support 721
Coaxiality 571
Collision
Reaction following ~ 716
Special aspects with RDS 717
Color coding
Characteristics 58
Features 45
Holders stylus changer 1314
Colors
Combined evaluation
Evaluation 628
Combining paths 4188
Compact printout
Example 82
Output in the Multiple Printouts mode
89
Output in the Single Printouts mode
86
Preparing 821
Compact printouts
Defining a printout 88
Compatibility of measurement plans 38
Compensation
Perpendicularity error 1211
Complex data binding
In report templates 922
Computed alignment
Basics 320
Concentricity 571
Conditions
Setting 640
Cone 452
Cone addition (construction) 4146
Cone angle 565
Cone angle, half 565
Conf.dat 5117
Configuration area
PiWeb BasicReporter 94
Configuration file
561
Configuration file, erosion module 5117
Configuring
AutoRun 1421
Connection lines
Connection to the CMM 313
Construction
Defining 497
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Constructions
Average 4146
Cone addition 4146
Definition 495
Edge point 4141
Intersection 4116
Maximum 4145
Maximum point 4145
Minimum 4145
Minimum point 4144
Overview 495
Perpendicular 4115
Plane with offset 4148
Projection 4141
Symmetry 4132
Tangent 4142
Context menu 110
Continuing
At missing probing 711
Controlling
Manual run 79
Measurement plan run 711
Controlling light signal 719
Controlling measuring runs
AutoRun 1417
Conversion CAD
Settings 225
Coordinate system
Defining 319
Defining references 323
From best fit of bore pattern 5107
From CAD model 214
With index 321
Coordinate systems
Basics 116
Coordinates
Showing in CAD model 217
Alphabetic index
Copying
Characteristics 631
Features 631
Icons 1445
Result file 899
With details 631
Copying datum reference frame 541
Copying evaluation method for feature
540
Copying graphic parameters 541
Copying ISO286 540
Copying lower tolerance 540
Copying shape of zone 540
Copying tolerance class 540
Copying upper tolerance 540
Correction
Perpendicularity errors, local 1211
Coupling the measuring ranges (duplex
mode) 158
Creating a space-point grid 240
Limiting, example 724
Repeat measurement 723
CT point cloud
Displaying in the CAD window 216
CT properties
Preparations 318
Current selection
For the CNC run 74
Curve 455
Curve distance 567
Curve distance file 887
Curve expansion 567
Curve form 570
Curve length 567
Curve slope 567
Curve stroke 567
Curve, 2D 455
Curve, 3D 455
Alphabetic index
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Custom printout
Automatic fields 822
Example 82
Global dummies 822
Local dummies 822
89
Output in the Single Printouts mode
86
Preparing 821
Result presentation 822
Structure 821
With input prompt, example 836
Cylinder 450
Converting ~ to circles 636
Cylinder form 570
Cylindricity
Multiple circle plot 847
D
Data binding
Data transfer
Reference spheres 1150
Datum reference frame
According to CALYPSO 524
According to ISO 5459 524
Datums
For characteristics 524
Parallelism 526
Decimal places
Results 616
Default names
File structure 619
Internal feature names 620
Loading a file 624
Loading file 619
Default printout
Example 82
89
Defining
Clearance groups 669
Desks 1426
Stylus system 113
Defining feature
Options 42
Defining length of master stylus 1317
Defining measuring reference 431
Defining references 323
Degrees with formulas 637
Deleting
Base alignment 349
Characteristics 632
Desk 1445
Features 632
Toolboxes 658
Desk
Deleting 1445
Renaming 1445
Desks
Adding measurement plans 1427
Determining temperatures
By automatic probing 371
By manual input 376
By manual probing 370
Diameter 563
Diameter two 568
Directory structures 113
Display
CAD program window 225
Display of formulas 639
Display Sensor Signals
For 3D microstyli 1129
Displaying technology
Distance symmetry point 566
DMIS files 886
DMIS output
Configuring 894
DML data in the table file 896
Dummies
Global 822
Local 822
Duplex mode
Preparing 154
Preparing in Calypso 154
System files 157
Use 1515
Duplicating
Of features 48
DuraMax
Configuring the stylus system changer
718
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Dynamic images
E
Edge point (construction) 4141
Editing bodies 237
Element templates
General settings 546
Ellipse 456
End angle
Characteristic 573
Entering
Nominal values 531
Tolerances 531
Entering memo 130
AutoRun 1416
Entering text with the mouse 110
Entries with the mouse 110
Erosion module 5115
Configuring 5117
Error report 103
Preparing 103
Preparing saving 104
Using 105
Evaluation
Subsequent, measuring results 8100
Evaluation parameters 542
Evaluation range
Basics 4164
Defining 4165
Display in the CAD window 4169
Particularities 4168
Evaluation settings
Excel report
Example Characteristic.xls 817
Example FeatChar.xls 819
Example Feature.xls 818
Excel reports
Outputting 812
Exiting
CALYPSO 130
Measurement plan run, controlled
715
Alphabetic index
Export
Icons 1446
Measuring points 887
Points, manual 892
Exporting
CAD model 247
Measuring results 885
Exporting points
CNC 891
Manually 892
Exporting points manually 892
External batch files 648
File names 649
Extracting from CAD
Settings 225
F
Faces from either side
FCR25 1335
Feature
Assigning characteristic 518
Preassignments 43
Recalling in its entirety 4103
Feature angle 565
Characteristic 573
Feature end
Automatic 412
Feature name
Replacing 636
Feature recognition
Automatic 411
When defining features 414
Feature recognition, automatic
Defining 413
10
Alphabetic index
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Feature, defining
As pattern 424
By duplicating 48
By probing 47
Importing from the CAD model 420
Tips and tricks 436
Using definition templates 47
Variable 47
Features 115
3D curve 455
Adding 629
Adding ~ to desks 236
Angle point 469
Circle 445
Color coding 45
Cone 452
Copying 631
Copying ~ with details 631
Copying properties 435
Creating new ~ in the CAD model
238
Curve 455
Cylinder 450
Deleting 632
Details 438
Duplicating 48
Editing in the CAD model 236
Ellipse 456
Evaluation range 4164
Free form surface 473
General curve 472
General surface 472
In loops 644
Index card 44
Line, 2D 448
Line, 3D 450
List 439
Moving 632
Name default 618
Offset plane 462
Plane 446
Point 442
Preassignments 49
Radius point 467
Recall of 497
Rectangle 458
Renaming 635
Representation, editing 36
Rotary table parameters 1241
Searching 636
Selecting/defining in the CAD window

210
Separating 421
Slot 457
Sphere 455
Sphere point 468
Step cylinder 464
Symmetry plane 463
Symmetry point 463
With feature recognition, defining
414
Features of the measurement plan
Features, defining
From CAD file 415
File
Loading with default names 619
With points for recall 4114
File export 885
Files
For duplex mode 157
Filter
Activating 547
ViScan 551
Filtering 543
Filters
Basics 543
Flatness 569
With reference length 570
Flatness with reference length
Basics 588
Focus 1
Angle 568
Height 568
Radius 567
X value 567
Y value 567
Z value 567
Focus 2
Angle 568
Height 568
Radius 568
X value 567
Y value 567
Z value 567
Folder structures
Program and data 113
Following pages
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Footers
forbiddenChars.txt
Format of the file 833
Form 570
Form and location data
Extracting from CAD model 59, 514
Form plot
Activating 875
CAD view as a plot 878
Changing settings 883
Curve distance 854
Curve form 851
Dialog box 882
Flatness 846
Format files 878
Fourier analysis 881
From characteristic 872
Layout 840
Output options 840
Outputting 873, 877
Printing 883
Roundness 881
Setting the type 876
Waviness 5104
Form plots
Format files for plots 878
Designing 880
Formula
For clearance plane/group 638
Formula input
Angle 637
Formulas
Displaying 639
Entering 638
For angles 637
In patterns 423
Free form surface 473
Free form surface, best fit
Variable accuracy 477
Free patterns 421
G
Gage correction qualification 492
Alphabetic index
11
Gap
Characteristic 572
Gauss (LSQ feature) 54
GDT symmetry 579
Gear 479
GEAR PRO 479
General curve 472
General surface 472
Geometry best fit 5113
Graphic
Changing properties 862
Creating a new single template 862
Magnified representation of the deviations 865
Opening a single template 860
Graphics
Outputting texts, lines and legends
863
Outputting variables 864
Graphics editor
Graphics 860
Graphics element
Defining 842
Utilities 5120
Grid
Protocol templates 920
Grid lines
Groups
Creating 633
Renaming 635
Ungrouping 633
H
H3
Scanning a circle path with several styli
4188
Headers
In the protocol template 96
Help
Displaying 123
Hierarchy
Of the CAD entities 248
Holder
Approach paths 1324
Color coding 1314
Setting a manual path 1325
Holos 479
Homing the CMM 313
Horizontal rotary table axis 129
12
Alphabetic index
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Horizontal-arm CMMs
Combining measurement plans 627
Hyperlinks
I
Icon
Arranging on the AutoRun interface
1429
Copying and pasting 1445
Exporting 1446
Importing 1427
Removing 1445
Icons
Snapping to grid 1428
Images
Import
CAD data 415
Icon 1427
Measurement plan for RT axis 1213
Inclination angle 565
Index card
Characteristics 58
Features 44
Index exchange 530
Individual printout
Displaying 813
Printing 813
Individual printouts 82
Information file
For measurement plan 675
Information on run 721
INI file
For characteristic attributes 560
INI file for stylus data output
Structure 1148
Initializing
CMM 1015
Initializing the CMM 1015
Internet
Access to 123
Interrupting
Measurement plan run 714, 715
Intersection (construction) 4116
Iteration
Computed, for space points 330
J
Joystick
Locking axes 718
K
Keeping position
Keywords
Assigning 1436
Kink point 4154
L
L1 feature 55
Laser tracker
Offset for reflector tool 613
Least absolute value feature (L1 feature)
55
Least-material condition 535, 536
Legend
In graphic/single template 863
Length of perpendicular 564
Details 573
Licenses
Activating 120, 1014
Deactivating 120
Floating 121
In the network 121
Licenses for options
Zeiss License Activation Utility 119
Zeiss License Manager 119
Limit curve for waviness 5101
Limit values
For styli 1127
Measuring for styli 1128
Line profile 570
Line, 2D 448
Line, 3D 450
Linear patterns 421
Linear pitch 568
Details 584
Lines
List of features 439
LMC 535, 536
Loading mode
Lowerable rotary tables 1231
LRT 1231
RT-AB rotary table 1239
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Loading secondary alignment

Particular aspects 343
Loading the interface
AutoRun 1411
Location plot
Activating 875
CAD view as a plot 878
Changing settings 883
Dialog box 882
Format files 878
From characteristic 872
Layout 840
Output options 840
Outputting 873, 877
Printing 883
Setting the type 876
Location plot for bore pattern 852
Location plots
Locking axes
Joystick 718
Login
Automatic 1012
Loops
Alignment to RPS 646
Around feature 643
Features in ~ 644
For multiple measurements 647
Loop indexes 643
Loop variables 643
Nest level 647
Nested 647
Setting 642
Lowerable rotary table
Loading mode 1231
LRT
Loading mode 1231
Measuring mode 1231
Alphabetic index
13
M
Macro
Advantages 650
Basics 651
Creating 654
Editing 655
In the measurement plan 650
Integrating 654
Naming conventions 651
Parameterizing ~ measurement plan
650
Settings 653
Updating 656
Using 653
Magnification in graphic/single template
865
Management
Reference spheres 1151
Managing
AutoRun 1443
Manual paths
For holders 1325
Holders 1324
Manual run
Controlling 79
Starting 78
Warning limits 710
Manual stylus change 316
Masking
Points for scanning 615
Mass moment of inertia
Rotary table 123
Master 1010
Master measurement plan
Evaluation 628
Master measurement plan, horizontal-arm
CMMs 627
Master page
Protocol template 95
Master stylus
Entering data 1113
Maximum
Details 586
Maximum material condition 535, 536
Maximum result 568
MCR20
Special aspects 136
MCR200
Measurable variables
Representation 36
14
Alphabetic index
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Measurement
Ending, AutoRun 1417
Preparing AutoRun 1437
Relative 425
Running 73
Starting 77
Starting in AutoRun 1415
With measuring reference 431
With missing bores 434
With working planes 426
Measurement area illumination 714
Measurement cylinder method (rotary table) 1224
Measurement parameters, changing
1014
Measurement plan
Adding an information file 675
Controlling manual run 79
Controlling the run 711
Creating from a super characteristic
661
Editing 68
Exchanging styli 67
Feature names 618
From CAD file 244
Mirroring 625
Multimedia information 675
Paths in AutoRun 1443
Run 72
Saving 64
Saving version 64
Starting a CNC run 77
Starting manual run 78
Tab 311
Undoing changes 635
Measurement plan area 16, 310
Measurement plan editor
Basics 68
Characteristics 365
Designing a table 69
Editing nominal data 612
Features 364
Features, RT parameters 1242
Tabular editor 611
Measurement plan features
Replacing 636
Searching 636

Canceling 714
Controlling the end 715
Interrupting 714, 715
Restarting 717
Measurement Plan tab 311
Combining (HAM) 627
Compatibility 38
Copying 64
Creating 32, 33
Defaults 35
Deleting 63
Editing 629
Editing compatibility settings 65
Integrating user information 675
Loading settings 36
Managing 63
Merging 633
Mirroring 624
Opening 34
Opening existing 34
Renaming 64
Running 73
Saving 63, 64
Measurement strategies
Context menu 4163
Defining 4162
Definition 4160
Editing 4162
Managing 4160
Measurement strategy
Measurements
Repeating 723
Measuring
Automatically 4178
Circle edge 428
Edge point 428
With rotary table 1234
With the Own Geometry reference
432
With VAST XTR gold 176
Measuring a circle edge 428
Measuring an edge point 428
Measuring force
Insufficient 728
Measuring mode
Lowerable rotary tables 1231
LRT 1231
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Measuring points
Exporting 887
Masking 552
Saved measuring points, subsequent
evaluation 8101
Saving ~ for subsequent evaluation
8100
Measuring results
Activating output in DMIS format
885
Configuring output in DMIS format
894
Copying result file 899
Curve points 887
Evaluating subsequently 8100
Exporting 885
Programming access 8104
Saving as DMIS 886
Saving as PDF 887
Saving as Q-DAS 886
Saving for PiWeb 886
Saving in merge file 885
Saving in table file 885
Measuring thread 4189
Measuring values
Eliminating outliers 543
Filtering 543
Menu bar 16
Merge file 885
Merging
Of measurement plan elements 633
Microstyli 1129
Midpoint 443
Minimum 568
Details 586
Mini-plans 74
Mirroring
CAD model 238
Measurement plan 625
Missing bore 434
Missing probing
Continue with CNC 711
MMC 535, 536
MMC/LMC 534
Mode when qualifying 1132
Modification
CAD model 235
Modifying
System settings 109
Modifying the CAD model 235
Mouse
For text entries 110
Alphabetic index
15
Moving the base alignment

Purpose 334
Moving to park position, AutoRun 1435
Moving to start position, AutoRun 1434
Multimedia in measurement plans 675
Multiple circle plot 847
Multiple measurements with loops 647
Multiple printout
Displaying 813
Example 82
Printing 813
Multiple printouts 89
Outputting Excel reports 812
Using custom protocol templates 93
Multi-sensor system
Setting the change behavior 134
N
Navigation check
Automatic 670
Navigation paths
Rotary table 1231
Nest level in loops 647
Net point 443
Network licenses 121
Nominal data
Editing ~ in the measurement plan editor 612
Nominal values
Copying 540
Defining 531
Editing ~ in the measurement plan editor 612
O
Offset
For reflector tools 613
Offset plane 462
O-Inspect 714
Online help
Calling 123
Notes 126
Screen structure 124
Typographic conventions 126
Using 123
Videos 126
Warnings 126
Online Help
Using 124
16
Alphabetic index
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Opening
Measurement plan 34
Stop light window 1015
Operating instructions
Displaying 123
Operation
Keyboard 18
Three-button mouse 18
Two-button mouse 18
Origin of the coordinate system 5108
Outer clearance planes 671
Outliers
Eliminating (basics) 544
Eliminating (procedure) 549
Eliminating ~ in the CAD window
553
ViScan 551
Output
Form and location plot 873
View, CAD window 232
Output files
Defining names 888
P
P6 alignment 351
Pages
Pallet
Mapping 1430
Measuring runs with a loop 1433
Measuring runs, individual 1434
Parallelism 571
Datums 526
Parameter
In single template/graphic 864
Part alignment
Basics 320
Creating new 324
Defining 319
Loading 323
Rotating 335
Rotating by distances 336
Rotating reference axis 341
Rotating to distance 338
Rotating to origin line 339
Rotating to same deviation 340
Passive rotary table 1234
Password
Changing 1012
Path generation
Circle 4185
Circle path on plane 4192
Cone 4185
Cylinder 4185
Lines 4193
Overview 4180
Planes 4190, 4192
Rectangular path 4194
Unknown contour 4184
Paths for measurement plans, AutoRun
1443
Pattern 421
And formulas 423
Basics 421
Defining 424
Recall 499
PCM function
For workpiece recognition 711
PDF files 887
Perpendicular 4115
Datums 527
Perpendicularity error
Local compensation 1210
Local compensation, procedure 1211
Pipe evaluation 569
Pitch plot 859
PiWeb
Saving measuring results 886
PiWeb BasicReporter
Basics 92
Calling 93
Closing 926
Program window 94
Setting up pages 95
Toolbox 99
Plane 446
Plane point 443
Plot
3D view cylindricity 849
Circle in contour construction 858
Multiple circle ~ for cylindricity 847
Straightness for surface lines 850
Surface lines for cylinder form 847
Plot output
CAD window 233
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Plot window
Possibilities 870
Point 442
Point cloud
Editing 236
Point list 4169
Changing 4170
Point masking 615
Point recall
Defining ~ with the mouse 4109
From files 4112
Options 4105
Parameterizing 4107
Specifying points more accurately
4109
With range specification 4105
Point set
Additional feature 484
Defining 484
Editing 236
Evaluating 487
Points
Exporting during CNC run 891
Exporting manually 892
Polar 2D 566
Polar 3D 566
Polar pattern offset 421
Polar position angle 564
Polar position height 564
Polar position radius 564
Position list (pattern) 421
Postsettings
Copying into characteristics 541
Preassignments
Features 43
Preparations
Multiple printouts 363
Rotary table 127
Prerequisites
Rotary table 355
Presettings
Copying into characteristics 541
Principle of CALYPSO 117
Printing
CAD model 232
Printing the CAD model 232
Alphabetic index
17
Printout
Displaying 813
Printing 813
Printout format editor
Overview 823
Structure 824
Defining own 828
Entering 76
Global 76
INI file 830
INI file, example 833
Local 76
Overview 837
Preparing 827
TXT file 829
Printout header editor
Form files 867
Printout header fields
Defining own 828
INI file 830
TXT file 829
Printout settings 363
Printouts
Defining ~ output 88
Excel reports 812
INI file for header data, example 833
Multiple printouts mode 89
Overview 82
Printout types 82
Single Printouts mode 86
Subsequent (AutoRun) 1419
Text output 5118
Working with multiple printouts 810
Probing
Avoiding faulty probing during selfcentering probing 4170
Continue at missing ~ 711
Probing object in CAD window 217
Problems
During the CNC run 721
Product information
On the internet 123
Profile 570
Basics 576
Profile element
Program data
Displaying 1014
18
Alphabetic index
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Projection
On nominal plane 430
Rotational 430
Projection (construction) 4141
Projection angle one 565
Projection angle two 565
Projection plane
Preassigning 49
Properties
Graphic/single template 862
Protocol template
Designing 93
Setting up pages 95
Protocol templates
Arranging elements 920
Basics 92
Buttons 925
CAD model views 911
Calling external file 925
Following pages 914
Headers and footers 96
Hyperlink 925
Images 911
Lines 912
Properties, element 919
Saving 926
Table of contents 97
Tables 914
Text 910
Variables 910
Q
Q-DAS files 886
Qualification method 1132
Qualification of stylus system holders
Utilities 5115
Qualifying
Mode 1132
R
Rack assignment
Activating 1316
Creating 1315
Using 1315
Radial runout 571, 572
Radian measure
In the formula window 637
Radius 563
Radius measurement 564
Details 573
Radius point 467
Radius two 568
Range specification point recall
Defining 4105
Parameterizing 4107
RC
Creating list 1117
List, automatic 1120
RDS
After collision 717
Creating RC list 1117
Defining the geometry 1318
Defining the slot distance 1318
RC list, automatic 1120
Setting the angle positions 1115
Recall 497
Feature 4103
Methods of point recall 4105
Pattern 499
Reference points 4101
Recall file
Format 4114
Rectangle 458
Rectangular path 4194
Reference axis secondary reference
Rotating 337
Reference point
For feature 555
Reference points
Recalling 4101
Reference sphere
Basics 1149
Correction of flexibility 1149
Creating a new ~ 1152
Data transfer from older versions
1150
Determining position 1123
Editing data 1153
Management 1151
Outputting data 1155
Qualifying the ~ 1122
RSH shaft definition 1154
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Reflector tool
Determining offset 613
Relative measurement 425
Release information 123
Remark window 721
Renaming
Characteristics 635
Desk 1445
Features 635
Groups 635
Stylus 1112
Repeat measurement
Activating via PCM 726
Critical characteristics 723
Evaluating 728
Limiting critical characteristics 724
Performing 726
Preparing 724
Repeating measurements 723
Replacing
Characteristic name 636
Feature name 636
Report page
Report templates
Form plots 917
922
Restoring changes 924
Templates for toolbox elements 927
Undoing changes 924
Representation of measurable variables
36
Restarting measurement plan run 717
Result element 569
Details 590
Result presentation 822
Results
Decimal places 616
Retract distance
Retract plane 669
REWI additional correction
Basics 1210
Defining 1211
Alphabetic index
19
Rotary table
Defining 355, 127
Defining position at the end of the CNC
run 1233
General 122
Homing 1210
Horizontal axis 129
Importing measurement plan for axis
1213
Loaded RT-AB 1239
Logging in 127
Mass moment of inertia 123
Measuring features 1234
Measuring in a number of positions
1243
Mechanical alignment 1229
Parameters in the feature 1241
Positioning the ~ manually 1235
Prealignment at CNC start 1230
Qualification methods 1216
Qualifying axis 1215
Rotational pattern 1244
Setting the axis 1213
Setting the position 129
Status of the axis 1214
Using the ~ passively 1234
Visualizing tilting moment of RT-AB
1238
Rotary table position
Rotate plane 320
Rotate space 320
Rotate to Distance 338
Rotate to same deviation 340
Rotating the base alignment
Purpose 334
Rotating to origin line 339
Rotation angle 565
CAD model 225
Rotation axis
Projection around ~ 430
Rotational pattern 421
Measuring with rotary table 1244
Rotational projection 430
Roundness 569
Roundness with angle 569
Roundness with reference angle
Basics 587
RPS alignment 350
With loop 646
20
Alphabetic index
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
RT axis
Importing measurement plan 1213
RT clearance planes 1240
RT homing 1210
RT parameters
Measurement plan editor features
1242
RT position
RTA curve for waviness 5101
RTA parameter file
Format 5103
RT-AB
Loaded rotary table 1239
Safety instructions 123
Visualizing the tilting moment 1238
RTP20
Configuring 164
Entering the angular position 1611
Prerequisites for semi-automatic operation 165
Qualifying the pivot sphere 166
Semi-automatic operation 165
Semi-automatic operation sequence
168
Structure 163
Ruler
Run control
With batch files 648
Running
Measurement 73
Measurement plan 72, 73
Running a measurement plan 73
Printout header data 76
S
Safety
For rotary table 122
For RT-AB 123
Saving
CAD model 247
Measurement plans 63, 64
Measuring results 885
Scanning
Automatically measuring 4178
Point masking 615
Several styli 4188
Scope of measurement
Defining the ~ for AutoRun 1413
SCP600
SCR200
Special aspects 137
Screen structure, online help 124
Searching
Characteristics 636
Features 636
Secondary alignment
Loading 342
Secondary reference
Rotating reference axis 337
Selecting the coupling method (duplex
mode) 159
AutoRun 1413
Self-centering probing 4172
Basics 4170
Circle path 4174, 4175
Restrictions 4171
Special features 4171
Self-centering qualification (rotary table axis) 1227
Sensitivity factor 1129
Sensor monitoring 1129
Server
For licenses 121
Setting up
Stylus system changer 1310
Settings
Loading for measurement plans 36
Macros 653
Setup mode 711
Shaft of the reference spheres
Shape of zone 577
Shortcuts 19
Simple data binding
Simple distance 566
Single printouts 86
Outputting Excel reports 812
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Single template
Changing properties 862
Creating 862
Editing 860
Magnified representation of the deviations 865
Opening 860
Outputting texts, lines and legends
863
Outputting variables 864
Single templates
For diagrams, overview 844
Slot 457
Length, characteristic 568
Width, characteristic 568
SP25 1335
Space mouse 18
Space point 443
Space point distance 566
Special program 569
Sphere 455
Sphere point 468
Standard custom printout
Example 814
Standard custom printout (compressed)
Example 816
Start
Start alignment
Basics 322
Creating new 324
Loading 323
Loading secondary alignment 342
Starting
Calypso 13
CNC run 77
Manual run 78
Starting a measurement plan 77
Manual run 78
Starting Calypso 13
Station point
Step cylinder 464
Step point 4156
Stop light window 712
Interrupting measurement plan run
714, 715
Opening 1015
Stopping
Measurement plan run 714, 715
Alphabetic index
21
Storage location
CAD model 225
Straightness 570
Straightness with reference length 570
Basics 589
Stylus
~ table for RC, automatic 1120
3D microstyli 1129
Adding 1111
Angle range in automatic mode
4177
Automatic search 4175
Basics about qualification 1125
Bend parameters, applying 493
Bend parameters, recording 492
Creating ~ table for RC 1117
Editing 113
Exchanging ~ in a measurement plan
67
Limit values for qualification 1127
Measuring limit values 1128
Qualifying automatically 317, 1138
Qualifying manually 1134
Qualifying with manual path 1136
Qualifying with measurement plan
1139
Renaming 1112
Results of stylus qualification 1138
Scanning with several ~ 4188
Sensor monitoring 1129
Setting the angle positions 1115
Stylus changer
Color coding and holders 1314
Stylus changer rack
Qualifying in the CNC run - run 1342
Qualifying in the CNC run - suitable
holders 1341
Stylus data
Creating new ~ 1144
Editing 1144
Managing 1143
Stylus data list
Printing 1146, 1147
Stylus qualification
Basics 1125
Data of the reference sphere 1153
Position of the reference sphere
1123
With manual path 1136
22
Alphabetic index
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Stylus system
Adding styli 1111
Change behavior multi-sensor 134
Editing 113
Inserting 316
Printing list with data 1146, 1147
Redefining 113
Validity 315
Automatic 1334
Basics 132
RDS with SP25 and FCR25 1335
RDS with XXT 1337
Semi-automatic 1334
TP20 or TP200 133
Two-stage ~, configurations 133
With VAST XTR gold 177

Adding holders 1312
Approach paths 1324
Approach paths for holders 1325
Assigning a stylus system 1333
Automatic stylus system change
1334
Changing approach parameters 1321
Changing stylus assignments 1335
Checking approach parameters 1321
Configuring for DuraMax 718
Configuring, working steps 1311
Defining holder position 1327
For RDS 139
Safe approach 1320
Semi-automatic stylus system change
1334
Setting approach parameters 1320
Setting approach paths 1325
Setting up 1310
Setting up holders 1312
Special aspects with ACR3 138
Special aspects with MCR20 136
Special aspects with SCR200 137
Stylus system management 1143
Subsequent evaluation 8100
Super characteristic 658
Adding 660
Creating a measurement plan 661
Removing 660
Special features 662
Surface area 567
Surface measurement with single points
730
Switching, user 1011
Symmetry 571
Symmetry (construction) 4132
Symmetry plane 463
Symmetry point 463
System login 1013
System settings
Areas 108
Modifying 109
Overview 1015
Table of contents
Tables
Tabular editor
In the measurement plan editor 611
Tangent (construction) 4142
Tangential element 55
Taskbar 1015
Activating 369
Base alignment 378
Different materials 378
General 367
Of the base alignment 379
Workpiece and clamping 378
Text
In protocol template 910
Text element 5118
Text file
With point set, format 475
Texts
Displaying in the CAD model 225
Three-button mouse 18
Tips and tricks 123
TOL/PROFS 576
Tolerance curve (waviness)
Importing 597
Tolerance polynomial for waviness 599
Tolerance steps for waviness 595
Tolerance zones, projected 538
Tolerances
Defining custom ~ 537
Entering 531
File with custom ~ 537
LMC 535, 536
MMC 535, 536
MMC/LMC 534
Predefined 532
Projected tolerance zones 538
Toolbar 16
Structuring 111
Toolbar editor 111
T
Table file
Characteristic names 897
DML data 896
Reference 895
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Alphabetic index
23
Toolbox
Templates for elements 927
Toolboxes 657
Creating 657
Deleting 658
Using 658
Tooltips 123
Touch point 443
TP20
Stylus system change 133
TP200
Training block 128
Transformation
CAD entities and coordinate systems
249
CAD model 235
Travel paths
Basics 664
Checking 667
Editing 664
True Position 571
True position with best fit of bore pattern
Use 5108
True Position with best fit of bore pattern
Basics 5106
Turbine blade
CNC run 483
Two-button mouse 18
Types of bracket in loops 647
U
UMESS
Alternating operation with CALYPSO
731
Unknown contour 4184
User
~ settings, changing 1013
Master 1010
Adding 1010
Switching 1011
User information
Integrating 675
Loading 676
24
Alphabetic index
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
User rights
AutoRun 1422
User support 123
User-defined characteristic attributes 557
Configuration file 561
Using distance check 5110
Using the best-fit methods 56
Utilities
Erosion module 5115
Geometry best fit 5113
Overview 5112
Probing system qualification 5114
Text element 5118
V
Variables
In protocol template 910
VAST XTR gold
Basics 173
Conditions 174
Particularities for the measurement
176
Prerequisites 174
VAST XTR gold probe 173
VDA printout (without values)
Example 815
Videos in the online help 126
View
Of the CAD model 225
Viewing system messages 1014
ViScan
Filter and outliers 551
Warning limits
Manual CNC 710
Waste basket 633
Waviness 569
Basics 593
RTA curve 5101
Tolerance curve 597
Tolerance polynomial 599
Tolerance steps 595
Work area 16
CAD icons 17
CAD window 17
Measurement plan area 16
Menu bar 16
Toolbar 16
Work areas
Working planes 426
Workpiece recognition
By probing attempt 711
X value 563
XXT
Probe 1337
Rack 1337
61212-2011002
CALYPSO
Y
Y value 563
Z
ZCR-70
For VAST XTR gold 177
Zeiss training block 128
Zoom factor
CAD model 225
Zooming
CAD model 218
Zooming in
CAD model 218
Zooming out
CAD model 218
Alphabetic index
25
26
Alphabetic index
61212-2011002
CALYPSO

1.1.2 Calypso Mittauksen Perusteet

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1.1.2 Calypso Mittauksen Perusteet

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CALYPSO

Important terms in CALYPSO ...................................... 115

Measurement plan-oriented measuring with CALYPSO

Licensing ...................................................................................... 119

User support for CALYPSO .......................................... 123

Exiting CALYPSO .......................................................... 130

Working with the CAD window

Buttons in the CAD window ......................................... 27

Defining the display in the CAD window .................. 216

Displaying measuring results in the CAD window ... 227

Output of the CAD model ........................................... 232

Working with the CAD model .................................... 235

Working with the data of the CAD model ................ 244

Updating a loaded CAD model ..................................................... 245

Preparing the measurement plan

Measurement plan area .............................................. 310

Connecting the CMM .................................................. 313

Preparing the stylus system ........................................ 315

Defining the CT properties ......................................... 318

Adapting a base / start alignment ................................................. 327

Customizing a base alignment iteratively ...................................... 328

Prerequisites for the rotary table ............................... 355

Editing printout settings ............................................. 363

Temperature compensation ........................................ 367

Details on definition of the features ......................... 438

Sphere Point special geometry ...................................................... 468

Linking features in constructions ............................... 495

Measurement strategies for features ...................... 4160

Managing measurement strategies ............................................. 4160

Path generation measuring features automatically

Defining characteristics ................................................. 57

Evaluation parameters for features ........................... 542

Filtering and outlier elimination ..................................................... 543

User-defined characteristic attributes ........................ 557

Details on defining characteristics ............................. 563

Utilities ....................................................................... 5112

Text Element utility ..................................................................... 5118

Editing the measurement plan

Editing features of the measurement plan ............... 629

Converting selected cylinders to circles ......................................... 636

Formula input and run control ................................... 637

Using macros in the measurement plan .................... 650

Toolboxes ..................................................................... 657

Editing the travel paths .............................................. 664

Multimedia user information ..................................... 675

Running a measurement plan

Entering printout header data ..................................... 76

Starting a measurement ............................................... 77

Checking and controlling the measurement plan run

Repeating measurements ........................................... 723

Manual measurements ................................................ 730

Alternating operation with CALYPSO and UMESS ... 731

Viewing, presenting and editing measuring results

Preparing custom printouts and compact printouts ...821

Outputting form and location plots for characteristics

Exporting measuring results into files ....................... 885

Evaluating measuring results subsequently ............ 8100

Programmed access to measuring results ............... 8104

Creating protocol templates with the PiWeb

Designing pages by means of the toolbox .................. 99

Lines in protocol templates ........................................................... 912

Linking an element to a characteristic ....................... 922

Modifying system settings ......................................... 108